Routledge Research 2010

Forthcoming, new and recent publications from

ROUTLEDGE RESEARCH

February 2010 – February 2011 For further information about any titles listed please email: reference@routledge.co.uk

All prices are net in the UK and subject to alteration without notice. Publication dates are also subject to change without notice.

Why not set up a Standing Order?

You will then automatically receive the titles in the series that you are interested in, as they are published.

For more information, contact Customer Services: Tel: +44 (0) 1235 400524 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6699 Customer Services Taylor & Francis Group Bookpoint (T&F) FREEPOST RRXG-BBUL-LAER Abingdon Oxon, OX14 4SB UK Email: info@routledge.com www.routledge.com

SERIES INDEX ASIAN STUDIES ASAA Women in Asia Series Asian States and Empires Central Asian Studies Central Asia Research Forum China Policy Series Guides to Economic and Political Developments in Asia Intersections: Colonial and Postcolonial Histories Japan Anthropology Workshop Series Rethinking Southeast Asia Routledge Advances in South Asian Studies Routledge Contemporary Asia Series Routledge Contemporary China Series Routledge Contemporary Japan Series Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series Routledge/Edinburgh South Asian Studies Series Routledge Law in Asia Routledge Pacific Rim Geographies Routledge Research on Gender in Asia Series Routledge Security in Asia Series Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series Routledge Studies in Social and Political Thought Routledge Studies in South Asian History Routledge Studies in the Growth Economies of Asia Routledge Studies in the Modern History of Asia Routledge Studies on the Chinese Economy Royal Asiatic Society Books

1 2 3 5 5 8 9 10 11 11 13 13 16 17 17 26 27 29 30 30 31 31 34 34 36 40 41 44

BUSINESS, ECONOMICS, MANAGEMENT The Adam Smith Review Applied Psychology Series BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies The Economics of Legal Relationships Global Institutions The Graz Schumpeter Lectures Marketing and Consumer Psychology Series New Political Economy Routledge Advances in Experimental and Computable Economics Routledge Advances in Heterodox Economics Routledge Advances in Management and Business Studies Routledge Advances in Social Economics Routledge Critical Studies in Public Management Routledge Explorations in Economic History Routledge Foundations of the Market Economy Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy Routledge Historical Perspectives in Accounting The Routledge History of Economic Thought Routledge International Business in Asia Routledge International Studies in Business History Routledge International Studies in Health Economics Routledge International Studies in Money and Banking Routledge Interpretive Marketing Research Routledge New Works in Accounting History Routledge Political Economy of the Middle East and North Africa Routledge Research in Employment Relations Routledge Research in Strategic Management Routledge Studies in Accounting Routledge Studies in Business Ethics Routledge Studies in Business Organizations and Networks Routledge Studies in Contemporary Political Economy Routledge Studies in Employment and Work Relations in Context Routledge Studies in Entrepreneurship Routledge Studies in Global Competition Routledge Studies in Governance and Change in the Global Era

49 49 50 50 52 52 53 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 61 62 71 72 72 73 74 75 78 79 80 80 81 82 83 84 85 85 86 87 89

Routledge Studies in Human Resource Development Routledge Studies in Innovation, Organizations and Technology Routledge Studies in International Business and the World Economy Routledge Studies in Library and Information Science Routledge Studies in Management, Organizations and Society Routledge Studies in Technology, Work and Organizations Routledge Studies in the European Economy Routledge Studies in the History of Economics Routledge Studies in the Management of Voluntary and Non-Profit Organizations Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy Series in Organization and Management

90 91 93 94 94 97 98 100 113 114 118

EDUCATION Routledge International Studies in the Philosophy of Education Routledge Research in Education Routledge Studies in Computer Assisted Language Learning Routledge Studies in Educational Policy and Politics

122 123 130 130

GEOGRAPHY, ENVIRONMENT, DEVELOPMENT Interventions Regions and Cities Routledge Advances in Geography Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics Routledge ISS Studies in Rural Livelihoods Routledge Studies in Development and Society Routledge Studies in Development Economics Routledge Studies in Ecological Economics Routledge Studies in Human Geography Routledge Studies in Sustainability Transitions

131 132 135 135 141 142 143 149 150 152

HISTORY Roman Imperial Biographies Routledge Advances in American History Routledge/Canada Blanch Studies on Contemporary Spain Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series Routledge Monographs in Classical Studies Routledge Research in Atlantic Studies Routledge Research in Medieval Studies Routledge Studies in Ancient History Routledge Studies in Medieval Religion and Culture Routledge Studies in Modern British History Routledge Studies in Modern European History Routledge Studies in the History of Russia and Eastern Europe Studies in African American History and Culture Studies in American Popular History and Culture

156 156 156 157 157 158 158 158 159 159 161 162 163 164

LANGUAGE, LINGUISTICS Routledge Advances in Corpus Linguistics Routledge Critical Studies in Discourse Routledge Critical Studies in Multilingualism Routledge Leading Linguists Routledge Research in Literacy Routledge Studies in Linguistics Routledge Studies in Sociolinguistics Second Language Acquisition Research Series

166 167 168 169 169 169 170 170

LAW Asian Yearbook of International Law Biomedical Law & Ethics Library Birkbeck Law Press Contemporary Issues in Public Policy Critical Approaches to Law Discourses of Law Jewish Law Annual Law, Development and Globalization Law, Science and Society Nomikoi Critical Legal Thinkers Routledge Research in Competition Law Routledge Research in Corporate Law

171 171 172 173 173 174 176 177 178 178 180 181

Routledge Research in European Union Law Routledge Research in Finance and Banking Law Routledge Research in Human Rights Law Routledge Research in Information Technology and E-Commerce Law Routledge Research in Intellectual Property Routledge Research in International Commercial Law Routledge Research in International Environmental Law Routledge Research in International Law Routledge Research in Legal Ethics Routledge Research in Terrorism and the Law Routledge Research in the Law of Armed Conflicts Routledge Research in Transnational Crime and Criminal Law Social Justice Transitional Justice UT Austin Studies in Foreign and Transnational Law

182 183 185 187 189 190 190 191 193 195 196 196 197 198 198

LITERATURE African Studies Children's Literature and Culture Literary Criticism and Cultural Theory Routledge Research in Atlantic Studies Routledge Research in Postcolonial Literatures Routledge Research in Travel Writing Routledge Studies in Contemporary Literature Routledge Studies in Multimodality Routledge Studies in Renaissance Literature and Culture Routledge Studies in Rhetoric and Stylistics Routledge Studies in Romanticism Routledge Studies in Shakespeare Routledge Studies in Twentieth-Century Literature Routledge Transnational Perspectives on American Literature

228 228 231 232 232 235 236 237 238 239 240 240 241 244

MEDIA, CULTURAL STUDIES BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series Routledge Advances in Film Studies Routledge Advances in Internationalizing Media Studies Routledge Advances in Theatre & Performance Studies Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies Routledge Studies in Cultural History Routledge Studies in Ethnomusicology Routledge Studies in New Media and Cyberculture Routledge Studies in Rhetoric and Communication Routledge Studies on African and Black Diaspora Studies in African American History and Culture Studies in Asian Americans

246 246 251 254 254 257 257 260 261 261 262 262 262 263

PHILOSOPHY The Collected Works of F. A. Hayek Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy Routledge Studies in Ethics and Moral Theory Routledge Studies in Metaphysics Routledge Studies in Nineteenth Century Philosophy Routledge Studies in Seventeenth Century Philosophy Routledge Studies in the Philosophy of Science Routledge Studies in Twentieth Century Philosophy Studies in Philosophy

264 264 267 268 269 270 270 271 272

POLITICS, INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies Comparative Development and Policy in Asia Durham Modern Middle East and Islamic World Series Extremism and Democracy Global Institutions Interventions Routledge Advances in European Politics Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series

273 278 278 280 281 281 283 283 286

Routledge Critical Studies in Discourse Routledge Innovations in Political Theory Routledge Political Economy of the Middle East and North Africa Routledge Research in Atlantic Studies Routledge Research on the United Nations (UN) Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series Routledge Studies in US Foreign Policy

286 287 288 288 288 289 290

RELIGION Routledge Advances in Jaina Studies Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series Routledge Critical Studies in Buddhism Routledge Hindu Studies Series Routledge South Asian Religion Series Routledge Studies in Religion Routledge Studies in Religion and Politics Routledge Studies in Tantric Traditions Routledge Studies in Taoism

291 292 292 294 295 296 296 298 298

SECURITY STUDIES Asian Security Studies BESA Studies in International Security Cass Military Studies Cass Series: Naval Policy and History Cass Series on Peacekeeping Cass Series on Political Violence Cold War History Contemporary Security Studies Contemporary Terrorism Studies CSS Studies in Security and International Relations Geopolitical Theory Interventions LSE International Studies Series Media, War and Security Military History and Policy PRIO New Security Studies Routledge Critical Security Studies Routledge Critical Terrorism Studies Routledge Global Security Studies Routledge Studies in Defence and Peace Economics Routledge Studies in Intervention and Statebuilding Routledge Studies in Liberty and Security Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict Resolution Routledge Studies in Security and Conflict Management Studies in Intelligence

299 300 301 303 304 305 307 308 313 315 316 316 317 318 318 319 321 321 323 325 326 327 328 330 330

SOCIOLOGY Contemporary Issues in Public Policy Indigenous Peoples and Politics Routledge Advances in Criminology Routledge Advances in Feminist Studies and Intersectionality Routledge Advances in Research Methods Routledge Advances in Sociology Routledge Advances in Tourism Routledge International Studies of Women and Place Routledge Research in Gender and Society Routledge Research in Information Technology and Society Routledge Research in Sport, Culture and Society Routledge Studies in Science, Technology and Society Routledge Studies in Social and Political Thought Routledge Transnational Crime and Corruption Routledge/UNRISD Research in Gender and Development

336 337 338 338 339 340 342 344 345 347 347 350 351 352 353

SPORT Ethics and Sport International Studies in Physical Education and Youth Sport Routledge Critical Studies in Sport Routledge International Handbooks

353 354 355 356

TITLE INDEX Gender and Emotional Labour in Asia Gender Diversity in Indonesia Practising Feminism in South Korea Women in China's Muslim Northwest Young Muslim Women in India China's Southern Tang Dynasty, 937–975 Pre-Modern States on China's North-Eastern Frontier Counterterrorism Policies in Central Asia Ethnicity, Authority and Power in Central Asia Securing the Indian Frontier in Central Asia Religion and Security in South and Central Asia The Challenge of Labour in China China and International Relations The Domestic Sources of China's Foreign Policy Higher Education Reform in China The Institutional Dynamics of China's Great Transformation Legitimating the Chinese Communist Party Since Tiananmen Public Procurement in China Economic Developments in Contemporary China Communalism and Globalization in South Asia and its Diaspora Subalternity and Religion Home and Family in Japan Japanese Women, Class and the Tea Ceremony Decentralization and Adat Revivalism in Indonesia The Construction of History and Nationalism in India Dispossession and Resistance in India Political Survival in Pakistan Sufism and Saint Veneration in Contemporary Bangladesh Urban Transformation in East Asia Chinese Male Homosexualities HIV/AIDS in China Industrial Innovation in China Innovation in China Looking for Work in Post-Socialist China Religion in Contemporary China Trade Unions in China Dealing with Disaster in Japan Chinese Migrants in Russia, Central Asia and Eastern Europe Bangladesh Cinema and National Identity Bengali Cinema The Biography of Benazir Bhutto Bollywood Travels Conflict and Peacebuilding in Sri Lanka Corporate Social Responsibility in India The Culturalization of Caste in India Development, Democracy and the State The Economics of Urban Migration in India Education and Inequality in India The Labour Movement in the Global South Microcredit and Women's Empowerment Mohajir Militancy in Pakistan National Identities in Pakistan Nationalism and Ethnic Conflict Nationbuilding, Gender and War Crimes in South Asia Nation, Constitutionalism and Buddhism in Sri Lanka Political Islam and Governance in Bangladesh The State in India after Liberalization Tsunami Recovery in Sri Lanka Environmental Cooperation in Southeast Asia Gender and Transitional Justice Masculinities in Southeast Asia Nation-building and National Identity in Timor-Leste The Politics of Reconstruction and Development in Sri Lanka Princely India Re-imagined A Social History of Healing in India Sovereignty and Social Reform in India Law and Development in Asia

1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 8 8 8 9 10 10 11 11 11 11 12 13 13 13 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 20 20 20 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 27 28 28 29 29

Legal Reforms in China and Vietnam Cambodia's Neoliberal Order Religion, Politics and Gender in Indonesia China's Rise – Threat or Opportunity?

China’s Strategic Competition with the United States Asia's Nuclear Futures The East Asian Security Community Human Security in Southeast Asia India and the South Asian Strategic Triangle South Asia's Nuclear Security Southeast Asia and the Rise of Chinese and Indian Naval Power Social Theory in Contemporary Asia Bureaucracy, Community and Influence in India Gandhi's Spinning Wheel and the Making of India Gender and Radical Politics in India The Great Rebellion of 1857 in India The State and Governance in India The Everyday Impact of Economic Reform in China Gender and Labour in Contemporary India Globalization and the Japanese Economy Intellectual Property, Innovation and Management in Emerging Economies The Migration of Indian Human Capital Responsible Development Trade Liberalisation and Poverty in South Asia Understanding Innovation – The Case of Japan and China The Japanese Occupation of Borneo, 1941–45 National Pasts in Europe and East Asia The Philosophy of Japanese Wartime Resistance Post-War Repatriation to Defeated Japan China's Multinationals – The Resource Sector China's Road to Peaceful Rise China's Rural Financial System Road Map of China's Rise Sustainable Reform and Development in Post-Olympic China Asceticism and Power in South and Southeast Asia The Making of Western Indology The Rise of the Ottoman Empire Building Bangalore The European Union and Central Asia International Mobility and the Transformation of Global Capitalism The Political Economy of East Asian Development Routledge Handbook of Central Asian Politics Routledge Handbook of Indian Politics Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics The Philosophy of Adam Smith Insidious Workplace Behavior Building Big Business in Russia Bubbles, Law and Financial Regulation Norms and Values in Law and Economics Patent Policy The Rule of Law The Bank for International Settlements Regional Development Banks Complex Economics The Aging Consumer Seeking Sustainability Worker Identity, Agency and Economic Development Computable Foundations for Economics Models of Simon The Cultural and Political Economy of Recovery A Critique of Environmental Economics Global Advertising, Attitudes, and Audiences Management Research The Economics of Social Responsibility Elements of an Evolutionary Theory of Welfare Public Management and Complexity Theory Public Private Partnerships in the European Union Social Accounting and Public Management Ideas and Economic Crises in Britain from Attlee to Blair (1945–2005) The International Tin Cartel

29 30 30 31 31 31 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 49 49 50 50 50 51 51 52 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 60

Labour-Intensive Industrialization in Global History Privatization and Transition in Russia The South Sea Bubble Mind, Society, and Human Action Computable, Constructive and Behavioural Economic Dynamics Economic Complexity and Equilibrium Illusion Economics, Culture, and Development Economic Theory and Social Change The Foundations of Institutional Economics Freedom and Happiness in Economic Thought and Philosophy The Global Economic Crisis Hahn and Economic Methodology Happiness, Ethics and Economics Living With Markets Macroeconomic Regimes in Western Industrial Countries The Market, Happiness, and Solidarity Monetary Macrodynamics The Moral Rhetoric of Political Economy The Political Economy of Bureaucracy The Political Economy of Capital The Political Economy of the Small Firm Post Keynesian Microeconomic Theory The Practices of Happiness Rationality and Explanation in Economics Wage Policy, Income Distribution, and Democratic Theory Insights from Accounting History A History of Irish Economic Thought The History of Norwegian Economic Thought Multinationals and Cross-Cultural Management Reappraising State-Owned Enterprise Technological Innovation in Finance Trade Marks, Brands and Competitiveness Health Innovation in Late Economic Development The Capital Needs of Central Banks Currencies and Currency Policies in the Global Economy Developing Alternative Frameworks for Explaining Tax Compliance International Tax Coordination Monetary and Banking History The New International Monetary System Policy Makers on Policy, Second Edition Social Banks and the Future of Sustainable Finance Changing Consumer Roles Interactive Marketing Managing Service Firms Accountancy and Empire Economic Liberalization and Turkey Ethical Socialism and the Trade Unions European Works Councils and Industrial Relations Computational Analysis of Firms’ Organization and Strategic Behaviour Wisdom and Management in the Knowledge Economy Accounting and Justice Accounting in Networks Law, Corporate Governance, and Accounting Leadership and the Global Environmental Challenge Entrepreneurship and Organization Management of International Business Networks Procuring Complex Performance Political Economy of the Environment The Regulation of Work and Employment in Global Firms Enterprise and Deprivation Promoting Informal Venture Capital Embedded Entrepreneurship The Evolving Firm in the Evolving Context Innovation in Complex Social Systems Internationalization, Technological Change and the Theory of the Firm Knowledge-Intensive Entrepreneurship and Innovation Systems Territory, specialization and globalization in European Manufacturing Networked Activisms and Regionalism Managing Healthy Organizations Trade Union Strategies for Competence Development

60 60 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 64 65 65 66 66 66 67 67 68 68 68 69 69 70 70 71 71 72 72 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 75 76 76 77 77 78 78 78 79 79 80 80 80 81 81 82 82 83 83 84 84 85 85 85 86 86 87 87 87 88 88 89 89 90 90

Workplace Learning Creativity and Innovation in Business and Beyond Global Research and Development in Emerging Economies Organization in Open Source Communities Theory and Practice of Triple Helix Model in Developing Countries Corporate Strategy and Trade Policy International Growth of Small and Medium Enterprises Information Worlds Gossip and Organizations Imagining Business International Management and International Relations Storytelling and Antenarrative in Organizations Style Differences in Cognition, Learning, and Management Visual Culture in Organizations Health Technology Development and Use Economic Governance in the EU The Economics of Urban Property Markets Global Population Ageing and Migration in Europe International Trade, Consumer Interests & Reform of Common Agricultural Policy The Political Economy of the European Social Model Adam Smith and the Economy of the Passions The Analysis of Linear Economic Systems Austrian and German Economic Thought Contributions to the History of Economic Thought Crises and Cycles in Economic Dictionaries and Encyclopaedias The Division of Labour in Economics A Dynamic Approach to Economic Theory The Economic Reader E.E. Slutsky as Economist and Mathematician The Essential Writings of Thorstein Veblen Fighting Market Failure Generations of Economists Hayek, Mill and the Liberal Tradition Henry A. Abbati: Keynes' Forgotten Precursor The Ideas of Ronald H. Coase Innovation, Knowledge and Growth Keynes and the British Humanist Tradition The Making of the Classical Theory of Economic Growth Marshall, Marshallians and Industrial Economics The Origins of David Hume's Economics Political Economy and Industrialism Political Economy and Liberalism in France Population, Development and Welfare in the History of Economic Thought Production, Distribution and Trade Real Business Cycle Models in Economics Stalin's Economist Studies in Social Economics Thomas Tooke and the Monetary Thought of Classical Economics Utility Theory Governance and Regulation in the Third Sector Voluntary Organizations and Public Service Delivery Cartelization, Antitrust and Globalization in the US and Europe Cost-Benefit Analysis of Multi-Level Government Critical Issues in Air Transport Economics and Business The Economic Geography of Air Transportation Financial Liberalization and Economic Performance Global Politico-Economic Crises Intellectual Property Rights in Contemporary Capitalism The Political Economy of Integration The Role of 'Informal' Economies in the Post-Soviet World A Contemporary Look at Organizational Justice Social Psychology and Organizations Concise Encyclopedia of Insurance Terms The Connected Customer Handbook of Employee Selection Leading Under Pressure Managerial Ethics The Value Creating Board Education, Professionalism and the Quest for Accountability Children’s Writing and Drawing as Design

91 91 92 92 92 93 94 94 94 95 95 96 96 97 97 98 98 98 99 99 100 100 101 101 102 102 103 103 104 104 105 105 106 106 107 107 107 108 108 109 109 110 110 110 111 112 112 113 113 113 114 114 115 115 116 116 117 117 117 118 118 119 119 119 120 121 121 121 122 123

Citizenship, Education and Social Conflict Collaboration in Education Education and Sustainability Education and Culture The Gates Foundation and the Future of US “Public” Schools Gender Inclusive Engineering Education Globalization, the Nation-State and the Citizen Inclusive Education in the Middle East Intercultural and Multicultural Education Leadership, Accountability, and Culture Picturebooks and Pedagogy Realizing the Rights of Children Systemization in Foreign Language Teaching Teaching and Learning with Technology Trust and Betrayal in Educational Administration and Leadership Universities and Global Diversity What’s So Important About Music Education?

WorldCALL Education Policy, Space and the City Changing Schools in an Era of Globalization Governing Sustainable Development Beyond Territory Can Neighbourhoods Save the City?

Cities, State and Globalization Controversies in Local Economic Development Manufacturing in the New Urban Economy Migration in the 21st Century Territorial Development, Cohesion and Spatial Planning Shrinking Cities Climate Change and Forest Resources Climate Change and the Private Sector The Cooperation Challenge of Economics and the Protection of Water Supplies Ecosystem Services and Global Trade of Natural Resources Environmental Efficiency, Innovation and Economic Performances Environmental Policies for Air Pollution and Climate Change in the New Europe The Future of Helium as a Natural Resource Optimal Control of Age-structured Populations in Economy, Demography, & Envir Participation in Environmental Organizations Permit Trading in Different Applications Preference Data for Environmental Valuation The Taxation of Petroleum and Minerals: Principles, Problems and Practice Valuation of Regulating Services of Ecosystems Reforming Land and Resource Use in South Africa Agricultural and Territorial Rural Policy Analysis India’s New Economic Policy Protecting Biological Diversity Social Development Agri-Food Systems and Economic Development Assessing the Impact of Prospective Trade Reforms: The Case of EU-ACP Credit Cooperatives in India Culture, Institutions, and Development Development Economics in Action Second Edition Monetary and Financial Integration in West Africa The Multinational Enterprise in Developing Countries Reform and Development in China Social Protection for Africa’s Children Towards New Developmentalism Beyond Reductionism Carbon Responsibility and Embodied Emissions Environmental Social Accounting Matrices Greening the Economy Design Economies and the Changing World Economy The Globalization of Advertising Governance and Planning of Mega-City Regions Transitions to Sustainable Development Companion to Urban Design Globalisation and Advertising in Emerging Economies Handbook of Local and Regional Development Handbook of Urban Ecology Sustainability in European Transport Policy

123 123 124 124 125 125 125 126 126 127 127 128 128 128 129 129 130 130 130 131 131 132 132 133 133 133 134 134 135 135 136 136 136 137 138 138 138 139 139 140 140 141 141 142 142 143 143 143 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 148 148 149 149 150 150 150 151 151 152 152 153 153 154 155

Constantine and the Christian Empire Public Health and the US Military The Politics and Memory of Democratic Transition Rural Women in the Soviet Union and Post-Soviet Russia Religious Dissent in the Roman Empire Theorizing a Colonial Caribbean-Atlantic Imaginary Theorizing Medieval Geopolitics Cicero and the Catilinarian Conspiracy Medieval Monstrosity and the Female Body Representations of Eve in Antiquity and the English Middle Ages Origins of Pan-Africanism Statistics and the Public Sphere, 1750–2000 Victorians on Race German Colonialism and National Identity German Colonialism, Visual Culture, and Modern Memory The Caucasus Under Soviet Rule The Polish Government in Exile, 1939–45 Race, Remembering, and Jim Crow’s Teachers Frances Ellen Watkins Harper Ancient Graffiti in Context An Archaeology of Materials Collected Papers on Alexander the Great Contesting Human Remains in Museum Collections The Diplomatic History of Postwar Japan Corpus Approaches to Evaluation Corpus-Based Contrastive Studies of English and Chinese Corpus Stylistics and Dickens’s Fiction The Discourse of Teaching Practice Feedback Language and the Market Society Language Mixing and Code-Switching in Writing Multilingualism, Discourse, and Ethnography Essays on Syntax and Semantics Logical Form and Linguistic Theory Romani Writing Metaphor and Reconciliation The Economics of the Multilingual Workplace A Guide to Doing Statistics in Second Language Research Using R Asian Yearbook of International Law Birth, Harm and the Role of Distributive Justice The Other's War Revenge versus Legality Mental Health and Crime International Development Jurisdiction Crime Scenes The Land is the Source of the Law Novel Judgements The Rule of Reason in European Constitutionalism and Citizenship Sex, Culpability and the Defence of Provocation The Jewish Law Annual Volume 18 Governance Through Development Lawyers and the Construction of Transnational Justice Social Movements, Law and the Politics of Land Reform Law, Complexity and Globalisation Carl Schmitt Deleuze & Guattari: Emergent Law Giorgio Agamben Henri Lefebvre Merger Control in Europe Merger Control in Post-Communist Countries The Political Determinants of Corporate Governance in China Rethinking Corporate Governance Criminal Law and Policy in the European Union Human Rights and Minority Rights in the European Union New Governance and the European Employment Strategy Turkey’s Accession to the European Union European Prudential Banking Regulation and Supervision International Secured Transactions Law The Legal and Regulatory Aspects of Islamic Banking Children and International Human Rights Law

156 156 157 157 157 158 158 158 159 159 160 160 161 161 162 162 163 163 164 164 165 165 165 166 166 166 167 167 168 168 169 169 169 169 170 170 170 171 171 172 172 173 173 173 174 174 175 175 176 176 177 177 178 178 178 179 179 180 180 180 181 181 182 182 183 183 183 184 184 185

Emerging Areas of Human Rights in the 21st Century The European Court of Human Rights in the Post-Cold War Era Global Health and Human Rights The Human Right to Water The Right to Religious Freedom in International Law The Current State of Domain Name Regulation Law of Electronic Commercial Transactions Online Dispute Resolution for Consumers in the European Union Intellectual Property, Community Rights and Human Rights The Law and Economics of Intellectual Property in the Digital Age International Commercial Arbitration and the Arbitrator’s Contract Environmental Governance in Europe and Asia International Law and the Conservation of Coral Reef Ecosystems International Law in a Multipolar World International Organisations and the Idea of Autonomy Self-Determination in the Post-9/11 Era Sovereignty, Jurisdiction, & Exploitation of Seas, Polar, Airspace & Outer Space State Accountability under International Law Alternative Perspectives on Lawyers and Legal Ethics The Ethics Project in Legal Education Reaffirming Legal Ethics Counter-Terrorism and Beyond Counter-terrorism and the Detention of Suspected Terrorists Islamic Law and the Law of Armed Conflict Cross-Border Law Enforcement Regulating Sexuality Rights of Passage The Era of Transitional Justice Transitional Justice, Judicial Accountability and the Rule of Law Human Rights and the Protection of Privacy in Tort Law Asylum, Welfare and the Cosmopolitan Ideal Binding Men Capital Punishment and Political Sovereignty Child Pornography Comparative Perspectives on Communal Lands and Individual Ownership Contemporary Perspectives on Life After Punishment The Criminology of Pleasure The Delivery of Human Rights Drugs, Crime and Public Health Eco Crime and Genetically Modified Food EEO Law and Personnel Practices, Third Edition Events: The Force of International Law Feminist Encounters with Legal Philosophy Foucault and Criminology Framing Crime From Heritage to Terrorism Gender, Law and Sexualities Genocide, State Crime, and the Law Globalisation and the Quest for Social and Environmental Justice Global Perspectives on the Rule of Law A History of Drugs Honour, Violence, Women and Islam Human Rights and Constituent Power Human Rights, or Citizenship?

Internet Child Abuse: Current Research and Policy Islam, Law and Identity Jurisdiction: The Expression and Representation of Law Law Across Borders Law and Art Law and Religion in Public Life Law, Ethics and the Biopolitical Law in the Pursuit of Development Lawscape Legal Architecture Legal Theology Living Under Two Laws Mainstreaming Human Security in Peace Operations and Crisis Management Marginalized Communities and Access to Justice Neoliberalism and the Law in Post Communist Transition On the Right of Exclusion: Law, Ethics and Immigration Policy

185 185 186 186 187 187 188 188 189 189 190 190 190 191 191 192 192 192 193 194 194 195 195 196 196 197 197 198 198 198 199 199 199 200 200 201 201 202 202 202 203 203 204 204 205 205 205 206 206 207 207 208 208 209 209 210 210 210 211 211 212 212 213 213 213 214 214 215 215 216

Patient Safety, Law Policy and Practice Penal Power and Colonial Rule Protecting the Property Rights of Refugees and Internally Displaced Persons Public Interest Litigation in Asia Public Sex and the Law Punitive States Queer Theory: Law, Culture, Empire Reading Modern Law: Critical Methodologies and Sovereign Formations Regulating the International Movement of Women Resolving Disputes in the Asia-Pacific Region Rethinking Rape Law Rights, Gender and Family Law The Right to Silence Risk, Power and the State The Scene of Violence Serial Killers Sexuality and the Politics of Rights in Southern Africa Sovereignty, Human Rights and Global Order The Spatial, the Legal and the Pragmatics of World-Making Strategic Visions for Human Rights Surveillance and Democracy Testifying to Trauma Tomorrow's Torts Transcending the Boundaries of Law Uncertainty in International Law Understanding the Islamic Veiling Controversy Universal Jurisdiction for Humanitarian Crimes Women, Judging and the Judiciary Heroism and the Supernatural in the African Epic The Children's Book Business Humor in Contemporary Junior Literature Irish Children's Literature and Culture New Directions in Picturebook Research Picturing the Wolf in Children's Literature Reading the Adolescent Romance The Role of Translators in Children’s Literature Modern American Counter Writing Black Atlantic Speculative Fictions Generating the Hybrid City Postapartheid Literature The Postcolonial City and Its Subjects The Postcolonial Gramsci Postcolonial Nostalgias Postcolonial Tourism Representing Mixed Race in Jamaica & England from the Abolition Era to Present Transnational Negotiations in Caribbean Diasporic Literature Travel Writing and Atrocities Travel Writing and Ethics Beyond Cyberpunk Criticism, Crisis, and Contemporary Narrative Multimodality, Cognition, and Experimental Literature Ecocriticism and Early Modern English Literature Prophecy and Sibylline Imagery in the Renaissance Representing the Plague in Early Modern England Shakespeare, Jonson, and the Claims of the Performative Language, Ideology and Identity in Serial Killer Narratives Literary Reading, Cognition, and Emotion The Female Romantics Crossing Gender in Shakespeare Shakespeare and Trauma Aesthetic Pleasure in Twentieth-Century Women's Food Writing Diary Poetics Gender, Ireland and Cultural Change Italo Calvino's Architecture of Lightness Jewishness and Masculinity from the Modern to the Postmodern Making Space in the Works of James Joyce Primo Levi's Narratives of Embodiment Travel and Modernist Literature The Construction of Irish Identity in American Literature Slave Heroism in the Transatlantic Imagination

216 216 217 217 218 218 218 219 219 220 220 221 221 222 222 223 223 223 224 224 225 225 226 226 226 227 227 227 228 228 228 229 229 230 230 231 231 232 232 232 233 233 234 234 234 235 235 236 236 237 237 238 238 238 239 239 240 240 240 241 241 241 242 242 243 243 244 244 244 245

Travel and Dislocation in Contemporary American Fiction Narrative Developments from Chaucer to Defoe Celebrity and Glamour in Contemporary Russia Cultural and Social Change in Taiwan Global Chinese Cinema HIV/AIDS, Health and the Media in China Islam and Popular Culture in Indonesia and Malaysia New Media and Human Rights in Southeast Asia On-Line Society in China Politics and the Media in 21st Century Indonesia Rethinking Transnational Chinese Cinema Youth, Society and Mobile Media in Asia The Media, Cultural Control and Government in Singapore Cinema, Memory, Modernity Cinematic Emotion in Horror Films and Thrillers Distributing Silent Film Serials Hollywood Melodrama and the New Deal Korea’s Occupied Cinemas South Asian Cinema Global Media Ecologies Understanding Media and Culture in Turkey Ecology and Environment in European Drama Feminist Visions and Queer Futures in Postcolonial Drama Global Ibsen Performing Embodiment in Samuel Beckett's Drama The Provocation of the Senses in Contemporary Theatre The Theatre of the Bauhaus Russian Mass Media and Changing Values Cognitive Poetics and Cultural Memory Emotion, Genre, and Justice in Film and Television International Journalism and Democracy Landscapes of Holocaust Postmemory Letters, Postcards, Email Teletechnologies, Place and Community Violence, Visual Culture, and the Black Male Body History of Participatory Media The Local Scenes and Global Culture of Psytrance Disability and New Media Media Representations of Gender and Torture Post-9/11 Representing the Black Female Subject in Western Art Jesse Owens, the Press, and the 1936 Berlin Olympic Games Aging Among Japanese American Immigrants Network Journalism Transmedia Television Studies on the Abuse and Decline of Reason Autonomy and Liberalism Contrastivism in Philosophy Epistemology and the Regress Problem Habermas and Literary Rationality Habermas and Rawls Objectivity and the Language-Dependence of Thought Philosophical Delusion and its Therapy The Philosophy of the Pittsburgh School Rawls, Citizenship, and Education Ethics and the Digital Divide Freedom of the Will The Metaphysics of Powers The Semantics and Metaphysics of Natural Kinds Dialectics, Politics, and the Contemporary Value of Hegel's Practical Philosophy Mill's Radical Liberalism Vanishing Matter and the Laws of Nature Emergence in Science and Philosophy Platonism, Naturalism, and Mathematical Knowledge Popper’s Critical Rationalism C. D. Broad’s Philosophy of Time Bioregionalism and Global Ethics The Ethics of Need James Mill and the Despotism of Philosophy The Baltic States Bolshevising the Soviet Communist Party

245 245 246 246 247 247 248 248 249 249 250 250 251 251 251 252 252 253 253 254 254 254 255 255 256 256 257 257 257 258 258 259 259 259 260 260 261 261 262 262 262 263 263 264 264 264 265 265 265 266 266 267 267 267 267 268 268 269 269 270 270 270 271 271 271 272 272 273 273 273

Constitutional Bargaining in Russia, 1990–93 Disease, Health Care and Government in Late Imperial Russia The EU–Russia Borderland Khrushchev in the Kremlin Learning to Labour in Post-Soviet Russia Poland's Troubled Transition, 1989–2008 Presidential Power and Television in Putin’s Russia Russia and Islam The Socialist Alternative to Bolshevik Russia Public Policymaking in Hong Kong Iraq, Democracy and the Future of the Muslim World Iran and the International System Islamic Extremism in Kuwait Islam in the Eyes of the West The Populist Radical Right in Poland Radical Left Parties in Contemporary Europe Social and Political Thought of Julius Evola The Forum on China–Africa Cooperation (FOCAC) Deleuze and Guattarri on Fascism International Relations and Non-Western Thought Madness in International Relations The EU Presence in International Organizations Believing in Russia – Religious Policy After Communism The Colour Revolutions in the Former Soviet Republics Russia and Europe Regional Development in Central and Eastern Europe Russia's Skinheads Reconciliation in Post-Suharto Indonesia Discourse and Democracy The Discourse of the New World Order Metaphor, Nation and the Holocaust Rethinking Gramsci The Political Economy of Aid in Palestine Defining the Atlantic Community Chairing Multilateral Negotiations in the United Nations ASEAN Regionalism American Foreign Policy and Postwar Reconstruction Race and US Foreign Policy United States Cuban Relations The US Public and American Foreign Policy Rewards for High Public Office in Europe and North America The History of Vegetarianism and Cow-Veneration in India Jaina Law and Society Religion and Language in Post-Soviet Russia Buddhism in Australia Buddhist Practice and Visual Culture The Spread of Tibetan Buddhism in China Tibetan Rituals of Death Indian Philosophy and Western Theism Religion, Narrative and Public Imagination in South Asia Women in the Hindu Tradition Health and Religious Rituals in South Asia Rethinking Religion in India Adam Smith as Theologian Christianity and Party Politics Politics and the Religious Imagination Politics, Religion and Gender An Introduction to Tantric Philosophy Tantric Mantras Daoism and the Creation of Tradition Daoist Rituals, State Religion, and Popular Practices Religion and Commodification Pakistan's Security US–China–EU Relations The New Citizen Armies Democratic Citizenship and War A European Army Managing Military Organizations Modern War and the Utility of Force Naval Power and Expeditionary Wars

274 274 275 275 276 276 276 277 277 278 278 278 279 279 280 280 281 281 281 282 282 283 283 284 284 285 285 286 286 286 287 287 288 288 288 289 289 290 290 290 291 291 291 292 292 292 293 293 294 294 294 295 295 296 296 297 297 298 298 298 299 299 299 300 300 301 301 302 302 303

Piracy, Terrorism and Irregular Warfare at Sea Technology and the Mid-Victorian Royal Navy Statebuilding and Justice Reform UN Peace Operations and Post-Conflict Reconstruction Negotiating with Terrorists Political and Military Evolution of Irish Republican Groups Political Assassinations and International Politics Terrorism and the Olympics Terrorism, Identity, and Legitimacy Terrorist Groups and the New Tribalism The Globalization of the Cold War International History of the Vietnam War Yugoslavia and the Soviet Union in the Early Cold War Global Biosecurity Justifying America's Wars Multipolarity in the 21st Century Private Security Contractors and New Wars Rethinking Security Governance Russia's Foreign Security Policy in the 21st Century Russian Imperialism Revisited Understanding NATO in the 21st Century Unipolarity and World Politics US Collective Memory, Intervention and Vietnam US Hegemony and International Legitimacy War, Ethics and Justice The EU and Counter-Terrorism International Terrorism Post-9/11 Talking to Terrorists European–American Relations and the Middle East Geopolitics for the 21st Century Inventing Geopolitics Insuring Security War, Identity and the Liberal State America, the UN and Decolonisation Hamas and Suicide Terrorism Radicalisation and the Media Helmuth Von Moltke Critical Perspectives on Human Security Security and Global Governmentality Security, Risk and the Biometric State Terror and the Politics of Catastrophe The New Spatiality of Security Reimagining War in the 21st Century Discourses and Practices of Terrorism Female Suicide Bombers An Intellectual History of Terror The Making of Terrorism in Pakistan The Globalization of NATO Great Powers and Strategic Stability in the 21st Century International Conflict in the Asia-Pacific US Strategy in Africa Economic Development and Military Security Economics of Defence Policy The Economics of UN Peacekeeping Kosovo, Intervention and Statebuilding Statebuilding, Security-Sector Reform and the Liberal Peace Conflict, Security and the Reshaping of Society Mapping Transatlantic Security Relations Gender, Nationalism and Conflict Transformation Governing Ethnic Conflict Migration and Security in the Global Age Small Arms, Crime and Conflict Theory and Practice of International Mediation A History of the Egyptian Intelligence Service Intelligence, Command and Military Operations The South African Intelligence Services Gender and Peacebuilding The Routledge Handbook of European Security The Routledge Handbook of Human Security Routledge Handbook of Insurgency and Counter-Insurgency

303 304 304 304 305 305 306 306 306 307 307 308 308 308 309 309 310 310 311 311 312 312 312 313 313 314 314 315 315 316 316 316 317 317 317 318 318 319 319 320 320 321 321 321 322 322 323 323 324 324 325 325 326 326 326 327 327 328 328 329 329 330 330 330 331 331 332 332 333 333

The Routledge Handbook of New Security Studies Routledge Handbook of Terrorism Research The Routledge Handbook of Transatlantic Security The Routledge Handbook of War and Society Health and the National Health Service Immigration, Integration and Crime Indigenous Knowledge, Ecology, and Evolutionary Biology Descriptions of Deviance Feminist Studies Sexuality, Gender and Power Women, Civil Society and the Geopolitics of Democratization The Mutual Construction of Statistics and Society Atoms, Bytes and Genes Discourse Learning and Social Evolution Globalization and Transformations of Social Inequality Perspectives on Genetic Discrimination Twentieth Century Music and the Question of Modernity Youth in Contemporary Europe Managing and Marketing Tourist Destinations Tourism and Poverty Tourist Shopping Villages Tourists, Tourism and the Good Life Development and Gender Equity in the Anglophone Caribbean Gender and Rurality The Cultural Politics of Female Sexuality in South Africa Ethics, Materiality, and the Problem of Objectification Gender and Neoliberalism in India Gender, Violence, and Law Migration, Domestic Work and Affect Transgender Identities Identity in the Internet Age Towards a Normative Theory of the Information Society The Olympic Games and Cultural Policy Race, Ethnicity and Football Social Capital and Sport Governance in Europe Sport Policy in Britain Theology, Ethics and Transcendence in Sports Women and Exercise Biometrics Global Public Health Vigilance The Politics of Bioethics Rethinking Disability Wired and Mobilizing Governmentality Hemingway on Politics and Rebellion Human Security, Transnational Crime and Human Trafficking Time Use Studies and Unpaid Care Work Watching Sport Inclusion and Exclusion Through Youth Sport Muslim Women and Sport Young People, Physical Activity and the Everyday The Gay Games Routledge Handbook of Biomechanics and Human Movement Science Children and Exercise XXV Motor Learning in Practice Projectile Dynamics in Sport Routledge Handbook of Sports Development

334 335 335 336 336 337 337 338 338 339 339 339 340 340 340 341 341 342 342 343 343 344 344 344 345 345 345 346 346 346 347 347 347 348 348 348 349 349 350 350 350 351 351 351 352 352 353 353 354 354 355 355 356 356 357 357 358

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

1

Gender and Emotional Labour in Asia ASAA Women in Asia Series

Ann Brooks, University of Adelaide, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56389-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The concept of emotional labour has largely emerged from the analysis of organizations in the West. However, little has been written about the issue of what defines emotional labour and how it is configured in different cultural contexts. This book addresses this gap in the literature and considers how and in what ways emotional labour characterises formal and informal work environments in Southeast Asia. It argues that despite official notification of several international statutes on gender equity and human rights, major barriers continue to restrict women’s rights and behaviour in the workplace in Asia. Some of the key themes that the chapters focus on are – caregiving, parenting and emotional labour in Southeast Asia; the impact of the new economy, organizational constraints, and its impact on professional women in Asia; the impact of the ‘feminization of migration’ in servicing high-end economic migrants in Southeast Asia; human rights issues in the context of female migrant labour in Southeast Asia; and men, masculinity and emotional labour.

CONTENTS Introduction Chapter 1. Globalization, Labour Force Participation and the Gender Gap Part 1 Caregiving, Emotional Labour and Female Migrant Labour Chapter 2. Caregiving, Parenting and Emotional Labour in Southeast Asia Chapter 3. Globalization, the Feminization of Migration and Emotional Labour Chapter 4. Human Rights and Female Migrant Labour in Asia Part 2 New Economy and Servicing High-End Economic Migrants Chapter 5. New Economy, Women Executives, Organizational Constraints and Emotional Labour Chapter 6. Servicing High-End Economic Migrants in Global Cities in Asia Part 3 Masculinity, Relationships and Emotional Labour Chapter 7. Men, Masculinity and Emotional Labour Conclusion

Gender Diversity in Indonesia ASAA Women in Asia Series

Sharyn Graham Davies, Auckland University of Technology, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 262pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-37569-6; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Indonesia provides particularly interesting examples of gender diversity. Same-sex relations, transvestism and cross-gender behaviour have long been noted amongst a wide range of Indonesian peoples. This book explores the nature of gender diversity in Indonesia, and with the world’s largest Muslim population, it examines Islam in this context. Based on extensive ethnographic research, it discusses in particular calalai – female-born individuals who identify as neither woman nor man; calabai – male-born individuals who also identify as neither man nor woman; and bissu – an order of shamans who embody female and male elements. The book examines the lives and roles of these variously gendered subjectivities in everyday life, including in low-status and high-status ritual such as wedding ceremonies, fashion parades, cultural festivals, Islamic recitations and shamanistic rituals. The book analyses the place of such subjectivities in relation to theories of gender, gender diversity and sexuality.

CONTENTS 1. Framing Place and Process 2. Contextualizing Gender 3. Queer(y)ing Transgender 4. Gendering the Present Past 5. Gendering Life 6. Calalai Subject Positions 7. Calabai Subject Positions 8. Bissu Subject Positions

Practising Feminism in South Korea ASAA Women in Asia Series

Kyungja Jung, University of Technology Sydney, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56727-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Korean women’s movement, which is widely seen, in both Western and non-Western countries, as exemplary in terms of women’s activism, experienced a dramatic change in its direction and strategy in the early 1990s, a typical example of the new approach being an increasing focus on sexual violence issues. The anti-sexual violence movement has had a huge impact in bringing women’s issues on to the public agenda in Korea, and has been claimed as the heart of the women’s movement in Korea. This book examines feminist practice in Korea, focusing on and analysing the experiences of the first Sexual Assault Centre in Korea. Based on

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

2 extensive original research, including interviews with activists and extensive participant observation, it explores why feminist activists in South Korea have organized vigorous activities on sexual violence, what has been the impact of the movement, and what have been the strategies and challenges in achieving their objectives.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Theorising Feminist Practice 3. Feminist Methodology 4. Sexual Assault Centres as Sites of Feminist Practice 5.

The issue of Sexual Violence and the Women’s Movement in Korea 6. Feminist Organisational Practice 7. Feminist Practice in Crisis 8. Conclusion

Women in China's Muslim Northwest ASAA Women in Asia Series

Ayxem Ali, University of Tasmania, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55712-2; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The resurgence of Islam in China’s Northwest Xinjiang province among the Uyghurs, the largest ethnic group in the region, has been noted by numerous scholars. However, how this resurgence of Islam relates to Uyghur ethnic identity and how Uyghur women are responding to government policies and social change are questions that still need to be explored. This book focuses on Kashgar, an ancient city in south-western Xinjiang, bordering Afghanistan, India, Pakistan, Tajikistan and Kyrgyzstan. It examines how the Kashgar women in different social strata have expressed their ethnic and gendered identities in the context of Islamic traditions, the resurgence of Islam, and the shifting policies of the Chinese government over the last fifty years. It addresses the changing class hierarchies, family planning programmes and the re-veiling of women. The book will appeal to readers from a wide range of disciplines, including scholars of minority and gender studies in China, Central Asia, anthropology, post-socialist studies, and Islamic studies, and to those interested in Chinese political history since the 1950s.

Young Muslim Women in India ASAA Women in Asia Series

Kabita Chakraborty PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56324-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The reality for marginalized Muslim girls in the city of Kolkata (formerly Calcutta) in India is far more complex than the one that is often constructed during discussions that view the lives of Muslim girls through a lens of repression and poverty within the patriarchal Islamic community. Based on extensive, original research, this book portrays a different and an under-represented perspective of young Muslim girls in the bustees (shanty towns) of Kolkata. Through a series of personal narratives, photos and artwork, it demonstrates that in spite of the dominant discourse surrounding their lives, the consumption and behaviour patterns of young women in these bustees challenge the monolithic representations of what it means to be a Muslim girl in Indian society. It explores the ways in which the young Muslim women live, manipulate, and resist the stereotypes of Islamic femininity by carefully negotiating the risks and performing multiple identities inspired by modernity, globalization and, most of all, Bollywood culture.

China's Southern Tang Dynasty, 937–975 Asian States and Empires

Johannes L. Kurz, Universiti Brunei Darussalam PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $160.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45496-4; March 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Southern Tang was one of the great states in China in the tenth century, and although often regarded as one of several states preceding the much better known Song dynasty (960-1279), was in fact the key state in this period, preserving from the former great Tang dynasty (618-907) cultural values and artefacts which were to form the basis of Song rule, and thereby presenting the Song with a direct link to the Tang and it traditions. This book is the first in English to provide a comprehensive overview of the Southern Tang.

It demonstrates that the Southern Tang was an independent empire and it discusses the political, social and economic history of this empire. It traces the rise of the first ruler of the Southern Tang, Li Bian, who ruled the state of Wu, showing how he established and consolidated his power, including through the fabrication of a genealogy that linked him to the Tang imperial clan. It goes on to

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

3 discuss the subsequent rulers, Li Jing and Li Yu, showing how Southern Tang power was extended, how the Southern Tang claimed to be the rightful and only heir to the Tang, and how power was eventually lost to the Song. The book includes full coverage of military history in this period, and also coverage of culture and poetry, including the poetry of Li Yu lamenting the loss of his empire which is widely known and regarded today.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The State of Wu 2. The State of Qi 3. The Southern Tang at the Height of Their Power 4. The State of Jiangnan 5. End

Pre-Modern States on China's North-Eastern Frontier Asian States and Empires

Remco Breuker, Australian National University PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77620-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the pre-modern states on China’s north-eastern frontier during the 10 th , 11 th and 12 th centuries, a crucial formative period in which the shape of the modern Chinese and northeast Eurasian states from Mongolia to Korea was formed. In particular, it focuses on the Liao and Koryo, showing how they were as important as their better understood Han Chinese counterpart to the south -the Northern Song dynasty - in shaping the history of the region. Liao is best known as the initiator of the lineage of northern states which dominated the political history of China for an entire millenium from 900 to 1900. It formulated a model of multi-ethnic empire whose conceptions and systems of socio-political organization were highly influential for a number of polities including the Mongol empire, Manchukuo and the People’s Republic of China. This book argues that the conventional portrait of the Liao as a purely destructive ‘conquering dynasty’ is incomplete, and that its military might was complemented by a strong cultural, intellectual, religious and commercial influence throughout the Korean peninsula and in Central Asia and Eurasia. It describes how the Liao state rose to prominence, not only through military conquest, but also through trade, exchange and export of physical and intellectual goods, not least in the important constructive role it played in the emergence and consolidation of Koryo as the third state of northeast Asia. It looks in detail at the role played by both Liao and Koryo in Northeast and East Asia, demonstrating clearly how they functioned in the international arena and the important part they played in the cycles of consolidation that shaped the course of Asian history.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Narratives of the Northeast 2. Barbarians at the border: New perspectives on Koryo-Liao relations 3. Establishing empire: Narratives of Liao integration and expansion 4. Trade, travel, deterrence: The emergence of Koryo 5. The Northeast in Asia: Recurrent patterns of involvement 6. The world according to Koryo and Liao Conclusion Bibliography Glossary

Counterterrorism Policies in Central Asia Central Asian Studies

Mairya Y. Omelicheva, University of Kansas, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77981-4; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION During the last two decades, Central Asian states have witnessed an intense revival of Islamic faith. Along with its moderate and traditional forms, radical and militant Islam has infiltrated communities of Muslims in Central Asia. This book explores the extensive measures and counterterrorism policies adopted by Central Asian states against radical Islam, and the similarities in the policies of the different states. Applying a comprehensive theoretical framework which integrates different mechanisms of international influences on state behavior, the author explains the Central Asian states’ perceptions of terrorist threat and their counterterrorism responses. By using the reference group theory - a type of social theory that explicates how various social units to which states belong affect their understandings of security threats, as well as their views on the legitimacy and effectiveness of solutions to security problems - the book applies this perspective for an in-depth analysis of counterterrorism policies of Kazakhstan and Kyrgyzstan, the two Central Asian state that have been least affected by terrorist violence and Islamism but chose to combat those threats vigorously. It also explores the counterterrorism policies of neighboring states – Uzbekistan, Tajikistan, and Russia, and regional security organizations – Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), Collective Security Treaty Organization (CSTO) and Shanghai Cooperation Organizations (SCO).

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Reference Group Perspective on State Behavior 3. Kyrgyzstan’s Counterterrorism Policy 4. Kazakhstan’s Counterterrorism Responses 5. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

4

Ethnicity, Authority and Power in Central Asia Central Asian Studies

Edited by Robert L. Canfield, Washington University, St. Louis, USA and Gabriele Rasuly-Paleczek, University of Vienna, Austria PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-78069-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The peoples of Greater Central Asia – not only Inner Asian states of Soviet Union but also those who share similar heritages in adjacent countries like Afghanistan and Pakistan, Iran, and the Chinese province of Xinjiang – have have been drawn into more direct and immediate contact since the Soviet collapse. Infrastructural improvements, and the race by the great powers for access to the region’s vital natural resources, have allowed these peoples to develop closer ties with each other and the wider world, creating new interdependencies, and fresh opportunities for interaction and the exercise of influence. They are being integrated into a new, wider economic and political region which is increasingly significant in world affairs, owing to its strategically central location, and its complex and uncertain politics. However, most of its inhabitants are pre-eminently concerned with familial and local affairs. This work examines the viewpoints and concerns of a selection of groups in terms of four issues: government repression, ethnic group perspectives, devices of mutual support, and informal grounds of authority and influence. Responding to a need for in-depth studies concerning the social structures and practices in the region, the book examines trends and issues from the point of view of scholars who have lived and worked "on the ground" and have sought to understand the conditions and concerns of people in rural as well as urban settings. It provides a distinctive and timely perspective on this vital part of the world.

CONTENTS Part I, Repressions and their Consequences 1. Authoritarianism and Its Consequences in ex-Soviet Central Asia 2. Localism and Identity among the Uyghur of Xinjiang Part II, Ethnic Perceptions and Reactions 3. Central Asian Attitudes towards Afghanistan; Perceptions of the Afghan War in Uzbekistan 4. Alignment Politics and Factionalism among the Uzbeks of North-Eastern Afghanistan 5. Rebuilding Afghanistan 6. Pukhtun Identity in Swat, Northern Pakistan Part III, Devices of Mutual Support 7. Towards a Transnational Community: Migration and Remittances among the Hazaras 8. An Interregional History of Pashtun Migration, c. 17752000 Part IV, Mechanisms of Authority and Influence 9. Political Games in Post-Soviet Uzbekistan: Factions, Protection and New Resistances 10. Female Mullahs, Healers and Leaders of Central Asian Islam: Gendering the Old and New Religious Roles in PostCommunist Societies 11. Efficacy and Hierarchy: Practices in Afghanistan as an Example

Securing the Indian Frontier in Central Asia Central Asian Studies

Sir Martin Ewans, former British Ambassador to the United Nations and Head of Chancery, British Embassy Kabul, Afghanistan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49681-0; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The three decades between 1865 and 1895 marked a particularly contentious period in the relationship between Britain and Russia in Central Asia, which more than once brought them to the verge of war. Moderates tried to settle the problem by the negotiation of ‘neutral zones’, or firm boundaries, but the issue was complicated by misreading of intentions, much internal confusion and dispute, and considerable ignorance of the geographical and geopolitical factors involved. This careful and detailed analysis examines the strategic thinking and diplomatic discourse which underlay the whole period, and in particular of the succession of efforts to establish a frontier, which eventually brought the period to a close without a major confrontation being provoked. Based on relevant records in the PRO and the British Library, as well as private papers, press comment, parliamentary debates and other contemporary accounts, Sir Martin Ewans provides a ‘history of thought' of this crucial period in Central Asia. He provides an insight into the manner in which issues of war and peace were handled in the 19 th Century and a fascinating case study of a great power relationship prior to the First World War. An important contribution to the study of Asian history, Tsarist Russia, imperial history and the history of British India, this book will also be of interest in India and Pakistan as a study of the events that led to the definition and consolidation of their northern frontiers.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Prelude 2. Russia and the Central Asian Khanates 3. The British Debate 4. Anglo-Russian Negotiations, 1865-1873 5.

The Agreement of 1873 6. Kashgar 7. The Revival of the ‘Forward Policy’ 8. The ‘Forward Policy’ Enforced 9. War with Afghanistan 10. The Seizure of Merv 11. The Pandjeh Crisis 12. The Settlement of the Western Frontier 13. The Erosion of the 1873 Agreement 14. Confrontation in the Pamirs 15. The Consolidation of Dardistan 16. The Pamirs Settlement 17. Epilogue Appendix 1: The Gorchakov Memorandum of 1864 Appendix 2: The Anglo-Russian Agreement of 1973 Appendix 3: The Gorchakov Memorandum of 1875 Appendix 4: The Western Frontier: Protocol of 1885 Appendix 5: Col. Ridgeway’s Report on the Western Frontier, 1887 Appendix 6: The ‘Durand Agreement’ of 1893 Appendix 7: The Pamirs Agreement of 1895

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

5

Religion and Security in South and Central Asia Central Asia Research Forum

Edited by K. Warikoo, Jawaharlal Nehru University, India PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57590-4; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Religion and security play an important role in traditional societies. In South and Central Asia, traditional and moderate Islamic beliefs and practices with strong indigenous and Sufi content are diametrically opposed to radical Wahabi and Taliban brands of Islam intolerant of other cultures and groups. The emergence of radical extremist and violent Islamist movements poses serious challenge to the secular and democratic polity, pluralistic social order, inter-religious harmony, security and territorial integrity of states in the region. As such, religious extremism, separatism, terrorism, drug trafficking and arms smuggling are viewed by various countries in South and Central Asia and also in the West as the main threats to their security. Against this backdrop, this book provides local perspectives on religion, security, history, geopolitics and geostrategy in South Asia and Central Asia in an integrated manner.

Presenting a holistic and updated view of the developments inside and across South and Central Asia, it offers coherent and concise analyses by experts on the region.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction K. Warikoo 2. Taliban’s Resurgence in Afghanistan and Pakistan Frederic Grare 3. Pakistan's Slide Towards Talibanisation Sushant Sareen 4. Resurgence of the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan: Implications for Regional Security Deepali Gaur 5. Islamic Radicalism in PATA (NWFP): Challenge to Regional Security Ashok K. Behuria 6. Roads to Perdition: The Politics and Practice of Islamist Terrorism in India Praveen Swami 7. Islamist Extremism in Kashmir K. Warikoo 8. Communal Peace in India: Lessons from Multicultural Banaras Priyankar Upadhyaya 9. Islamist Extremism and Terror Network in Bangladesh Smruti S. Pattanaik 10. Religious Radicalism in Bangladesh: Security Challenges to India C. A. Josukutty 11. Hizb-ut-Tahrir: The Destabilising Force in Central Asia Mahesh R. Debata 12. Islamic Radicalism in Central Asia Murat Laumulin 13. Islam in Contemporary Tajikistan: Role of Muslim Leaders Muzaffar Olimov 14. Ethnic-Religious Separatism in Xinjiang: Challenge to China's Security K. Warikoo

The Challenge of Labour in China China Policy Series

Chris King-chi Chan, Hong Kong Polytechnic University PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55703-0; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION China’s economic success has been founded partly on relatively cheap labour, especially in the export industries. In recent years, however, there has been growing concern about wages and labour standards in China. This book examines how wages are bargained, fought over and determined in China, by exploring how the pattern of labour conflict has changed over time since the 1970s. It focuses in particular on the city of Shenzhen where labour conflict and workers’ protests have been especially prevalent. This book includes a detailed account of the transformation of labour relations and labour policy in China more broadly during 2004 to 2009, a period when there have been significant changes in the labour market, labour regulation and labour relations. The author argues that these recent developments have brought to the fore the class basis of workers’ protest in China and have thoroughly undermined the post-Marxist analysis of identity politics. The book makes an invaluable contribution to studies on industry and labour, as well as Chinese studies.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Globalisation and Chinese Migrant Workers 2. Labour Conflict in Shen Zhen: a Historical Review 3. Community and Shop Floor Culture: a Prelude to Workers' Protests 4. Strikes and Changing Power Relations in the Workplace 5. Workplace Conflict, Legal Institution, and Labour Regime 6. International Civil Society, Chinese Trade Unionism, and Workplace Representation 7.

Conclusion: Workers' Struggle and the Changing Regime in China

China and International Relations China Policy Series

Edited by Zheng Yongnian, National University of Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00; 234x156 mm; 400pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57607-9; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

6 Despite Beijing’s repeated assurance that China’s rise will be "peaceful", the United States, Japan and the European Union as well as many of China's Asian neighbours feel uneasy about the rise of China. Although China’s rise could be seen as inevitable, it remains uncertain as to how a politically and economically powerful China will behave, and how it will conduct its relations with the outside world. One major problem with understanding China’s international relations is that western concepts of international relations only partially explain China’s approach. China’s own flourishing, indigeneous community of international relations scholars have borrowed many concepts from the west, but their application has not been entirely successful, so the work of conceptualizing and theorizing China’s approach to international relations remains incomplete. Written by some of the foremost scholars in the field of China studies, this book focuses on the work of Wang Gungwu - one of the most influential scholars writing on international relations - including topics such as empire, nation-state, nationalism, state ideology, and the Chinese view of world order. Besides honouring Wang Gungwu as a great scholar, the book explores how China can be integrated more fully into international relations studies and theories; discusses the extent to which existing IR theory succeeds or fails to explain Chinese IR behaviour, and demonstrates how the study of Chinese experiences can enrich the IR field.

CONTENTS Part 1: Historicity and Social Foundation of China’s Domestic Order and International Relations 1. Historicity and International Relations: A Tribute to Wang Gungwu 2. A Re-Appraisal of Abrahamic Values and Neorealist IR Theory: From a Confucian-Asian Perspective 3. Historians and Chinese World Order: Fairbank, Wang, and the Matter of ‘Indeterminate Relevance’ 4. The Historical Roots and Character of Secularism in China Part 2: Reinterpreting China’s "World Order" 5. Rethinking the "Tribute System": Broadening the Conceptual Horizon of Historical East Asian Politics 6. Traditional Chinese Theory and Practice of Foreign Relations: A Reassessment 7. Traditional China and the Globalization of International Relations Thinking Part 3: Chinese Overseas and China’s International Relations 8. Conceptualizing Chinese Migration: Wang Gungwu and His Struggle with Terminology 9. China, Cuba, and the Chinese in Cuba: Emigration, International Relations, and How They Interact 10. Chinese Overseas and a Rising China: The Limits of a Diplomatic "Diaspora Option" Part 4: China in Contemporary World Politics 11. Understanding the Intangible in International Relations: The Cultural Dimension of China’s Integration with the International Community 12. Has the Rise of China Made Latin America more Unsafe? 13. Japan’s Response to the Fall and Rise of China: The Shift of Foreign Policy Mainstream Thinking Part 4: Historical Continuity and Transformation of China’s International Relations 14. The Returned China with Chineseness in History and World Politics: A Deeper Understanding with the Intellectual Guide from Wang Gungwu 15. Organizing China’s Inter-state Relations: From "Tianxia" (All-Under-Heaven) to Modern International Order 16. Wang Gungwu, the Transnational and Research Imagination

The Domestic Sources of China's Foreign Policy China Policy Series

Lai Hongyi, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56237-9; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION As China’s political and economic influence in the world is rapidly increasing, it is essential to understand how China’s domestic politics affects its foreign political and economic policy. This book offers an accessible, informative and up-to-date systemic analysis of the foreign policy of China. Where mainstream literature on international relations usually suggests that China’s foreign policy is primarily determined by external factors, such as the international system and external settings, this book demonstrates instead that domestic factors profoundly shape China’s foreign policy from the late Mao’s era to the reform era. It demonstrates how China’s foreign policy is driven by the preservation of political and economic regimes; the political survival of the top leader; the top leader’s vision for, and skills in, managing external affairs; the leader’s policy priorities; dramatic events and the process of policymaking. It presents its argument in-depth analysis of major cases of Chinese foreign policy – for example, China’s difficult relations with Southeast Asia; China’s 15-year accession to the World Trade Organization (WTO); China’s oil diplomacy in the recent decade, and the diversified process of foreign policy making in the twenty-first century.

CONTENTS Part 1: Analytical Framework 1. Introduction: Bringing Back Domestic Politics in Studies of Foreign Policy 2. Internal Sources of External Policy: An Analytical Framework Part 2: Cases of China’s Foreign Policy 3. Domestic Regimes and Leaders’ Vision: Relations with Southeast Asia 4. Leadership Succession, Priority, Debates, and Shocks: WTO Accession 5. Managing DomesticExternal Interaction: China-U.S. WTO Agreement 6. Securing Strategic Resources for Domestic Economy: Oil Diplomacy 7.

Institutions and Players: Diversified Policy Making Process Part 3: Conclusion 8. Understanding a Rising China

Higher Education Reform in China China Policy Series

W. John Morgan and Wu Bin, both of University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56413-7; October 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

7 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A major transformation of Chinese higher education (HE) has taken place over the past decade, with the number of graduates from China’s higher education institutions having quadrupled over the past six years to three million a year. China is exceptional among lower income countries in using tertiary education as a development strategy on such a scale. Its aim is to not only improve the quality of its graduates, but also make HE available to as many of its citizens as possible. But has China got its policies right? Can its universities move from quantity to quality? How will so many graduates find jobs in line with their expectations? Can Britain and other western countries continue to benefit from China’s education boom? What are the prospects for collaboration in research? This book provides a critical examination of these issues and other issues, and evaluates the prospects for Chinese and foreign HE providers, regulators and other stakeholders. It introduces the key changes in China’s HE programme since the Opening-Up policy in 1www.routledge.com/978 and analyses the achievements and the challenges over the subsequent three decades. Furthermore, it sheds light on new reforms that are likely to take place in the future, particularly as a result of the current international financial crisis.

CONTENTS Part One: Economics, Structure and Performance. Chapter 1: Thirty Years of Reform in China's Higher Education Funding Mechanism Dr LI, Fengliang , Assistant Professor, Institute of Education, Tsinghua University, Beijing, China, and Professor DING Xiaohao, Graduate School of Education, Peking University, Beijing, China. Chapter 2: The Similarity of Chinese Universities in Disciplinary Structure: An analysis of its trend, dynamics and consequences Chen, Aijun, Professor, Xian University of Technology, and WU Bin, Senior Research Fellow, China Policy Institute, University of Nottingham. Chapter 3: The Labour Market for Graduates in China Professor DING Xiaohao, Graduate School of Education, Peking University, Beijing, China, Dr LI, Fengliang, Assistant Professor, Institute of Education, Tsinghua University, Beijing, China, and Professor W. John Morgan, UNESCO Centre for Comparative Education Research, University of Nottingham, UK . Chapter 4: The attitudes and morale of Chinese academics in Sciences and Technology Professor ZHAO, Yandong, Institute of Science, Technology and Society, Chinese Academy of Science and Technology for Development, Beijing, China Part Two: Building a Wider Provision. Chapter 5: The Regional Unevenness of China’s Allocation of Higher Education resources: Its origin, status and consequences Professor Chen, Aijun, Xian University of Technology Dr WU, Bin, University of Nottingham, and Wang, Xiaochui, Research Associate, Xian University of Technology. Chapter 6: The Problems and Potential of University Adult Higher Education in China Dr WANG, Naixia, Research Associate, UNESCO Centre for Comparative Education Research and China Policy Institute, University of Nottingham, UK . Chapter 7: The Role of China’s Radio and Television University Special Professor Bernadette Robinson, UNESCO Centre for Comparative Education Research, University of Nottingham, UK, Professor Shukun, Mo, Inner Mongolia Provincial Radio and TV University, and Associate Professor Yan Shuoqin, China Central Radio and TV University, Beijing, China. Chapter 8: Private higher education in China: Problems and possibilities Dr LI, Fengliang, Assistant Professor, Institute of Education, Tsinghua University, Beijing, China and Professor W. John Morgan, UNESCO Centre for Comparative Education Research, University of Nottingham, UK. Chapter 9: Higher education and Teacher Professional Education in the Context of China’s Curriculum Reform Dr Janette Ryan, Senior Lecturer in Education, Monash University, Australia. Part Three: External Influences. Chapter 10: Education Reform in Hong Kong: Some implications for higher education and lifelong learning Dr John Cribbin, School of Professional and Continuing Education, University of Hong Kong, Special Administrative Region of Hong Kong, China. Chapter 11: Studying in a Foreign Context: Chinese students’ experiences in British Higher Education Dr GU, Qing, Senior Research Fellow, UNESCO Centre for Comparative Education Research, University of Nottingham . Chapter 12: Concluding Remarks Professor W. J. Morgan and Dr WU Bin . Select Bibliography. Index.

The Institutional Dynamics of China's Great Transformation China Policy Series

Xiaoming Huang, Victoria University, Wellington, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58058-8; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the role of institutions in China’s recent fundamental economic transformation and social and political changes.

Viewing the changes from a variety of subject perspectives, including economics, politics and communication studies, the book argues that, although the importance of institutions is widely acknowledged, exactly how institutions affect changes in particular national and historical settings is less well understood. The institutions discussed include China’s political and legal institutions, the international institutions with which China engages, institutions promoting science and technology, media companies, and local institutions, including the household registration system. Overall, besides showing how institutions have affected recent change in China, the book also discusses how institutions themselves have been formed, changed and re-formed over recent decades.

CONTENTS Introduction. Xiaoming Huang, Victoria University of Wellington 1. China and International Institutions: One International Society or Two International Political Parties? Harry Harding, University of Virginia 2. Efficiency, Institutions and the China Puzzle: A Research Framework Xiaoming Huang, Victoria University of Wellington 3. State capacity, Democratic Principles and Constitutional Order: Modern State-building in Post-Totalitarian Society Li Qiang, Peking University 4. Science and Technology Institution and Performance in China: An Assessment with the Case of the Semi-conductor Industry Keun Lee, Seoul National University 5. The Road to Rechtesstaat: Rule of Law, Constitutional Democracy and Institutional Change Weisen Li, Fudan University 6. China's Evolving Institutional Exclusion: the Hukou System and Its Transformation Wang Fei-ling, Georgia Institute of Technology 7.

Institutions Formation, Imitation and Borrowing: Zhongguancun as a Case Study on Mechanisms of Institutional Change Hong Sheng, Unirule Institute of Economics 8. Propaganda vs. Profit: the Political Economy of CCTV Yong He, Communication University of

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

8 China 9. Village Elections and the Institutionalization of Legitimate Authority C S Bryan Ho, University of Macau 10. China and South Pacific Regionalism: Activism and Dominance Jian Tang, University of Auckland 11. Institutional or Non-institutional? A Case Study of PRC Policymaking on Taiwan during the 1995-96 Taiwan Crisis Bi Jianhai, University of Macau Conclusion Xiaoming Huang

Legitimating the Chinese Communist Party Since Tiananmen China Policy Series

Peter Sandby-Thomas, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55398-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The dominant view concerning the rule of the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) is that it is simply a matter of time before it comes to an end. This view has been dominant since the pro-democracy protests in 1989 and has only been strengthened by the increasing number of protests in recent years. However, the Chinese Communist Party has continued to remain in power throughout this period and its rule appears to be secure in the short-to medium-term. As the twentieth anniversary of the military suppression of the prodemocracy demonstrations approaches, this book explains how the Chinese Communist Party has maintained its authority since 1989.

It provides a detailed analysis of the Party’s discourse emphasising stability in the post-Tiananmen period, analysing the government’s propaganda in order to show how this discourse has been used by the Party to legitimate its authority. The interdisciplinary nature of this book makes it relevant to a number of different academic disciplines including Asian studies, China studies, international relations, politics and sociology.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Conceptualizing Legitimation 2. Analyzing Stability 3. The 1989 'Beijing Spring' 4. The 1999 'Anti-Falun Gong' Campaign 5. The 2005 'Anti-Japan' Demonstrations. Conclusion

Public Procurement in China China Policy Series

Ping Wang, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46276-1; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Owing to its massive state sector, public procurement in China is a critical element of public policy. At the same time, because of its considerable market size, public procurement is of increasing importance for international trade, and thus subject to enacted regulations in most countries and has been put on the agenda of international and regional trade organisations, such as the WTO. This book examines China’s public procurement regime since the launching of market-oriented reform in 1www.routledge.com/978. It outlines the development of the relevant national laws and their implementing regulations, which have evolved from scratch since the onset of economic reform. It considers the impact of WTO membership, and the steps China has taken to initiate negotiations on accession to the WTO Government Procurement Agreement (GPA) by the end of 2007. It also provides a detailed picture of the current legal framework, assessing the impact of key legislative measures including the Tendering Law of 2000 and the Government Procurement Law of 2003. While both laws were drafted with the help of international experts and organisations such as the EU, there remain a number of inconsistencies in China’s public procurement regime, such as the overlap between the scope of application in laws and jurisdiction of government agencies. This book shows how these issues, that are hard for the international community to understand, will have a profound impact on China’s domestic policy agenda and its integration into the global trading system. Overall, this book is important not only for those who want to understand China’s procurement regime and public policy, but also for business people requiring a detailed picture of the current legal and regulatory environment.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Public Procurement in China 2. The Tendering Law and its Implementing Regulations 3. The Government Procurement Law and its Implementing Regulations 4. Procurement of Chinese State Enterprises: To what Extent is it Regulated? 5.

Electronic Procurement in China 6. Public Procurement in China’s WTO Accession and other Trade Instruments China Participated 7.

China’s GPA Accession: Challenges for International Regulation and Domestic Reform 8. China’s Long March to the Integration into Global Public Procurement Regime: The Way Forward

Economic Developments in Contemporary China Guides to Economic and Political Developments in Asia

Ian Jeffries, University of Wales, Swansea, UK

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

9 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £125.00 $200.00; 234x156 mm; 592pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47866-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION China’s role in global affairs today continues to rise. This book provides an authoritative, comprehensive and detailed overview of contemporary economic developments in China. Key topics include agriculture; the market gradually replacing central planning; the global financial crisis; the reform of state-owned industrial enterprises; the non-state sectors; the ‘open-door’ policy (including the WTO, exchange rate policy, and inward and outward direct foreign investment); and China’s economic performance in general. The book continues - and adds to – the overview of developments up to May 2006 which were covered in the author’s China: A Guide to Economic and Political Developments (2006), and is the companion volume to Political Developments in Contemporary China: A Guide (2010) - both published by Routledge.

CONTENTS Overview Agriculture : policy since 1945; general facts and figures; the Household Responsibility System (features, reforms, successes and failures); the hukou system; the World Trade Organization (WTO) The market gradually replacing central planning: prices ; monetary policy and the banking system; a chronology of financial developments The reform of state industrial enterprises : the discarding of social functions (unemployment compensation and pensions, health and housing); early reforms; shareholding and privatization (including developments on the two stock exchanges); conglomerates; a chronology of developments in ownership policy and state enterprise reform; bankruptcy law; the new labour law; financing investment (the debate); trade union branches in enterprises; the role of the party in enterprises; the non-state, non-agricultural sectors: the private sector, foreign-invested enterprises and township-village enterprises (TVEs); the importance of these sectors as a proportion of industrial output; the private sector as a whole as a percentage of GDP; the private, non-agricultural sector as a percentage of GDP; the underground economy; TVEs The ‘open-door’ policy : foreign trade; growing importance and general aspects; the WTO; yuan convertibility and exchange rate policy; the Asian financial crisis; direct foreign investment (DFI): definition; volume and other indicators of importance; investment overseas

by Chinese companies (outward/outbound direct foreign investment); China and Taiwan; the gradual opening up of sectors; developments in conditions affecting direct foreign investment; Special Economic Zones (SEZs) Economic performance : global significance; GDP (including the upward revision of 2004 GDP and a section devoted to purchasing-power parity (PPP) estimates of GDP) and GDP growth; manufacturing output; sources of growth; raw materials; poverty; inflation; unemployment; pollution; energy sources; the number of labour disputes; aid; education

Communalism and Globalization in South Asia and its Diaspora Intersections: Colonial and Postcolonial Histories

Edited by Deana Heath, Trinity College Dublin, Ireland and Chandana Mathur, National University of Ireland, Maynooth PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57364-1; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book deals with the relationship between communalism and globalization in South Asia, addressing the issue of time scale and causality of the two concepts and asking whether globalization has amplified or muted the processes of communalism. Globalization is typically conceived of as a very recent phenomenon, whereas communalism is usually conceived of as atavistic and inherently premodern. Exploring different disciplinary and theoretical perspectives and methodologies that range from archival to oral historical to multi-sited ethnographic research, this book presents detailed scholarly analyses of the issues of communalism and globalization.

Arguments are based in close-up views of specific historical and contemporary phenomena across four South Asian countries (India, Pakistan, Bangladesh and Sri Lanka) and various diaspora locations. With contributions by some of the most notable scholars working on communalism in South Asia and its diaspora as well as a selection of challenging new voices, the book is an important stimulation of new debates surrounding the relationship between communalism and globalization.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: New Directions - Communalism, Globalisation and Governmentality Deana Heath Part 1: Thinking Historically 2.

Rethinking Communalism: India, Pakistan and the Challenge of Globalization Ayesha Jalal 3. Indian Civilization and its Others: Global Circuits and the Making of Islamic Iconoclasm Vazira Fazila-Yacoobali Zamindar 4. Globalization and Hindutva Sumit Sarkar 5. Salafi Extremism in the Punjab and its Global Impact Tahir Kamran 6. Western Hindutva: Hindu Nationalism in the United Kingdom and North America Christophe Jaffrelot and Ingrid Therwath Part 2: Contemporary Connections: Problems and Possibilities 7. Communalism and Globalization in India: Evidence from Karnataka Badrinath Rao 8. For or Against?: Islam, Cinema and Globalization in Bangladesh Zakir Hossain Raju 9. Imrana’s Rape: Debating Islam and Law in Contemporary India Barbara Metcalf 10. Searching for the Greatest Bengali: The BBC and Shifting Identity Categories in South Asia Reece Jones 11. Communalism in Sri Lanka: Where is the Labour Movement? Sumithra Janaka Biyanwila 12. Religion, Diaspora, Globalisation: The Vishwa Hindu Parishad and the Jama’at-i Islami in the United States Aminah Mohammad-Arif Part 3: Theoretical Constructions 13. www.kottu.org: Arguments, Nations and Communities in Sri Lankan’ Cyberspace Pradeep Jeganathan 14. How Not to Think About Social Power: The Hindu Right Response to the Problems of Globalisation Tanika Sarkar 15. (Re)production of Nationalism and Communal Politics in

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

10 the Age of Globalization: Popular Buddhism in Sri Lanka Premakumara De Silva 16. Conclusion: Communalism and Globalisation: Initiating a Dialogue Chandana Mathur

Subalternity and Religion Intersections: Colonial and Postcolonial Histories

Milind Wakankar, SUNY, Stony Brook, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 212pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77878-7; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores the relationship between mainstream and marginal or subaltern religious practice in the Indian subcontinent, and its entanglement with ideas of nationhood, democracy and equality. With detailed readings of texts from Marathi and Hindi literature and criticism, the book brings together studies of Hindu devotionalism with issues of religious violence. Drawing on the arguments of Partha Chatterjee, Martin Heidegger and Jacques Derrida, the author demonstrates that Indian democracy, and indeed postcolonial democracies in general, do not always adhere to Enlightenment ideals of freedom and equality, and that religion and secular life are inextricably enmeshed in the history of the modern, whether understood from the perspective of Europe or of countries formerly colonized by Europe. Therefore subaltern protest, in its own attempt to lay claim to history, must rely on an idea of religion that is inextricably intertwined with the deeply invidious legacy of nation, state, and civilization. The author suggests that the co-existence of acts of social altruism and the experience of doubt born from social strife - ‘miracle’ and ‘violence’ - ought to be a central issue for ethical debate. Keeping in view the power and reach of genocidal Hinduism, this book is the first to look at how the religion of marginal communities at once affirms and turns away from secularized religion. This important contribution to the study of vernacular cosmopolitanism in South Asia will be of great interest to historians and political theorists, as well as to scholars of religious studies, South Asian studies and philosophy.

CONTENTS Preface Part 1: Introduction: The Question of a Prehistory 1. Subalternity at the Cusp: Limits and Openings in the Dalit Critique 2.

Moral Rite before Myth and Law: Death in Comparative Religion 3. The Time of Having-Found (God): Languages of Dalit Hearsay Part 2: The Vicissitudes of Historical Religion 4. The Anomaly of Kabir: Historical Religion in Dwivedi’s Kabir (1942) 5. The Pitfalls of a Dalit Theology: Dr Dharmvir’s Critique of Dwivedi (1997) 6. System and History in Rajwade’s Grammar for the Dnyaneswari (1909) Part 3: The Prehistory of Historical Religion 7. The Suspension of Iconoclasm: Myth and Allegory in the Time of Deities 8.

Miracle and Violence: The Allegorical Turn in Kabir, Dnyaneswara, and Tukaram 9. Deity and Daivat: The Transfiguration of the Folk in Tukaram

Home and Family in Japan Japan Anthropology Workshop Series

Edited by Richard Ronald, Delft University of Technology, the Netherlands and Allison Alexy, Lafayette College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48867-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The traditional family and family house, often portrayed in ideal terms as key foundations of Japanese society, have been subject to significant changes in recent years. This book explores the degree to which traditional patterns of both houses and households are changing. It examines the social, economic and urban changes which are causing these changes, discusses the shift from the stem family to the nuclear family and to a situation where there are large numbers of single person and childless couple households, and elderly people living in nursing homes, and explores new patterns in family relationships. It also discusses new rhetoric about the family, and new concepts of self and family role fulfilment.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Richard Ronald and Allison Alexy 2. Youth Agency, Intergenerational Relationships and a Child-led Vision of the 21st Century Japanese Family Bruce White 3. Coping with Hikikomori: Socially Withdrawn Youth and the Japanese Family Sachiko Horiguchi 4. Unwed Mothers and Negotiations of Illegitimacy: ‘I did not know how to tell my parents so I thought I would have to have an abortion’ Ekaterina Hertog 5. Masculinity and the Family System: The Ideology of the Salaryman and Daikokubashira across Three Generations Tomoko Hidaka 6. 'If you buy it, he will come': Housing Strategies of Unmarried Women in Tokyo Lynne Nakano 7. Legislating Ideals: Conceptions of ‘Ie’ and the Registration of Households Karl Jakob Krogness 8. The Housing System and Family Formation: Intergenerational Fragmentations in Life-Courses Yosuke Hirayama 9. Sense and Space: Transformations in Homes and Urban Housing Richard Ronald 10. Home and Homelessness in Contemporary Japan Akihiko Nishizawa 11. ‘When I got divorced, my single friends said "Welcome Home!"’: Divorce in Family Lives Allison Alexy 12. Rethinking and Reorganizing Dwelling Spaces: Home, Family and Social Networks in Old Age Anemone Platz 13. Reforming Families in Japan: Family Policy in the Era of Structural Reform Takeda Hiroko 14. Epilogue Allison Alexy and Richard Ronald

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

11

Japanese Women, Class and the Tea Ceremony Japan Anthropology Workshop Series

Kaeko Chiba, Akita International University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55715-3; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the complex relationship between class and gender dynamics among tea ceremony ( chad? ) practitioners in Japan. Focusing on practitioners in a provincial city, Akita, the book surveys the rigid, hierarchical chad? system at grass roots level.

Making critical use of Bourdieu’s idea of cultural capital, it explores the various meanings of chad? for Akita women and argues that chad? has a cultural, economic, social and symbolic value and is used as a tool to improve gender and class equality. Chad? practitioners focus on tea procedure and related aspects of chad? such as architecture, flower arranging, gardening and pottery.

Initially, only men were admitted to chad? ; women were admitted in the Meiji period (1868-1912) and now represent the majority of practitioners. The author - a chad? practitioner and descendant of chad? teachers - provides a thorough, honest account of Akita women based on extensive participant observation and interviews. Where most literature on Japan focuses on metropolitan centres such as Kitakyushu and Tokyo, this book is original in both its subject and scope. Also, as economic differences between metropolitan and non-metropolitan areas have become more pronounced, it is timely to explore the specific class and gender issues affecting nonmetropolitan women. This book contributes not only to the ethnographic literature on chad? and non-metropolitan women in Japan, but also to the debates on research methodology and the theoretical discussion of class.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Identity work 3 Time, space and the experience of chad? 4. Bourdieu’s theory of capital and discourses on class 5.

Gender 6. Class 7. Raison d’être

Decentralization and Adat Revivalism in Indonesia Rethinking Southeast Asia

Adam D. Tyson, University of Northern Malaysia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-78011-7; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the dynamic process of political transition and indigenous ( adat ) revival in newly decentralized Indonesia. The political transition in May 1998 set the stage for the passing of Indonesia’s framework decentralization laws. These laws include both political and technocratic efforts to devolve authority from the centre (Jakarta) to the peripheries. Contrary to expectations, enhanced public participation often takes the form of adat revivalism - a deliberate, highly contested and contingent process linked to intensified political struggles throughout the Indonesian archipelago. The author argues adat is aligned with struggles for recognition and remedial rights, including the right to autonomous governance and land. It cannot be understood in isolation, nor can it be separated from the wider world. Based on original fieldwork and using case studies from Sulawesi to illustrate the key arguments, this book provides an overview of the key analytical concepts and a concise review of relevant stages in Indonesian history. It considers struggles for rights and recognition, focusing on regulatory processes and institutional control. Finally, Tyson examines land disputes and resource conflicts. Regional and local conflicts often coalesce around forms of ethnic representation, which are constantly being renegotiated, along with resource allocations and entitlements, and efforts to preserve or reinvent cultural identities. This will be valuable reading for students and researchers in Political Studies, Development Studies, Anthropology and Southeast Asian Studies and Politics.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Critical Conjectures 3. In Search of Recognition 4. Recognition of the Seko Domain 5. Lembang Governance in Tana Toraja 6. The Nickel Project in East Luwu 7. Rubber Production in Bulukumba 8. Becoming Indigenous

The Construction of History and Nationalism in India Routledge Advances in South Asian Studies

Sylvie Guichard, University of Geneva, Switzerland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56506-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

12 Most studies on nations and nationalism argue that history, or more precisely a 'common past', is crucial for the process of national identity building. However, the existence of one or more concurrent narratives for the construction of this identity is often not accounted for, and there are cases where the ‘common past’ or a ‘collective memory’ is no longer shared. This book centres on the construction, elaboration and negotiation of the narratives that have become official history in India. These narratives influence politics and the representation of the nation. Depending on the chosen definition of the nation, over 160 million Muslim Indians are either included or excluded from the nation, and considered as ‘foreigners from inside’. The author shows that beyond the antagonism of two representations of history, two conceptions of the Indian nation – secular and Hindu nationalist – confronted each other during the history textbook controversy between 1998 and 2004. The diverging elements of the two discourses are underlined, and surprising similarities are uncovered. Yet, in contemporary India this convergence remains overshadowed in political debates as the definition of the political has been shaped by the opposition between these two visions of the nation. This book analyzes and questions the conception of the school textbook as a tool of national construction and more generally highlights the complexity of the link between historiography, nation-state and nation-building.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Nation, Religion and History 2. Textbooks, Teachers and Students 3. The Debate in Context 4. Enemies and Defenders 5. Perspectives and Silences 6. General. Conclusion

Dispossession and Resistance in India Routledge Advances in South Asian Studies

Alf Gunvald Nilsen, University of Bergen, Norway PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 242pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55864-8; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book deals with the controversies on developmental aspects of large dams, with a particular focus on the Narmada Valley projects in India. Based on extensive ethnographic fieldwork and research, the author draws on Marxist theory to craft a detailed analysis of how local demands for resettlement and rehabilitation were transformed into a radical anti-dam campaign linked to national and transnational movement networks. The book explains the Narmada conflict and addresses how the building of the antidam campaign was animated by processes of collective learning, how activists extended the spatial scope of their struggle by building networks of solidarity with transnational advocacy groups, and how it is embedded in and shaped by a wider field of force of capitalist development at national and transnational scales. The analysis emphasizes how the Narmada dam project is related to national and global processes of capitalist development, and relates the Narmada Valley movement to contemporary popular struggles against dispossession in India and beyond. Conclusions drawn from the resistance to the Narmada dams can be applied to social movements in other parts of the Global South, where people are struggling against dispossession in a context of neoliberal restructuring. As such, this book will have relevance for people with an interest in South Asian studies, Indian politics and Development Studies.

CONTENTS 1. The River and the Rage: Introducing the Narmada Valley Conflict 2. Losing Ground: Accumulation by Dispossession in the Narmada Valley 3. Everyday Tyranny and Rightful Resistance: The Emergence of the Khedut Mazdoor Chetna Sangath 4.

Discovering the Dam: Militant Particularist Struggles for Resettlement and Rehabilitation 5. Towards Opposition: The Formation of the Anti-Dam Campaign 6. Cycles of Struggle: The Trajectory of the Anti-Dam Campaign 1990-2000 7. Enablements and Constraints: The Making of the Maheshwar Anti-Dam Campaign 8. Development, Not Destruction: Alternative Development as a Social Movement Project 9. Whither the Rage? Learning from the Narmada Valley Movement Process

Political Survival in Pakistan Routledge Advances in South Asian Studies

Anas Malik, Xavier University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77924-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explains key political choices by leaders and challengers in Pakistan through the political survival mechanism and offers an explanation for continuing polity weakness in the country. Offering a framework that incorporates macro forces into micro-level strategic calculations by key agents, it fills a gap in the literature. The study applies to cross-national comparison in Islamic contexts, thus presenting a counterpoint to studies that focus on ideology.

CONTENTS 1. Political Survival and Extraction 2. Pakistan: A Weak State 3. Leadership and Extraction in Pakistan 4. Challengers in Weak States 5. Challengers in Pakistan 6. Implications for Theory and Cases 7. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

13

Sufism and Saint Veneration in Contemporary Bangladesh Routledge Advances in South Asian Studies

Hans Harder, Heidelberg University, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58170-7; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides a comprehensive study of Bengali Islam. Focusing on the Maijbhandari movement, which claims the status of the only Sufi order originated in Bengal and which has gained immense popularity in recent years, the book provides a comprehensive picture of contemporary Bengali Islam in the South Asian context. The author combines expertise in South Asian languages and literatures with ethnographic field work and theoretical formulations from cultural anthropology, Islamic studies, religious studies and other disciplines. Analysing the Maijbhandaris tradition of Bengali spiritual songs, one of the largest popular song traditions in Bengal, this book offers a solid discourse on the legitimacy of regional forms of Islam.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Structure and Religious Practice 3. Theological and Hagiological Writings 4. Hagiographies 5. Maijbhandari Songs 6. Songs in Contemporary Maijbhandari Interpretations 7. Maijbhandari Classifications, Classifying Maijbhandar 8. Conclusion: A Note on Bengali Islam

Urban Transformation in East Asia Routledge Contemporary Asia Series

Hyun Bang Shin, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46945-6; March 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores urban transformation in East Asia, focusing in particular on the rapid transformation of old and dilapidated neighbourhoods in East Asian cities. Drawing on detailed empirical fieldwork conducted in Seoul and Beijing, including case studies of redevelopment neighbourhoods and interviews with government officials, real estate developers and local residents, it explores the different approaches to urban transformation that have been adopted. It shows how despite social, economic and political differences between cities, urban transformation has come to depend heavily on the participation of real estate developers and property owners for their successful implementation. It describes how property-based interests have formed partnerships to revalue under-valued neighbourhoods and make way for higher priced dwellings and higher income residents, which in turn has left many low-income families facing the demolition of and displacement from their neighbourhoods. It assesses the reasons behind the rise of developer-led renewal, and considers the benefits and costs accruing to all the affected parties. It concludes by drawing implications for public policy, arguing that urban transformation has not had benign outcomes for all, and that stronger government intervention is necessary to safeguard the interests of existing residents in dilapidated neighbourhoods.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: urban transformation in East Asia 2. Urban regeneration and developer-led partnership 3. Urbanisation, urban housing and the evolution of renewal policies 4. Living conditions in neighbourhoods targeted for redevelopment 5. Real estate capital and its profiteering in neighbourhood redevelopment processes 6. Government intervention in redevelopment: driving neighbourhood changes 7. Redevelopment and residents: Constraints upon ‘decision-to-move’ 8. Redevelopment and residents: Housing experiences upon displacement 9. Residents and participation: limited opportunities 10. Conclusion: assessing developer-led partnership

Chinese Male Homosexualities Routledge Contemporary China Series

Travis S. K. Kong, University of Hong Kong PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45189-5; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book presents a groundbreaking exploration of masculinities and homosexualities amongst Chinese gay men. It provides a sociological account of masculinity, desire, sexuality, identity and citizenship in contemporary Chinese societies, and within the constellation of global culture. Kong reports the results of an extensive ethnographic study of contemporary Chinese gay men in a wide range of different locations including mainland China, Hong Kong and the Chinese overseas community in London, showing how Chinese gay men live their everyday lives. Relating Chinese male homosexuality to the extensive social and cultural theories on

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

14 gender, sexuality and the body, postcolonialism and globalisation, the book examines the idea of queer space and numerous "queer flows" – of capital, bodies, ideas, images, commodities – around the world. The book concludes that different gay male identities – such as the conspicuously consuming memba in Hong Kong, the urban tongzhi , "money boy" in China, and the feminised "golden boy" in London – emerge in different locations, and are all caught up in the transnational flow of queer cultures which are at once local and global.

CONTENTS Introduction: Bodies that Travel 1. Study of Chinese Male Homosexualities and Citizenship Part I: Hong Kong 2. Queers are ready!?

Sexual Citizenship and Tongzhi Movement 3. Memba Only: Consumer Citizenship and Cult Gay Masculinity 4. All about Family: Intimate Citizenship and Family Biopolitics Part II: London 5. Queer Disapora: Hong Kong Migrant Gay Men in London Part III: China 6. New New China, New New Tongzhi 7. Sex and Work in a Queer Time and Place Conclusion: Transnational Chinese Male Homosexualities

HIV/AIDS in China Routledge Contemporary China Series

Dylan Sutherland, University of Dublin, Trinity College, Ireland and Jennifer Hsu PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-41875-1; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Providing a comprehensive analysis of the most critical aspects of the current HIV/AIDS situation in China, this book links the epidemic to broader issues of economic and social development.

CONTENTS 1. Human Development in China 2. The Global, East Asian and Chinese HIV/AIDS Epidemics 3. Uneven Economic Development and the Epidemic 4. Migration and the Spread of HIV 5. Migration, Women and Commercial Sex Work (CSW) 6. The Demand Side: Men, CSW and Demography 7. Health Care and the Fight Against HIV 8. NGOs and the Fight Against HIV in China 9. Economic Impacts

Industrial Innovation in China Routledge Contemporary China Series

Edited by Denis Fred Simon, Pennsylvania State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77610-3; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides an in-depth analysis of industrial innovation in China, assessing the progress China has made in re-structuring and re-configuring its innovation systems in the context of the massive and multifaceted program of economic reform. Each chapter tackles a different aspect of industrial innovation, such as research and development (R&D), intellectual property, technological adaptation, and government policy. Some chapters adopt a comparative perspective, comparing the Chinese case with important economies such as Korea and India and the global economy more generally. It shows that the reform process has had a powerful impact on China’s industrial innovation, suggesting that a new system is emerging that is much more driven by market forces and has been heavily influenced by China’s growing interactions with the outside world. It argues that the launch of the Chinese government’s new Medium-to-Long-term Strategy & Technology Plan, 2006-2020 (MLP), represents an important demarcation point in the evolution of the Chinese national innovation system. The MLP promises to alter the prevailing trajectory of Chinese innovation in a fundamental way, putting the enterprise at centre stage in an effort to secure better linkages between those organisations that generate new ideas and those responsible for the commercialisation of these ideas. Finally, it addresses the crucial question of whether China has embarked on a path that will lead it to becoming a true technological superpower. Overall, this book puts forward a sophisticated, insightful, and realistic set of assessments about the capabilities of China’s industrial innovation, a crucial determining factor of China’s future economic performance.

CONTENTS Introduction Denis Simon 1. Collaborative Advantage and China’s Evolving Position in the Global Technology System Leonard Lynn 2. Government Policy and Industrial Innovation: The Political Economy of Technological Development in China Douglas Fuller 3.

Commercialization of R&D in China: The Ecology of the Industrial Innovation System Robert Sheldon 4. A Strategic Analysis of the Medium-to-Long Term Plan for S&T, 2006-2020 Guangling Xiao 5. Economic Openness and China’s Manufacturing Progress Thomas Rawski 6. Technological Adoption and Adaptation in an Open Market: The Case of China’s Magnesium Industry Michael Komesaroff 7. Institutions, Incentives, and Innovation: The Environment for Intellectual Property in China Andrew Mertha 8.

China’s Emerging Science and Engineering Talent Pool: A Quantitative and Qualitative Analysis Denis Simon/Cong Cao 9. India, China, and Globalized Innovation Adam Segal 10. A Korean Perspective on China’s Innovation System Yong June Kim 11. Foreign

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

15 Corporation R&D in China: Trends and Policy Issues Sylvia Schwaag-Serger 12. Beyond Technology: Defining the New Frontiers in China’s Innovation System Zhou Yuan 13. Whither China’s Industrial Innovation System: Some Thoughts and Conclusions Denis Simon

Innovation in China Routledge Contemporary China Series

Shang-Ling Jui PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 172pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56456-4; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A key question for China, which has for some time been a leading global manufacturing base, is whether China can progress from being a traditional centre of manufacturing to becoming a centre for innovation. In this book, Shang-Ling Jui focuses on China’s software industry and examines the complete innovation value chain of software in its key phases of innovation, standards definition, development and marketing. He argues that, except for software development, these key phases are of high added-value and that without adopting the concept of independent innovation as a guiding ideology, China’s software enterprises – like India’s – would have an uncertain future. In other words, the lack of core competence in the development of China’s software industry might restrain the industry from taking the leading position and drive it towards becoming no more than the software workshop of multinationals over the long term. Shang-Ling Jui contends that China’s software industry should and can possess its own complete innovation value chain. Having worked in China’s software industry for many years, the author provides an inside-out perspective – identifying the strengths and weaknesses of the industry and defining the challenges in China’s transition from "Made in China" to "Innovated in China."

CONTENTS 1. Twenty Years of Software Development in China 2. Software Industrialization and Globalization—Opportunities and Challenges for China 3. On the Road towards Innovated-in-China—Examples from SAP Labs China 4. From Made-in-China to Innovated-inChina—Which Microeconomic Factors Are Still Needed? 5. Factors Influencing the Transition—Education and Intellectual Property Protection

Looking for Work in Post-Socialist China Routledge Contemporary China Series

Feng Xu, University of Victoria, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55968-3; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Unemployment is one of the most politically explosive issues in China and has gained further prominence as a result of the present global financial crisis. The novelty, urgency, and complexity of Chinese unemployment have compelled the government to experiment with policy initiatives that originate in the West, initiatives such as training programmes, career and psychological counselling, a webbased national labour-market information network, and labour-market insurance, and also other employment-related initiatives such as using community (shequ) organizations as the base for new mechanisms of governance and informal job generation. This book examines these initiatives which represent China’s attempt to institutionalize, professionalize and humanize its approach to governance, drawing heavily on international norms and standards in employment regulation. Based on extensive original research including semi-structured interviews, the book argues that although the Chinese government is not a liberal democracy, it is increasingly using liberal techniques to govern. The book discusses the ways in which the government combines the new techniques with old campaign-style policy techniques, which not only makes the state’s power visible, but also allows it to claim credit for managing unemployment.

CONTENTS Introduction. Chapter 1 Unemployment and ‘Harmonious Society’. Chapter 2 International Standards in Cultivating Active Jobseekers. Chapter 3 Public Employment Agencies. Chapter 4 Urban Community Organizations/Shequ. Chapter 5 University Career Centres. Chapter 6 Temporary Staffing Agencies. Chapter 7 Laws and Numbers. Chapter 8 Periodic Campaigns. Conclusion.

Religion in Contemporary China Routledge Contemporary China Series

Edited by Adam Yuet Chau, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

16 HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45934-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION China had one of the richest and most diverse religious cultures in the world before the modernist transformations brought about by the Republican and Communist regimes, both of which had radical anti-traditionalist polices. The recent economic reforms and concurrent relaxation of religious polices have provided fertile ground for the revitalization of a wide range of religious practices including divination, ancestor worship, temple festivals, spirit mediumism, funeral rites, exorcism, pilgrimages and more. At the same time apparently new forms of religious practices have emerged, including lay Buddhist preachers, "Maoist shamans", and a bewildering number of new sects and schools. This book provides a wide-ranging and in-depth survey of contemporary religious practices in China. It examines the nature of contemporary practices, including formal and informal practices, mainstream religions such as Buddhism and Daoism, minority religions such as Roman Catholicism and "new" religions. It explores how this remarkable religious effervescence has come about, discusses which practices are revivals of older practices, which are new ones and which older practices have not been revived, and relates religious revitalization and innovation to larger issues of social and cultural continuity and change.

CONTENTS Introduction Adam Yuet Chau 1. Buddhism in the Reform Era: A Secularized Revival? JI Zhe 2. Giving Back: Morality Texts and the Re-Growth of Lay Buddhism Garesh Fisher 3. The Emerging Spirit-Medium Cults in Sishui Village, Hebei Der-ruey Yang 4. Daoist Temple Networks and Monks’ Wandering About Adeline Herrou 5. Temples as Enterprises Selina Chan and Graeme Lang 6. Building Temples across the Border: The Story of a Female Spirit Medium and Her Devotees Tik-sang Liu 7. Intertwined Fortunes: MusicMaking and Ritual Life in North China Stephen Jones 8. Rationalizing Re-Enchantment: Charisma, Affiliation and Organization in the Post-Mao Qigong Movement David Palmer 9. Global Modernity, Local Community, and Spiritual Power: Innovation and Tradition in the Catholic Church in Shanxi since 1979 Henrietta Harrison 10. Of Stones and Fonts: The Art and Politics of Inscribing and Reinscribing a Temple Adam Yuet Chau Conclusion

Trade Unions in China Routledge Contemporary China Series

Tim Pringle PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55958-4; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION China’s trade unions are at a turning point. The country’s embrace of globalisation and global integration which was demonstrated so vividly during the 2008 Olympics has produced domestic and external factors that are pushing the All China Federation of Trade Unions (ACFTU) into a decisive break with policies and practices inherited from the command economy. This book focuses on how the ACFTU is reforming under current conditions. It argues that it is the dependence of primary level trade unions on the employers, not acceptance of Party leadership, which is the main obstacle to effective union work and that the evolving labour unrest, as opposed to legal developments, is the main force driving trade union reform. While exploring the dominant direction of this reform, which has been to channel disputes into juridical forms of dispute resolution sponsored by the State, the book also highlights key examples of more innovative experiments in trade union work that represent a clear break with past practice and, crucially, have been recognised by both the union and Party leaderships as models for future trade union policy and practice.

CONTENTS Chapter One: The Return of ‘Labour-Capital Relations. Chapter Two: Labour Unrest: From Protests to Strikes. Chapter Three: Pioneering a Sector Level Collective Contract. Chapter Four: A Trade Union Rights Centre: Contending with Contention. Chapter Five Democracy and Dependency: Trade Union Elections. Conclusion.

Dealing with Disaster in Japan Routledge Contemporary Japan Series

Christopher Hood, Cardiff University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $160.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45662-3; June 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Just as the sinking of the Titanic has a large place in public consciousness in Britain and North America, so the crash of Japanese Airlines flight 123 has become part of Japanese collective memory. This crash, the world’s worst, on 12 August 1985, involved the largest loss of life in any air crash to date, with 520 people killed, people returning to their ancestral home for the Obon religious festival. This book tells the story of the crash, discusses the many controversial issues surrounding it, and considers why it has come to have such importance for the Japanese. It shows how the Japanese coped with the disaster – having to acknowledge shortcomings such

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

17 as the faulty repair which caused the crash and the fact that rescue services took such a long time to reach the remote crash site, how the bereaved dealt with their loss, how the media in Japan and in the wider world reported the disaster, and how the disaster is remembered and commemorated. Although concentrating on a single episode the book casts a great deal of light on Japanese attitudes and behaviour more generally.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. JL123 – From Take-off to Disaster 3. The Human Cost 4. The Media and JL123 5. JL123 as a Phenomenon 6.

Conclusions: Long Term Impact of JL123 Appendix

Chinese Migrants in Russia, Central Asia and Eastern Europe Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series

Edited by Felix Chang and Sunnie Rucker-Chang PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57874-5; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The countries of the former Soviet bloc – Russia, Eastern Europe and the countries of Central Asia – have a disproportionately high number of Chinese immigration. In many of these countries Chinese immigrants are engaged in entrepreneurial activities, often dominating key sectors of the economy. This book provides a comprehensive overview of Chinese migration to these countries. It explores how Chinese migration has come about, discusses the motivation of the migrants and examines the significant contribution the migrants are making. The book relates Chinese migration to wider issues of globalisation and international business, and assesses the idea that Chinese migrants seem to thrive in ravaged countries deemed too risky by institutional businesses.

CONTENTS Introduction Felix Chang Part 1: Chinese Entrepreneurs 1. The Chinese Experience in Former Yugoslavia Felix Chang 2. Merchant Competition in Bulgaria Anna Krasteva 3. Chinese Associations in the Czech Republic Marketa Moore 4. Cultural Responses to the Chinese in Former Yugoslavia Sunnie Rucker-Chang Part 2: Beyond ‘Entrepreneurs’ 5. The Chinese on Far East Russia Vladimir Datsyshen 6. The Chinese in Western Russia and Ukraine Victor Larin, Vladimir Datsyshen, Alexander Larin 7. Russian Law and Chinese Migration Alexander Larin Part 3: Beyond ‘Chinese’ 8. ‘Chinese’ Migration into Central Asia Elena Sadovskaya 9. Religious Expressions of ‘Chinese’ Migrants in Central Asia William Clark

Bangladesh Cinema and National Identity Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Zakir Hossain Raju, Monash University, Malaysia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $170.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46544-1; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyses the relationship between cinema and modernity in Bangladesh. It investigates the roles of a non-western ‘national’ film industry in Asia in constructing nationhood and identity within colonial and postcolonial predicaments. The political and economic forces and the cultural institutions that have been active in shaping Bangladesh cinema are presented. The author explores how the conflict among different social groups turned Bangladesh cinema into a site of contesting identities during the twentieth century and beyond. In particular, he illustrates the connections between film production and reception in Bangladesh and a variety of nationalist constructions of Bengali Muslim identity. Drawing on the idea of cinema as public sphere and the postcolonial notion of formation of the ‘Bangladesh’ nation, interactions between cinema and middle-class Bengali Muslims in different social and political matrices are analysed. It is then argued that the development of western-educated Bengali-Muslim middle classes and their search for a distinct cultural identity affected the development of cinema as a cultural institution in postcolonial East Pakistan and Bangladesh.

This book, the first major academic study on this large and vibrant national cinema, demonstrates that Bangladesh national cinema worked as different ‘public spheres’ for different ‘publics’ throughout the twentieth century. It fills a gap in Global Film and Media Studies as well as in South Asian Studies.

CONTENTS 1. Methods in Film Historiography 2. National Cinema and Non-Western Modernity: Framework to Study Bangladesh Cinema 3.

National Cinema Study and Beginning of/in Bangladesh Film History 4. Cinema and Cultural Modernity in Colonial Bengal 5. Film Industry and Bengali-Muslim Modernity in Postcolonial East Pakistan and Bangladesh 6. Film as Popular Culture in between Nationstate and Market Forces in Contemporary Bangladesh 7. Cultural Modernity and Bangladeshi Art Cinemas in National and Global Stage

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

18

Bengali Cinema Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Sharmistha Gooptu, South Asia Research Foundation (SARF), India PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57006-0; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is the first comprehensive historical work on Bengali cinema. It covers the years spanning cinema’s emergence as a popular form in Bengal in the first half of the twentieth century, studies the main genres and trends produced by this cinema, and leads up to Bengali cinema’s last phase of transition in the 1980s, which produced its contemporary avatar. Arguing that Bengali cinema has been a key economic and social institution, which must be considered for what it brings to bear upon our existing sense of Bengali and Indian history, the author highlights that the Bengali filmic imaginary existed over and above the imaginary of the Indian nation. This book constructs a definitive history of Bengali cinema, and makes a case for this history as positing an alternative understanding to the currently influential notion of the Hindi film as the ‘Indian’ or ‘national’ cinema. It argues that the Bengali cinema presents a history which brings to the fore the deeply contested terrain of ‘national’ cinema, as also its ultimate subversion, and posits the creation of an “alternative imaginary” of the Bengali film. The case of the Bengali cinema demonstrates the emergence of a public domain that set up a definitive discourse of difference with respect to the “all-India” Hindi film (popularly classified as Bollywood cinema), thus preempting, consciously, its own subsumption within the more pervasive culture of the Bombay Hindi cinema. While Bengali cinema could not ultimately compete with the “all-India” Hindi film, it was able to create a domain which steadfastly resisted the construction of India as a Hindi-nation.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Consumers, Entrepreneurs, Critics and Commentators: The Rise of a Film Culture in Bengal 3. Bengal and a National Cinema: New Theatres Ltd., 1931-1941 4. The Transition to a Regional Cinema, 1941-1951 5. Bengali Love-Stories: The World of Uttam-Suchitra, 1953-1961 6, Satyajit Ray and the Bengali Cinema, 1955-1961 7. Mainstream and Parallel Cinemas, 19611980 8. Changing Contexts, New Texts: the post-1980 Bengali cinema 9. Epilogue

The Biography of Benazir Bhutto Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Omar Noman, UNDP Regional Centre, Sri Lanka PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48094-9; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores the life of Benazir Bhutto, looking at how the situation in Pakistan affected her success as a politician and to what extent she contributed to her downfall.

CONTENTS 1. "If I am assassinated…" 2. Exile 3. Office without Power 4. Exile II 5. Office without Power II 6. Exile III 7. The Assassination

Bollywood Travels Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Rajinder Dudrah, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-44740-9; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers a cultural and social analysis of contemporary Bollywood films over the past decade. Using the author’s analysis of a sociological imagination, it is developed here as one that is concerned with the private and public issues of the day through the silver screen and popular cultures of Bollywood cinema. He engages with the common assumptions about everyday South Asian and diasporic South Asian cultures and representations that are given expression in and through Bollywood cinema. By interrogating these issues further, the ideas of nation, race, religion, gender and sexuality, cinema and public spaces, diaspora and globalization are explored. Providing a socio-cultural commentary on the contemporary workings of popular Hindi cinema as an industry, this book is a continuation of the critical tradition. It presents aesthetic readings of readily available contemporary films that are indicative of select key films of the last ten years and their emerging trends in dealing with issues of representation. Drawing on interdisciplinary schools of thought and modes of close textual analysis across film and media studies, cultural studies, and sociology, it addresses and analyzes

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

19 key Bollywood films and filmmakers that have emerged from India and fostered a relationship with Bollywood audiences around the globe in the contemporary moment.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Global Bollywood 2. The Transnational Stars of Hindi Cinema 3. The Homeland and the Diaspora 4. More Masala: Action Hero Meets Sci-Fi in Krrish 5. Bollywood’s Dark Side: The Films of Ram Gopal Varma 6. Borders and Border Crossings in Main Hoon Na and Veer Zaara 7. Gender and Sexuality: Bollywood Ish-tyle. Conclusion

Conflict and Peacebuilding in Sri Lanka Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Edited by Jonathan Goodhand, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, UK, Jonathan Spencer, University of Edinburgh, UK and Benedikt Korf, University of Zurich - Irchel, Switzerland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46604-2; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book brings together a unique range of perspectives on the Sri Lankan peace process from 2001-2006, a period that has seen the rise and fall of an attempt to bring a protracted violent conflict to a peaceful resolution. A ceasefire agreement, signed in February 2002, was followed by six rounds of peace talks. But growing political violence, disagreements over core issues and a fragmentation of the constituencies of the key parties led to the break down of the peace process; there has now been a shift from the ‘no-war, nopeace’ hiatus of the peace negotiations towards a major escalation of fighting. The contributions are based upon extensive field research and written by leading Sri Lankan and international researchers and practitioners. Applying a political economy framework and by the concept of ‘liberal peacebuilding’, the structures and dynamics of conflict and the interaction and role of international actors are analysed. The lessons drawn from the Sri Lankan case have important implications in the context of wider debates on the ‘liberal peace’ and post conflict peacebuilding – particularly as these debates have largely been shaped by the ‘high profile’ cases such as Kosovo, Afghanistan and Iraq. Therefore this book will be of interest not only to Sri Lanka specialists but also to the wider academic and policy/practitioner audience.

CONTENTS Setting the Scene 1. Introduction Goodhand, Korf and Spencer 2. Waiting for Godot? The Sri Lankan Peace Process from a Systemic Perspective Ropers and Uyangoda Security Dynamics 3. Regional Security Dynamics and the Role of India Keethaponcalan 4.

Domestic Security and the "Shadow War" C. Smith Political Dynamics 5. Nationalist Politics of the South D. Rampton and A.Welikala 6. Politics of the North-East L. Philipson and Y. Thangarajah 7. A Voice in the Peace Process? Political Spaces of Muslims N. Lewera and Ismail Socio-Economic Dynamics 8. The Economic Dimension of the Peace Process Bastian 9. Aiding Peace? An Insider’s View of Donor Support for the Peace Process Mulakala and Burke 10. Muddling the Peace Process? PostTsunami Response and Conflict Dynamics Frerks and Klem 11. Civil Society and the Peace Process Sarravanmuttu 12. Conclusions and Policy Implications Goodhand, Korf and Spencer

Corporate Social Responsibility in India Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Bidyut Chakrabarty, Delhi University, India PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57503-4; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) has attracted global attention. Presenting the first analysis of CSR in India, this book shows the unique roots of the concept in India: Gandhi’s philosophical moorings that inform India’s approach to CSR, the role of civil society in setting an agenda championing the rights of the stakeholders and not merely shareholders which was the case in the past and the role of the government in grooming the Indian business to be sensitive of its social concerns. Drawing on rich empirical data, the author shows that CSR in India cannot be conceptualized in ethnocentric terms. Arguing that it is not about ‘the typical Indianness’ of the articulation, he emphasizes the point that CSR in India needs to be conceptualized in a wider perspective by taking into account its philosophical roots with reference to the prevalent socio-economic and political context. The book is a valuable contribution to the literature on CSR, and as such will be of interest to scholars of Asian Studies, business and development studies.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Ethics and Market in the Context of Globalization 3. Trusteeship: Inputs from Gandhi and Gandhians 4. The Empirical Context of CSR in Post-Independent India 5. CSR and Public-Partnership in India 6. CSR in India (case studies) 7.

Dynamics of CSR in Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) 8. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

20

The Culturalization of Caste in India Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Balmurli Natrajan, William Paterson University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77997-5; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION An ethnic specter of caste haunts India wherein caste groups ensure their durability in an era of multiculturalism by officially representing caste as cultural difference or ethnicity rather than unequal descent-based relations. Challenging dominant social theories of caste, this book addresses questions of how caste survives the system that gave rise to it and adapts to new demands of capitalism and democracy. Based on original fieldwork among an artisanal caste in central India, the author shows how the terrain of culture captured by a new grammar of caste revitalizes castes as cultural communities so that the culture of a caste is produced, organized and naturalized in the process of transforming jati (fetishized blood and kinship) into samaj (fetishized culture). Castes are shown to not be homogenous cultural wholes but sites of hegemony where class, gender and hierarchy overdetermine the meanings and materiality of caste. Arguing that there now exists a new casteism in India paralleling a new racism built less on biology and descent and more on purported cultural differences and their rights to exist, the author locates an incipient multiculturalism of castes in India which emerges within the cultural logic of globalization and governance of difference. This book is an extended critique and a search for an alternative view of caste and anti-casteist politics.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Artisans Part 1: Producing Identities 3. Culture 4. Community Part 2: Reproducing Inequalities 5.

Overdetermination 6. Multiculturalism

Development, Democracy and the State Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Edited by Ravi Raman, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 264pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54917-2; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Indian state of Kerala is known for its high social model of development and social democratic governance. This book presents the most comprehensive analysis of the Kerala Model of Social Development to date. The model has often been identified as one worth emulating because it is seen to have taken the state to the zenith of human development and democratic governance. Using an interdisciplinary approach, the book sheds new light on the paradoxes of the Indian state and its model of economic development. The book provides a consolidated exploration and critique of the Kerala model, which usually has been portrayed as linear with the grand narrative of progress, development and democracy. Chapters discuss the past and present dimensions of the Kerala experience from a historical and political-economic perspective, thus providing a fresh understanding of the emerging concerns in the state and the construction of an ethically viable development agenda, eschewing the scourge of social inequity. A significant contribution to the literature on development, democracy and the state, it analyses the complex interconnectedness of the various political-economic and socio-cultural domains involved in these experiences.

CONTENTS 1. Kerala Model: Situating the Critique K. Ravi Raman Part 1: Caste, Religion and Social Development 2. 'Public Action' Reconsidered: The Dalit and the Brahmin in the Kerala Model of Development K.T. Rammohan 3. 'Community' as De-Imagining Nation: Relocating Narayana Guru and Ezhava Movement in Kerala J. Reghu 4. Negotiating Caste, Religion and Nation: Ezhava Community in Flux 1917-24 M.M. Khan Part 2: The Kerala Model: Contemporary Political Economy 5. The Conjuncture of 'Late Socialism' in Kerala: Towards a Preliminary Theorization Nissim Mannathukkaren 6. Reforms, Capabilities and the Kerala Model M.A.Oommen 7. Revisiting the Kerala Model – Questioning Good Health at Low Cost? Caroline Wilson 8. Education in Kerala: A Dalit Critique Roshni P. 9. Globalisation is Ruining Us: Neoliberal Capitalism, Islamism and Business in Kozhikode (Calicut), South India Filippo Osella and Caroline Osella Part 3: Gender, Space and Identities 10. Mobility Towards Work and Politics for Women in Kerala State, India: A View from the Histories of Gender and Space Devika J. 11. A Gender Critique of Social Development in Kerala Praveena Kodoth 12. Trajectories of Change: Gendered Technologies and Perspectives Shoba Arun, T.G. Arun and Richard Heeks Part 4: New Social Movements: Political and Cultural Perspectives 13. Postdevelopment Social Movements: Waves of “Political Indigenism” K. Ravi Raman 14. Social Space, Civil Society and Transformative Politics of New Social Movements in Kerala T.T. Sreekumar 15. Contemporary Adivasi Activism and the Contested Legacy of the Kerala Model of Development Luisa Steur

The Economics of Urban Migration in India Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Vegard Iversen, University of Manchester, UK

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

21 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-41539-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Presenting new research on rural-urban migration in developing countries, this book combines novel economic theories with empirics, and focuses on the social dimensions of such movement. Centering on the movement from villages to cities in South Asia, and in India in particular, the book argues the case for more nuanced theories and empirical inquiries informed by novel theoretical perspectives, taking into account social structure and pluralistic social relations.

CONTENTS 1. Background, Motivation and Literature Review 2. Social Boundaries in Migration Events: The Role of Kin, Caste and Religion 3.

Segmentation and Social Network Multipliers in Rural Urban Migration 4. Networks in the Traditional Economy: Empirics 5.

Concluding Remarks

Education and Inequality in India Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Manabi Majumdar, Centre for Studies in Social Sciences, Calcutta, India and Jos Mooij, Institute of Social Studies, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49534-9; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book focuses on primary education in India and interrogates what schooling means and does to children from weaker sections of Indian society and which values underpin the school system. It examines whether the concept of `education for all’ is just a mechanically conceived policy target to chasing enrolment and attendance or whether it a larger social goal and a deeper political statement about the need for attacking entrenched social inequalities, and above all an affirmation of the idea that schooling has a liberating potential. Drawing on original data collected in the two states of Andhra Pradesh and West Bengal, the authors first present the multiple ways in which social class impinges on the educational system, educational processes and educational outcomes. In the second part of the book, issues around autonomy and accountability are explored via an analysis of the position of teachers within the educational hierarchy, and by looking at the various possibilities of making teachers accountable. The last part centres on the learning process, with a particular focus on the classroom. The conclusion includes recommendations that are related to the necessity for a larger debate and normative framework, which includes private schools as possible partners in the pursuing of a public good for which a public entity should take some responsibility, and in conjuncture to that, the necessity to move from government action and responsibilities to a broader concept of public action.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Social Class in Education 2. Teachers 3. Parents 4. Schools and the Educational System Part 2: Autonomy and Accountability 5. Centralization and Decentralization 6. Participation and Accountability Part 3: Quality and Educational Regimes 7.

The Learning Process 8. Textbooks and Curriculum 9. Conclusion

The Labour Movement in the Global South Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Janaka Sumithra Biyanwila, University of Western Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58080-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Workers and trade unions in the global South, or the poorer economies made up of Asian, African and Latino workers, are faced with a range of challenges. The book explains why unions in Sri Lanka illustrate a much broader phenomenon of the global South in general, where most workers operate outside the terrain of formal labour markets. The author identifies key theoretical dimensions taken by unions and labour groupings, and then provides three case studies – nurses, tea plantation workers, garment factory workers that show how these dimensions operate in practice. The country the book examines, Sri Lanka, despite the lack of scholarly attention it deserves, is very much in the news as a potential tourist destination or another Southern state entrenched in ethnic violence and human rights violations. The book shows the roots of those conflicts not just in the policies adopted by the state and those with power, but also in the actions taken and not taken by oppositional groups, particularly by trade unions. The book is based on extensive original research, covering roughly the last three decade of ‘free’ market policies, including analyses of events within the past year. By connecting theory closely with evidence, the book illustrates how the empowerment of workers emerges from a self-transformation of unions, with a global sense of local places.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

22 CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. History of Unions in Sri Lanka : The Colonial State and Political Unionism 3. Trade Unions, Neo-liberalism and Ethno-nationalism: "Motherland First, Workplace Second" 4. Nurses’ and a Monk: Limits of Economic Unionism 5. Plantation Workers and Anti-Tamil Violence: Struggles of Political Unionism 6. Free Trade Zone Workers and Alliances : Building a Movement Unionism 7. Conclusion: Renewing Movement Politics and Global Labour Solidarity

Microcredit and Women's Empowerment Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Aminul Faraizi, Jim McAllister, both of CQUniversity Australia and Taskinur Rahman, Assistance for Social Organization and Development (ASOD), Bangladesh PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58490-6; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book investigates the claims of the success of microcredit, as well as critiques of it in the context of women’s empowerment.

Using the case study of Bangladesh and based on a long term participatory observation method, the book establishes that the success stories of the microcredit programme are blown out of proportion. The dynamics of collective responsibility for repayment of loans by a group of women borrowers – usually seen to be a tool for success of microcredit – is in fact no less repressive than traditional debt collectors. Microcredit does produce a kind of disciplined self, but recipients also employ their own agency in resisting this disciplinary power. Results also show that the neoliberal policy of privatisation of welfare enables capitalism to extend its control to the poorest, most deprived of the world without breaking down the cultural barriers which keep women subjugated. This book denies the universal applicability of the microcredit model to the causes and alleviation of the conditions of the poor, and, as it represents an aid practitioner working within Bangladesh questioning that universal applicability, it stands to make a worthwhile contribution to development debates, challenging adherents to more closely specify those conditions under which microcredit does indeed have validity.

CONTENTS 1. The Empowerment Project 2. Microcredit as Empowerment Strategy 3. Unpacking Microcredit Discourses 4. Implanting Microcredit: BRAC and the Grameen Bank 5. Envisioning Microcredit 6. The False Promise: Microcredit and Poor Womens' Empowerment

Mohajir Militancy in Pakistan Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Nichola Khan, University of Brighton, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55490-9; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Synthesizing political, anthropological and psychological perspectives, this book addresses the everyday causes and appeal of longterm involvement in extreme political violence in urban Pakistan. Taking Pakistan’s ethno nationalist Mohajir party, the Muttahida Qaumi Movement (MQM) as a case study, it explores how certain men from the ethnic community of Mohajirs are recruited to the roles and statuses of political killers, and sustain violence as a primary social identity and lifestyle over a period of some years. By drawing on detailed fieldwork in areas involved in the Karachi conflict, the author contributes to understandings of violence, tracing the development of violent aspects of Mohajir nationalism via an exploration of political and cultural contexts of Pakistan’s history, and highlighting the repetitive homology of the conflict with the earlier violence of Partition. Through a local comparison of ethnic and religious militancy she also updates the current situation of social and cultural change in Karachi, which is dominantly framed in terms of Islamist radicalization and modernization. In her examination, governance and civil society issues are integrated with the political and psychological dimensions of mobilization processes and violence at micro-, meso- and macro- levels. This book injects a critical and innovative voice into the ongoing debates about the nature and meaning of radicalization and violence, as well as the specific implications it has for similar, contemporary conflicts in Pakistan and the developing world.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Post-Partition History of the Mohajirs in Sindh 3. The Transformation 4. Partition Reprised: Grievance, Unification and Violence 5. Women in the Homeland 6. Jamaat E Islami and the Ijt in Liaquatabad 7. Conclusion

National Identities in Pakistan Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

23 Cara Cilano, University of North Carolina Wilmington, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77958-6; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In 1971, a war which took place in Pakistan that resulted in the establishment of two separate countries; East Pakistan became Bangladesh, leaving the remaining four western provinces to comprise a truncated Pakistan. This book examines how literature by those who remained Pakistanis acts as a cultural response to the threat the war posed to a nationalist identity. It provides an analysis of the writing by Pakistani authors in their attempt to deal with the radical shock of the war and shows how fiction about the war helps readers imagine what the paring down of the country means for any abiding articulation of a Pakistani group identification. The author discusses English-and Urdu-language fictions in the context of the historical debate about Pakistani nationalism, including how such nationalism informs literary culture, and in the contemporary interest in official apologies for the past. The author organises the literary analysis around four key issues: the domestic sphere and the family; the territorial limits of citizenship; multiculturalism, class, and nationalist history; and diasporic imaginings of the nation. These issues resonate across the fictions in both languages and the author's analysis of them traces how these works grapple with changing notions of what it means to be Pakistani after the civil war and offers an interesting discussion to studies in South Asia.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: The 'Deep Wounds' of Nations 2. 'It is Impossible to Assess Precisely Where the Truth Lies': The Diffusion of Authority in The Report of the Hamoodur Rehan Commission 3. 'Freeing the Outlook of Man from Its Geographical Limitations': Nationalism, History, and Literature in Pakistan 4. Domestic Violence: At Home in the Nation 5. Eternally Displaced Persons: Inside the Borders, Outside the Nation 6. Unfinished Business: Designs Against the Nation 7. Distant Reflections, Distinct Refractions: Diaspora and the Nation 8. Coda: Neighbourhood Watch: The 1971 Pakistani War in English-Language Fictions from Bangladesh and the Indian Diaspora

Nationalism and Ethnic Conflict Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Edited by Mahendra Lawoti, Western Michigan University, USA and Susan Hangen, Ramapo College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-78097-1; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Ethnic and nationalist movements surged forward in Nepal after the restoration of democracy in 1990, surprising observers who believed that ethnic harmony prevailed in the country. After the turn of the century, these movements entered a new phase with some groups launching armed rebellions and demanding separate territories. Ethnic mobilization and conflict is threatening to disrupt the transition that began with the comprehensive peace agreement reached between the government and the Maoist rebels in November 2006. In this context, this book analyses the rise in ethnic mobilization, the dynamics and trajectories of these movements, and their consequences for Nepal. Contributions offer cultural, political and sociological approaches to understanding the roots of ethnopolitical mobilization and conflicts between diverse groups, the reasons for the increase in mobilization and violent activities, and the political and social effects of these movements. For the first time, the book addresses the question of nationalism in Nepal by bringing together empirical contributions on key issues in identity production in a comparative perspective. It is an influential volume in South Asian studies and studies of nationalism and identity more broadly.

CONTENTS Part 1: Issues, Theories and Context 1. Ethnic Groups and Mobilization: Theory and Reality in Nepal Mahendra Lawoti and Susan I Hangen 2. Politics, Economy and Culture: Capitalism, Ethnicity, and the Rising Wave of Himalayan Communism in Nepal Mallika Shakya Part 2: Creating Identities and Forming Nations 3. The National Muslim Forum Nepal and a Nepali Muslim ‘Nation’ Megan Adamson Sijapati 4. Many Names for Mother: The Ethno-linguistic Politics of Deafness in Nepal Erika Hoffmann-Dilloway 5.

Problems of Identity for Dalits in Nepal’s Nationalist Project Steven Folmar 6. This Land is Made out of our Ancestors' Sweat and Labor: Dhimals' Indigenism and Cultural Politics of 'Place Making' in the Eastern Plains of Nepal Janak Rai Part 3: Rising Mobilization and Conflict 7. The Changing Roles of Ethnic Parties Susan I Hangen 8. Nepal’s Madhesi Movement Pramod Kantha 9.

The Muslim Madhesis: Coexistence of Religion and Ethnicity? Mollica Dastider 10. Rising Ethnic Mobilization and Conflict in Nepal Mahendra Lawoti Part 4: Future Prospects 11. Ethno-demographic and Linguistic Federalism for Nepal Bal Krishna Mabuhang 12.

Ethnic Mobilization and Future Political Challenges Mahendra Lawoti and Susan Hangen

Nationbuilding, Gender and War Crimes in South Asia Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Bina D’Costa, Australian National University

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

24 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56566-0; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book gives a detailed historical analysis of nationbuilding processes and how these are closely linked to statebuilding and to issues of war crime, gender and sexuality, and marginalization of minority groups. With a focus on the Indian subcontinent, the author demonstrates how the state itself is involved in the construction of a gendered identity, and how control of women and their sexuality is central to the nationbuilding project. She applies a critical feminist approach to two major conflicts in the Indian subcontinent - the Partition of India in 1947 and the Liberation War of Bangladesh in 1971 – and offers suggestions for addressing historical injustices and war crimes in the context of modern Bangladesh. Addressing how the social and political elites were able to construct and legitimize a history of the state that ignored these issues, the author suggests a critical re-examination of the history of the creation of Bangladesh which takes into account the rise of the Islamic right and their involvement in war crimes. Looking at the impact that notions of nation-state and nationalism have on women from a critical feminist perspective, the book will be an important addition to the literature on gender studies, international relations and South Asian politics.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Politics of Nationalism and Nationbuilding 2. 1947: From Partition to Creation 3. 1971: Politics of Silence, or Refusal to Remember? 4. Gendered Nationbuilding 5. Frozen in Time? War Crimes, Justice and Political Forgiveness 6. Partnership with Transnational Networks for Gender-Sensitive Justice Mechanism. Conclusion

Nation, Constitutionalism and Buddhism in Sri Lanka Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Roshan de Silva Wijeyeratne, Griffith Law School, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46266-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers a new perspective on contemporary debates about nationalism in South Asia in general and Sri Lanka in particular.

The price of that nationalism in Sri Lanka is the current agonizing split between Sinhalese and Tamil. The central focus here is the ‘capture’ of Buddhism by militant Sinhalese nationalism in the colonial and postcolonial periods and the framing of subsequent key constitutional legal moments. This is the first study that combines the dynamics of constitutionalism with the orbit of historical, political and anthropological scholarship on the cosmology of Sinhalese Buddhism and its relation to Sinhalese Buddhist nationalism.

It explores four cases of legal-constitutional moments and offers a unique contribution to the politics and history of devolution in Sri Lanka. A timely and scholarly intervention given the intensification of Sri Lanka’s civil war since the election in 2005 of President Mahinda Rajapakse on an overtly ultra nationalist Sinhalese Buddhist platform, this book will be of interest to scholars of South Asian Studies, anthropology, sociology, ethnicity and political science.

CONTENTS Introduction: Sri Lankan Nationalism and the Presence of the Past 1. The History of State Formation and the Crisis of Ethnicity in Sri Lanka 2. The Cosmology of Buddhism, the Pali Chronicles and the Ontology of Evil 3. Textual Practices, Sinhalese Buddhist Consciousness and Dissonance 4. Galactic Polities and the Decentralization of Power 5. The Modernisation of Sinhalese Buddhist Consciousness in the Late Colonial and Postcolonial Period 6. Citizenship and the Approach of the Other 7. Language and EthnoLinguistic Nationalism 8. Cosmology, Constitutionalism and the Tamil as Other 9. Decentralization, Federalism and the Cosmology of Buddhism. Conclusion: The Buddha does not have to Return to the Centre

Political Islam and Governance in Bangladesh Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Edited by Ali Riaz, Illinois State University, USA and Christine Fair, RAND Corporation, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57673-4; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The past decade has seen a marked policy focus upon Bangladesh, home to nearly 150 million Muslims; it has attracted the attention of the world due to weak governance and the rising tide of Islamist violence. This book provides a broad-ranging analysis of the growth and impact of "political Islam" in Bangladesh, and reactions to it. Grounded in empirical data, experts on Bangladesh examine the changing character of Bangladeshi politics since 1971, with a particular focus on the convergence of governance, Islamism and militancy. They examine the impacts of Islamist politics on education, popular culture and civil society, and the regional and extraregional connections of the Bangladeshi Islamist groups. Bringing together journalists and academics - all of whom have different professional and methodological backgrounds and field experiences which impact upon these issues from different vantage

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

25 points - the book assesses Bangladesh’s own prospects for internal stability as well as its wider impact upon South Asian security. It argues that the political environment of Bangladesh, the appeal of Islamist ideology to the general masses and the dynamic adaptability of Islamist organizations all demonstrate that Bangladesh will continue to focus the attention of policy makers and analysts alike. This is a timely, incisive and original explanation of the rise of political Islam and Islamic militancy in Bangladesh.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Political Culture in Contemporary Bangladesh: Histories, Ruptures and Contradictions 2. Political Violence in Bangladesh 3. Who are the Islamists? 4. Who are the Militants? 5. Bangladeshi Civil Society and Islamist Politics 6. Islamist Politics and Education 7. Islamist Politics and Popular Culture 8. Regional and Extraregional Dimensions

The State in India after Liberalization Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Edited by Akhil Gupta, University of California, USA and Kalyanakrishnan Sivaramakrishnan, Yale University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77553-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book assesses the impact of liberalization on practices of government and relations between state and society. It is clear that liberalization as state policy has complex forms of regulation and deregulation inbuilt, and these policies have resulted in dramatic increases in productivity and economic wealth but also generated spectacular new forms of inequality between social groups, regions, and sectors. Through a detailed examination of the Indian state, the contributors - all experts in their respective fields - explore questions such as: Have the new inequalities resulted in greater social unrest and violence? How has the meaning of citizenship changed? What will the long-term effects of regional economic imbalances be on migration, employment, and social welfare? Will increasing federalism result in new problems? Will smaller governments be more effective in providing basic necessities such as clothing, housing, food, water, and sanitation to citizens? What does liberalization mean to Indians in cities and villages, in small towns, and metropolises, in poor, middle class, or wealthy homes? Are concepts like social capital, decentralization, private enterprise, and grass-roots globalization effective in analyzing the post-liberalization state, or are new concepts needed? By focusing on what specifically has changed about the state after liberalization in India, this volume will shed light on comparative questions about the process of neoliberal restructuring across the world. As such, it will be of interest to scholars of a variety of disciplines, including sociology, anthropology, political science, geography, international studies, public policy, environmental studies and economics.

CONTENTS Introduction: The State in India After Liberalization Part 1: The Indian State as Moral and Political Economy 1. On the Enchantment of the State 2. An Institutional Perspective on the Post-liberalization State in India Part 2: Citizens, Sociality, and Association 3. States of Empowerment 4. ‘New Politics’ and the Governmentality of the Post-liberalization State in India: An Ethnographic Perspective Part 3: Liberalization, the State, and the Experience of Poverty 5. Poverty Knowledge and Poverty Action in India 6. ‘Money Itself Discriminates’: Obstetric Crises in the Time of Liberalization Part 4: Law, Identity, and Rights 7. Normative Vision, Cultural Accommodation and Muslim Law Reform in India 8. The Rule of Law and the Rule of Property: Law-Struggles and the Neo-Liberal State in India Part 5: Enterprising Citizens 9. The Terms of Trade: Competition and Cooperation in Neoliberal North India 10.

Becoming Entrepreneurial Subjects: Neoliberalism and Media

Tsunami Recovery in Sri Lanka Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Edited by Dennis B. McGilvray, University of Colorado at Boulder, USA and Michele R. Gamburd, Portland State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77877-0; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Indian Ocean Tsunami, which devastated 70 percent of Sri Lanka’s coastline and killed an estimated 35,000 people, was remarkable both for the magnitude of the disaster and for the unprecedented scale of the relief and recovery operations mounted by national and international agencies. The reconstruction process was soon hampered by political patronage, by the competing efforts of hundreds of foreign humanitarian organizations, and by the ongoing civil war. The book is framed within this larger political and social context, offering descriptions and comparisons between two regions (southwest vs. eastern coast) and four ethnic communities (Sinhalese, Tamils, Muslims, and Burghers) to illustrate how disaster relief unfolded in a culturally pluralistic political landscape.

Approaching the issue from four disciplinary perspectives - anthropology, demography, political science, and disaster studies chapters by experts in the field analyse regional and ethnic patterns of post-tsunami reconstruction according to different sectors of Sri Lankan society. Demonstrating the key importance of comprehending the local cultural contexts of disaster recovery processes, the book is a timely and useful contribution to the existing literature.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

26 CONTENTS Part 1: Overview and Context 1. Introduction Michele R. Gamburd and Dennis B. McGilvray 2. Building the Conflict Back Better: The Politics of Tsunami Relief and Reconstruction in Sri Lanka Alan Keenan 3. Conflict, Coastal Vulnerability, and Resiliency in Tsunami-Affected Communities Randall Kuhn Part 2: Ethnographic Materials 4. The Golden Wave: Discourses on the Equitable Distribution of Tsunami Aid on Sri Lanka’s Southwest Coast Michele R. Gamburd 5. The Sea Goddess and the Fishermen: Religion and Recovery in Navalady, Sri Lanka Patricia Lawrence 6. Dreaming of Dowry: Post-Tsunami Housing Strategies in Eastern Sri Lanka Dennis B. McGilvray and Patricia Lawrence Part 3: Disaster Studies 7. Actors in a Masala Movie: Fieldnotes on the NGO Tsunami Response in Eastern Sri Lanka Timmo Gaasbeek 8. Principles Ignored and Lessons Unlearned: A Disaster Studies Perspective on the Tsunami Experience in Sri Lanka Georg E. Frerks 9. Conclusion Michele R. Gamburd and Dennis B. McGilvray

Environmental Cooperation in Southeast Asia Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series

Paruedee Nguitragool, Albert-Ludwigs-Universität Freiburg, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58214-8; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyzes environmental cooperation in Southeast Asia from an international regime perspective. It examines the issue and response to the haze, the sickening and deadly cloud of smoky pollution caused by widespread burning of land and forests in Indonesia, which has posed one of the most challenging environmental threats to the ten countries of the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN). Tracing the development of regional cooperation on the haze and evaluates the effectiveness of the cooperation, the author argues that the haze crisis, combined with economic crisis of 1997, has profoundly challenged the ASEAN modus operandi - characterized by the ASEAN way of diplomacy and the norms of non-intervention/non-interference - and resulted in ASEAN’s efforts to establish an environmental regime to cope with environmental challenges. Nested in ASEAN’s institutions as well as international laws, the emerging ASEAN haze regime is a unique case study of a regional environmental institution in a multilevelled global environmental governance. It links local problems such as poverty, democratization, land rights, conflicts and forest fires to the regional and global problems such as the haze, biodiversity depletion and climate change. Based on in-depth original research, the author integrates this case study in international relations, political science, and compariative political analysis literatures and contributes to a better understanding of processes within the regional organization.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. ASEAN Regionalism and the Politics of the Environment 3. Rise of a Regime 4. Region on Fire 5. Issue Linkages 6.

Effects of Cooperation 7. Conclusions

Gender and Transitional Justice Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series

Susan Harris Rimmer, Australian National University PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 242pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56118-1; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Gender and Transitional Justice provides the first comprehensive feminist analysis of the role of international law in formal transitional justice mechanisms. Using East Timor as a case study, it offers reflections on transitional justice administered by a UN transitional administration. Often presented as a UN success story, the author demonstrates that, in spite of women and children’s rights programmes of the UN and other donors, justice for women has deteriorated in post-conflict Timor, and violence has remained a constant in their lives. This book provides a gendered analysis of transitional justice as a discipline. It is also one of the first studies to offer a comprehensive case study of how women engaged in the whole range of transitional mechanisms in a post-conflict state, i.e. domestic trials, internationalised trials and truth commissions. The book reveals the political dynamics in a post-conflict setting around gender and questions of justice, and reframes of the meanings of success and failure of international interventions in the light of them.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: A luta continua! (The fight continues!) 2. Sexing the Subject of Transitional Justice 3. Cecelia Soares Recalls: East Timor as a Case Study 4. Beloved Madam: The Indonesian ad hoc Human Rights Court 5. Wearing his Jacket: The Serious Crimes Process 6. Women Cut in Half: The Commission for Reception, Truth Seeking and Reconciliation and the limits of restorative justice 7. Conclusion: 'Operation Love' Appendices Bibliography

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

27

Masculinities in Southeast Asia Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series

Edited by Michele Ford, University of Sydney, Australia and Lenore Lyons, University of Wollongong, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48223-3; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book brings together extensive recent innovative research on the study of men and masculinities in Southeast Asia. Drawing on rich ethnographic fieldwork from Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, Thailand, Vietnam, and Cambodia, the book examines both dominant constructions of masculinity and the ways in which marginal men engage with these. Complementing existing studies of gender in Asia, which have concentrated on women, East Asia and gay men, the book demonstrates, overall, how gender, ethnicity, class, sexuality and nationality shape contemporary understandings of what it means to be a ‘man’ in Southeast Asia.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Lenore Lyons and Michele Ford 2. Being Broh: Masculinities in 21st Century Cambodia Trudy Jacobsen 3.

Generations of Men: Masculinity in Post-conflict Vietnam Hung Cam Thai 4. East Malaysian Masculinities: Negotiating ‘Malayness’ Anne-Marie Hilsdon 5. Social Drinking Among Vietnamese Civil Servants: The Sociality of Male Sexual Impotence Binh Ngo 6.

Masculinities, Religion and Militarisation in Southern Thailand Alexander Horstmann 7. The Biggest Cock: Violence, Authority and the Construction of Male Prowess in a Jakarta Neighbourhood Ian Wilson 8. Masculinities Across Borders: Singaporean Men in the Riau Islands Lenore Lyons, Michele Ford and Sophie Williams 9. Men at Work: Migrant Labour and Modes of Masculinity in Flores and Abroad Penny Graham 10. Migrant Intimacies: The Private Life of Thai Workmen in Singapore Pattana Kitiarsa

Nation-building and National Identity in Timor-Leste Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series

Michael Leach, Swinburne University of Technology, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 216x138 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58213-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION East Timor continues to be an example of a state built from the ground up, a society rebuilding itself after almost a quarter of a century of profound trauma, and consecutive eras of colonialism. The impact East Timor has had, and continues to have, across a range of fields, belies the small size of its population and territory. This book examines the key challenges of national building in Timor-Leste in the ten years since the 1999 independence referendum. It addresses key issues in the development and reconstruction of an independent East Timor, highlighting its successes and its failures, as well as a set of unresolved issues confronting the state. East Timor provides a clear example of the challenges of post-conflict nation-building. Following the 1999 violence which precipitated institutional collapse within the territory, East Timor was often described as a ‘nation without a state’. Prior to the resurgence of violence in April 2006, the UN-led mission in East Timor (UNTAET) was considered one of the most successful examples of international state-building intervention. The author examines the history of debates and conflict over issues of national identity, national history, cultural heritage, language policy, and relationships between distinct regions, generations, and language groups.

Interdisciplinary in its approach, the analysis links qualitative studies of cultural nationalism with quantitative analyses of popular attitudes to national identity. The book argues that nation-building - in the sense of creating the conditions for social cohesion, political stability and identity formation - is a neglected dimension of the state-building process in post-independence Timor-Leste, and that these national ‘faultlines’ have been key sources of civil conflict since independence.

CONTENTS Introduction: Nation building in Timor-Leste 1999-2009 2. Constitutional and elite narratives of national identity 3. Surveying popular attitudes to national identity 4. History curriculum and history teaching 5. Managing the cultural heritage of the resistance 6. "Eastwest" violence and post-conflict resolution programs 7. Decentralisation and nation-building 8. Modern and traditional political authority

The Politics of Reconstruction and Development in Sri Lanka Routledge/Edinburgh South Asian Studies Series

Eva Gerharz, University of Bielefeld, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58229-2; August 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

28 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Sri Lanka’s conflict and peace processes have gained global attention during recent years. This book presents a comprehensive insight into the politics of reconstruction and development in Sri Lanka. Based on extensive empirical fieldwork, it elaborates how development was shaped by interplay and cooperation, but also by the disparities and conflicts between a variety of local and intervening actors, such as local organizations and civil society, LTTE, Government of Sri Lanka, international development cooperation and the Tamil diaspora. Focusing on the ceasefire which was negotiated between the Government of Sri Lanka and the separatist LTTE in 2002 and which lasted until 2006, the author integrates findings from development sociology with new perspectives on the transnationalization and the migration-development-nexus. The book provides a detailed analysis of the emerging development visions and perspectives and makes an innovative contribution by linking the analysis of local reconstruction with contemporary phenomena of transnationalization, diasporization, and globalization.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Sri Lanka between War and Peace: National Politics and the Global Development Regime 3. A Tamil Homeland: Jaffna Peninsula and the Construction of a Diaspora 4. Who Does Development? 5. Cooperation, Coalition, Conflict: Shaping Transformations 6. Development, Reconstruction and Social Change 7. Translocal Development Visions between Peace and War

Princely India Re-imagined Routledge/Edinburgh South Asian Studies Series

Aya Ikegame, University of Edinburgh, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55449-7; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION India’s Princely states covered nearly 40% of the Indian subcontinent at the time of Indian independence, and they collapsed after the departure of the British. This book provides a chronological analysis of the Princely State in colonial times and its post-colonial legacies. It focuses on one of the largest and most important of these states, the Princely State of Mysore, and offers a novel interpretation and thorough investigation of the relationship of king and subject in South Asia. Using a combination of historical and anthropological methodologies and based upon substantial archival and field research, the author argues that the idea of kingship lived on in South India and continues to play a vital and important role in contemporary South Indian social and political life.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: The Kingdom of the Imaginary 2. Caste Ideology and the Urs 3. Becoming Gentlemen 4. Marriage Alliances in Imperial Space: Colonial Indian Kinship and the Emerging Aristocracy 5. The Everyday Life of the ‘Royals’: Legacies and Beyond 6.

The Palace and Politics of Honour 7. The Capital of Rajadharma: Modern Space and Religion 8. Dasara, Durbar, and Dolls: MultiDimensionality of Public Ritual 9. The King is Dead, Long Live the King!

A Social History of Healing in India Routledge/Edinburgh South Asian Studies Series

Bihari Projit Mukharji, McMaster University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49952-1; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book re-connects the history of medicine with the social and political history of India and analyses the popular and subaltern healing practices in the region. Moving away from the view that a relatively homogenous and discrete set of practices organized under the name of ‘indigenous’ medicine confronted an equally homogenous and discrete set of ‘modern’ practices in a colonial situation, the author argues that both the pre-existing domain of healing as well as the new forces of modernity was heterogeneous and pluralised. The book argues that owing to this plurality on both sides their relationship was not an uniformly confrontational one.

Different aspects of the pre-existing healing praxes articulated with different aspects of colonial modernity through a range of ways ranging from mimesis to confrontation. The first full-length first historical exploration of the histories of ‘minor/non-classical’ domain of healing, the book maps the intellectual history of ‘subaltern’ healing in the region. It will be of interest to academics working in the field of Indian history, the history of medicine and public health.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Medical Modernity in Colonial Bengal 2. Casting Ayurveda: Vaidyas and the Classicism of Indigenous Medicine 3.

Reading the Pulse: The Politics of Tradition 4. Sex, Medicine and Morality: The Medicalization of Sexuality 5. Chandshir Chikitsa: Medical Institutionalisation and Non-National Pasts 6. The Magic of Modernity: Islamiya Tantra 7. Spaces of Cure: The Spatiality of Modern Healing 8. Conclusion: Healing Modernities

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

29

Sovereignty and Social Reform in India Routledge/Edinburgh South Asian Studies Series

Andrea Major, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58050-2; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers an important reinterpretation of major themes of sovereignty, authority and social reform in colonial South Asian history. Focusing on the British prohibition of sati in 1829, the author shows how the debates that preceded this legislation have been instrumental in setting the terms of post-colonial debates about sati, as well as of defining the terms and parameters of British involvement in Indian social and religious issues more generally.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Princes, Politics and Pragmatism: British Policy on Sati in the Indian States 1830-1860 3. Prohibition, Prevention and Prosecution: The Practicalities of Suppressing Sati 4. Romance, Race and Rule: Imagining Sati in Rajput Society 5. Victimhood and Volition: British Encounters with the Satimata 6. Conclusion

Law and Development in Asia Routledge Law in Asia

Edited by Gerald McAlinn, Keio University, Japan and Caslav Pejovic, Kyushu University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00; 234x156 mm; 432pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57603-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book presents a comprehensive overview of the key issues relating to law and development in Asia. It discusses the different models of law and development, including both the developmental state model of the 1960s and the neo-liberal model of the 1980s, and shows how development has worked out in practice in relation to these models in a range of Asian countries, including Japan, Korea, China, Thailand, Singapore, India and Mongolia. Particular themes examined include constitutionalism, judicial and legal reform, labour law, the growing importance of private rights, foreign investment and the international law of development.

CONTENTS Preface Toshiyuki Kono 1. Law and Development in a Time of Multiple Visions David M. Trubek 2. Law and Development Orthodoxies and the Northeast Asian Experience John Ohnesorge 3. Japanese Law and Asian Development Tom Ginsburg 4. Law and Development: Korean Contemporary History in Retrospect Chang Hee Lee 5. Neo-Liberalism, Foreign Investment and the International Law of Development M. Sornarajah 6. Emergence of Private Rights in the Resolution of Foreign Investment Disputes Gerald Paul McAlinn 7. Soft-law Approach in Labour Law in Asia Shinichi Ago 8. The Politics of Law, Development and Constitutionalism in Thailand Andrew Harding 9. Thailand and Legal Development: Challenges Ahead Lawan Thanadsillapakul 10.

Mongolia’s Constitutional Crisis and the Rule of Law in Post-Soviet Societies Sumiya Sukhbataar 11. Contextualising Debates about Legal and Judicial Reform in Asia: Case Studies of Recent Trends in Singapore and India Michael Ewing-Chow and Arun Thiruvengadam 12. The Success of Law and Development in China Connie Carter

Legal Reforms in China and Vietnam Routledge Law in Asia

John Gillespie, Monash University, Australia and Albert H.Y. Chen, University of Hong Kong PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00; 234x156 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56104-4; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Although the adoption of market reforms has been a key factor leading to China’s recent economic growth, China continues to be governed by a communist party and has a socialist-influenced legal system. Vietnam, starting later, also with a socialist-influenced legal system, has followed a similar reform path, and other countries too are now looking towards China and Vietnam as models for development. This book provides a comprehensive, comparative assessment of legal developments in China and Vietnam, examining similarities and differences, and raising important questions such as: Is there a distinctive Chinese model, and/or a more general East Asian Model? If so, can it be flexibly applied to social and economic conditions in different countries? If it cannot be applied to a culturally and politically similar country like Vietnam, is the model transportable elsewhere in the world? Combining ‘micro’ or interpretive methods with ‘macro’ or structural traditions, the book provides a nuanced account of legal reforms in China and Vietnam, highlighting the factors likely to promote, change or resist the spread of the Chinese model.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

30 CONTENTS Part I Introduction. Chapter 1 Introduction: China and Vietnam Compared Albert Chen and John Gillespie . Chapter 2 Sequencing Chinese Legal Development Professor Randall Peerenboom . Part II Debating legal development in China and Vietnam. Chapter 3 Legal Thought and Legal Development in the People’s Republic of China Albert Chen . Chapter 4 The Juridification of State Regulation in Vietnam John Gillespie . Part III Developing an Administrative Law System. Introduction: Michael Dowdle . Chapter 5 Towards Regulatory Neutrality in a Party-State? A Review of Administrative Law Reforms in China Assistant Dr Zheng Ge . Chapter 6 Achievements and challenges in developing an administrative law system in contemporary Vietnam Vu Doan Ket and Matthieu Salomon . Part III Public access to justice. Introduction: Nicholas Booth . Chapter 7 Access to Justice in China: Potentials, Limits and Alternatives Fu Hualing . Chapter 8 Publication and Public Access: the largely inaccessible Vietnamese court decision Pip Nicholson .

Part IV Commercial regulatory reforms. Introduction: Donald Clarke . Chapter 9 Commercial Regulatory Reform in China during Transition: An Alternative Path to the Regulatory State Assistant Dr Leng Jing . Chapter 10 Vietnam: The development of commercial regulation in Vietnam Melanie Beresford . Part V The evolving role of legal education Introduction: Jerry Cohen . Chapter 11 China’s Lawyers and their Training: Enduring Influences and Disconnects Alison Conner . Chapter 12 Legal Education in Vietnam: To Change or Not to Change? Bui Bich Thi Lien . Part VII Legal diffusion: the role of non-state actors in shaping the regulatory environment. Introduction: Michael Dowdle . Chapter 13 China: Business Lobbying in China in Comparative Perspective Scott Kennedy . Chapter 14 By-passing the state: Non-state regulation in Vietnam Nguyen Hung Quang . Conclusion: Reflections on legal development in China and Vietnam Albert Chen and John Gillespie.

Cambodia's Neoliberal Order Routledge Pacific Rim Geographies

Simon Springer, National University of Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56819-7; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Neoliberal economics have emerged in the post-Cold War era as the predominant ideological tenet applied to the development of countries in the global south. For much of the global south, however, the promise that markets will bring increased standards of living and emancipation from tyranny has been an empty one. Instead, neoliberalisation has increased the gap between rich and poor and unleashed a firestorm of social ills. This book deals with the post-conflict geographies of violence and neoliberalisation in Cambodia.

Applying a geographical analysis to contemporary Cambodian politics, the author employs notions of neoliberalism, public space, and radical democracy as the most substantive components of its theoretical edifice. He argues that the promotion of unfettered marketisation is the foremost causal factor in the country’s inability to consolidate democracy following a United Nations sponsored transition. The book demonstrates Cambodian perspectives on the role of public space in Cambodia's process of democratic development and explains the implications of violence and its relationship with neoliberalism. Taking into account the transition from war to peace, authoritarianism to democracy, and command economy to a free market, this book offers a critical appraisal of the political economy in Cambodia.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Setting the Stage for Neoliberalisation 2. Caught in the Headlights of Culture and Neoliberalism: Public Space as a Vision for Democracy and Development from Below in the Global South 3. From Genocide to Elections to Coup d’État: Public Space in Cambodia’s Transitional Political Economy 4. Cambodia’s Battle for Public Space: The Neoliberal Doctrine or Order versus the Democratic Expression of the People’s Will 5. Conclusion: Sowing the Seeds of a New Revolution?

Religion, Politics and Gender in Indonesia Routledge Research on Gender in Asia Series

Sonja van Wichelen, Brown University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 160pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49724-4; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The political downfall of the Suharto administration in 1998 marked the end of the "New Order" in Indonesia, a period characterized by 32 years of authoritarian rule. It opened the way for democracy, but also for the proliferation of political Islam, which the New Order had discouraged or banned. Many of the issues raised by Muslim groups concerned matters pertaining to gender and the body.

They triggered heated debates about women’s rights, female political participation, sexuality, pornography, veiling, and polygamy.

The author argues that public debates on Islam and Gender in contemporary Indonesia only partially concern religion, and more often refer to shifting moral conceptions of the masculine and feminine body in its intersection with new class dynamics, national identity, and global consumerism. By approaching the contentious debates from a cultural sociological perspective, the book links the theoretical domains of body politics, the mediated public sphere, and citizenship. Placing the issue of gender and Islam in the context

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

31 of Indonesia, the biggest Muslim-majority country in the world, this book is an important contribution to the existing literature on the topic. As such, it will be of great interest to scholars of anthropology, sociology, and gender studies.

CONTENTS Introduction: Disputing the Muslim Body 1. Muslim Politics and Democratization 2. The Debate on Female Leadership 3. Formations of Public Piety 4. Contesting Masculinity 5. Sexualized Bodies and Morality Talk. Conclusion: Negotiating the Citizen-Subject

China's Rise – Threat or Opportunity?

Routledge Security in Asia Series

Edited by Herbert Yee, Macau Polytechnic University, China PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57606-2; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Perceptions of China's rise have shifted over the last decade or so from seeing China as a threat to a more mixed view, where China is seen as playing a key role in economic recovery, taking an increasingly responsible role in world affairs, and contributing significantly to scientific and technological advances. This book presents a comprehenisve overview of how China's rise is perceived in different countries and regions of the world. The countries and regions covered are very wide ranging including China's neighbours, other world powers, the parts of China not part of mainland China - Taiwan, Hong Kong and Macau - and regions of the world where China is having an unexpected impact, such as the Middle East. Changing perceptions of China in the western media generally are also covered. Overall, the book demonstrates that whilst many countries and regions are much more positive about China's rise than they were previously, much nervousness and concern persist.

CONTENTS 1. Power Transition Theory: A Challenge to the Peaceful Rise of World Power China 2. Core Elements in a Rising China’s Foreign Policy and Key Issues in Sino-American Relations 3. China’s Rise and Russia’s Interests 4. European Perspectives on China’s Rise 5.

Sino-Vatican Relations on China’s Rise 6. Middle-Eastern Perceptions of China’s Rise 7. Too Close for Comfort?: Japanese and Korean Perspectives on China’s Rise 8. Political and Economic Friction between China and Japan 9. Indian Perspectives on China: Concerns and Prospects 10. Accommodation with Hedging: Southeast Asia’s Changing Perspectives toward China 11. Indonesia’s Perceptions of the "China Threat": From "Yellow Threat from the North" to "Strategic Partner" 12. The "China Threat" in the Context of China’s Peaceful Development: A View from Australia 13. A New Era of Mainland-Taiwan Relations? 14. The Response of Hong Kong and Macao to Mainland China’s Emergence: Trends and Prospects 15. From "China Threat" to "China Responsibility": Changing Perceptions about China in the Western Media and China’s Response

China’s Strategic Competition with the United States Routledge Security in Asia Series

Russell Ong, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56107-5; June 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION China’s rise as an economic, political, and military power and the expansion of its diplomatic activism beyond Asia into Europe, Latin America, Africa, and the Middle East has profoundly transformed its relationship with the United States. This book examines the transformation and the multifaceted nature of the relationship between US and China in the twenty-first century, and argues that it is more competitive than co-operative, even in areas that are amenable to co-operation such as trade and nuclear non-proliferation. It addresses important questions including: Does China’s growing power and influence inexorably come at the expense of the United States or the wider world? and To what extent do the national interests and policies of the United States and China coincide or diverge on a host of regional issues? It covers all the important issues including politics, security, nuclear deterrence, military modernization, energy, trade and economic interaction, and Asia-Pacific power reconfiguration.

CONTENTS Acknowledgements Introduction Chapter 1. US global supremacy Chapter 2. US and the export of liberal democracy Chapter 3. US and the world economic system Chapter 4. US and the Taiwan issue Chapter 5. The US-Japanese alliance Chapter 6. The North Korean nuclear issue Chapter 7. The US-South Korea alliance Chapter 8. Central Asia Conclusions Endnotes Selected Bibliography Index

Asia's Nuclear Futures Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

32 Chung Min Lee, National University of Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42825-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides a comprehensive assessment of the role of nuclear weapons in Asia since 1945, its implications for regional and global security, and the conditions under which more Asian countries might seek to acquire a nuclear capability in the future. It focuses in particular on understanding the nuclear proliferation networks that enabled small and middle ranking powers such as Pakistan and North Korea to pursue nuclear weapons programs. Three networks are included: the Soviet network which allowed for the proliferation of nuclear technologies to India, and also to North Korea the Chinese network which provided missile technology to North Korea, and nuclear technology to Pakistan the A.Q. Khan network which transferred nuclear weapons technology from Pakistan to North Korea, and missile technology from North Korea to Pakistan. Chung Min Lee considers the pressures upon other Asian powers to go nuclear, particularly Japan and South Korea as a response to the North Korea nuclear program, and Taiwan as a response to China; the role of key forces including the rise of new asymmetrical military capabilities in Asian militaries, and the complex interplay between failing states, weapons of mass destruction and transnational terror groups.

CONTENTS Part 1: Proliferation Networks Preface. Introduction 1. Nuclear Weapons in Asia and Proliferation Networks Part 2: Nuclear Pandora’s Arc 2. Proliferation Before and After the A.Q. Khan Network 3. Failed States and Nuclear Weapons Part 3: Tipping Points and New Security Dilemmas 4. Tipping Points: Japan, South Korea, and Taiwan 5. Deterrence and New Security Dilemmas Part 4: A Brave New World? 6. Nuclear Proliferation in Asia and Consequences for Global Security

The East Asian Security Community Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series

Donna Weeks, University of the Sunshine Coast, Queensland, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49448-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the concept of ‘security community’ as put forward by international relations theorists, and explores how such a concept might be applied in practice in East Asia. It also discusses various international organisations in Asia, including ASEAN. CONTENTS Acknowledgements/Preface. Introduction. 1. Framing a Security Community in the Asia-Pacific Region 2. Securing Community— Japan’s ‘in/security’ and the Region 3. Reframing Security: Japan’s Tentative Re-engagement 4. When a Security Community can Work: Australia and Japan in Iraq 5. From Bilateral to Multilateral: Japan and the East Asia Community 6. The Next Step: The Sixparty Talks 7. Security Communities, Trust and the Asia-Pacific Security Environment. Conclusion. Bibliography. Index

Human Security in Southeast Asia Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series

Yukiko Nishikawa, Mahidol University, Thailand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47868-7; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There is a growing interest in human security in Southeast Asia. This book firstly explores the theoretical and conceptual basis of human security, before focusing on the region itself. It shows how human security has been taken up as a central part of security policy in individual states in Southeast Asia, as well as in the regional security policy within the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN). The book discusses domestic challenges for human security including the insurgencies in southern Thailand, the Philippines and Indonesia. Transnational security issues such as terrorism, drugs, human trafficking and the situation in Burma are explored by the author, and the ‘ASEAN’ way of contrasting the values and approaches of Southeast Asian countries with those in the West is assessed. By focusing on the ongoing changes and efforts to achieve human security in Southeast Asia, this book contributes to theoretical debates on human security as well as regional studies on Southeast Asia.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

33 Introduction 1. Human Security: A New Label for Old Challenges? 2. Human Security in Southeast Asia at a Turning Point 3.

Domestic Challenges for Human Security 4. Regional Challenges for Human Security 5. The ASEAN Way and Human Security Conclusion

India and the South Asian Strategic Triangle Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series

Ashok Kapur, University of Waterloo, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45466-7; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book traces the triangular strategic relationship of India, Pakistan and China over the second half of the twentieth century, showing how two enmities – Sino-Indian and Indo-Pakistani – and one friendship – Sino-Pakistani – defined the distribution of power and the patterns of relationships in a major centre of gravity of international conflict and international change. The book considers internal debates within the three countries; zones of conflict, including northeast and northwest south Asia, the Himalayas and the Indian Ocean; and the impact of developments in nuclear weapons and missile technology. It examines the destructive consequences of China’s harsh methods in Tibet, of China’s encouragement of military rather than democratic regimes in Pakistan, and of China’s delay in dealing with the border disputes with India. It shows how the Nehru-Chou rhetoric about "peaceful co-existence" affected the relationship, and how the dynamics of the relationship have changed significantly in recent years as a range of new factors, including India’s increasing closeness to the United States, have moved the relationship into a new phase.

CONTENTS 1. Importance of Subject 2. China-India-Pakistan as a Strategic Triangle: Overview 3. Origins of the Triangle: Context, Motives and Behaviour, 1950s – Early 1960s 4. The Triangle at Work in War – 1962, 1965, 1971 5. China and Pakistan Nuclearize the Triangle, 1970s – Present, and India Joins the Nuclear Game (1998) 6. Late 1990s – Present. China Adapts its Style and Makes Few Minor Policy Changes 7. The Future: Adapting or Learning from the Past

South Asia's Nuclear Security Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series

Bhumitra Chakma, University of Hull, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49449-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The conditions and context under which nuclear deterrence is to function have drastically altered since the Cold War period. This book examines the dynamics of nuclear deterrence in the Second Nuclear Age. It focuses on South Asia, as it is the most dominant and, to some, the most dangerous case of contemporary nuclear stand-off, where deterrence can fail. It provides a thorough, up-to-date qualitative analysis of the South Asian nuclear deterrence and includes detailed explanations of the concept of nuclear deterrence and its variations, the problems of applying the idea in the context of South Asia, the nature of South Asia’s deterrence stability, the nuclear postures of India and Pakistan, the dynamics and efficacies of pre-test and the post-test Indo-Pakistani nuclear deterrence, the role of confidence-building measures, and arms control in the Indo-Pakistani nuclear deterrence system. With novel explanations and fresh insights, this book sheds new light on nuclear deterrence in the Second Nuclear Age and is a timely and valuable contribution to the nuclear scholarship on South Asia.

Southeast Asia and the Rise of Chinese and Indian Naval Power Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series

Edited by Sam Bateman and Joshua Ho, both of Nanyang Technological University, Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55955-3; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the emerging maritime security scene in Southeast Asia. It considers highly topical implications for the region of possible strategic competition between China and India - the rising naval powers of Asia - with a possible naval "arms race" emerging between these countries both with naval force development and operations. As part of its "Look East" policy, India has deployed naval units to the Pacific Ocean for port visits and exercises both with East Asian navies and the US Navy, but India is also concerned about the possibility of the Chinese Navy operating in the Indian Ocean. Even as the US-India defence relationship continues to deepen, the

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

34 US and China are struggling to build a closer links. China’s and India’s strategic interests overlap in this region both in maritime strategic competition or conflict – which might be played out in the Bay of Bengal, the Malacca and Singapore Straits and the South China Sea. The sea lines of communication (SLOCs) through Southeast Asian waters constitute vital "choke points" between the Indian and Pacific Oceans carrying essential energy supplies for China and other Northeast Asian countries. Any strategic competition between China and India has implications for other major maritime players in the Pacific and Indian Oceans, especially Australia, the Republic of Korea and Japan, as well as the US. This book identifies possible cooperative and confidence-building measures that may contribute to enhanced relations between these two major powers and dampen down the risks associated with their strategic competition.

CONTENTS Part 1: Regional Strategic Environment: Contemporary Regional Relations 1. Between Rising Powers – A Broad Strategic Overview 2. China’s Relations with Southeast Asia 3. US Engagement with China, India and Southeast Asia 4. Japanese Engagement with China, India and Southeast Asia 5. Singapore’s Strategic Involvement in the Indian Ocean 6. Chinese Perspective 7. The Korean Perspective 8. The Malaysian Perspective Part 2: Contemporary Regional Maritime Security 9. Regional Maritime Security – Threats and Risk Assessments 10. Cooperative Mechanisms for Safety and Security in the Malacca and Singapore Straits 11. Shaping Naval Power – Implications of the Naval Buildup in Asia 12. Chinese Naval Developments 13. Indian Perspective 14. US Perspective 15.

Japanese Perspective 16. Australian Perspective 17. Scope for Maritime Cooperation and Confidence Building 18. Towards a Cooperative Maritime Regime in Southeast Asian Seas – Contemporary Issues, including in the South China Sea 19. Cooperation and Confidence Building: A Southeast Asian Perspective

Social Theory in Contemporary Asia Routledge Studies in Social and Political Thought

Ann Brooks, University of Adelaide, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 160pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55109-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Philosophical debates around individualization and the implications for intimacy, reflexivity and identity have occupied a central part of social and cultural theorizing in the West in the last decade. The author analyses the relevance of these debates in the context of contemporary Asia and combines an analysis of significant social theorists with an application of these debates to social, political and cultural contexts. Intimacy, reflexivity and identity are examined in the context of cultured, gendered and ethnic Asian identities. The author looks at debates around ‘individualization’, reflexivity and identity; religions and practices in the region; and gender relations in the context of late modernity in Asia. Further debates examined include intimacy and equality in heterosexual relationships; sex and singlehood as sources of tension in cosmopolitan Asia; and the impact of nationalism and state policy on procreation, gender ideology and human rights. Drawing on empirical research, case studies, global reports, media and academic literature, the book provides a relevant, wide-ranging and contemporary analysis of the debates on Asian culture and society.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Contesting Intimacy, Reflexivity and Identity in Contemporary Social Theory 2. Intimacy, Reflexivity and Identity in Contemporary Asia 3. Reflexivity and the Transformation of Gender Identity in Cosmopolitan Asia 4. Postmodern Confucianism, 'Moral Economies' and 'Biopolitical Otherness' in Redefining Intimacy and Identity in Southeast Asia 5. Sex and 'Singlehood' as a Source of Tension in Contemporary Asia 6. Cultural Production, Intimacy and Identity: Paradigms of Resistance and Islamic Orthodoxy in Asia

Bureaucracy, Community and Influence in India Routledge Studies in South Asian History

William Gould, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77664-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Offering a fresh approach to the issue of government and administrative corruption through 'everyday' citizen interactions with the state, this book explores changing discourses and practices of corruption in late colonial and early independent Uttar Pradesh, India.

The author moves away from assumptions that the state can primarily be associated with the top levels of government, and looks at citizens' approaches to local level bureaucracies and police. The central argument of the book is that deeply 'institutionalised' corruption in India could only have come about through the exercise of particular long term customs of interaction between agencies of the state - government servants and police, and their interactions with local politicians. Because the social hierarchies that condition such interactions are complicated by individual and family connections to state employment, periods of traumatic state transformation lead to a reconfiguration in the meaning of corruption in the local state. Based on principal primary sources and extensive field interviews, this book will be of interest to academics working on political science and Indian and South Asian history.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

35 CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Administrative power and public morality: hierarchy and corruption in late colonial and ealry independent UP 3.

Religion, caste and government servant recruitment 1920s - 1950s 4. Imagining corruption: languages and symbolism in administrative and police power in north India 5. The rise of anti-corruption: government servants and 'citizens', 1940 - 1952 6. The bureaucracy, police and political change: maintaining the 'steel frame' in the 1950s and 1960s 7. Conclusion

Gandhi's Spinning Wheel and the Making of India Routledge Studies in South Asian History

Rebecca Brown, Johns Hopkins University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 216x138 mm; 144pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49431-1; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Gandhi’s use of the spinning wheel was one of the most significant unifying elements of the nationalist movement in India. Spinning was seen as an economic and political activity that could bring together the diverse population of South Asia, and allow the formerly elite nationalist movement to connect to the broader Indian population. This book looks at the politics of spinning both as a visual symbol and as a symbolic practice. It traces the genealogy of spinning from its early colonial manifestations in Company painting to its appropriation by the anti-colonial movement. This complex of visual imagery and performative ritual had the potential to overcome labour, gender, and religious divisions and thereby produce an accessible and effective symbol for the Gandhian anti-colonial movement. By thoroughly examining all aspects of this symbol’s deployment, this book unpacks the politics of the spinning wheel and provides a model for the analysis of political symbols elsewhere. It also probes the successes of India’s particular anti-colonial movement, making an invaluable contribution to studies in social and cultural history, as well as South Asian Studies.

CONTENTS Introduction - Spinning, Anticolonial Nationalism, and the Visual 1. Action and Identity: Colonial Representations of Spinning 2.

Capturing the Wheel in Motion: Photography and Spinning 3. Discovering Spinning: Towards Gandhi's Visual Rhetoric 4. Gender and the Modern Charkha 5. National Symbols: Gandhi and the Spinning Wheel

Gender and Radical Politics in India Routledge Studies in South Asian History

Mallarika Sinha Roy, Roskilde University, Denmark PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56235-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Naxalbari movement marks a significant moment in the postcolonial history of India. Beginning as an armed peasant uprising in 1967 under the leadership of radical communists, the movement was inspired by the Marxist-Leninist theory of revolution and involved a significant section of the contemporary youth from diverse social strata with a vision of people’s revolution. It inspired similar radical movements in other South Asian countries such as Nepal. Arguing that the history and memory of the Naxalbari movement is fraught with varied gendered experiences of political motivation, revolutionary activism, and violence, this book analyses the participation of women in the movement and their experiences. Based on extensive ethnographic and archival research, the author argues that women’s emancipation was an integral part of their vision of revolution, and many of them identified the days of their activism as magic moments, as a period of enchanted sense of emancipation. The book places the movement into the postcolonial history of South Asia. It makes a significant contribution to the understanding of radical communist politics in South Asia, particularly in relation to issues concerning the role of women in radical politics.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: In Search of the Definition of Naxalbari 2. Through the Looking Glass of Gender 3. Multiple Patriarchies: Politics, Power, and Masculinity 4. Speaking Silence: Continuous Politics and Discrete Memory 5. Acts of Agency: Political Activism and Identity in Women’s Words 6. Weapons and Wounds: The Discourse of Violence 7. Conclusion: Third World, Second Sex: Sisterhood of Resistance

The Great Rebellion of 1857 in India Routledge Studies in South Asian History

Edited by Biswamoy Pati, Delhi University, India PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

36 HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 196pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55843-3; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Great Rebellion of 1857 in India was much more than a ‘sepoy mutiny’. It was a major event in South Asian and British colonial history that significantly challenged imperialism in India. This fascinating collection explores hitherto ignored diversities of the Great Rebellion such as gender and colonial fiction, courtesans, white ‘marginals’, penal laws and colonial anxieties about the Mughals, even in exile. Also studied are popular struggles involving tribals and outcastes, and the way outcastes in the south of India locate the Rebellion. Interdisciplinary in focus and based on a range of untapped source materials and rare, printed tracts, this book questions conventional wisdom. The comprehensive introduction traces the different historiographical approaches to the Great Rebellion, including the imperialist, nationalist, marxist and subaltern scholarship. While questioning typical assumptions associated with the Great Rebellion, it argues that the Rebellion neither began nor ended in 1857-58. Clearly informed by the ‘Subaltern Studies’ scholarship, this book is post-subalternist as it moves far beyond narrow subalternist concerns. It will be of interest to students of Colonial and South Asian History, Social History, Cultural and Political Studies.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: The Great Rebellion Biswamoy Pati 2. 1857 and the Adivasis of Chotanagpur Shashank S. Sinha 3. Remembering Gonoo: The Profile of an Adivasi Rebel of 1857 Sanjukta Dasgupta 4. Beyond Colonial Mapping: Common People, Fuzzy Boundaries and the Rebellion of 1857 Biswamoy Pati 5. Forests on Fire: The 1857 Rebellion in Tribal Andhra B. Rama Chandra Reddy 6.

Contested sites: The Prison, Penal Laws and the 1857 Revolt Madhurima Sen 7. Courtesans and the 1857 Revolt: The Role of Azeezun in Kanpur Lata Singh 8. Discourses of ‘Gendered Loyalty’: Constructing Indian Women in ‘Mutiny’ Fiction of the Nineteenth century Indrani Sen 9. The ‘Disposable’ Brethren: European Marginals in Eastern India during the Great Rebellion Sarmsitha De 10. Sanitizing Indigenous Memory: 1857 and Mughal Exile Amar Farooqui 11. Ideas, Memories and Meanings: Adi Dravida Interpretations of the Impact of the 1857 Rebellion Raj Shekhar Basu

The State and Governance in India Routledge Studies in South Asian History

William F. Kuracina, Texas A&M University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 246pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77944-9; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book presents an innovative investigation of the policies of the Indian Congress during the late colonial period. Departing from the existing historiography of Indian nationalism, it analyses the extent to which Congress elites engaged in processes intended to foster nation-building in India. Rejecting the long-standing premise that the Congress primarily sought to generate a national identity, the author hypothesizes that Congress elites knowingly grappled with the creation of a national governmentality. He argues that they distanced themselves from lethargic nation-building exercises and instead opted to support more practical and more feasible statebuilding efforts. Accordingly, this book shows that Congress elites constructed the institutions that would enable Indians to govern themselves after India’s liberation from British imperialism. It presents evidence which shows that Congress elites began to perceive themselves and their organization as an emerging post-colonial state.

CONTENTS 1. Processes Fueling the Development of the State and Governance 2. Indian Democracy and Civil Liberties 3. Opposing Imperialism through Foreign Affairs 4. Planning for Economic Liberation 5. Imagining a Unique Federal State 6. Erosion of the Ideal: Defense and National Government 7. Conclusions

The Everyday Impact of Economic Reform in China Routledge Studies in the Growth Economies of Asia

Ying Zhu, Michael Webber, both of University of Melbourne, Australia and John Benson, University of Southern Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 194pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42841-5; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION During the past 30 years, China has undergone extensive economic reform, replacing the government’s administration of enterprises with increasing levels of market-oriented enterprise autonomy. At the heart of the reform are changes in the employment relationship, where state control has been superceded by market relationships. These reforms have had far-reaching implications for many aspects of everyday life in Chinese society. This book appraises the impact of the economic reforms on the employment relationship and, in turn, examines the effects on individual workers and their families, including salaries, working conditions and satisfaction, job security and disparities based on location, gender, age, skill, position and migrant status. In particular, it focuses on how changes in

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

37 the employment relationship have affected the livelihood strategies of households. It explores the changing human resource management practices and employment relations in different types of enterprises: including State-Owned Enterprises, Foreign-Owned Enterprises and Domestic Private Enterprises; throughout different industries, focusing especially on textiles, clothing and footwear and the electronics industry; and in different regions and cities within China (Beijing, Haerbin, Lanzhou, Hangzhou, Wuhan and Kunming). Overall, this book provides a detailed account of the everyday implications of economic reform for individuals and families in China.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Economic reform and its industrial and social impact 3. Management, workers and conditions of employment 4.

Worker representation and emerging roles for trade unions 5. Enterprise performance and intangible management 6. Market-oriented economic reform and the quality of working life 7. Work, households and livelihoods 8. Economic reform and its impact on management, enterprises and workers

Gender and Labour in Contemporary India Routledge Studies in the Growth Economies of Asia

Amrita Chhachhi, Institute of Social Studies, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42193-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Providing a comprehensive analysis of the electronics industry in India, this book highlights the gendered nature of labour regimes and domestic regimes and also the linkages between households, labour markets, factories and the state, to provide a more comprehensive understanding of the relationship between gender and economic/industrial restructuring. Making an important contribution to the growing amount of available literature on gender and globalization, the author analyzes the struggles that women workers have been engaged in over their work, wages and service conditions and in their personal lives. These assertions of Õcitizenship in practiceÕ highlight the significance of agency and public action in ensuring legal entitlements as well as a consciousness of rights among workers and provide a new perspective on the broader theme of women’s employment and globalization CONTENTS Introduction 1. Conceptualizing Gender and Economic Restructuring 2. State Intervention: Industrial Policy and Labour Regulation 3.

Segmented and Overlapping Labour Markets: Social Characteristics of Workers in the Electronics Industry, Delhi 4. Gendered Labour Regimes Established in the Era of Regulation 5. Gendered Labour Regimes Established in the Era of De-regulation 6. Citizenship in Practice: Organization at the Workplace and Negotiating Autonomy in the Household 7. Informalization at the Workplace and Vulnerability of the Household. Conclusion

Globalization and the Japanese Economy Routledge Studies in the Growth Economies of Asia

David Bruce, London Metropolitan University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46944-9; April 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides a critical account of the origin, development and operation of the Japanese economy. Based on detailed empirical research and statistical analysis, it examines the development of the Japanese economy before and after the Second World War until today. In particular, it explores a debate that has divided economic historians in Japan and has played a major role in current debates about economic reform: whether the modern Japanese economy is largely a construct of events during the Second World War, or if instead it is a natural part of the evolution from a much older system. This debate has important ramifications for understanding not only how the modern Japanese economy came into existence and its fundamental workings, but also why Japan was so successful and the reasons it is facing problems today. It challenges externally imposed views of the Japanese economy and its success, for example that its high rates of growth were principally driven by export growth and uniquely favourable conditions in the world economy in the post-war period. Despite its strong resonance in academic and policy-making circles in Japan, the extensive literature on this topic has been neglected by international scholars. This book brings that material to an English language audience for the first time. It also adds to that debate, arguing that the events of the Second World War did have critical lasting consequences and did not merely amount to an aberration of a long term trend, but that other important factors have also exerted an impact, for example the change in the nature of the Japanese economy as it shifted from a small economy in the international system (and therefore much less able to deal with a competitive international economy through government intervention), to a large closed one (which was much more insulated and less exposed to changes in international conditions).

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

38 Introduction 1. Critical Historical Developments in the World Economy 2. Japan’s Changing Economic Structure and Status in the World Economy 3. The Evolution of Macro-Economic Policy during the Catch Up Phase 4. Continuity and Discontinuity 5. The PostWar High Speed Growth System: Competing Explanations 6. The End of High Speed Growth. Conclusion. Bibliography

Intellectual Property, Innovation and Management in Emerging Economies Routledge Studies in the Growth Economies of Asia

Edited by Ruth Taplin, Centre for Japanese and East Asian Studies, London, UK and Alojzy Z. Nowak, University of Warsaw, Poland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55960-7; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book argues that intellectual property (IP) development and innovation are fundamental to economic growth, especially in newly emerging economies which often hold vast reserves of natural resources and human knowledge that remain unprotected. It sheds light on countries that are gradually realising this situation, with examples from many parts of the world, including Eastern Europe, Africa and especially Asia, where a great deal is being made of innovation and intellectual property to stimulate economic growth. Specific examples discussed include Japan and Korea’s new cross border laws and the patent prosecution highway, to which China has also recently signed up, and India’s development of generic drugs at lower costs. It discusses how these successful models can be utilised by less developed emerging economies such as those in Africa, where IP development is almost non-existent or, in some cases, explored only superficially. It provides a comprehensive assessment of the ways in which innovation, protection and enforcement of IP laws can help newly emerging economies achieve economic growth without destroying natural and human resources, and move ahead from the current global financial crisis.

CONTENTS 1. Cross border Intellectual Property and theoretical models 2. Innovation and Intellectual Property Rights in China and India: Prospects and Strategies 3. African Intellectual Property Law and the Newly Emerging African Economies with an Emphasis on South Africa 4. Two types of University Technology Transfer Intermediaries: TLO and TMC the Case of Thailand and the United States 5.

The Financial Crisis, Intellectual Property and Prospects for Recovery: the Case of Poland, Central and Eastern Europe 6. Socio Economic changes Effected by Intellectual Property Rights - the Indian perspective 7. Development of Intellectual Property Rights in Turkey: its Implications for the Turkish Economy 8. Cluster development, Intellectual Property and Global Competitiveness: Prospects of the Nano Sector in Hsinchu Science Park

The Migration of Indian Human Capital Routledge Studies in the Growth Economies of Asia

Faizal bin Yahya, National University of Singapore and Arunajeet Kaur, Australian National University PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48108-3; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In an increasingly globalised world manifested in greater economic integration, human capital is an important factor. One of the key sources of human capital to the global economy is India, and the main destinations for Indian professionals has been Western developed economies, the Middle East and Gulf regions and East and Southeast Asia. Southeast Asia as a region has close historical, social and cultural linkages with India, and India has undertaken a number of initiatives under its “Look East” policy (LEP) to enhance ties with the Southeast Asian region. This book examines the trends and motivations of human capital flows from India to Southeast Asia. Focusing in particular on Malaysia, Singapore and Thailand, the three largest ASEAN trading partners with India, the book provides an analysis of Indian labor in a variety of sectors including the information technology (IT) sector, academia, banking, oil and gas. Based on empirical data, the book provides an analysis of current trends in the flow of human capital from India to Southeast Asia. It will be of interest to policy makers, businessmen, students, analysts and academics in the field of Asian studies, foreign relations, human capital and labour migration.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Historical Mobility of Indian Human Capital 2. Rise of Knowledge Based Economies 3. Global Talent Crunch 4.

India Rising and Human Capital Flows 5. Southeast Asia – Shortage of Talented Individuals 6. Singapore – Low Fertility Levels & Education 7. Singapore – Foreign Talent 8. Malaysia 9. Thailand 10. Conclusion

Responsible Development Routledge Studies in the Growth Economies of Asia

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

39 Omar Norman, UNDP Regional Centre, Sri Lanka PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 236pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-7103-1348-5; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Until the dramatic economic collapse of 1997, East Asia was the symbol of a successful market-led development strategy for Western governments, aid agencies and academics, despite underlying concerns about a lack of rights and freedoms. The crisis changed Asia and the world; currency depreciations, personal and state indebtedness, mass unemployment and rioting brought the paternalistic capitalist phase to an end in Asia. The decade following the economic crisis has seen a swift response, with the major restructuring of Asian economies, improved corporate governance, banks recapitalized, more attention paid to the environment and foreign exchange reserves restored so the IMF became redundant in Asia. Dividing the countries that emerged from the crisis into three categories – the Insecure Rich, the New Aspirants for Prosperity and the Danger Zone – Noman analyses the complex Asian recovery and future challenges within the framework of Responsible Development, an agenda for Asia that emphasizes the simultaneous challenge of building sustainable democracies, a viable environment and an equitable economy. Covering the many related issues that pose a threat to Asian economic stability – climate change, religious fascism, inequality and hunger – this book will have particular relevance in the areas of development studies, economics, international politics and Asian studies.

CONTENTS Part 1: Prosperity and Discontent 1. Freedom and Responsibility 2. The Asian Boom on the Eve of the Great Recession 3. Asia’s Hunger Test 4. The Loss of Egalitarian Capitalism 5. Damage Control: Can Asia Reduce Environmental Stress? Part 2: Expansion of Freedoms 6. Investing in Just Democracies 7. The End of "Asian Values" and the Spread of Democracy Part 3: Comparison of Asian Development Strategies 8. Conflict and Arrested Development: Pakistan’s Divergence from Eastern Asia 9. Democratic India and Authoritarian East Asia: Are Economic and Political Systems Converging? 10. Responsible Development in a Vulnerable World

Trade Liberalisation and Poverty in South Asia Routledge Studies in the Growth Economies of Asia

Edited by Prema-chandra Athukorala, Australian National University, Jayatilleke S. Bandara, Griffith University, Australia and Saman Kelegama, The Institute of Policy Studies of Sri Lanka, Sri Lanka PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56175-4; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The link between trade liberalisation and poverty has arguably been one of the most debated topics in development policy debate. At the onset of the current economic crisis, the issue is of even greater significance to developing countries in light of protectionism gaining strength in the global economy. This book examines the connection between trade liberalisation and poverty using theory and evidence. The case studies cover all South Asian countries as the region provides an excellent for a comparative study given the widespread emphasis on liberalisation reforms across all countries over the past two decade, significant inter-country differences in terms of the timing and comprehensiveness of reforms, and the heavy concentration of world poverty in the region. This book is the first comprehensive analysis of evidence on the link between trade liberalisation and poverty in South Asia and highlights important policy issues.

CONTENTS Part 1 1. Introduction Prema-chandra Athukorala, Jayatilleke S. Bandara and Saman Kelegama 2. Trade and Poverty in South Asia: Stylised Facts Prema-chandra Athukorala, Jayatilleke S. Bandara and Saman Kelegama 3. Trade and Poverty: Theory, Evidence and Policy Issues Prema-chandra Athukorala, Jayatilleke S. Bandara and Saman Kelegama Part 2: Case Studies of Trade Liberalization and Povery 4. Bangladesh Rashmi Banga and Shruti Sharma 5. India Rashmi Banga 6. Pakistan Rehana Siddiqui 7. Sri Lanka Deshal De Mel and Ruwan Jayatilleke 8. Nepal Yuba Raj Khatiwada 9. Maldives Jagath Dissanayake and Suwendrani Jayaratne 10. Bhutan Chencho Dorji Part 3 11. Conclusion and Policy Inferences Prema-chandra Athukorala, Jayatilleke S. Bandara and Saman Kelegama

Understanding Innovation – The Case of Japan and China Routledge Studies in the Growth Economies of Asia

Cornelia Storz, Johann Wolfgang Goethe University, Frankfurt, Germany and Sebastian Schäfer PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55455-8; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

40 The concept of "innovation systems" has gained considerable attention from scholars and politicians alike. The concept promises not only to serve as a tool to explain sustained economic development, but also to provide policy-makers with scientifically grounded policy options to advance the growth of economies. In recent times, the thrust of literature has been to review existing empirical findings in order to deduce "best practice" models which are assumed to benefit all countries in a similar fashion. However, as this book argues, these models, because they aim to be universal, often fail in both analysis and policy prescriptions, as they do not take into account sufficiently the circumstances and development trajectories of particular countries. This book discusses the extent to which the diagnoses and reform recommendations of recent work on innovation theory and the related policy recommendations actually apply to Japan and China. It examines the present design and reasons underlying the Japanese and Chinese innovation systems, and based on those findings, emphasises the necessity for reform if the future competitiveness of these countries is to be secured.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Innovation. 1.1 Why is Innovation a Relevant Issue? 1.2 Definition of Innovation, Innovation Process. 1.3 Classification and Types of Innovation. 1.4 Indicators of Innovation. 2. Standard Economic Theory and Newer Approaches. 2.1 Standard Economic Theory: Assumptions. 2.2 Review and Development of Alternative Assumptions. 2.3 Introduction into Institutional Economics. 3. Institution and Innovation: Innovation Systems. 3.1 The Concept of National Innovation Systems. 3.2 Definition and Content. 3.3 Institutions and Linkages. 4. Institution and Innovation: An Application to Japan. 4.1 Regulatory Framework and Innovation Policy. 4.2 Financial System. 4.3 Labour Market. 4.4 Science System. 5 Firms and Networks, Institution and Innovation: An Application to China. 5.1 The Pre-Reform System. 5.2 Regulatory Framework. 5.3 The Science System. 5.4 Science Parks and Networks of Innovation. 5.5 The Financial System. 5.6 Foreign Direct Investment and Knowledge Transfer.

Conclusion.

The Japanese Occupation of Borneo, 1941–45 Routledge Studies in the Modern History of Asia

Ooi Keat Gin, Universiti Sains Malaysia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45663-0; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Japanese occupation of both British Borneo – Brunei, Sarawak and North Borneo – and Dutch Borneo in 1941 to 1945 is a much understudied subject. Of particular interest is the occupation of Dutch Borneo, governed by the Imperial Japanese Navy that had longterm plans for ‘permanent possession’. This book surveys Borneo under Western colonialism, examines pre-war Japanese interests in Borneo, and analyses the Japanese military invasion and occupation. It goes on to consider the nature of Japanese rule in Borneo, contrasting the different regimes of the Imperial Japanese Army, which ruled the north, and the Navy. A wide range of issues are discussed, including the incorporation of the economy in the Greater East Asia Co-prosperity Sphere and the effects of this on Borneo’s economy. The book also covers issues such as the relationship with the various indigenous inhabitants, with Islam and the Muslim community, and the Chinese, as well as topics of acculturation and propaganda, and major uprisings and mass executions. It examines the impact of the wartime conditions and policies on the local multiethnic peoples and their responses, providing an invaluable contribution to the greater understanding of the significance of the wartime Japanese occupation in the historical development of Borneo.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Prewar Borneo 3. On the Road to War 4. The Japanese Invasion and Occupation of Bornoe 5. The Partition of Borneo 6. Kita Boruneo 7. Minami Boruneo 8. Opposition and Response 9. Between Generals and Admirals 10. End of a Era 11.

Concluding Remarks

National Pasts in Europe and East Asia Routledge Studies in the Modern History of Asia

Peter W. Preston, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 352pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56113-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION With the rise of industrial capitalism in Europe and the related imposition of colonial rule in much of East Asia, both Europe and East Asia have intertwined histories that continue to shape their political thinking and political decision making. The contemporary interactions of the two regions – now once again major trading partners – will both depend upon and facilitate deeper understandings of their respective sets of national pasts. This book compares national pasts as well as the current processes of change taking place in Europe and East Asia, including the dynamics of the European Union in Europe and the re-emergence of the historical centre of China in East Asia. It argues that as the change unfolds in the economic, social and political fields, the various national pasts embedded with

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

41 the polities of the two regions will also need to be revisited and reworked. This book makes an invaluable contribution to research on comparative politics, as well as studies on South East Asia and Europe.

CONTENTS 1. National Pasts in Europe and East Asia 2. The Scale and Pace of Change Recalled 3. Available Lessons: Private Memories and Wider European Agendas 4. Europe: General Crisis, Collapse and Recovery 5. Uncomfortable Lessons: The European Union and the USA, 1989/91-2008 6. Reading the Ongoing Changes: European Identity 7. Sweeping Change in East Asia: Political Leaders and the Experience of Violence 8. East Asia: General Crisis, Collapse and National Development 9. Contested Compromises: National Pasts in Singapore, Hong Kong, Shanghai and Bangkok 10. Japan/China: National Pasts and the Reordering of East Asia 11. Europe and East Asia: Intermingled Pasts and Changing Identities 12. Afterword: War is Failure

The Philosophy of Japanese Wartime Resistance Routledge Studies in the Modern History of Asia

Edited by David Williams, Cardiff University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47646-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This is a complete translation, together with a substantial commentary and introduction, of The Standpoint of World History and Japan , by Masaaki Kosaka, Iwao Koyama, Keiji Nishitani and Shigetaka Suzuki. This important work, by leading philosophers of the Kyoto School, long regarded as one of the most notorious "fascist" texts produced in Japan during the Pacific War, is, in fact, the translator and editor argues, an act of bold public dissent from the policies of aggressive expansion pursued by the wartime Tojo regime. As the translator and editor argues, the work of the Kyoto School requires close guided reading, as the true radical meaning is often made deliberately opaque by the writers in order to avoid inviting a hostile reaction from the regime being criticised. The translator and editor provides guidance on how to extract the true meaning from this opaque work, and goes on to cotend that these Kyoto School philosophers were conspiring with the Imperial Japanese Navy to bring the Tojo cabinet down.

CONTENTS Prologue: What is the Kyoto School. The Book in Brief. Acknowledgements. A Concise Outline of the Great East Asian War, 193145. Japanese Usage and Style Part 1: The Philosophy of Japanese Resistance 1. The Event - Pearl Harbour as the End of History 2.

The Conspiracy - Plotting to Bring Tojo Down 3. The Text - How to Read The Standpoint of World History and Japan 4. The Significance - Texts Written in the Shadow of Prison 5. The Controversy - Wartime Japan as It Really Was Part 2: The Standpoint of World History and Japan 1. ‘The Standpoint of World History and Japan’ (26 November 1941) 2. ‘The Ethical and Historical Character of the East Asian Co-prosperity Sphere’ (4 March 1942) 3. ‘The Philosophy of Total Resistance’ (24 November 1942).

Postscript: The Publication of The Standpoint of World and Japan as a book in 1943 and the Fate of the Publisher Chuo Koron-sha.

Appendix: Translation of ‘The Preface’ to the book version of The Standpoint of World History and Japan (1943)

Post-War Repatriation to Defeated Japan Routledge Studies in the Modern History of Asia

Beatrice Trefalt, University of Newcastle, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55248-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the repatriation of more than six million Japanese from overseas territories in the period after the Second World War. It contributes to emerging literature on mobility, migration and borders in the twentieth century, and examines Japan’s own postwar experience and the repatriation history of other nations.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. From Within the Japanese Empire to Outside of it: Defeat and Beyond 2. Early Repatriation (1945-1947) 3. Repatriates and Politics (1947-1951) 4. Delayed Repatriations and the Cold War 5. Nostalgia for the Empire: Negotiating Identity and Fighting for Compensation 6. Japanese Repatriates as ‘Disaster Victims of Decolonisation’? Conclusion

China's Multinationals – The Resource Sector Routledge Studies on the Chinese Economy

Huaichuan Rui, Brunel University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

42 HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45508-4; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Foreign investment by China’s multinational companies is growing rapidly, with China likely to be the fourth largest global outward investor in the next few years. Interestingly, about half of China’s foreign direct investment is made by firms in the resource sector, that is by firms involved in oil, gas, mining, metal and other resource-based industries. This book examines the foreign direct investment activities of China’s resource sector multinationals and the unfolding impact of these activities. It provides both a comprehensive overview of activities, including mergers and acquisitions, and also provides detailed case studies of the activities of particular Chinese firms in particular countries and specific sectors. It argues that the motivations and competencies of Chinese multinationals are often different from what is regarded as normal behaviour by multinationals, in that Chinese firms often do not have the ownership, organisational and technological advantages usually associated with successful multinationals, but they do have government support, including in the areas of finance and international diplomacy, and they often also have significant host government support, in that much of China’s firms’ investment is in developing countries where Chinese involvement is especially welcomed. The book concludes by assessing the likely impact of Chinese foreign investment in resources on China, host countries, the security and supply of energy and other resources, and on the global economy generally.

CONTENTS Part 1: Overview 1. The Global Resource Market: Demand and Supply 2. The Chinese Resource Market: Demand and Supply 3.

Chinese Resource Firms’ ‘Going Global’ 4. Current Wisdom on Firms’ Internationalisation versus Chinese Practice Part 2: Going Global 5. CNPC in Russia, Kazakhstan, Sudan, and Venezuela 6. CNOOC in Indonesia and Nigeria 7. Minmetal in Brazil, Chile and Canada 8. Shenhua in Mongolia 9. Baosteel in Australia and Brazil 10. Huaneng in Australia 11. COFCO (China National Cereals, Oils & Foodstuffs Corp) in the World 12. Sinochem in the World 13. Medium and Small Firms in Resource Sector Part 3: Impact 14. Impact on Global Resource Markets (Oil/Gas/Metal/Mining) 15. Impact on Chinese Resource Markets (Oil/Gas/Metal/Mining) Part 4: Policy-Making Implications 16. Implications for Policy-Making. Conclusion

China's Road to Peaceful Rise Routledge Studies on the Chinese Economy

Zheng Bijian, China Reform Forum, China PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 336pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55271-4; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Zheng Bijian has been one of the most influential thinkers and policy formulators in China during its reform period. In the early 1990s he worked with Deng Xiaoping collating and publishing Deng’s speeches and as vice president of the Party School gave top priority to ensuring that members of the Party were thoroughly familiar with Deng’s views, theories and reform agenda. In this important book, which is already available in Chinese, Zheng Bijian sets out his views and relates how his views were formed and developed over the long reform period, including the full text of his important speeches and papers, together with appropriate introductory material.

Particular key themes which Zheng Bijian’s thought has contributed to China’s development are that China should embrace globalization and strengthen its relationship with the rest of the world, and that China’s development should be peaceful. "Zheng Bijian’s ideas, actions and vision helped China in its astonishing thirty years growth. Zheng Bijian made a great contribution to envisioning the new role of China in a globalized world. This book is the intellectual story of a great witness of our times." - Romano Prodi, former President of the European Commission and former Prime Minister of Italy CONTENTS 1. Acquiring A Deeper Understanding of Ourselves in the Process of Deepening Our Understanding of the World (1988 –1991) 2. A Study of the "Overall Strategy" Connecting the Two Major Situations at Home and Abroad Is of Paramount Importance (1991 – 1995) 3. Deng Xiaoping’s New Generalization of Socialism with Chinese Characteristics Actually Mapped out in A Scientific Way China’s Unique Strategic Road to Peaceful Development (1995 –1998) 4. A New Period of Strategic Opportunities and A Brand New Strategic Road for the Rise of Late-Emerging Powers Modern History Has Ever Known (1998 – 2002) 5. China’s Development Is A Peaceful Development. China’s Rise Is A Peaceful Rise (2002 – 2005) 6. China Will Emerge In the World as a "Peaceful Nation" and A "Civilized Nation" (2005 – 2006)

China's Rural Financial System Routledge Studies on the Chinese Economy

Yuepeng Zhao, China Banking Regulatory Commission, China PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54793-2; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

43 This book examines the credit needs and the borrowing behaviour of rural households in China in recent years. It is based on in-depth analysis of the status of households’ indebtedness and borrowing behaviour; the performance of Rural Credit Cooperatives (RCCs), as well as resources of informal finance. RCCs are virtually the only source of formal credit for rural households in China and were subject to a series of reforms from 1996 to 2003. The reforms aimed to transform RCCs into market-oriented institutions and, more importantly, help them meet the increasing demands of farmers for varied financial services, and thereby contribute effectively to economic transformation in rural China. Based on a micro-study of three villages, at different stages of development with dissimilar economic characteristics in Jiangxi province, this book investigates the sources of finance, formal and informal, in rural areas and the different types of credit that farmers require. It examines the patterns of credit required by rural households at different stages of agricultural processes, and the institutions from which they obtain loans. It demonstrates the importance of innovative institutional arrangements in rural China and new instruments that give farmers access to formal rural financial markets and enable them to utilize credit effectively, concluding that further reforms to RCCs are necessary for RCCs to be truly effective.

CONTENTS 1. ‘San Nong’ Problems and the Challenges of the Rural Financial System in China 2. Literature Gap and Research Objectives 3.

Fieldwork Villages, Procedures and the RCCs’ Pilot Program in Jiangxi 4. Households’ Indebtedness and Borrowing Behaviour in the Natural Village of Yao 5. Households’ Indebtedness and Borrowing Behaviour in the Natural Village of Wulitang 6. Households’ Indebtedness and Borrowing Behaviour in the Natural Village of Xiaobu 7. Analytical Summary of the Three Villages 8. Conclusion

Road Map of China's Rise Routledge Studies on the Chinese Economy

Angang Hu, Center for China Study, Beijing, China PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 512pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47992-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The growth of China’s economy in recent years has been extraordinary, and there has been a corresponding rise in China’s status in the world, and in China’s international political position. Angang Hu is one of the leading thinkers in China on how China’s strategy for growth should develop going forward, and his views on this provide important clues as to how the Chinese leadership is thinking and how policy and strategy will progress. In this book, translated from Chinese, Angang Hu surveys the factors which have contributed to China’s rise so far, and assesses China’s strengths and weaknesses in the key areas which will affect China’s rise going forward. The book is particularly interesting in that it takes a long term view of China’s economic development over several centuries, makes insightful comparisons with the rise (and fall) of other world powers including Britain, Germany, Japan and the United States, and assesses just how far any leading world power can dominate the world economy and world politics.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Background of China’s Rising 1. Quantitative Assessment of China’s Power of Economic and Science & technology (1980~2005) 2. Quantitative Assessment of China’s Power in Science and Technology (1980~2004) 3. Five Major Scale Effects of China’s Rise 4. How Does China Narrow Its Relative Gap in GDP with the United States Part 2: China and World 5.

China's Long-term Growth Prospects and How Its Rising Affects the Asian and Global Economy 6. Sino-US and Sino-Japanese Relations In the Process of Economic Integration 7. Tentative Evaluation of China’s Accession to WTO: Impact on World Trade Growth Pattern (2000-2005) 8. The Rise of China and Opening Up: From a World Class Big Opening Power to a World Class Strong Opening Power 9. China’s Competitiveness: Present and Future Part 3: Economic Growth and Social Development 10. On Sustainability of China’s Economic Growth 11. Evolution of Regional Pattern and Disparities of China’s Human Development (19822003) 12. Develop Human Resources to Cope with Aging Society 13. Poverty of Knowledge: New Poverty in the New Century 14.

The Emergence of Informal Sector and the Development of Informal Economy in China’s Transition: A Historical Perspective 15.

China’s 11th Five-Year Program: Strategies and Implication Part 4: Industry and Development 16. China’s Catching-Up in Media Penetration Level 17. Trajectory of China’s Iron and Steel Industry

Sustainable Reform and Development in Post-Olympic China Routledge Studies on the Chinese Economy

Shujie Yao, Wu Bin, Dylan Sutherland and Stephen Morgan, all of University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55956-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION After thirty years of economic reform, China has approached a crossroad in its development process, facing many challenges in the use of natural resources, the living environment, and the economic, social and political systems. The sustainability of China’s reform and development has become even more salient in the face of the global financial crisis and economic recession. Taking the 2008 Olympic Games in Beijing as an iconic turning-point and exploring key themes such as economic reform and sustainability, innovation and sustainability, globalisation and social development, this book analyses the prospects for sustainable reform and

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

44 development in Post-Olympic China. With analysis from a wide range of academic disciplines, it provides a strong interdisciplinary perspective and will appeal to a wide range of readers interested in China’s environment and sustainable development, economic and political reform, and international relations.

CONTENTS 1. Post-Olympic China: A 30-year review and perspective on sustainable reform and development. PART I Economic reform and sustainability. 2. Development of Chinese private sector in the past 30 years: retrospect and prospect. 3. Banking reform in China and governance effects: 1995-2005. 4. Is the growth of Chinese firms constrained by Internal Finance? PART II Innovation and sustainability. 5. Globalisation, the innovation of SMEs and the upgrading of industrial clusters. 6. Effects of policy measures on energy demands and greenhouse gas emissions in China's road transport sector. 7. Low-carbon China: prospects for disruptive innovation and the role of international collaboration. PART III Globalisation and impacts. 8. Changes in the efficiency of the Chinese manufacturing industry in the era of globalisation. 9. Foreign direct investment and horizontal technology spillover to domestic firms in China. 10. Globalisation and westward of Chinese seafarers supply. 11. Globalsiation and outflow of Chinese enterprises. PART IV Social development perspective. 12. Regional inequalities in China – A non-monetary view. 13. The changing mode of village governance in China. 14. China’s Human Rights and Civil Society: Western Perceptions, Asian Realities.

Asceticism and Power in South and Southeast Asia Royal Asiatic Society Books

Edited by Peter Flügel, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, UK and Gustaaf Houtman, Royal Anthropological Institute, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 336pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42384-7; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Including analyses by top academics in the field, this book takes a unique look at questions of power and asceticism in the Hindu, Jain and Buddhist traditions of South and Southeast Asia. Ideas about power and purity in these three traditions are crucially related to ascetic practices. Paradoxically, asceticism is in these traditions conceived not only as a means of world-renunciation but also as a means of world-transformation. However, the way in which the conflictual relationship between these two aspects is conceptualized and organized varies historically and regionally and is subject of ongoing religious contests and political negotiations. This is the first book to provide a comparative analysis of the related traditions and their history in relation to the questions of power and legitimacy throughout contemporary Asia.

CONTENTS Part I: Historical 1. Power of Words: The Ascetic Appropriation and the Semantic Evolution of Dharma Patrick Olivelle 2. Power and Status: Ramanandi Warrior Ascetics in 18th Century Jaipur Monika Horstmann 3. The Householder Ascetic and the Uses of SelfDiscipline Timothy Lubin 4. The Buddhist Wrathful Ascetic: An Analysis of the Mataga Jataka Justin Meiland 5. Yogic and Political Power among the Nath Siddhas of North India David Gordon White 6. Ascetics' Rights in Early 19th Century Jaipur (Rajasthan) Catherine Clémentin-Ojha Part II: Contemporary 7. Guru and Politics in India: Public 'Eminences Grises'? Christophe Jaffrelot 8. The Power of the Dead: Relic Worship amongst the Jains Peter Flügel 9. Legitimacy and Power within the Dasanami Order: Sankaracarya and the Monasteries Matthew Clarke 10. Guru Bhagwan Ram and the Politics of Aghor Roxanne Poormon Gupta 11. Asceticism as Political Protest: The Self-Immolations of Vietnamese Buddhists in the 1960s Emmi Okada 12. Moderate Asceticism among the Thai Urban Middle Class: Alternative Paths to Buddhist Piety and Social Prestige Irene Stengs 13. The Quest for Salvation in Burmese Buddhism: World-Renunciation or World-Transformation Guillaume Rozenberg 14. Asceticism in the Political Language of Aung San and his Daughter Aung San Suu Kyi Gustaaf Houtman

The Making of Western Indology Royal Asiatic Society Books

Ludo Rocher and Rosanne Rocher, both of the University of Pennsylvania, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 384pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-33601-7; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Henry Thomas Colebrooke was an East India Company civil servant who became the father of modern Indology. He embodies the significant passage from the speculative yearnings attendant on eighteenth century colonial expansion, to the professional, transnational ethos of nineteenth century intellectual life and scholarly enquiry. Written by renowned academics in the field of Indology, and drawing on new sources, this book traces, explains and evaluates Colebrooke's importance. This modern biography will contribute to the reassessment of Oriental studies that is currently taking place.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

45 1. From Heir to the Crown to Turnspit (London, 1765–1782) 2. Against the Grain (Rural Bengal, 1783–1794) 3. Law and Sanskrit (Mirzapur, 1794–1801) 4. Matter of Duty (Calcutta, 1802–1807) 5. Theorist of the Bengal Government (Calcutta, 1807–1814) 6.

Paragon of Scholarship (London, 1815–1837) 7. Legacy

The Rise of the Ottoman Empire Royal Asiatic Society Books

Edited by Colin Heywood, University of Hull, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-7007-1500-8; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Wittek's The Rise of the Ottoman Empire was first published by the Royal Asiatic Society in 1938, and has been out of print for more than a quarter of a century. The opportunity has been taken at the present reissue of Wittek's 1937 London lectures to bring together in one volume translations of his other studies on Ottoman history, dating mainly from his Brussels years. The majority of these other studies – Two Chapters on the History of Rûm , The Sultan of Rûm , Religious Warriors in the early Ottoman State and From the Defeat at Ankara to the Conquest of Constantinople – were originally delivered in French (in one case German) at seminars or conferences in non-Nazi Europe in the mid to late 1930s. The journals in which they were originally published are for the most part inaccessible except in specialist libraries, it seems, in a period when Wittek's activities as an Ottoman historian are coming under increasing study within the Anglo-Saxon world of scholarship. In an increasingly monoglot age, his luminous and persuasive prose and historical insights should be made accessible to a wider English-reading audience. An edited introduction sets Wittek's work in its historical and historiographical context for the benefit of those students of later and present generations who were not privileged to experience it first hand.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Sultan of Rum 2. Two Chapters in the History of the Turks of Rum 3. Fighters for the Faith in the Ottoman Empire 4. From Defeat at Ankara to Victory at Constantinople 5. The Rise of the Ottoman Empire

Building Bangalore C. John Stallmeyer, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-78084-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Bangalore is one of India’s fastest growing and most important cities. This book studies the city and directly examines its built environment with relation to information and communications technology (ICT) development. The transformations taking place in Bangalore are occurring in many cities that are competing in the new informational economy. After a brief discussion of ICT development, its origins in Silicon Valley, California, and the informational urbanism that accompanies it, the book presents a history of Bangalore’s urban development and the emergence of the ICT industry there. Using this historical analysis and the geography of ICT development, the author identifies several case study areas where ICT development is transforming the built environment. In order to understand the various ways that ICT is influencing the built environment as well as how historical urban fabric continues to influence ICT development in unexpected ways, each case study area is analyzed in detail. As this ICT development increasingly transforms and taxes the social, cultural, and physical infrastructures of the city, it becomes progressively more unsustainable. The final chapter speculates on the future of informational urbanism and its sustainability as a social, political, economic and ecological model. Suggesting that the development in Bangalore over the last 20 years represents an informational cascade, the case studies illustrate that local information has the potential to alter the course of ICT development and therefore to overturn this informational cascade leading to a more sustainable urban future, one that profits from the city’s regional advantages.

CONTENTS Prologue 1. Informational Production and City/Urban Space 2. Bangalore: Context and Continuum 3. Electronics City: The Image Made Manifest 4. Indiranagar: Domesticating ICT 5. The CBD: Reconstructing the Cantonment 6. The Promise of Local Contours.

Epilogue

The European Union and Central Asia Edited by Jenniver Sehring, University of Wuerzburg, Germany and Alexander Warkotsch, King’s College London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

46 www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56236-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the European Union’s policy towards the five Central Asian states, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan and Uzbekistan. The growing importance of Central Asia to the EU has been expressed by an increase in EU’s regional resource allocation and the formal specification of areas of co-operation between the EU and Central Asia, including human rights, trade, education, environmental issues and energy. The analysis focuses on the EU’s Central Asia strategy and provides an evaluation of the EU’s performance in meeting its policy goals in the region. In particular, the book identifies and assesses European interests in the region and introduces the EU’s set of instruments for safeguarding them. Against a set of performance indicators, the book examines the extent to which these interests have been achieved or are likely to be achieved in the short-and medium term.

Furthermore, the book assesses the international environment in which the EU conducts its policy in Central Asia and identifies obstacles to and opportunities for the advancing of own interests through the presence of other international actors, such as , Russia, China, OSCE, and the United Nations, in the region. More generally, in providing substantial analysis of the fields in which the EU currently strengthens its engagement, the book contributes to a better understanding for the pitfalls of overall stability in Central Asia.

CONTENTS Preface Ambassador (ret.) Klaus W. Grewlich Part 1: Introduction 1. A Brief History of EU-CA Cooperation Alexander Warkotsch and Jenniver Sehring 2. The Central Asia Strategy: An Exercise in EU Foreign Policy Andrea Schmitz Part 2: The Framework of EUCentral Asian Cooperation 3. The Tool-kit of EU-Central Asian Cooperation Sigita Urdze 4. EU member-states in Central Asia Jackie Gower 5. EU-Central Asian Bilateral Cooperation Nargis Kassenova Part 3: Fields of Cooperation 6. Security Assistance and Border Management John Heathershaw and Katarzyna Czerniecka 7. Human Rights, Rule of Law, and Democratization Alexander Warkotsch 8. Youth and Higher Education Askat Dukenbaev and Martha Merrill 9. Economic Development, Trade and Investment Martin Spechler 10. Energy Cooperation: The Southern Gas Transport Corridor Roland Götz 11. Environmental Sustainability and Water Lena Partzsch and Jenniver Sehring 12. Inter-Cultural Dialogue, the Dialogue of Civilizations or Engaging "Islam" in Central Asia Tim Epkenhans Part 4: Conclusion 13. The EU and Central Asian Geopolitics Alexander Warkotsch 14. EU and Central Asia: A View from Central Asia Murat Laumulin 15. The EU in Central Asia: From Underdog to Potent Force? Alexander Warkotsch and Jenniver Sehring

International Mobility and the Transformation of Global Capitalism Anthony P. D'Costa, Copenhagen Business School, Denmark PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56495-3; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION International mobility is not new as people have moved throughout history, voluntarily and forcibly, for personal, familial, economic, and professional reasons. Yet, the mobility of technical talent in the global economy is a relatively new phenomenon, largely voluntary, structurally determined by market forces, and influenced by immigration policies. In particular, the rise of the new economy of information and communications technologies and tradable services has created an unprecedented demand for information technology workers and professionals. This economy also embodies the circulation of brain power, as opposed to simple brain drain of earlier decades, thereby inducing heightened competition among nations to secure and retain talent. This book demonstrates the processes underlying the uneven and interconnected development of the world economy by investigating the extent to which rich countries are becoming dependent on the supply of technical professionals from developing countries, the reasons for this reliance, the beneficiaries of such mobility, how institutions such as states and businesses are coping with talent imbalances at the national and global levels, and some of the inegalitarian social consequences of talent mobility. Based on this analysis the book provides both a theoretical and empirical understanding of the dynamics of the contemporary world economy, driven by the twin forces of exploitation of unskilled labor and economic mobilization of highly skilled professionals. In this accumulation model labor markets for technical talent are regulated by state intervention in technical education, immigration policies, and national mobilization of talent for international competitiveness.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Global Economy and the New International Division of Labor 3. The Movement of Global Talent 4. The Global Supply of Talent from China and India 5. Foreign Talent in Japan 6. Institutional Barriers: American and Japanese Outsourcing Patterns 7. The Emerging Regional Division of Labor in Asian Economies 8. Conclusion: The Importance of Talent Mobility to Capital Accumulation and the Global Economy

The Political Economy of East Asian Development Jeffrey Henderson, University of Bristol, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54791-8; September 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

47 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION From the re-emergence of Japan as an industrial power in the 1950s through to the contemporary rise of China as a potential economic-political behemoth, the story of East Asian development has been central to any serious analysis of the dynamics and trajectory of the global political economy. This book examines the key political-economic issues of East Asian development: the relation between the state and markets; the changing nature of economic governance and its relation to inequality; and the rise of China and its international consequences. Very few books consider the international consequences of China’s rise nor the relationship with inequality. This book engages with relevant issues and debates, written by an acknowledged expert in the field in an open, nontechnical language making it useful as an advanced textbook not only for East Asian studies, but more generally in international political economy and development studies.

CONTENTS Introduction: Making Sense of East Asian Development. 1. On the Making of the East Asian Miracle. 2. The Role of the State in the Economic Transformation of East Asia. 3. Danger and Opportunity in the Asia Pacific. 4. The Economic Crises of the late 1990s.5.

Governing Growth and Inequality: the relevance of strategic economic planning. 6. The Limits of Industrialisation in Malaysia (with Richard Phillips). 7. China and the Coming Global-Asian Era. Conclusion: East Asia in the 21 st Century.

Routledge Handbook of Central Asian Politics Edited by Reuel R. Hanks, Oklahoma State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $199.00; 246x174 mm; 368pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77676-9; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Since achieving independence in 1991, the five states of Central Asia have increasingly gained geopolitical, economic and strategic significance. There are several reasons for the region’s rise in importance. Geographic location, at the intersection of Russia, South Asia, China and the Middle East, gives Central Asia a crucial role in the relationships between all these key regions. The Central Asian countries clearly recognize their new role in the world, and in the last decade have entered into strategic alliances. The impact of the region on the global energy supply and markets, due to some countries holding potentially vast pools of oil and natural gas, is well documented, and the forward positioning of armed forces by the United States and Russia in Central Asia highlight the strategic dimension in the “war on terror.” The time period covered in the Handbook is contemporary, with a focus on the dynamics and causes behind current issues in the region. Central Asia here centres on the five former Soviet republics of Kazakhstan, Uzbekistan, Tajikistan, Kyrgyzstan and Turkmenistan. The book is structured around four general themes, which contain topically-focused chapters addressing the crucial components of each theme, across the five Central Asian states. This academic Handbook , produced by experts on the region’s complex politics, fill a void in the existing litereature. It is much needed to provide an in depth understanding of political issues in Central Asia.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Security and Stability 1. The Politicization of Islam 2. The Status of Minority Populations and Interethnic Conflict 3. Border Issues Between Central Asian States 4. Water Resources and Stability .e.g Military Power and Capacity Part 2: Development of Political Institutions and National Integration 5. Development of Institutions/Civil Society 6. Democratization of Political System 7. Construction of National Identity 8. Corruption, Patronage and Clan Politics 9. Role and Development of Media 10. Educational Reform Part 3: Issues in Political Economy 11. Economic Development and Political Issues 12. The Drug Trade 13.

Human Trafficking and the Status of Women 14. Internal and External Migration 15. Environmental Degradation 16. Infrastructure and Communications Part 4: International Relations 17. Geopolitics and International Organizations 18. Relations with Russia 19.

Relations with U.S. 20. Relations with South Asia (Afghanistan, Pakistan, India) 21. Relations with China 22. Relations with the EU 23. Geopolitics of Oil and Energy

Routledge Handbook of Indian Politics Edited by Atul Kohli, Princeton University, USA and Prerna Singh, Harvard University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $199.00; 246x174 mm; 480pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77685-1; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION India’s growing economic and socio-political importance on the global stage has triggered an increased interest in that country.

Scholars, policy analysts, students and the curious layperson alike are keen to gain a basic understanding of the ways in which the world’s largest democracy functions. As a result, there is at present an unprecedented need for a ready reference that provides a concise but comprehensive introduction to the central themes of Indian politics and this Handbook fills this niche. Chapters are structured along the themes of state, society, and the politics that links the two in the context of post-Independence India. In the section entitled ‘The State’ a spectrum of India’s leaders; institutions, such as political parties and federalism; economic growth and social development; and politics in different states are examined. The section on ‘Society’ analyzes identity politics; the relationship

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

48 between religion and society; and various aspects of civil society. The final section – ‘International Perspectives’ – analyzes India’s foreign relations as well as a selection of national security issues. The contributions are written by experts in their respective field, and consequently, the handbook offers an invigorating initiation into the seemingly daunting and complex terrain of Indian politics. It is targeted primarily towards academics, policy analysts, researchers and graduates as well as undergraduate students.

CONTENTS Introduction: Atul Kohli and Prerna Singh, Princeton University (1) State 1.1. Historical legacy (1.1.1) The Colonial Inheritance 1.2 Leaders (1.2.1) Gandhi (1.2.2) The Nehruvian Legacy (1.2.3) The Iron Man: Patel and the Integration of India (1.2.3) Indira’s India (1.2.4) India’s Minority Leaders (1.2.5) The Poet Prime Minister 1.3 Political Institutions Political Parties (1.3.1) The Congress System and its Decline (1.3.2) The Rise of the BJP (1.3.3) The Emerging Influence of Regional and Caste-based Parties/ Emergence of coalition politics (1.3.4) Elections and Electoral Behavior (1.3.5) Judiciary (1.3.6) The Bureaucracy (1.3.7) Panchayati Raj Institutions Federalism (1.3.8) Nature and construction of India’s federal structure (1.3.9) Centre-State Relations (including challenges to the centre - Kashmir, Punjab, North East) 1.4 Economic and Social Development (1.4.1) India’ economic development (1.4.2) Business and politics (1.4.3) The Politics of Redistribution (1.4.4) Corruption (1.4.5) The Politics of Public Goods Provision (1.4.6) Unemployment, labour regulations and trade unions (1.4.7) Outsourcing 1.5 A View from the States (1.5.1) Uttar Pradesh (1.5.2) Kerala (1.5.3) Tamil Nadu (1.5.4) West Bengal (1.5.5) Bihar (2) Society 2.1 Identity Politics (2.1.1) Language Politics: tbc (2.1.2) Caste Politics (2.1.3) Class politics (2.1.4) Reservations (2.1.5) Hindu-Muslim conflict and Civic life (2.1.6) Hindu-Muslim conflict and Party Competition 2.2. Religion and Society (2.2.1) Religion and Politics (2.2.2) Muslims in Indian Politics 2.3. Civil society Social Movements and Agrarian Struggles (2.3.1) Dalit movements in India (2.3.2) Agrarian Struggles Gender politics (2.3.2) Women’s movements Environmental Movements (2.3.3) The Chipko Movement (2.3.4) The Narmada Bachao Andolan Other aspects (2.3.5) Human rights issues (2.3.6) Role of NGOs in politics (2.3.7) Migration and the Indian diaspora (including India’s politics towards the diaspora and the role of the diaspora) (3) International perspective (3.1) India and the World (3.2) India in Asia (3.3) IndoUS relations (3.4) India-European relations (3.5) India-Russia relations National security issues (3.6) India’s relations with Pakistan (3.7) India and the Bomb (3.8) Security and Terrorism

Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics Edited by Paul R. Brass, University of Washington, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £110.00 $199.00; 246x174 mm; 480pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43429-4; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics examines key issues in politics of the five independent states of the South Asian region: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and Nepal. Written by experts in their respective areas, this Handbook introduces the reader to the politics of South Asia by presenting the prevailing agreements and disagreements in the literature. In the first two sections, the Handbook provides a comprehensive introduction to the modern political history of the states of the region and an overview of the independence movements in the former colonial states. The other sections focus on the political changes that have occurred in the postcolonial states since independence, as well as the successive political changes in Nepal during the same period, and the structure and functioning of the main governmental and non-governmental institutions, including the structure of the state itself (unitary or federal), political parties, the judiciary, and the military. Further, the contributors explore several aspects of the political process and political and economic change, especially issues of pluralism and national integration, political economy, corruption and criminalization of politics, radical and violent political movements, and the international politics of the region as a whole. This unique reference work provides a comprehensive and up-to-date survey of the state of the field and is an invaluable resource for students and academics interested in South Asian Studies, South Asian Politics, Comparative Politics and International Relations.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Paul R. Brass Part 1: Colonialism, Nationalism, and Independence in South Asia: India, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka 1.

India and Pakistan Ian Talbot 2. Sri Lanka’s Independence: Shadows Over a Colonial Graft Nira Wickramasinghe Part 2: Political Change, Political Parties, and the Issue of Unitary vs. Federal Forms of Government 3. Political Change, Political Structure and the Indian State Since Independence John Harriss 4. Parties and Politics in India Virginia Van Dyke 5. Pakistan’s Politics and Its Economy Shahid Javed Burki 6. Party Overinstitutionalization, Contestation and Democratic Degradation in Bangladesh Harry Blair 7. Politics and Governance in Post-Independence Sri Lanka Neil DeVotta 8. Trajectories of Democracy and Restructuring of the State in Nepal Krishna Hachhethu and David N. Gellner Federalism and Centre-State Relations 9. The Old and the New Federalism in Independent India Lloyd I. Rudolph and Susanne Hoeber Rudolph Part 3: The Judiciary 10. India’s Judiciary: Imperium in Imperio?

Shylashri Shankar 11. Balancing Act: Prudence, Impunity and Pakistan’s Jurisprudence Paula R. Newberg 12. Confronting Constitutional Curtailments: Attempts to Rebuild Independence of the Judiciary in Bangladesh Sara Hossein and Tanjib-ul Alam 13.

Executive Sovereignty: The Judiciary in Sri Lanka Shylashri Shankar Part 4: Pluralism and National Integration: Language Issues 14.

Politics of Language in India E. Annamalai 15. Language Problems and Politics in Pakistan Tariq Rahman Part 5: Crises of National Unity 16. Crises of National Unity in India: Punjab, Kashmir and the Northeast Gurharpal Singh 17. Communal and Caste Politics and Conflicts in India Steven I. Wilkinson 18. Ethnic and Islamic Militancy in Pakistan Mohammad Waseem 19. Ethnic Conflict and the Civil War in Sri Lanka Jayadeva Uyangoda Part 6: Political Economy India 20. The Political Economy of Development in India Since Independence Stuart Corbridge 21. The Political Economy of Agrarian Change in India Jan Breman Sri Lanka 22. Economic Development and Socio-Political Change in Sri Lanka since Independence W. D. Lakshman Part 7: Comparative Chapters 23. The Militaries of South Asia Stephen P. Cohen 24. Corruption and the Criminalization of Politics in South Asia Stanley A. Kochanek 25.

Radical and Violent Political Movements Sumanta Banerjee 26. The International Politics of South Asia Vernon Hewitt. Bibliography

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

49

The Philosophy of Adam Smith The Adam Smith Review

Edited by Vivienne Brown, Open University, UK and Samuel Fleischacker, University of Illinois at Chicago, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56256-0; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Adam Smith’s contribution to economics is well-recognised but in recent years scholars have been exploring anew the multidisciplinary nature of his works. The Adam Smith Review is a refereed annual review that provides a unique forum for interdisciplinary debate on all aspects of Adam Smith’s works, his place in history, and the significance of his writings for the modern world. It is aimed at facilitating debate between scholars working across the humanities and social sciences, thus emulating the transdisciplinary reach of the Enlightenment world which Smith helped to shape. The fifth volume of the series is a special issue to commemorate the 250 th anniversary of the publication of The Theory of Moral Sentiments . Contributors to this volume include Stephen Darwall, Fonna Forman-Barzilai, Patrick Frierson, Charles L. Griswold Jr, Ryan Patrick Hanley, Alice MacLachlan, Bence Nanay, Angelica Nuzzo, D.D. Raphael, Ian Simpson Ross, Emma Rothschild, Geoffrey Sayre-McCord, Arby Ted Siraki and Robert Urquhart, who discuss: The phenomenology of moral life Sympathy, moral judgment and the impartial spectator Issues such as aesthetics, value, honour, resentment, praise-worthiness, cosmopolitanism and religion CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Moral phenomenology 1. The virtue of TMS 1759 D.D. Raphael 2 . The Theory of Moral Sentiments and the inner life Emma Rothschild 3. The standpoint of morality in Adam Smith and Hegel Angelica Nuzzo Part 2: Sympathy and moral judgment 4. Tales of the self: Adam Smith’s reply to Rousseau Charles L. Griswold Jr. 5. Adam Smith’s concept of sympathy and its contemporary interpretations Bence Nanay 6. Smith’s ambivalence about honour Stephen Darwall 7. Sentiments and spectators: Adam Smith’s theory of moral judgment Geoffrey Sayre-McCord 8. Smith’s anti-cosmopolitanism Fonna Forman-Barzilai 9. Resentment and moral judgment in Smith and Butler Alice MacLachlan Part 3: Economics, religion, aesthetics and value theory 10. Adam Smith’s problems: individuality and the paradox of sympathy Robert Urquhart 11. Scepticism and naturalism in Adam Smith Ryan Patrick Hanley 12. Adam Smith’s solution to the paradox of tragedy Arby Ted Siraki 13. Smithian intrinsic value Patrick Frierson Memoir on Adam Smith’s life 14. Adam Smith’s smile: his years at Balliol College, 1740–6, in retrospect Ian Simpson Ross

Insidious Workplace Behavior Applied Psychology Series

Edited by Jerald Greenberg, Ohio State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £49.95 $79.95; 229x152 mm; 330pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-84872-858-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Insidious Workplace Behavior (IWB) refers to low-level, pervasive acts of deviance directed at individual or organizational targets.

Because of its inherently stealthy nature, scientists have paid little attention to IWB, allowing us to know very little about it. With this book, that now is changing. The present volume—the first to showcase this topic—presents original essays by top organizational scientists who share the most current thinking about IWB. Contributors examine, for example, the many forms that IWB takes, focusing on its antecedents, consequences, and moderators. They also highlight ways that organizational leaders can manage and constrain IWB so as to attenuate its adverse effects. And to promote both theory and practice in IWB, contributors also discuss the special problems associated with researching IWB and strategies for overcoming them. Aimed at students, scholars, and practitioners in the organizational sciences—especially industrial-organizational psychology, organizational behavior, and human resource management—this seminal volume promises to be inspire research and practice for years to come.

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction M. S. Edwards & J. Greenberg, What is Insidious Workplace Behavior?. Part 2: Forms of Insidious Workplace Behavior J . H. Neuman & L. Keashly , Means, Motive Opportunity and Aggressive Workplace Behavior. M. A. Seabright, M. L. Ambrose, & M. Schminke , Two Images of Workplace Sabotage. D. A. Jones , Getting Even for Interpersonal Mistreatment in the Workplace: Triggers of Revenge Motives and Behavior. C. M. Pearson , Research on Workplace Incivility and its Connection to Practice. C. Fitzgerald Boxer, T. E. Ford , Sexist Humor in the Workplace: A Case of Subtle Harassment. S. L. Glover , Lying to Bosses, Subordinates, Peers and the Outside World: Motivations and Consequences. Part 3: Methodological Issues S. M. Jex, J. L. Burnfield Geimer, O. Clark, A. M. Guidroz, J. E. Yugo, Challenges and Recommendations in the Measurement of Workplace Incivility. P. E. Spector, O. B. Rodopman , Methodological Issues in Studying Insidious Workplace Behavior. Part 4: Integration M. S. Edwards & J. Greenberg , Issues and Challenges in Studying Insidious Workplace Behavior.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

50

Building Big Business in Russia BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Yuko Adachi, Sophia University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 190pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46339-3; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the development of big business in Russia since the onset of market oriented reform in the early 1990s. It explains how privatized post-Soviet enterprises, many of which made little sense as business units, were transformed into functional firms able to operate in the environment of a market economy. It provides detailed case studies of three key companies – Yukos Oil Company, Siberian (Russian) Aluminium and Norilsk Nickel – all of which played a key role in Russia’s economic recovery after 1998, describing how these companies were created, run and have developed. It shows how Russian businesses during the 1990s routinely relied on practices not entirely compatible with formal rules, in particular in the area of corporate governance. The book fully explores the critical role played by informal corporate governance practices - such as share dilution, transfer pricing, asset stripping, limiting shareholders access to votes, and bankruptcy ‘to order’ - as Russian big business developed during the 1990s. Unlike other studies on Russian corporate governance, this book highlights the ambiguous impact of informal corporate governance practices on the companies involved as commercial entities, and suggests that although their use proved costly to Russia’s business reputation, they helped core groups of owners/managers at the time to establish coherent business firms. Overall, the book shows that we cannot understand the nature of current economic changes in Russia without recognising the crucial role played by informal corporate governance practices in the creation and development of big business in post-Soviet Russia.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Russia’s Corporate Governance Abuses 3. Turning Post-Soviet Enterprises into Business Firms 4. Yukos: Building a Coherent Vertically Integrated Company 5. SibAl (RusAl): Regional Smelter to a Leading World Company 6. Norilsk Nickel: Development of a Former State Concern

Bubbles, Law and Financial Regulation The Economics of Legal Relationships

Erik F. Gerding, University of New Mexico, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77939-5; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book aims to unpack the complex economic relationships between law, asset price bubbles and financial regulation. The failure to thoroughly understand these interactions has had severe consequences, as law has proven ill-equipped to prevent or mitigate financial crises caused by bubbles. Bubbles represent prolonged, but unsustainable booms in the price of assets, such as securities or real estate. They form due to herd behavior by investors and other economic feedback loops. These same feedback loops render financial regulations designed for normal market conditions ineffective or counterproductive. Unpacking the interactions of bubbles and law reveals common threads among the epidemic of financial fraud in the Enron era, the subprime crisis, and previous financial crises throughout the world. A systematic examination of these interactions points to reforms for making regulation more effective and markets more stable.

CONTENTS Chapter 1. The Economics of Bubbles, Chapter 2. A Historical Overview of Asset Price Bubbles and Laws, Chapter 3. Epidemics of Fraud and Bubbles: Explaining the Correlation, Chapter 4. The Cycle of Regulation and De-regulation, Chapter 5. Laws Against Bubbles: an Appraisal, Chapter 6. Law and Credit: Close Substitutes for Monetary Policy, Chapter 7. Law, Risk-taking, and Resiliency from Collapsed Bubbles, Chapter 8. Regulatory Boundaries and Regulatory Competition: Of Monocultures and Dominoes, Chapter 9. Nonlinearity and Procyclicality, Chapter 10. Conclusion: Towards More Robust Financial Regulation

Norms and Values in Law and Economics The Economics of Legal Relationships

Aristides Hatzis, University of Athens, Greece PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-40410-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

51 The Law and Economics approach to law dominates the intellectual discussion of nearly every doctrinal area of law in the US and its influence is growing steadily outside America as well. This year marks the thirtieth anniversary of the publication of Richard Posner’s Economic Analysis of Law , the book that launched the Law and Economics movement. The sixth edition of the book was published earlier this year, this time competing against over twenty textbooks, collections and casebooks on law and economics. Although there has been phenomenal growth in this area questions remain. Why has Law and Economics movement become so successful? What is the current status of the Chicago School? What are the alternative theories and how much influence do they exert? What can be considered mainstream today? What are the norms and values underlying this impressive body of research? These issues, amongst others, are thoroughly explored by the contributors, including Posner himself, Gerrit de Geest and Thomas Ulen in this important book.

CONTENTS Norms and Values in the Economic Approach to Law. Engagement with Economics: The New Hybrids of Family Law/Law and Economics Thinking. The Inevitability of Kaldor-Hicks Criterion. The Problematics of the Pareto Principle. Law, Economics and Society. New Institutional Economics and Legal Theory: Why New Institutional Economics Has Failed to Provide a Viable Alternative to the Law and Economics Movement. Choosing (Our)selves: The Limits of Identity and Interests in Law and Economics.

Norms in Behavioral Law and Economics. The Theory of Value Dilemma: A Critique of the Economic Analysis of Criminal Law. Overcoming Law and Economics. Comparing Law and Economics to its Rivals. A Coase-mas Carol: The Coase Theorem as the Ghost of Law and Economics, Past, Present and Future. Flawed Foundations: The Philosophical Critique of (a Particular Type of) Economics. Functional Law and Economics. The Primacy of Norms. Incentives and Constitutional Compliance

Patent Policy The Economics of Legal Relationships

Pia Weiss, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48105-2; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Intellectual property rights have become increasingly important for our modern economies in recent years. Although the entire patent system has a profound effect on the decision of firms of whether to conduct research and at which volume, patent law is the heart of the entire patent system. Therefore, this book focuses on the economic effects of certain provisions in patent law by using economic models dedicated to patent policy. The first part of the book presents a brief overview over the history of patent systems and introduces the main components of modern patent systems. A short introduction of the principal provisions of US patent law constitutes the centre of the subsequent analysis as it serves as a link between law and economics. The second part presents core economic models for central provisions, collecting the most fundamental results in a national framework in the field of literature. Part three is concerned with selected provisions of patent law in an international framework. It provides valuable insights into the situation of developing countries which are the chief recipients of technology transfers. Patent Policy will be of interest to researchers interested in the field of modelling patent policy. It can be also used as supplementary text in courses in Industrial Organization, Innovation Economics and Law and Economics.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Development of Patent Systems and Philosophical Foundations 3. An Introduction to Patent Law and Policy Instruments 4. Statistical Facts and Empirical Evidence 5. The Optimal Patent Term 6. Patent Scope 7. Patent Breadth 8. The Nonobviousness Standard 9. New Patentable Subject Matters 10. Different Non-obviousness Standards

The Rule of Law The Economics of Legal Relationships

Edited by Maria Dakolias, the World Bank, Washington DC, USA and Sandra E. Oxner PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77253-2; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Foreign policy necessitates that many developing and developed countries advocate and promote the rule of law; the rule of law is seen as a sine qua non for development and peace. In this book Maria Dakolias and Sandra E. Oxner argue that the establishment of the rule of law if not a project but a value and that the challenge is achieving the broad objectives set out under the rule of law because until now it has been difficult to demonstrate success. Lack of demonstration, however, does not mean that time has been wasted. It simply means that it is now time to demonstrate how reforms related to the justice sector and the rule of law have and will continue to contribute to economic development. This book reflects an evolving methodology in the development of the rule of law, containing seven perspectives using different methods to demonstrate its impact. The main findings are that experience has given us opportunities to improve how rule of law is supported. However, there is no established methodology to measure success. These chapters contribute to the conversation of methods to evaluate and monitor reforms. It also provides a way to bring together practitioners and

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

52 academicians in their common search for methodologies that may be successful in demonstrating that rule of law can and does make a difference. It is also hoped that this work will stimulate further research and collaboration between practitioners and academicians.

CONTENTS 1. How have the Objectives Evolved to Promoting the Rule of Law? 2. What has Influenced this Evolution? 3. What has been Achieved until Now? 4. What are the Greatest Difficulties/Risks Today? 5. What May Some of the Challenges be to Make Such Changes? 6. What Kind of Methodology Should be Promoted? 7. What Should the Priorities be in the Justice Sector Area? 8. What can be Expected in the Justice Sector in the Next Ten Years/Future?

The Bank for International Settlements Global Institutions

Kevin V. Ozgercin, SUNY College at Old Westbury, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $110.00; 216x138 mm; 196pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77929-6; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Despite playing a pivotal role in the liberalization and globalization of finance since the late 1950s, and being the principal center for bank supervision, the Bank for International Settlements (BIS) is perhaps the most obscure and under-researched of the major global financial institutions. This book offers readers the only available definitive guide to understanding the BIS’s identity and institutional make-up, as well as its role in the global financial system. It examines the internal governance and policy outputs of the BIS and provides a critical analysis of its evolution as the principal international center for central bank cooperation and the establishment international rules and standards for supervising internationally active banks. The BIS is often depicted as playing a supportive role to the IMF, G-8, World Bank, OECD, and regional development banks in the management of global finance. Ozgercin illuminates the role of the BIS in the existing architecture of global financial institutions, thus highlighting significant institutional differences. The proposed book will illustrate that compared to the other major global financial institutions, which are linked directly to governments through their treasuries, the BIS constitutes a uniquely independent, market-led approach to global financial governance, emphasizing the self-regulation of market institutions. A comprehensive yet concise and accessible introduction to the BIS, it will be of interest to students from a wide range of disciplines including Politics and International Studies, History, Sociology, Economics, and Finance.

Regional Development Banks Global Institutions

Jonathan Strand, University of Nevada, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $130.00; 216x138 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77594-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The regional development banks (RDBs) are important global institutions but often are overshadowed by more widely studied institutions such as the World Bank Group and International Monetary Fund (IMF). In the past decade, high profile protests against World Bank, IMF, and World Trade Organization policies have overshadowed the political role of the RDBs. Designed to provide readers with the definitive guide to the RDBs, Jonathan Strand exposes the political nature of RDB development lending and demonstrates the need to include the RDBs in any discussion of reform of the global economic architecture.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. What are the Regional Development Banks? 3. Who Controls the Regional Development Banks? 4. Are Regional Development Bank Projects Effective? 5. How Do the Regional Development Banks Collaborate with Other IGOs? 6. What is the Relationship between the Regional Development Banks and Civil Society? 7. Conclusions

Complex Economics The Graz Schumpeter Lectures

Alan Kirman, l’Université d’Aix-Marseille lll and l’Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales, France PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56855-5; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The economic crisis is also a crisis for economic theory. Most analyses of the evolution of the crisis invoke three themes, contagion, networks and trust, yet none of these play a major role in standard macroeconomic models. What is needed is a theory in which these

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

53 aspects are central. The direct interaction between individuals, firms and banks does not simply produce imperfections in the functioning of the economy but is the very basis of the functioning of a modern economy. This book suggests a way of analysing the economy which takes this point of view. The economy should be considered as a complex adaptive system in which the agents constantly react to, influence and are influenced by, the other individuals in the economy. In such systems which are familiar from statistical physics and biology for example, the behaviour of the aggregate cannot be deduced from the behaviour of the average, or "representative" individual. Just as the organised activity of an ants’ nest cannot be understood from the behaviour of a "representative ant" so macroeconomic phenomena should not be assimilated to those associated with the "representative agent". This book provides examples where this can clearly be seen. The examples range from Schelling’s model of segregation, to contributions to public goods, the evolution of buyer seller relations in fish markets, to financial models based on the foraging behaviour of ants. The message of the book is that coordination rather than efficiency is the central problem in economics. How do the myriads of individual choices and decisions come to be coordinated? How does the economy or a market, "self organise" and how does this sometimes result in major upheavals, or to use the phrase from physics, "phase transitions"? The sort of system described in this book is not in equilibrium in the standard sense, it is constantly changing and moving from state to state and its very structure is always being modified. The economy is not a ship sailing on a well-defined trajectory which occasionally gets knocked off course. It is more like the slime described in the book "emergence", constantly reorganising itself so as to slide collectively in directions which are neither understood nor necessarily desired by its components.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Structure of Interaction 3. Fish Markets: An Example of the Emergence of Aggregate Coordination 4. Financial Markets: Bubbles, Herds and Crashes 5. Public Goods: A coordination problem 6. Segregation: Schelling’s Model 7. Conclusion

The Aging Consumer Marketing and Consumer Psychology Series

Edited by Aimee Drolet, UCLA, USA, Norbert Schwarz and Carolyn Yoon, both of University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £44.95 $70.00; 229x152 mm; 298pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-84872-810-3; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION At present, about 45 million Americans are over the age of 65, and by 2020, one out of every six Americans will be 65 or older. These statistics are reflective of a worldwide phenomenon in developing and developed countries alike since the Industrial Revolution. This edited volume, written by experts in many fields, examines the economic and psychological research behind how aging consumer behave, make decisions, and choose in the marketplace. The book takes stock of what is known, identifies gaps and open questions, and outlines an agenda for future research. It covers topics from the individual to the societal level of analysis.

CONTENTS Preface. Section 1: What Changes with Aging? A. H. Gutchess , Cognitive Psychology and Neuroscience of Aging. M. D. Hurd, S. Rohwedd er, Spending Patterns in the Older Population. A. Drolet, L. Lau-Gesk, P. Williams, H. G. Jeong , Socioemotional Selectivity Theory: Implications for Consumer Research. Section 2: Decision Making E. Peters, Aging-related Changes in Decision Making . G. Burtless , Do Workers Prepare Rationally for Retirement?. S. L. Wood, J. A. Shinogle, M. M. McInnes , New Choices, New Information: Do Choice Abundance and Information Complexity Hurt Aging Consumers’ Medical Decision Making?. C. Folkman Curasi, L. L. Price, E. J. Arnould , The Ageing Consumer and Intergenerational Transmission of Cherished Possessions.

Section 3: Older Consumers in the Marketplace C. M. Bonifield, C. A. Cole , Comprehension of Marketing Communications among Older Consumers. R. Lambert-Pandraud, G. Laurent , Impact of Age on Brand Choice. C . Yoon, F. Feinberg, N. Schwarz , Why Do Older Consumers Tell Us They Are More Satisfied?. H. R. Moody, S. Sood , Age-branding. N. Charness, M. Champion, R. Yordon , Designing Products for Older Consumers: A Human Factors Perspective.

Seeking Sustainability New Political Economy

G. J. Paton, University of Sydney, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56610-0; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The ideas of neoliberalism perpetuate a disembedded and dichotomised view of economy-ecology relations. The renewed interest in climate change and sustainability attests to the lack of progress achieved by the ‘sustainable development’ regime and to the need for more appropriate frameworks for guiding social organisation toward ecological sustainability. This book is born of the need for a critique of current approaches to environmental policy and governance and the search for alternative sustainability frameworks.

Utilising a conceptual approach based on the Polanyian concept of ‘embeddedness’, this book argues that the links between economic theory, neo-liberalism, and the current regime of sustainable development, have rendered ‘sustainability’ a discursive frame in the

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

54 service of economic rather than ecological goals. In rejecting the integrity of ‘environmental neo-liberalism’, Paton argues there are some clear points of divergence between liberalism and neo-liberalism. She subsequently examines separately the impact on liberalism of efforts to integrate environmental concerns in order to determine if therein lies the potential for an effective reformist politics of ‘ecological sustainability’.

CONTENTS Introduction, 1. Ecological Political Economy, Part 1: Theorising Embeddedness for Sustainability , 2. Ecological Sustainability and Embeddedness, 3. Embeddedness in Liberalism and Neo-liberalism, Part 2: Policy and Governance for Sustainability , 4. Changing Discourses of Sustainability, 5. Environmental Neo-liberalism, Part 3: Greening Liberal Theory for Sustainability , 6. The Substantive Roots of Liberalism, 7. Economic Liberalism, 8. Political Liberalism, 9. Social Liberalism, 10. The Sustainability of Liberalism

Worker Identity, Agency and Economic Development New Political Economy

Elizabeth Hill, University of Sydney, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56609-4; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION More than nine out of every ten working women in India are employed in the informal economy, unprotected by labour laws and excluded from basic forms of social security. They work as daily labourers in the fields, small producers and industrial outworkers in their own homes and as vendors on the streets. These workers typically receive very low wages and experience extreme forms of social, economic and political marginalisation. This book examines what types of interventions can improve the well-being of women working in the Indian informal economy. Using the case study of the Self Employed Women’s Association, Worker Identity, Agency and Economic Development argues that work-life reform for informal women workers has moral and social dimensions, as well as economic. Drawing on the work of social philosopher Axel Honneth, the book argues that worker agency is critical to the process of work-life reform in the informal economy. Using empirical data collected amongst SEWA members the study shows that there is a positive and developmental relationship between a worker’s identity, or psychological integrity, and her actual capacity to engage in the political economy for constructive change. The study shows that membership based organisations can promote the social foundations of recognition and respect that are critical to identity and agency, as well as provide worker’s with real opportunities to develop alternative non-exploitative economic institutions that deliver improved wages and social security. But in organizing informal workers for collective action the existing distribution of power and wealth, as well as gender privilege are challenged. The result is social conflict and sometimes violence. Conflict of this nature is endemic to the development process, but is often overlooked in development literature and policy design. The book will be of interest to development scholars and practitioners, as well as those interested in the dynamics of women’s empowerment and socio-economic change for informal economy workers.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Unraveling the Informal Sector Debate 3. Reconceptualizing Labour in the Informal Sector Debate 4. Exploring a Labour Focused Strategy for Productivity and Well-being in the Informal Economy: Background and Method 5. Mapping ‘Problems’: Work-Life Experience in the Indian Informal Economy 6. Interventions for Work-Life Improvement: The Case of the Self Employed Women’s Association 7. The Moral Dynamics of Union Membership 8. Agency, Freedom and Economic Development 9. Public Action for Economic Development 10. The Politics of Economic Development 11. Conclusion: Worker Identity, Agency and Economic Development

Computable Foundations for Economics Routledge Advances in Experimental and Computable Economics

K. Vela Velupillai, University of Trento, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £100.00 $160.00; 234x156 mm; 512pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-35567-4; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Computable Foundations for Economics is a unified collection of essays, some of which are published here for the first time and all of which have been updated for this book, on an approach to economic theory from the point of view of algorithmic mathematics. By algorithmic mathematics the author means computability theory and constructive mathematics. This is in contrast to orthodox mathematical economics and game theory, which are formalised with the mathematics of real analysis, underpinned by what is called the ZFC formalism, i.e., set theory with the axiom of choice. This reliance on ordinary real analysis and the ZFC system makes economic theory in its current mathematical mode completely non-algorithmic, which means it is numerically meaningless. The book provides a systematic attempt to dissect and expose the non-algorithmic content of orthodox mathematical economics and game theory and suggests a reformalization on the basis of a strictly rigorous algorithmic mathematics. This removes the current schizophrenia in mathematical economics and game theory, where theory is entirely divorced from algorithmic applicability – for experimental and computational exercises. The chapters demonstrate the uncomputability and non-constructivity of core areas of general equilibrium

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

55 theory, game theory and recursive macroeconomics. The book also provides a fresh look at the kind of behavioural economics that lies behind Herbert Simon’s work, and resurrects a role for the noble classical traditions of induction and verification, viewed and formalised, now, algorithmically. It will therefore be of particular interest to postgraduate students and researchers in algorithmic economics, game theory and classical behavioural economics.

CONTENTS Part I: Foundations 1. The Incomputable, the Non?constructive and the Undecidable in Mathematical Economics 2. Advanced Computational Complexity Theory from an Elementary Standpoint 3. Economic Dynamics and Computation – Recursion Theoretic Foundations for the Icarus Tradition 4: Let’s Take the Con out of Mathematical Economics Part II: General Equilibrium Theory 5.

Effectivity and Constructivity in Economic Theory 6. Algorithmic Foundations of Computable General Equilibrium Theory 7.

Uncomputability and Undecidability in Economic Theory Part III: Methodology 8. The Unreasonable Ineffectivity of Mathematics in Economics 9. A Constructive Interpretation of Sraffa’s Mathematical Economics 10. The Computable Alternative in the Mathematization of Economics Part IV: Simon’s Behavioural Economics – A Computable Vision 11. Computable Rationality 12.

Boundedly Rational Choice and Satisficing Decisions 13. Simon’s Epicurean Adventures – A Prolegomena. Appendix 1 to Part IV: Artificing a Rationally Unbounded Life. Appendix 2 to Part IV: The Logic of Discovery, Problem Solving and Retroduction.

Appendix 3 to Part IV: Herbert Simon’s Letter on Computable Economics Part V: Inductive Reflections 14. De-Mystifying Induction, Falsification and other Popperian Extravaganzas 15. Re-reading Jevons’s Principles of Science: Induction Redux 16. Impossibility of Effectively Computable Inductive Policies in a Complex Dynamic Economy. Part VI: Concluding Notes 17. Epilogue – A Research Program for the Algorithmic Social Sciences

Models of Simon Routledge Advances in Experimental and Computable Economics

K. Vela Velupillai, University of Trento, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £55.00 $100.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-31158-8; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION When Herbert Simon died in 2000, he left behind a hugely impressive legacy. This new book from one of the world's leading experts on Simon will be of great interest to the modern economist.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Computability, Constructivity and Complexity in Economics: An Overview 3. Rationality, Computability and Complexity 4. Non-Maximum, Disequilibrium Macrodynamics 5. Undecidability, Computation Universality and Minimality in Economic Dynamics 6. Effectivity and Constructivity in Economic Theory 7. Constructivity, Computability and Computers in Economic Theory: Some Cautionary Notes 8. Economic Dynamics and Computation: Resurrecting the Icarus Tradition 9. Perplexed in the Tangled Roots of the Busy Beavers Ways 10. Rational Expectations Equilibria: A Recursion Theoretic Tutorial

The Cultural and Political Economy of Recovery Routledge Advances in Heterodox Economics

Emily Chamlee-Wright, Beloit College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77804-6; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In August 2005 the nation watched as Hurricane Katrina pummelled the Gulf Coast. Residents did not just suffer the personal costs of a home that had been severely damaged or destroyed; frequently they also lost their entire neighbourhood and the social systems that under normal circumstances made their lives "work". Katrina raised the questions of whether and how communities could solve the complex social coordination problems catastrophic disaster poses, and what inhibits them from doing so? Professor Chamlee-Wright investigates not only the nature of post-disaster recovery, but the nature of the social order itself – how societies are able to achieve a level of complex social coordination that far exceeds our ability to design. By deploying the tools of both political economy and cultural economy, the book contributes to the bourgeoning literature on the social, political and economic impact of Hurricane Katrina. Through a selection of case studies, the author argues that post-disaster resilience depends crucially upon the discovery that unfolds within commercial and civil society. The book will be of particular interest to postgraduate students and researchers in economics, sociology and anthropology as well as disaster specialists.

CONTENTS Introduction: Understanding the Sources of Resilience Part I: Theoretical Frame and Methodology 1. The Nature and Causes of Social Order as Seen Through Post-Disaster Recovery 2. Qualitative Methods and the Pursuit of Economic Understanding Part II: Deploying Socially Embedded Resources in a Post-Disaster Context 3. Collective Action in the Wake of Disaster: Social Capital Rebuilding Strategies of Early Returnees 4. Social Capital, Community Narratives, and Recovery Within a Vietnamese-American Neighborhood

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

56 5. Collective Narratives and Entrepreneurial Discovery in St. Bernard Parish 6. Negotiating Structure and Agency in the Ninth Ward: Sense of Place and Divine Purpose in Post Disaster Recovery Part III: Political -Economy and Social Learning in Non-Priced Environments 7. The Deleterious Effects of Signal Noise in Post-Disaster Recovery 8. Expectations Anchoring and the Civil Society Vacuum: Lessons for Public Policy 9. Concluding Remarks Part IV: Appendices Appendix A: Demographic Summaries of Research Subjects in Neighborhoods of Interest Appendix B: Sample Interview Guide Appendix C: Primary and Secondary Theme Codes

A Critique of Environmental Economics Routledge Advances in Heterodox Economics

Robin Hahnel, American University, Washington DC, USA and Kristen Sheeran, St. Mary's College at Maryland, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49092-4; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book draws on the insights from radical political economy, institutionalist economics, ecological economics, feminist economics, and other heterodox traditions to fill-in the gaps in our understanding of the relationship between economy and ecology left by mainstream environmental economics. The goal is to provide an analysis of environmental problems and their potential solutions that environmentalists as well as others can trust, because it is pluralistic, non-dogmatic and committed to the values of ecological sustainability, economic justice, and human dignity. This book will provide those who are frustrated with the mainstream’s treatment of environmental issues alternative tools for identifying how to change institutions and policies to better preserve and restore the natural environment in ways that are more, rather than less equitable, using decision making procedures that are more, rather than less democratic.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Rethinking Economics and the Environment 3. How and Why We Misuse the Environment 4. Tragedy of the Commons 5. Environmental Policy: A Primer 6. Environmental Policy: What They Don't Tell You 7. Natural Resource Extraction: Beyond the Math 8. Global Environmental Problems and Policies 9. The Ultimate Solution 10. Conclusion

Global Advertising, Attitudes, and Audiences Routledge Advances in Management and Business Studies

Tony Wilson, University Malaysia Sarawak, Malaysia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 210pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87597-4; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84634-6; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Global Advertising, Attitudes and Audiences is a post-Mcdonaldization view of marketing power, consumer pleasure, and audience protest. The psychological process wherein consumers actively make sense of advertising and branding and integrate them with living is fundamentally important in thinking about their responses to product sold on screen. This wide-ranging book draws on forty years of media and marketing theory to present a precise perception of that process, a seven stage model of 'moments' in media marketing reception. Local understandings of global branding and marketing content traveling—often from West to East—is the main focus of Global Advertising, Attitudes and Audiences. Drawing from diverse reception studies of creative consumption, Tony Wilson develops a philosophical psychology of purchasing, testing theory against shared consumer responses in online blogospheres and offline interviews. Successive chapters interpret reception of banking, fast food, national, telecommunications and university global branding

by Chinese, Indian and Islamic Malay consumers in multi-cultural Malaysia, an Anglophone gateway to S.E. Asia. These studies are used to illustrate how people view the 'worlds' constructed by product branding.

CONTENTS Introduction Chapter 1. Audiences Articulating Advertising. Chapter 2. Beyond Attitudes: To the Audience Itself! Understanding Consumers: Interpretive Inductivism. Chapter 3. Interpreting Place Branding: Absorbing or Alienating? Chapter 4. From Productive Consumer to Reflective Citizen: A Reception Study of Advertising Academia Online. Chapter 5. Cell Phone Connections: Audiences Activating Agora. Chapter 6. Mall-eable Media Marketing: ‘Give Reality the Slip’? Chapter 7. Banks, Blogging and Reflexive Branding. Conclusion

Management Research Routledge Advances in Management and Business Studies

Edited by Bill Lee, University of Sheffield, UK and Catherine Cassell, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

57 HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $170.00; 229x152 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47217-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Management research has expanded considerably over recent decades. The impetus for such growth comes from a wide range of forces both inside and outside of the academic community stimulate and regulate its development, while the audience for which management research might be considered to be useful and the extent of that usefulness are highly contested. This book seeks to explore the forces that drive the development of management research, shape its current state and influence its future potential.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part I: Survey of the background 2. Positioning current management research (Gerard P. Hodgkinson) 3. Management research: A view from the Baltic (Asta Pundzienë) 4. Management research: a European context (Goran Svensson) 5. Management research across the world: issues, themes and perspectives (Ralph Stablein) Part II: The institutional context 6. Publishing management research (Rolf van Dick) 7. Facing ethical regulation (Emma Bell) 8. Research Audits and their consequences (Mick Rowlinson) 9. Linking management research and management education: syntheses and challenges (Steven Armstrong) Part III. Theory in management research 10. Current theoretical debates in management research (Vadake Narayanana) 11. The relationship between evidence and theory in management research (Mark Learmonth) Chapter 12: Obsessions, uses and limits to theories in management research (Christopher Humphrey) 13. The development of critical management theory (John Hassard and Mick Rowlinson) Part IV: Aims and objectives of research methods and recent advances in data collection and analysis 14. Global research: themes, issues and challenges (Elena Antonacopolou) 15. Methodological eclecticism in management research (Richard Thorpe) 16.

Handling large datasets (Marc Goergen) Part V: Applying the outputs of management research 17. The Management Researcher as practitioner (Mark Saunders) 18. Seeking relevance in management research (Robin Wensley) 19. Contributing to policymaking debates (David Heald) 20. Working with the Voluntary sector (Jenny Harrow and Karl Wilding) Part VI: Challenges for the future 21.

Challenging the gendered nature of management research (Adelina Broadbridge and Sandra Fielden) 22. Theorising after the postmodern (David Boje) 23. Developing research capacity in emergent subject areas (Rob Blackburn) 24. Building a reflexive management research (Ann Cunliffe) Conclusion: facing the future

The Economics of Social Responsibility Routledge Advances in Social Economics

Edited by Carlo Borzaga, University of Trento, Italy and Leonardo Becchetti, University of Rome, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46576-2; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers a rethinking of the burgeoning research on not-for-profit organizations and socially responsible economics. Adopting a comparative approach, the chapters explore and reinterpret the impact of social enterprises on the provision of general-interest services, work integration, microfinance, and fair trade, and show how these enterprises form the hub of an emerging economy of social responsibility. The book provides a new interpretation of social enterprises as entrepreneurial organizations that pursue social objectives and are successful due to the non-self-seeking motives of their members. This book will be of interest to postgraduate students, professionals working in the not-for-profit sector, and scholars interested in socially responsible economics. It is particularly suitable for seminars and workshops focusing on the management of not-for-profit organizations, sustainable development, and globalization.

CONTENTS Introduction Leonardo Becchetti and Carlo and Carlo Borzaga 1. The economics of social enterprises: an interpretive framework Carlo Borzaga and Ermanno Tortia 2. The competitive advantages of social enterprises Sara Depedri 3. The impact of social enterprises on output, employment, and welfare Ermanno Tortia 4. From economic growth to sustainable development Leonardo Becchetti and Giuseppe Mastromatteo 5. The provision of welfare and general-interest services Luca Fazzi 6. Social enterprises and the integration of disadvantaged workers Giulia Galera 7. The fair-trade debate and its underpinnings Leonardo Becchetti 8. An empirical test of fair trade Leonardo Becchetti and Marco Costantino 9. Microfinance: a frontier social enterprise Leonardo Becchetti 10. Only the fittest survive? A test of the sustainability of corporate social responsibility Leonardo Becchetti and Rocco Ciciretti

Elements of an Evolutionary Theory of Welfare Routledge Advances in Social Economics

Martin Binder, Max Planck Institute of Economics, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56298-0; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

58 It has always been an important task of economics to assess individual and social welfare. The traditional approach has assumed that the measuring rod for welfare is the satisfaction of the individual’s given and unchanging preferences, but recent work in behavioural economics has called this into question by pointing out the inconsistencies and context-dependencies of human behaviour. When preferences are no longer consistent, we have to ask whether a different measure for individual welfare can, and should, be found.

This book goes beyond the level of preference and instead considers whether a hedonistic view of welfare represents a viable alternative, and what its normative implications are. Offering a welfare theory with stronger behavioural and evolutionary foundations, Binder follows a naturalistic methodology to examine the foundations of welfare, connecting the concept with a dynamic theory of preference learning, and providing a more realistic account of human behaviour. This book will be of interest to researchers and those working in the fields of welfare economics, behavioural and evolutionary economics.

CONTENTS 1.Introduction, 2. Conceptual Background and Welfare Terminology, 3. Other Approaches to Welfare Economics, 4. A Positive Basis: The Learning Theory of Consumption, 5. An Evolutionary Theory of Welfare, 6. Evolutionary Welfare Economics, 7. Concluding Remarks, Bibliography

Public Management and Complexity Theory Routledge Critical Studies in Public Management

Mary Lee Rhodes, Trinity College Dublin, Ireland, Joanne Murphy, Queen's University Belfast, UK, Jenny Muir, Queen's University Belfast, UK and John A. Murray, Trinity College Dublin, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £100.00 $150.00; 229x152 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45753-8; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION That public services exhibit unpredictability, novelty and, on occasion, chaos, is an observation with which even a casual observer would agree. Existing theoretical frameworks in public management fail to address these features, relying more heavily on attempts to eliminate unpredictability through increased reliance on measurable performance objectives, improved financial and human resource management techniques, decentralisation of authority and accountability and resolving principal-agent behaviour pathologies.

Essentially, these are all attempts to improve the ‘steering’ capacity of public sector managers and policy makers. By adopting a Complex Adaptive Systems (CAS) approach to public services, this book shifts the focus from developing steering techniques to identifying patterns of behaviour of the participants with the ultimate objective of increasing policy-makers’ and practitioners’ understanding of the factors that may enable more effective public service decision-making and provision. The authors apply a CAS framework to a series of case studies in public sector management to generate new insights into the issues, processes and participants in public service domains.

CONTENTS Part 1: The CAS Perspective 1. Introduction and the CAS Framework Part 2: Examples of Public Service Systems in Ireland 2. The Policy Arenas and Rules of the Game 3. Agents, Processes and Outcomes in Urban Regeneration 4. Agents, Processes and Outcomes in Information Systems Development in Health Care Part 3: Public Management Patterns in Ireland 5. The Symbolism of Place 6.

Consultation and Participation 7. Mixing the ‘Market’ 8. The Tension between the Governing ‘Core’ and the Implementing ‘Periphery’ Part 4: Conclusion 9. Implications for Public Policy, Practice and Theory

Public Private Partnerships in the European Union Routledge Critical Studies in Public Management

Christopher Bovis, University of Central Lancashire, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $130.00; 229x152 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-34993-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-69572-2; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Public procurement in the European Union represents almost twelve per cent of the EU's GDP and is continuing to increase, having been identified as a key objective in the EU's aim to become the most competitive economy in the world by 2010. This book provides a one-stop shop, multi-disciplinary approach to public procurement and will be of use to academics and policy-makers. Providing its readers with practical description and analysis of the relevant policies, law and jurisprudence, the book also explores possible future trends in public procurement regulation.

CONTENTS 1. Public Procurement in the Common Market Context 2. The Structure of Public Procurement in the EU Member States 3. The Legal Framework and the Applicability of the Rules 4. Utilities Procurement 5. Defence Procurement 6. The Procurement of Public-Private Partnerships 7. Public Procurement and EU Enlargement 8. Public Procurement and the WTO 9. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

59

Social Accounting and Public Management Routledge Critical Studies in Public Management

Edited by Stephen P. Osborne, University of Edinburgh, UK and Amanda Ball, University of Canterbury, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 393pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80649-7; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Social accounting as a discipline has challenged the methodology and focus of the larger field of accounting over the last 50 years.

More recently it has taken on greater significance for other subjects as well, addressing issues for public policy and management more broadly. These include the issues of the nature of accountability in the contemporary plural state, environmental and societal sustainability, the ethical management and governance of public services and resources, and the creation and sustenance of social capital as an essential element of the modern plural state. Social Accounting and Public Management brings together for the first time researchers from a range of disciplines including accounting, political science, management, sociology and policy studies to discuss and develop our knowledge and theory of the nature of ‘accountability’ in contemporary global society and the challenges it may pose for public policy and management. This book addresses this nexus of all of these issues and disciplines, and through this, makes a contribution to the development of the disciplines of both social accounting and public policy and management.

CONTENTS Contents 1. Introduction: Accounting – for the Common Good? (Amanda Ball and Stephen P. Osborne) Section I: Social Audit and Social Accounting: Cross-Disciplinary Perspectives 2. A Brief Re-Evaluation Of "The Social Accounting Project": Social Accounting Research As If the World Matters (Rob Gray, Jesse Dillard, and Crawford Spence) 3. Participatory Governance and Social Audit in the Third Sector (Giulio Citroni and Sabina Nicolella) 4. Budget and Social Capital System Theory: Empirical Research Tools (Cynthia E. Lynch and Thomas D. Lynch) 5. What is it Worth? Social Accounting for Membership Organisations (Laurie Mook, Femida Handy, and Meenaz Kassam) 6. Exploring the Potential of Shadow Accounts in Problematising Institutional Conduct (Colin Dey, Shona Russell, and Ian Thomson) Section II: Accountabilities 7. Czech Elites and Citizens as Part of a Public Accountability System (Pavol Fri?) 8. Non-profit Organisations, Democratisation, and New Forms of Accountability: A Preliminary Evaluation (Taco Brandsen, Mirjan Oude Vrielink, Thomas Schillemans, and Eelco van Hout) 9. An Accountability Model and Self-Assessment Initiative for Third Sector Organisations in Hungary (Monika Molnár) 10. Reporting for Public Sector Agencies: A Stakeholder Model (Daphne Rixon and Sheila Ellwood) 11. Agencies as Instruments of New Public Management: Models of Accountability in Italy (Sandro Brunelli, Alessandro Giosi, and Silvia Testarmata) 12. Evolving Accountabilities: Experience and Prospects from Scottish Public Services (Tony Kinder) Section III: Social Accounting and Sustainability 13. The Carbon Neutral Public Sector: Governmental Accounting and Action on Climate Change (Amanda Ball, Ian Mason, Suzana Grubnic, Phil Hughes, and S. Jeff Birchall) 14.

Choosing a Smart Set of Sustainable Development Indicators for "Governments at All Levels" (Dick Osborn) 15. Social and Sustainability Reporting in Italian Local Governments: What is not Reported? (Federica Farneti, James Guthrie, and Benedetta Siboni) 16. Stakeholder Responses to a Social and Environmental Reporting Model for the Credit Union Sector (Dianne McGrath) 17.

Prolegomena to Sustainability Reporting: Preventing Premature Closure of Debate Surrounding the Meaning of Sustainability (MarieAndrée Caron, Alain Lapointe, and Corinne Gendron) Section IV: Social Accounting, Social Capital, and the Social Economy 18.

Social Accounting and Auditing: Assessing the Contribution of Social Capital to Social Enterprise and the Social Economy (Guenther Lorenz and Alan Kay) 19. Social and Public Value Measurement and Social Audit: the Czech Experience (Magdalena Hun?ová) 20.

The Contribution of Religious Congregations to the Local Social Economy (Ram A. Cnaan) Section V: Social Accounting, Accountability, and Ethics 21. A Social Accountability Framework for Public Sector Conflict of Interest: Private Interests, Public Duties, and Ethical Cultures (Gordon Boyce and Cindy Davids) 22. Corruption and Accountability in a Globalized World: A Comparative Study of Japan, Hong Kong, and China (Wilson Wong) 23. An Accreditation Framework for the Indian Third Sector (Gaurav Patankar and Ashok Jain) 24. Conflicts of Interest, Corruption, and Ethics in Public Services: A Public Governance Approach (Andrea Calabrò) 25. Ethical Audit: Control, Performance, and Review (Alan Lawton, Frédérique Six, and Michael Macaulay) 26.

Social Accounting and Public Management: Accountability for the Public Good – Conclusions (Victor A. Pestoff)

Ideas and Economic Crises in Britain from Attlee to Blair (1945– 2005) Routledge Explorations in Economic History

Matthias M. Matthijs, American University, Washington DC, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57944-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The puzzle that motivates this book is both theoretical and empirical. During the period from 1945 to 2005, the United Kingdom underwent two deep-seated institutional transformations – roughly starting around 1945 and 1979 respectively – when political elites successfully challenged the prevailing wisdom on how to govern the economy, and in so doing, managed to change the basic terms of the political debate. Clement Attlee and Margaret Thatcher emerge as the "innovators" who were able to effectively implement most of their political platforms. During these periods there were two other opportunities to seriously challenge existing institutional

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

60 arrangements. Edward Heath won the general election in 1970 promising a dramatic overhaul of Britain’s institutions, only to fail miserably in 1972 when he was forced to take a U-turn; and Tony Blair’s New Labour, winning a larger majority in 1997 than Attlee in 1945, did not achieve a major break with the ‘Thatcherite’ settlement. Rather than simply retell the story of British economic policymaking since World War II, this book offers a theoretically informed version of events, which draws upon the literatures on institutional path dependence, economic constructivism and political economy to explain this puzzle. This manuscript departs from the conventional wisdoms that have accumulated on British economic governance over the years in several respects and makes significant contributions to critical literatures in the fields of political science and political economy.

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Continuity and Change in British Economic Policymaking, Chapter 2: Clement Attlee’s Postwar “Settlement” (1945-1970): Depression, War, Keynes, Chapter 3: Relative Decline and the Unravelling of Consensus (1959-1979): From “Having it so Good” to the “Winter of Discontent”, Chapter 4: Margaret Thatcher’s Triumph (1975-1990): Inflation, Hayek, and the Overhaul of the British State, Chapter 5: Thatcherism’s Flaws and Tony Blair’s Consolidation (1987-2005): From the Lawson Boom to New Labour’s “New Britain”, Chapter 6: Conclusion: Made in Britain?

The International Tin Cartel Routledge Explorations in Economic History

John Hillman, Trent University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £120.00 $190.00; 246x174 mm; 484pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55412-1; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION For most of the twentieth century, tin was the site of new forms of international regulation which became a model for other commodities. The onset of the depression of the 1930s saw a collapse in commodity prices, and governments of tin producing countries decided to form a cartel to return the industry to comparative prosperity. This is a detailed study of how the tin industry found itself in difficulty and how the cartel developed its policies of control over production and stocks, together with its enduring legacy after World War II. This study of a cartel brings together two levels of analysis that are normally kept separate; international cooperation, and national organization, and demonstrates how each affected the other. It is based on a comprehensive review of a wide range of archival sources which are sufficiently rich and frank that they provide an insider’s sense of how a cartel actually worked.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Tin: The Foundations of an Industry 3. Tin and Industrial Capitalism, 1815-1918 4. The Problem with Tin, 19191929 5. The Depression: Initial Responses, 1928-1930 6. The Formation of the International Tin Committee, 1927-1931 7.

Constructing the Machinery of Control 8. Rescuing the Industry, 1931-1933 9. Renewing the Second Agreement, 1933-1934 10.

Stabilizing the Tin Market, 1934-1936 11. Renewing the Third Agreement, 1935-1936 12. Riding the Commodity Roller-coaster, 1937-1939 13. Development under Restriction: The Producers 14. Tin Consumption and Research 15. The International Tin Committee and World War II, 1939-1942 16.The International Tin Committee and its Critics 17. The Demise of the International Tin Committee, 1945-1946 18. From the International Tin Committee to the International Tin Council, 1945-1985 19. Conclusion

Labour-Intensive Industrialization in Global History Routledge Explorations in Economic History

Edited by Gareth Austin, London School of Economics, UK and Kaoru Sugihara, Kyoto University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45552-7; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume calls for a major rethinking of our understanding of industrialization for global history, by bringing the East Asian experience of ‘labour-intensive’ industrialization into focus and, thereby, reinterpreting both the western experience of ‘capitalintensive’ industrialization and the equally distinctive experiences of countries in other regions of Asia and in Africa and Latin America. We argue that the absorption of labour into ‘labour-intensive’ industries, both traditional and modern, and the improvement of the quality of labour formed a central mechanism of global diffusion of industrialization. This volume presents a discussion on the significance of labour-intensive industrialization by leading economic historians engaged in the development of synthesizing theses and/or specializing in relevant regions, and seeking to foster the new academic dialogue on global economic history.

Privatization and Transition in Russia Routledge Explorations in Economic History

Carol Scott Leonard and David Pitt-Watson

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

61 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55608-8; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Few economic events have caused such controversy as the privatization process in Russia. Some see it as the foundation of political and economic freedom. For others it was economics gone wrong, and ended in "Russians stealing money from their own country". As Russia reasserts itself, and its new brand of capitalism, it is ever more important that policy makers and scholars understand the roots of the economic structure and governance of that country; what was decided, who made the decisions and why, what actually transpired, and what implications this has for the future of Russia. This work, written by two senior advisors to the Russian government, has unique access to documentation, tracking the decision making process in the Russian Mass Privatization process. By close reference to events, and supplemented by interviews with many of the key participants, it shows that the policies adopted were often influenced and shaped by different forces than those cited by current popular accounts. The book challenges the interpretation of Russian privatization by some of the West’s most eminent economists. It underlines that economists of all schools, who bring assumptions from the West to the analysis of Russia, may reach false or misleading conclusions. It is an essential guide for anyone interested in Russian economic reform, and anyone who seeks to understand this enigmatic country, and its actions today.

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction and Summary, Chapter 2 Drawing the Line: Between Communist and Market Distributions, Chapter 3: Mass Privatisation Programme (MPP): The Ideas, their Evolution and their Embodiment in Law, Chapter 4: The Implementation of Privatization, Chapter 5: Emerging Issues, Chapter 6: Reflections

The South Sea Bubble Routledge Explorations in Economic History

Helen Paul, University of Southampton, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $120.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46973-9; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The South Sea Bubble of 1720 is a famous morality tale. Shares in the South Sea Company rose steeply in price. The whole stock market followed. Share prices then crashed and the resulting furore was exploited by Robert Walpole in his bid for power. The South Sea Company was accused of fraudulently leading gullible investors to waste their money on a slaving project which could not work.

It has been assumed that the investors were struck by a gambling mania. However, this classic story has questioned by financial historians. This book makes the lessons from financial theory comprehensible to non-specialists. It combines these insights with qualitative evidence to show how the Georgians actually behaved. It explains why a bubble could occur without a gambling mania being to blame. There are strong reasons why investors would be attracted to the company and to share-trading. They include the possibilities of gain from the slave trade and smuggling into Spanish America. However, there were reasons for the public outcry.

Behavioural finance shows that people complain more about losses than an equivalent gain.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The history of the South Sea Company 3. The functioning of the market 4. Investment in the South Sea Company 5.

The Aftermath 6. Conclusion

Mind, Society, and Human Action Routledge Foundations of the Market Economy

Richard E. Wagner, George Mason University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77996-8; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Economics originated as a branch of the humane studies that was concerned with trying to understand how some societies flourish while others stagnate, and also how once-flourishing societies could come to stagnate. Over the major part of the 20 th century, however, economists mostly turned away from these humane and societal concerns by importing mechanistic ideas from 19 th century physics. This book seeks to show how that original humane and social focus can be renewed. The many particular topics the book examines can be traced to two central ideas. Firstly, that economic theory, like physics, requires two distinct theoretical frameworks.

One treats qualities that are invariant across time and place; this is the domain of equilibrium theory. The other treats the internal generation of change in societies through entrepreneurial action that continually transforms the ecology of enterprises that constitutes a society. Secondly, economic theory is treated as a genuine social science and not a science of rationality writ large. The book also explores ways in which life in society is understood differently once economics is treated as a social science. The book will be useful

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

62 to professional audiences who work with economic theory and who find that much of the hyper-formality that comprises economic theory these days fails to make reasonable contact with reality. It will also be of interest to sociologists, political scientists, and researchers in law, public policy, Austrian economics, evolutionary economics, institutional economics and political economy.

CONTENTS 1. Social-Economy: Some Preliminaries on Scope and Method, 2. Society, Property, and Human Action, 3. Economizing, Calculation, and Purposive Action, 4. Planning, Production, and Entrepreneurial Action, 5. Markets and Prices as Emergent Patterns of Human Interaction, 6. Competition and Its Social Organization, 7. From Micro to Macro through an Emergent Ecology of Enterprises, 8.

Politics, Markets, and Political Economy: Entangled, not Separated

Computable, Constructive and Behavioural Economic Dynamics Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Edited by Stefano Zambelli, Trento University, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 560pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49263-8; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The book contains thirty original articles dealing with important aspects of theoretical as well as applied economic theory. While the principal focus is on: the computational and algorithmic nature of economic dynamics; individual as well as collective decision process and rational behavior, some contributions emphasize also the importance of classical recursion theory and constructive mathematics for dynamical systems, business cycles theories, growth theories, and others are in the area of history of thought, methodology and behavioural economics. The contributors range from Nobel Laureates to the promising new generation of innovative thinkers. This volume is also a Festschrift in honour of Professor Kumaraswamy Vela Velupillai, the founder of Computable Economics, a growing field of research where important results stemming from classical recursion theory and constructive mathematics are applied to economic theory. The aim and hope is to provide new tools for economic modelling. This book will be of particular appeal to postgraduate students and scholars in one or more of the following fields: computable economics, business cycles, macroeconomics, growth theories, methodology, behavioural economics, financial economics, experimental and agent based economics. It might be also of importance to those interested on the general theme of algorithmic foundations for social sciences.

CONTENTS Prelude 1. Velupillai’s Constructive and Computable Economics, Undecidable Dynamics and Algorithmic Social Sciences Stefano Zambelli 2. From an admirer and a friend Robert W. Clower Allegro: Dynamical Systems, Business Cycles and Macroeconomics 3.

The Richard Goodwin circle at Harvard (1938-1950) Paul Samuelson 4. Not growth, not cycles, but something in-between Robert Solow 5. The nonlinear path of macroeconomic dynamics Axel Leijonhufvud Crescendo: Computable Economics 6. The information economy Gregory Chaitin 7. Hypotheses that imply the independence of P = NP from strong axiomatic systems N. C. A. da Costa and F. A. Doria 8. Universal Models Jorma Rissanen 9. Model description length priors in the urn problem Duncan Foley Allegro ma non troppo: Constructivity, Rationality and Complexity in Economic Theory 10. The honeybee as teacher John McCall 11. Constructivist logic and emergent evolution in economic complexity Barkley Rosser 12. Remarks on numerical systems, algorithms and economic theory Richard Day 13. An experiment on equilibrium selection: The relative unimportance of context Håkan J. Holm 14. The complexity of social choice Kislaya Prasad Andante: History of Thought and Methodology 15. Varieties of internal critique Tony Lawson 16. Rational economic man: A centrepiece in social science? Carsten Heyn-Johnsen 17. Resisting the sirens of realism in economic methodolody: A Socratic odyssey Thomas A. Boylan & Paschal F. O’Gorman 18. Who, in Scandinavian economic theoretic literature, picked up major threads fromWicksell’s writings? Björn Thalberg Moderato ma non troppo: Capital, viability and growth 19. The Accumulation of Capital over 50 years on G.C. Harcourt & Prue Kerr 20. The means of subsistence and the notion of ‘viability’ in Sraffa’s surplus approach Guglielmo Chiodi 21. A disequilibrium growth cycle model with differential savings Serena Sordi Allegretto: Markets and Their Behaviours 22. Evolution of FX Markets and New Financial Economics Joseph L. McCauley 23. Elasticity puzzle: An inquiry into micro-macro relations Shu-Heng Chen, Ya-Chi Huang & Jen-Fu Wang 24.

Bubbles and crashes: A a cyborg approach Ralph Abraham, Todd Feldman and Daniel Friedman 25. Is there gold in the Taylor’s Rule? A note on the treasure hunt Francesco Luna 26. The economics of Keynes in an almost stock-flow consistent agent-based setting Charlotte Bruun 27. Minsky’s ‘financial instability hypothesis’: The not-too-Keynesian optimism of a financial Cassandra Elisabetta De Antoni 28. Organizational capabilities and industry dynamics: A computational model Marco Corsino, Roberto Gabriele and Enrico Zaninotto Finale 29. The most difficult questions: A brief reflection inspired by K. Vela Velupillai’s contributions in computable economics, evolution and complexity Cassey Lee 30. A homage to my father Viveka Velupillai

Economic Complexity and Equilibrium Illusion Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Edited by Ping Chen, Peking University, China PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55475-6; March 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

63 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Principle of Large Numbers indicates that macro fluctuations have weak microfoundations; persistent business cycles and interrupted technologies can be better characterized by macro vitality and meso foundations. Economic growth is limited by market extent and ecological constraints. The trade-off between stability and complexity is the foundation of cultural diversity and mixed economies. The new science of complexity sheds light on the sources of economic instability and complexity. This book consists of the major work of Professor Ping Chen, a pioneer in studying economic chaos and economic complexity. The chapters are selected from works completed since 1987, including original research on evolutionary dynamics of division of labor, empirical and theoretical studies of economic chaos, and stochastic models of collective behavior. Offering a new perspective on market instability and the changing world order, the basic pillars in equilibrium economics are challenging by solid evidence of economic complexity and time asymmetry, including Friedman’s theory of exogenous money and efficient market, the Frisch model of noise-driven cycles, the Lucas model of microfoundations and rational expectations, the Black-Scholes model of option pricing, and the Coase theory of transaction costs. Throughout, a general framework based on complex evolutionary dynamics is developed, which integrates different insights from Smith, Malthus, Marx, Schumpeter, and Keynes and others a new understanding of the evolutionary history of division of labor.

This book will be of interest to postgraduates and researchers in Economics, including macroeconomics, financial economics, advanced econometrics, and economic methodology.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part 1 Methodological review: economic complexity, equilibrium illusion, and evolutionary dynamics 2. Equilibrium illusion, economic complexity, and evolutionary foundation of economic analysis (2008) 3. Evolutionary economic dynamics: persistent business cycles, disruptive technology, and the trade-off between stability and complexity (2005) Part 2 Macro vitality: trend-cycle separation, economic chaos and persistent cycles 4. Empirical and Theoretical Evidence of Economic Chaos (1988) 5.

Searching for Economic Chaos: A Challenge to Econometric Practice and Nonlinear Tests (1993) 6. A Random Walk or Color Chaos on the Stock Market? - Time-Frequency Analysis of S&P Indexes (1996) 7. Trends, Shocks, Persistent Cycles in Evolving Economy: Business Cycle Measurement in Time-Frequency Representation (1996) Part 3 Micro interaction and population dynamics: learning, communication, and market share competition 8. Origin of Division of Labor and Stochastic Mechanism of Differentiation (1987) 9. Imitation, Learning, and Communication: Central or Polarized Patterns in Collective Actions (1991) 10. Needham's Question and China's Evolution - Cases of Nonequilibrium Social Transition (1990) 11. China's Challenge to Economic Orthodoxy: Asian Reform as an Evolutionary, Self-Organizing Process (1993) Part 4 Equilibrium illusion and meso foundation: perpetual motion machine, representative agents, and organization diversity 12. The Frisch Model of Business Cycles - A Spurious Doctrine, but a Mysterious Success (1999) 13. Microfoundations of Macroeconomic Fluctuations and the Laws of Probability Theory: the Principle of Large Numbers vs. Rational Expectations Arbitrage (2002) 14. Complexity of Transaction Costs and Evolution of Corporate Governance (2007) Part 5 Market instability, natural experiments, and government policy 15. Market Instability and Economic Complexity: Theoretical Lessons from Transition Experiments (2006) 16. From an Efficient to a Viable International Financial Market (2009) Epilogue

Economics, Culture, and Development Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Eiman Zein-Elabdin, Franklin and Marshall College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55192-2; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Despite the tide of postmodernism, postcolonial critiques of hegemony, ecological threats, and the distances bridged by globalization, the concept of culture in economics remains under theorized or altogether absent. The aim of this book is to examine the place of culture in different schools of thought within economics, with respect to the question of development and thereby fill a conspicuous gap in economic literature. In postcolonial theory, culture is the primary analytical category whereas the problem of economy has been the weakest link in an array of path-breaking arguments. Although postcolonial theory has neglected the economic dimension of culture, it has succeeded in producing tremendous insights on issues of cross-cultural hegemony and the role of knowledge construction in this process. In this book, Zein-Elabdin carries the project further by borrowing some of the insights from postcolonial theory to call for a more profound rethinking of the place of culture and of currently devalued cultures in economic theory.

CONTENTS Preface, 1. Introduction: The Problem of Culture, 2. Two Contrasting Approaches to Culture in Economics: Neoclassical economics, The original institutionalist school, 3. Marxism: Can Class Survive Culture?, 4. Feminist Economics: Devalued Femininity and Devalued Cultures, 5. Culture in Development Economics, 6. Africa between Culture and Development, 7. Cultural Hybridity as a Theoretical Framework, Conclusion

Economic Theory and Social Change Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Hasse Ekstedt, University of Gothenburg, Sweden and Angelo Fusari, ISAE, Rome PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

64 www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56423-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is a discourse on modelling Man in a social context. Its focus is on economic main-stream theory in its capacity to handle basic problems such as uncertainty, social dynamics and ethics. The point of departure is a systematic critique of the specific methodology of economics and its axiomatic structure. The ultimate aim is to develop an economic theory for a socially sustainable society. Economic Theory and Social Change analyses the foundation of economic market theory in relation to its social implications.

On rejecting the axiomatic structure of the market theory Hasse Ekstedt and Angelo Fusari analyse the concept of growth and uncertainty with respect to a more realistic modelling of man, The book also addresses central political problems and their potential solutions, including permanent unemployment, distribution of income, the interaction of real and financial growth, money and the credit system. In seeking objective values to help to obtain a socially sustainable society, the book traces a tentative revision of economic and social thought based on a deepening of some crucial features of modern economies and societies. These features include innovation, the connected flows of uncertainty, entrepreneurship, and their role in fuelling and characterizing economic growth and development. This book will be of interest to postgraduate students and researchers of Economics, particularly to those focussing on Economic Theory and Political Economy.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Method of Social Theory: Suggestions for a Shared Basic View 2. Homo Œconomicus Versus Homo Politucus 3.

The Axiological – Normative Question in Econmics and Social Sciences: Objective and Subjective Values 4. On Time and Ethics 5.

Innovation, Uncertainty, Entrepreneurship – Modelling the Dylanmic Process of the Economy: Discussion and Formalization 6. From Invisible Hand to Perpetum Mobile – The Problem of Economic Growth 7. Money – Resource Allocation – Income Distribution 8.

Toward a Non-Capitalist Market System: Spontaneous Order and Organization

The Foundations of Institutional Economics Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

K. William Kapp, edited by Sebastian Berger, Roanoke College, Virginia, USA and Rolf Steppacher, Geneva Graduate Institute of International Studies, Switzerland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58655-9; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION K. William Kapp was one of the leading 20 th century institutionalists and a founding member of the Association for Evolutionary Economics. This book was developed by Kapp and is his attempt to present the foundations of institutional economics though has remained unfinished and unpublished during the last 30 years since his death. Carefully edited with additional material from some of Kapp’s other major works and with a full introduction from Sebasitan Berger and Rolf Steppacher, this book represents a major reappraisal of Kapp’s contribution and legacy. Kapp’s great accomplishment lies in extracting the crucial elements of Veblen’s theory and in showing the links to second generation institutionalists’ theories of Myrdal, Galbraith, Polanyi and Clark. Thoroughly explored in this volume are the analytical concepts of institutions and institutional change, technological dynamics and capital formation, the multi-sector economy and the domination effect, the principle of circular and cumulative causation, social costs and substantive rationality.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction. 2. Institutional Economics as a Distinct Approach to Economic Analysis and as a Critique of Conventional Economics. 3. The Intellectual Antecedents of Institutional Economics, 4. The Nature and Meaning of Institutions: towards a biocultural theory of institutions and socio-economic change, 5. Towards a Theory of Institutional Change. 6. The Institutional Theory of Human Behavior and Economic Conduct, 7. Towards a Theory of Human Needs, 8. The Institutional Concept of Capital and the Theory of Capital Formation, 9. The Interaction between Technology and Business Enterprise. 10. The larger Industrial and Cultural Consequences of Technology in a System of Business Enterprise and Finance, 11. Technology in the Economy: The Multi-sector Economy and the Theory of Economic Dominance, 12. Formal versus Substantive Rationality, 13. The Central Hypothesis of Institutional Economics: Circular Causation, 14. On the Theory of Social Costs

Freedom and Happiness in Economic Thought and Philosophy Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Edited by Ragip Ege, University Louis Pasteur, France and Herrade Igersheim, Aix-Marseille University, France PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57948-3; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

65 Starting with a philosophical distinction between the liberalism of freedom and the liberalism of happiness, this book brings together modern European research from leading scholars looking at the fundamental debates and issues surrounding the economics and philosophy of happiness. Considering the founding texts of both liberalisms and containing new essays on the work of Hume, Smith, Mill and Jevons, this book sheds new light on the concepts of Utilitarianism and individual preference. Contemporary issues in welfare economics is a secondary focus of the book and more recent concepts such as meta-ranking are also fully considered.

CONTENTS Introduction and Overview. Part I Freedom and Happiness in the Light of the Rawlsian Opposition: 1. "Rawls: The Construction of a Democratic Thought" (Rima HAWI) 2. "Hume’s Treatise of Human Nature and ‘Liberalism of Freedom’ (Daniel DIATKINE) 3.

"Between a ‘Liberalism of Freedom’ and a ‘Liberalism of Happiness’: Smith and Condorcet on the Institutions for Instruction" (JeanDaniel BOYER and Charlotte LE CHAPELAIN) 4. "Mill and Bentham: Coercion and Liberty" (Nathalie SIGOT) 5. "Is Jevons a Libertarian of Happiness?" (Pelin SEKERLER) PART II Freedom and Happiness in Other Traditions of Liberalism: Towards a Reconciliation: 6. "German Historical Schools and the Question of Liberalism" (Karl-Heinz SCHMIDT) 7. "On the Liberalism of Walras" (Shirine SABERAN) 8. "Balancing Freedom and Order – The Liberalism of Adolph Lowe" (Harald HAGEMANN) 9. "‘Liberismo’ and ‘Liberalismo’: A New Concept of Liberalism in the Controversy Croce Einaudi" (Riccardo SOLIANI) 10. "Liberty, Equality and Independence: Looking at Rousseau through Constant, Tocqueville and Berlin" (Jimena HURTADO-PRIETO) 11.

"Rawls, Rousseau, Kant and Hegel: A Reconciliation" (Ragip EGE and Benoît WALRAEVENS) PART III Freedom, Happiness and Preferences: Applied Analysis: 12. "Interpersonal utility comparisons (new developments)" (Claude D’ASPREMONT) 13. "The prescription of happiness: a Humean point of view" (André LAPIDUS) 14. "Rights revisited, and limited" (Maurice SALLES and Feng ZHANG) 15. "Do we gain from exchange at all? On some lessons to be drawn from Rousseau" (Caroline GUIBET-LAFAYE and Emmanuel PICAVET) 16. "Individual choice and happiness: The misfortune of desire of infinite wealth in Things of G. Perec" (Claire PIGNOL) 17. "Liberalism of happiness vs. Liberalism of freedom. Some clues from experimental data on approval and evaluation voting" (Antoinette BAUJARD and Herrade IGERSHEIM) General Conclusion: "Metaranking as Reconciliation" (Ragip EGE and Herrade IGERSHEIM)

The Global Economic Crisis Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Edited by Emiliano Brancaccio, University of Sannio, Italy and Giuseppe Fontana, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58661-0; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Why did the economists of the neoclassical mainstream fail to foresee the worldwide economic crisis that exploded in 2008? And why do they appear to have difficulty in putting forward any interpretation of it consistent with the theoretical foundations of their models?

These two questions have echoed insistently ever since the outbreak of the great recession, not only in academic circles but also in the mass media, and appear to reflect increasingly widespread dissatisfaction with the neoclassical paradigm of economic theory. Many believe, however, that the great recession now underway may constitute a historic watershed also for the evolution of economics and therefore that an authentic change of paradigm is called for rather than minor adjustments to the dominant neoclassical approach. This book constitutes a collection of new work from the Italian schools of critical thought that promises reinterpretations of the primary schools of heterodox economics, stringent critiques of the mainstream readings of the recession, new models of theoretical and empirical analysis of the crisis, and proposals for economic policies alternative to those hitherto adopted.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction, Emiliano Brancaccio, 2. The Process of Substituting Loans for Wages and its Long-Term Unsustainability, Aldo Barba and Massimo Pivetti , 3. Tracking the U.S. economy with a "New Cambridge" model, Gennaro Zezza , 4. The Great Recession and the Third Crisis of Economic Theory, Riccardo Bellofiore and Joseph Halevi , 5. A Critique of Interpretations of the Crisis based on the “Taylor Rule”, Emiliano Brancaccio and Giuseppe Fontana , 6. A Search for Warnings about the Crisis in Journals with the Highest Impact Factors, Andrea Imperia and Vincenzo Maffeo , 7. The Great Crisis and Intercapitalist Conflict, Ernesto Screpanti , 8.

The Tendential Decrease in the Rate of Profit. Back to the Future?, Stefano Perri , 9. Labour Market Deregulation and the Global Crisis: an MTP Approach, Guglielmo Forges Davanzati and Riccardo Realfonzo , 10. Economic Theories and Financial Crisis: a Postkeynesian Standpoint, Carlo Panico , 11. Changes in the “Functional” Distribution of Income in Europe, Antonella Stirati , 12.

Privatisation and Crisis: Profits and Rents in the Case of Privatised Utilities, Bruno Bosco , 13. Key Currencies, the Global Crisis and the Way Out: a Circuit Approach, Lilia Costabile , 14. Property Rights in the Knowledge Economy: an Explanation of the Crisis, Ugo Pagano and Maria Alessandra Rossi , 15. Poor Countries, Washington Consensus and Crisis, Andrea F. Presbitero and Alberto Zazzaro , 16. Income Distribution from a Classical-Keynesian Point of View, Enrico Bellino

Hahn and Economic Methodology Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Edited by Thomas Boylan and Paschal O'Gorman, both of National University of Ireland, Galway PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

66 HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-21348-6; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Frank Hahn's powerful critiques of current economic methodology and innovative reconstructions of economic theorizing have long challenged the views of practising economists. This is the first book-length study of Hahn's methodological writings, and is essential reading for any scholar with an interest in the philosophy of economics.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Hahn in Context: An Overview 2. Hahn’s Hostility to Methodology 3. In Defence of Economic Theorizing 4. The Core of Neoclassical Economics 5. Economics and Axiomatization 6. Kaldor and Hahn on Equilibrium Economics 7. Mathematics, Economics and Philosophy: Methodological Challenges

Happiness, Ethics and Economics Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Johannes Hirata, University of Applied Sciences Osnabrück, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58404-3; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Modern happiness research has produced a wealth of evidence on the relationship between economic conditions and life satisfaction.

This relationship is rather complex and it is to some extent intuitive but also partly surprising This book provides a stringent interpretation of this evidence and shows that it can be understood with the help of a handful of psychological and economic effects.

To make sense of this evidence, it is necessary to have a sound conception of happiness that recognizes the ethical dimension of the concept, and Hirata does this by presenting happiness as a hedonic experience and evaluative exercise arguing that happiness is an important indicator that helps identify life concerns that really matter to people but that good development in society cannot be reduced to a matter of maximizing happiness.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction, 2. The evidence on happiness, 3. Interpreting the evidence, 4. Happiness and ethics, 5. Happiness and good development, 6. Happiness-oriented societal development under the premise of democracy, 7. Orientation for a knowledgeable world

Living With Markets Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Jeremy Shearmur, Australian National University PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-15337-9; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This important book discusses two inter-related themes. Firstly, Shearmur surveys some of the characteristics of, and debates about, rational choice analysis and rational economic man. Secondly, he considers and discusses the range of problems which arise when one considers human affairs within an extended market order, and the implications for our institutions and personal characters of the various choices that we make.

Macroeconomic Regimes in Western Industrial Countries Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Hansjörg Herr and Milka Kazandziska, both of Berlin School of Economics, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56173-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The development of countries depends on the specific economic regime. A macroeconomic policy regime consists of four areas: monetary, fiscal, wage policy and external sector. This book presents the theoretical derivations and an exact definition of a macroeconomic regime and its elements, and proves it empirically. This book includes case studies on the development of macroeconomics regimes in large developed countries: Great Britain and the United States show examples of positive development, whereas Japan and Germany show rather dysfunctional development. Drawing on Keynesian monetarism, the authors argues that

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

67 microeconomic deregulation does not explain the differences in development among Western industrial countries sufficiently and instead the key to understanding these developments in the industrial countries over recent decades in the positive or negative shaping of the basic macroeconomic areas and in their interactions.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction and Methodological Procedure, 2. Macroeconomic Regimes and their Assessment, 3. Typical Macroeconomic Regimes, 4. Case Studies of Economic Regimes in Western Industrial Countries, 5. Germany and the Dysfunctional Macroeconomic Regime of the EMU, 6. Conclusions for Economic Policy

The Market, Happiness, and Solidarity Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Johan J. Graafland, Tilburg University, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56127-3; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The past two decades of market operation has generated welfare and economic growth in Western countries, but increasing income inequalities, depletion of the natural environment and the current financial crisis have led to an intense debate about the advantages and disadvantages of the free market. With this book, Professor Graafland makes a valuable contribution to the Christian debate about the market economy. In particular, it aims to clarify the links between ethical values, Christian belief and economics, as well as informing theologians and economists about recent economic insights into market operation. The book investigates the effect of free market operation on welfare and well-being, calling into question why one would favour more market competition as a means of increasing happiness. As well as this, Professor Graafland examines how free market competition relates to principles of justice and looks at whether it enforces or crowds out Christian virtues like love, humility and temperance. Books that systematically link biblical teaching about the economy to recent theoretical and empirical research in economics on free market operation are rare. Most Christian books on the market system are theologically oriented, lacking a sound basis in the extensive knowledge of the recent economic literature on market operation. This book confronts Christian ethical standards with current economic literature on the effects of market operation on welfare, happiness, human rights, inequality and virtues in order to develop a well-based and balanced view of the pros and cons of market operation. This book will be of interest to both undergraduate and postgraduate students of economics, philosophy and theology.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The market and welfare 3. The market and justice 4. The market and virtues 5. Integration and application

Monetary Macrodynamics Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Toichiro Asada, Chuo University, Japan, Carl Chiarella, University of Technology, Sydney, Australia, Peter Flaschel, Bielefeld University, Germany and Reiner Franke, University of Kiel, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ100.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 448pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54837-3; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book investigates the interaction of effective goods demand with the wage-price spiral, and the impact of monetary policy on financial and the real markets from a Keynesian perspective. Endogenous business fluctuations are studied in the context of long-run distributive cycles in an advanced, rigorously formulated and quantitative setup. The material is developed by way of self-contained chapters on three levels of generality, an advanced textbook level, a research-oriented applied level and on a third level that shows how the interaction of real with financial markets has to be modelled from a truly integrative Keynesian perspective. Monetary Macrodynamics shows that the balanced growth path of a capitalist economy is unlikely to be attracting and that the cumulative forces that surround it are controlled in the large by changes in the behavioural factors that drive the wage-price spiral and the financial markets. Such behavioural changes can in fact be observed in actual economies in the interaction of demand-driven business fluctuations with supply-driven wage and price dynamics as they originate from the conflict over income distribution between capital and labour. The book is a detailed critique of US mainstream macroeconomics and uses rigorous dynamic macro-models of a descriptive and applicable nature. It will be of particular relevance to postgraduate students and researchers interested in disequilibrium processes, real wage feedback channels, financial markets and portfolio choice, financial accelerator mechanisms and monetary policy.

CONTENTS Part I: Conventional AD-AS Modeling 1. Models of Growth, Inflation, and the Real-Financial Market Interaction 2 Neglected Textbook Results: IS-LM-PC Inflation Dynamics 3. Strange AS-AD Outcomes: Rational Expectations Inflation Theory 4. Taking Stock: Keynesian Theories of Aggregate Demand and Supply (by Amitava Dutt and Peter Skott) Part II: Matured Keynesian AD-AS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

68 Modeling 5. Expectations and the Real-Wage Feedback Channel. Two Competing Baseline Approaches 6. Beyond Neoclassical Syntheses: A Baseline DAS-AD Model 7. Reformulation and Estimation of the Baseline Model 8. Applied DAD-DAS Modelling: Elaboration and Calibration Part III: Outlook: Real-Financial Markets Interaction from a Keynesian Perspective 9. Keynes-MetzlerGoodwin Growth Dynamics and Tobinian Portfolio Choice

The Moral Rhetoric of Political Economy Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Paul Turpin, Gustavus Adolphus College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77392-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Two of the most important economics treatise are Adam Smith's Theory of Moral Sentiments and Wealth of Nations and Milton Friedman's Capitalism and Freedom . In this book, Paul Turpin provides a rhetorical analysis of these texts arguing that both Smith and Friedman use argumentative and narrative depictions of character to reinforce a sense of societal decorum as a stabilizing foundation for their theories of liberal political economy. The comparison of Smith and Friedman by itself is a major contribution to the development of the history of economic thought. It adds a new, historical, depth to the heterodox analyses and critiques of twentieth century economics by writers such as Giocoli and Mirowski. The issue of the social constitution of identity, which is at the core of this book, is a hot topic in economic methodology and as such this book by a promising young historian of economic thought will be roundly applauded.

CONTENTS 1. Liberal Political Economy: Distributive Justice, Decorum, and Moral Rhetoric 2. Sympathy and Justice in Theory of Moral Sentiments 3. Sympathy and Moral Horizons in Wealth of Nations 4. The Subordination of Distributive Justice in Milton Friedman's Capitalism and Freedom 5. Liberal Political Economy and Justice: Summary and Conclusions

The Political Economy of Bureaucracy Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Steven Richardson PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58856-0; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Despite decades of intense study, serious reform efforts and impressive technological advances, the U.S. government remains a typical bureaucracy that citizens find falling further behind their market-based expectations for high-quality services. Scholars and professionals recognize that even after allowing for the differences between businesses and political organizations, our best efforts to improve performance continue to disappoint. Clearly, policy analysis is missing something. In a careful analysis of US federal agencies, examining the interaction between executive and legislative branches of government and between political appointees and civil servants, Richardson argues that policy makers should look to selectively relax constraints that may prevent experimentation needed to determine the most effective methods. The author combines an Austrian definition of economics and a Public Choice explanation of bureaucratic behavior with an Evolutionary Economics methodology to address questions that will be of interest to public administration scholars and political economists alike.

CONTENTS Preface, 1. The Research Question, 2. Bureaucracy and Beyond, 3. Methodology and the Kaleidic Hyperstructure (KH) Model, 4.

From Politics as Usual to Transparency, Competition and Flexibility, 5. Case Study: The Department of Homeland Security (DHS), 6.

Lessons for Institutional Change

The Political Economy of Capital Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Howard Engelskirchen PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77691-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

69 In this new analysis of Marxian Political Economy, Howard Engelskirchen focuses in on the social theory underpinning much of Marx's writing and as such provides a new perspective on his defining work - Das Kapital.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. On the Clear Comprehension of Political Economy: Social Kinds and the Significance of Section 2 of Marx's Capital 3. Why is this Labour Value? - Commodity Producing Labour as a Social Kind 4. Separation, Subordination, and Appropriation: The Real Definition of Capital as a Social Kind 5. Transforming Capital 6. Value and Contract Formation 7. Social Kinds in Social Theory

The Political Economy of the Small Firm Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Charlie Dannreuther, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ85.00 $160.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-19856-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Since the early 1970s, small firms have received attention from economists and politicians in the UK and the European Union, yet little from the political science community. This new book fills the gap. Dannreuther argues that this increased interest from political science in the institutional aspects of policy-making indicates a concern for the role of habitual and socially supported logics of action that may be a more appropriate way of explaining SME policy. Showing that the concept of legitimacy is central to recent political science writing on the New Institutionalism in Political Science, the author applies this theoretical framework to the following three arenas of political activity, which are central to understanding policy-making in contemporary Europe: the identification and formation of societal interest the making of national decisions the development of policy in the European Union. In this well-written and incisive text, Dannreuther concludes that, in addition to explaining SME policy and providing a framework for future analysis, the evolutionary approach outlined in The Political Economy of the Small Firm has much broader potential uses in the understanding of policy-making in a global society.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction, 2. The Idealised Economic Subject, 3.The Exclusion of the Small firm, 4. Re-engaging the Small Firm and the origins of the UK's regulation debate, 5. Social Relations and the Entrepreneurial Society, 6. Competitiveness and the Small Firm Economy, 7. Supranational subjects and the centrality of SME policy to C21st EU, 8.Conclusion: Globalisation as Small Business Policy

Post Keynesian Microeconomic Theory Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Frederic Lee, University of Missouri, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ65.00 $120.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-24731-3; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this book is to delineate Post Keynesian microeconomic theory. More specifically, the objective is to build the theoretical core of Post Keynesian microeconomics that can then be used by other Post Keynesians in their work. Hence the book is about theory creation as opposed to delineating what is currently accepted, with an emphasis on business enterprise, production, costs, pricing and prices, markets, market governance, market demand, and distribution of income. The book begins with a historical understanding of the origins of Post Keynesian economics and an awareness of the range of different and similar ideas that contributed to the development of Post Keynesian microeconomics. This book is unusal however to the extent that it refers more to theory than specific theorists, grounding each component of the core theory in empirical evidence. The conceptual organization of the book is based on a critical realist perspective of identifying structures and causal mechanisms, examining Post Keynesian microeconomics as it currently stands.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Methodology of Heterodox 3. Structure and Organization of Economic Activity 4. The Structure of the Business Enterprise 5. Agency and the Theory of the Business Enterprise 6. Industry and Market 7. Structure of Market Demand 8. Structure of Market Demand, the Business Enterprise, and the Market Price 9. Competition, the Market Price, and Market Governance 10. Private Market Governance and the Market Price: Trade Association and Price Leadership 11. Public Market Governance and the Market Price: Laws and Government Regulation 12. Disaggregated Price-Output Model of the Economy 13. Mark Ups, Finance, Investment, and Economic Activity

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

70

The Practices of Happiness Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Edited by Ian Steedman, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK, John R. Atherton and Elaine Graham, both of University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55097-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There is growing evidence that rising levels of prosperity in Western economies since 1945 have not been matched by greater incidences of reported well-being and happiness. Indeed, material affluence is often accompanied instead by greater social and individual distress. A growing literature within the humanities and social sciences is increasingly concerned to chart not only the underlying trends in recorded levels of happiness, but to consider what factors, if any, contribute to positive and sustainable experiences of well-being and quality of life. Increasingly, such research is focusing on the importance of values and beliefs in human satisfaction or quality of life; but the specific contribution of religion to these trends is relatively under-examined. This unique collection of essays seeks to rectify that omission, by identifying the nature and role of the religious contribution to wellbeing. A unique collection of nineteen leading scholars from the field of economics, psychology, public theology and social policy have been brought together in this volume to explore the religious contribution to the debate about happiness and well-being. These essays explore the religious dimensions to a number of key features of well-being, including marriage, crime and rehabilitation, work, inequality, mental health, environment, participation, institutional theory, business and trade. They engage particularly closely with current trends in economics in identifying alternative models of economic growth which focus on its qualitative as well as quantitative dimensions. This distinctive volume brings to public notice the nature and role of religion’s contribution to wellbeing, including new ways of measurement and evaluation. As such, it represents a valuable and unprecedented resource for the development of a broadbased religious contribution to the field. It will be of particular relevance for those who are concerned about the continuing debate about personal and societal well-being, as well as those who are interested in the continuing significance of religion for the future of public policy.

CONTENTS Introductory essay: developing an overview as context and future John Atherton Part 1: Political Economy 1. Economic theory and happiness Ian Steedman 2. Happiness, welfare and capabilities Carl-Henric Grenholm 3. Happiness through thrift: The contribution of business to human wellbeing Peter Heslam 4. Happiness, work and Christian theology Peter Sedgwick 5. Happiness isn't working, but it should be Malcolm Brown 6. Challenging inequality in a post-scarcity era: Christian contributions to egalitarian trends John Atherton 7. Fair trade and human wellbeing Michael Northcott Part 2: Contributions to Other Social Sciences 8. Religion and happiness: perspectives from the psychology of religion, positive psychology and empirical theology Leslie Francis 9. Ethnographic insights into happiness Jonathan Miles-Watson 10. Institutions, organisations and wellbeing Tony Berry 11. Religion, family form and the question of happiness Adrian Thatcher 12. Mental health, spirituality and religion Peter Gilbert 13. The ‘one in the morning’ knock: exploring the connections between faith, participation and wellbeing Christopher Baker 14. Crime, wellbeing and society: Reflections on social, 'anti-social' and 'restorative' capital Christopher Jones 15. Supporting offenders: A faith based initiative Charlotte Lorimer Part 3: Reflections on Foundations 16. Human happiness as a common good: clarifying the issues Patrick Riordan 17. Being well in creation John Rodwell 18.The ‘virtuous circle’: Religion and the practices of happiness Elaine Graham

Rationality and Explanation in Economics Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Maurice Lagueux, University of Montréal, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55121-2; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Economical questions indisputably occupy a central place in everyday life. In order to clarify these questions, people generally turn to those who are familiar with economics. In answering such legitimate questions, economists propose explanations which rest on a few principles among which the rationality principle is by far the most fundamental. This principle assumes that people are rational, but what is meant by this has to be specified. Rationality and Explanation in Economics claims that only a minimal kind of rationality is required to ‘animate’ economic explanations. However, such a conception of rationality faces serious objections: it is closely associated with harshly criticised methodological individualism and it is not easily disentangled from sheer irrationality. The book answers these objections and shows that the economists’ way of mobilising the concepts of maximization or of consistency for defining rationality raises more serious problems. Since the latter have encouraged various attempts to downgrade or even to dispense with the very notion of rationality, the book is largely devoted to countering arguments associated with these attempts and to show why postulating that agents are rational is still the only efficient way to explain economic phenomena as such. The author also proposes original views about the role of rationality, the meaning of methodological individualism, the relevance of the selection argument and the relation between ‘rational’ explanations of economics and explanations in natural sciences.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

71 Introduction Part I Rationality in the history of economic thought 1. Rationality in economics before World War II 2. The hardly consistent story of rationality-consistency Part II Objections to the notion of minimal rationality 3. Can methodological individualism survive? 4. Is still some room left for irrationality? 5. Minimal and Maximal Rationality: loosely defined concepts? Part III But is rationality really necessary in economics? 6. Why unrealism of assumptions remains a predicament 7. Explaining in the absence of rationality Part IV Regarding economic explanations 8. Rationality and Natural Selection in Economics 9. Theories of explanation applied to economics. Epilogue

Wage Policy, Income Distribution, and Democratic Theory Routledge Frontiers of Political Economy

Oren M. Levin-Waldman, Metropolitan College of New York, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77971-5; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Wage policy can be broadly defined as a set of institutions designed to bolster the wages of workers, especially for those workers who lack negotiating power. This book concentrates on the relationship between wage policy and the distribution of income and the maintenance of a sustainable democracy. Whereas economists have looked at this issue in relation to labour markets, this book aims to reset the balance by focusing on issues such as equality and democratic theory. This book makes an important contribution to the literature of public policy, political philosophy and political economy. Levin-Waldman argues that wage policy is an important component in the maintenance of democratic society and that a reduction in income inequality can have a positive effect both on personal autonomy and empowerment.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Democratic Theory 3. Evolution of Wage Policy 4. Post-New Deal Era and the Demise of Wage Policy 5. New Living Wage Movement 6. Wage Policy and the Middle Class 7. Wage Policy and the Path Towards Democracy

Insights from Accounting History Routledge Historical Perspectives in Accounting

A. Stephen Zeff, Rice University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 510pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55429-9; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85129-6; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Stephen Zeff has been a prolific researcher on the history of accounting and auditing in the twentieth century. He has written numerous papers on the history of standard setting and regulation, of accounting and auditing practice, of the accounting profession, of accounting thought, and of the intellectual contributions of major authors (such as Hatfield, Canning, Paton and MacNeal). This volume brings together the greatest hits of Zeff's academic career, including several articles that were published in out-of-the way places, for easier use by students and researchers of the field. In an introduction, Zeff discusses the evolution of his research interests and explains the factors led to the writing of the papers and their intended contribution to the literature. The book also includes a complete list of his publications.

CONTENTS Introduction Preface Acknowledgements Chapter 1. "Replacement Cost: Member of the Family, Welcome Guest, or Intruder?" The Accounting Review, October 1962 Chapter 2. "The Rise of ‘Economic Consequences’," Stanford Lectures in Accounting 1www.routledge.com/978 Chapter 3. "Paton on the Effects of Changing Prices on Accounting, 1916-55," in Zeff, Demski and Dopuch (editors), Essays in Honor of William A. Paton: Pioneer Accounting Theorist, Division of Research, University of Michigan, 1979 Chapter 4. "Truth in Accounting: The Ordeal of Kenneth MacNeal," The Accounting Review, July 1982 Chapter 5. "Some Junctures in the Evolution of the Process of Establishing Accounting Principles in the U.S.A.: 1917-1972," The Accounting Review, July 1984 Chapter 6. "Big Eight Firms and the Accounting Literature: The Falloff in Advocacy Writing," Journal of Accounting, Auditing & Finance, Spring 1986 Chapter 7. "Arthur Andersen & Co. and the Two-Part Opinion in the Auditor’s Report: 1946-1962," Contemporary Accounting Research, Spring 1992 Chapter 8. "The Early Years of the Association of University Teachers of Accounting: 1947-1959," The British Accounting Review, June 1997 (Special Issue) Chapter 9. "The Evolution of the Conceptual Framework for Business Enterprises in the United States," The Accounting Historians Journal, December 1999 Chapter 10. "John B. Canning: A View of His Academic Career," Abacus, February 2000 Chapter 11. "The Work of the Special Committee on Research Program," The Accounting Historians Journal, December 2001 Chapter 12. "Du Pont’s Early Policy on the Rotation of Audit Firms," Journal of Accounting and Public Policy, January/February 2003 Chapter 13. "‘The Apotheosis of Holding Company Accounting’: Unilever’s Financial Reporting Innovations from the 1920s to the 1940s," Accounting, Business & Financial History, July 2003 (with Kees Camfferman) Chapter 14. "How the U.S. Accounting Profession Got Where It Is Today: Part I," Accounting Horizons, September 2003; "How the U.S. Accounting Profession Got Where It Is Today: Part II," Accounting Horizons, December 2003 Chapter 15. "The Primacy of ‘Present Fairly’ in the Auditor’s Report," Accounting Perspectives, Vol. 6, No. 1 (2007) Chapter 16.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

72 "The SEC Preempts the Accounting Principles Board in 1965: The Classification of the Deferred Tax Credit Relating to Installment Sales," The Accounting Historians Journal, June 2007 Chapter 17. "The SEC Rules Historical Cost Accounting: 1934 to the 1970s," Accounting and Business Research, Special Issue: International Accounting Policy Forum Issue (2007) References Index

A History of Irish Economic Thought The Routledge History of Economic Thought

Edited by Thomas Boylan, National University of Ireland, Galway, Renee Prendergast and John Turner, both of Queen's University Belfast, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42340-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION For a country that can boast a distinguished tradition of political economy from Sir William Petty through Swift, Berkeley, Hutcheson, Burke and Cantillon through to that of Longfield, Cairnes, Bastable, Edgeworth, Geary and Gorman, it is surprising that no systematic study of Irish political economy has been undertaken. In this book the contributors redress this glaring omission in the history of political economy, for the first time providing an overview of developments in Irish political economy from the seventeenth to the twentieth century. Logistically this is achieved through the provision of individual contributions from a group of recognized experts, both Irish and international, who address the contribution of major historical figures in Irish political economy along the analysis of major thematic issues, schools of thought and major policy debates within the Irish context over this extended period.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1. Ireland and the Birth of Political Economy 1. The Irish Connection and the Birth of Political Economy: Petty and Cantillon Anthony Brewer 2. Swift and Berkeley on Economic Development Salim Rashid and Edward McPhail 3. Virtue, Vice and Political Economy- Engaging the Eighteenth Century Debates Renee Prendergast Part 2. The Classical Era: The Rise and Fall of Laissez-Faire 4. "A Science Unknown in Ireland": Political Economy in 19 th Century Ireland Peter Gray 5. The Trinity College School of Value and Distribution Lawrence Moss 6. Irish Agriculture-Land Tenure Systems, Redistribution and Risk Charles Hickson 7. Cairnes on Land, Laissez-faire: An Irish Challenge to Political Economy T.A. Boylan and T. P. Foley 8. Irish Debates on Money and Banking John Turner 9. Bastable on Trade and Public Finance John Maloney and Tom Boylan 10. The Peculiarities of Place: The Irish Historical School Roger Backhouse Part 3 . Into the Twentieth Century- Irish Contributions to Economic Theory 11. Edgeworth Alberto Baccini 12. Roy Geary John Spencer 13. Terence Gorman Patrick Honohan and Peter Neary Part 4. Policy and Economic Development-Shifting Economic Paradigms 14. Religion, Nationalism and Political Economy in the Early Twentieth Century Gearoid O Tuathaigh 15. Political Economy- from Nation Building to Stagnation Graham Brownlow 16. Export Led Growth, Multinational Corporations and Economic Development Frank Barry

The History of Norwegian Economic Thought The Routledge History of Economic Thought

Olav Bjerkholt and Pal Lykkja, both of University of Oslo, Norway PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $110.00; 234x156 mm; 200pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-29921-3; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The History of Norwegian Economic Thought is best known for its contribution to econometrics, with authors such as Ragnar Frisch and Trygve Haavelmo in particular standing out. This significant new volume presents a chronological historical overview of the developments of Norwegian economic thought over the years, and its use of primary Norwegian literature ensures it is an important reference book.

Multinationals and Cross-Cultural Management Routledge International Business in Asia

Parissa Haghirian, Sophia University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-44931-1; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Globalisation makes our world appear smaller: it is easier to connect, communicate and do business with people all over the world.

But cultural differences remain and challenge globalized knowledge communication and transfer. This book examines cross-cultural management within multinational enterprises (MNEs), focusing in particular on how cultural differences influence the transfer of

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

73 knowledge between different units within individual corporations. Based on detailed empirical analysis of 267 companies in Germany and Japan, it considers the relative effectiveness of inter-cultural and intra-cultural knowledge transfer; identifies the factors that inhibit or facilitate successful knowledge transfer; and suggests how management processes of MNEs can be improved. It demonstrates that although cultural differences do not necessarily influence the selection and transmission of knowledge overseas, they do have a strong impact on how that knowledge is received, integrated and put into practice locally. The book shows how knowledge is accepted differently in Europe and Asia and which factors have the strongest impact on efficient knowledge transfer. It suggests that to improve cross-cultural management MNEs should focus less on upgrading the technology that allows knowledge transfer, and more on the capabilities and beliefs of individual employees.

CONTENTS Part I. Theoretical Foundations of Knowledge Management and Transfer in Multinational Corporations 1. The Nature of Knowledge 2. Managing Knowledge within Organizations 3. Western Knowledge Management and Japanese Knowledge Management 4.

Knowledge Management in Multinational Corporations 5. Knowledge Transfer Across Cultures Part II. Research Question and Analysis 6. The Research Project 7. Do Knowledge Transfer Processes Differ Between Cultures? 8. Is Knowledge Transfer Between Cultures Less Successful Than Knowledge Transfer within one Culture? 9. Which Factors Influence Cross-cultural Knowledge Transfer? Part III. Effectiveness of Cross-cultural Knowledge Transfer in Multinational Corporations 10. How Successful is Crosscultural Knowledge Transfer? 11. The Future of Knowledge Management in Multinational Corporations

Reappraising State-Owned Enterprise Routledge International Studies in Business History

Edited by Franco Amatori, University of Bocconi, Italy, Robert Millward, University of Manchester, UK and Pier Angelo Toninelli, University of Milan-Bicocca, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87832-6; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION After a quarter century of almost general condemnation and rebuttal of the entire nationalization experience, it appears that there are second thoughts about governmental direct intervention in the economy. Since 9/11 the Western model has faced new ideological, institutional, and cultural challenges while the free-market economy no longer appears to be a universal panacea. Whatever the economic destiny of western civilization, however, does state-owned enterprise once again have a future? The collection of essays in this volume – prepared by some of the leading authorities in the field – offers a contribution to this debate by providing a balanced assessment of two of the most relevant experiences of mixed economies, the United Kingdom and Italy. As different as they are with regard to timing and background, a comparison between the two countries can nevertheless offer precious insights. At the general level it can throw new light on the motives, the directions, and the outcomes of nationalization. At the specific level, the essays have been conceived in order to allow a balanced comparison between the two experiences, especially for those sectors more affected by State intervention in the two countries (oil, energy, steel, shipbuilding) and to the nature of government’s actions. No other volume offers such an insightful, detailed analysis of SOE performance and possibilities for other major European nations.

CONTENTS 1. F. Amatori, R. Millward and P. A. Toninelli: Introduction: Reappraising State-owned enterprise Part I: Policies, Outcomes, and Funding 2. R. Millward: The nature of state enterprise in Britain, c. 1900-64 3. F. Amatori and P. A. Toninelli: Do

Technological Innovation in Finance Routledge International Studies in Business History

Edited by Bernado Batiz-Lazo, University of Leicester, UK, J. Carles Maixé-Altés, Universidade da Coruña, Spain and Paul Thomes, RWTH Aachen University, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88067-1; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This is the first book to investigate how computers have transformed the internal workings of financial service organizations in different competitive environments around the globe. Documenting developments in the US alongside case studies from Japan, Mexico, and Europe, Technological Innovation in Finance addresses the variety of financial institutions that populated the markets for retail finance. Contributors envision technological change in banking as a long-term process of evolution, articulating an interdisciplinary approach to the study of technological change in banking that considers the effects in diverse organizational forms and in multiple banking systems. Technological innovation had a major role in the shaping and developing of administrative procedures, routines, and organizational capabilities in organizations offering retain financial services. This volume shows how and when technological change altered the competitive intensity in the markets for retail finance. Technological Innovation in Finance explores the scope and consequences of these phenomena in an international context by discussing the diffusion of mechanical and digital technology across commercial/clearing banks, savings banks, cooperative banks, and postal banks. Some contributions focus

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

74 on individual organizations, others on changes in the competitive process, and others on the collaboration between several organizations.

CONTENTS Introduction Automation, computerization and the mechanization of retail financial services: An introduction Bernardo Bátiz-Lazo, J. Carles Maixé-Altés and Paul Thomes Part I: Digitalizing Commercial Banks 1. From prehistory to history of bankin

Trade Marks, Brands and Competitiveness Routledge International Studies in Business History

Edited by Teresa da Silva Lopes, Queen Mary, University of London, UK and Paul Duguid, University of California, Berkeley PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £100.00 $140.00; 229x152 mm; 254pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77693-6; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-86198-1; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines trademarks and brands, and their historical role in national competitive and comparative advantage and in overall economic growth. The contributors provide an historical account of the contribution of brands in consumer goods to economic growth; examine the development of trademark law, its influence on brand strategy, and reciprocally the influence of strategy on the law; and look at the building and repositioning of individual brands as example of the interplay of law and strategy. Brands and trademarks are usually discussed from the perspective of marketing. This book draws together scholars and practitioners not only from marketing, but also from business history, law, economics, and economic history to provide a richer understanding of trade marks and competitiveness than has hitherto been available.

CONTENTS List of Tables. List of Figures. Preface. Jack Keenan, CEO of Gran Cru Consulting, former CEO of Diageo. Introduction. Paul Duguid and Teresa da Silva Lopes. I. Trademarks and National Competitiveness. 1. Reading Registrations: An Overview of 100 Years of Trade Mark Registrations in France, the United Kingdom and the United States. Paul Duguid, Teresa da Silva Lopes and John Mercer.

2. Export Performance and Reputation. Mark Casson and Nigel Wadeson. 3. Trade Marks and Performance in UK Firms. Christian Helmers and Mark Rogers. 4. Co-Branding Product and Nation: Danish Modern Furniture and Denmark in the United States, 19401970. Per Hansen. II. Trademarks and the Law. 5. Trade Marks and Infringement in Britain, c. 1875- c.1900. David Higgins. 6.

Trademarks, Brands and Competition. Jennifer Davis and Spyros Maniatis. III. Building Brands. 7. Brands in Chains. Paul Duguid. 8.

Turning Trade Marks into Brands: How Advertising Agencies Practiced and Conceptualised Branding, 1890-1930. Stefan Schwarzkopf. 9. Corporate Brand Building: Shell-Mex Ltd in the Interwar Period. Michael Heller. 10. Unilever’s (Other) Brand Wars: Retailers, Private Labels and Struggles for Supremacy Within Product Supply Chains. Peter Miskell. Contributors. References. Index.

Health Innovation in Late Economic Development Routledge International Studies in Health Economics

Padmashree Gehl Sampath, United Nations University, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58578-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this new book, Padmashree Gehl Sampath brings together her years of research looking at the experiences of different latecomer countries in promoting sustainable health innovation systems to cater to local needs. The book covers a range of issues including knowledge accumulation and use for health and what it means for sustainable late development, innovation (both in terms of technological innovation and process and organisational innovation to ensure health delivery) and the role of states and institutions, as well as the meaning and consequence of locally relevant "knowledge infrastructure". The book, for the first time, presents empirical findings from six countries across Asia and Africa on health innovation, namely, India, Bangladesh, Vietnam, Kenya, Tanzania and Nigeria. The book concludes that the growth of knowledge and the accumulation of capabilities influence the ability of a country to generate wealth.

CONTENTS Part I: Overview, 1. The Global Health Imperative, 2. Sectoral Systems for Health Innovation and Development, Part II Empirical Evidence from Asia and Africa , 3. India’s Advanced Capacity in Health Innovation, 4. Health Innovation Systems in Bangladesh and Vietnam, 5. Kenya’s Health Innovation Capacity, 6. Nigeria’s and Tanzania’s Incipient Health Innovation Capacity, Part III Bridging the Health Divide: Inequality, Competitiveness and Delivery Issues, 7. Health Innovation and Latecomer Development: Comparative Insights, 8. Bridging the Health Divide: Institutional Capacity in Latecomers

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

75

The Capital Needs of Central Banks Routledge International Studies in Money and Banking

Edited by Susan Milton and Peter Sinclair PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55328-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyses the different ways central banks are funded and how funding arrangements may impact on their independence. The book’s objective is to explore these themes first from the academic and practitioner’s views – those of the economist, accountant and lawyer’s – and then to introduce practical experiences from a range of different central banks, in terms of their economic and sociopolitical environments. It will be the first time that the theorist and practitioner, the accountant, the economist and the lawyer come together in one volume. The reader will be able to access the full breadth of views on this important subject.

CONTENTS Introduction (Mario Blejer): 1. Central bank finances & independence: how much capital should a central bank have? (Alex Cukierman): 2. Central bank financial strength & macroeconomic policy performance (Peter Stella): 3. Financing the central bank: capital adequacy & financial independence – an accountant’s perspective (Robin Darbyshire): 4. Securing financial independence in the legal basis of a central bank (Fabian Amtenbrink): 5. Central bank capital adequacy: the cases of central banks with or without monetary policy (Luca Papi): 6. Creating a new central bank: the case of the Central Bank of the Philippines (Evelyna C Avila): 7. Exchange rate appreciation & negative central bank capital: is there a problem? (Jan Frait): 8. Central bank losses, electronic money and contestable central banking (Yuksel Görmez): 9. Funding models for central banks: is the European Central Bank a special case? (Ian Ingram): 10. The evolving financial arrangements & independence of the National Bank of Poland (Wojciech Kolodziej): 11. Central bank funding models & their risk-return profile (J Ramón Martínez-Resanó): 12. How asset liability management techniques can help central banks (Age Bakker, Han van der Hoorn, & Leonard Zwikker).

Currencies and Currency Policies in the Global Economy Routledge International Studies in Money and Banking

Kurt Hübner, University of British Columbia, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48265-3; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explains the volatility of the global foreign exchange markets by the interplay of political strategies and actions of market makers, looking at currency strategies put in place by the US, the Euro zone, Japan, China, and also Canada.

CONTENTS Foreword Introduction 1. Exchange Rate Regimes and Exchange Rate Episodes – The Historical Dimension 2. The Failure of Standard Exchange Rate Economics 3. Foreign Exchange Markets as ‘Socially Embedded Markets’ - An Alternative Approach 4.

Global Imbalances, Power Shifts, and Strong Dollar Politics of the US: The Era of Currency Competition 5. Case Studies: Currency Strategies Compared 6. Currency Cooperation Past and Present: Proposals and Interpretations 7. Outlook

Developing Alternative Frameworks for Explaining Tax Compliance Routledge International Studies in Money and Banking

Edited by James Alm and Jorge Martinez-Vazquez, both of Georgia State University, USA and Benno Torgler, Queensland University of Technology, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57698-7; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Over the last several decades, there has been a growing interest in theoretical, empirical, and experimental work on all aspects of tax compliance and tax evasion. The essays in this volume summarize the existing state of knowledge of tax compliance and tax evasion, present new thinking about this issue, and analyze the empirical relevance of these new perspectives. The original essays in this volume represent an attempt to provide a framework on compliance that moves beyond the economics-of-crime perspective, one that provides a more complete understanding of individual (and group) decisions, and one that is more consistent with empirical evidence.

It is the insights of behavioural economics that provide much of the bases for these essays and the main theme running through this

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

76 book is that the basic model of individual choice must be expanded, by introducing some aspects of behaviour or motivation considered explicitly by other social sciences.

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction to the Volume 1. Developing Alternative Frameworks for Explaining Tax Compliance James Alm, Jorge Martinez-Vazquez, and Benno Torgler Part 2: A Review and a Critique of the Existing Literature 2. Why Pay Taxes? A Review of Tax Compliance Decisions Erich Kirchler, Stephan Muehlbacher, Barbara Kastlunger, and Ingrid Wahl Part 3: Expanding the Standard Theory of Compliance 3. Tax Compliance: Social Norms, Culture and Endogeneity John Cullis, Philip Jones, and Alan Lewis 4. Vertical and Horizontal Reciprocity in a Theory of Taxpayer Compliance Jan Schnellenbach 5. Tax Evasion and the Psychological Tax Contract Lars P. Feld and Bruno S. Frey Part 4: Empirical Evidence on Financial Incentives 6. A Meta-Analysis of Incentive Effects in Tax Compliance Experiments Calvin Blackwell 7. Econometric Models for Multi-Stage Audit Processes: An Application to the IRS National Research Program Brian Erard and Jonathan S. Feinstein Part 5: Empirical Evidence on Governance 8. Tax Compliance, Tax Morale and Governance Quality Benno Torgler, Markus Schaffner, and Alison Macintyre 9. Tax Evasion, Corruption , and the Social Contract in Transition Eric Uslaner 10. Procedural Justice and the Regulation of Tax Compliance Behavior: The Moderating Role of Personal Norms Kristina Murphy Part 6: Case Studies 11. Tax Non-Compliance Among the Under-30s: Knowledge, Obligation or Skepticism? Valerie Braithwaite, Monika Reinhart, and Michael Smart 12. The Economic Psychology of Value Added Tax Compliance Paul Webley and Julie Ashby 13. Tax Evasion, the Informal Sector, and Tax Morale in LAC Countries James Alm and Jorge Martinez-Vazquez

International Tax Coordination Routledge International Studies in Money and Banking

Edited by Martin Zagler, Vienna University of Economics and Business, Austria PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56948-4; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION International taxation is a major research topic, and for a field of research at the intersection of so many disciplines there has been surprisingly little done across disciplinary boundaries. This book fills the gap by combining teams from business, economics, information science, law and political science to offer a unique and innovative approach to the issue of international tax coordination.

All the chapters are written in collaboration between at least two authors from two different disciplines. This approach offers a rich and nuanced understanding of the many issues of international tax coordination. The book collects seven papers, each one a valuable contribution in itself, beginning with current problems of international taxation and finishing with potential solutions. The essays explore current EU legislation, tax avoidance and tax fraud, as well as double tax agreements, dividend repatriation and hybrid finance and tax planning. Providing methodological answers to the question of how to conduct interdisciplinary research, the book also gives an accessible introduction into research questions and answers that are important in related disciplines for scholars in various areas.

This book will be of interest to postgraduates and researchers in the fields of economics, business, informational science, law and political science, as well as to professional accountants and tax lawyers.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: International Tax Coordination - An Interdisciplinary Perspective on Virtues and Pitfalls Martin Zagler 2. Rethinking tax jurisdictions and relief from international double taxation in relations with developing countries: Legal and economic perspectives from Europe and North America Pasquale Pistone and Timothy J. Goodspeed 3. How to combat tax evasion in tax havens? – A legal and economic analysis of OECD and EU standards on exchange of information in tax matters with a special focus on capital income Dietmar Aigner and Michael Tumpel 4. Double Tax Avoidance and Tax Competition for Mobile Capital Markus Leibrecht and Thomas Rixen 5 . Intra-firm dividend policies: Evidence and explanations Christian Bellak and Nadine Wiedermann-Ondrej 6. Cross Border Hybrid Finance and Tax Planning: Does International Tax Coordination Work? Ewald Aschauer, Eva Eberhartinger, and Wolfgang Panny 7. Investigating the shift towards a value added type destination-based cash flow capital income tax (VADCIT) Klaus Hirschler and Martin Zagler 8. The Case for and against an EU tax Michael Lang and Martin Zagler

Monetary and Banking History Routledge International Studies in Money and Banking

Edited by Geoffrey E. Wood, Cass Business School, City University, UK, Terrence Mills, Loughborough University, UK and Nicholas Crafts, University of Warwick, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $160.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45146-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Under the steely editorship of Geoffrey Wood, this book brings together a stellar line of contributors - including Charles Goodhart, Harold James, Michael Bordo, Barry Eichengreen, Charles Calomiris, and Anna Schwartz. It analyzes many of the mainstream themes

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

77 in economic and financial history - monetary policy, international financial regulation, economic performance, exchange rate systems, international trade, banking and financial markets - where historical perspectives are considered important.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Forrest Capie as a Monetary and Banking Historian 2. Openness and Britain’s Productivity Performance, 1870 - 1990 3. Monetary Policy and the Yield on High Yield (Junk) Bonds, 1910–1955 4. The International Financial Architecture in the First Half of the 20th Century 5. An Essay 6. Sudden Stops and Output Drops: Tales from the Gold Standard Years 7. Information Flows in 19th Century British Banking 8. Monetary Policy and Reserve Ratios over the Business Cycle 9. Tariffs and the Growth of Atlantic Trade 10. The Yield on Long Bonds in the Long Run 11. Another Essay

The New International Monetary System Routledge International Studies in Money and Banking

Edited by Charles Wyplosz, Graduate Institute of of International and Development Studies, Geneva, Switzerland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56052-8; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The New International Monetary System brings together twelve original contributions by leading scholars and practitioners to a conference convened in May 2008 on the occasion of the retirement of Alexander Swoboda. The contributions are arranged in three main parts. Part I deals with the international financial architecture, Part II examines the ever-controversial role of exchange rate regimes and Part III takes stock of the conduct of monetary policy and the challenges posed by the inflation-targeting strategy. The chapters provide considered assessments of virtually all the hotly debated issues that concern monetary policies seen from an international perspective. Edited by and with an introduction from Charles Wyplosz, the collection includes contributions from some of the key international figures in the field of monetary policy, central banking and exchange rate regimes to discuss contemporary international monetary issues. Contributors include Michael Bordo, Barry Eichengreen, Ronald McKinnon and Charles Goodhart. The volume also contains tributes from Paul Volcker and Jean-Pierre Roth.

CONTENTS Introduction Charles Wyplosz Part I: How has the IMF changed? 1. The Long-running Quest for IMF Reforms Michael Bordo and Harold James 2. The Future of the IMF and of Regional Cooperation in East Asia Yung Chul Park Part II: Exchange rate regimes: old debate, new answers 3. ‘Global Inflation’ and ‘The Proper Use of Policies under Fixed and Flexible Exchange Rates - A Personal Perspective on Two Themes of Alexander’s Research Hans Genberg 4. Financial Stability Under Fixed and Flexible Exchange Rates: A Theoretical Note Olivier Jeanne 5. Exchange Rate Regimes and Capital Mobility: How Much of the Swoboda Thesis Survives?

Barry Eichengreen 6. Exchange Rate Regimes and external Adjustment: New Answers to an Old Debate Atish Gosh and Jeronimo Zettelmeyer 7. China’s Exchange Rate Impasse and the Weak US Dollar Ronald McKinnon and Gunther Schnabl Part III: Central banking: a revolution under way? 8. Monetary Policy and Exchange Rates: Theory and Practice Stefan Gerlach and Cédric Tille 9.

Central Banks’ Function to Maintain Financial Stability: An Uncompleted Task Charles Goodhart 10. Is Inflation Targeting Passé?

Ulrich Kohli 11. It’s What They Do, Not What They Say: How to Infer the Stabilization Objectives of a Central Bank Michael Salemi 12. For the Celebration of Alexander Swoboda upon his Retirement Paul Volcker

Policy Makers on Policy, Second Edition Routledge International Studies in Money and Banking

Edited by Forrest Capie and Geoffrey Wood, both of Cass Business School, City University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 258pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57368-9; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Monetary policy is still one of the most contested areas of modern economics, yet since the original publication of Policy Makers on Policy much has changed. This new edition collects contributions from leading policy makers and practitioners to reflect on the aims and objectives of monetary policy and on what it can achieve, combining the old chapters from the likes of Gordon Brown, Tony Blair, Kenneth Clarke, Geoffrey Howe and Nigel Lawson with new perspectives from Mervyn King, Jean-Claude Trichet, Ernst Welteke, Otmar Issing, and Alastair Darling. A new far reaching introduction from the editors Forrest Capie and Geoffrey Wood puts these important contributions to the discussion of economic policy in the new context. What lessons can be learnt from these earlier discussions? What anticipations of present difficulties can be found in them? What, in other words, does the comparatively recent past teach us about how to deal with the turbulent present?

CONTENTS 1: Introduction, Forrest Capie and Geoffrey Wood Part 1, 2: Reflections on the conduct of monetary policy, Gordon Richardson , 3: Objectives of monetary policy: past and present, Lord Robbins , 4: The fight against inflation, Geoffrey Howe , 5: Monetary policy in

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

78 Britain and Europe, Robin Leigh-Pemberston , 6: Monetary Policy in Britain and Europe, Eddie George , 7: Financial and Monetary Integration: Benefits, Opportunities and Pitfalls, Hans Tietmeyer , Part II , 8. 'The British Experiment', Nigel Lawson , 9. The Economic Framework for New Labour, Tony Blair , 10: The conditions for full employment, Gordon Brown , Part III , 11: Benefits and costs: Securing the future for social security, Peter Lilley , 12: The changing world of work in the 1990s, Kenneth Clarke , Part IV : 13: Some presumptions of economic liberalisation, Samuel Brittan , 14: Markets, governments and virtues, Jonathan Sacks , Part V, 15: Monetary Policy: Practice Ahead of Theory, Mervyn King , 16: The process of European financial integration, Jean-Claude Trichet , 17: Reflections on European Monetary Policy, Ernst Welteke , 18: The ECB and the Euro - The First Five Years, Otmar Issing , 19: Maintaining stability in a global economy, Alistair Darling

Social Banks and the Future of Sustainable Finance Routledge International Studies in Money and Banking

Olaf Weber and Sven Remer, both of the Institute for Social Banking, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58329-9; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In the context of the current financial crisis social banking offers an alternative to conventional banking in stressing the opportunities for banks to positively influence the financial, economic and sustainable development. The book describes and explains the history, the current state and the development of social and sustainable banking, covering a range of topics such as products and services management and organizational issues and featuring case studies of different social banks worldwide, including GLS, Alternative Bank ABS, TRIODOS and Banca Etica.

CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction, Chapter 2 Background to Social Banking, Chapter 3 Social Banking Products and Services, Chapter 4 Inside Social Banks, Chapter 5 The Future of Social Banking

Changing Consumer Roles Routledge Interpretive Marketing Research

Edited by Karin Ekström, University of Gothenburg, Sweden and Kay Glans PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87849-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Including new essays from heavy-hitting scholars Zygmunt Baumann, Russell Belk, Colin Campbell, Deirdre McCloskey , and Neva Goodwin , Changing Consumer Roles brings together a diverse set of expert scholars to enliven and sharpen the debate about the ways in which consumption affects society today. This informative and provocative anthology explores the relationships between consumption and a variety of important topics such as the character of a society and its social and cultural dimensions; the relations between generations; dependency on technology and the risks involved; the rise of Asia and its consumption patterns; the question of whether we must continuously increase our consumption to avoid a recession, and whether this is in fact ecologically sustainable.

These questions reflect the current need for an analytically rigorous exploration of consumption – based on theory and empirical evidence – that will inspire readers to participate in more nuanced debates on consumption and changing consumer roles.

CONTENTS Part I. Editors introduction Part II. A Changing Society? 1. The historical roots to today’s society (Colin Campbell) 2. Reflections on economic thought (Deirdre McCloskey) 3. The change of the market over time. What is the meaning of the market

Interactive Marketing Routledge Interpretive Marketing Research

Christopher J. Miles, Eastern Mediterranean University, Turkey PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 244pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80171-3; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85207-1; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book critically examines the rhetoric surrounding current trends in the adoption of tropes of interactivity in marketing communication. Concepts such as viral advertising, customer-generated content, brand communities and the whole panoply of Web 2.0-mediated marketing technologies all have their foundations in an overt positioning of interactivity as the savior of effective

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

79 marketing communication. Yet, what exactly is meant by interactivity in these contexts and how far does it represent a revolution in the methodologies of marketing? Anchoring his analysis in a critique of the assumptions of control embedded in current marketing communication models and the rhetorical analysis of exemplar texts from the Marketing Management, Customer Relationship Management, Viral Marketing and Buzz Marketing paradigms, Chris Miles investigates the constructions and reconstructions of discourse that surround the uses of interactivity in contemporary marketing discourses. In doing so, he offers a radical new model of marketing based upon a recursive, constructivist understanding of communication that uses metaphors of invitation and exploration to rebuild interactivity at the center of marketing. The work culminates in a reading of the theory of Relationship Marketing that uses autism as an allegory to interrogate the communicative paradox at the heart of this contemporary marketing panacea.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Rhetoric of Interactivity 2: The Interactivity Crisis and Marketing Discourse 3: A Radical Constructivist's Marketing Construction 4: The Rendition of the Consumer's Voice 5: Customer Communities and the Grammar of Control 6: The Autism of Relationship Marketing 7: A Recursive, Invitational Model of Marketing Interactivity

Managing Service Firms Routledge Interpretive Marketing Research

Per Skålén, Karlstad University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $130.00; 229x152 mm; 186pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47326-2; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Based on a conceptual analysis of marketing texts, particularly service marketing texts, and a case study of a service firm that utilizes approaches to managing organizations that have been developed within the boundaries of marketing, this book presents a critical examination of marketing as a managerial practice. Skålén focuses in particular on the managerial research tradition and managerial practice referred to as service marketing (sometimes service management), which is seen as a ‘dominant managerial logic’ by many marketing scholars. Skålén analyzes the governmentality of service marketing through textual representations of managerial marketing and a case study of a service organization. Based on the former, the author argues that managerial marketing has always promoted and fostered customer orientation as the main governmental rationality and that this rationality in service marketing targets human beings more exclusively than previously. This book contributes to critical marketing research since this research tradition lacks studies of empirical responses to managerial marketing which articulate a radical social critique.

CONTENTS Preface 1: Introduction 2: Power and Marketing 3: The Bureaucratic Organization and the Reactive Employee 4: ‘I Want To Help You’: The Power of Market and Service Orientation 5: The Power/Knowledge of Service Quality and Coaching 6: The Managerial Rationality of Relationship Marketing 7: From Prescribing Marketing Practices to Studying Marketing as Practice Appendix: Methodology and Methods Notes Bibliography Index

Accountancy and Empire Routledge New Works in Accounting History

Edited by Chris Poullaos, University of Sydney, Australia and Suki Sian, Cardiff University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 306pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45771-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85154-8; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book brings together, for the first time, studies of the professionalisation of accountancy in key constituent territories of the British Empire. The late nineteenth century was a period of intensive activity in terms of both imperialism and professionalisation. A team of expert contributors has examined profession-state engagements between Britain, on the one hand and Canada, South Africa, Australia, Nigeria, Malaysia, Sri Lanka, Jamaica, Trinidad and Tobago, India and Kenya, and the other with a view to assessing how the organizations of accountancy in the colonies was affecting the metropolitan profession and state agents- and vice versa. Their contributions highlight the peculiarities of the professionalization processes in variant social, economic and political environments linked together by the relays of empire, prompting reflection on both the common and disparate dynamics involved. This book has numerous objectives, including giving historical insight and focus on countries that provide contrasting and variant examples of the uptake of the "British model", and broadening the appeal of accounting history and professionalisation as a taught subject in university accounting departments.

CONTENTS Chapter 1. Accountancy and Empire: Setting the Stage Suki Sian and Chris Poullaos Chapter 2. The Self-Governing Dominions of South Africa, Australia and Canada and the Evolution of the Imperial Accountancy Arena during the 1920s Chris Poullaos Chapter 3.

Canada between Empires Alan J. Richardson Chapter 4. Colonial Heritage and the Accounting Profession in Nigeria Chibuike U. Uche Chapter 5. The Malaysian Accountancy Profession and its Imperial Legacy (1957-1995) Devi S. Susela Chapter 6. The Imperial

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

80 Roots of Accounting Closure: The Case of Sri Lanka P.W. Senerath Yapa Chapter 7. Imperialism and Professionalization: The Case of Accountancy in Jamaica Owalabi M. Bakre Chapter 8. Maintaining Empire: The Practice Link in Trinidad and Tobago Marcia Annisette Chapter 9. The Influence of Empire on the Establishment of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) After Independence Shraddha Verma Chapter 10. Between the Lines: The Professionalization of Accountancy in Kenya Suki Sian Chapter 11. Accountancy and Empire: Connections, Patterns and Suggestions Chris Poullaos and Suki Sian

Economic Liberalization and Turkey Routledge Political Economy of the Middle East and North Africa

Sübidey Togan, University of Bilkent, Turkey PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00; 234x156 mm; 322pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49595-0; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The liberalization of the Turkish economy is a key factor affecting Turkey’s application to join the European Union. This book examines the impact of economic liberalization in Turkey and Turkey’s approach to the elimination of barriers to trade. It focuses on the liberalization of trade in Turkey’s agricultural and industrial commodities sector and key services such as telecommunications, electricity, natural gas, banking and transport. The chapters include thorough discussions on WTO and EU approaches for the elimination of barriers to trade, international and EU rules and regulations in the various service sectors, and the methods for estimating the tariff equivalents of barriers to trade in the different service sectors as well as methods for estimating the benefits of liberalization of services for Turkey. The experience of Turkey, its approach to liberalization and its measures to eliminate barriers to trade serve as a useful model for other neighboring countries of the European Union.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part I: Liberalization of Trade in Goods 2. The Foreign Trade Regime and Trade Liberalization in Turkey 3. Standards, Conformity Assessment and Technical Barriers to Trade Part II: Liberalization of Services 4. Liberalization of Telecommunications Services 5. Electricity Sector Policy Reform 6. Policy Reform in the Natural Gas Sector 7. Liberalization of Banking Services 8.

Maritime Freight Transport Sector Policy Reform 9. Policy Reform in the Road Freight Transport Sector Part III: Quantifying the Impact of Economic Liberalization 10. Impact of Economic Liberalization

Ethical Socialism and the Trade Unions Routledge Research in Employment Relations

John Kelly, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 227pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87848-7; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84942-2; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Allan Flanders was one of the leading British industrial relations academics and his ideas exerted a major influence on government labor policy in the 1960s and 1970s. But as well as being an Oxford academic with a strong interest in theory and labor reform, he was also a lifelong political activist. Originally trained in German revolutionary ethical socialism in the early 1930s, he was the founder and joint editor of Socialist Commentary, the leading outlet for ‘revisionist’ social democratic thinking in Britain in the 1950s and 1960s. He was also the leading figure in the influential 1950s ‘think tank’ Socialist Union and played a key part in the bitter factional struggles inside the Labour Party. The main argument of the book is that Flanders’ ethical socialist ideas constituted both his strength and his weakness. Their rigor, clarity and sweep enabled him to exert a major influence over government attempts to negotiate labor reforms with the trade unions. Yet he proved unable to explain the failure of the reforms amidst rising levels of industrial conflict, as his intellectual rigor turned into ideological rigidity. The failure of negotiated reform led to Margaret Thatcher’s neo-liberal assault on trade union power in the 1980s.

CONTENTS Chapter 1. Introduction: Industrial Relations and Social Democratic Politics Chapter 2. Revolutionary Ethical Socialism in Interwar Germany Chapter 3. Revolutionary Socialism in a Cold Climate 1932-1939 Chapter 4. Trade Unions under Planned Capitalism 19391946 Chapter 5. Democratic Socialism in the Cold War 1946-1951 Chapter 6. The Recuperation of Ethical Socialism 1951-1959 Chapter 7. Ethical Socialism and Industrial Relations Reform 1959-1973 Chapter 8. The Limits and Failings of Industrial Relations Reform Chapter 9. Conclusions: Allan Flanders, Ethical Socialism and the Reform of British Industrial Relations Epilogue: Industrial Relations Reform and Social Democratic Politics after Flanders

European Works Councils and Industrial Relations Routledge Research in Employment Relations

Jeremy Waddington, University of Manchester, UK

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

81 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 184pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87390-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The creation of European Works Councils is arguably the most important measure taken in global industrial relations in recent years.

Adopted with the primary goal of facilitating European-level workers’ participation in information-sharing and consultation in multinational companies, EWCs have also been central to a wide-ranging process of institution-building at the European level.

European Works Councils and Industrial Relations looks in depth at the three largest European Industry Federations in the process of institution-building, and whether these federations have helped or hindered EWC workers’ representatives. The first part of the book examines the provision for information and consultation rights, intended to permit workers’ representatives a degree of influence upon high levels of company restructuring in multinational corporations. Next, the book assesses whether that direct line of communication with top management has in fact been successful in practice. Institution-building, a second result of EWCs, has taken many forms, such as giving workers’ representatives in unions and national works councils the opportunity to consult with one another and develop a common European response to employers’ transnational plans before they are implemented. Most importantly for institutionbuilding, the development of EWCs has led to a wider role beyond the narrow barriers of the institution itself, and includes changing roles and politics for European Industry Federations (EIFs), as well as paved the way for a kind of ‘global’ works council with implications for industrial relations worldwide.

CONTENTS 1. Setting the Scene. 2. The Articulation Activities of European Industry Federations. 3. The Numerical Development of European Works Councils and the Terms of Founding Agreements. 4. Information, Consultation and Company Restructuring: Views on

Computational Analysis of Firms’ Organization and Strategic Behaviour Routledge Research in Strategic Management

Edoardo Mollona, University of Bologna, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 353pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47602-7; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85009-1; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book addresses possible applications of computer simulation to theory building in management and organizational theory. The key hypothesis is that modelling and computer simulation provide an environment to develop, test and articulate theoretical propositions. In general, computer simulation provides an experimental environment where researchers are able to play with symbolic representations of phenomena by modifying the model’s structure and activating or deactivating model’s parameters. This environment allows to both generating hypotheses to ex post explain observed phenomena or to ex ante generate distributions of unrealized events thereby envisioning areas for further empirical investigations. Under a methodological perspective, the volume investigates logics and techniques to design a research strategy grounded on computer simulation. In particular, the articles in the book concentrate on two different techniques, and philosophies, to set up a simulation study: System Dynamics, which is grounded on differential equations and feedback theory, and agent-based modeling. The book describes how computer simulation helps to look into research issues typical to strategic management and organizational theory. In this respect, such themes as firms’ diversification strategies, competitive strategy, rivalry and the impact of role dynamics on organizational performances are explored through the lenses of computer simulation models.

CONTENTS Part I: Why and How Using Computer Simulation for Theory Development in Social Sciences Chapter 1. The Use of Computer Simulation in Strategy and Organization Research. Mollona, E. Chapter 2. Computational Modelling and Social Theory- The Dangers of Numerical Representation. Edmonds, B. Chapter 3. Devices for Theory Development: Why Using Computer Simulation if Mathematical Analysis is Available. Fioresi, R. and E. Mollona. Chapter 4. Mix, Chain and Replicate: Methodologies for AgentBased Modelling of Social Systems. Hales, D. Part II: Computer Simulation for Theory Development in Strategy and Organization Theory Chapter 5. The Dynamics of Firm Growth and Resource Sharing in Corporate Diversification. Gary, S. Chapter 6. Revisiting Porter’s Generic Strategies for Competitive Environments using System Dynamics. Kunc, M. Chapter 7. Rivalry and Learning among Clustered and Isolated Firms. Boari, C., Fioretti, G. and Odorici, V. Chapter 8. Organization and Strategy in Banks. Cappellini, A. and A. Raimondi. Chapter 9. Changing Roles in Organizations: An Agent-Based Approach. Lamieri, M. and D. Mangalagiu Chapter 10.

Rationality Meets the Tribe: Recent Models of Cultural Group Selection. Hales, D. Part III: How to Build Agent-Based Computer Models of Firms Chapter 11. An Agent-Based Methodological Framework to Simulate Organizations or the Quest for the Enterprise: jES and jESOF, Java Enterprise Simulator and Java Enterprise Simulator Open Foundation. Terna, P. Chapter 12. From Petri Nets to ABM: The Analysis of the Enterprise's Process to Model the Firm. Ferraris, G.

Wisdom and Management in the Knowledge Economy Routledge Research in Strategic Management

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

82 David Rooney, Bernard McKenna and Peter Liesch, all of University of Queensland, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 260pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-44573-3; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85279-8; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Today there are more technology, technologists, knowledge and experts than at any time in human history; but from a global perspective, it is difficult to argue that this accumulation of knowledge and technology has put the world in an unambiguously better position than it was in the past. Business is not getting any easier to do and major corporate collapses based on poor decisions, poor conduct, and poor judgement continue to occur. In public administration too, basic institutions and services (education, health, transport) seem to be continually undergoing “crises” of inadequate delivery and excessive pressure. Wisdom and Management in the Knowledge Economy explains why unwise managerial practice can happen in a world characterized by an excess of information and knowledge. Drawing on Aristotle’s idea of practical wisdom, the book develops a theory of social practice wisdom that addresses important social psychological and sociological dynamics that underpin wise management and organizations. As well as providing a detailed theory of social practice wisdom, this book considers practical issues in organizational communication, behavior, culture, change and knowledge as well as in HRM, leadership, ethics, strategy, international business, business education, and wisdom research. By introducing the notion of social practice wisdom, aspects of social structure, organizational culture, and organizational communication needed for wisdom to flourish are for the first time rendered visible in a way that opens new possibilities for wiser management, wiser organizations, and wisdom research.

CONTENTS 1. Wise Business in a Knowledge Society 2. What is Wisdom 3. Where did Talk of it Go? 4. Change, Ephemerality, and Fads 5.

Knowledge, Innovation and Creativity 6. Human Resource Management 7. Public Administration 8. Strategy and Business Policy 9.

International Business 10. Communication Management 11. Intellectual Leadership and the Wise Leader 12. Management Education 13. Wisdom Problematics and Limitations

Accounting and Justice Routledge Studies in Accounting

John Flower, EIASM, Belgium PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 223pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87177-8; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84746-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Accounting and Distributive Justice challenges the basic assumptions on which the current practice of financial reporting is based. It argues that the decisions which need to be made regarding the allocation of the scarce resources produced by the business community should be based on justice and equality, rather than the traditional capitalist paradigm. It explains in non-technical terms the principle philosophical theories of justice and argues that a firm has a moral responsibility to seek distributive justice in its dealings with its shareholders, employees, suppliers, customers, and other people with whom it has dealings, who are considered to be the firm’s stakeholders. The book introduces concepts of distributive justice to accountants and provokes them into reflecting on how the discipline of accounting can best serve the cause of justice. Accounting and Distributive Justice provides both a philosophical foundation and a practical game plan for the future of a more sustainable accounting practice.

CONTENTS Preface 1.The Wrong Paradigm 2. Distributive Justice 3.The Firm’s Responsibility for Distributive Justice 4. The Contribution of Financial Reporting to Distributive Justice 5. The Reporting Function 6. The Distribution Function 7. The Information Function 8.

Concluding Remarks

Accounting in Networks Routledge Studies in Accounting

Edited by Hakan Hakansson, BI Norwegian School of Management, Kalle Kraus and Johnny Lind, both of Stockholm School of Economics, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £3/25/1900 $125.00; 229x152 mm; 368pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80647-3; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85431-0; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Accounting in Networks is the first book that in a comprehensive way covers the emerging issue of accounting and control in horizontal relations across legally independent organizations. During the last 20 years, organisations have shown an increased interest in collaborations that cross company boundaries. New organisational forms, such as alliances, partnerships, joint ventures, outsourcing

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

83 and networks have received increased attention. This development has pushed management accounting researchers into examining the lateral effects of accounting. This book examines these lateral effects on accounting, and creates a comprehensive summary of what has been achieved so far and what interesting developments will occur in the coming ten years. The book covers a variety of interorganizational settings – dyads, networks, joint ventures, public sector – and the roles of accounting therein. It also deals with specific inter-organizational accounting techniques – customer accounting, target costing and open book accounting – which companies use to manage in a world of inter-organizational relationships and networks. The book also covers different theoretical perspectives – transactional cost economics, the industrial-network approach, actor-network theory, institutional theory – on accounting in networks.

Each chapter focus on a specific angle of accounting in networks, assess theoretical and empirical evidence, summarize the current position/debate and discuss promising avenues for future research.

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Accounting in Networks as a New Research Field Håkan Håkansson, Kalle Kraus and Johnny Lind Chapter 2: Accounting and Inter-Organisational Issues David Ford and Håkan Håkansson Part 1: Accounting in Different Settings Chapter 3: InterOrganisational Accounting in Dyadic Settings John Cullen and Juliana Meira Chapter 4: Towards Accounting in Network Settings Johnny Lind and Sof Thrane Chapter 5: The Role of Management Accounting in Joint Venture Relationships: A Dynamic Perspective Jeltje van der Meer-Kooistra and Pieter E. Kamminga Chapter 6: Accounting in Inter-Organisational Relationships within the Public Sector Kalle Kraus and Cecilia Lindholm Part 2: Accounting Techniques Chapter 7: Customer Accounting When Relationships and Networks Matter Mikael Cäker and Torkel Strömsten Chapter 8: Target Costing in Inter-Organisational Relationships and Networks Martin Carlsson-Wall and Kalle Kraus Chapter 9: Open-Book Accounting in Networks Peter Kajüter and Harri I. Kulmala Part 3: Theoretical Perspectives on Accounting in Networks Chapter 10: Accounting in Networks — the Transaction Cost Economics Perspective Shannon Anderson and Henri Dekker Chapter 11: Accounting In Networks — the Industrial-Network Approach Håkan Håkansson, Kalle Kraus, Johnny Lind and Torkel Strömsten Chapter 12: Actor-Network Theory and the Study of Interorganisational Network-Relations Jan Mouritsen, Habib Mahama and Wai Fong Chua Chapter 13: Accounting in Inter-organisational Relationships — the Institutional Theory Perspective Robert W. Scapens and Evangelia Varoutsa Chapter 14: Accounting in Networks — the Next Step Håkan Håkansson, Kalle Kraus and Johnny Lind

Law, Corporate Governance, and Accounting Routledge Studies in Accounting

Edited by Victoria Krivogorsky, San Diego State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87186-0; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The growing internationalization of markets, the relaxation of constraints on capital flows between countries, and the creation of different economic unions -- the European Union in particular -- initiated the flow of capital, goods, and services across national borders, growth and diffusion of shareholding, and increased merger activity among the world’s largest stock exchanges. These changes have stimulated an interest in understanding developments in accounting and corporate governance in a newly qualitative way. Two recent occurrences in the world of business have created this interest in examining accounting and corporate governance.

First, the corporate scandals in the US and Europe in early 2000’s shook the financial community’s confidence in the performance of public companies’ boards of directors and drew attention to possible flaws in corporate governance practices. Second, the European Parliament passed a resolution requiring all firms listed on stock exchanges of European member states to apply to IFRS when preparing their financial statements, making it necessary to analyze and debate the merits of this adoption, such as its effects on financial statements’ properties – economic performance in particular. The outcome of this research is instrumental in evaluating the corporate governance differences and first outcomes of this accounting convergence for robust policy prescriptions for future regimes.

Leadership and the Global Environmental Challenge Routledge Studies in Business Ethics

Edited by Benjamin Redekop, Christopher Newport University, PA, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 265pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80650-3; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84699-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION As the first book in the field of leadership studies to approach sustainability as a multi-faceted leadership challenge, Leadership for Environmental Sustainability will help to set the terms of the discussion on this topic among students, scholars, and practitioners of leadership for years to come. It explores the connection between leadership and sustainability from a variety of disciplinary perspectives, including sociology, history, psychology, business, literature, communication, and the arts. Chapter topics range from the communication strategy of Al Gore to environmental leadership in India, from spirituality to business, and from the rise of the German Green Party to the leadership role played by artists in environmental design. Through close examination by contributors, conceptual underpinnings of environmental leadership are put to the test, as are the practical constraints and challenges faced by leaders concerned about protecting the natural environment.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

84 CONTENTS Introduction: Connecting Leadership and Sustainability. Benjamin Redekop. Chapter 1: An Ecological Perspective on Leadership Theory, Research, and Practice. Richard M. Wielkiewicz and Stephen P. Stelzner. Chapter 2: Eco-Leadership: Towards the Development of a New Paradigm. Simon Western. Chapter 3: Challenges and Strategies of Leading for Sustainability. Benjamin Redekop. Chapter Four: Leadership and the Dynamics of Collaboration: Averting the Tragedy of the Commons. Rob Williams.

Chapter 5: Leadership for Sustainability in Business: It's All About the Stories We Tell. Martin Melaver. Chapter 6: Green Heroes Reexamined: An Evaluation of Environmental Role Models. Beth Birmingham and Stan Lequire. Chapter 7: Communicating Leadership for Environmental Sustainability: The Rhetorical Strategies of Rachel Carson and Al Gore. Denise Stodola. Chapter Eight: Artists as Transformative Leaders for Sustainability. Jill Jacoby & Xia Ji. Chapter 9: The Agrarian Mind and Good Leadership: Harvesting Insights from the Literary Field of Wendell Berry. Paul Kaak. Chapter 10: Leadership from Below: Farmers and Sustainable Agriculture in Ethiopia. Ezekiel Gebissa. Chapter 11: The League of Nations and the Problems of Health and the Environment: Leadership for the Common Good in Historical Perspective. Michael Callahan. Chapter 12: Protest, Power, and "Political Somersaults:" Leadership Lessons from the German Green Party. Heather McDougall. Chapter 13: Religion, Leadership, and the Natural Environment: The Case of American Evangelicals. Calvin Redekop. Chapter 14: The Turn toward Spirituality and Environmental Leadership. Corné Bekker. Chapter 15: Deep Systems Leadership: A Model for the 21st Century. Rian Satterwhite.

Conclusion: Towards a New General Theory of Leadership.

Entrepreneurship and Organization Routledge Studies in Business Organizations and Networks

Daniel Hjorth, Entrepreneurship and Small Business Research Institute (ESBRI), Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $130.00; 229x152 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42334-2; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Working from a unique standpoint and challenging the orthodoxy on entrepreneurship this controversial book explores the possibilities of entrepreneurship in organizations and entrepreneurship in organization creation whilst re-anchoring entrepreneurship within a broader disciplinary approach. Demonstrating that there is an increasingly relevant and complex relationship between entrepreneurship and organization, this volume: de-contextualizes entrepreneurship from its present inclusion in management provides the philosophical and historical conditions for the emergence of entrepreneurship and management in society re-contextualizes entrepreneurship in organization via its central concepts of imagination, desire/passion, power, becoming and organizational creation places entrepreneurship among the natural human activities in organized contexts. A fascinating account of the relationship between entrepreneurship and organization, this book is a must read for all those researching entrepreneurship, organizational theory, and business and management thought.

CONTENTS 1. Entrepreneurship in Society: Entrepreneurship in Business 2. Organizations: From Bureaucracy to Self-Actualization 3. A Genealogy of the Entrepreneurship: Management Relationship 4. A Genealogy of Management in the Study of Organization 5.

Entrepreneurship and Organization: Some Lines of Flight 6. Entrepreneurship as Organizational Creativity

Management of International Business Networks Routledge Studies in Business Organizations and Networks

Emanuela Todeva, University of Surrey, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-36839-1; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-02827-8; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Fully updated and revised, this second edition builds upon the foundations of business network theory introduced in Business Networks: Strategy and Structure . Drawing together the international dimensions of global business networks and a discussion of the modes of foreign market entry, this book covers a range of management issues including: co-ordination governance evolution of business networks across borders. This book will be of interest to those studying or researching ownership or organization of enterprises, business systems analysis and economics and business and management in general.

CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2. Network Dynamics and Evolution 3. Managing Network Communications and Resource Flows: Network Coordination 4. Managing Cooperation and Competition in Networks: Network Governance 5. Managing Foreign Market Entry and Internationalisation of Business Networks 6. Managing International Supply-Chain Networks, R&D Networks & Technology Alliances and Partnerships 7. Cases of International Business Networks

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

85

Procuring Complex Performance Routledge Studies in Business Organizations and Networks

Edited by Mickey Howard and Nigel Caldwell, both of University of Bath, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 232pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80005-1; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited collection will stimulate debate over all aspects of ‘procuring complex performance’ (PCP), an emerging research phenomenon in both public and private business sectors. Examining industry studies in terms of their operational, structural, strategic, and political context, Procuring Complex Performance reflects on current trends in managing for complex outcomes. Drawing on projects in construction, healthcare, defense, and aerospace, as well as the contractual forms that support innovative approaches to risk and incentives, this book illustrates not only the now well-documented shift from a manufacturing orientation to a service orientation, but a further shift from managing suppliers’ inputs to contracting for outcomes. Exploring large-scale complex projects such as the construction of Heathrow Terminal 5, the management of a major hospital, the provision of service support in the defense sector, as well as a case from the Public Finance Initiative, the contributions here demonstrate the ways in which both the public-private and product-service boundaries evolve as a project progresses. Similarly, developments in more capital-intensive industries, such as aerospace, challenge the simple notion of hierarchy-based relationships between customer and supplier. Offering a comprehensive look at the key drivers for corporate competitiveness in terms of 21 st century supply and policy practice, Procuring Complex Performance shows organizations and supply communities what they must do in order to identify and develop the skills needed to ensure growth, security, and prosperity.

CONTENTS Foreword (TBA) Introduction (Nigel Caldwell and Mickey Howard, University of Bath) Section 1: Conceptual Underpinnings 1. PCP: A Preliminary Conceptualization and Research (Mike Lewis and Jens Roehrich, University of Bath) 2. Commissions and Con

Political Economy of the Environment Routledge Studies in Contemporary Political Economy

Simon Dietz, London School of Economics, UK, Jonathan Michie, University of Birmingham, UK and Christine Oughton, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43753-0; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Climate change and environmental policy in general was one of the key issues discussed at the historic G8 summit in Gleneagles in the summer of 2005. This book draws together a team of political economists and environmentalists to assess the big picture and eschews "number-crunching" cost-benefit analysis to develop a more holistic approach, designed to take into account the point of view of all people and not just a select few.

CONTENTS 1. The Microeconomics of Environmental Policy 2. Environmental Systems and Macro-Economic Models 3. Innovation Systems and Technological Progress 4. Sustainable Consumption

The Regulation of Work and Employment in Global Firms Routledge Studies in Employment and Work Relations in Context

Edited by Gregor Murray and Gilles Trudeau, both of University of Montreal, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47010-0; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Traditionally, industrial relations actors - unions and governments - have dealt with the regulation of work and employment through national mechanisms such as labour laws and collective bargaining. The inadequacy of these mechanisms to cope with the era of globalization has led to a rethinking of the nature and role of these traditional instruments and actors in the regulation of work and employment in the global firm. This book seeks to shed light on this process, to evaluate the range of emerging mechanisms and to consider the implications of this process for traditional forms of industrial relations governance such as collective bargaining and labour law in a global context. The originality of the approach is linked to the attempt to build bridges between industrial relations, labour law, the sociology of work and management and management studies. There are few other studies which systematically seek to integrate both different regions of the world and different sources of regulation into a single book.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

86 CONTENTS Introduction (Gregor Murray & Gilles Trudeau, Université de Montréal) 1. Social Regulation and the Global Firm: What's at Stake?

(Gregor Murray & Gilles Trudeau, Université de Montréal) 2. Mapping the Mechanisms for the International Regulation of Labour (George Tsogas, City Univeristy) 3. European Approaches to the Social Regulation of the Global Firm (Marie-Ange Moreau, European University) 4. Towards a Gradual Continentalization of Labour Law in the Americas (Pierre Verge, Université Laval) 5.

Regulation of Labour in the South: The Emergence of Social Regionalism in the CARICOM and MERCOSUR (Adelle Blackett, McGill University) 7. Corporate Social Responsibility (Corinne Gendron & Alain Lapointe, Université du Québec à Montréal) 8.

Corporate Social Responsibility and State-Centred Regulation of International Labour Standards (Don Wells, McMaster University) 9.

International Framework Agreements: A Union Response to Codes of Conduct (Reynald Bourque, Université de Montréal) 10. The Pachyderm and the Predator: Two Fables about the Social Regulation of the Global Firm (Harry Arthurs, York University) 11.

Towards a Social Regulation of the Global Firm? (Gregor Murray & Gilles Trudeau, Université de Montréal)

Enterprise and Deprivation Routledge Studies in Entrepreneurship

Alan Southern, University of Liverpool, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00; 229x152 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45815-3; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There is little doubt that in recent years enterprise has been considered an essential approach in the alleviation of deprivation existing in the developed world. The assumption is that area-based initiatives provide a means by which enterprise can include all members of society in mainstream social and economic activities. The rationale behind this book is to critically challenge the notion that enterprise can address the complexity behind deprivation and social exclusion by demonstrating UK and North American examples. The contributions in this edited collection offer a distinct opportunity in respect of both theoretical and empirical advancement. The authors hale from both sides of the Atlantic and form an inter-disciplinary group to provide complementary perspectives in this field.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Idealised Enterprise and Real Deprivation (Alan Southern, University of Liverpool) 2. Locating Enterprise and Placing Wealth: Organizational Structure as a Tool in Place-based Business (Doug Lionais, Cape Breton University) 3. Discursive Chasms: An Examination of the Language and Promotion of Social Enterprise (Carole Howorth and Caroline Parkinson, Lancaster University) 4. Revitalizing Inner-City Minority Communities By Creating and Expanding Small Businesses: An Analysis (Timothy Bates, Wayne State University and Alicia Robb, University of California) 5. Exciting Start-Ups: Disappointing Outcomes? Evidence from UK Enterprise Programmes (Julia Rouse, Manchester Metropolitan University) 6. The Role of Ideology in Community Economic Development Policy: An Examination of the Clinton and George W. Bush Administrations (Julia Sass Rubin, Rutgers University New Jersey) 7. The Hidden Enterprise Culture (Colin Williams, University of Sheffield) 8. Unauthorized Immigrant Entrepreneurship (Enrico Marcelli, Harvard University) 9. Urban Boosterism and Ethnic Minority Entrepreneurship (Trevor Jones and Monder Ram, De Montfort University) 10. Race, Space, and the Dynamics of Self-Employment (Casey Dawkins, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University) 11. Working Life in Rural Micro-Enterprises: Old Forms of Organisation in the New Economy (Susan Baines, Jane Wheelock and Elizabeth Oughton, University of Newcastle) 12. Micro Enterprise and Cooperative Development in Economically Marginalized Communities (Jessica Gordon Nembhard, University of Maryland) 13. Access to Finance in Deprived Areas: Has the Government Lost Interest? (, Salford University) 14. Challenges of Delivering Enterprise Support in Deprived Areas (Fergus Lyon, Middlesex University) 15. Entrepreneurship, Social Exclusion and Regeneration Policy: Moving Beyond Social Enterprise? (Simon Pemberton, University of Liverpool) 16. Market Madness or the Road to Salvation? (Geoffrey Whittam, University of Paisley and Kean Birch, University of Glasgow) 17. Alternative Forms of Enterprise (Peter North, University of Liverpool) 18. Conclusion: Enterprise, Deprivation and Social Exclusion and the Role of Small Business in Supporting Sustainable Communities (Alan Southern, University of Liverpool)

Promoting Informal Venture Capital Routledge Studies in Entrepreneurship

T. Richard Harrison, Queen's University Belfast, UK and Colin Mason, University of Strathclyde, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 250pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87964-4; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The field of entrepreneurial finance and venture capital in general, and informal venture capital or business angel financing in particular, has become a major focus of academic research and policy debate internationally, with strong interest not only in Europe and North America but also in the Pacific Rim and Latin America. Over the past twenty years Richard Harrison and Colin Mason have established an international reputation as leading researchers in the field and have published widely in this area. This new volume collects for the first time in one accessible place the most significant of their work on business angel networks and the development of

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

87 the informal venture capital market, as well as offers new material from these two pioneers of the field. The ground-breaking research

by Colin Mason and Richard Harrison has put ‘business angels’ firmly on the policy agenda internationally and has influenced policy and practice around the globe. There has been increasing recognition in recent years that the informal venture capital market is central to the development of an entrepreneurial economy. The original papers remain remarkably relevant – not only as policy in many countries looks for ways to respond to initiatives to promote business angels, but also as business angels help to ameliorate the deepening finance gap for new and young businesses while banks are constrained in their lending to small businesses. Together with the addition of a new introduction, conclusion, and chapter on coninvestment, networks, and syndicates, this volume represents the greatest synthesis of current knowledge and practice in the promotion of informal venture capital currently available.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Local informal venture capital networks and institutional structure – the role of business angel networks Part I: Why Are Networks Important? 2. The informal venture capital market in the UK From D Storey and A Hughes (1994) Fina

Embedded Entrepreneurship Routledge Studies in Global Competition

Alexander Ebner, Goethe University, Frankfurt, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45976-1; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this book, Alexander Ebner reconstructs the theory of entrepreneurship from an institutionalist perspective. It provides a fresh account of current theorising on entrepreneurship, specifically addressing Schumpeterian thought as well as Neo-Austrian, NeoSchumpeterian and evolutionary approaches. A synthesis of these institutionalist arguments allows for outlining a new approach to the theory of entrepreneurship. It conceptualises the innovative generation and coordinative assimilation of technological novelty as an evolutionary process that is marked by paradigmatic qualities. The underlying emphasis on the relationship between institutional and technological change informs a reconsideration of the institutional embeddedness of entrepreneurship.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Entrepreneurship in Economic Thought: An Intellectual History 3. The Schumpeterian Perspective: Novelty, Leadership, and Historicity 4. Neo-Austrian Contributions: Knowledge, Alertness and Discovery 5. The Evolutionary Challenge: Routines, Cognition and Variety 6. Beyond Growth and Development: Microfoundations of Economic Change 7. Neo-Schumpeterian Variations: Collective Entrepreneurship and Systems of Innovation 8. Innovation, Coordination, and the Paradigmatic Character of Entrepreneurship: A New Approach 9. Embedded Entrepreneurship: Policy Implications 10. Conclusion

The Evolving Firm in the Evolving Context Routledge Studies in Global Competition

Päivi Oinas, Helsinki School of Economics, Finland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-33966-7; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume offers a broad social scientific view of 'the firm'. Regarded as an agent of change in society, the firm is as fully conditioned by the environment in which it operates. This requires that actors participating in the evolution of firms are involved in an ongoing coordination process. This important book is the latest in the Routledge Studies in Global Competition series and will prove to be an outstanding contribution to evolutionary political economy, economic geography and business economics as whole.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Firm in a Resource-Based Perspective 3. The Externally Connected Firm 4. Resources 5. Resource Relatedness and Learning 6. Resources and Activity-Specific Relations 7. Resource Relatedness and Proximity 8. Coevolution in Multiple Contexts 9. Types of Firm 10. Concluding Discussion

Innovation in Complex Social Systems Routledge Studies in Global Competition

Edited by Petra Ahrweiler, University College, Dublin, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55870-9; March 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

88 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Innovation is the creation of new, technologically feasible, commercially realisable products and processes and, if things go right, it emerges from the ongoing interaction of innovative organisations such as universities, research institutes, firms, government agencies and venture capitalists. Innovation in Complex Social Systems uses a "hard science" approach to examine innovation in a new way. Its contributors come from a wide variety of backgrounds, including social and natural sciences, computer science, and mathematics.

Using cutting-edge methodology, they deal with the complex aspects of socio-economic innovation processes. Its approach opens up a new paradigm for innovation research, making innovation understandable and tractable using tools such as computational network analysis and agent-based simulation. This book of new work combines empirical analysis with a discussion of the tools and methods used to successfully investigate innovation from a range of international experts, and will be of interest to postgraduate students and scholars in economics, social science, innovation research and complexity science.

CONTENTS Part I: The Systemic Aspects Of Innovation (Theory) 1.Innovation Is Emergent 2.Innovation Is Evolutionary Part II: The Actors and Networks of Innovation (Empirical Research) 3.Innovation Is Regional 4.Innovation Is Small 5.Innovation Is Big 6.Innovation is Policy-Driven 7.Innovation Is Academic Part III: The Systemic Aspects Of Innovation (Modeling) 8.Innovation Is Computable

Internationalization, Technological Change and the Theory of the Firm Routledge Studies in Global Competition

Edited by Nicola De Liso, University of Salento, Italy and Riccardo Leoncini, University of Bologna, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46071-2; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book focuses on three main areas, each of which is central to economic theorising: firms’ organisation and behaviour, technological change and the process of globalisation. Each subject can be analysed by using different methods, which range from purely theoretical abstractions to case studies and from econometrics to simulations. What this collection provides is a broad view of the three topics by concentrating on different aspects of each of them, and utilising different methods of investigation.

Internationalization, Technological Change and the Theory of the Firm looks in detail at various questions surrounding firms’ organisation, including why we can observe ordered paths of production, whether proximity between firms matters, and whether patenting is always worthwhile. In addition, several essays explore technology and innovation, including the persistence-cumdevelopment of old technologies. Furthermore, this book focuses on those processes which concern small- and medium-sized firms, considering the usefulness of stage theory, the possibilities of production off-shoring and the skill composition of manufacturing firms. Overall, the book is characterised by original ideas, renewed applications of mathematical and statistical methods and the use of new databases. This valuable collection will be of interest to postgraduates and researchers focusing on innovation, theories of the firm and globalisation; and should also be useful to a professional readership as it presents up-to-date research with the aim of improving our understanding of the phenomena of technological change, firms’ strategies, and globalisation.

CONTENTS Introduction Nicola De Liso and Riccardo Leoncini Part I: Technological change, firms' organisation and incentives 1. The production process as a complex, dynamic and ordered world Mauro Lombardi 2. Incumbents’ strategies for platform competition: Shaping the boundaries of creative destruction Stefano Brusoni and Roberto Fontana 3. Linking technological change to organizational dynamics: Some insights from a pseudo-NK model Tommaso Ciarli, Riccardo Leoncini, Sandro Montresor and Marco Valente 4. Technological persistence through R&D on an old technology: The sailing-ship effect Nicola De Liso and Giovanni Filatrella 5. Software patents and firm's strategic behaviour in the EU: Some empirical insights Francesco Rentocchini and Giuditta De Prato Part II: Fragmentation and internationalisation of firms and of local systems of production 6. Does spatial proximity matter? Micro-evidence from Italy Giulio Cainelli and Claudio Lupi 7. Internationalization in Italian medium sized firms: Does stage theory explain the observed patterns? Donato Iacobucci and Francesca Spigarelli 8. Production offshoring and the skill composition of Italian manufacturing firms: A counterfactual analysis Roberto Antonietti and Davide Antonioli 9. A global network and its local ties: Competition and restructuring of the Benetton Group Paolo Crestanello and Giuseppe Tattara

Knowledge-Intensive Entrepreneurship and Innovation Systems Routledge Studies in Global Competition

Edited by Franco Malerba, Bocconi University, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 352pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55791-7; March 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

89 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines entrepreneurship from three interrelated perspectives. Firstly, it links entrepreneurship to innovation and to the generation, transformation and use of knowledge . Secondly, it inserts entrepreneurship in innovation systems of various typesnational, sectoral and local. Thirdly, it views entrepreneurship not as a single event but as a process that evolves in time, from the preentry experience, to the entrepreneurial act, to the evolution of the entrepreneur and the new company. With chapters from a range of international contributors, the book answers questions such as; what are the main dimensions of knowledge intensive entrepreneurship? What are the factors affecting its emergence, evolution and performance? How important is knowledge intensive entrepreneurship for European growth and competitiveness? Is the situation of Central and Eastern Europe, engaged in a process of major economic and institutional transformation, similar or different from the one of Western Europe?

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction 1. Knowledge intensive entrepreneurship and innovation systems in Europe Franco Malerba Part 2: Perspectives on Knowledge Intensive Entrepreneurship and Innovation Systems 2. The knowledge-based entrepreneur: the need for a relevant theory of the firm Patrick Cohendet, Patrick Llerena 3. What makes entrepreneurship systemic? Slavo Radosevic 4. Academic patents, spin-offs and beyond: the many faces of scientific entrepreneurship Chiara Franzoni, Francesco Lissoni Part 3: Knowledge Intensive Entrepreneurship and Innovation Systems: The European Case 5. Patterns of Technological Entry in Different Fields: an Analysis of Patent Data Roberto Camerani, Franco Malerba 6. Survival of innovative entrants in knowledge based sectors Stefano Breschi, Franco Malerba, Maria Luisa Mancusi 7. Academic inventors as brokers: An exploratory analysis of the KEINS database Francesco Lissoni 8. New innovators and knowledge intensive entrepreneurship in some European sectoral systems: a field Camilla Lenzi, Kate Bishop, Stefano Breschi,Guido Buenstorf, Patrick Llerena, Franco Malerba, Maria Luisa Mancusi, Maureen McKelvey 9. Knowledge Intensive Entrepreneurship in Central and Eastern Europe: Results of a Firm Level Survey Slavo Radosevic, Maja Savic, Richard Woodward 10. Diversity of Knowledge-Intensive Entrepreneurial Firms: Struggling Biotech Firms Despite Opportunities Johan Brink and Maureen McKelvey 11. Knowledge-Based Entrepreneurship and International Technology Transfer in the German Laser Industry Guido Buenstorf 12. Are the dynamics of knowledge intensive industries any different? Ricardo Mamede, Daniel Mota, Manuel Mira Godinho 13. Entrepreneurship and Growth David B. Audretsch, Max Keilbach Part 4: Policy Conclusions 14. Knowledge intensive entrepreneurship in Europe: some policy conclusions Franco Malerba, Nicholas Vonortas

Territory, specialization and globalization in European Manufacturing Routledge Studies in Global Competition

Helena Marques, University of Manchester, UK and Francisco Puig, University of Valencia, Spain PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55206-6; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Although traditional manufacturing (textiles, clothing, footwear, furniture, etc) has been in decline in developed countries, it still represents an important part of European employment due to its labour-intensive character. Moreover, its geographical concentration particularly exposes certain regions of Europe to job loss as the industry declines. This book provides an explanation for the differences observed in the impact of globalization which is based on the influence of the territory and of the production specialization of the firms. The conclusions presented in the book are withdrawn from a detailed study of the Spanish textile-clothing sector. The book highlights the intensity of the relationship between the organizational model of the territory where the firms are located (high concentration of interrelated firms in a well-defined geographical area called "industrial district"), the specialization strategy implemented and the globalization of the economy. It also suggests the need to consider those factors as interdependent determinants of firm performance, particularly given the current trend for firms to simultaneously concentrate geographically and multilocalize domestically and internationally. The proposed methodology of analysis can be used to study other manufacturing sectors in other European countries.

CONTENTS Chapter 1. Networks and industrial districts, Chapter 2. Globalization, internationalization strategy and industrial districts, Chapter 3.

The textile-clothing sector, Chapter 4. A case of analysis: the Valencian textile industrial district, Chapter 5. Analysis and discussion of findings, Chapter 6. Conclusions and recommendations

Networked Activisms and Regionalism Routledge Studies in Governance and Change in the Global Era

Rosalba Icaza, Institute of Social Studies, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57515-7; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

90 Networked Activisms and the Making of Regionalisms draws renewed attention to the role that citizens across borders have played to advance more democratic and socially sustainable alternatives to contemporary market-led regionalisms. Icaza looks at cross-border joint campaigns and mobilizations undertaken by networks and coalitions of ngos, think tanks, and social movements’ organizations based in Mexico to influence the decision-making processes and the content of regionalist agendas. She argues that social movements; organizations are the makers of regionalisms and that their interventions are paradoxical expressions of both resistance and power in the age of globalization. Icaza draws on Mexican case studies of networked opposition to significant examples of North-South and South-South regionalisms, identifying these groups’ contributions to overcome social and democratic deficits connected to these regionalist projects as well as their setbacks and limitations.

CONTENTS Introduction: Understanding Networked Activisms on Regionalisms in the Global South, Chapter 1 Civic Action and Resistance Turns Regional, Chapter 2 To be and/or not to be: Power & Resistance of Networked Activisms, Chapter 3 Mexico in the Global and Regional Economies: "So far away from God and so close to the US", Chapter 4 Mexico in the Political Economy of Regionalization: Lessons to other Economies in the South, Chapter 5 Global and Regional Governance: Privatization, Decentralization and Regionalization, Chapter 6 Regionalism and Development: Who benefits, who doesn’t?, Chapter 7 Regionalism and Democracy: Who participates and how, who doesn’t?

Managing Healthy Organizations Routledge Studies in Human Resource Development

Mikael Holmqvist and Christian Maravelias, both of Stockholm University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 194pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87389-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION During the past two decades, corporate management has come to take an active role in health promotion programming for employees, offering health education, screenings, therapy, and even leisure initiatives. However, little attention has been given to how contemporary worksite health programs in fact blur the traditional distinction between work and private life. This has resulted in that little research on the other side of the work-health nexus: how employers factor health considerations into workforce management and productivity control. With the advancement of "work-site health promotion" in contemporary organizations, Holmqvist and Maravelias argue that this narrow focus, and the typical uncritical standpoint towards initiatives which are taken in the name of employees’ health, is inadequate. At a more fundamental level, the advancement of work-site health promotion may be a sign of a new or altered corporate health ethic: in contrast to the old corporate health ethic that was narrow and specific to the workplace, the new corporate health ethic appears to judge the ‘whole employee’ and especially what the whole employee may become; the risks one faces and the abilities one has to shoulder the responsibility for developing into a real corporate value. The authors suggest that health experts’ work is closely aligned with problems relating to the general management of organizations. Through a focused appraisal of this central albeit neglected occupational group in management studies, this book tries to explore and understand in some depth situations and experiences that are of general interest and concern in our society.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Management and Health 3. Health Promotion as Management 4. Scania - SPS and the ‘New Employee’ 5. Policies and Ambitions in Managing Health 6. Spreading the Ideas and Ideals of Health Promotion 7. Practices and Procedures in Managing Health 8. Conclusions 9. Social and Political Implications

Trade Union Strategies for Competence Development Routledge Studies in Human Resource Development

Edited by Jonathan Winterton, Toulouse Business School, France and Lars Magnusson, Uppsala University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $110.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55428-2; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The EU's stated objective to make Europe ‘the most competitive and knowledge-based economy in the world capable of sustainable growth and better jobs and greater social cohesion’ has led to an increased focus on the area of vocational education and training. This book addresses the role of trade unions in developing competence at work in eight European countries. The main objective is to explore differences in trade union strategies for competence development at wok and assess the extent to which country variation is affected by prevailing competence models, vocational training systems and social dialogue approaches. Acknowledged national experts writing about their countries combined with an engagement of social partner institutions fulfils the book's explicit objective of assessing the scope for transfer of good practice to build capacity and improve effectiveness in this area.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

91 1. Introduction (Lars Magnusson and Jonathan Winterton) 2. Defining competence (Françoise Le Deist and Jonathan Winterton) 3.

Social dialogue over training and development (Jonathan Winterton) 4. UK: The sound of one hand clapping? (Mark Stuart) 5. France: How much chocolate is in the mousse? (Françoise Le Deist) 6. Germany: Modell Deutschland on the verge of history? (Vera Trappmann) 7. Sweden: The winner takes it all (Tony Huzzard) 8. Malta: An emerging island of social dialogue over vocational training? (Edward Zammit) 9. Slovenia: Dual system in retreat? (Martina Trbanc) 10. Latvia: Lacking in competence? (Charles Woolfson) 11. Turkey: Ignoring labour market signals? (M. Kemal Öke and Jonathan Winterton) 12. Competence building in comparative context (Jonathan Winterton and Lars Magnusson) 13. Priorities for action (Emma Stringfellow)

Workplace Learning Routledge Studies in Human Resource Development

Edited by Marianne van Woerkom and Rob Poell, both of University of Tilburg, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 270pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48262-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85008-4; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited volume aims to evaluate the promises of workplace learning by addressing the following related questions: What are current developments in theory that informs workplace learning research? How can learning in the workplace be measured? What is the impact of various organizational settings (e.g., team-based work and call centres) on workplace learning? Which are the promising new avenues for research? And which research-based recommendations can be made to boost learning opportunities in various work contexts? The topic is conceptualized as an interaction between the individual and the work context, as a combination of individual and collective processes, as a link between cognition and action, and as a political process. With a wide array of contributions from academics such as Stephen Billet, Tara Fenwick and Victoria Marsick, this volume will be an important research and reference tool with all those academics and practitioners who are interested in the field of human resource development. Targeted at researchers, (post) graduate students, and reflective practitioners and managers interested in the area, "Workplace Learning" provides must-read material for anyone wanting to advance the theory, research, and/or practice of learning in the workplace.

CONTENTS Chapter 1. Introduction Marianne Van Woerkom, Rob Poell Section 1: Perspectives on Learning in the Workplace Chapter 2. The Relational Interdependence between Personal and Social Agency in Learning and for Working Life Stephen Billet Chapter 3. Beyond Individual Acquisition: Theorising Practice-Based Collective Learning in HRD Tara Fenwick Chapter 4. Principles For Research on Workplace Learning: At the Intersection of the Individual and the Context Peter Chin, Nancy L. Hutchinson, Joan Versnal, Hugh Munby Chapter 5. Bateson’s Levels of Learning: A Framework for Transformative Workplace Learning? Paul Tosey, Jane Mathison, Dawn Langley Section 2: Operationalising Learning in the Workplace Chapter 6. Antecedents of Nurses’ Actual Learning Activities: The Role of Psychological Work Conditions and Intrinsic Work Motivation Marjolein Berings, Rob Poell, Marc Van Veldhoven Chapter 7. The Development of an Instrument to Assess Information Acquisition Activities: Implications for Workplace and Organisational Learning Yu-Lin Wang, Andrea D. Ellinger Chapter 8. In Search of a Good Method for Assessing Learning from Errors at Work Johannes Bauer, Regina H. Mulder Section 3: Learning in Various Workplace Settings Chapter 9. Learning from Differences: The Relationships between Expertise Diversity, Team Learning and Team Performance Marloes Van Engen, Marianne Van Woerkom Chapter 10. The Relationship between Central Actors and Level of Reflection in Project-Based Learning: Dutch and U.S. Data and Theory Compared Rob Poell, Victoria J. Marsick, Lyle Yorks Chapter 11. A Call for Learning: The Challenge of Realizing Learning in Call Centers Eira Andersson, Anna Berg Jansson Chapter 12. Work-Based Learning Programmes in English Universities: Government Policy and Organizational Practice Paul Smith, David Preece Chapter 13. The Relationship between the Professional Identity, Professional Development and Coaching Style of Teacher Educators Marianne Van Woerkom Chapter 14.

Implications for Research and Practice Marianne Van Woerkom, Rob Poell

Creativity and Innovation in Business and Beyond Routledge Studies in Innovation, Organizations and Technology

Edited by Leon Mann, University of Melbourne, Australia and Janet Chan, University of New South Wales, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 225pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88010-7; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In many modern economies, creativity, the essential prerequisite for innovation, tends to be assumed or neglected while the catchphrase "innovation" dominates the field of business as the key to national performance and competitiveness. Creativity and Innovation in Business and Beyond illustrates the ways in which creativity spurs innovation – not only in the realms of business and management, where the innovation is regularly acknowledged and discussed, but throughout the social sciences. With contributions from experts in fields as far-flung as policy, history, economics, law, psychology, and education, in addition to business and management, this volume explores the manifold avenues for creativity and innovation within and across a multitude of disciplines.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

92 CONTENTS 1. Introduction Janet Chan and Leon Mann 2. Innovation and Creativity in Industry and the Services Sectors Jane Marceau 3.

Historical Approaches to Creativity and Innovation Simon Ville 4. Economics Approaches to Understanding and Promoting Inno

Global Research and Development in Emerging Economies Routledge Studies in Innovation, Organizations and Technology

Prasada Reddy, Lund University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87966-8; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In recent decades, there have been significant changes in the way corporate innovation is performed. They include changes in the innovation process, flexibility to outsource innovation activities, and most importantly, the location of innovation. There are mainly two new trends: First, location of globally strategic R&D by the multinational corporations (MNCs) in some developing countries; second, more recently, some companies from the emerging economies have also started performing R&D to develop products and services for global markets. These trends are occurring in a dynamic business environment that consists of mutually reinforcing economic and technological changes. These trends have managerial implications for companies and policy implications for the emerging economies where such R&D is performed, as well as for the industrialized home countries of the companies.

Further, innovative products and services resulting from R&D activities in emerging economies seem to better address the needs of consumers at the bottom-of-the-pyramid in other developing countries. Global Research and Development in Emerging Economies examines the dynamics of the globalization processes and the emergence of new locations for innovation and its implications.

Exploring twenty in-depth case studies of MNCs, local companies, and research institutes/universities based in Brazil, China, India, and South Africa (the so-called BRICS Group), Prasada Reddy develops a conceptual framework of the evolution of globalization of corporate R&D. This unique books addresses many issues including the context for location of global R&D in emerging economies by MNCs and the driving forces behind this trend, performance of global R&D by companies from emerging economies, and national and corporate implications of these new trends for innovation systems.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Global Business Environment 3. Globalization of Corporate R&D – A Conceptual Framework 4. Innovation Environment in Emerging Economies 5. Global R&D in India 6. Global R&D in China 7. Global R&D in Brazil and S

Organization in Open Source Communities Routledge Studies in Innovation, Organizations and Technology

Evangelia Berdou, University of Sussex, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 167pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48042-0; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85197-5; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book contributes new insights into the organization of free/open source (F/OS) software communities by examining the links between learning, division of labour and commercialization, demonstrating the need for a synthesis of work on both community organization and cooperation to understand F/OS community dynamics. These aspects are examined in the light of detailed case studies of the GNOME and KDE projects. This book offers an innovative theoretical framework, a critical assessment of various methodologies for examining the organisation of F/OS communities, and a typology of commercial involvement in F/OS. The analysis reveals the diversity and evolution of F/OS communities and their connections with other socio-economic networks and institutional practices. The insights afforded by the book have implications for future research and the design and implementation of open source efforts.

CONTENTS 1.Introduction 2. Technologies of Communities and Peer Production: Disentagling Power Relations in Fl/Oss Development 3. Fl/Oss as an Object of Research: Methodological and Disciplinary Issues 4. Commercial Involvement and Fl/Oss 5.The Community, the Firm and the Two Economies 6. Learning and the Division of Labour in Fl/Oss 7. The Story So Far: Technologies of Communities and Peer Production 8. Conclusions

Theory and Practice of Triple Helix Model in Developing Countries Routledge Studies in Innovation, Organizations and Technology

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

93 Edited by Mohammed Saad, University of the West of England, UK and Girma Zawdie, Strathclyde University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00; 229x152 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47516-7; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume contributes to the expanding literature on "triple helix" innovation - focusing on developing countries. Based on practical cases and experiences from Africa, Latin America and Asia, best practices from developed countries are examined. The authors address specific issues which are critical to the economic and social development of specific regions in developing countries such as: The role of universities in developing, sharing and disseminating all forms of knowledge Triple helix as a discontinuous innovation and a new paradigm to provide a sustainable basis for innovation and technological progress. The implications of the ‘triple helix paradigm’ for the organization and management of the university system, and also for the modalities of technology transfer practices in developing countries The theoretical basis for the triple helix system of innovation and sustainable development CONTENTS Introduction Part I: Triple helix model and theory 1. Defining the theoretical basis of the triple helix model of innovation 2. Towards a Triple Helix Theory of Development 3. Understanding the Triple Helix Model from the Perspective of a Developing Country: A Demand or a Challenge for Indonesian Case Study Part II: Triple Helix and Development 4. Role of universities in innovation and economic development: what should developing countries do? 5. Triple Helix Lessons for Development in Jamaica 6. Evidence of the triple helix paradigm in Korea – A test for channel interaction Part III: Operationalising the triple helix model and bridging the gaps 7.

Operationalizing the Triple Helix Model for Creating Sustainable Technology Development: Examples of Linking Arrangements in Two Tanzanian Universities 8. Compared perspective of methodological tendencies for the analysis of local innovative networks in India 9. Transferring knowledge across national boundaries through vertical de-aggregation in India 10. Science Parks and UniversityIndustry Collaboration in Malaysia 11. Client-Driven Biotechnology Research for Poor Farmers - A Case Study from India 12.

Enhancing competitiveness of SMEs through industrial cluster – Indian experience 13. Building Triple Helix Relations in Pakistan 14.

Balancing old and new organisational forms - Changing dynamics of government, industry and university interaction in South Africa 15. The Foreign Factor within the Triple Helix Model Part IV: knowledge production, sharing and use through Triple Helix 16.

Research management: an emerging profession in the developing world 17. Innovation and Entrepreneurship in Brazilian Universities 18. Developing regional clusters in India: role of national laboratories 19. Experiences of the Tea Research Institute of Tanzania 20.

National Science and Technology Development Agency, Thailand: Development of ‘Triple Helix’ System in a Weak AcademicIndustry-Link Environment: The Case Study of the Industrial Technology Assistance Program in Thailand 21. Learning through south-south cooperation - A Tunisian case of study 22. The effectiveness of Triple Helix Model in developing innovation in Malaysia, both at the regional and national level 23. Innovation and Entrepreneurism in Indian Universities: A Case Study of the Technology Business Incubator at the Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur Part V: Redevelopment and implications for developing countries 24. Universities Role and Knowledge Exchange in the Developed World 25. Building an Institute for Triple-Helix Research Innovation in Burns School of Medicine, University of Hawai' 26. Redevelopment and implications for developing countries: The cooperative movement: a way to promote regional development and innovation through the assumption of complexity and social capital perspective - Thinking about transfer from the Mondragón experience 27. The ‘School – Enterprise’ An initiative from the Chamber of Commerce and Industry of Franche-Comté to support the future leadership of local SMEs

Corporate Strategy and Trade Policy Routledge Studies in International Business and the World Economy

Alan Rugman, Indiana University, USA and Alain Verbeke, University of Calgary, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80012-9; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Twenty years after the first edition of Global Corporate Strategy and Trade Policy first published, Alan Rugman and Alain Verbeke’s seminal book remains as relevant to an examination of the relationships between firms and governments as ever. As developed nations now face a sharp rise in imports from rapidly developing countries such as China and India, this groundbreaking theoretical analysis of strategic management and trade policy, with the authors’ original framework now substantively updated and extended, may indeed take on a new kind of consequence for students and practitioners of international business than it did even twenty years ago. Where once the core of the debate focused on the EU, the US, and Japan, now the so-called "core triad" has extended to the broad regions of Europe, North America, and Asia. The volume has long offered a sophisticated analysis of the interactions between industrial / science policy and corporate strategy. New to the second edition are extensive discussions of innovation policy, clustering and its role in enhancing competitiveness, spill-over effects, international technology transfer, trade and investment agreements such as NAFTA, the deeper integration of the EU, investor state dispute, and an examination of parent/subsidy relationships within the internal network of the multinational enterprise. Additionally, the authors have written entirely new chapters analyzing the impact of environmental regulations on corporate strategy, large firms’ reliance on sales within their home region, and the role of NGOs in the formulation of both government policy and corporate strategy. Global Corporate Strategy and Trade Policy, 2 nd Edition reintroduces the basic theoretical models of Rugman and Verbeke and demonstrates that these models remain required tools for contemporary scholarly analysis. This new edition also provides the first serious investigation of strategies for multinational enterprises in a world of

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

94 globalization and regional economic activity, and incorporates new real world case studies into the historical context of the volume’s original contribution.

CONTENTS List of figures List of tables Acknowledgements Preface: Corporate Strategy and Government Regulations 1. Introduction 2.

Corporate Strategic Management 3. Trade Policy and Corporate Strategy 4. Corporate Strategy for Trade Barriers 5. Global Co

International Growth of Small and Medium Enterprises Routledge Studies in International Business and the World Economy

Edited by Niina Nummela, Turku School of Economics, Finland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87270-6; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The majority of small and medium enterprises operate in a networked business environment that extends beyond national and cultural boundaries. Within these networks, growth takes various routes and forms. Instead of linear, positive growth, international growth is often more cyclical, including periods of stagnation and withdrawal, even exits. Network management has also become a central mechanism in steering the growth and long-term success of SMEs, but our knowledge of the processes that control this mechanism is yet limited. International Growth of Small and Medium Enterprises focuses on how companies expand their operations across national borders through opportunity exploration and exploitation, and identification and development of innovations. Networks are here seen as a precondition for international growth. New forms of collaborations in an increasingly competitive market are warranted, and this book explores the concept of so-called "coopetition" within opportunity and innovation processes in particular. While not all smallbusiness owners/managers are interested in international growth, the number of companies with growth-oriented management teams is increasing, and innovative network-based business models to expand their operations will be required. This collection of new and international perspectives sheds much-needed light on how founders and management teams of SMEs can succeed in fostering the growth process, and what specific characteristics are instrumental in initiating and maintaining international growth.

CONTENTS Part I. International growth of SMEs – past, present, future (Niina Nummela, Sami Saarenketo) Part II. Drivers of international growth of SMEs 1. Entrepreneurs’ human and relational capital and early internationalisation: The case of Latin Ameri

Information Worlds Routledge Studies in Library and Information Science

Paul T. Jaeger, University of Maryland, USA and Gary Burnett, Florida State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 200pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99778-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85163-0; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The authors present a multi-level theory of "Information Worlds" to investigate the ways in which information creates the social worlds of people. Building upon the foundational works of Library and Information Studies (LIS) scholar and theorist Elfreda Chatman and philosopher Jurgen Habermas, as well as from theory and research from a wide range of other fields, the theory of information worlds can serve as a theoretical driver both in LIS studies and across other disciplines that study information issues, enriching and expanding our understanding of the multi-layered role of information in society. Testing their theory through application to a variety of real-world issues, Burnett and Jaeger tackle the topics of libraries and information provision, the value assigned to information by differing social groups, information access and exchange, international information policies, the role of information in democracy, and technological change. Information Worlds provides a framework for empirical investigations into the fascinating and very real social dimensions of information.

CONTENTS Introduction Acknowledgments 1. Theory, Information, and Society 2. Information Worlds 3. Information Value 4. The Evolution of Information Access and Exchange 5. Public Libraries in the Public Sphere 6. Information Worlds and Technological Change 7. News, Media, and Information Worlds 8. Information Worlds and the Political World 9. Applications of the Theory of Information Worlds 10. The Future of Information Theory Bibliograpy Index

Gossip and Organizations Routledge Studies in Management, Organizations and Society

Kathryn Waddington, City University, London, UK and Grant Michelson, University of Sydney, Australia

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

95 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $130.00; 229x152 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-41785-3; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Gossip is a complex and ubiquitous phenomenon, widely found and variously practiced by different individuals and groups. Gossip and Organizations provides the reader with an analysis of gossip and informal knowledge across different national, organizational and cultural contexts, drawing upon empirical findings and the authors' experiences of researching gossip in nursing and healthcare organizations, higher educational institutions, non-government organizations and private sector organizations in Australia and the UK. Co-authors Kathryn Waddington and Grant Michelson aim to dispel once and for all the myth that women gossip and men have conversations, shattering the illusion that gossip at work is trivial talk. This book challenges the assumption that gossip is a problem that should be discouraged arguing instead that paying closer attention to gossip enables exploration of other ways of seeing, interpreting and understanding organizations and people's experience in organizations The complexity of gossip is such that a range of psycho-social-cultural explanations are necessary in order to account for human interactions at all levels in organizations. Waddington and Michelson provide a new framework that synthesizes these elements to further illuminate gossip and/in organizations and guide future research, theoretical development and critical reflection in the field.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Organizing Gossip 3. Gossip, Taboo and Ethics 4. Gossip and Identity 5. Gossip and Emotion 6. The Management of Gossip? 7. The Politics of Gossip 8. Conclusion and Reflections

Imagining Business Routledge Studies in Management, Organizations and Society

Edited by Paolo Quattrone, Oxford University, UK, Nigel Thrift, University of Warwick, UK, Chris McLean, University of Manchester, UK and Francois-Regis Puyou, Nantes Management School, France PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88064-0; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The modern business relies extensively upon myriad images and pictorial representations such as budgets, schedules, reports, graphs, and organizational charts. Visual images play such an integral role in the process of organizing that many modern managers have come to take them for granted. This book provides a new disciplinary space in which to experiment and capture the significant role that images and other forms of engagements play in the performance of the organizational activities that make business possible.

Images are often seen as simple representations of what happens in organisations: thus financial reports are believed to enable readers to see the ‘true and fair view’ of a firm’s financial transactions. Contributions to this volume challenge this orthodox view to explore how images in business, organizing and organizations are "performative" rather than simply representational, viewed in a static and rigid form. Imagining Business addresses the question of how we visualise organizations and their activities as an important aspect of managerial work, focusing on practices and performances, organizing and ordering, and media and technologies. Moreover, it aims to provide a focal point for the growing collection of studies that explore how various business artefacts draw on the power of the visual to enable various forms of organizing and organizations in diverse contexts.

CONTENTS Introduction: Imagining Business: why now? (McLean, Puyou, Quattrone & Thrift) 1. Interdisciplinary studies on the visual: the cognitive power of images (Barbara Stafford) Section I: Performing markets 2. Making Things the Same: Gases, Emiss

International Management and International Relations Routledge Studies in Management, Organizations and Society

Edited by Ana Guedes and Alex Faria, both of Brazilian School of Public and Business Administration PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 258pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80169-0; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85432-7; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Over the last few decades, the field of management enlarged its boundaries, especially in international terms, in a very rapid fashion— mainly because of the arrival of the so-called era of globalization. Many renowned scholars have criticized the universal approach given to ‘management’ in the United States and its subsequent automatic conversion into ‘international management,’ but their arguments too can fall into the trap of universalism at times. This book has a more specific concern: to challenge the conversion of ‘management’ into ‘international management’ from a Latin American perspective. This challenge might be taken as a first step toward the construction of a Latin American perspective in International Management and a potential contribution to the development of this field in other parts of the world. Drawing upon such critical standpoint, several authors in the book converge upon the idea that

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

96 researchers, practitioners and authorities in Latin America should challenge the US dominance in International Management and foster interdisciplinary developments within International Relations. The critical perspective provided in this book challenges the US’s narrow viewpoint on management as it clearly does not fit the governance features of ‘international management’ in Latin America.

So far, we have not observed the constitution of sub-areas such as international management of international organizations, international management of transnational institutions, international management of public-private networks, international management of public companies, and international public administration or international public management, all of which would be extremely important in Latin America.

CONTENTS Preface Introduction: What is International Management? Part 1: Geography and History into International Management and International Relations Chapter 1: Neoliberal Globe/centrism and International Management Blindness: The Indispensable Decolonial Turn Chapter 2: Regional Governance in Latin America: Institutions and Normative Discourses in the Post-Cold War Period Chapter 3: International Political Economy, Management and Governance in Latin America Part 2: Cross-Cultural Issues: Into, Across and From Latin America Chapter 4: Managing Latin America: Historical Semantics and the Logic of Othering Chapter 5: From Latin America to the World: Notes on the (possible) Latin American Management Styles Part 3: International Management and Governance in Latin America Chapter 6: Managerialism as Knowing and Making in Latin America: International Development Management and World Bank Intervention Chapter 7: "Dirty Management": The Legacy of Chile & Argentina Chapter 8: Green Deserts in the South of Latin America: The Role of International Agencies and National States Part 4: Conclusions Chapter 9: Bringing the ‘International’ Into International Management: New Challenges Contributors Index

Storytelling and Antenarrative in Organizations Routledge Studies in Management, Organizations and Society

Edited by David M. Boje, New Mexico State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87391-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The concept of narrative is explored in many different fields from organization studies to studies on identity, psychology, and learning. Organization and management studies have overwhelmingly focused to date on rational narrative structures with beginnings, middles, and ends, where narrative has proved to be a handy concept in qualitative studies – such as in the analysis of interviews or in understanding an organization’s history and identity. Far less attention is given however to the more spontaneous and ‘non-staged’ storytelling that occurs in organizations. The collective and joint storytelling of everyday conversations and interactions in business is less well understood, but is arguably vital to an organization’s dynamics and ability to cope with change. Pioneering thinker in organizational communication David Boje here compiles a collection of new essays on the theme of ‘antenarrative,’ or non-linear narrative, as applied to organizations and business, bringing together different approaches and philosophical interpretations of the concept. The essays combine a strong theoretical background with empirical cases as diverse as Wal-mart, information systems, and Nordic banking. Storytelling and Antenarrative in Organizations is the first volume to offer such a varied but systematic examination of non-traditional narrative inquiry in the management realm, organizing and developing its approach, and providing new insights for management students and scholars.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction to Antenarrative and Storytelling Organizations (David Boje) PART I – INDIVIDUAL AND GROUP ANTENARRATIVES 2. Antenarrative and Complexity Modeling (David Tobey) 3. Antenarratives of Negotiated Diversity (Jawad Syed) 4. Antenarrat

Style Differences in Cognition, Learning, and Management Routledge Studies in Management, Organizations and Society

Edited by Stephen Rayner, University of Gloucestershire, UK and Eva Cools, Gent Management School, Belgium PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80199-7; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The field of style difference is critical to our understanding of the ways cognitive styles and learning styles operate in human performance. The fifteen international scholars presented here examine, for the first time, the issue of style difference from both theoretical and empirical perspectives – bridging the gaps between practitioners and researchers of cognitive and learning styles – creating a global paradigm for the field of studying differences in human performance. The book is divided into three distinct sections: one establishing the history and context of cognitive style and offering a consensual theory for the style difference field; a second utilizing cutting edge research to address diverse applications of style in the contexts of learning, knowledge management, training, and pedagogy; and a third extending applications of style to the workplace context. Style Differences in Performance is a timely and

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

97 field-defining volume that will change the way academics and practitioners across international and disciplinary boundaries think and talk about the field of learning style and its implications for human achievement.

Visual Culture in Organizations Routledge Studies in Management, Organizations and Society

Alexander Styhre, Chalmers University of Technology, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 264pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87190-7; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84868-5; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Vision and visuality are two concepts widely discussed and debated in philosophy and social science literature. Some authors even suggest that the entire Western intellectual tradition is strongly shaped by the paradigm of vision; the inspection and analysis of specimens collected from social reality are regarded as the only legitimate source of truth. However, in organizations, a variety of visual practices are employed in for instance science-based innovation in for instance the pharmaceutical industry and in architect work. Such visual practices include the use of various technoscientific machinery and tools to more mundane uses of full-scale models and photos in architect work. In comparison to the various linguistic perspectives on organizations, vision and visuality remain surprisingly little theorized and examined in the organization literature. Visual Culture in Organizations offers an introduction to the literature on vision and visuality that is relevant to organizational theory (comparing and contrasting it to the well-documented area of linguistic theory in organizations), proposes a theoretical framework for visual culture in organizations, and provides empirical illustrations to the theoretical framework. The book shows that visual practices are a central procedure in the day-to-day routines of organizations and are long overdue for close examination.

CONTENTS Part I. Epistemologies of Vision Chapter 1. Introduction: From the Lexical to the Visual Chapter 2. The Visual Turn in Social Science and Organization Theory Part II. Practices of Seeing Chapter 3. Vision and Visualization in Science-Based Innovation Work Chapter 4. Vision and Visualization in Architecture Work Part III . Concluding Remarks Chapter 5. The Primacy of Vision and Its Implication for Organization Theory Bibliography Index

Health Technology Development and Use Routledge Studies in Technology, Work and Organizations

Sampsa Hyysalo, University of Helsinki, Finland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 379pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80646-6; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84915-6; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Most industrialized countries have faced the rising cost of health care services since the 1980s and expect health care costs to only continue to rise in coming decades. As recently as the last US presidential election, technology has been touted as the ‘medicine’ that can ‘cure healthcare,’ saving billions of dollars in taxpayer dollars. But the continuous adoption of new technology is also argued to be the major cost-driver for health care. Health Technology Development and Use: From Practice-Bound Imagination to Evolving Impacts maps out the complex, emergent relationship between users and designers, offering three outstanding case-studies of the development and use of new health technology. These studies follow the evolution of new health technology in detail through several rounds of design and deployment across various organisations, showing that in order to be truly useful, design concepts must continually be revised and reworked in the light of the practical experiences of implementation and use – a lesson with implications for healthcare technology and beyond. The "biographies of technologies and practices" approach to new technology advanced in this volume offers us urgent new insight to core empirical and theoretical questions about how where development projects gain their representations of future use and users, how usage is actually designed, how users’ requests and modifications affect designs and what kind of learning takes place between developers and users in different phases of innovation—all crucial to our understanding and ability to advance new health technology, and innovation more generally.

CONTENTS Part I: Design–Use Relations and Biographies of Technology Chapter 1. From Markets to Social Learning: Mapping the Dynamics of Design, Use, and Early Evolution of New Technology Chapter 2. Biography of Technologies and Practices: Studying Technology across Time and Space Part II: Grounding and Theorizing Chapter 3. The Birth of the User: Community and Imagination Chapter 4.

The Anticipation of Need: Investigations and Intermediaries Chapter 5. Visions in Matter: Invention and Erosion Chapter 6. Nurturing Technology: Enactment and Impact Chapter 7. The Post-launch Change: Learning and Reconfiguring Part III: Comparisons and Implications Chapter 8. Diabetes Databases: Co-design, Its Evolution, and Power Relations Chapter 9. TeleChemistry: Radical Innovation, Deviance, and Path Formation Chapter 10. Conclusions: Findings and Theorizing Chapter 11. Implications: Policy, Evaluation, and Development Practice

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

98

Economic Governance in the EU Routledge Studies in the European Economy

Willem Molle, Erasmus School of Economics, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56544-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In the course of its development the EU has had to deal with an expanding policy agenda, covering ever more subjects and an increased diversity of instruments. It has also had to deal with an increased number of member states and an extended range of partners (regional authorities, non governmental organisations). These developments have greatly increased the risk of inconsistencies between the various policies pursued and between the various levels of competence for the same policy. Inconsistent policies are less effective than they ought to be. So, they imply a welfare loss. The EU has tried to cope with the challenge of consistency by adapting its governance. Traditionally it uses mainly the regulatory method. The effectiveness of this method has recently come into question.

So alternative methods are now favoured. One is the financial method; which implies more expenditure via the EU budget. The other is coordination. The application of both methods has certain advantages and disadvantages. The problem for policy makers is then to determine the choice between the modes first and the optimal level of budgetary and coordination efforts next. Notwithstanding its obvious policy relevance the problem has got little attention from academia. This book sets out to contribute to a solution by following two approaches. The first is a systematisation of the theoretical and conceptual underpinnings of the financial and coordination methods. The second is an empirical investigation into a range of European policy processes, implying to different degrees budgetary outlays and coordination.

CONTENTS Part 1: Intro 1. Introduction Part 2: General aspects 2. Definitions 3. Horizontal Coordination 4. Vertical Coordination 5. Network Coordination 6. Overall Architecture 7. Budget: General 8. Budget Implementation Aspects 9. Comparison of Various Governance Methods Part 3: Case Studies 10. Competitiveness (IM, Innovation; Allocation) 11. Stabilisation (EMU and SGP) 12. Cohesion (Redistribution) 13. Environment (Sustainability) 14. Employment and Social Protection 15. External (Aid, etc) Part 4: Conclusions, Outlook 16. Evaluation; Conclusions

The Economics of Urban Property Markets Routledge Studies in the European Economy

Paschalis Arvanitidis, University of Thessaly, Greece PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42682-4; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Mainstream urban and real estate economics tend to ignore the supply side of the economy and to undervalue the significant role that the property market plays in the economic development of cities. The Economics of Urban Property Markets is a cohesive analysis and synthesis of a wide range of factors that determine the regional development of cities. The book draws on institutional economics to explore the mechanisms, processes and dynamics through which the built environment is provided, and considers how these affect urban economic potential. The author advances the argument that the property market as an institution is a mediator through which economic potential can be realised and served. This book is an invaluable resource for all students on urban and regional economics and built environment courses.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part 1: Property Market and Urban Dynamics: A Conceptual Framework 2. Philosophies of Social Sciences and Analytical Frameworks in Economic Thought 3. Urban Economic Transformation and Property Market Analysis 4. Methodological Developments I: Philosophical Position and Conceptual Framework 5. Methodological Developments II: The Research Approach Part 2: The Madrid Property Market: An Illustrative Case Study Analysis 6. A Property Market Approach to Urban Economic Growth 7.

The Wider Institutional Environment of Madrid 8. The Property Market as Institution Part 3: Synthesis 9. Overview and Conclusions

Global Population Ageing and Migration in Europe Routledge Studies in the European Economy

Bo Malmberg, Stockholm University, Sweden, Kristof Tamas, David Bloom, Harvard University, USA, Rainer Munz and David Canning, Harvard University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55123-6; December 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

99 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION During the last decades, it has become increasingly clear that demographic change constitutes one of the most important challenges of the 21st century. One important factor that has placed demographic change high on the political agenda is an increasing awareness of current demographic trends. It is well known today that we can expect a dramatic increase in the number of elderly people in Europe, due to declining mortality combined with continuing low fertility. The working age population in Europe will decrease. This process of ageing in Europe is the closing phase of the demographic transition, a shift from high to low birth and death rates that started in the 19 th century. The main question this book focuses on is to what extent European external policies should be reconsidered in the light of current demographic challenges. Experts from Europe and the US concentate their study on current demographic trends, an analysis of demographic transitions and their economic, social and geo-political implications and European migration policies.

CONTENTS 1 Introduction, 2 Underlying demographic trends and patterns, 3 Research background, 4 Forecasting global income growth, 5 Forecasting net migration, 6 The political demography of global population aging, 7 Policy challenges in a growing global economy, 8 Migration trends, current population, demographic outlook: Will there be sufficient labour in Europe?, 9 The causes and effects of international migration, 10 The development of a common European asylum and migration policy, 11 Current European Union migration and development policies, 12 Migration and other external policy areas, 13 Population complementarities and balanced migration inflows and outflows, 14 Assessing the Qualitative Aspects: Qualification and Skills, 15 A Way Forward: skill formation, manpower planning and migration policy development, 16 Conclusions and policy recommendations

International Trade, Consumer Interests and Reform of the Common Agricultural Policy Routledge Studies in the European Economy

Edited by Susan Mary Senior Nello and Pierpaolo Pierani, both of University of Siena, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57019-0; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The European Union has launched an important debate on the future of the EU budget from 2013. This discussion is to cover all aspects of EU revenue and expenditure, including that on the Common Agricultural Policy (CAP). The CAP has been radically transformed in recent years, but the issue of its reform, including its goals, its effectiveness in reaching them and the question of division of responsibility and financing between the EU and member states, is once again at the centre of attention. This collection features well-known experts in the field and aims to contribute to the debate on the present state and future prospects of the CAP and other EU policies. The topics covered range from the EU budget to food safety, rural development, sustainable food consumption, and the influence of international trade negotiations. Many of the ideas presented here are original and controversial and intended to fuel the debate on this important topic. For instance, there are various proposals for the EU budget, the division of responsibilities between the EU and its member states, and the shape of the CAP post-2013.

CONTENTS Foreword Giuseppe Barbero 1. Introduction Susan Senior Nello and Pierpaolo Pierani 2. A CAP for the Whole Community John S. Marsh 3. Consumers and the Political Economy of European Agricultural and Food Policies Johan F. M. Swinnen, Martha Negash and Thijs Vandemoortele 4. Sustainable Food Consumption and Government Responsibility Stefan Tangermann 5. Pillar II: A Real Improvement of the CAP? Ulrich Koester and Susan Senior Nello 6. Mountain Regions as Natural Laboratories for the Evaluation of Agricultural Policies Geremia Gios and Roberta Raffaelli 7. The UK Rebate, the budget and the post-2013 CAP Faced with Fiscal Federalism Louis-Pascal Mahé, Hugo Naudet and Marie-Alix Roussillon-Montfort 8. Multilateral Trade Negotiations and the CAP Giovanni Anania 9. Conclusions: Pointers to a Future CAP Kenneth J. Thomson

The Political Economy of the European Social Model Routledge Studies in the European Economy

Philip B. Whyman, University of Central Lancashire, UK, Mark Baimbridge, University of Bradford, UK and Andrew Mullen, Northumbria University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47629-4; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book seeks to analyse the development of the European Union (EU), which was founded upon the principle of the free movement of capital, goods, services and people in 1957. Its central thesis is that, from a practical and theoretical point of view, such a basis is fundamentally at odds with the creation of an interventionist regime that the construction of a social Europe would require. The authors argue convincingly that - economically: the EU does not currently possess the budget or the economic tools to pursue such a strategy; politically: close to none of the institutions of the EU have backed such a policy; practically: conservative and neo-liberal

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

100 forces (among member states and the institutions of the EU) have repeatedly thwarted any moves in this direction. In reality, the Single Internal Market, Economic and Monetary Union, enlargement, the Lisbon Agenda and European Constitution projects all prioritise supply-side measures and expanding the scope of the market rather than the boosting of demand and other economic intervention. Consequently, constructing a social Europe in the face of this would appear problematic. Hence, in both theory and practice, the idea that there can be a social Europe vis-à-vis neoliberalisation is a contradiction in terms. This controversial book will be an educating and refreshing read for advanced students and academics involved with European politics, the European Union, European Economics and Economic instititutions.

CONTENTS 1. The European Social Model Part 1: Foundations of a Neo-liberal EU 2. International Political Economy of a Social Europe 3. The EU as a Neo-liberal Project 4. National Attempts to Construct a Social Model 5. EU Attempts to Construct a Social Model Part 2: The Neoliberalisation of EU Policy 6. Operation of Economic Policy 7. Fiscal Federalism: a Missed Opportunity 8. Social Partnership and Labour Market Flexibility 9. Social Policy Part 3: What Future for a Social Europe? 10. Neoliberalisation and Enlargement: Incompatible Goals? 11. The Lisbon Agenda 12. Rival Visions of Europe 13. National Economic Alternatives

Adam Smith and the Economy of the Passions Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Jan Horst Keppler, University of Paris-Dauphine, France PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 216x138 mm; 160pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56986-6; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The fertility of Adam Smith’s work stems from a paradoxical structure where the pursuit of economic self-interest and wealth accumulation serve wider social objectives. The incentive for this wealth accumulation comes from a desire for social recognition or "sympathy" – the need to recognise ourselves in our peers – which is the primary incentive for moderating and transforming our violent and egotistical passions. Adam Smith thus examines in detail the subliminal emotional structure underlying market behaviour.

This new book by Professor Jan Horst Keppler presents an Adam Smith for the 21 st century, more sceptical, searching and daring than he has ever been portrayed before. Without disputing its benefits, Professor Keppler’s original contribution explores the anarchic passions constantly threatening to destroy all social bounds, and how the overarching "desire for love" and social recognition provides the Smithian individual with the incentive to transform his unsocial passions into a desire for social advancement and economic wealth with the view to gaining the vital approbation of his peers. One of the most striking results of this new reading of Adam Smith is the latter’s insistence on the primacy of exchange value over use value. In other words, the quest for wealth is exclusively driven by the value it represents in the eyes of others rather than by any value in individual use. At a moment of crisis, where the link between "true" economic values and "virtual" financial values is more fragile than ever, Adam Smith’s work is a profoundly contemporary reminder that in the absence of personal, ethical groundings our economic actions are only grounded in the game of mirrors we play with our peers. This book will be of interest to postgraduate students and researchers in the History of Economics, or indeed any reader with an interest in the psychological foundations of a market economy and its theoretical representations as developed by Adam Smith.

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction: Personal Ethics and Social Morality 1. Reading Adam Smith 2. An Economy of the Passions in a Double System of Coordinates 3. The Horizontal Principle: Sympathy, Exchange and the Market 4. The Vertical Principle: the Impartial Spectator 5.

The Paradoxical Synthesis 6. The Stakes of a Well-established Problem – Das Adam Smith Problem Part 2: Sympathy, Communication, Exchange – The Horizontal World 7. Self-Interest in the Service of Sociability: The World of Sympathy 8. The Exchange of Looks 9. Sympathy and the Harmonisation of Perceptions 10. The Limits of Sympathy 11. The Social Function of Wealth 12. Codification and the Reduction of Transaction Costs: From Sympathy to the Market 13. The Formation of Preferences through Auto-Referential Feedback Loops 14. From Image to Action: The Codification of the Smithian World 15. The Iconic World of The Wealth of Nations 16. The Division of Labour, Constant Returns and Equilibrium: Economics as Science Part 3: The Vertical World of the Impartial Spectator 17. The Names of Adam’s Father: Looking for the Impartial Spectator 18. Power and Limits of the Vertical Principle: The Two Tribunals 19. On the Difference in Status of ‘Generosity’ and ‘Justice’ 20. The Nature of the Impartial Spectator 21. Criticism and Refutation of the Vertical Principle 22. The Economic Passion 23. Passions and Interests 24. Self-Control and the Society of ‘Brothers’ 25. Ethics and Morality 26. Ethics and Morality in the Works and Life of Adam Smith Part 4: The Paradoxical Synthesis 27. ‘Efficient Causes’ and ‘Final Causes’: The Working of the Invisible Hand 28. The Invisible Hand and the ‘Cunning of Reason’ Part 5: The Ethics of Morality: Conclusion

The Analysis of Linear Economic Systems Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Edited by Christian Bidard, Université de Paris Ouest- Nanterre La Défense, France and Guido Erreygers, Universiteit Antwerpen, Belgium PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

101 www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47321-7; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Maurice Potron (1872-1942), a French Jesuit mathematician, constructed and analyzed a highly original, but virtually unknown economic model. This book presents translated versions of all his economic writings, preceded by a long introduction which sketches his life and environment based on extensive archival research and family documents. Potron had no education in economics and almost no contact with the economists of his time. His primary source of inspiration was the social doctrine of the Church, which had been updated at the end of the nineteenth century. Faced with the ‘economic evils’ of his time, he reacted by utilizing his talents as a mathematician and an engineer to invent and formalize a general disaggregated model in which production, employment, prices and wages are the main unknowns. He introduced four basic principles or normative conditions (‘sufficient production’, the ‘right to rest’, ‘justice in exchange’, and the ‘right to live’) to define satisfactory regimes of production and labour on the one hand, and of prices and wages on the other. He studied the conditions for the existence of these regimes, both on the quantity side and the value side, and he explored the way to implement them. This book makes it clear that Potron was the first author to develop a full input-output model, to use the Perron-Frobenius theorem in economics, to state a duality result, and to formulate the Hawkins-Simon condition. These are all techniques which now belong to the standard toolkit of economists. This book will be of interest to Economics postgraduate students and researchers, and will be essential reading for courses dealing with the history of mathematical economics in general, and linear production theory in particular.

CONTENTS Foreword Paul Anthony Samuelson Introduction: Society, Church and Economics - An Introduction to the Life and Work of Maurice Potron 1. Abstract of a study on just prices and wages 2. With regard to a mathematical contribution to the study of the problems of production and wages 3. Some properties of linear substitutions with coefficients = 0 and their application to the problems of production and wages 4. Application to the problems of "sufficient production" and the "living wage" of some properties of linear substitutions with coefficients = 0 5. Possibility and determination of the just price and the just wage 6. Mathematical contribution to the study of the problems of production and of wages 7. Relations between the question of unemployment and those of the just price and the just wage 8. Some properties of linear substitutions with coefficients = 0 and their application to the problems of production and of wages 9. Mathematical contribution to the study of the equilibrium between production and consumption 10. The scientific organization of labour - The "Taylor system" 11. On some conditions of economic equilibrium. Letter of M. Potron (90) to R. Gibrat (22) 12. On the economic equilibria 13. Communication made at the Oslo Congress 14. The mathematical aspect of some economic problems in relation to some recent results of the theory of nonnegative matrices. Lectures given at the Catholic Institute of Paris 15.

On nonnegative matrices 16. On nonnegative matrices and positive solutions to certain linear systems 17. Letter on industrial statistics Appendix I: Alfred Barriol , "Obituary. Maurice Potron (1872-1942)" Appendix II: Alfred Barriol , "[Report on] L.aspect mathématique de certains problèmes économiques" Appendix III: Michel Vittrant , "[Report on] Le problème de la manne des Hébreux" The Potron Bibliography

Austrian and German Economic Thought Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Kiichiro Yagi, Kyoto University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55404-6; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The emergence of subjectivist value theory of Carl Menger in the late nineteenth century Vienna altered the constellation of social sciences in Austria and Germany. Menger and his two followers, Eugen v. Böhm-Bawerk and Friedrich Wieser, established a new school in economics, the "Austrian School", whose name is inherited up to present via Friedrich Hayek. In this new book, Kiichiro Yagi argues for a renovation of the views of these Austrian and German social scientists, a quest that can be surmised as a journey to reconcile the new born methodological subjectivism (or individualism) with the concept of social change, which modern readers can interpret as a concept of "social evolution". Yagi grounds his work on thorough archival research, examining the formation process of the classic works of Austrians in detail and situating them in the context of political liberalism and the peculiar constitution of the old Austria. Yagi argues that the Austrian economists were not confined in pure theory but had their own view of society and history that would place the Debate on Method as well as of the works of Max Weber in a wider context place. The final aim of the study is to explore the place of subjective rationality or methodological individualism in the total view of social evolution. The book acquires some answers by reading works of Max Weber and Schumpeter from the viewpoint of an evolutionary economist.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Subjectivism and Social Evolution in the history of economic thought, 2. Portrait of an Austrian Liberal : Max Menger's Liberal Position, 3. Carl Menger as Journalist and Tutor of Crown Prince, 4. Grundsätze in the Making, 5. Carl Menger and Historicism in German economics, 6. Origin of Böhm-Bawerk's theory of Interest and Capital, 7. Alternative Equilibrium Vision in Austrian Economics, 8. Anonymous history in the Austrian Economic Thought (Carl and Anton Menger, Wieser), 9. Knies, Weber, and Austrians: A Heidelberg Connection, 10. Schumpeter on Social Evolution, 11. Evolutionist Turn of the Marx-Weber Problem

Contributions to the History of Economic Thought Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

102 Bertram Schefold, Johann-Wolfgang Goethe University, Frankfurt, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $160.00; 234x156 mm; 560pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43066-1; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This is the opus magnum of one of the worlds most renowned experts on the history of economic thought. Bertram Schefold’s choice of authors for the "Klassiker" series, which he has edited since 1991, and his comments on the various re-edited works are proof of his highly original and thought-provoking interpretation of the history of economic thought. This volume is an important contribution to the history of economic thought not only because it delivers original and fresh insights about such well-known figures as Aristotle, Jevons or Wicksell, but also because it deals with authors and ideas who have been forgotten or neglected in the previous literature. In this regard Schefold’s book could prove to be seminal for the field of the history of economic thought, for in the age of globalisation our usual restriction to the thinkers of Western Europe and the USA might eventually be overcome.

Crises and Cycles in Economic Dictionaries and Encyclopaedias Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Edited by Daniele Besomi, University of Lausanne, Switzerland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 640pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49903-3; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Economic dictionaries have a long history, dating back to Choel’s Dictionnaire Oeconomique first published in 1709. Some of these dictionaries give nothing more than definitions, but some offer ponderous articles, occasionally up to a hundred pages in size that have been influential, or were used as reference material, or marked important tuning points in the development of their writer’s ideas.

Some dictionaries aimed at systematizing knowledge, others at supplying materials for conversation others still at registering the most recent advances in the discipline. Accordingly, some entries expounded new ideas, others summarized their author’s thought and others were brilliant surveys of the field at their time. This new book investigates from the perspective of the major economic dictionaries and encyclopaedias the notions of economic crises and cycles, bringing together extensive summaries of a number of significant entries on this subject, with an introductory essay to each entry placing them (and the dictionary to which they belong) in their context, giving some details on the author of the dictionary entry, and assessing the entry’s (and its author’s) contribution. This book will be accompanied by a website generated by the research team and feature contributions from notable economic historians such as Pascal Bridel, Cécile Dangel-Hagnauer, Ludovic Frobert, Harald Hagemann and Alain Raybaut.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction, Daniele Besomi , 2. Blanqui, 'Crise commerciale', in Encyclopedie des gents du monde (1836), Alain Raybaut , 3.

Courcelle-Seneuil: Commerical crises and Republican institutions (1842), Ludovic Frobert , 4. Roscher, Die Produktionkrisen mit besonderer Rucksicht auf die letzten Jahrzehnte, Harald Hagemann , 5. Mora, 'Crisis comercial' in Enciclopedia Moderna , (1851), Jesus Astarriaga and Juan Zabalza , 6. Charles Coquelin, 'Crises commerciales' (1852), Daniele Besomi , 7. Expectations and crises in Auguste Ott's Dictionnaire des sciences politiques et sociales (1854), Daniele Besomi , 8. Crises in Gerolamo Boccardo's Dizionario della economia politica (1857), Daniele Besomi , 9. Garnier 'Crises Commerciales', in Guillaumin's Dictionnaire universel, theorique et pratique du commerce et de la navigation , 1859, Alain Raybaut , 10. C. Juglar: Crises commerciales, in Block's Dictionnaire general de la politique (1863) and in Say's Nouveau dictionnaire d'economie politiqu e (1891), Cecile Dangel-Hagnauer, 11.

Commercial crises in MacLeod's Dictionary of Political Economy , (1863), Cecile Dangel-Hagnauer , 12. Wagner's 'Krisen', in Rentzsch's Handworterbuch der Volkswirthschaftslehre , (1866), Vitantonio Gioia , 13. E. de Laveleye, 'Crise', in Berthelot's Grande encyclopedie (1886-1902), Ludovic Frobert , 14. Tugan-Baranowski, 'Economic crises' in Brockhaus-Efron Encyclopedic Dictionary (1895, 1909, 1915), Francois Allisson , 15. Crises and related entries in Palgrave's Dictionary of political economy , (1894-99), Pascal Bridel , 16. Tsumura on crises in the Japanese Dictionary of economics (1910), Shigeki Tomo , 17.Lexis on Crisis and Overproduction in Elster's Worterbuch der Volkswirtschaft , (1911), Harald Hagemann , 18. Spiethoff, 'Krisen', in Elster's Handworterbuch der Staatswissenschaften , (1925), Vitantonio Gioia , 19. Bachi, 'Crisi economiche', in Enciclopedia Treccani , (1931), Riccardo Realfonzo , 20. Koynus's 'Economic conjuncture' in the Granat encyclopedia, Vincent Barnett, 21. Mitchell on Business cycles in Seligman's Encyclopedia of the social sciences , (1930-35), Pier Francesco Asso and Luca Fiorito , 22. Tinbergen on dynamics and conjuncture in Stridiron's Bedrijfseconomische encyclopedie , (1947), Peter Rodenburg , 23. Balogh's 'Fluttuazioni economiche', in Napoleoni's Dizionario di economia politica , (1956), 24. Burns on Business cycles in Sills's International encyclopedia of the social sciences , (1968), Pier Francesco Asso and Luca Fiorito , 25. Nonlinear business cycles in recent dictionaries, Giorgio Colacchio , 26. Long waves in recent dictionaries, Francisco Louca , 27. The political BC in recent dictionaries, Jan-Peter Olders , 28. Real and Equilibrium business cycles in recent dictionaries, 29. Crises in recent dictionaries, Daniele Besomi and Giorgio Colacchio , 30. Bibliography of specialised dictionaries, Daniele Besomi

The Division of Labour in Economics Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Guang-Zhen Sun, Monash University, Australia

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

103 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-44907-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book painstakingly identifies and elaborates on the tradition in economic analysis of the division of labor by examining the studies on this topic that have emerged over the past two and a half millennia, especially in about two and a quarter centuries since Adam Smith (1776). Studies of the division of labor are found in the writings of many authors ranging from Plato to Smith, Karl Marx, von Friedrich Hayek and George Stigler. This book is devoted to close examination of the various pieces of lasting importance in the history of ideas, and of the complexity of their intellectual connections. Another major aim of the book is to assess and synthesize the contemporary studies, namely the post-WWII studies, especially since the revival of research interest in the division of labor in the late 1970s, in light of such a tradition, thereby highlighting and assessing advancements recently made and suggesting some new directions into which further exploration appears to be scientifically rewarding.

CONTENTS Preface 1.Introduction Part One: Pre-Smith Analyses 2. Early Analyses 3. Mercantilists and Emergence of Political Economy of the Division of Labour Part Two: The Smithian Economics of the Division of Labour 4. The Smithian Economics of the Division of Labour and the Market Process: The Basic Principle 5. Economic Development as Framed in the Smithian Economics Part Three: The Marxian Economics of Manufacturing Division of Labour and the Austrian Problem of Knowledge 6. Machinery and the Factory System: Charles Babbage and Karl Marx on the Division of Labour in Manufacture 7. Catallaxy and the Division of Knowledge: Hayek’s Insight Part Four: The Firm 8. The Firm: The Various Theories Framed in Economics of the Division of Labour Part Five: Insights from Neighboring Disciplines in Social Sciences 9. The Anthropology, Biology and Sociology of the Division of Labour

A Dynamic Approach to Economic Theory Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Edited by Olav Bjerkholt, University of Oslo, Norway and Duo Qin, Queen Mary, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56409-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book contains a set of notes prepared by Ragnar Frisch for a lecture series that he delivered at Yale University in 1930. The lecture notes provide not only a valuable source document for the history of econometrics, but also a more systematic introduction to some of Frisch’s key methodological ideas than his other works so far published in various media for the econometrics community. In particular, these notes contain a number of prescient ideas precursory to some of the most important notions developed in econometrics during the 1970s and 1980s More remarkably, Frisch demonstrated a deep understanding of what econometric or statistical analysis could achieve under the situation where there lacked known correct theoretical models. This volume has been rigorously edited and comes with an introductory essay from Olav Bjerkholt and Duo Qin placing the notes in their historical context.

CONTENTS I. General Consideration on Statistics and Dynamics in Economics , 1. What is economic theory?, 2. A discussion of the fundamental distinction between a static and a dynamic economic theory, 3. The static and the dynamic conception of an equilibrium, 4. Structural, confluent and fictitious relations in economic theory, II. Dynamic Formulation of Some Parts of Economic Theory , 5. A dynamic analysis of marginal utility, 6. A dynamic formulation of the law of demand, 7. A simple case of steered oscillations. The reaction problem, 8. A simple case of initiated oscillations, 9. Dynamic analysis of a closed economic system, III. Statistical Verification of the Laws of Dynamic Economic Theory , 10. Types of clustering in scatter diagrams and the non-significance of partial correlations, 11.

General principles regarding the possibility of determining structural relations from empirical observations, 12. The separation of short-time and long-time components in an empirical time series, 13. The phase diagram. Phase elasticities and structural elasticities.

The comparison problem in time series components, 14. Critical remarks on some of the recent attempts at statistical determination of demand and supply curves, 15. A new theory of linear regression. The diagonal and the arithmetic mean regression. The invariance problem, 16. A statistical analysis of selected groups of data by the methods developed in the present course

The Economic Reader Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Edited by Massimo M. Augello and Marco E. L. Guidi, both of University of Pisa, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55443-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

104 The Nineteenth Century saw the emergence of political economy as an independent science in Europe, the USA and Japan and its growing popularity was favoured by an unexpected wealth of publications and manuals, in which the principles of economics were systematically explained and discussed and the connections between this science and other forms of moral, political and legal discourse were examined. Among the issues that found a large place in manuals were the methodology of economics, the divisions between pure and applied economics and between science and art, the boundaries of this science and its relationships with other moral and social sciences. The oppositions between laissez-faire and interventionism, the emergence of socialism, Christian social thought, and the conservative and neo-liberal reactions that they provoked, are all registered in the history of economic manuals. Although substantial differences may be identified among national cases, this book proposes a comparative study of the history of manuals of political economy in the most representative countries for the development of economics in the 19th and early 20th centuries demonstrating that their evolution mirrors the various stages of the 'professionalisation' of economics.

CONTENTS 1. Manuals and the Spread of Economics: a Comparative Analysis Massimo M. Augello and Marco E.L. Guidi 2. The United Kingdom Keith Tribe 3. France Philippe Steiner and François Vatin 4. Germany and Austria Harald Hagemann and Mattias Rösch 5.

Italy Massimo M. Augello and Marco E.L. Guidi 6. Spain, Salvador Almenar 7. Portugal José Luis Cardoso and Antonio Almodovar 8. Belgium Guido Erreygers and Bert Mosselmans 9. Russia Joachim Zweynert 10. Sweden Johan Lönnroth 11. USA Brad Bateman 12. Japan Tamotsu Nishizawa

E.E. Slutsky as Economist and Mathematician Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Vincent Barnett, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54960-8; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Slutsky is perhaps the Russian/Ukrainian economist most quoted by mainstream economists today, although his fame in the West rests on only two articles that were initially translated into English. Moreover, Slutsky’s work is still employed in economics textbooks today, and he is the only Russian/Ukrainian person to be so honoured. This is the first book in English devoted to assessing Slutsky’s contributions to economics and to their links with his influential work in pure mathematics and statistics. Whereas previous scholars who have written on Slutsky have done so exclusively from either a ‘history of economics’ or a ‘history of science’ approach, Barnett argues that the two strands must be tied together as he examines Slutsky’s wide range of research interests and traces the connections between them. Barnett utilizes the full range of Russian archival and published sources and offers new translations into English of some of Slutsky’s currently unknown works in economics. Barnett provides the first detailed overview of the context and immediate influence of Slutsky’s life and work, both within Russia and outside it.

CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction, Part One: Slutsky's Life and Contributions , Chapter Two Slutsky's Life and Work up to 1917, Chapter 3 Slutsky after the Boshevik Revolution.Chapter 4 Slutsky joins the Moscow Conjuncture Institute, Chapter 5 Slutsky after 1930, Part Two: Slutsky's Unknown Works in Economics , Chapter 6 An Essay on the Economic Views of William Petty (1914), Chapter 7: Mathematical Notes Towards a Theory of Currency Emission (1923), Chapter 8 An Enquiry into the Formal Praxelogical Foundations of Economics (1926), Part Three: Wider Discussion and Conclusion , Chapter 9: At the Limit of Economics and Mathematics, Chapter 10 Conclusion

The Essential Writings of Thorstein Veblen Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Edited by Charles Camic, Northwestern University, USA and Geoffrey M. Hodgson, University of Hertfordshire, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £125.00 $200.00; 234x156 mm; 656pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77790-2; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The 38 selections in the volume include complete texts of all of Veblen’s major articles and book reviews from 1882 to 1914, plus key chapters from his books The Theory of the Leisure Class (1899), The Theory of Business Enterprise (1904) and The Instinct of Workmanship (1914). These writings present a wide range of Veblen’s most significant contributions, especially with respect to the philosophical and psychological foundations of economics, sociology, and other social sciences. A thorougly comprehensive volume, this is the only collection to present Veblen’s writings in chronological order, so that their development can be correctly understood.

The volume is edited by a leading sociologist and a prominent economist, who provide extensive introductory essays which include item-by-item commentaries that place each selection in its intellectual-historical context and in relation to subsequent developments in economics. It makes for a valuable source of reference both for students and researchers alike. .

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

105 CONTENTS General Introduction Part I: The Early Works 1. Introduction 2. ‘Mill’s Theory of the Taxation of Land’ (1882) (Johns Hopkins University Circulars) 3. ‘Kant’s Critique of Judgment’ (1884) (Journal of Speculative Philosophy) 4. ‘Some Neglected Points in the Theory of Socialism’ (1891) (Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science) 5. ‘Böhm-Bawerk’s Definition of Capital and the Source of Wages’ (1892) (Quarterly Journal of Economics) 6. ‘The Food Supply and the Price of Wheat’ (1893) (Journal of Political Economy) 7. Review of The Land-Systems of British India by B.H. Baden-Powell (1893) (Journal of Political Economy) 8. Review of Der Parlamentarismus, die Volksgesetzgebung und die Socialdemokratie by Karl Kautsky (1894) (Journal of Political Economy) 9. ‘The Economic Theory of Women’s Dress" (1894) (Popular Science Monthly) 10. Review of Socialisme et Science Positive by Enrico Ferri (1896) (Journal of Political Economy) 11. Review of Einfuhrung in den Socialismus by Richard Calwer (1897) (Journal of Political Economy) 12. Review of Essais sur la conception matérialiste de l’histoire by Antonio Labriola (1897) (Journal of Political Economy) 13. Review of Die Marxistische Socialdemokratic by Max Lorenz (1897) (Journal of Political Economy) 14. Review of Über einige Grundfragen der Socialpolitik und der Volkswirtschaftslehre by Gustav Schmoller (1898) Journal of Political Economy) 15. Review of Aristocracy and Evolution: A Study of the Rights, the Origins and the Social Functions of the Wealthier Classes by William H. Mallock (1898) (Journal of Political Economy) Part II: The Flowering of Veblenian Theory 16. ‘Why Is Economics Not an Evolutionary Science?’ (1898) (Quarterly Journal of Economics) 17. ‘The Instinct of Workmanship and the Irksomeness of Labor’ (1898) (American Journal of Sociology) 18. The Beginnings of Ownership’ (1898) (American Journal of Sociology) 19. ‘The Barbarian Status of Women’ (1899) (American Journal of Sociology) 20. ‘The Preconceptions of Economic Science,’ Parts I, II, III (1899-1900) (Quarterly Journal of Economics) 21. Review of The Development of English Thought: A Study in the Economic Interpretation of History by Simon N. Patten (1899) (Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science) 22. The Theory of the Leisure Class: An Economic Study in the Evolution of Institutions, Chapter 8 (1899) Part III: Critiques and Further Developments 23. Introduction 24. ‘Mr. Cummings’s Strictures on "The Theory of the Leisure Class" (1899) Journal of Political Economy) 24. Review of Social Laws: An Outline of Sociology by Gabriel Tarde (1900) (Journal of Political Economy) 25.

‘Industrial and Pecuniary Employments’ (1901) (Publications of the American Economic Association) 26. ‘Gustav Schmoller’s Economics’ (1901) (Quarterly Journal of Economics) 27. Review of Psychologie économique by Gabriel Tarde (1902) (Journal of Political Economy) 28. Review of Der moderne Kapitalismus by Werner Sombart (1903) (Journal of Political Economy) 29. Review of Pure Sociology: A Treatise Concerning the Origin and Spontaneous Development of Society by Lester Ward (1903) (Journal of Political Economy) 30. The Theory of Business Enterprise, Chapter 7 (1904) Part IV: The Penultimate Period 31. Introduction 32.

‘The Place of Science in Modern Civilisation’ (1906) (American Journal of Sociology) 33. ‘The Socialist Economics of Karl Marx and His Followers,’ Parts I & II (1906-07) (Quarterly Journal of Economics) 34. ‘Professor Clark’s Economics’ (1908) (Quarterly Journal of Economics) 35. ‘The Evolution of the Scientific Point of View’ (1908) (University of California Chronicle) 36.

‘On the Nature of Capital I,’ Parts I & II (1908) (Quarterly Journal of Economics) 37. ‘Fisher’s Capital and Income’ & ‘Fisher’s Rate of Interest’ (1908-09) (Political Science Quarterly) 38. ‘The Limitations of Marginal Utility’ (1909) (Journal of Political Economy) 39. ‘The Mutation Theory and the Blond Race’ (1913) (Journal of Race Development) 40. The Instinct of Workmanship, and the State of the Industrial Arts, Chapters 1 & 2 (1914) Epilogue: Veblen’s Writings after 1914

Fighting Market Failure Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Maria Cristina Marcuzzo, University of Rome, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58310-7; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Cambridge tradition of economics is a heritage to draw upon as alternative to neoclassical economics – more of a legacy than a fully-fledged system of thought. Moreover, the label "Keynesians" is somewhat misleading: while the centrality of Keynes’ ideas is beyond dispute, there is the parallel line of thought provided by Sraffa’s revival of classical political economy, which J. Robinson was greatly influenced by in the later part of her life, and which some would consider as relevant to identification of the "Cambridge tradition of economics" as the line stemming from Keynes. So argues Marcuzzo in this new collection, that brings together her major research in the Cambridge tradition of economics. The book focuses on Keynes, Kahn, J. Robinson and Sraffa, who shared in the physical space and lifestyle of Cambridge to an exceptional degree. The bond between them was intellectual partnership, a recognised common ground, dialogue and acceptance of criticism.

CONTENTS Introduction, I. Individuals, 1. Cambridge as a place in economics, 2. Keynes and Cambridge, 3. Piero Sraffa at the University of Cambridge, 4. Joan Robinson and the Three Cambridge Revolutions, 5. Introduzione, in R.F. Kahn, Concorrenza, occupazione e moneta, 6. R.F. Kahn and Imperfect Competition Cambridge Journal of Economics, II. Collaboration , 7. The Collaboration between J.M. Keynes and R.F. Kahn from the Treatise to the General Theory, 8. Joan Robinson and Richard Kahn. The origin of short period analysis, 9. Robinson and Sraffa, 10. Sraffa and Cambridge Economics, 1928-1931, III. Approach , 11. From market ‘imperfections’ to market ‘failures’. Some Cambridge challenges to laissez-faire, 12. Alternative Microeconomic Foundations for Macroeconomics: The Controversy Over the L-shaped Cost Curve Revisited, 13. Short Period Economics in Retrospect, 14. The first imperfect competition revolution, 15.Profit Maximization in the Cambridge Tradition of Economics

Generations of Economists Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

106 David Collard, University of Bath, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56541-7; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION David Collard is an internationally recognised authority on the early 20 th century Cambridge economist AC Pigou and has also written widely on other topics in the history of economics. The theme of economic generations recurs throughout the book which includes two new historical essays on twentieth century treatments of over-lapping generations and a new introduction on the place of intellectual history in modern economics. The essays provide original and, it is argued, often symbiotic treatments of mainstream figures such as Bentham, Malthus, Edgeworth, Walras, Pigou and Marshall and of "neglected" figures such as John Tozer and Alfred Russel Wallace.

CONTENTS Preface, 1. Introduction, Part One: Pigou and Cambridge . 2 Pigou’s place in the history of economics, 3. Pigou and Modern Business Cycle Theory, 4. Cambridge After Marshall, 5. The Cambridge Economics Tripos 1957-60, Part Two: Classical utilitarianism and Welfare , 6. Classical Utilitarianism and Welfare, 7. Research on Well-Being: Some Advice from Jeremy Bentham, 8. Malthus on How to Improve Welfare for all Generations, Part Three: General equilibrium Theory , 9. Edgeworth and Walras: Contrasting Approaches to General Equilibrium Theory, 10. Leon Walras and the Cambridge Caricature, 11. Edgeworth’s Propositions on Altruism, Part Four. Two Neglected Writers on Political Economy , 12. "Neglect" in the history of economics, 13. Tozer’s "Mathematical Investigation of the Effects of Machinery etc", 14. Alfred Russel Wallace and the Economists, Part Five.

Intergenerational Economics , 15. Pigou and Future Generations: A Cambridge Tradition, 16. Economists and Future Generations, 17.

The Economics of Overlapping Generations : Review and Assessment

Hayek, Mill and the Liberal Tradition Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Edited by Andrew Farrant, Dickinson College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77934-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book considers the relationship between Hayek and Mill, taking issues with Hayek’s criticism of Mill and providing a broader perspective of the liberal tradition. Featuring contributions from the likes of Ross Emmett, Leon Montes and Robert Garnett, these chapters ask whether Hayek had an accurate reading of the ideas of Mill and Smith, as well as considering themes such as sympathy and analytical egalitarianism that play a large part in the liberal tradition, but less in work of Hayek These chapters argue that addition of these key ideas to the Hayekian corpus leads to a far broader understanding of the liberal tradition than that provided by Hayek CONTENTS Introduction, Andrew Farrant , 1.Hayek and the Liberal Tradition, 1. Is Friedrich Hayek rowing Adam Smith’s boat, Leon Montes , 2.

F. A. Hayek’s Sympathetic Agents, David M. Levy and Sandra Peart , 3. Discussion and the Evolution of Institutions in a Liberal Democracy: Frank Knight Joins the Debate, Ross Emmett , 2. Pushing the Boundaries of the Liberal Tradition? , 4. Hayek, Mill, and the Problem of Institutional Change?, Andrew Farrant , 5. A Socialist Spontaneous Order, Theodore A. Burczak , 6. Hayek and Philanthropy: A Classical Liberal Road Not (Yet) Taken, Robert Garnett

Henry A. Abbati: Keynes' Forgotten Precursor Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Edited by Serena Di Gaspare, University of Turin, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57345-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Henry A. Abbati was not an economist by profession. After retiring from business, in 1924 he published his first book, The Unclaimed Wealth: How Money Stops Production in which he expounded his theory of ‘effective demand’ (terminology of his own) and its differences with respect to current theories on economic fluctuations. He was advocating public intervention in the economy in the crisis. His second book, The Final Buyer marshalled his criticisms of current theories and further clarified salient aspects of his theory, such as ‘saving’ and its various definitions, the working of the banking system, the interest rate and the role of public works as a means of reducing unemployment. Later work in the 30s and 40s looked at full employment, reflections on the economic crisis and further analysis of the concept of unclaimed wealth. In many ways Abbati’s work in the twenties was an important precursor to Keynes’ Treatise on Money , though despite being admired by Robertson and indeed Keynes, his work is today largely unknown and

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

107 entirely ignored by the numerous authors who have examined the debate of the twenties and thirties on the crises and business cycles and by academic opinion in general. In this book, Di Gaspare restores Abbati’s position as a pioneer in macroeconomic theory with a selection of his writings and a far reaching introduction to his contribution to the history of economic thought.

The Ideas of Ronald H. Coase Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Lawrence W. C. Lai, University of Hong Kong PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55906-5; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Are the ideas of Nobel Laureate Ronald H Coase’s ideas anti or pro market? This book carefully examines the best known works of Coase such as "The Problem of Social Cost" (1960) and "The Lighthouse in Economics" (1974) and illustrates their contemporary relevance in the context of urban development. Lawrence Lai explains how in theory and practice Coase’s theories have been misinterpreted both by anti-regulation libertarians and pro-planning interventionists. He demonstrates how Coase’s theories, although intended to ruin interventionist concepts, can be used to establish a practical pro-planning agenda without compromising the freedom of contract or private property rights as pillars of a market economy. He shows how this can be adapted to partake in the current debate on sustainable development.

CONTENTS Part I: Intellectual and Policy Context, 1. Coase: a Friend or an Enemy of Planning?, 2. Coase and Coasian Research on Zoning, Part II: Coase and Market Failure , 3. "The Problem of Social Cost", the "Coase Theorem" and Externalities, 4. "The Lighthouse in Economics" and Public Goods, 5. Sustainable Development, Part III: Coase and Planning by Contract , 6. Planning by Contract: a Coasian Model for Sustainable Development, Part IV: Concluding Thoughts, 7. Summary and Conclusion

Innovation, Knowledge and Growth Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Heinz D. Kurz, University of Graz, Austria PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55063-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Heinz Kurz is a major contemporary figure in the study of the history of economic thought and this new collection brings together recent work on growth theory, integrating the study of the history of economic analysis with contemporary economic theorizing. Kurz draws on the work of Schumpeter and Smith to articulate the relationships between innovation, knowledge and growth. Essays included range in subject, from considering Schumpeter’s work in Graz and the problem of innovation and profits from a Schumpeterian point of view to the concepts of knowledge and economic growth and the state of the study of the history of economic thought. Kurz’s analytical and technically sophisticated approach is combined with in awareness of the relevance of discussing the issues of innovation and growth in historical perspective and context.

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction, Chapter 2: Joseph A. Schumpeter – An Economist between Marx and Walras, Chapter 3: Innovations and Profits. Schumpeter and the Classical Heritage, Chapter 4: On the Growth of Knowledge about the Role of Knowledge in Economic Growth. A Critical Assessment of Recent Literature on Growth Theory, Chapter 5: Whither the History of Economic Thought? Going Slowly Rather Nowhere?, Chapter 6: Shorter papers: Capital, Classical Economics, Physiocracy, Quesnay, Ricardo, Ricardian Vice, Sraffa, Turgot, Wicksell Effects

Keynes and the British Humanist Tradition Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

David Andrews, University of Richmond, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-29986-2; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Well-connected in academia, business and government, John Maynard Keynes was one of the most influential economic theorists of the twentieth century. It appears that his theories will be just as important for the twenty-first. As Keynes himself explained, his ideas

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

108 throughout his life were influenced by the moral philosophy he learned as an undergraduate. Nevertheless, the meaning and significance for Keynes of this early philosophy have remained largely unexplored. Keynes and the British Humanist Tradition offers an interpretation of Keynes’s early philosophy and its implications for his later thought. It approaches that philosophy from the perspective of the nineteenth century intellectual context out of which it emerged. The book argues that roots of Keynes’s early beliefs are to be found in the traditions of the Apostles, the very famous secret society to which he and most of his teachers belonged. The principles of Keynes’s philosophy can be seen in such writers as John Stuart Mill and Henry Sidgwick, but the underlying ideas have been obscured by changing fashions in philosophy and thus require excavation and reconstruction. This book will be of interest to students and researchers in the history of economics, in particular the thought of John Maynard Keynes, especially his ethics, politics and economics.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Religion 3. Morals 4. Politics 5. Economics 6. Conclusion

The Making of the Classical Theory of Economic Growth Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Anthony Brewer, University of Bristol, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48620-0; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book collects together for the first time Anthony Brewer’s work on the origins and development of the theory of economic growth from the late eighteenth century and looking at how it came to dominate economic thinking in the nineteenth century. Brewer argues that many of the earliest proponents of economics growth theory had no concept of it as a continuing theory. This book looks at many of the key players such as Smith, Hume, Ferguson, Steuart, Turgot, West and Rae and is tied together with a rigorous introduction and a new chapter on capital accumulation.

CONTENTS Part 1: The Invention of Economic Growth 1. Introduction 2. The Concept of Growth in Eighteenth Century Economics Part 2: The Scottish Tradition from Hume to Smith 3. An Eighteenth Century View of Economic Development: Hume and Steuart 4. Luxury and Economic Development: David Hume and Adam Smith 5. Adam Ferguson, Adam Smith, and the Concept of Economic Growth Part 3: Accumulation and Growth: Turgot and Smith 6. Turgot, Founder of Classical Economics 7. Turgot, Smith, and Capital Accumulation Part 4: Growth, Saving and Distribution 8. Adam Smith on Classes and Saving 9. Rent and Profit in the Wealth of Nations 10. Edward West and the Classical Theory of Distribution and Growth Part 5: Epilogue: John Rae and Technical Change 11.

Economic Growth and Technical Change: John Rae's Critique of Adam Smith 12. Invention

Marshall, Marshallians and Industrial Economics Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Edited by Tiziano Raffaelli, University of Pisa, Italy, Tamotsu Nishizawa, Graduate School of Economics, Tokyo, Japan and Simon Cook, University of Tel Aviv, Israel PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55270-7; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In recent years, Alfred Marshall’s reflections on industrial organization have attracted renewed attention, first in the booming literature on the industrial district and then as anticipations of the competence theory of the firm. Firms are no longer seen as devices aimed to economize transaction costs, but as organisms that grow and thrive thanks to their core competencies. This attitude has fostered a revival of interest in Marshall’s theory of industrial organization which now proves itself to be of long-lasting relevance.

The aim of the book is to focus on both Marshall’s own work and the Marshallian tradition, revisiting the 1920s and 1930s debates on business size, external economies, coordination and management costs by the authors who followed Marshall’s insightful theoretical perspective. Authors include well-known historians such as Roger Backhouse and Richard Arena, applied and theoretical economists, young researchers who are working on unpublished material by Marshall and the Marshallian writers and an introduction from Giacomo Becattini.

CONTENTS Introduction, Giacomo Becattini , Section 1: Marshall's Industrial Economics , 1. Marshall‘s evolutionary views on the industrial system, Tiziano Raffaelli , 2. "Industry and Trade" revisited, Marshall on Britain's industrial leadership and business organization, Tamotsu Nishizawa , Section 2: Wider Perspectives , 3. The history of industrial organization, Simon Cook , 4. Fair wages and capability-development, Kenji Fuji , 5. Partial equilibrium analysis as a tool for the study of the economics of industry, Roger Backhouse , 6. Ideal social orders, Marco Dardi , 7. Sraffa's attitude to Marshall, Annalisa Rosselli , Section 3: The Marshallian School , 8. The Lancashire industrial district: its rise, prosperity and decline in the analysis of British economists, Katia Caldari and

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

109 Fiorenza Belussi , 9. Layton on industrial and applied economics, Masashi Kondo , 10. Two Marshallians: Layton and the early MacGregor, Carlo Cristiano , 11. Sargant Florence's research programme, Leonard Minkes , 12. Dennis Robertson’s ‘The Control of Industry’, Hiroyuki Shimodaira , Section 4: The Revival , 13. D. H. MacGregor and Industrial Economics at Oxford, 1920 – 1945, Frederick Lee , 14. "The Marshallian Tradition of Industrial Economics in Oxford (1947-1979): From Andrews’ contribution to the emergence of Industrial Organization and Business Studies", Lise Arena , 15. Marshall and George Richardson, Richard Arena , 16.

On the revival of interest in industrial districts, Marco Bellandi , 17. Marshall's influence on recent developments in industrial economics, Richard Langlois.

The Origins of David Hume's Economics Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

William Henderson, University of Minnesota Duluth, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77863-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The book covers Hume’s biographical development; his self appraisal as a 'man of letters’; his philosophical writings with emphasis on their direct and indirect economic content; his self-aware criticism of his approach to the Treatise and the development of his rhetorical understanding of the needs/interests of his readers/potential readers; his rhetorical turn and Ciceronian adjustments to his writing within the genre of the essay, including his two Enquiries ; his political essays and his nine essays conventionally classified as economic. The work aims to show how the Treatise and its vicissitudes gave rise to his economics. The work takes a broad approach to Hume and his writings on economic topics from the Treatise , through the Enquires and on to his political and economic essay. The work also explores Hume’s textual method and charts the move form abstruse philosophy to a Ciceronian engagement with social conditions and problems as developed in the Political Discourses . In addition, Hume’s extensive use of analogies is also brought into clearer focus than is found in other texts. Overall, the book will be of great use to both postgraduates and undergraduates alike.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction and Overview 2. Hume’s "Treatise of Human Nature": shaping economic and social life 3. 'A compleat chain of reasoning' 4. The Treatise and Hume’s revised philosophical writing 5. Hume’s economics writing: on the cusp of the modern world 6.

Contexts and Methods: 'Of the Populousness of Ancient Nations' and other essays in the context of Hume’s methodology 7. Hume’s political writing 8. The economic and methodological content of Hume’s "History of England"

Political Economy and Industrialism Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Gilles Jacoud, University Jean Monnet of Saint-Etienne, France PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48266-0; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The French philosopher and economist Saint-Simon (1760–1825) propounded a new political, economic and social order in which the quest for economic efficiency and social justice led to putting the workers at the forefront. On his death, his disciples worked to preserve his thought and developed it in numerous writings. This book explains why the Saint-Simonians could not be content with the existing economic and social order and how they planned to organise society and the role banks were to play in it. It contains a selection of old texts, written by the main Saint-Simonian thinkers, published in the press in French between 1826 and 1831, which show the Saint-Simonian conception of the organisation of society and the place allotted to banks. It is an indispensable reference work in understanding a current of thought which greatly contributed to the industrial expansion of the nineteenth century. This book will be of interest to postgraduate students, economists, historians and philosophers interested in the history of economic thought.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction by Gilles Jacoud. 2. On discount banks (first article) by Prosper Enfantin 3. On discount banks (second article) by Prosper Enfantin 4. Seventh session. Constitution of property – Organisation of banks by Saint-Amand Bazard, Hippolyte Carnot, Charles Duveyrier, Prosper Enfantin and Henri Fournel 5. Fourth letter to the editor of Le Globe, on our legislation considered in its relations with industry and property by Alphonse Decourdemanche 6. Political economy. The idle and the workers. Farm rents, rents of houses, interest, wages by Prosper Enfantin 7. Political economy. The idle and the workers. Farm rents, rents of houses, interest, wages (second article) by Prosper Enfantin 8. The idle and the workers. Political functions according to the idle. Political functions according to the workers (third article) by Prosper Enfantin 9. Political economy. The idle and the workers (third article) by Prosper Enfantin 10. Political economy (fifth article). Institution of banks by Prosper Enfantin 11. Political economy (sixth article). Industrial policy by Prosper Enfantin 12. Political economy (seventh article). Organisation of communes by Prosper Enfantin 13. SaintSimonian policy (eighth article). Banks by Prosper Enfantin 14. Saint-Simonian policy (continuing article VIII). Banks by Prosper Enfantin 15. Tenth letter to the editor of Le Globe, on legislation in its relations with industry and property. Influence of the mobilisation of land and the foundation of free banks on social destiny by Alphonse Decourdemanche 16. Industry. Third lesson given

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

110 in the Athénée hall by J. Pereire, member of the second degree, on 14 September last. On the progress of workers and the decline of the idle by Isaac Pereire 17. Industry. Fourth lesson given in the Athénée hall by J. Pereire, member of the second degree, on 21 September last. On the transformation of the present banks and credit securities by Isaac Pereire 18. Industry. Continuing the fourth lesson given in the Athénée hall by J. Pereire, member of the second degree, on 21 September last. On the transformation of the present banks and credit securities by Isaac Pereire 19. On industry. Article II by Olinde Rodrigues 20. Appendix 1. Chronological table by Gilles Jacoud 21. Appendix 2. Biographical notices by Gilles Jacoud

Political Economy and Liberalism in France Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Robert Leroux, University of Ottawa, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58055-7; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Frédéric Bastiat (1801-1850) set himself against the political trends of mid nineteeth century France and his work stood in stark contrast to the dominant trends within economics, history and philosophy. This book provides a comprehensive analysis of the work of Bastiat’s and his impact on economics and liberalism in the mid-nineteenth century. Winner of the Prix Charles-Dupin from the Académie des Sciences Morales et Politiques in Paris in its original French edition, this book examines the liberal legacy of Bastiat and his major contributions to political economy. Leroux discusses the fundamental tenets of Bastiat’s liberalism and the influence on his thought of many well-known English thinkers (Smith, Ricardo, Malthus) and some forgotten French authors (Charles Dunoyer, Charles Comte). The author explains how Bastiat came to political economy and how the genesis of his thought shaped the development of his political thinking.

CONTENTS 1. Bastiat's Intellectual Background, 2. Bastiat's Correspondence, 3. Bastiat and England, 4. A Scientific Project, 5. History and Progress, 6. Questions and Debates, 7. Liberty and its Enemies, 8. Social Harmonies, Economic Harmonies

Population, Development and Welfare in the History of Economic Thought Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Claudia Sunna, Università degli Studi di Lecce, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-36278-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The relation between demographic phenomena and economic development is a complex one and has changed throughout time; today the relationship is still unclear and the effects of population growth on development and social welfare are still a matter of debate. In this book, Claudia Sunna examines how this relationship has been considered in the history of economic thought, from Mercantilism to the beginning of the 20th century, demonstrating how it has been a common feature in Mercantilist, Classical, Marginalist, Neoclassical and Keynesian paradigms. Sunna argues that the ideas of marginalist authors on population and development in particular mainly went beyond the analytical frame of economic theory due to the fact that in the static model that they developed, population was an exogenous variable. Sunna considers such economists as Wicksell and Pareto with their theory of the “optimum populationâ€?, or Marshall with his theory of long period growth who tried to consider the population variable in the new analytical frame. Others, like Jevons, Walras, Edgeworth, Sidgwick, dealt with this subject in non-analytical works. Sunna argues that all were influenced by the classical scheme and that even Keynes, up to the end of the Twenties, used a classical way of reasoning in order to explain unemployment as a demographic phenomenon. This book will be of interest to student and researchers in history of population theory and economics development, as well as those adopting an interdisciplinary approach to demography and sociology.

CONTENTS 1. Population Theories in Mercantilist Thought 2. A. Smith on Population, Wages and Economic Development 3. T.R. Malthus on Population from the Essay to the Principles 4. Classical Economists: Toward the Stationary State 5. The Critique of the 'Law of Population' 6. Population in Marginalist and Neoclassical thought 7. K. Wicksell: From the 'Optimum of Population' to the Steady Growth Path 8. V. Pareto and the 'Popolazione Ottima' 9. J.M. Keynes on Population, Unemployment and Economic Development 10.

'Stagnation Theories' and the Fear of Zero Population Growth 11. Population Theories in Development Economics 12. The Theory of Demographic Transition

Production, Distribution and Trade Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

111 Edited by Adriano Birolo, University of Padova, Italy, Duncan Foley, New School for Social Research, New York , USA, Heinz D. Kurz, University of Graz, Austria, Bertram Schefold, Johann-Wolfgang Goethe University, Frankfurt, Germany and Ian Steedman, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55723-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This collection brings together significant new contributions to the Sraffa--based theories of production and distribution, from postKeynesian arguments concerning monetary and macro economics to the history of thought and methodology. All of the authors are well established authorities in their field, and in this book they add stimulating and original pieces of analysis to the contemporary literature. Production, Distribution and Trade is divided into three parts. The first explores analytical issues in production and exchange theory, the second examines Postkeynesian Macroeconomics and the final part includes essays on the history of economic thought and methodology. This collection has been written in honour of Sergio Parrinello and is a fitting tribute to his untiring efforts to stimulate discussion among Classicists, Marxists, Postkeynesians, and Evolutionists. The book is a clear and convincing attempt to prove that an alternative paradigm to mainstream economics is alive and thriving and to argue that these perspectives shed better light on current economic problems, both as diagnosis and in terms of policy conclusions. The book will be of interest to Economics postgraduate students and researchers working in the Classical and Postkeynesian tradition.

CONTENTS Introduction Adriano Birolo Part 1: Analytical issues in production and exchange theory 1. Bads as Joint Products in a Linear Production System Eiji Hosoda 2. Goods, Characteristics and the Quasi-concavity of Preferences Ian Steedman 3. Edgeworth without equal treatment Duncan Foley 4. Capital in the Neoclassical Theory Pierangelo Garegnani 5. Spurious ‘Margins’ versus the Genuine Article Heinz D. Kurz and Neri Salvadori 6. Can Sraffa Point Us to a Better Future? Lynn Mainwaring 7. Can Sraffa Point Us to a Better Future? A Comment on Mainwaring Guglielmo Chiodi and Leonardo Ditta 8. Competitiveness and Comparative Advantage: Towards an Evolutionary Approach to Growth and Foreign Trade Stan Metcalfe 9. Labour Values and Prices in a Linear Model with International Trade Takao Fujimoto Part 2: Postkeynesian Macroeconomics 10. The interlocked crisis of the real and the financial sector Amit Bhaduri 11. Financial Risk Redistribution and Income Fluctuations Claudio Gnesutta 12. A New Triffin Paradox for the Global Economy? J.A. Kregel 13. Interest, inflation and inflation targeting: some critical notes on the ‘new consensus monetary policy model’ Massimo Pivetti 14. Equilibrium, Stability and Path Dependence in post Keynesian Models of Economic Growth Amitava Krishna Dutt 15. On the circulation of real and fiat money in fix-price and flex-price economies based on different technological systems Edward J. Nell Part 3: History of Economic Thought and Methodology 16. The origins of social inequality: beavers for women, deer for men Alessandro Roncaglia 17. Johann Heinrich von Thünen and the history of economic thought: a bird's-eye view Bertram Schefold 18. A XXI-century alternative to XX-century peer review Grazia Ietto-Gillies 19. Research standards for the Italian young academics: what has changed over the last thirty years? Annalisa Rosselli and Adriano Birolo 20. Sergio as a young professor Flavio Pressacco 21. The smiles of Sergio Angelo Marzollo

Real Business Cycle Models in Economics Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Warren Young, Bar Ilan University, Israel PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47569-3; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this book is to describe the intellectual process by which Real Business Cycle models developed. The approach taken focuses on the core elements in the development of RBC models: (i) building blocks, (ii) catalysts, and (iii) meta-syntheses. This is done by detailed examination of all available unpublished variorum drafts of the key papers in the RBC story, so as to determine the origins of the ideas. The analysis of the process their discovery is then set out followed by explanations of the evolution and dissemination of the models, from first generation papers through full blown research programs. This is supplemented by interviews and correspondence with the individuals who were at the center of the development of RBC models, such as Kydland, Prescott, Long, Plosser, King, Lucas and Barro, among others. This book gets stright to the heart of the debates surrounding RBC models and as such contributes to a real assessment of their impact on modern macroeconomics. The volume, therefore, will interest all scholars looking at macroeconomics as well as historians of economic thought more generally.

CONTENTS Introduction Part I: Origins: Building Blocks and Catalysts 1. Optimal and Stochastic Growth Models, RCE, Calibration, and Critiques of Control Theory and Econometrics 2. Equilibrium, Understanding and Classical Modeling of Business Cycles and the Economy: Lucas, Barro and Sargent (1976) models 3. Dynamics of Economic Time-Series and Time-Series Filters 4. KydlandPrescott: time inconsistency and time-to-build 5. Long-Plosser and King-Plosser 6. Cross-Fertilization, Referees and Revision Part II: Evolution and Dissemination 7. The monetary and work-hours sting in the tail: first generation models of Kydland and Prescott and their students 8. Long-Plosser, King-Plosser and King-Plosser-Rebelo: from multi-sector to one-sector general models 9. Modern Business Cycle Theory: Barro and McCallum Challenges: Critiques and Debates in Freshwater and Saltwater venues 10. The "New Keynesian" Challenge: nominal and real rigidities in macroeconomics 11. Second and Third Generation models: The issues of work-

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

112 hours and sticky prices and their inclusion in generalized RBC monetary models 12. Critiques and Debates: from Altug, Heckman and Summers to Gali-Basu-Kimball critiques and replies Conclusion

Stalin's Economist Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

André Mommen, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57516-4; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Jenö Varga was the Comintern’s chief economist and contributed much to Stalin’s belief in a coming general crisis of capitalism. His importance resides in the fact that his theoretical and practical work contributed much to the development of the Kremlin’s international grand strategy and influenced Soviet thinking on the alleged uncertain future of capitalism and the inevitable coming of the world revolution. This intellectual biography of Varga stresses his contribution to Soviet economic thinking and to Stalin's ideological and political opinion. It was in this period that new paradigms had to be formulated and debated in periods of intense international tensions, revolutions and wars in combination with clashes on domestic policy choices with regard to industrialization and collectivisation. Varga's contribution consisted in applying both Hilferding's and Luxemburg's theories of finance capitalism and accumulation to actual economic problems and policies. Through Varga's work and at the hand of his polemics we can follow the changing attitudes of Soviet economists with regard to the development of world capitalism and inter-imperialist contradictions.

CONTENTS Prologue, Introduction, Part 1: The Hungarian Years (1879-1920): The Making of a Hungarian Socialist, The Making of a Teacher, The Making of a Marxist, The Bourgeois Republic, The Republic of Councils, The Viennese Intermezzo, Part 2: The Comintern Years (1920-1939), Economist of the Comintern (1920-1928), The Sixth Congress of the Comintern and Bukharin's Fall (1928-29), The Agriarian Question, On Germany, Waiting for the Collapse of Capitalism, Varga and the Stalanist Purges, Two Systems, Part 3: The Years of Endorsement (1939-1964), The War Years, The Cold War, The Varga Controversty, Rákosi's Consultant, The Economic Textbook, Cold War Economist, Conclusions

Studies in Social Economics Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Léon Walras, translated by Jan Van Daal and Donald A. Walker PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 400pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56965-1; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Léon Walras (1834–1910) is one of the four or five most important economic theorists in the history of the science. The present book is a complete English translation of the second edition (1936) of his Études d’économie sociale (1896), in which he applies economic theory to real problems, presents the essence of his normative economic ideas, and reveals himself to have also been a great thinker on human nature, justice, mores, and the structure of scientific inquiry and knowledge. The book will be of interest to researchers and postgraduate students in the area of the history of economics as well as those interested in Walrasian topics, such as social justice, taxation, intellectual property, and land ownership.

CONTENTS Abbreviations and notes on the text Translators’ introduction 1. Aims of the translation 2. Walras, social science, and economics 3.

Walras’s expository powers manifested in SSE 4. Editions of EES and contents of SSE 5. Concluding remarks. Appendixes to the Translators’ Introduction A. Walras’s terminology with regard to capital B. Comparisons of the pagination of editions 1 and 2 of EES and the Dockès edition Studies in Social Economics Author’s preface Part I: Seeking the Social Ideal 1. Socialism and liberalism 2.

General theory of society: present state of economics and social science 1. First lecture: Competition between the principles of economic advantageousness and justice in socio-economic matters 2. Second lecture: Intervention of philosophical doctrines. The present battle between materialism and spiritualism in economics and social science 3. Third lecture: Critique of materialism. Critique of spiritualism. New point of view on social morality. 3. General theory of society: of man and society 1. Fourth lecture: Man and human destiny from a twofold point of view: physiologico-economic and psychologico-moral 2. Fifth lecture: Compatibility of material considerations and justice 3. Sixth lecture: The individual and the State. General formula of the constitution of moral science 4. Method of reconciliation or synthesis 1. Principles of the method of synthesis 2. Synthesis of socialism and liberalism 3. Synthesis of utilitarianism and moralism 4. Synthesis of communism and individualism Part II: Property 5. Theory of property 6. The Social Question 7. On intellectual property Part III: Realisation of the Social Ideal 8. Mathematical theory of the price of land and its purchase by the State 1. The doctrines of J. Mill and H.-H. Gossen 2. The price of land. Formula for the establishment of the normal price in the cases of a temporary or a perpetual variation of rent 3. The price of land. Formula for the variation of the normal price during the period of variation of rent 4. Buying up of the land by the State. Formula for repayment of the purchase price in scheduled amounts by using the rent of the land 5. Buying up of the land by the State. Variation of the sum owed during the period of repayment

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

113 6. Impossibility of repayment in case of paying the normal price 7. Critique of Gossen’s theory. Possibility of payment enabled by the increase in the rate of growth of rent 9. An unknown economist: H.-H. Gossen Part IV: Taxes 10. Remembrances of the Lausanne Conference 11. The tax on revenue and the tax on capital 12. The cadaster and the land tax 1. The present organization of the cadaster 2. The cadaster: land registration and fiscal registration 3. The cadaster in France, Belgium and Germany 4. The nature of the land tax 5. The basis of the land tax. State co-ownership of the land 6. The basis of the land tax. Distinction between land and capital 13. The fiscal problem 1. Multiple taxes. Single tax: proportional or progressive 2. Critique of taxes as a normal and definitive phenomenon 3.

Taxation as an abnormal and transitory phenomenon. On the nationalization of land 4. France and the social question. Index of persons cited by Léon Walras. Subject index

Thomas Tooke and the Monetary Thought of Classical Economics Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

Matthew Smith, University of Sydney, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58393-0; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this book is to provide a comprehensive account and reconsideration of the contribution to political economy of Thomas Tooke (1774-1858), classical economist and influential monetary theorist. Its chief purpose is to examine Tooke’s contributions to political economy with the aim of bringing to light its unified nature and its important legacy to contemporary economics. In doing so the book aims to throw new light on monetary analysis within the framework of classical economics. There remains no comprehensive account of Tooke’s contributions that is concerned with showing his lasting and ongoing influence on the development of monetary thought. The book provides an interpretation and analytical study of Tooke’s political economy from the standpoint of the classical tradition. This enables a demonstration of how his constructive contribution throws a new light on monetary thought in this tradition.

CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction, Chapter 2 Tooke’s Contributions, Chapter 3 Tooke’s Approach to Value and Distribution, Chapter 4 An Explanation of Agricultural Price Movements, Chapter 5 An Explanation of General Price Movements, Chapter 6 The Monetary Thought of the Pre-Banking School Tooke, 1819-1838, Chapter 7 The Monetary Thought of the Banking School Tooke, 1840-1857, Chapter 8 Tooke’s Legacy, 9. Epilogue

Utility Theory Routledge Studies in the History of Economics

John Chipman, University of Minnesota, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-78113-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There is a standard belief that the modern theory of marginal utility originated in the UK with Jevons, Germany with Gossen, Austria with Menger and France with Walras. In this new book, John Chipman introduces new English translations of important writings from German economists such as Rau, Hildebrand, Roscher and Knies showing that the introduction of this concept originated with them.

This ground breaking book comes with a long introduction from John Chipman analysing the theory.

Governance and Regulation in the Third Sector Routledge Studies in the Management of Voluntary and Non-Profit Organizations

Edited by Susan Phillips, Carleton University, Canada and Steven Rathgeb Smith, University of Washington, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $130.00; 229x152 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77477-2; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book brings together scholars and experienced practitioners from different countries to investigate the relationship between regulation and relational governance for the third sector in a comparative context. First, each chapter will review recent regulatory changes in the country in question. To what extent are there significant convergences in these reforms and what are the implications

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

114 for the third sector? The chapters then move on to ask what impact does the changing regulatory and institutional framework have on shifts to more distributed or relational forms of governance? Is there any evidence that the foundational architecture for a more collaborative relationship between the state and the voluntary sector has been laid? What are the outstanding challenges for regulatory reform as well as for collaboration?

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction Susan Phillips and Steven Rathgeb Smith Part 2: Country Chapters 1. England Debra Morris 2. Scotland Patrick Ford 3. Ireland Gemma Donelly-Cox 4. Canada Susan Phillips 5. Australia Mark Lyons 6. Hungary Eva Kuti 7. Germany/France Igno Bode 8. Estonia Daimer Liiv 9. EU 10. United States Steven Rathgeb Smith Part 3 11. Reflections on the Government-Nonprofit Relationship Doug Rutzen and Richard Fries

Voluntary Organizations and Public Service Delivery Routledge Studies in the Management of Voluntary and Non-Profit Organizations

Edited by Ian Cunningham, University of Strathclyde, UK and Philip James, Oxford Brookes University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87473-1; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The outsourcing of public services to voluntary, not-for-profit organizations has proven an important part of public sector reform during the last three decades across most industrialised countries. These moves to accord the voluntary sector a greater role in public service delivery inevitably means that the nature of its relationship with government, and place in the State more generally, is undergoing a process of change. To date, much of the debate about the desirability, or otherwise, of these changes has focused attention on how far it will improve efficiency and quality of services and the degree to which it will undermine the independence of the organisations themselves. Very little attention has however been paid to the implications for the employment policies and practices of voluntary organizations and the work experiences of those working for them. Voluntary Organizations and Public Sector Delivery provides a systematic examination of how these, and other, aspects of voluntary sector employment are being affected by its engagement with the growing trend to the market-based outsourcing of the delivery of public services. The volume draws together a team of expert contributors to explore how the process of outsourcing is impacting the internal and external labor markets of voluntary organizations, and the implications for the policy objectives underlying the externalization of the delivery of public services to them.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction (Ian Cunningham and Philip James) Part I. Policy and labor market contexts 2. Outsourcing and the voluntary section: a review of the evolving policy landscape (Steve Davies) 3. Trends in voluntary sector employment (Jenny Clark) 4

Cartelization, Antitrust and Globalization in the US and Europe Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy

Mark S. LeClair, Fairfield University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 160pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57343-6; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The uncovering of a great number of cartels in the industrialised world has left an unfortunate, yet significant, mark on global economic developments in recent years. Globalization has forced firms into more direct competition; the result has been global pricefixing. This situation has greatly challenged antitrust authorities. Taking a broad yet detailed approach, this work sets a practical explanation of the history of cartels and antitrust law in a sound theoretical framework, as well as providing suggestions as to how potential reforms of antitrust laws could improve the situation going forward. The book includes a comprehensive analysis of the motivations behind and perceived necessity for organisations to enter into cartels, and the success or otherwise of legislatures’ attempts to both uncover and prevent such cartels from taking place. A total of 24 price-fixing conspiracies uncovered in the US and Europe are examined as part of the analysis to demonstrate the globalization of collusion.

CONTENTS Chapter 1. The Development of Antitrust Policy in the U.S. and the E.U., Chapter 2. Models of Cartel Behavior, Chapter 3. The Historical Background – Early Cartels and the Phasing in of Antitrust Law, Chapter 4. Globalization, Collusion and the Need for Antitrust Reform, Chapter 5. The Modern Face of Collusion – Recent Cases in the U.S. and E.U., Chapter 6. Potential Reforms of Antitrust Law as it is applied to Cartels

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

115

Cost-Benefit Analysis of Multi-Level Government Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy

Alessandro Ferrara, European Commission, Brussels, Belgium PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 352pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56821-0; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides an original theoretical framework for assessing public investment policies co-financed by Union (Federal) governments. This framework is applied to two important case studies: the EU Cohesion Policy and the US Federal Investment Policies. Cost-Benefit Analysis of Multi-Level Government sheds light on a number of outstanding issues of economic theory by extending the theory of shadow prices, and provides guidance to real-world decision makers. In particular, the following questions are addressed: In which circumstances is intervention by higher level government in Member States through investment policies justified?

Is there a welfare economics rationale to underpin interregional equity? What is the relationship between interregional and interpersonal income distribution? How can social exclusion be included in cost-benefit tests? How can a higher level of government allocate financial resources to investment policies before it bargains over the related programming documents with lower levels of government? In these circumstances, how can optimal matching rates be derived under binding or non binding budgetary constraints?

How can such an analytical framework provide guidance for real-world decision makers? Guidelines such as the Impact Assessment Guidelines (European Commission), the Green Book (British Treasury), and Guidelines and Discount Rates for Benefit-Cost Analysis of Federal Programs (Executive Office of the US President) are also analyzed. The book will be of interest to policy makers, postgraduate students and researchers in cost-benefit analysis, welfare economics, public choice, public finance, multi-level government economics, and income distribution issues.

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction 1. The Economic Theory of Shadow Pricing Part 2: Case Studies 2. The Cohesion Policy of the European Union 3. The Federal Investment Policies of the United States of America Part 3: The New Theoretical Framework 4. The Case for EU Intervention: Discussion 5. The Case for EU Intervention: Formalisation 6. The Impact of EU Intervention 7. Welfare Weights 8.

Social Discount Rates 9. Shadow Wage Rates Part 4: Theoretical Insights and Policy Implications 10. Theoretical Insights and Extensions 11. Insights and Methodological Directions for the Case Studies

Critical Issues in Air Transport Economics and Business Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy

Edited by Rosário Macário, Technical University of Lisbon, Portugal and Eddy Van de Voorde, Universiteit Antwerpen, Belgium PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 400pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57055-8; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers material for strategic thinking featuring contributions from key figures in Europe, the US and Asia. The focus of the book expands from economic to legal issues, bankruptcy and safety and security. The carefully selected papers offer a thorough and structured analysis of major current developments in the air transport industry. Fully up to date, topics covered include competitive strength, capacity utilisation and risk. The most likely future scenarios are more or less known. Only, the timeframe remains uncertain.

The speed at which the various market players in the air transport chain will implement their strategies remains the key question. This depends on a whole range of exogenous and endogenous variables, as this book aspires to demonstrate. As both an overview of the current issues affecting the industry and as a cohesive set of strategic documents, therefore, this collection will prove invaluable for policy makers and researchers alike.

CONTENTS Introduction, Rosário Macário and Eddy Van de Voorde , 1. The future air transport sector: a modified market and ownership structure, Hilde Meersman, Eddy Van de Voorde and Thierry Vanelslander , 2. Airlines and their focus on cost control and productivity, Juan Carlos Martin and Conception Roman , 3. Low-cost airlines: strategies and reaction patterns, Rosário Macário and Vasco Reis , 4. Air freight, a key to success, Franziska Kupfer, Hilde Meersman, Evy Onghena and Eddy Van de Voorde , 5.

Integrators in a changing world, Marc Pirenne , 6. Airports of the future: essentials for a renewed business model, Rosário Macário , 7.

Airport Cities: drivers and effects, Duncan A. Campbell , 8. The economics of airline alliances, Martin Dresner , 9. The transmogrification of hub and spoke airline networks, Ken Button , 10. The impact of airline network strategies for airports: the case of Amsterdam Schiphol and Paris Charles de Gaulle, Jan Veldhuis , 11. Congestion and air transport: a challenging phenomenon, Paul Roosens , 12. Slot allocation and use at hub airports, perspectives for secondary trading, Jaap de Wit and Guillaume Burghouwt , 13.

Assessing the impact of Open Skies Agreements, David Pitfield , 14. The impact of North Atlantic passenger services on airports, Anne Graham , 15. Effects of Emission Trading Schemes, Anming Zhang , 16. The air transport industry’s long-term strategic options to meet the energy and environmental challenge, Sveinn Gudmundsson , 17. Competition between airlines and High Speed Rail, Werner Rothengatter , 18. Consolidation in the air transport sector and antitrust enforcement in Europe, Marco Benacchio , 19.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

116 Regulatory constraints or how free are you?, Mia Wouters , 20. Air transport marketing, Joel Zhengyi Shon , 21. Major challenges for the future air transport sector, Rosário Macário and Eddy Van de Voorde

The Economic Geography of Air Transportation Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy

John T. Bowen, Central Washington University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 352pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77805-3; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Like the railroad and the automobile, the airliner has changed the very geography of the societies it serves. Fundamentally, air transportation has helped redefine the scale of human geography by dramatically reducing the cost of distance, both in terms of time and money. The result is what the author terms the ‘airborne world’, meaning all those places dependent upon and transformed by relatively inexpensive air transportation. The Economic Geography of Air Transportation answers three key questions: how did air transportation develop in the century after the Wright Brothers, what does it mean to live in an airborne world, and what is the future of aviation in this century? Examples are drawn from throughout the world. In particular, ample consideration is given to the situation in developing countries, where air transportation is growing rapidly and where, to a considerable degree, the future of the airborne world will be determined. The book weaves together the technological development of aviation, the competition among aircraft manufacturers and their stables of airliners, the deregulation and privatization of the airline industry, the articulation of air passenger and air cargo services in everyday life, and the challenges and controversies surrounding airports. It will be of particular interest to students and researchers in air transport history, the geography of the airline industry, air transport technological development, competition in the commercial aircraft industry, airport development, geography and economics. It will also be useful to professionals working in the airline, airport, and aircraft manufacturing industries.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part 1: Getting Airborne: The Development of the Airliner and Commercial Air Transportation 2. Jetting Towards a Smaller World: Early Commercial Aviation 3. Far and Wide: Wide-body Jetliners and the Growth of the Global Airline Industry 4.

Space-Makers and Pace-Setters: Boeing and Airbus Part 2: Open Skies and a Crowd of Competitors 5. Letting Go: The Liberalization of the Airline Industry 6. Survival of the Fittest: Network Carriers in the Global Airline Industry 7. A World Taking Wing: Low Cost Carriers and the Ascent of the Many Part 3: Life Aloft and on the Ground in the Airborne World 8.People on the Move at 1,000 Kilometers per Hour 9. The High Ways of Trade 10. Points of Departure: Airports in the Airborne World 11. Dangers Hidden in the Air: The Broader Costs of Commercial Aviation Part 4: Beyond the Horizon 12. Coming Back Down to Earth? The Cloudy Future of Air Transportation

Financial Liberalization and Economic Performance Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy

Luiz Fernando de Paula, State University of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46009-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Since the beginning of the 1990s, Brazil has followed a pattern of economic development inspired by Washington Consensus. This framework includes a set of liberalising and market friendly policies such as privatisation, trade liberalization, stimulus to foreign direct investment, tax reform, and social security reforms. This book assesses the determinants and impacts of financial liberalisation in Brazil considering its two dimensions: the opening up of the balance of payments capital account, and the penetration by foreign bank of the domestic banking sector. The author combines theoretical and empirical analyses. Some make use of mathematical models and/or statistical techniques; however, they are only used when they are strictly necessary to the analysis.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part 1: Capital Account Liberalization and Capital Controls in Brazil 2. Capital account liberalization, capital controls and exchange rate regime: theoretical and empirical evaluation 3. Capital controls and capital account liberalization in Brazil: determinants and characteristics 4. The debate on capital account convertibility and capital controls in Brazil 5. The impact of capital account liberalization 6. External financial fragility and speculative attacks: an analysis of the 1998-99 Brazilian currency crises Part 2: Foreign Bank Entry and the Brazilian Banking Sector 7. The internationalization of banks: patterns and strategies 8. Determinants of foreign banks entry in Latin America and Brazil 9. Some features of the recent foreign banks wave in Brazil 10. The impacts of foreign banks entry in the Brazilian banking sector Part 3: Summary and Perspectives 11. Economic policies in Brazil: is there an alternative? 12. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

117

Global Politico-Economic Crises Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy

Keiichiro Komatsu, Komatsu Research & Advisory, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47766-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The 1997 Asian Crisis and 9/11 were turning points for the world economy. The two events reminded the Western World of the dynamic impacts of globalisation and the increased uncertainty the world was facing. This book examines the threats to the world economy arising in the wake of the tragedy of 11th September 2001 and the preceding Asian financial crisis of 1997. The author makes the point that a distinctive “1990s-type” global capitalist system was the victim of these attacks, so that an appreciation of the peculiarities of this system is essential to an examination of the specific threats that it is likely to face in future and the policy measures necessary to deal with them. As an international relations specialist working for a Japanese trade organization both in Britain and Japan itself, the author has a somewhat uniquely privileged vantage point from which to observe, analyze and evaluate the future tendencies and dangers of the new global system. The book cuts across economics and politics and as such will be of use to a wide audience within both of these disciplines.

CONTENTS Preface Introduction: A Theme in the Aftermath of the Events of September 11th Part 1. The strength of the World Economy and the new crises Introduction: Nature of Global Crises 1. Case Study: Recovery from the aftermath of the ‘IT boom’ Collapse and the '9/11’ Shock 2. The Situation in Japan and the UK 3. The nature of costs post 9/11 Terrorist Attacks Part 2. Asia, the Recovery from the Currency Crisis Introduction: Is the Next Asian Currency Crisis Coming? 4. Currency Crisis in the Asia Pacific Region 5. The Asian Markets 6. Markets in the Pacific Part 3. Japan Recovering from the Bubble Burst Introduction: Was the ‘Lost Decade’ after the ‘Bubble’ Truly Lost? 7. The UK’s Policies Regarding Trade and Investment with Japan 8. The UK Government’s Perception of the Japanese economy 9. The Consequences of the Problems 10. UK success in trade with Japan 11. The Japanese economy headed for recovery Part 4. The Lessons and the Future Introduction: The Structural Flaws of Post-Cold War Globalism 12. Lessons to be Learnt 13. From now on

Intellectual Property Rights in Contemporary Capitalism Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy

Edited by Birgitte Andersen, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48346-9; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is a timely contribution to an important debate on the increased, changed or new scope of Intellectual Property Rights in the light of Contemporary Capitalism. How the expanded or pushed Intellectual Property Rights domain encourages an individual and corporate self-interest over community, and the consequences this has in the context of markets, competition, globalization, trade, corporate dominance is a central feature of this book. Focusing on evidence from sector studies as well as inter-disciplinary theoryperspectives, the book is relevant for policymakers, economists, business analysts, industrialists, managers, as well as researchers and students interested in IPR studies and related debates.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Birgitte Andersen 2. The Political Economy of Patent Policy Reform in the United States F.M. Scherer 3. Forgetting History is Not an Option: Intellectual Property, Public Policy and Economic Development in Context Christopher May and Susan Sell 4. The New Role and Status of IPRs in Contemporary Capitalism Benjamin Coriat 5. The Value of IPRs Christine Greenhalgh and Mark Rogers 6. The International Enclosure Movement Peter Yu 7. Information Society: Consequences of Expanding the Intellectual Property Domain Ed Steinmueller 8. Cultural Diversity in an Era of Corporate Dominance: A Clash of Rights Fiona Macmillan 9.

Global Brands and Corporate Dominance in Consumer Goods Teresa da Silva Lopes 10. The Discovery of Invention: Gene Patents and the Question of Patentability Johanna Gibson 11. Looking at Vuitton: Negotiating Value and Price of Counterfeit Merchandise Gard Hopsdal Hansen and Henrik Kloppenborg Moeller 12. The Impact of Free Downloading and File Sharing on Music CD and MP3 Pay-markets Birgitte Andersen and Marion Frenz 13. A Note on IPR Policy Making in the Era of Contemporary Capitalism Zeljka Kozul-Wright

The Political Economy of Integration Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy

Jeffrey W. Cason, Middlebury College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

118 HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 144pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77885-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book assesses South America’s most ambitious attempt at economic integration, Mercosur. It explains the main—and inherent— weaknesses of the integration effort, through explicit comparison with the European experience with integration. Jeffrey Cason argues that the three main reasons for Mercosur’s limited success are weak domestic political institutions in the member countries, vulnerability in the global political economy, and a serious imbalance in the economic and political weight of the member countries.

In addition to providing this overarching explanation for Mercosur’s limitations, the book tells the story of Mercosur’s genesis, development, and frustrations. This book provides both an explanatory framework for understanding Mercosur and a story. It considers how Mercosur emerged, why it was greeted with great enthusiasm (and huge trade growth), and how it hit stumbling blocks as it sought to be more than it was capable of being. The book also focuses on how and why developing countries are inherently limited in any economic integration project.

CONTENTS Introduction, Chapter 1: Understanding Integration: The European Model and a South American Case, Chapter 2: A Long-Standing Dream: Historical Experience With Integration In Latin America Chapter 3: The Launching Of Mercosur, Chapter 4: Mercosur’s Day In The Sun: Ambition Meets Its Match, Chapter 5: Mercosur in Slow-Motion Crisis, Chapter 6: The Future of Mercosur and the Challenges of Economic Integration in the Developing World.

The Role of 'Informal' Economies in the Post-Soviet World Routledge Studies in the Modern World Economy

Peter Rodgers, Aston Business School, UK, John Round, University of Birmingham, UK and Colin C. Williams, University of Sheffield, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56721-3; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book challenges the accepted notion that the transition from the command economy to market based systems is complete across the post-Soviet space. While it is noted that different political economies have developed in such states, such as Russia’s ‘managed democracy’, events such as Ukraine gaining ‘market economy status’ by the European Union and acceding to the World Trade Organisation in 2008 are taken as evidence that the reform period is over. Such thinking is based on numerous assumptions; specifically that economic transition has defined start and end points, that the formal economy now has primacy over other forms of economic practices and that national economic growth leads to the ‘trickle down’ of wealth to those marginalised by the transition process. Based on extensive ethnographic and quantitative research, conducted in Ukraine and Russia between 2004 - 2007, this book questions these assumptions by stating that the economies that operate across post-Soviet spaces are far from the textbook idea of a market economy. Through this the whole notion of ‘transition’ is problematised and the importance of informal economies to everyday life is demonstrated. Using case studies of various sectors, such as entrepreneurial behaviour and the higher education system, it is also shown how corruption has invaded almost all sectors of the post-Soviet every day.

CONTENTS Part I: Overview, 1. The collapse of the Soviet Union and the move towards the market, Part II: (Re)theorising Transition, 2.

Transition or Transformation?, 3. Which Way to the Market?, 4. The theoretical role of informal economies in transition economies, Part III: The lived experience of ‘transition’, 5. The scale of Russia and Ukraine’s Informal economies, 6. The everyday nature of corruption, 7. The relationships between formal and informal work, 8. The workplace: finding and keeping a job, 9. Getting an education, 10. Surviving in transition economies, Part IV: Can a market economy develop?, 11. The barriers to transition, 12.

Conclusions

A Contemporary Look at Organizational Justice Series in Organization and Management

Joel Brockner, Columbia University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £44.95 $59.95; 229x152 mm; 360pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-84872-832-5; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is for scholars with an interest in the burgeoning area of theory and research on organizational justice. The ideas it describes forge connections between the justice literature and other prominent bodies of knowledge in organizational and social psychology, including those pertaining to trust, social identity, attribution theory, regulatory focus theory and cross-cultural differences in people's beliefs and behaviors. Though intended primarily for researchers, this book is written in a very accessible way, so that informed practitioners will gain considerable value from it.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

119 CONTENTS 1. Introduction. 2. High Process Fairness Reduces the Effect of Outcome Favorability (Part A). 3. High Process Fairness Reduces the Effect of Outcome Favorability (Part B). 4. High Process Fairness Heightens the Effect of Outcome Favorability. 5. Accounting for Both Interaction Effects. 6. Casting the Process/Outcome Interaction Effects More Broadly. 7. Practical Applications. Appendix to Chapter 1. References.

Social Psychology and Organizations Series in Organization and Management

Edited by David De Cremer, Tilburg University, the Netherlands, J. Keith Murnighan, Northwestern University, USA and Rolf Van Dick, Goethe University Frankfurt, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £44.95 $69.95; 229x152 mm; 325pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-84872-856-1; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited volume by contributors from various countries and disciplines will bring together research that touches the interface of social psychology, IO psychology and organizational behavior Theories of individuals such as attribution theory, cognitive dissonance, psychological reactance and theories of attitude and persuasion can help explain individual behavior in organizations and guide our understanding of individual’s work motivation, and issues relating to performance and job evaluation.

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction D. De Cremer, R. Van Dick, J. K. Murnighan , On Social Beings and Organizational Animals: A Social Psychological Approach to Organizations. Part 2: Leadership, Power, and Social Influence A. D. Galinsky, D. Rus, J. Lammers , Power: A Central Force Governing Psychological, Social, and Organizational Life. D. De Cremer, T. R. Tyler, On Being the Leader and Acting Fairly: A Contingency Approach. N. J. Goldstein, R. B. Cialdini , Managing Normative Influences in Organizations. M. Frese , Entrepreneurial Actions: An Action Theory Approach. Part 3: Conflict, Cooperation and Decision Making R. M. Kramer , Responsive Leaders: Cognitive and Behavioral Reactions to Identity Threats. D. Moore, S. A. Swift , The Three Faces of Overconfidence in Organizations. S. Rispens, K. A. Jehn , Conflict in Workgroups: Constructive, Destructive, and Asymmetric Conflict. K. T. Dirks, D. De Cremer , The Repair of Trust: Insights from Organizational Behavior and Social Psychology. F. J. Flynn, Give and Take: Psychological Mindsets in Conflict. Part 4: Contemporary Issues K. W. Phillips, S. Y. Kim-Jun, So-Hyeon Shim , The Value of Diversity in Organization: A Social Psychological Perspective. K. Aquino, J. O’Reilly , Antisocial Behavior at Work: The Social Psychological Dynamics of Workplace Victimization and Revenge. C. K.W. De Dreu, B. A. Nijstad, M. Baas , Creativity in Individuals and Groups: Basic Principles with Practical Implications. S. A. Haslam, R. van Dick , A Social Identity Approach to Workplace Stress. M. M. Pillutla , When Good People Do Wrong: Morality, Social Identity and Ethical Behavior. K. Leung, M. W. Morris , Culture and Creativity: A Social Psychological Analysis. Contributor Bios.

Concise Encyclopedia of Insurance Terms Lawrence Silver and Robert E. Stevens, both of Southeastern Oklahoma State University, USA and Kenneth Clow, University of Louisiana, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-7890-3634-6; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85105-0; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The purpose of the book is to provide insurance practitioners, consumers, and students with definitions of common insurance terms in both the property/casualty and life/health insurance industries. The unique feature of the book is that many of the definitions contain detailed explanations of coverage provided by certain types of insurance and/or examples that illustrate how a particular coverage works. The book should be helpful to insurance agents and to new insurance agency/company personnel. It will also be helpful to consumers to use as a reference guide to better understand insurance products the consumer needs. Finally, it will be useful as a reference guide for students in business courses.

CONTENTS List of Acronyms. About the Authors. Foreword. Terms. Index.

The Connected Customer Edited by Stefan H. K. Wuyts, Marnik G. Dekimpe, Els Gijsbrechts and F.G.M.(Rik) Pieters, all of Tilburg University, the Netherlands

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

120 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £50.00 $69.95; 229x152 mm; 376pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-84872-837-0; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In today’s connected consumer environment, customers are better informed and harder to please, but they also leave a more visible evidence trail in the form of improved databases and customer information. Consumers are increasingly interconnected through various sorts of social networks, a trend that is facilitated by recent advances in electronic media and telecommunication. Initiatives on the internet, for example, have created ample opportunity for consumers to connect with other consumers through social networking sites (MySpace, Facebook, Cyworld) and information sharing sites (YouTube, MyStarbucksIdea.com, and others). The contributors to this book are internationally renowned scholars who share their thoughts on the impact of the phenomenon of connectivity on marketing thought and marketing practices. This book will guide marketers and marketing/consumer scholars in dealing with the new reality of consumer and business marketing in today’s technological world.

CONTENTS Preface. Introduction. Part 1. Connectivity and the New Reality of Markets C. Van den Bulte, Opportunities and Challenges in Studying Customer Networks. C.M. Henderson, R.W. Palmatier , Understanding the Relational Ecosystem in a Connected World. S. Wuyts , Connectivity, Control, and Constraint in Business Markets. Part 2. Leveraging Vertical Connectivity with Channel Partners and Brands N. Camacho, V. Landsman, S. Stremersch , The Connected Patient. B. Shiv , Is Mr. Spock a Good Candidate for Being a Connected Customer? The Role of Emotion in Decision Making. A. Rindfleisch, N. Wong, J.E. Burroughs , God and Mammon: The Influence of Religiosity on Brand Connections. R. Srivastava, T. Wiesel , Brand Platforms as Strategic Investments: Leveraging Customer Connections to Manage Profitability, Growth and Risk. Part 3. Leveraging Horizontal Connectivity Among Customers R. Burt , The Shadow of Other People: Socialization and Social Comparison in Marketing. R. van der Lans, G. Verbruggen , Viral Marketing: What is It and What are the Components of Viral Success? J. Goldenberg, S. Han, D.R. Lehmann , Social Connectivity, Opinion Leadership and Diffusion. A. Bonfrer , The Effect of Negative Word of Mouth in Social Networks.

Handbook of Employee Selection Edited by James L. Farr, Pennsylvania State University, USA and Nancy T. Tippins, Valtera Corporation, South Carolina, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £49.95 $99.00; 234x156 mm; 1,032pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-8058-6437-3; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Handbook of Employee Selection summarizes the state of science and practice in the field of employee selection. Chapters in this book cover issues associated with measurement such as validity and reliability as well as practical concerns around the development of appropriate selection procedures and implementation of selection programs. Several chapters discuss the measurement of various constructs commonly used as predictors, and other chapters confront criterion measures that are used in test validation. Ethical and legal concerns are dealt with in another set of chapters and highlight the concerns of the employer as well as the test taker and the psychologist responsible for the testing program. Final sections of the book include chapters that focus on testing for certain types of jobs (e.g., blue collar jobs, supervisory jobs) and describe important milestones in the development of selection programs.

CONTENTS J.L. Farr, N.T. Tippins, Employee Selection in Work Organizations: Introduction and Overview. Part 1. Foundations of Psychological Measurement and Evaluation Applied to Employee Selec tion. D.J. Putka, P.R. Sackett, Reliability and Validity. N. Schmitt, J. Arnold, L. Nieminen, Validation Strategies for Primary Studies. K. Pearlman, J. Sanchez , Work Analysis. J.F. Kehoe, K.R. Murphy , Making Decisions about Selection Procedures: Validity, Validation, and Generalizability. Part 2. Implementation and Management of Employee Selection Systems in Work Organizations. A.M. Ryan, T. Delany , Attracting Job Candidates to Organizations. J.W. Johnson, F.L. Oswald, Test Administration and the Use of Test Scores. D. Reynolds, D. Dickter , Technology and Employee Selection. R.E. Ployhart, J.A. Weekley , Strategy, Selection and Sustained Competitive Advantage. J.F. Kehoe, S.T. Mol, N. Anderson, Managing Sustainable Selection Programs. W.F. Cascio, L. Fogli , The Business Value of Employee Selection. Part 3.

Predictor Constructs in Employee Selection. Part 3A. Categories of Individual Difference Constructs . D.S. Ones, S. Dilchert, C. Viswesvaran, J.F. Salgado , Cognitive Abilities. D.L. Gebhardt, T.A. Baker , Physical Performance Tests. L. Hough, S. Dilcher t, Personality. D. Chan , Values, Styles, and Motivational Constructs. F. Lievens, D. Chan, Practical Intelligence, Emotional Intelligence, and Social Intelligence. Part 3B. Assessing Work-Related Predictor Constructs . N. Tippins, J. Papinchock, E. Solberg , Decisions in Developing and Selecting Assessment Tools. R.S. Wunder, L.L. Thomas, Z. Luo , Scoring and Administering Assessments. M.J. Zickar, J.M. Cortina, N.T. Carter , Evaluation of Measures: Sources of Error, Sufficiency, and Contamination. M. London, L.A. McFarland , Assessment Feedback. Part 4. Criterion Constructs in Employee Selection. W.C. Borman, R.H. Bryant, J. Dorio , The Measurement of Task Performance as Criteria in Selection Research. D. Dorsey, J.M. Cortina, J. Luchman , Adaptive and Citizenship-Related Behaviors at Work. M. Rotundo, P.E. Spector , Counterproductive Work Behavior and Withdrawal. E.D. Pulakos, R.S. O’Leary , Defining and Measuring Results of Workplace Behavior. L.E. Tetrick, P.L. Perrewe, M. Griffin , Employee WorkRelated Health, Stress, and Safety. J.N. Cleveland, A.J. Colella , WhoDdefines Performance, Contribution, and Value? Part 5. Legal and Ethical Issues in Employee Selection . J. Lefkowitz, R.L. Lowman , Ethics of Employee Selection. R. Jeanneret, S. Zedeck, Professional Guidelines/Standards. F.J. Landy, A. Gutman, J.L. Outtz, A Sampler of Legal Principles in Employment Selection. P.R. Sackett, W. Shen, B. Myors, Perspectives from Twenty-Two Countries on the Legal Environment for Selection. Part 6. Employee

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

121 Selection in Specific Organizational Contexts . W.S. Sellman, D.H. Born, W.J. Strickland, J.J. Ross , Selection and Classification in the U.S. Military. R. Jacobs, D. Denning , Public Sector Employment. S.C. Erker, C.J. Cosentino, K.B. Tamanini , Selection Methods and Desired Outcomes: Integrating Assessment Content and Technology to Improve Entry- and Mid-Level Leadership Performance.

W.J. Campbell, R. A. Ramos , Blue-collar selection in private sector organizations. J. Hausknecht, A. Langevin, Selection for Service and Sales Jobs. P. Caligiuri, K.B. Paul , Selection in Multinational Organizations. S. Mohammed, J. Cannon-Bowers, S.C. Foo , Selection for Team Membership: A Contingency and Multilevel Perspective. G. Thornton, G. Hollenbeck, S. Johnson , Leadership and Executive Selection/High Potentials. Part 7. Milestones in Employee Selection. A. Howard , The Management Progress Study and Its Legacy for Selection. D. Knapp, J.P. Campbell, A.N. Peterson, C. Sager , The Dictionary of Occupational Titles and the Occupational Information Network. L.R. James, H.H. McIntyre , Situational Specificity and Validity Generalization. J.F. Salgado, U. Hulsheger, N. Anderson , European Milestones in Employee Selection. Epilogue: R.M. Guion, Employee Selection: Contemporary Status and Musings about Its Future.

Leading Under Pressure Erika H. James, University of Virginia, Charlottesville, USA and Lynn Perry Wooten, University of Michigan, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £39.95 $59.95; 229x152 mm; 246pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-84169-790-1; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The global workforce is under tremendous pressure. At a macro level, there is the pressure of worldwide competition and the need to operate across the globe. At the micro level, there is pressure of individuals or departments to produce more with increasingly fewer resources. Pressure is at once the precipitator and the consequence of crisis. Leaders who can flourish under pressure will be the ones to guide us through these and future turbulent times.

CONTENTS Preface. Part 1: The Modern Face of Leadership under Pressure 1. Introduction: Why Crisis Leadership Matters. 2. A Primer on Crises and Crisis Management. Part 2: Becoming a Crsis Leader - Invidividual Capabilities 3. Critical Leadership Competencies Before, During, and After a Crisis. 4. Decision Making for the Crisis Leader. 5. Leading a Crisis Team. Part 3: Organizational Capabilities 6.

Organizational Trust Amidst Crisis. 7. Organizational Learning amid Crisis. 8. Crises and the Global Environment. Part 4: From Surviving to Thriving Under Pressure 9. Crises as Sources of Opportunity and Change. References.

Managerial Ethics Edited by Marshall Schminke, University of Central Florida, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £27.50 $49.95; 229x152 mm; 340pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-84872-833-2; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book will combine management theory with ethical theory on a chapter by chapter, topic by topic basis. The volume bridges the theoretical, empirical and practical gap between management and ethics. It will be of interest to a cross disciplinary group of students, researchers and managers in business, management, organizational behavior, IO psychology and business ethics.

CONTENTS Preface. M. Schminke, M. Priesemuth, Management and Ethics: Revisiting Distant Neighbors. Section 1: Ethics from the Top Down .

R. Cropanzano, F. O. Walumbwa, Moral Leadership: A Short Primer on Competing Perspectives. R. Chun, Organizational Virtue, CSR, and Performance. D. Rupp, C. A. Williams, R. V. Aguilera, Increasing Corporate Social Responsibility Through Stakeholder Value Internalization (and the Catalyzing Effect of New Governance): An Application of Organizational Justice, Self-Determination, and Social Influence Theories. M. S. Mitchell, N. F. Palmer, The Managerial Relevance of Ethical Efficacy. Section 2: Unethical Behavior: Causes, Consequences, and Comebacks. D. De Cremer, On the Psychology of Preventing and Dealing with Ethical Failures: A Behavioral Ethics Approach. E. E. Umphress, J. T. Campbell, J. B. Bingham, Paved with Good Intentions: Unethical Behavior Conducted to Benefit the Organization, Coworkers, and Customers. R. L. Hess, Failures, Losses, and Fairness: The Customer's Perspective. L. K. Treviño, G. R. Weaver, Advances in Research on Punishment in Organizations: Descriptive and Normative Perspectives. Section 3: New Theoretical Perspectives . R. Folger, R. Cropanzano, Social Hierarchies and the Evolution of Moral Emotions. M. E. Price, Free Riders as a Blind Spot of Equity Theory: An Evolutionary Correction. D. M. Mayer, From Proscriptions to Prescriptions: A Call for Including Prosocial Behavior in Behavioral Ethics. M. Schminke, A. Vestal, J. Caldwell, A Review and Assessment of Ethical Decision Making Models: Is a Garbage Can Approach the Answer?

The Value Creating Board Edited by Morten Huse, Norwegian School of Management, Oslo

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

122 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £22.50 $41.95; 234x156 mm; 536pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57849-3; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book presents boards of directors from a strategic and entrepreneurial management perspective. Boards of directors are receiving increased interest in the business world as well as among academic audiences however few contributions integrate corporate governance and organizational behavior. In this book a research stream about value-creating boards is introduced. Boards of directors have during the recent decades mostly been studied within a framework of corporate governance where the interests of external investors are emphasized. This book aims to go further and explore actual board behavior. The framework and the contributions in the book include concepts such as: board leadership and structure, boardroom decision-making, board task performance corporate entrepreneurship and innovation boards in small and medium-sized firms board diversity and women directors The book also presents the results of a research agenda about value-creating boards which was conducted throughout various European countries.

CONTENTS Part 1. Introduction: The Value Creating Board and Behavioural Perspectives 1. The Value Creating Board and Behavioural Perspectives Morten Huse 2. Context, Behaviour and Evolution: Challenges in Research on Boards and Governance Jonas Gabrielsson and Morten Huse 3. Accountability and Creating Accountability: A Framework for Exploring Behavioural Perspectives of Corporate Governance Morten Huse Part 2. Exploring Issues and Theories: The Classics – Developing a Field 4. Building Blocks in Understanding Behavioural Perspectives on Boards: Developing a Research Stream Morten Huse 5. The President and the Board of Directors Miles L Mace 6. The Separation of Ownership and Control Eugene Fama and Michael Jensen 7. Boards of Directors and Corporate Financial Performance: A Review and Research Agenda Shaker Zahra and John A Pearce 8. On Studying Managerial Elites Andrew Pettigrew 9. Cognition and Corporate Governance: Understanding Boards of Directors as Strategic Decision-Making Groups Daniel Forbes and Frances Milliken Part 3. Exploring Methods and Concepts 10. Exploring Methods and Concepts in Studies of Boards Processes Morten Huse 11. Relational Norms as a Supplement to Neo-classical Understanding of Directorates Morten Huse 12. Stakeholder Management and the Avoidance of Corporate Control Morten Huse and Dorthe Eide 13. Researching the Dynamics of Board – Stakeholder Relations Morten Huse 14. Stakeholders’ Expectations of Board Roles: The Case of Subsidiary Boards Morten Huse and Violina Rindova 15. Corporate Boards as Assets for Operating in the New Europe: The Value of Process-oriented Boardroom Dynamics Morten Huse, Alessandro Minichilli and Margrethe Schøning 16. Gender Related Boardroom Dynamics Morten Huse and Anne Grethe Solberg Part 4. Exploring Relationships: Results from ‘The Value Creating Board’ Surveys 17. The ‘Value Creating Board’-Surveys: A Benchmark Morten Huse 18. What Makes Boards in Small Firms Active? Mattias Nordqvist and Alessandro Minichilli 19. How Actual Board Task Performance Influences Value Creating Boards in Dutch SMEs Jeroen van den Heuvel and Anita van Gils 20. The Board’s Control Tasks in Family Firms: Theoretical Perspectives and Exploratory Evidence Yannick Bammens and Wim Voordeckers 21. Board Activity in Large Italian Companies: A Behavioural Perspective Alessandro Minichilli, Alessandro Zattoni and Fabio Zona 22. Women Directors, Board Working Style and Board Task Performance Sabina Nielsen 23. Board Task Performance in Small Firms: The Role of Incentives and Board Processes Luca Gnan and Alessandro Zattoni 24. Trust and Board Task Performance Hans van Ees, Gerwin van der Laan and Theo Postma 25. Consequences of Board Power Pingying Zhang Wenstøp 26. Boards of Directors and Firm Innovation: An Empirical Analysis on Large Italian Companies Fabio Zona, Alessandro Minichilli and Alessandro Zattoni 27. Board Control and Innovation: An Empirical Study of Small Technology Based Firms Jonas Gabrielsson and Diamanto Politis Part 5. The Value Creating Board: Implications for Practice 28. How Boards Contribute to Value Creation Morten Huse, Jonas Gabrielsson and Alessandro Minichilli

Education, Professionalism and the Quest for Accountability Routledge International Studies in the Philosophy of Education

Jane Green PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87925-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book focuses on education and its relation to professional accountability as viewed from two different, but not unrelated, perspectives. First, the book is about the work of professionals in schools and colleges (teachers, head teachers, leaders, principals, directors and educational managers, etc.) and the detrimental effects which our present system of accountability—and the managerialism which this system creates—have had on education, its practice, its organization, its conduct and its content. It is also about the professional education (the occupational/professional formation and development) of practitioners in communities other than educational ones and how they, too, contend with the effects of this system on their practices. These different perspectives represent two sides of the same problem: that whatever one’s métier—whether a teacher, nurse, social worker, community officer, librarian, civil servant, etc.—all who now work in institutions designed to serve the public are expected to reorganize their thoughts and practice in accordance with a "performance" management model of accountability which encourages a rigid bureaucracy, one which translates regulation and monitoring procedures, guidelines and advice into inflexible and obligatory compliance. A careful scrutiny of the underlying rationale of this "managerial" model shows how and why it may be expected, paradoxically, to make practices less accountable—and, in the case of education, less educative.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

123 Part I: Starting Points: Ideas, Ideals and Ideologies Introduction Chapter 1: From Concern to Doubt, from Doubt to Critique Chapter 2: Ideology and Ideologies: Elective Affinities Chapter 3: The Lure of the Explicit: the Ideal of Transparency Part II: Practical Judgement Chapter 4: Responsibility and Accountability Chapter 5: Accountability, Answerability and the Virtue of Responsibleness Chapter 6: Professional Formation Part III: End-points: Ideas, Ideals and Ideologies Chapter 7: Should Professional Educators Attempt to Codify Practical Knowledge? Chapter 8: Return of the Lure of the Explicit: Making the Implicit Explicit Chapter 9: Public Trust and Accountability: What Public? Whose Trust? Which Accountability? Conclusion

Children’s Writing and Drawing as Design Routledge Research in Education

Diane Mavers, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-96155-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores the variety of means by which children make meaning graphically in response to different social contexts. Mavers discusses children’s resourcefulness in their selection, shaping and combination of resources in paper-based and digital mediums and in educational and leisure-related contexts. The recognition that meanings are made with the resources of different modes opens up new possibilities for understanding representation and communication and raises questions about what the resources of different modes are and how they are interrelated. Building upon key concepts developed in recent empirical studies in and theorization of multimodality from a social semiotic perspective, this book offers ways of understanding children’s writing and drawing – both discretely and in combination – as design.

Citizenship, Education and Social Conflict Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Hanan Alexander, Halleli Pinson, both of Haifa University, Israel and Yossi Yonah, Ben Gurion University, Israel PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99190-2; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume provides new perspectives into the challenges of citizenship education in the age of globalization and in the context of multicultural and conflict-ridden societies. The collection calls us to rethink the accepted liberal and national discourses that have long dominated the conceptualization and practice of citizenship and citizenship education in light of social conflict, globalization, terrorism, and the spread of an extreme form of capitalism. The contributors of the volume identify the main challenges to the role of citizenship education in the context of globalization, conflicts and the changes to the institution of citizenship they entail and critically examine the ways in which schools and education systems currently address – and may be able to improve – the role of citizenship education in conflict-ridden and multicultural contexts.

CONTENTS Part I: Citizenship, Education and Globalization and its discontents Chapter 1: The Emergence of Citizenship as a Political Problem in an Era of Globalization - Seyla Benhabib Chapter 2: Education, Power and the State: Dilemmas of Citizenship in Multicultural Societies - Carlos Torres Chapter 3: The Gender Politics of Citizenship Education: Reproduction, Interruption or Transformation? Madeleine Arnot Chapter 4: Teaching about Conflict through Citizenship Education - Lynn Davies Part II: Emerging tension in citizenship education: Rights, religion and radicalism Chapter 5: Parents Rights, the Political State and the Prerequisites of Tolerance Walter Feinberg Chapter 6: Reintegration: Citizenship, Education and Religion in the New Age - Philip Wexler Chapter 7: Critical Pedagogy Reloaded: Dispatches from the Imperial Heartland - Peter McLaren and Juha Suoranta Part III: Citizenship and Inclusion in a Democratic and Jewish state. Chapter 8: Reconsidering Zionism: Open Society, Critical Theory, and the Education of Citizens Hanan Alexander Chapter 9: Citizenship Education: Between Inclusion and Exclusion - Yossi Yonna Chapter 10: Citizenship Education for Israeli Palestinians: Dilemmas and Visions – Ayman Agbaria Chapter 11: The Neo Liberal Revolution in Israel - Yossi Dahan Part IV: Citizenship Education and Schooling in Israel Chapter 12: On Competing Models of Nationalism in Education: An analysis of Ceremonies in Schools - Edna Lomskey-Feder Chapter 13: One Civic Curriculum, Different Civic Visions - Halleli Pinson Chapter 14: The Consolidation of Civic Identity in Israeli Religious Schooling - Zehavit Gross Epilogue

Collaboration in Education Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Judith J. Slater, Florida International University, USA and Ruth Ravid, National-Louis University, USA

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

124 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 232pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80621-3; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85470-9; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Collaboration in Education establishes a needed framework for school/university collaborations that will be critical for others wishing to reproduce and participate in these partnerships. The contributors explore the elements necessary for sustainable collaboration in order to provide a frame of reference for others doing this work. This volume will help readers to ask the correct questions in thinking through school/university collaboration, such as: Does this collaboration make a true change in the way each parent organization operates in the future? Does it meet the needs of a more complex and changing work environment for universities and schools? Does it impact beyond the participant institutions and inform the field by producing knowledge of use to others? This volume also includes extensive analyses of ongoing school/university projects in the United States, Asia and Europe.

CONTENTS Introduction: The Meme of Collaboration Judith J. Slater Section I: Professional Development Schools 1. When a Look Back Can Be a Step Forward: An Analysis of Two PDS Partnerships for Education Change and Improvement Linda A. Catelli 2. Growing a MultiSite Professional Development School John E. Henning, Becky Wilson Hawbaker, Debra S. Lee and Cynthia F. McDonald Section II: Consultation 3. Schools of Ambition: Bridging Professional and Institutional Boundaries Moira Hulme, Ian Menter, Deirdre Kelly and Sheelagh Rusby 4. Ten School Districts and One University: A Collaborative Consultation Mary Phillips Manke and Rachael Marrier 5. Elementary Public School and University Partnership: Promoting and Analyzing Professional Development Processes of School Teachers Maria da Graça Nicoletti Mizukami, Aline Maria de Medeiros Rodrigues Reali and Regina Maria Simões Puccinelli Tancredi Section III: One-to-One Collaboration 6. Policy Development and Sustainability: How a Rural County Maximized Resources through Collaboration and Managed Change David M. Callejo Pérez, Sebastián R. Díaz and Anonymous 7. School-University Collaboration as Mutual Professional Development Efrat Sara Efron, Maja Miskovic and Ruth Ravid 8. A Public/Private Partnership in a Diverse Community Maria Pacino Section IV: Multiple Configurations 9. Reflections on a Cross University-Urban School Partnership: The Critical Role of Humanizing the Process Babette Benken and Nancy Brown 10. A System’s Perspective for Professional Development in Science and Mathematics Education: The Texas Regional Collaboratives James P. Barufaldi and Linda L.G. Brown 11. Conducting Research that Practitioners Think is Relevant: Metropolitan Educational Research Consortium (MERC) R. Martin Reardon and James McMillan 12. A Miracle in Process: What it Takes to Make an Educational Partnership a True Collaboration Kathleen Shinners 13. Collaboration and Equitable Reform in Australian Schools: Beyond the Rhetoric Joanne Deppeler and David Huggins 14. Benefits, Challenges, and Lessons of Longitudinal Research Collaborations Elizabeth A. Sloat, Joan F. Beswick and J. Douglas Willms Section V: Postsecondary 15. Reciprocity in Collaboration: Academy for Teacher Excellence’s Partnerships Belinda Bustos Flores and Lorena Claeys 16. Reconceptualizing Leadership and Power: The Collaborative Experiences of Women Educational Leaders Debra Nakama and Joanne Cooper 17. A CLASSIC © Approach to Collaboration: Documenting a Multi-State University and Multi-School District Partnership Janet Penner-Williams, Della Perez, Diana Gonzales Worthen, Socorro Herrera and Kevin Murry Section VI: Technology Projects 18. School-University Collaboration for Technology Integration: Resistance, Risk-Taking, and Resilience Cathy Risberg and Arlene Borthwick Section VII: Interagency Collaboration 19. Project FIRST: Families, Intercollegiate Collaboration, and Routes to Studying Teaching Mary D. Burbank and Rosemarie Hunter 20. Urban Teacher Residencies: Collaborating to Reconceptualize Urban Teacher Preparation Wendy Gardiner and Carrie Kamm 21. Sharing Power in an Interagency Collaboration Jack Leonard and Lisa Gonsalves 22. Collaborating for Labor Consciousness: The Education & Labor Collaborative Adrienne Andi Sosin, Leigh David Benin, Rob Linné and Joel I. Sosinsky Conclusion

Education and Sustainability Routledge Research in Education

Seonaigh MacPherson, British Columbia Institute of Technology, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88215-6; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book critically examines the impact of migration, education, development, and the spread of English on global bio-linguistic and cultural diversity. Derived from findings from a comparative eco-linguistic study of intergenerational language, culture, and education change in the Tibetan Diaspora, the book extends its analysis to consider the plight of other peoples who find themselves straddling the Indigenous-Minority-Diaspora divide. MacPherson explores the overlapping and distinctive sustainability challenges facing indigenous and minority communities when they are connected by and within diasporas, and seeks to adequately explain the discontinuities and disjunctures between their educational struggles and achievement levels.

Education and Culture Routledge Research in Education

Jocey Quinn, London Metropolitan University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99405-7; March 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

125 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Quinn presents a radical new perspective on the interrelationships between education and culture. Rather than viewing education in isolation from major cultural debates, she demonstrates how culture shapes education and education shapes culture. Cultural perspectives and rich empirical data from a wide range of research with learners in university, voluntary, community and work settings are used to provide a bridge between cultural theory and the embodied worlds of learners. Drawing vivid links with other cultural evidence from literature and popular culture, this book convincingly shows how anti-realist theory can produce positive material changes both in education and society.

The Gates Foundation and the Future of US “Public” Schools Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Philip Kovacs, University of Alabama in Huntsville, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87334-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There has been much public praise for the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation’s efforts to reform public education. However, few scholars have engaged substantively and critically with the organization’s work. While the Gates Foundation is the single largest supporter by far of "choice" initiatives particularly with regard to charter school formation, it is pushing public school privatization through a wide array of initiatives and in conjunction with a number of other foundations. What are the implications for a public system as control over educational policy and priority is concentrated under one of the richest people on the planet in ways that foster de-unionization and teacher de-skilling while homogenizing school models and curriculum? The Gates Foundation and the Future of U.S. "Public" Schools addresses this crucial, unanswered question while investigating the relationships between the Gates Foundation and other think tanks, government, and corporate institutions.

Gender Inclusive Engineering Education Routledge Research in Education

Julie Mills, University of South Australia, Mary Ayre, University of Glamorgan, UK and Judith Gill, University of South Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 210pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80588-9; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85195-1; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Women continue to comprise a small minority of students in engineering education and subsequent employment, despite the numerous initiatives over the past 25 years to attract and retain more women in engineering. This book demonstrates the ways in which traditional engineering education has not attracted, supported or retained female students and identifies the issues needing to be addressed in changing engineering education to become more gender inclusive. This innovative and much-needed work also addresses how faculty can incorporate inclusive curriculum within their courses and programs, and provides a range of exemplars of good practice in gender inclusive engineering education that will be immediately useful to faculty who teach engineering students.

CONTENTS Foreword by Emeritus Professor Robin King Acknowledgments 1. Introduction: Why We Need Gender Inclusive Engineering Education 2. Women in Engineering: The Current Position 3. Attracting Women to Enter and Succeed in Engineering Study 4.

Learning, Curriculum and Gender: Theoretical Contexts 5. Design and Implementation Strategies for Gender Inclusive Engineering Curriculum 6. Gender Inclusive Engineering Courses 7. Implementing and Embedding Gender Inclusive Engineering Education 8. In Conclusion: A Look to the Future Appendix A: Accreditation Criteria and Attributes of Engineering Graduates Appendix B: Glossary of Terms Notes Bibliography Index

Globalization, the Nation-State and the Citizen Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Alan Reid and Judith Gill, both of University of South Australia and Alan Spears, University of New Brunswick, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 252pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87223-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85511-9; February 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

126 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The past decade has seen an explosion of interest in civics and citizenship education. There have been unprecedented developments in citizenship education taking place in schools, adult education centers, or in the less formally structured spaces of media images and commentary around the world. This book provides an overview of the development of civics and citizenship education policy across a range of nation states. The contributors, all widely respected scholars in the field of civics and citizenship education, provide a thorough understanding of the different ways in which citizenship has been taken up by educators, governments and the wider public.

Citizenship is never a single given, unproblematic concept, but rather its meanings have to be worked through and developed in terms of the particularities of socio-political location and history. This volume promotes a wider and more grounded understanding of the ways in which citizenship education is enacted across different nation states in order to develop education for active and participatory citizenry in both local and global contexts.

CONTENTS Section A: Introduction 1. The Forming of Citizens in a Globalising World Alan Reid, Judith Gill and Alan Sears Section B: Case Studies 2. In Whose Interest? Australian Schooling and the Changing Contexts of Citizenship Alan Reid and Judith Gill 3. Education, Citizenship and the Construction of a New Democracy in Brazil Tristan McCowan and Cleonice Puggian 4. South African PostApartheid Realities and Citizenship Education Kogila Moodley 5. Citizenship Education in Pakistan: Changing Policies and Practices in Changing Social-Political Contexts Bernadette Dean 6. The Dilemmas of Singapore’s National Education in the Global Society Mark Baildon and Jasmine B-Y Sim 7. State and Civil Society Embattled in Colonialism, Capitalism and Nationalism: Civic Education and its Politics in Hong Kong Thomas Kwan-choi Tse 8. England: Searching for Citizenship Ian Davies 9. Perceptions of the Past and Education of Future Citizens in Contemporary Russia Nelli Piattoeva 10. ‘Common-sense Citizenship’, ‘Citizenship Tourism’ and Citizenship Education in an Era of Globalisation: The Case of Ireland during the Celtic Tiger Era Audrey Bryan 11. A Paradigm Shift in the Political Culture and in Educating for Citizenship? The Case of the United States of America Thomas J. Scott and John Cogan 12. The State and the Citizen in Mexican Civic Education: An Evolving Story Bradley Levinson 13. Possibilities and Problems: Citizenship Education in a Multinational State: The Case of Canada Alan Sears Section C: Reflections and Analysis 14.

Oppositions and Possibilities Walter Parker 15. Citizenship and the Nation-State: Affinity, Identity and Belonging Audrey Osler 16.

Neo-Statism and Post-Globalisation as Contexts for New Times Kerry Kennedy 17. Politics, Citizenship Education Policy in Twelve Countries, and Cosmopolitanism: A Commentary Yvonne Hébert

Inclusive Education in the Middle East Routledge Research in Education

Eman Gaad, The British University in Dubai, United Arab Emirates PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 133pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99881-9; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84521-9; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The potential of adopting inclusive education to support learning for all is an international phenomenon that is finding its way to the Middle East and the Arabian region. Eman Gaad examines the current status of inclusive education in Arabia and the Middle East through an assessment of the latest international, regional, and local research into inclusive education. With a focus on the more complex areas of related cultural practice and attitudes towards inclusive education in this dynamic and fast-changing part of the world, Gaad offers a research-based analysis of the current educational status of the Arabian Gulf and some Middle Eastern countries that adopted inclusive practice in education, and others that are yet to follow. This book will be of great interest to students, academics, teachers, and therapists in the field of comparative and inclusive education as well as those with an interest in policies of education in the dynamic and culturally distinguished Middle Eastern Arabian region.

CONTENTS 1. Education of Learners with Special Needs in the Gulf and the Middle East: A Historical Perspective 2. Middle Eastern and Gulf Countries and the Quest for Inclusion: Current Status and Learned Lessons 3. Inclusion in the UAE: Theory, Culture and Practice 4.

Inclusive Education and Cultural Challenges in the Arabian Gulf and the Middle East 5. Discussion

Intercultural and Multicultural Education Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Carl A. Grant, University of Wisconsin-Madison, USA and Agostino Portera, University of Verona, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 385pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87674-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84858-6; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION By addressing intercultural and multicultural education in a global context, this volume brings together the dynamic discussions and lively debate of intercultural and multicultural education taking place across the world. Not content with discussion of theory or practice at the expense of the other, this collection of essays embodies dialogical praxis by weaving together a variety of

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

127 epistemologies, ideologies, historical circumstances, pedagogies, policy approaches, curricula, and personal narratives. Contributors take readers to the countries, schools, and nongovernmental agencies where intercultural education and multicultural education, either collectively or singularly, are active (often central) concepts or practices in the daily educational undertaking and discourse of society.

Readers are also informed about how intercultural education and/or multicultural education within a country came to be and will learn about the debates over intercultural education and/or multicultural education at both the government and local level.

CONTENTS Preface Carl A. Grant and Agostina Portera Acknowledgments Introduction 1. A Global Invitation: Toward the Expansion of Dialogue, Reflection, and Creative Engagement on Intercultural and Multicultural Education Carl A. Grant and Stefan Brueck 2.

Intercultural and Multicultural Education: Epistemological and Semantic Aspects Agostino Portera Intercultural Education 3. The Intercultural Perspective and its Development through Cooperation with the Council of Europe Micheline Rey-von Allmen 4.

Comments on Intercultural Education in German Guidelines and Curricula Cristina Allemann-Ghionda 5. Intercultural Education in Post-Communist Countries Krystyna M. Bleszynska 6. Cross-Cultural Education in Greece: History and Prospects Soula Mitakidou 7.

Intercultural Education: The Theory Deficit and the World Crisis David Coulby 8. Intercultural Education in Japan: Foreign Children and Their Education Maki Shibuya 9. Becoming American: Intercultural Education and European Immigrants Cherry A. McGee Banks 10. Philosophical and Historical Foundations of Intercultural Education in Mexico Fernanda Pineda and Hilary Landorf Multicultural Education 11. The Development of Multicultural Education in Taiwan: Overview and Reflection Meihui Liu and TzuBin Lin 12. Ethnicity and the State of Multiculturalism in the Malaysian Education System Hazri Jamil and Hairul Nizam Ismail 13.

Multicultural Education in a Color-blind Society Carl E. James 14. Multiculturalism in South Africa: In the Shadow of the Rainbow Dennis Francis and Crispin Hemson 15. Cultural Transformation of Educational Discourse in China: Perspectives of Multiculturalism/Interculturalism Zongjie Wu and Chunyan Han 16. The Politics of Inclusion and the Search for the "Other": The International Education Policies and the Politics of "Difference" in Pakistan Ayesha Khurshid Intercultural and Multicultural Education 17. Multiculturalism in the Nordic Countries Johanna Lasonen 18. Multicultural and Intercultural Education in Spain Teresa Aguado and Beatriz Malik 19. Citizenship and Intercultural Education in an International and Comparative Context Jagdish S. Gundara 20. Moving from Multicultural to Intercultural Education in Australian Higher Education Valerie A. Clifford 21.

Interculturalism, Multiculturalism, and Diversity as Social and Educational Policies in Chile, 1990-2008 Carmen Montecinos and Guillermo Williamson Contributors. Index.

Leadership, Accountability, and Culture Routledge Research in Education

Giovanna Barzanò, Ministry of Education, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87610-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Accountability, as a set of formal and informal practices making schools answerable to various constituencies and stakeholders, is a crucial issue for principals all over the world. It is the object of an intensive debate both in the contexts where it has a stronger tradition, as well as in the ones where it is progressively gaining more space. This book examines the cultural aspects that inform the conceptualisations and the perceptions of educational accountability in different societal contexts and the influences they have on the role of school leaders. On the basis of a comparison of the data collected through the analysis of policy documents and in-depth interviews with key informants in four different educational systems throughout the world, Barzanò presents a picture of the ways accountability mechanisms vary and are made sense of in the frameworks of different cultural and societal traditions, both at the levels of policy and practice.

Picturebooks and Pedagogy Routledge Research in Education

Joanna Haynes, University of Plymouth, UK and Karin Murris, University of the Witwatersrand, South Africa PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88080-0; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Contemporary picturebooks open up spaces for philosophical dialogues between people of all ages. As works of art, picturebooks offer unique opportunities to explore ideas and to create meaning collaboratively. This book considers censorship of certain wellknown picturebooks, challenging the assumptions on which this censorship is based. Through a lively exploration of children’s responses to these same picturebooks the authors paint a way of working philosophically based on respectful listening and creative and authentic interactions, rather than scripted lessons. This dialogical process challenges much current practice in education. The authors propose that a courageous and critical practice of listening is central to the facilitation of mutually educative dialogue. This book will be of interest to scholars and students of education studies, philosophy of education, literacy teaching and learning, children’s literature, childhood and pedagogy.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

128

Realizing the Rights of Children Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Anne Smith, University of Otago, New Zealand and Joan Durrant, University of Manitoba, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87920-0; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book describes the unfolding of a global phenomenon: the legal prohibition of physical punishment of children. Until 30 years ago, this near-universal practice was considered appropriate, necessary and a parental right. But a paradigm shift in conceptions of childhood has led to a global movement to redefine it as violence and as a violation of children’s rights. Today, many countries have prohibited it in all settings, including the home. This remarkable shift reflects profound cultural changes in thinking about children and their development, parent-child relationships, and the role of the state in family life. It has involved actors in many sectors, including academia, government, non-governmental organizations and children themselves. Documenting the stories of countries that have either prohibited corporal punishment of children or who are moving in that direction, this volume will serve as a sourcebook for scholars and advocates around the world who are interested in the many dimensions of physical punishment and its elimination.

Systemization in Foreign Language Teaching Routledge Research in Education

Wilfried Decoo, Brigham Young University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 415pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-36193-4; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-01224-6; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Foreign language learning is a progressive endeavor. Whatever the method, the learner should advance from one point to another, constantly improving. Growing proficiency entails growing language content. Content is complex, displaying many dimensions.

Syllabus designers, textbook authors, and teachers often struggle with the monitoring of content. Computer-assisted systemization helps to handle it in a manageable framework. Besides inventorying content, it ensures more balanced selections, calculated progression, and controlled reiteration of previously learned material. It gauges the usability of authentic material in relation to the level attained. During the teaching process, it allows the instant selection of items needed for a communicative situation, focus on forms, or particular exercises. This book first describes the theoretical background for systemization, including a historical overview, with special attention to the Common European Framework and the new Profiles and Referentials.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Of Concepts and Connotations 3. Content Systemization in Historical Perspective 4. Since the 1970s: The Council of Europe's Systemic Approaches 5. Vocabulary: The Substance of Progressive Content 6. Functions of Systemization 7. Defining and Codifying Content 8. Selecting and Structuring Content 9. Supplemental Output of Systemized Material 10. Conclusion

Teaching and Learning with Technology Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Concetta M. Stewart, Catherine C. Schifter and Melissa E. Markaridian Selverian, all of Temple University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 324pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87850-0; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85205-7; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Today, new media is both augmenting and extending the traditional classroom with a variety of technology-based tools available to both students and faculty, and has created "new" virtual classrooms for anywhere, anytime availability to education. Despite the enormous potential for technology to support the educational enterprise in this emerging "creative" economy, technologies are still not yet fully integrated in the classroom and their association with educational outcomes is as-yet unclear. This book profiles scholarly work from around the world to examine closely the effectiveness of the newest media in education at bridging the gaps among and between teachers, students and subject matter at all levels, from K-12 through adult education. These pieces are theory-based investigations with implications for future research, theory and application. Contributors examine how the fields of education and new media have evolved and are continuing to evolve pedagogically and practically, from predominantly instructivist, with a passive, oneway teaching format; to constructivist, including teacher- and learner-controlled, sensorially immersive and socially interactive exchanges. This book will be of interest to students and faculty in the areas of new media in education, including distance learning, online learning and "virtual" learning.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

129 CONTENTS Foreword Chris Dede Part I: Introduction and State of the Field 1. Technologies and the Classroom Come to Age after Century of Growth Catherine C. Schifter and Concetta M. Stewart Part II: Achieving Social Closeness through Authentic Learning Exchanges 2.

Effects of Web-Enhanced Course Materials on College Students’ Engagement and Learning Outcomes Xigen Li 3. From Homer to High Tech: The Impact of Social Presence and Media Richness on Online Mentoring in Higher Education Jamie S. Switzer 4.

Educating Educators for Virtual Schooling: Communicating Roles and Responsibilities Chad Harms, Dale S. Niederhauser, Niki E. Davis, M. D. Roblyer and Stephen B. Gilbert Part III: Media-Rich Environments Building Stronger Connections 5. A New Lens for Learning in the Communications Field: The Effectiveness of Video Lectures with Asynchronous, Synchronous Discussions in Online/Distance Education Amy Schmitz Weiss 6. A New Educational Technology for Media and Communication Studies: Mapping Media in Australia and Sweden Christina Spurgeon, Christy Collis, Marcus Foth and Pernilla Severson 7. Not Your Father’s Educational Technology: A Case Study in Mobile Media and Journalism Education Susan Jacobson and Karen Turner Part IV: Complex Virtual Systems: Making Learning Spatially and Socially Whole 8. Virtual Reality in Education Veronica S. Pantelidis and David C. Vinciguerra 9. A User Centered Approach for Building Design Guidelines for the Use of Virtual Actors in CVEs for Learning Daphne Economou 10. Matching Computer Game Genres to Educational Outcomes John L. Sherry 11. The Virtual Harlem Experiments James J. Sosnoski 12. The Unique Features of Educational Virtual Environments Tassos A. Mikropoulos and Joan Bellou Part V: Discussion and Conclusion 13. ‘Real’ Learning in Virtual Worlds: An Integration of Media, Curricula and Pedagogy through Telepresence Melissa E. Markaridian Selverian and Concetta M. Stewart

Trust and Betrayal in Educational Administration and Leadership Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Eugenie A. Samier, The British University in Dubai, United Arab Emirates and Michèle Schmidt, Simon Fraser University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 257pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87340-6; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85241-5; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This collection explores critical and foundational theory for trust in educational administration and leadership as it influences a broad range of topics, such as ethics, governance, diversity, policy, management, and power. It demonstrates the relevance of this foundation to practical issues and problems internationally, both within the organizational context and extra-organizationally. Contributors from throughout the world focus on the application of trust factors as they affect our understanding of, and practice in, educational organizations. This volume will be of interest to students and faculty of educational administration theory, the policy and politics of education, and educational leadership as well as practitioners and policy makers.

CONTENTS Editors’ Introductions. The Interdisciplinary Foundation of Trust: From Trustworthiness to Betrayal Eugenie A. Samier . Theoretical, Practical, and Research Perspectives of Trust in Educational Administration and Leadership Michèle Schmidt Part I: Theoretical Foundations 1. Exploring the Dynamics of Work Place Trust, Personal Agency, and Administrative Heuristics Cheryl L. Bolton and Fenwick W. English 2. Educational Trust: A Critical Component in the (De)cultivation of Social Capital in School Districts Michèle Schmidt 3. Trust in Organisational, Leadership, and Management Studies: Theories, Approaches, and Conceptions Eugenie A. Samier Part II: Research Approaches 4. Reconceptualising Educational Administration as a Hermeneutics of Trust Stephanie Mackler and Séamus Mulryan 5. Studying the Psychological and Cultural Wages of Mistrust: An Essay on Organisational Torment under a Suspicious Regime Eugenie A. Samier 6. Developing Trust through Collaborative Research: Mentoring Graduate Students of Colour Cynthia Gerstl-Pepin and Marybeth Gasman Part III: Critical and Current Issues 7. Toxic Leadership and the Erosion of Trust in Higher Education Sheri R. Klein 8. In Schools We Trust? Leadership in loco parentis and the Failure to Protect Students from Bullying and Harassment Dominique E. Johnson 9. Administration, Education, and the Question of Trust Richard Bates 10. The Politics of Derision, Distrust and Deficit: The Damaging Consequences for Youth and Communities Put at a Disadvantage John Smyth 11. (Non)-Legal Requirements for Trust in Slovenian Higher Education Uroš Pinteri? 12. Personalisation: The Individual, Trust, and Education in a Neo-liberal World Helen M. Gunter, Stephen Rogers, and Charlotte Woods

Universities and Global Diversity Routledge Research in Education

Edited by Beverly Lindsay, Pennsylvania State University, USA and Wanda Blanchett, UMKC School of Education, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88287-3; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

130 This volume seeks to critically examine the nexus between globalization and diversity as it affects the preparation of professional educators on several continents, taking into account the extensive changes in economic, sociopolitical, and cultural dynamics within nations and regions that have occurred in the last decade.

What’s So Important About Music Education?

Routledge Research in Education

J. Scott Goble, University of British Columbia, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 338pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80054-9; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85322-1; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION What’s So Important About Music Education? addresses the history of rationales provided for music education in the United States. J. Scott Goble explains how certain factors stemming from the nation's constitutional separation of church and state, its embrace of democracy and capitalism, and the rise of recording, broadcast, and computer technologies have brought about changes in the ways music teachers and concerned others have conceptualized music and its importance in education. In demonstrating how many of the personal and societal benefits of musical engagement have come to be obscured in the nation’s increasingly diverse public forum, Goble also argues for the importance of musical engagement in human life and for the importance of music in education. The book concludes with recommendations for teaching the musical practices of the nation's constituent cultural communities in schools in terms of their respective cultural meanings.

CONTENTS 1. Music as an Academic Subject in the Public Schools of the United States: An Inherent Cultural Tension 2. "Culture," "Worldview," and Pragmatism: The Philosophy and Semiotic of Charles Sanders Peirce 3. A Pragmatic Conception of Musical Practices: "Music" as a Sign of Worldview 4. Conceptions of Music in the United States 5. A Brief Historical Survey of Concepts of Music in Music Education in the United States 6. Community, Autonomy, and Music Education in the Postmodern United States: Summary and Recommendations

WorldCALL Routledge Studies in Computer Assisted Language Learning

Edited by Mike Levy, Griffth University, Australia, et al PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88086-2; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION As technological innovation continues to affect language pedagogy, there is an increasing demand for information, exemplars, analysis and guidance. This edited volume focuses on international perspectives in Computer-Assisted Language Learning (CALL) in all of its forms, including Technology Enhanced Language Learning, Network-Based Language Learning, Information and Communication Technologies for Language Learning.

Education Policy, Space and the City Routledge Studies in Educational Policy and Politics

Kalervo N. Gulson, University of British Columbia, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99556-6; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the relationships between educational policy, space and place. Gulson demonstrates how education policy is multi-variant in nature and how space, as both lens of analysis and object of study, is crucial to understanding and analysing education policy. The book utilizes three qualitative case studies of educational policy change that converge with urban policy directions, notably those effecting urban renewal and regeneration, in the inner city areas of London, Vancouver and Sydney. These studies of the reorganisation of urban schooling examine policy’s role in the production and amelioration of social and educational inequality, primarily connected to social class and ‘race’. With urbanisation posited as one of the central concerns for the future of the planet, relationships between the city, educational policy, and social and educational inequality deserve sustained examination. Gulson’s book is a rich and needed contribution to these areas of study.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

131 Introduction Chapter 1: Spatialisations and the city: analytics for education policy research Chapter 2: Cities, cases and spaces: notes on theory and methodology Chapter 3: Postcolonialism, education markets and Aboriginality Chapter 4: Neoliberalism, Olympic dreaming and the politics of school choice Chapter 5: The global city, educational philanthropy and everyday globalisation Chapter 6: Spatialising research: the city, policy, theory Chapter 7 Urban moments: education policy, space and the city Conclusion Notes Bibliography Index

Changing Schools in an Era of Globalization John Chi-Kin Lee, The Chinese University of Hong Kong and Brian Caldwell, University of Melbourne, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99330-2; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Much has been written about globalization and the challenge of preparing young people for the new world of work and life in times of complexity and continuous change. However, few works have examined how globalization has and will continue to shape education in the East. This volume discusses education within the context of globalization and examines what is occurring in schools and systems of education in the People's Republic of China, Hong Kong, Chinese Taipei, Singapore, and Australia. Closer examination of recent developments and current trends reveal the same turbulence and a range of common issues in areas such as assessment, curriculum, leadership, management of change, pedagogy, policy, professional capacity and technology. This volume demonstrates the commonalities and differences and offers tremendous insight into the way things are done in places where student achievement is high but there is also a sense of urgency in continuing an agenda of change.

CONTENTS SECTION I. EDUCATIONAL REFORMS AND CHANGING SCHOOLS: INTERNATIONAL AND ASIA-PACIFIC PERSPECTIVES Chapter 1 Changing schools in Asia-Pacific societies in a global society Chapter 2 Educational reforms and school improvement in China Chapter 3 Educational reforms and school improvement in China Hong Kong Chapter 4 Educational reforms and school improvement in Chinese Taipei (Taiwan) Chapter 5 Educational reforms and school improvement in Australia Chapter 6 Educational reforms and school improvement in Singapore SECTION II. ISSUES IN EDUCATIONAL REFORMS Chapter 7 School Choice: Privatization and Decentralization of Schooling Chapter 8 School Improvement, Curriculum and Teaching Innovations Chapter 9 Accountability and assessment measures Chapter 10 Responses of the Government and the Educational Profession to the Educational Reform Agenda and Policies SECTION III REFLECTIONS ON EDUCATIONAL ISSUES AND CREATIONS OF FUTURE LEADERS AND SCHOOLS Chapter 11 Future educational reform policies and measures in China, Australia, Taiwan and Singapore Chapter 12 Future schools, leadership development and school education in China, Australia, Taiwan and Singapore Notes Bibliography Index

Governing Sustainable Development Interventions

Carl Death, Dublin City University, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56926-2; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Multilateral UN summits from Stockholm to Copenhagen have set the pace and direction for the global governance of sustainable development. The 2002 Johannesburg World Summit on Sustainable Development (WSSD) was a key moment in the evolution of sustainable development as a discourse and summitry as a technology of government. It firmly established multi-stakeholder partnerships, carbon-trading and communication strategies as key techniques for dealing with environmental crises. It was also a significant event in terms of South African domestic politics, witnessing some of the largest protests since the end of Apartheid. Carl Death draws on Foucauldian governmentality literature to argue that the Johannesburg Summit was a key site for the refashioning of sustainable development as advanced liberal government; for the emergence of an exemplary logic of rule; and for the mutually interdependent relationship between ‘mega-events’ (summits, world cups, Olympic games) and ‘mega-protests’ understood as Foucauldian counter-conducts. Analysing detailed and original research on the WSSD, Death argues that summits work to make politically sustainable a global order which is manifestly unsustainable. Paradoxically however, they also provide opportunities for the status quo to be protested and resisted. This work will be of great interest to scholars of development studies, global governance and environmental politics.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Power, Discourse, Government 3. Producing Sustainable Development 4. Negotiating Sustainable Development 5.

Performing Sustainable Development 6. Resisting Sustainable Development 7. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

132

Beyond Territory Regions and Cities

Edited by Maryann Feldman, University of North Carolina, USA, Harald Bathelt and Dieter F. Kogler, both of University of Toronto, Canada, PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 368pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49327-7; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The main purpose of the book is to discuss new trends in the dynamic geography of innovation and argue that in an era of increasing globalization, two trends seem quite dominant: rigid territorial models of innovation, and localized configurations of innovative activities. The book brings together scholars who are working on these topics. Rather than focusing on established concepts and theories, the book aims to question narrow explanations, rigid territorializations, and simplistic policy frameworks; it provides evidence that innovation, while not exclusively dependent on regional contexts, can be influenced by place-specific attributes. The book will bring together new empirical and conceptual work by an interdisciplinary group of leading scholars from areas such as economic geography, innovation studies, and political science. Based on recent discussions surrounding innovation systems of different types, it aims to synthesize state-of-the-art know-how and provide new perspectives on the role of innovation and knowledge creation in the global political economy.

CONTENTS 1. Where do new industries come from? Evidence from the biotechnology industry 2. The emergence of nanotechnology: Why can there be regional concentration without regional clusters? 3. Constructing regional advantage: policy platforms based on related variety and differentiated knowledge bases 4. Agglomeration and the Geography of Localization Economies in Canada 5. OrganicsAesthetics: Authenticity as a Regional Development Instrument 6. Non-competes and inventor mobility: the Michigan experiment 7.

Geographical dimensions of clusters - an evolutionary approach to change agency in technological and institutional transformation 8.

Growth and evolution of the Danish IT sector: geographical concentration, specialisation and diversity 9. Relatedness and related variety as sources of regional growth 10. Temporary face-to-face contact and the ecology of global buzz 11. Global corporate knowledge transfer: a social network analysis of an international technology service firm 12. Unpacking the proximity puzzle: Spaces of learning in Toronto’s design community 13. Overcoming Myopic Search? Transient inter-firm collaborations ("projects") for knowledge generation and exchange: governance, transaction costs and outcome

Can Neighbourhoods Save the City?

Regions and Cities

Edited by Frank Moulaert, University of Newcastle, Erik Swyngedouw, University of Manchester, UK, Flavia Martinelli, Università Mediterranea di Reggio, Reggio Calabria, Italy and Sara Gonzalez, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48588-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION For decades, neighbourhoods been pivotal sites of social, economic and political exclusion processes, and civil society initiatives, attempting bottom-up strategies of re-development and regeneration. In many cases these efforts resulted in the creation of socially innovative organizations, seeking to satisfy the basic human needs of deprived population groups, to increase their political capabilities and to improve social interaction both internally and between the local communities, the wider urban society and political world. SINGOCOM - Social INnovation GOvernance and COMmunity building – is the acronym of the EU-funded project on which this book is based. Sixteen case studies of socially-innovative initiatives at the neighbourhood level were carried out in nine European cities, of which ten are analysed in depth and presented here. The book compares these efforts and their results, and shows how grassroots initiatives, alternative local movements and self-organizing urban collectives are reshaping the urban scene in dynamic, creative, innovative and empowering ways. It argues that such grass-roots initiatives are vital for generating a socially cohesive urban condition that exists alongside the official state-organized forms of urban governance. The book is thus a major contribution to socio-political literature, as it seeks to overcome the duality between community-development studies and strategies, and the solidarity-based making of a diverse society based upon the recognising and maintaining of citizenship rights. It will be of particular interest to both students and researchers in the fields of urban studies, social geography and political science.

CONTENTS 1. Social Innovation and Community Development: Concepts and Theories 2. Historical Roots of Social Change: Philosophies and Movements 3. ALMOLIN: How to Analyse Social Innovation at the Local Level 4. Kommunales Forum Wedding – Innovation in Local Governance in Berlin 5. Arts Factory, Rhondda Cynon Taff, South Wales 6. Social Exclusion/Inclusion and Innovation in the Neighbourhood of Epeule (Roubaix). The Case of the Association Alentour 7. The End of Social Innovation in Urban Development Strategies? Neighbourhood Development Corporations in Antwerp 8. How do you Build a Shared Interest? Olinda - a Case of Social Innovation Between Strategy and Organizational Learning in Milano 9. Centro Sociale Leoncavallo - Milan - Italy. A building-block for an Enlarged Citizenship in Milan 10. Associazione Quartieri Spagnoli (AQS) - Naples 11. New Deal for Communities in

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

133 Newcastle 12. The Ouseburn Valley. A Struggle to Innovate in the Context of a Weak Local State 13. The Contradictions of Controlled Modernisation: Local Area Management in Vienna 14. Self-determined Urban Interventions as Tools for Social Innovation: The Case of City Mine(d) in Brussels 15. Creative Designing the Urban Future: Building on Experiences - A Transversal Analysis of Socially Innovative Case-Studies 16. Socially Innovative Projects, Governance Dynamics and Urban Change: A Policy Framework

Cities, State and Globalization Regions and Cities

Tassilo Herrschel, University of Westminster, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48938-6; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book makes a new contributution to the current lively debate on city regional governance, offering a genuinely comparative approach, covering Europe (east and west) and North America, and thus different ‘cultures’ of city regionalism. Drawing on a series of case studies conducted by the author the main focus of this book is on the interface between state structure power and the established way of ‘doing urban policy’ on the one hand, and the pressures and challenges of globalisation, on the other. Hershel argues that the spatiality of cities has become less clear cut, as has the notion of ‘region’, adding to the challenges of defining and understanding city regions. Whether ‘real’ or ‘imagined’, they are, however, becoming the main arena of these various interacting, competing and interdependent processes and structures. This timely contribution to the existing literature examines the intricacies of these processes and issues.

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction: Cities, City regions, State and Globalisation, Chapter 2: Defining City Regions, Chapter 3: City Regions and Globalisation, Chapter 4: City Regions and the State, Chapter 5: Governance of City Regions, Chapter 6: Examples of City-regional governance under different ‘state cultures’ in Europe and North America, Chapter 7: Summary and Conclusion: City-Regional Governance, State and Globalisation.

Controversies in Local Economic Development Regions and Cities

Martin Perry, Massey University, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48968-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Efforts to promote the economic development of individual localities engage the attention of academics, students and professionals.

Many such analysts argue that competitive advantage can be fostered within local economies, complimenting the advent of a more globalised economy. Intensified efforts to build new economic foundations show no sign of abating despite the apparent increase in the international mobility of businesses and employment. Unpicking the arguments supporting different strategies for promoting local economic development, Controversies in Local Economic Development is an introductory guide to some of the major ideas and policy tools that have influenced academic debate and development practice. Taking the view that economic processes are mechanisms that promote desired outcomes only in particular contexts, the book asks questions of both academic debates and the prescriptions of policy experts.

CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Local economic development as controversy, Chapter 2 – The case for local economic development, Chapter 3 – The learning region, Chapter 4 – Enterprise and new venture growth, Chapter 5 – Innovation and employment, Chapter 6 – Enterprise clusters, Chapter 7 – Inward investment beyond zero sum, Chapter 8 – Being business friendly, Chapter 9 – Quartering the creative class, Chapter 10 – Prospects for local economic development

Manufacturing in the New Urban Economy Regions and Cities

Willem van Winden, Leo van den Berg, Luis Carvalho and Erwin van Tuijl, all of the Erasmus University, The Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 400pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58607-8; August 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

134 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In large cities in developed countries, the share of manufacotruing has declined drastically in the last decades and the share of service has grown as many manufacturing firms have closed or moved to lower-cost locations. The process of deindustrialization is often seen as part of the inevitable shift towards a knowledge based economy and urban economies come to rely on research and development, financial services, tourism and the creative industries. This book looks at the changing link between manufacturing and knowledgebased activities in urban regions. The authors develop a new framework drawing on insights from organization studies and regional economic literature looking at various international case studies in Western and Eastern Europe, South America and Asia.

CONTENTS 1. Cities and Manufacturing: Setting the Scene, 2. Manufacturing and Urban Development: A Frame of Analysis, 3. Dortmund: Metalelectro sector, 4. Eindhoven: Automotive Industry, 5. Munich: Automotive Industry, 6. Ostrava: Automotive Industry, 7. Paris: Automotive Industry, 8. Porto: Metal-electro Sector, 9. Rotterdam: Food Industry, 10. Sao Paulo: Automotive Industry, 11. Shanghai: Automotive Industry, 12. Turku: Shipbuilding Industry, 13. Synthesis: Conclusions and Recommendations.

Migration in the 21st Century Regions and Cities

Edited by Kim Korinek and Thomas N. Maloney, both of the University of Utah, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ85.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77914-2; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this volume, we examine the challenges and opportunities created by global migration at the start of the 21st century. Our focus extends beyond economic impact to questions of international law, human rights, and social and political incorporation. We examine immigrant outcomes and policy questions at the global, national, and local levels. Our primary purpose is to connect ethical, legal, and social science scholarship from a variety of disciplines in order to raise questions and generate new insights regarding patterns of migration and the design of useful policy. While the book incorporates studies of the evolution of immigration law globally and over the very long term, as well as considerations of the magnitude and determinants of immigrant flows at the global level, it places particular emphasis on the growth of immigration to the United States in the 1990s and early 2000s and provides new insights on the complex relationships between federal and state politics and regulation, popular misconceptions about the economic and social impacts of immigration, and the status of 'undocumented' immigrants.

CONTENTS 1. A Multidisciplinary Perspective on Immigrant Rights, Outcomes and Policy Kim Korinek and Thomas N. Maloney I. International Law, Human Rights, and Migration in the Global Context , 2. The Great Immigration Debate: Facts and Fictions, Ideals and Illusions Seyla Benhabib 3. The Rights of Aliens in International Law: An Historical Overview Tony Anghie and Wayne McCormack 4. How Should Corporate Social Responsibility Address Human Labor Migration and Human Rights in an Era of Globalization?, Erin Ortiz, Esther Agyeman-Budu, and George Cheney , II. Migrant Impacts and Outcomes: Demographic, Economic, Political, and Social , 5.

Global Patterns of Migration Richard Bilsborrow , 6. Economic Impacts of Migrants Giovanni Peri 7. Political Incorporation of Immigrants in the United States Alejandro Portes 8. To Welcome the Stranger: Realities and Misconceptions about Immigration to the U.S, Patricia Fernandez-Kelly 9. Migrants, Migrant Communities, Social Capital, and Violence Ben Judkins and Steve Reynolds 10.

Bridging Multiple Worlds: Cultures, Immigrant Youth Identities, and Pathways to College Catherine Cooper III. Rights, Outcomes, and Policy at the State and Local Level: A Case Study of Utah 11. Shedding Light on a Shadowy Existence: State-Level Responses to the Failings of National Immigration Policy Julie Stewart and Ken Jameson 12. Assimilation of Undocumented Immigrants: Demographics, Residence, and Geographic Mobility, Thomas N. Maloney, Thomas Kontuly, and Brad Hanks 13. Home but Far Away from Home: Refugee Resettlement Policy and Programs Examined at the Local Level, MacLeans Geo-JaJa IV. Summary: What Have We Learned? 14. Immigration in the Early 21 st Century: Lessons from a Multi-Disciplinary Investigation Kim Korinek and Thomas N. Maloney

Territorial Development, Cohesion and Spatial Planning Regions and Cities

Edited by Neil Adams, South Bank University, London, UK, Giancarlo Cotella, Politecnico di Torino, Italy and Richard Nunes, Oxford Brookes University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 432pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55194-6; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines some of the evolving challenges faced by EU regional policy in light of enlargement and to assess some of the approaches and trends in terms of territorial development policy and practice that are emerging out of this process. Focusing on the experiences on Central and Eastern Europe, these chapters reflect on the diversity of approaches to spatial planning and the the politics

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

135 of policy formation and multi-level governance operations – from local to trans-national agendas. Promoting increased awareness and understanding of these issues is the main purpose of the book, as well as harnessing the extensive capacity and ‘knowledge’ within these countries that can greatly enrich the discourse within an enlarged ‘epistemic community’ of European spatial planning academics, practitioners and policy-makers. The recently acquired CEE dimension provides a unique opportunity to examine the evolution of existing ‘epistemic communities’ as well as to explore the potential emergence of new ones.

CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 1. Territorial Challenges in the New Europe and the Cognitive Bounds of European Spatial Planning –Neil Adams, Giancarlo Cotella and Richard Nunes Part 1: EVOLVING SPATIAL AGENDA IN AN ENLARGED EU 2. Cohesion and Competitiveness: the Context for Territorial Development in the Evolving European Landscape - Mark Tewdwr-Jones 3. The Evolution of EU Territorial Policy and Potential Challenges for the Future of the European Territory after EU Enlargement - Klaus Kunzmann 4. Evolving Frameworks for Regional Development and Spatial Planning in the New Regions of the EU - Maros Finka 5.

The Emergence of New ‘Epistemic Communities’ in the New European Landscape: Some Theoretical Implications for the Spatial Agenda of the EU - Karina Pallagst PART 2: ENGAGING SYSTEMS OF MULTI-LEVEL GOVERNANCE 6. Emerging Forms of Territorial Governance and the ‘Europeanization’ of Spatial Planning - Vincent Nadin and Dominic Stead 7. Technocratic Networks, Path Dependency and Institutional Change: Civic Engagement and the Implementation of the Structural Funds in Poland - Marcin Dabrowski 8. The Limits of Trans-boundary Spatial Planning Networks. Perspectives from the Austrian-Slovakian Border Region Beatrix Haselsberger and Paul Benneworth 9. New Planning Jurisdictions, Scant Resources and Local Public Responsibility: Delivering Planning in Slovenia - Naja Marot PART 3: ADDRESSING INCREASING DISPARITIES AND INEQUALITIES IN THE NEW REGIONS OF EUROPE 10. The Pursuit of Balanced Territorial Development: The Realities and Complexities of the Cohesion Agenda - Karel Maier 11. The Impact of Education on Regional Development in Poland - Konrad Czapiewski and Krzysztof Janc 12. The Rhetoric and Reality of Pursuing Territorial Cohesion in Latvia - Zaiga Krisjane, Laila Kule and Maris Berzins 13.

Regional Promotion and Competition: Determinants of Long-Term and ad hoc Approaches to FDI Attraction in Central and Eastern Europe - Pawel Capik PART 4: LEARNING FROM EXPERIENCES BEYOND THE BORDER 14. Strategic Planning Practices in North-West Russia: European Influences, Challenges and Future Perspectives - Natalia Razumeyko 15. The Kalingrad Question: An Assessment of the Evolution of Spatial Policy - Nikiforova Evgeniya CONCLUSION 16. Building on the Eastwards Enlargement: Addressing the New Challenges for EU Regional Policy - Neil Adams, Giancarlo Cotella and Richard Nunes

Shrinking Cities Routledge Advances in Geography

Edited by Karina M. Pallagst, University of California at Berkeley, USA, Thorsten Wiechmann, Institute of Ecological and Regional Development, Germany and Cristina Martinez-Fernandez, University Western Sydney, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80485-1; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The shrinking city phenomenon is a multidimensional process that affects cities, parts of cities or metropolitan areas around the world that have experienced dramatic decline in their economic and social bases. Shrinkage is not a new phenomenon in the study of cities.

However, shrinking cities lack the precision of systemic analysis where other factors now at work are analysed: the new economy, globalisation, aging population (a new population transition) and other factors related to the search for quality of life or a safer environment. This volume places shrinking cities in a global perspective, setting the context for in-depth case studies of cities within Mexico, Brazil, Indonesia, Germany, France, Great Britain, South Korea, Australia, and the USA, which consider specific economic, social, environmental, cultural and land-use issues.

Climate Change and Forest Resources Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Brent Sohngen, Ohio State University, USA and Robert O. Mendelsohn, Yale University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77060-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There is growing evidence that even if modest control policies are adopted, increasing greenhouse gas levels in the atmosphere will lead to global warming over the next century and beyond. This is expected to have profound effects on the location and productivity of the world’s ecosystems. Although a great deal of attention has been devoted to studying the direct effects of climate change on agriculture and coastal systems, comparatively little attention has been devoted to studying the impacts on the world’s forests. Yet virtually every forest system around the world is expected to be influenced by climate change; from tropical forests in Africa or the Amazon to polar forests in Canada or Russia. This book discusses important scientific and policy relevant information about climate change and global forests. Divided into three general sections, the book: highlights the natural science link between greenhouse gases

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

136 and forests discusses the social impacts of climate-induced forest changes discusses policies to use forests to sequester carbon. Each chapter of includes a review of the literature relevant to the specific issues addressed.

Climate Change and the Private Sector Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Craig Hart PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $149.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77475-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The private sector is increasingly engaged in the climate change issue as it has become clear that climate risks potentially affect financial markets and solutions to climate change will require a response from those quarters. The purpose of this book is to contribute to new areas of research by examining the role of the private sector in addressing the challenges of climate change. Amongst the issues explored are: - the risks posed by climate change to private investment in critical infrastructure, - the potential effectiveness of financial instruments for mitigating climate risks - the cost of developing a long-term solution through clean energy infrastructure, the capacity of capital markets to finance clean energy infrastructure on necessary scale - the potential for climate change to cause bankruptcy of firms and market collapse Until recently, both academic and policy circles, nationally and internationally, have ignored the critical role the private sector and financial system must play in addressing climate change.

CONTENTS 1. Energy and Climate Change: Challenges of the Twenty-first Century 2. Capital Markets’ Capacity to Finance Carbon Neutral Infrastructure 3. Climate Change Risks 4. Climate Risks to Financing Infrastructure 5. Financial Instruments for Managing Climate Risk 6. Evaluating the Clean Development Mechanism for Financing Carbon Neutral Energy Infrastructure 7. Storm Effects on Utilities and the Energy Sector 8. The Effect of Natural Catastrophic Events on the Insurance Industry 9. Results and Policy

The Cooperation Challenge of Economics and the Protection of Water Supplies Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Joan Hoffman PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77470-3; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION How can we build the institutions that will promote the cooperation needed to meet our intertwined environmental and economic needs? Efforts to meet these twin goals in New York City’s watershed collaborations offer some guidance. The experience provides lessons in addressing scattered sources of pollution, encouraging environmentally compatible economic development, and coping with conflicts that are part of the collaboration process. It also yields insights into what we need to work effectively towards sustainable economic development. This book identifies many barriers to achieving the cooperation necessary to solving our water problems and discusses how watershed collaborations are a means to overcoming those barriers. Historical experience and lessons from other watershed collaborations informed the design of New York City’s complex watershed collaboration which is shown to contain the elements of a "green milieu" that can foster sustainable economic development. The particular challenges to the collaboration’s environmental and economic goals created by the watershed’s rural economy, farming and forestry are described. The unusual inclusion of the analysis of the economic aspects and effects of collaboration, of the relationship between collaboration and sustainable development, and of the processes of implementation and conflict make this book especially valuable to those interested in collaboration, regulation, environmental cooperation and conflict, watershed protection, economic development in general, and sustainable economic development in particular.

CONTENTS Introduction: The Problem and the Questions 1. New York City’s Case, Needed Cooperation, and Collaboration Needs 2. The Vision 3. Watershed Collaborations: Green Milieus for Sustainable Development? 4. Rural Economies and the Drama of Farm and Forest 5.

Implementation: The Collaboration as a Learning Machine 6. Conflict 7. Evaluation 8. Lessons Learned: The Art of Paying for Ecological Services

Ecosystem Services and Global Trade of Natural Resources Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Edited by Thomas Köllner, Swiss Federal Institute of Technology

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

137 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48583-8; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The utilization of natural resources to satisfy worldwide growing consumption of goods and services has severe ecological consequences. Increasing intensity of resource extraction, land use, freshwater use and use of marine environments will cause large impacts on biodiversity, ecosystems and their services. Besides the projected doubling of food consumption over the first 50 years of the twentieth century, the growing demand for biofuels and other biophysical products will challenge ecosystem managers worldwide, because of the need to optimize ecosystems with respect to multiple needs. The aim of this book is to show how the increase in international trade of biophysical commodities can damage global ecosystems and their services, how those damages can be accounted for in Life Cycle Assessment and Green National Accounting and finally how instruments in the public and private sector can help to achieve a more sustainable global trade. The focus is on the global ecosystem impact of traded products due to land use, freshwater use and use of marine environments.

CONTENTS 1. Society’s Dependence on Global Ecosystem Services (Gretchen Daily and Kai Chen) 2. Globalization and Governance of HumanEnvironment Systems (Roland W. Scholz) 3. International Trade Policies and Ecosystem Services (David Blandford) 4. Virtual Land Use Embodied in Traded Goods and Services (Thomas Köllner and Manel van der Sleen) 5. Virtual Water Embodied in Global Trade of Agricultural and Industrial Products (Hong Yang and Sascha Zehnder) 6. Global Trade of Fish Products (Lisa Deutsch and Carl Folke) 7. Impacts of Land Use on Ecosystem Services (Jonathan A. Foley) 8. Impacts of Freshwater Water Use on Ecosystem Services (Johan Rockström) 9. Impacts of Fisheries and Aquaculture on Ecosystem Services (Jane Lubchenco) 10. Life Cycle Assessment and Ecosystem Services (Thomas Koellner, Manuele Margni, Ruedi Müller Wenk, Stefanie Hellweg and Stephan Pfister) 11. Land and Ecosystem Services Accounts of the European Union (Jean-Louis Weber) 12. International Payments for Ecosystem Services IPES (Fulai Scheng, Benjamin Simmons and Anantha Duraiappah) 13. Fair Trade, Environmental Labels, Bans and Ecosystem Services (Ulrike Grote) 14. Compensation of Ecosystem Services in the Private Sector (Thomas Köllner) 15. International Biodiversity Off-sets in the Private Sector (Kerry ten Kate and Josh Bishop) 16. The Forest-Carbon Partnership Facility (The World Bank) 17. Linking Public Policies and Private Sector Instruments to Sustainably Manage Global Ecosystem Services (Stefanie Engel and Thomas Köllner)

Environmental Efficiency, Innovation and Economic Performances Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Anna Montini, University of Bologna, Italy and Massimiliano Mazzanti, University of Ferrara, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47852-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book deals with the increasingly complex issues of eco-innovation. Eco-innovation is becoming a conceptual reference point for many regional and international public policies and management strategies. Since 2000, this field of research has been focusing on environmental innovation, particularly related to the intensity of emissions, and economic performance and efficiency. There are two reasons for this growing interest. The first is that environmental performance is one of the main economic policy goals of European countries thanks to its relevance to the Lisbon Strategy and the Göteborg priorities for sustainable development. The second, which is partly linked to the first, is related to the growing impact of environmental regulation on private sector activity in many European countries. This volume brings together microeconomics studies on firms’ eco and economic performance both in the industrial and service sector; by considering a sector based perspective rooted mainly in the exploitation of NAMEA data; at regional level, and a macroeconomic analysis of the environment, income and welfare. This collection brings together the best of recent research in the area of eco-innovation and in its entirety is an excellent source of knowledge for postgraduates and researchers students of Environmental and Ecological Economics alike. As well as fully developing the theoretical aspects of its topics, these essays are also strongly policyoriented and will be of interest to anyone seeking information an applied perspective.

CONTENTS Introduction Massimiliano Mazzanti and Anna Montini Part 1. Environmental innovation, firms’ economic performances and policy drivers 1. Environmental innovation drivers and economic performance in industrial systems Davide Antonioli, Massimiliano Mazzanti and Roberto Zoboli 2. The dynamic relationship between emissions and manufacturing firm’s growth Giulio Cainelli, Massimiliano Mazzanti and Roberto Zoboli 3. Environmentally-oriented strategies and firm performance in services Giulio Cainelli, Massimiliano Mazzanti and Roberto Zoboli 4. An early assessment of the influence on eco-innovation of the EU emissions trading scheme: evidence from the Italian paper industry Serena Pontoglio Part 2. Environmental efficiency and sector performances 5.

Emissions trends and labour productivity dynamics Giovanni Marin and Massimiliano Mazzanti 6. Production-related air emissions: a decomposition analysis for Italy Aldo Femia and Renato Marra Campanale 7. Regional and sector environmental efficiency: empirical evidence using the Italian RAMEA Massimiliano Mazzanti and Anna Montini 8. Biofuels public support and technological specialization in the energy sector Valeria Costantini, Francesco Crespi and Annalisa Zezza 9. Environmental impacts of personal mobility: exploring an Austrian EKC Michael Getzner Part 3 Economic growth, environmental degradation and policies 10.

Reconsidering the Environmental Kuznets Curve hypothesis: the trade off between environment and welfare Nicola Cantore and

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

138 Maurizio Canavari 11. Environmental degradation, economic growth and welfare: the role of self-protection choices Angelo Antoci and Simone Borghesi 12. Carbon Kuznets curves: long-run dynamics and policy events Massimiliano Mazzanti and Antonio Musolesi 13. The EU ETS: CO 2 price drivers during the learning experience Emile Alberola, Julien Chevallier and Benoît Chèze

Environmental Policies for Air Pollution and Climate Change in the New Europe Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Caterina De Lucia, University of York, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 216x138 mm; 136pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49814-2; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The interlinked issues of air pollution and energy policies in an enlarged Europe are currently subjects of major interest in economic, environmental, geography and regional sciences. This interest is understandable given the considerable consequences on human health and on climate change issues at not only a European, but a global level. In addition, the recent effects of economic fluctuation and oil prices as well as the actual restructuring of the European energy supply and security market raise a great deal of policy challenges.

These issues have become an increasingly relevant concern, as the optimal design of policy by centralised European institutions has come under greater scrutiny. This book presents an integrated approach to recent regulations on air pollution with particular emphasis on transborder air pollution, climate change and energy policies in the new Europe. This integrated vision embraces the extent to which global pollution influences policy decisions at different institutional levels; the magnitude, by virtue of policy simulation analysis, of environmental policy tools (i.e. environmental taxes) on aggregate welfare and transboundary air emissions fluxes in light of the recent enlargement process; the European Trading System and its flexible mechanisms to curb carbon emissions and fulfil the European Union Kyoto Protocol’s commitments; and the developments of the new European energy strategy and its interdependencies across energy requirements, innovation, competitiveness and climate change. The book is primarily aimed at Postgraduates and Postdoctoral research students in economics, environmental economics, environmental sciences, or environmental policy disciplines.

However, it should also be of interest to environmental economists, energy policy analysts, members of governmental and nongovernmental agencies dealing with environmental policy, climate change or air pollution.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. European Air Pollution Regulation 3. A Case Study on Modelling Transboundary Air Pollution Policy in an Enlarged Europe 4. Market Based Approach to Air Pollution and Climate Change 5. New EU Policy Initiatives for Air Pollution and Climate Change

The Future of Helium as a Natural Resource Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Edited by William J. Nuttall, Richard Clarke and Bartek Glowacki, all of the University of Cambridge, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57697-0; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The purpose of the book is to inform the reader as to the future for Helium: a most unusual substance of significant high technology relevance and key natural resource. The frame of reference is international and not just American: helium is globalizing Commercial helium is a by-product of the natural gas industry. The relationship of helium supply to natural gas is fundamental and has not been studied extensively in the past. The global natural gas industry is part way through a profound change with increasing emphasis on liquefied natural gas. This has major consequences for helium supply. The authors turn their attention to helium supply and demand; most helium studies having previously been excessively focused on the supply-side. Chapters study the potential impact of helium in a number of fields, including medical imaging and the nuclear industry, as well its influence in major national economies such as Russia and India.

Optimal Control of Age-structured Populations in Economy, Demography, and the Environment Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Edited by Raouf Boucekkine, Université Catholique de Louvain, Belgium, Natali Hritonenko, Prairie View A&M University, USA and Yuri Yatsenko, Houston Baptist University, USA

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

139 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $170.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77651-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book covers a wide range of topics in mathematical modelling of interlinked economic, technological and environmental processes. The main unifying theme of the book is the integration of applied mathematical models that describe and optimize the mutual impact of economy, demography, technological change, and the environment on global, regional and local levels. Emphasis is placed on optimization methods and deterministic dynamic models that take age structures, delay effects, and non-standard decision variables into account, and the authors explicitly deal with the age structure of assets, resources, and populations under study. The integrated interdisciplinary modelling has enormous potential for discovering new insights in global and regional development. The articles illustrate the fruitful interaction between applied mathematics, economics, demography, environment sciences, management sciences, and operations research in exploiting global and local change.

CONTENTS Introduction (Raouf Boucekkine, Natali Hritonenko and Yuri Yatsenko) 1. The genuine savings criterion and the value of population in an economy with endogenous fertility rate (Kenneth J. Arrow, Alain Bensoussan, Qi Feng and Suresh P. Sethi) 2. Continuous time overlapping generations models (Hippolyte d'Albis and Emmanuelle Augeraud-Véron) 3. Modeling technological change in equipment replacement problems (Joseph C. Hartman and Chin Hon Tan) 4. Embodied technology adoption under uncertainty (Bruno Cruz and Aude Pommeret) 5.Viability, optimality, and sustainability in vintage models (Noël Bonneuil) 6. Embodied technical change and learning-by-doing in a two sector growth model with human capital accumulation (Alberto Bucci, Herb Kunze and Davide La Torre) 7. Age-structured optimization models in fisheries bioeconomics: a survey (Olli Tahvonen) 8. Age-structured models and optimal control in mathematical epidemiology: a survey (David Greenhalgh) 9. Optimal management of a size distributed forest with respect to timber and non-timber values (Renan-Ulrich Goertz and Angels Xabadia) 10. Optimal harvesting in a two-species model of size-structured population (Nobuyuki Kato) 11. Optimisation problems in the management of indigenous plant populations under grazing pressure (Lynne McArthur, John Boland and Fleur Tiver) 12. Identification of age-structured contamination sources in ground water (Sergey Lyashko, Dmitry Klyushin, Dmitry Nomirovsky and Vladimir Semenov)

Participation in Environmental Organizations Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Benno Torgler, Alison Macintyre, both of Queensland University of Technology, Australia, and Maria A. Garcia-Valiñas, University of Oviedo, Spain PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 286pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-44631-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION For decades, social scientists have searched for factors that shape pro-environmental behaviour. However, only a few studies have investigated the causes and consequences of participation in environmental organizations. This book fills the gap by analysing in detail the determinants of environmental participation and its consequences in different parts of the world. Benno Torgler, María A. García-Valinas and Alison Macintyre seek the answer to several questions regarding who is working towards positive outcomes for our environment, what sort of social and institutional context will assist voluntary participation, what sort of attitudes are related to positive environmental behavior, and which countries are active on the intergovernmental stage. By focusing on voluntary participation in environmental organizations, we are able to determine the level of willingness to work towards a solution for environmental problems. This allows an insight into the motivations and attitudes of individuals and nations and how these factors can affect environmental cooperation. Participation in Environmental Organizations sheds light on who is liable to participate and will help to see whose priorities and values are forwarded through voluntary activities and to what extent voluntary participation can become representative. Thus, the book provides a unique examination of citizens’ willingness to participate in environmental organizations. The book will be of interest to Economics students and researchers alike who seek a deeper understanding of the theory and practice of environmental participation.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Social Capital and Institutions 3. Participation in Environmental Organization: What Matters? 4. Participation in Environmental Organizations: An Explorative Approach 5. The Determinants of Environmental Participation: An Empirical Analysis 6. Littering and Environmental Participation 7. Participation in Environmental Organizations: Environmental Motivation 8.

Environmental Participation, Environmental Outcome and International Engagement: A Macroeconomic Perspective

Permit Trading in Different Applications Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Edited by Bernd Hansjürgens, Helmholtz Centre for Environmental Research, Germany, Ralf Antes, Martin-Luther-Universität Halle-Wittenberg, Germany and Marianne Strunz, KfW Bankengruppe, Germany

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

140 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55122-9; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyzes the current picture for permit trading: one of the most influential environmental instruments to emerge in recent times. Its possibilities and limits, its successful design options and its restrictions will all be placed under the microscope, with a focus not only on “traditional” fields of application including air quality and climate policy, but new and emerging fields in which permit trading has been brought to bear: biodiversity, land use policy, water policy amongst them. The authors have set out with the following intentions: - to demonstrate how lessons learned in established policy fields can be transferred to new fields of application to fill specific research gaps in instrument choice and instrument design with respect to permit trading in emerging fields of application - to contribute to instrument choice in environmental policy by delivering a comparative analysis of market-based instrument permit trading. The primary focus will be on practical and empirical analyses of existing and emerging permit trading schemes and the majority of the contributions are of an empirical nature. However, the book will be supplemented by analyticaltheoretical considerations including mechanism design and implementation issues. An overview chapter summarize the central messages of the chapters in a comparative way and helps fill a substantial gap in the existing literature on permit trading.

CONTENTS 1. Emissions Trading in Air Quality Management and Climate Policy 2. Permit Trading in Land Use Management 3. Water Trading and Water Quality Trading 4. Overarching Design Options 5. Synthesis and Conclusions

Preference Data for Environmental Valuation Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Tim Haab, Ohio State University, USA, Ju-Chin Huang, University of New Hampshire, USA and John Whitehead, Appalachian State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77464-2; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The monetary valuation of environmental goods and services has evolved from a fringe field of study in the late 1970s and early 1980s to a primary focus of environmental economists over the past decade. Despite its rapid growth, practitioners of valuation techniques often find themselves defending their practices to both users of the results of applied studies and, perhaps more troubling, to other practitioners. One of the more heated threads of this internal debate over valuation techniques revolves around the types of data to use in performing a valuation study. In the infant years of the development of valuation techniques, two schools of thought emerged: the revealed preference school and the stated preference school, the latter of which is perhaps most associated with the contingent valuation method. In the midst of this heated debate an exciting new approach to non-market valuation was developed in the 1990s: a combination and joint estimation of revealed preference (RP) and stated preference (SP) data. This book provides a systematic, cohesive and in-depth discussion of the theory and methods of joint estimation, as well as showcasing recent developments in theory and methods of data combination and joint estimation via a set of original, state-of-the-art studies that are contributed by leading researchers in the field.

The Taxation of Petroleum and Minerals: Principles, Problems and Practice Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Edited by Philip Daniel, Michael Keen and Charles McPherson, all of the International Monetary Fund, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 368pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56921-7; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There are few areas of economic policy-making in which the returns to good decisions are so high—and the punishment of bad decisions so cruel—as in the management of natural resource wealth. Rich endowments of oil, gas and minerals have set some countries on courses of sustained and robust prosperity; but they have left others riddled with corruption and persistent poverty, with little of lasting value to show for squandered wealth. And amongst the most important of these decisions are those relating to the tax treatment of oil, gas and minerals. This book will be of interest to Economics postgraduates and researchers working on resource issues, as well as professionals working on taxation of oil, gas and minerals/mining.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

141 Preface Dominique Strauss-Kahn 1. Introduction Philip Daniel, Michael Keen Charles McPherson (IMF) Part 1: Conceptual Overview 2. Theoretical perspectives on resource tax design Robin Boadway (Queens University, Canada) and Michael Keen (IMF) 3.

Principles of resource taxation for low-income countries Paul Collier (University of Oxford) Part 2: Sectoral Experiences and Issues 4.

Petroleum fiscal regimes: Evolution and challenges Carole Nakhle (University of Surrey, UK) 5. International mineral taxation: Experience and issues Lindsay Hogan (Australian Bureau of Agricultural and Resource Economics) and Brenton Goldsworthy (IMF) 6.` Natural gas: Experience and issues Graham Kellas (Wood Mackenzie) Part 3: Special Topics 7. Evaluating fiscal regimes for resource projects: An example from oil development Philip Daniel, Brenton Goldsworthy, Wojciech Maliszewski, Diego Mesa Puyo (all IMF) and Alistair Watson 8. Resource rent taxes: A re-appraisal Bryan Land (World Bank) 9. State participation in the natural resources sectors: Evolution, issues and outlook Charles McPherson (IMF) 10. How best to auction natural resources Peter Cramton (University of Maryland) Part 4: Implementation 11. Resource tax administration: The implications of alternative policy choices 12 Resource tax administration: Functions, procedures and institutions Jack Calder 13. International tax issues for the resources sector Peter Mullins (Australian Tax Office) Part 5: Stability and Credibility 14. Contractual assurances of fiscal stability Philip Daniel (IMF) and Emil Sunley 15. Time consistency in petroleum taxation: Lessons from Norway Petter Osmundsen (University of Stavanger, Norway)

Valuation of Regulating Services of Ecosystems Routledge Explorations in Environmental Economics

Pushpam Kumar and Michael Wood, both of University of Liverpool, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56987-3; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Policy and management decisions are often made on financial grounds. However, the economic value of the benefits that people derive from ecosystems, that is, ecosystem services, may not be fully recognised and hence ecosystem considerations may not be incorporated adequately into decision-making processes. This is particularly true for regulating services, the benefits obtained from the regulation of ecosystem processes, the valuation of which requires an interdisciplinary approach. In essence, valuation is a problem solving strategy and a problem is a problem, it does not respect the boundary of any particular discipline. The valuation of regulating services is an evolving field of ecological economics. In this book, Professor Pushpam Kumar and Professor Michael D. Wood have invited some of the foremost international experts in the field of ecosystem services valuation to contribute chapters on the valuation of regulating services and highlight some of the main obstacles to the implementation and acceptance of these methodologies in the context of decision-making. The contributors explore the theoretical underpinning of valuation of ecosystem services and demonstrate ways in which these theories can be applied to case-specific problems in order to inform decision-making processes. This collection clarifies some of the doubt and uncertainty regarding the valuation of regulating services. Innovative methodologies in this field have started to emerge and in coming years there may be much further discussion on this topic as methodologies and understanding continue to evolve. This is a highly active area of interdisciplinary research with far reaching social and environmental implications, and this book should be of interest to those who are new to the field, as well as established experts, in moving both theory and practice forward.

CONTENTS Part 1: Concepts 1. An introduction to the valuation of regulating services Pushpam Kumar and Michael D. Wood 2. Valuing Ecosystem Services: Benefits, values, space and time Brendan Fisher, Ian Bateman and R. Kerry Turner 3. Ecosystem services: managing trade-offs between provisioning and regulating services Thomas Elmqvist, Magnus Tuvendal, Jagdish Krishnaswamy and Kristoffer Hylander 4. The "Ecosystem Service Framework": A Critical Assessment R. David Simpson Part 2: Methodological applications 5. Evaluating the economic impacts of water harvesting in Burkina Faso Rodney B.W. Smith, Laura A. Hildreth and Kimsey Savadago 6. Accounting for regulating services Karl-Göran Mäler, Sara Aniyar and Åsa Jansson 7. Valuation of Ecosystem Services in Coastal Ecosystems: Asian and European perspectives Premachandra Wattage 8. Valuing the Storm Protection Services of the Mangroves: Methodological and Data challenges Saudamini Das 9. European Forests and Carbon Sequestration Services: An Economic Assessment of Climate Change Impacts Helen Ding, Paulo A.L.D. Nunes and Sonja Teelucksingh 10. Valuing the Services of Coral Reef Systems for Sustainable Coastal Management: A Case Study of the Gulf of Kachchh, India Arun M. Dixit, Lalit Kumar, Pushpam Kumar and Kinjal Pathak Part 3: Synthesis 11. Institutions and Ecosystem Functions: The Case of Keti Bunder, Pakistan John M. Gowdy and Aneel Salman 12. Valuation of Ecosystem Services: methods, opportunities and policy implications Nicolas Kosoy, Makiko Yashiro, Carlota Molinero and Anantha Duraiappah 13. Conclusions on the valuation of regulating services: current status and future perspectives Pushpam Kumar and Michael D. Wood

Reforming Land and Resource Use in South Africa Routledge ISS Studies in Rural Livelihoods

Edited by Paul Hebinck, Wageningen University, the Netherlands and Charlie Shackleton, Rhodes University, South Africa PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58855-3; February 2011

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

142 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores the debates surrounding land and agrarian reform in South Africa after the transition to democracy in 1994. In particular, it explores how these reforms, and particular those that potentially make access easier, have created new options for and broadened the use of land and natural resources. Reform-minded policies in South Africa have assumed that if access to land and other natural resources is less problematic, the use of these resources are intensified which in turn would alter the structure and dynamics of rural and urban poverty. The book examines in detail, and from several disciplinary perspectives, whether and how this has occurred, and if not, why. A key argument that the book pursues is whether land reform has resulted in transformed the use of natural and other strategic resources. This book explores a combination of new or alternative meanings of land and unlike most analysis and commentaries on land reform, pursues an analysis of land reform dynamics at various levels of aggregation. These chapters go further than simply offering a one sided perspective of land and agrarian reforms and instead combines field and empirical studies and more ethnographic explorations to come to terms with empirical realities.

Agricultural and Territorial Rural Policy Analysis Routledge Studies in Development and Society

Edited by John Bryden, Norwegian Agricultural Economics Research Institute, et al PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88225-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book presents the methodology and results of a three-year, eleven-country science-to-policy research project, Toward a Policy Model of Multifunctional Agriculture and Rural Development, undertaken between 2005 and 2008 and financed under the European Union's 6th Framework program. It deals with an important contemporary policy issue, how best to ensure that an agriculturally-based policy can contribute to the development of rural regions. It tackles this problem in a number of different but complementary ways, primarily by the development of a unique and innovative dynamic systems model, POMMARD (a Policy Model of Multifunctional Agriculture and Rural Development).

India’s New Economic Policy Routledge Studies in Development and Society

Edited by Waquar Ahmed, Mount Holyoke College, USA, Amitabh Kundu, Jawaharlal Nehru University, India and Richard Peet, Clark University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 376pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80188-1; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84681-0; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Conventional interpretations of the New Economic Policy introduced in India in 1991 see this program of economic liberalization as transforming the Indian economy and leading to a substantial increase in the rate of India’s economic growth. But in a country like India, growth is not enough. Who benefits from the new growth regime, and can it significantly improve the conditions of livelihood for India’s 800 million people with incomes below $2.00 a day? This edited volume looks at international policy regimes and their national adoption under strategic conditions of economic crisis and coercion, and within longer-term structural changes in the power calculus of global capitalism. The contributors examine long-term growth tendencies, poverty and employment rates at the national level, regional level and local levels in India; the main growth centers; the areas and people left out; the advantages and deficiencies of the existing policy regime, and alternative economic policies for India. Bringing together the leading figures in the discussion on India’s economic policy, this volume is the authoritative critical study of India’s New Economic Policy.

CONTENTS Introduction Waquar Ahmed, Amitabh Kundu and Richard Peet 1. Neoliberalism, Inequality and Development Richard Peet 2. From Mixed Economy to Neo-liberalism: Class and Caste in India’s Policy Transition Waquar Ahmed 3. Urban System in India: Trends, Economic Base, Governance and a Perspective of Growth under Globalization Amitabh Kundu 4. New Urbanism, Neoliberalism and Urban Restructuring in Mumbai Swapna Banerjee-Guha 5. Economic Liberalization and Urban Governance: Impact on Inclusive Growth Shipra Maitra 6. The Right to Waste: Informal Sector Recyclers and Struggles for Social Justice in Post-Reform Urban India Bharti Chaturvadi and Vinay Gidwani 7. From Red Tape to Red Carpet? Violent Narratives of Neoliberalizing Ahmedabad Ipsita Chatterjee 8. Neoliberalism, Environmentalism and Urban Politics in Delhi Rohit Negi 9. Coping with Challenges to Food Security: Climate Change, Biofuels and GMOs Suman Sahai 10. Imperialism, Resources and Food Security, with Reference to the Indian Experience Utsa Patnaik 11. Special Economic Zones: Space, Law and Dispossession Rupal Oza 12. Thinking Militant Particularisms Politically: Resistances to Neo-liberalism in India Dave Featherstone 13. Radical Peasant Movements and Rural Distress in India: A Study of the Naxalite Movement Raju Das

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

143

Protecting Biological Diversity Routledge Studies in Development and Society

Carmen Richerzhagen, German Development Institute, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 291pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87224-9; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION During the last ten years the enormous global loss of biodiversity has received remarkable attention. Among the numerous approaches undertaken to stop or lessen this process, access and benefit-sharing (ABS), a market-based approach, has emerged as among the most prominent. In theory, ABS turns biodiversity and genetic resources from an open access good to a private good and creates a market for genetic resources. It internalizes the resources’ positive externalities by pricing the commercial values for research and development and makes users pay for it. Users’ benefits are shared with the resource holders and set incentives for the sustainable use and the conservation of biodiversity. Carmen Richerzhagen, however, finds that in practice there are significant questions about the effectiveness of the approach in the protection of biodiversity and about the fair and equitable sharing of benefits arising from the commercialization. Utilizing the empirical findings of three case studies of biodiversity-providing countries - Costa Rica, the Philippines and Ethiopia - and one case study of a community of user countries, the European Union (EU), Richerzhagen examines the effectiveness of ABS through the realization of its own objectives.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Basic Principles of Genetic Resources as Regards ABS 3. The Economic Framework of the ABS Concept 4.

The Effectiveness of ABS: Critical Factors and Measures Used to Address Them 5. Implementation of ABS Regulations in Provider and User Countries 6. Conclusions

Social Development Routledge Studies in Development and Society

Edited by Manohar S. Pawar, Charles Sturt University, Australia and David R. Cox, La Trobe University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 274pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87926-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84701-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited collection demonstrates that the ideas inherent in social development are practical and not utopian. By discussing and delineating a social development approach, the book argues the need for practicing it at local or grassroots-level communities to promote universal social justice and wellbeing. Towards this end, several leading scholars have presented critical and inspiring thoughts on the significance and usefulness in development of genuine participation of people, bottom-up strategies, self-reliance, capacity building, and egalitarian and empowering partnerships. They also delve into hitherto neglected aspects of social development related to preparing personnel for social development work, ethical imperatives and a new social development paradigm. The world’s contemporary problems persist in part because the social development approach in its comprehensive form has not been planned and implemented at local, national and global levels. Social Development presents the optimistic argument that the application of social development ideas can help create a world in which almost all people’s wellbeing can be significantly enhanced.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Why a Focus on Social Development in the 21st Century? Manohar S. Pawar and David R. Cox. Conceptual Understanding of Social Development 2. Social Development Manohar S. Pawar and David R. Cox 3. Local Level Social Development Manohar S. Pawar and David R. Cox. Critical Perspectives in Social Development 4. Participatory Development Kwaku Osei-Hwedie and Bertha Z. Osei-Hwedie 5. Self- Reliant Development Madhavappallil Thomas and Manohar S. Pawar 6. Capacity Building for Local Development: An Overview Gautam N. Yadama and Marsela Dauti 7. Building Partnerships for Social Development Ingrid Burkett and Alex Ruhunda 8. Personnel for Local Level Social Development David R. Cox and Manohar S. Pawar 9. Importance to Poverty Alleviation of Bottom-Up Approaches to Social Development Rufus Akindola. Ethical Issues in Social Development 10. The Ethics of Social Development Hartley Dean. Future of Social Development 11. Towards a New Social Development Brij Mohan 12. Conclusions: Social Development into the Future Manohar S. Pawar and David R. Cox

Agri-Food Systems and Economic Development Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Edited by Spencer Henson and Steven Jaffee PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49695-7; November 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

144 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book draws on a three-year programme of research undertaken in sub-Saharan Africa, involving research teams in six countries looking at the role of donor interventions in the context of African smallholder participation in higher-value markets for agricultural and food products, both domestically and through exports to industrialized countries. . In so doing, it explores the interface between donor-led interventions and the actions of the private sector, and of government, in developing countries. Put bluntly, this book investigates ‘what works and what doesn’t’. Thus, the chapters ‘throw light’ on the nature of higher-value markets for agricultural and food products, presents the critical processes determining smallholder participation in higher-value markets for agricultural and food products and relations to the level and forms of quality standards applied and examines the extent to which smallholders are actually participating in higher-value markets with differing levels of quality standards and the challenges they face in doing so and the role of donor interventions in facilitating the participation of smallholders in higher-value markets for agricultural and food products and the interface with private and public sector initiatives in developing countries.

CONTENTS Section 1: Emerging context, Chapter 1: Potential Opportunities from High-Value Markets, Spencer Henson and Steven Jaffee, Chapter 2: The Spectre of Smallholder Exclusion, Spencer Henson and Steven Jaffee, Chapter 3: The Level and Nature of Donor Response, Luz Diaz Rios, Steven Jaffee and Spencer Henson, Section 2: Conceptualizing the Inclusion and Exclusion of Smallholders , Chapter 4: The Process of Inclusion and Exclusion of Smallholders into Higher-Value Markets: A Conceptual Framework, Spencer Henson and Steven Jaffee, Chapter 5: Assessing the Propensity of Buyers to Source from smallholders, Spencer Henson and Steven Jaffee, Chapter 6: Promoting the Inclusion of Smallholders: The Views of Practitioners, Spencer Henson, Steven Jaffee, John Cranfield, Jose Blandon and Paul Siegel, Section 3: Case studies, Chapter 7: Mainstream horticultural products for high-end market segments, Steven Jaffee, John Humphrey, Julius Okello, Michael Jensen, Spencer Henson, and John Lamb, Chapter 8: Supplying the European market for ‘ethnic’ fruits and vegetables, Luz Diaz Rios, Ramatu Al-Hassan, Johnny Mugisha, Sean Field, Steve Jaffee and Spencer Henson, Chapter 9: Trade in Spices: the Case of Vanilla from Uganda, Spencer Henson, Steven Jaffee and Gabriel Elepu, Chapter 10: Trade in Natural Products: The Case of Honey, Ramatu Al-Hassan, Gabriel Elepu, Michael Jensen, Spencer Henson, and Paul Siegel, Chapter 11: Upgrading in the Speciality Coffee Sector, Daniele Giovannucci, Luz Rios Diaz and Steve Jaffee, Section 4: Synthesis, Chapter 12: Promoting Smallholder Inclusion in Higher-Value Markets, Steve Jaffee and Spencer Henson

Assessing the Impact of Prospective Trade Reforms: The Case of EU-ACP Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Edited by Oliver Morrissey, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55403-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The European Union (EU) has provided trade preferences to the former colonies of the African, Caribbean and Pacific (ACP) regions since 1975 but these preferences have been of limited value and found to be incompatible with WTO rules. To continue preferences, economic partnership agreements (EPAs) were established, under which the EU and regional groupings of ACP countries offer reciprocal trade preferences to each other. This volume not only assesses EPAs and the impact on ACP countries, but also provides guidance for ACP negotiators in future negotiations and provides an evaluation of methods used to analyse the impact of trade reforms. In addition to overviews of the content and process of EPAs, estimates of impacts on a range of ACP countries and evaluating how they can contribute to development, these chapters focus on specific negotiating concerns such as legal commitments, adjustment costs, impacts on poverty and food security, and regulatory reforms.

CONTENTS 1 Introduction, Oliver Morrissey, 2 Content Analysis of EPAs, Mareike Meyn, 3 EPA Negotiations: An African Perspective, Addis Ababa, 4 Assessing the Economic Impact of EPAs, Addis Ababa, 5 Trade and Welfare Effects on ACP Imports, Oliver Morrissey and Evious K.Zgovu, 6 Adjusting to EPAs: The case of Mauritius, Chris Milner, Oliver Morrissey and Evious K. Zgovu, 7 EPAs and Poverty: A GE Analysis for Uganda, Ole Boysen and Alan Matthews, 8 EPAs, Trade and Households: A GE Analysis for Kenya, Jane Kiringai, 9 EPAs and Food Security, Alan Matthews, 10 Trade Facilitation, Investment and Regulatory Reform, Chris Milner, Oliver Morrissey and Evious K. Zgovu, 11 Monitoring EPAs for Promoting Development, Sanoussi Bilal, 12 Analysing the Effects of Evolving Policy: The Case of EPAs, Christopher Stevens

Credit Cooperatives in India Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Biswa Swarup Misra, Xavier Institute of Management, India PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 216x138 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56699-5; April 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

145 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Credit cooperatives in India make up one of the largest rural financial systems in the world. Playing a vital role in dispensing credit in largely agricultural areas, they are also the weakest link in the formal credit delivery system. This book provides a valuable case study of the traditional banking system in this developing economy, exploring the reasons for the poor performance of credit cooperatives in India and suggesting measures to revitalise them. Although this sector has grown along with the micro-credit sector to provide finance for the poor and the less creditworthy borrowers, financing development still remains a major problem in the developing world.

However, the financial health of credit cooperatives in India has been a matter of perennial concern. The author argues that cooperatives hold great promise for financial inclusion if the financial position of the cooperatives can be consolidated. Providing a detailed analysis of the historical evolution of cooperatives in India, the book establishes the link between different segments of this institutional system and their performance in a commercial sense to show that cooperatives occupy an important place in India’s financial edifice as they play a key role in the multi-agency framework for rural credit delivery. As such, the analysis provides a valuable reference for scholars of economics, Asian economics and finance.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Evolution of Credit Cooperatives in India 3. Revitalising Primary Credit Cooperative in India 4. District Central Cooperative Banks: Reorienting the Middle Tier in the Cooperative Edifice of India 5. The Role of State Cooperative Banks in the Indian Cooperative Structure 6. Interdependence in the Cooperative Credit Structure in India 7. Impact Analysis of Credit Extended by Cooperatives 8. Redesigning the Cooperative Edifice in India

Culture, Institutions, and Development Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Edited by Jean-Philippe Platteau, Facultés Universitaires Notre-Dame de la Paix, Belgium and Robert Peccoud PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58007-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There is a growing re-emergence of the old controversy between Max Weber and Karl Marx, which centres on the issue as to whether cultural factors such as social norms and values can determine real forces or are simply the endogenous outcome of such forces; this is obviously of critical importance, not least because of its policy implications. Indeed, if culture is not an autonomous factor susceptible of influencing economic realities, it does not matter and public authorities can dispense with thinking about cultural interventions. On the contrary, if culture does have real impacts, the question arises as to whether it is conducive or detrimental to economic growth, political liberalization and emancipation of individuals. In this book, these questions are discussed by a group of economists, sociologists and anthropologists in relation to several concrete development issues. Five issues receive primary attention: the role of tradition and its influence on development; the role of religion, with special reference to countries of the Middle East; the role of family, kinship, and ethnic ties in the process of development; the relation between culture and entrepreneurship; and the relation between culture and poverty. With contributions from Marcel Fafchamps, Timur Kuran and Michael Walton, analytical insights, empirical evidence, and policy implications are combined in varying proportions.

CONTENTS Part 1: General reflections and overview of issues , Chapter 1. The role of culture in development: an overview, Jean-Philippe Platteau, Chapter 2. Culture and development: a review of literature, Héla Yousfi , Chapter 3. Culture and development: do social struggles make a difference?, Jean-François Bayart , Part II : Religion, Family and Ethnicity: Three Contributions by Economists , Chapter 4. Economic underdevelopment in the Middle East: the historical roles of culture, institutions, and religion, Timur Kuran , Comments, Mona Makram Ebeid , Chapter 5. Family and kinship ties in development: an economist’s perspective, Eliana La Ferrara , Chapter 6. The demand for disadvantage, Rohini Somanathan , Part 3: Culture and Entrepreneurship , Chapter 7. Markets and the diffusion of institutional innovations, Marcel Fafchamps , Chapter 8. Cultural norms and business development in developing countries, Philippe d’Iribarne , Chapter 9. Invention of enterprise spirit and tradition: a critical perspective, Jean-Pierre Warnier , Part 4: Culture and Poverty Reduction, Chapter 10. Culture matters for poverty, but not because of a culture of poverty - Notes on analytics and policy, Michael Walton , Chapter 11. Two series of comments on Michael Walton’s contribution, Stuti Khemani and Stéphanie Mahieu , Part 5: Conclusion , Chapter 12, Final reflections, Olivier de Sardan

Development Economics in Action Second Edition Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Tony Killick, Overseas Development Institute, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $145.00; 216x138 mm; 518pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47383-5; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

146 First published in 1www.routledge.com/978, Development Economics in Action is a renowned study of policies in Ghana, one of Africa’s most closely watched economies. In this new edition three additional chapters provide a detailed account of 1www.routledge.com/978-2008.

CONTENTS Part A - Nkrumah and his Immediate Successors, 1960-72 1. Introduction 2. Development, Disequilibrium and State Interventionism 3. The Economic Strategies of Nkrumah and his Successors 4. Domestic Economic Performance in the 1960s 5. External Performance: The Foreign Exchange Constraint and its Causes 6. Planning, Saving and Economic Management 7. Modernization without Growth 8. The Unbalanced Growth of Agriculture and Industry 9. The State as Entrepreneur 10. The State as Controller 11.

After Nkrumah: Interpretations of Policies, 1966-72 12. Lessons Part B - The Record since 1972 13. From Implosion to Boom, 19722008 14. Structural Change 1970-2008 15. Forces for Change 1983-2008

Monetary and Financial Integration in West Africa Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Temitope W. Oshikoya, West African Monetary Institute, Ghana PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58008-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Monetary and Financial Integration in West Africa details the progress, challenges faced, and potential of the project intended to create a West African Monetary Zone (WAMZ) between Gambia, Ghana, Guinea, Nigeria and Sierra Leone. Given the trend towards regionalization of economic ties across the world, especially after the successful launch of the euro, a detailed analysis of the WAMZ is needed. As this is the first book on monetary and financial integration in Gambia, Ghana, Guinea, Nigeria and Sierra Leone, it is an essential read for anyone interested in economic development in West Africa, and indeed in Africa as a whole. This book is extremely well-researched, with detail on virtually all aspects of economic integration in the region; with issues ranging from the institutional details of integration, trade and financial market integration, to progress on convergence of macroeconomic fundamentals to the required payments system infrastructure. The book deploys solid empirical facts and sophisticated analyses to thoroughly defend its assertions. This collection is a valuable contribution and an excellent companion book for monetary economics or international economics classes as well as African development literature. It will provide students and researchers with an exciting chance to apply concepts of, for example, optimum currency areas, central bank structure or monetary policy approaches, to a real-world case of potential monetary union. Dr. Temitope W. Oshikoya and his collaborators have written the authoritative book on the subject of monetary union in the West African Monetary Zone. As is evident in the level of detail of the book, Dr. Oshikoya brings rich field experience from his role as Director General and CEO of the West African Monetary Institute. This book will be of interest to postgraduates and researchers in development economics; as well as policymakers, monetary authorities and development practitioners.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Temitope W. Oshikoya Part 1: Economic Integration 2. The political context Temitope W. Oshikoya, John H. Tei Kitcher and Emmanuel Ukeje 3. Analytical framework Temitope.W. Oshikoya, Emmanuel Onwioduokit, and Abu Bakarr Tarawalie 4. Characteristics and structural convergence of the WAMZ economies Temitope W. Oshikoya, Emmanuel Onwioduokit, Abu Bakarr Tarawalie and Rohey Khan 5. Nominal macroeconomic convergence Emmanuel Onwioduokit, lamin Jarju, Tidiane Syllah, Jibrin Yakubu and Hilton Jarrett 6. Fiscal sustainability in the WAMZ Temitope W. Oshikoya, Emmanuel Onwioduokit, Abu Bakarr Tarawalie and Rohey Khan Part 2: Market Integration in the WAMZ 7. Trade integration and a common market Temitope W. Oshikoya, Lanto Harding and Cyprian K. Eboh 8. Financial integration Temitope.W. Oshikoya, Abdoulaye Barry and Emmanuel Adamgbe 9. Payments system infrastructure Chris Odiaka,Twum Ohene-Obeng Tajudeen Nasiru Part 3: Operational and Institutional Framework 10. Monetary policy framework and statistical harmonization Emmanuel Ukeje, Momodu Sissoho and Mohamed Conte 11. Legal and institutional framework Hussein Thomasi, Adeniyi Karunwi, Linda Omolehinwa and Gladys Ku fuor 12. A comparative analysis Temitope W. Oshikoya, John H. Tei Kitcher and Emmanuel Onwioduokit

The Multinational Enterprise in Developing Countries Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Edited by Rick Molz, Catalin Ratiu, both of Concordia University, Canada and Ali Taleb, HEC, Montreal, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49252-2; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A key distinctive feature of Multinational Enterprises (MNEs) as organizations resides in the fact that they span across borders. This exposes them to dissimilar and often unfamiliar social and economic conditions as they venture in foreign countries. MNEs from industrialized economies that are active in developing countries and emerging markets face particularly challenging hurdles due to

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

147 both economic and institutional discrepancies between their home and host countries. This book focuses on the uneasy interaction between the traditional logics of developing countries and the economic logic of MNEs. The traditional logics of most developing countries are built around community-based legitimacy and an intuitive but concrete epistemology. Conversely, the economic logic of MNEs from developed economies is built around technical and economic legitimacy and an abstract intellectual epistemology.

Unpacking the uneasy interactions between these two logics will help achieve MNEs’ objectives of competitiveness in developing countries as well as globally. The Montreal Local Global Research Group is a well recognized research group in formulating and researching local and global issues in strategic management from the perspective of integrating divergent dominant logics into the strategy conceptualization process, and this will be the first book to be dedicated to the study of the interaction between the traditional logic of developing country and the economic logic of Multinational Enterprise (MNE). The cultural diversity of the contributing authors and the multidisciplinary approach offers a fresh perspective from which to explore beneficial corporate and local strategies that promote long-term economic growth consistent with local traditional and cultural norms. This collection will be primarily of interest to scholars of international business, international development, and economics. Furthermore, this book is immediately relevant to decision makers in Multinational corporations, NGOs and political decision makers that mediate the interaction between local actors and corporate agents in developing and transitional economies.

CONTENTS Preface Rick Molz, C?t?lin Ra?iu and Ali Taleb Introduction Rick Molz, C?t?lin Ra?iu and Ali Taleb Part 1: Local-Global View of Multinationals in Developing Countries 1. Organizational and Institutional Rationalities and Western Firms in Emerging Countries: Proposal for a Local/Global Analytical Model Sid Ahmed Soussi 2. Strategy Implementation in Emerging Countries: Three Theoretical Approaches Claude Marcotte, Sid Ahmed Soussi, Rick Molz, Mehdi Farashahi, Taïeb Hafsi Part 2 : Theoretical Considerations 3. West Meets SouthEast: A Cultural Fit of Goal Setting Theory to the Filipino Workforce Pamela Lirio 4. Emergent global institutional logic in the multinational corporation Gwyneth Edwards 5. Political strategies of MNEs in emerging economies: A theoretical model Shoaib Ul-Haw and Mehdi Farashahi 6. Business groups and corporate governance in emerging markets Natalya Totskaya 7. Entrepreneurship, firm size and knowledge transfer to developing and emerging countries Claude Marcotte Part 3: Empirical Perspectives 8. A comparison of foreign acquisitions in the Brazilian Electricity Industry: What determines success?

Marcos Bosquetti, Rick Molz and Taïeb Hafsi 9. Behaviour of MNEs in developing countries: Having a sense of the ‘good’ through ‘smart partnerships’ in Malaysia Rabia Naguib 10. Environment, strategy and leadership patterns as determinants of firm performance: The case of a developing country Taïeb Hafsi and Bernard Gauthier Part 4: Emerging Global Roles of Local Firms 11. Multinationals and corporate environmental strategies: Fostering subsidiary initiative C?t?lin Ra?iu and Rick Molz 12. Emerging multinationals from developing countries: Would their exposure to eclectic institutional conditions grant them unique comparative advantages? Ali Taleb Conclusion 13. The challenges of developing competitive advantage from local and the differential logics Rick Molz, C?t?lin Ra?iu and Ali Taleb

Reform and Development in China Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Edited by Yang L. Yao and Ho-Mou Wu, both of Peking University, China PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00; 234x156 mm; 408pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55948-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Between 1www.routledge.com/978 and 2006, GDP growth in China maintained an annual average rate of 9.7%, meaning the Chinese economy increased by more than twelve times. This was achieved with quite unorthodox approaches to reform and development as China has adopted a gradualist approach to adopting key institutions, as well as modifying and experimenting with traditional recipes for economic growth. This collection brings together key researchers in the field from Asia, US, Europe and Australia to discuss how China has managed to push forward reforms in the face of political resistance, how the Chinese economy has maintained growth within an imperfect institutionalist environment and how the Chinese government remains effective when it relinquishes its power to the market. Specific emphasis is paid to the relevance of China’s experiences to other developing countries. This valuable contribution to the study of China’s economy covers a wide range of topics, including the historical foundations of the 30 years of reform, law and development in China, foreign direct investment, poverty reduction, market integration, income distribution, social protection, as well as demographics and population. Reform and Development in China finds both unique elements to the Chinese experience and elements which can be applied to other developing countries. In particular, China’s gradualism in economic reform, strong leadership, and emphasis on inclusive development are singled out to be potentially transferable to other developing countries. This collection will be of interest to postgraduate students and researchers as well as practitioners in development economics.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Yang Yao and Ho-Mou Wu Part 1: History and International Comparisons 2. China’s Economic Emergence: Possible Lessons for Large Developing Nations David Daokui Li 3. History, Politics and 30 Years of Development and Reform Dwight Perkins 4. Chinese Reforms in Historical and Comparative Perspective Prasenjit Duara 5. Thirty Years of Chinese Reform and Economic Growth: Challenges and How It Has Changed World Development Ross Garnaut Part 2: Sectoral Development 6.

Economic Growth and Income Inequality in China over 30 Years of Reforms Shujie Yao 7. Policy Reforms of Labor Mobility and Urbanization in Transition China Fang Cai 8. Market integration across regions Mary-Francoise Renard 9. The Evolution of Chinese Entrepreneurial Firms: Township-Village Enterprises Revisited Chenggang Xu and Xiaobo Zhang 10. The Relationship between Law and Economic Growth in China Linda Yueh 11. Thirty Years of Catch-up in China: A Comparison with Korea Kuen Lee 12. China’s Income Inequality at the Provincial Level: Trends, Drivers, and Impacts Tun Lin, Juzhong Zhuang, and Damaris Yarcia 13. The Great Transformation: The Double Movement in China Shaoguang Wang Part 3: The Political Economy of the Chinese Experience 14. The

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

148 Disinterested Government: An Interpretation of China’s Economic Growth Yang Yao 15. Is China’s Development Success Transferable? Thomas Rawski 16. China’s Contribution to the Field of Economics: A Laboratory for Induced Institutional Change Gary Jefferson

Social Protection for Africa’s Children Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Edited by Sudhanshu Handa, University of North Carolina, USA, Stephen Devereux, University of Sussex, UK and Douglas Webb, Unicef, Ethiopia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58333-6; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Social protection is currently receiving a great deal of academic and policy attention throughout Africa, but not all policy decisions taken are based on solid evidence. Social protection can be understood as interventions that reduce social vulnerability, economic risk and extreme poverty. Because of the newness of this rapidly evolving agenda, evidence on critical design choices such as targeting, and on impacts of social protection interventions, is mostly limited to case studies or small, unrepresentative surveys. This book makes a major contribution to building the evidence base, drawing on rigorous analysis of social protection programmes in several African countries, as well as original research and thinking on key topical issues in the social protection discourse. In terms of numbers, orphans and vulnerable children (OVC) are the largest vulnerable group in Africa in the context of the ongoing AIDS pandemic. They also face a range of economic and social vulnerabilities that require social protection support of several kinds, from targeted ‘social cash transfers’ to education and health services to legislative change. How effectively are the needs of Africa’s vulnerable children addressed by the "new social protection agenda"? What does "child-sensitive social protection" actually entail? Are the two agendas well aligned, or are children being marginalised by the rapid spread of particular social protection measures? These are some of the questions that this book attempts to answer.

CONTENTS Section I: Context , Chapter 1. Introduction, Sudhanshu Handa, Stephen Devereux & Douglas Webb , Chapter 2. The Case for Child–Oriented Social Protection in Africa Sudhanshu Handa & Stephen Devereux , Section II: Social Transfers: Targeting Children , Chapter 3. Community-Based Targeting of Social Transfers in Kenya, Sudhanshu Handa, Carlos Alviar, Francisco Ayala and Ahmed Hussein , Chapter 4. Reaching OVC through Cash Transfers in Sub-Saharan Africa: Simulation results from alternative targeting schemes, Scott Stewart & Sudhanshu Handa , Section III: Social Transfers: Impacts on Children , Chapter 5. The Impact of Ethiopia's Productive Safety Net Program on Schooling and Child Labour, John Hoddinott, Dan Gilligan & Alemayehu Seyoum Taffesse , Chapter 6. Impacts on Children of Cash Transfers in Malawi, Candace Miller & Kathryn Reichert , Chapter 7.

Quantitative Analysis of the Impacts of South Africa’s Child Support Grant, Michael Samson, Carolyn Heinrich, Ferdinando Regalia, Sheshangai Kaniki, Martin Williams, Tendie Muzondo, Kenneth Mac Quene & Ingrid van Niekerk , Section IV: Social Justice and Child Rights , Chapter 8. The Advantages of a Justiciable Right to Social Assistance: The Case of the Child Support Grant in South Africa, Paula Proudlock , Chapter 9. Children, HIV & AIDS and Social Protection in Africa, Douglas Webb , Chapter 10.

Child Vulnerability and Community Coping Mechanisms in Kenya: Implications for Social Protection Policy in Africa, Erick Nyambedha , Chapter 11. Transformative Social Protection for Africa’s Children, Stephen Devereux & Rachel Sabates–Wheeler

Towards New Developmentalism Routledge Studies in Development Economics

Edited by Shahrukh Rafi Khan and Jens Christiansen, both of Mount Holyoke College, US PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77984-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Neo-liberalism has dominated academic debates and policy choices concerning economic development since the early 1980s.

Although this approach has been vigorously critiqued from different perspectives, these critiques have not coalesced into a recognizable alternative in the development economics literature. The main objective of this book is to formulate and name an alternative to neo-liberalism, identify what is new in this approach, and project it onto the academic landscape. This book draws on the work of early developmentalists and furthers the debate, bringing together old and young scholars alike with important new contributions from Robert Wade and Ha Joon Chang. This book sets the agenda for new developmentalism, drawing on issues such as industrial policy, technology, competition, growth and poverty.

CONTENTS Introduction, I. Setting the agenda , Chapter 1. The market as means rather than master: The crisis of development and the need to rethink the role of government, Robert Wade , Chapter 2. Hamlet without the Prince of Denmark: How development has disappeared from today’s ‘development’ discourse, Ha-Joon Chang , Chapter 3. The economics of failed, failing, and fragile states: productive structure as the missing link, Erik S. Reinert, Yves Ekoué Amaïzo, and Rainer Kattel , II. Constricting the policy agenda and resources

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

149 for an alternative approach, Chapter 4. The pernicious legacy of the rent-seeking paradigm, Helen Shapiro , Chapter 5. Cementing neo-liberalism in the developing world: Ideational and institutional constraints on policy space, Ilene Grabel, Chapter 6. Domestic Resource Mobilization for a New-Developmentalist Strategy: Fiscal Policy Space in Latin America, Luis Abugattas and Eva Pa us, III. Building capacity in the context of economic globalization, Chapter 7. Investment treaties as a constraining framework, Gus Van Harten, Chapter 8. Volatility and crisis in catching-up economies: Industrial path-through under the stickiness of technological capabilities and 'The Red Queen Effect', Mario Cimoli and Gabriel Porcile, IV. Social justice: making production structures poverty, gender, and environment sensitive, Chapter 9. Climate and poverty resilient development: Can foreign direct investment play a positive role?, Lyuba Zarsky , Chapter 10. TBA Gunseli Berik , V. Case studies in pro-active government, Chapter 11. Policies for Industrial Learning in China and Mexico, Kevin P. Gallagher and M. Shafaeddin, Chapter 12. Enhancing the Developmental Impact of Growth in Africa: Challenges and Opportunities, Leonce Ndikumana, Conclusion, Chapter 13. Towards new developmentalism, Shahrukh Rafi Khan

Beyond Reductionism Routledge Studies in Ecological Economics

Edited by Katharine Farrell, University of Aarhus, Denmark, Sybille van der Hove, University of Barcelona, Spain and Tommaso Luzzati, University of Pisa, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47014-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The field of ecological economics, now just over twenty years old, operates at the interface between the two sciences of ecology and economics and is, by definition, concerned with the interplay between two types of complex living systems. It lies, therefore by definition, beyond reductionism – that dominant scientific methodology which dates back to Descartes. In this respect, the story of how ecological economic methods have developed over time is also one of how new scientific methods that lie beyond reductionism have developed. Telling that story is the first basic aim of this book and this is then developed into a state of the art assessment of ecological economics as well as its likely future direction. The tone is defiantly pluralistic and inclusive and the contributors include many of the leading names in the field including Richard Norgaard, Arild Vatn and Malte Faber.

CONTENTS Introduction: What is Reductionism and Why do we Need to Move Beyond it? Part 1: The Idea of ‘Ecological Economics’ 1. The Shape of the Field Joan Martínez-Alier 2. The Enduring Case for Methodological Pluralism Richard Norgaard 3. The Corruptions of Elite Folk Sciences Jerome Ravetz and Samuel Randalls 4. Cutting a Path Beyond Reductionism Mary E. Clark Part 2: Life after Reductionism 5. Building a Career in the Epistemological no Man’s Land Malte Faber 6. Ecofeminism Ariel Salleh, Mary Mellor and Vandana Shiva 7. The Helmholtz Centre for Environmental Research: Conducting Ecological Economics within an Interdisciplinary Research Institute Irene Ring 8. Multi-scale Integrated Assessment Kozo Mayumi, Mario Giampietro and Jesus Ramon-Martin Part 3: Into the Woods: Mapping the Challenges 9. Institutional Factors in the Organisation of Interdisciplinary Research Jouni Paavola 10.

What Lies Beyond Reductionism? Katharine Farrell, Sybille van den Hove and Tommaso Luzzati 11. Epistemelogical and Institutional Issues for the Future Arild Vatn and Richard Norgaard

Carbon Responsibility and Embodied Emissions Routledge Studies in Ecological Economics

João F. D. Rodrigues, Tiago M. D. Domingos, and Alexandra P.S. Marques, all of the Instituto Superior Técnico (IST), Lisbon, Portugal PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 216x138 mm; 128pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47020-9; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Climate change policy and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions are currently discussed at all scales, ranging from the Kyoto Protocol to the increasingly frequent advertisement of ''carbon neutrality'' in consumer products. However, the only policy option usually considered is the reduction of direct emissions. Another potential policy tool, currently neglected, is the reduction of indirect emissions, i.e., the emissions embodied in goods and services, or the payments thereof. This book addresses the accounting of indirect carbon emissions (as embodied in international trade) within the framework of input-output analysis and derives an indicator of environmental responsibility as the average of consumer and producer responsibility. A global multi-regional input-output model is built, using databases on international trade and greenhouse gas emissions, from which embodied carbon emissions and carbon responsibilities are obtained. Carbon Responsibility and Embodied Emissions consists of a theoretical part, concerning the choice of environmental indicators, and an applied part, reporting an environmental multi-regional input-output model. It will be of particular interest to postgraduate students and researchers in Ecological Economics, Environmental Input-Output Analysis, and Industrial Ecology.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

150 1. Introduction 2. Accounting indirect emissions 3. Carbon indicators 4. Carbon responsibility 5. Multi-regional IO model 6. Carbon responsibility of world regions 7. Discussion

Environmental Social Accounting Matrices Routledge Studies in Ecological Economics

Pablo Martínez de Anguita, Yale University, USA and John E. Wagner, State University of New York, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 216x138 mm; 128pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77630-1; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this book Professors Pablo Martínez de Anguita and John E. Wagner put two disciplines together, regional and ecological economics, presenting a way to understand ecological economic concerns from a regional perspective, and providing a mathematical tool to measure their interrelationships. This book offers different regional economic models that explicitly include the role of the natural resources and pollutants in economic regions through the use of Social Accounting Matrixes and Input-output models. The main objective of this book is to explore Input-output and Social Accounting Matrix (SAM) models by expanding the accounts to include natural resources and the environment. The proposed models in this book incorporate the forest and other natural resources and pollutants as a component in a larger model of how the economy and environment of larger areas interact. This book will be of interests to postgraduates, researchers and scientists in the fields of regional, resource, environmental, or ecological economics.

CONTENTS Introduction. 1. Basic Concepts in Natural Resource Economics 2. Regional Input-Output Economic Models. 3. Social Accounting Matrices. 4. Regional Economic Multipliers. 5. Ecosystem and Economic System Framework. 6. The Accounting OS Sustainability in a SAM

Greening the Economy Routledge Studies in Ecological Economics

Robert B. Williams PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57056-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Professor Bob Williams examines the essential elements that give ecosystems their durability. These key characteristics are: selfregulating cycles of key materials, a plentiful and durable energy source, an ability to adjust to changing circumstances, and the capacity for resiliency in the face of unpredictable disruptions. In separate chapters, each of these natural attributes are applied to our economy and 20 polices are recommended to shift our economy toward each of these objectives. The policies include marketable waste emission permits, a "carbon" tax, split-rate property taxation, environmental assurance bonds, a revamped home mortgage deduction, and an inheritance tax. These policies function to implement the principle of full-cost pricing in order to ensure market incentives that encourage environmentally temperate behaviour and decisions. This book will be of interest to students of Ecology and Economics, at undergraduate and postgraduate level alike, as well as anyone seeking an understanding of key ecological concepts that are critical to fully appreciating the role of natural capital in our economic affairs CONTENTS 1. Dueling Paradigms 2. Our Precious Endowment 3. Understanding our Natural Endowment 4. A Tale of Two Energy Crises 5.

Dysfunctional Markets 6. Nature as Guide 7. Closing the Materials Loop 8. Shifting Back to Renewable Energy Sources 9. Economic Succession 10. Economic Resiliency 11. Conclusion

Design Economies and the Changing World Economy Routledge Studies in Human Geography

John Bryson, University of Birmingham, UK and Grete Rusten, University of Bergen, Norway PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46175-7; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Manufacturing and service companies based in high cost locations are increasingly finding it difficult to compete on price with producers located in countries like India and China. Companies located in high-cost locations either have to shift production abroad or

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

151 compete on speed of production, closeness to market, technology and design. This book explores the development and operation of design economies and design-intensive firms; countries and firms whose competitive advantage is founded upon design rather than price. The book develops a comprehensive account of the relationship between design and competitiveness by identifying and exploring the nature of design-based competitive advantage. The concept of a design economy is developed to describe countries that are increasingly creating competitive advantage based on design rather than price. Design economies are explored through an analysis of corporate strategies, the relationship between product and designer, design and designer biographies and design-centred regional and national policies. The analysis is based on the understanding that the design process functions at the intersection between production and consumption. Thus, our analysis explores the interface between consumer behaviour and the development and design of products and services. The focus of the analysis is on firms, individuals as well as national policy. This draws attention to the development of firm- and nation-based design strategies that are intended to enhance competitive advantage. An important part of the argument consists of the identification and analysis of imitators; companies and nations (China and India) that are copying designbased policies and strategies developed in Europe and elsewhere. The possibility exists that Chinese companies may add value to their production processes by ensuring that products are designed rather than just manufactured in China. Design has only recently been identified as a key competitive advantage and this book is the first to provide a comprehensive account of the role of design in both corporate and national competitiveness.

CONTENTS 1. Design Economies and the Changing World Economy; 2. Design Histories; 3. Design Processes ; 4. Design in the Value Chain; 5.

Competing by Design; 6. Spatial Divisions of Design Expertise; 7. Designer Careers; 8. Designing National Competitiveness; 9 Consuming Design; 10. Conclusion

The Globalization of Advertising Routledge Studies in Human Geography

James Faulconbridge, Peter J. Taylor, J.V. Beaverstock and C. Nativel PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56716-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The role of advertising in everyday life and as a major employer in post-industrial economies is in many ways bound up with processes of contemporary globalization. At centre of the advertising industry are the global advertising agencies which have an important role in developing global brands which are reliant on advertising for their worldwide diffusion and also in developing national brands. But how is the production of advertising, whether for national or international markets, organised in leading global agencies? Where does advertising work get done and why do agencies have particular locational geographies that favour some places over others? What impact has outsourcing had on advertising work in cities such as New York and Detroit? This book explores these questions through detailed study of the contemporary work of the advertising industry in three US cities. By drawing on a previously unpublished research that collected insights in the form of quantitative and qualitative data, the book unpacks the contemporary structure and spatial organization of global advertising agencies and the way this is defined by advertising as a cultural product and time-space sensitive service. The geographies of teamwork in contemporary advertising work, intra-organizational power relations and the distribution of organizational capabilities are all explored to reveal how global agencies operate as transnationally integrated organizations. This allows understanding to be developed of the role of the offices of global agencies located in Detroit, Los Angeles and New York City in relational networks of advertising work. In particular, this book reveals how the role of New York, Detroit and Los Angeles in advertising work has changed radically over recent years. These cities in the USA – the preeminent market for advertising – have experienced both growth and decline in employment as a result of their position in global networks of advertising work, networks that operate in the context of the rise of new and emerging centres of advertising in Asia and South America.

Governance and Planning of Mega-City Regions Routledge Studies in Human Geography

Edited by Jiang Xu and G.O. Anthony Yeh, both of Hong Kong University PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 312pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56089-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Neoliberalism’s market revolution has had tremendous effect on contemporary mega-city regions. The negative consequences of market-oriented politics for territorial growth have been recognized. While a lot of attention has been given to how planners and policy makers are fighting back political fragmentation through innovative governance and planning, little has been done to reveal such practices through an international comparative perspective. Governance and Planning of Mega-City Regions provides a comparative treatment and examination of how new approaches in governance and planning are reshaping mega-city regions around the world. The contributors highlight how European mega-city regions are evolving and strategic intervention redefined to enable the integration of urban qualities in a multi-level governance environment, how traditional federal countries in North America and Australia see the promise of major policies and development initiatives finally moving ahead to herald a more strategic intervention at national and regional scales, and how transitional economies in China witness the rise of state strategies to control the articulation of

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

152 scales and to reassert the functional importance of state in a growing diffused power context. This book offers case studies written from a variety of theoretical and political perspectives by world leading scholars. It will appeal to upper level undergraduates, postgraduates, researchers and policymakers interested in urban and regional planning, geography, sociology, public administrations and development studies.

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Governance and Planning of Mega-City Regions: Diverse Processes and Reconstituted State Spaces Jiang Xu and Anthony G.O. Yeh Part I: Multi-Level Governance and Planning in Europe Chapter 2: The Polycentric Metropolis: a Western European Perspective on Mega-City Regions Sir Peter Hall Chapter 3: Innovations in Governance and Planning: Randstad Cooperation Willem Salet Chapter 4: Strategic Planning and Regional Governance in Europe: Recent Trends and Policy Responses Louis Albrechts Part II: Multi-Polity Governance and Planning in Federacy Chapter 5: Novel Spatial Formats: Megaregions and Global Cities Saskia Sassen Chapter 6: America 2050: Towards a Twenty-first Century National Infrastructure Investment Plan for the United States Robert D. Yaro Chapter 7: Mega-City Regional Cooperation in the United States and Western Europe: A Comparative Perspective Linda McCarthy Chapter 8: Regions of Cities: Metropolitan Governance and Planning in Australia John Abbott Chapter 9: The Upper Spencer Gulf Common Purpose Group: A Model of Intra - Regional Cooperation for Economic Development Jim Harvey and Brian Cheers Part III: State-Led Governance and Planning under Transition Chapter 10: Coordinating the Fragmented Mega-City Regions in China: State Reconstruction and Regional Strategic Planning Jiang Xu and Anthony G.O. Yeh Chapter 11: Spatial Planning for Urban Agglomeration in the Yangtze River Delta Chaolin Gu, Taofang Yu, Xiaoming Zhang, Chun Wang, Min Zhang, Cheng Zhang and Lu Chen

Transitions to Sustainable Development Routledge Studies in Sustainability Transitions

John Grin, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands, Jan Rotmans, Erasmus University Rotterdam, the Netherlands and Johan Schot, Technische Universiteit Eindhoven, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ30.00 $50.00; 229x152 mm; 398pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87675-9; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85659-8; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Over the past few decades, there has been a growing concern about the social and environmental risks which have come along with the progress achieved through a variety of mutually intertwined modernization processes. In recent years these concerns are transformed into a widely-shared sense of urgency, partly due to events such as the various pandemics threatening livestock, and increasing awareness of the risks and realities of climate change, and the energy and food crises. This sense of urgency includes an awareness that our entire social system is in need of fundamental transformation. But like the earlier transition between the 1750s and 1890s from a pre-modern to a modern industrial society, this second transition is also a contested one. Sustainable development is only one of many options. This book addresses the issue on how to understand the dynamics and governance of the second transition dynamics in order to ensure sustainable development. It will be necessary reading for students and scholars with an interest in sustainable development and long-term transformative change.

CONTENTS List of Figures. List of Tables. List of Textboxes. Foreword by Carlota Perez. Preface. Introduction: From Persistent Problems to System Innovations and Transitions Part I: The Dynamics of Transitions: A Socio-Technical Perspective Chapter I.1: Introduction: Exploration of the Research Topic Chapter I.2: A Multi-Level Perspective on Transitions Chapter I.3: Theoretical Backgrounds: Crossovers STS, Evolutionary Economics, and Sociology Chapter I.4: A Typology of Transition Pathways Chapter I.5: Managing Sustainable Innovation Journeys Chapter I.6: Reflections: Process Theory, Causality and Narrative Explanation Part II: Towards a Better Understanding of Transitions and Their Governance: A Systemic and Reflexive Approach Chapter II.1: Introduction Chapter II.2: A Complex Integrated Systems Perspective Chapter II.3: Conceptual Framework for Analyzing Transitions Chapter II.4: Research into the Governance of Transitions: A Framework for Transition Management Chapter II.5: Case Study I: Parkstad Limburg: Regional Transition Management Chapter II.6: Case Study II: The Dutch Energy Transition Chapter II.7: Self-Evaluation of the Development and Prospects of Transition Management Part III: Understanding Transitions from a Governance Perspective Chapter III.1: Introduction Chapter III.2: Contemporary Processes of Institutional Change Chapter III.3: Modernization Processes in Dutch Agriculture, 1886 to the Present Chapter III.4: The Governance of Transitions: An Agency Perspective Chapter III.5: Modernization as Multilevel Dynamics: Lessons from Dutch Agriculture Chapter III.6: Governance of Transitions: An Analytical Perspective.

Conclusion: How to Understand Transitions? How to Influence Them?: Synthesis and Lessons for Further Research. Notes.

References. Index.

Companion to Urban Design Edited by Tridib Banerjee, University of Southern California, USA and Anastasia Loukaitou-Sideris, University of Los Angeles, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ110.00 $180.00; 246x189 mm; 608pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55364-3; August 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

153 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Today urban design has emerged as an important area of intellectual pursuit, involving theory, research, and pedagogy, all intended to inform and improve appearance and design of cities and the quality of the built environment. The practice of urban design has applications at many different scales -- ranging from the block or street to the metropolitan and regional landscapes, with such intermediate scales of applications as planned new communities, or conservation and design of urban neighborhoods. The field interfaces with many aspects of contemporary public policy: multiculturalism, healthy cities, environmental justice, economic development, climate change, energy conservation, sustainable development, community livability, and related issues. The companion includes original contributions from a select group of internationally renowned scholars and practitioners, addressing such questions as: What are the intellectual roots of urban design? Who are the important thinkers? What are its important research issues? What are its current best practices? What are the current innovations in its pedagogy? What are the major debates, conflicts, and contradictions?

Which are the important global trends shaping the urban design practice? What are its significant disciplinary influences? The chapters are organized in the following themes: roots; theoretical perspectives; influences; technologies and methods; process; components; debates; global trends; and new directions. A basic knowledge of urban design is a requirement not just for graduate or undergraduate professional studies in architecture, landscape architecture, and urban planning, but also in urban studies, urban affairs, geography, and related fields. While there are introductory readers and text books in urban design, there has never been a more authoritative and comprehensive companion to these readers that includes core, foundational, and pioneering ideas and concepts, a volume that will serve not only the students and future professionals, but also the scholars, teachers, and practitioners of urban design.

CONTENTS Introduction Tridib Banerjee and Anastasia Loukaitou-Sideris Part I Roots: 1. From CIAM to CNU: The Roots and Thinkers of Modern Urban Design Eugenie Birch 2. Design Paradigms Robert Fishman 3. Pedagogical Traditions Danilo Pal

Globalisation and Advertising in Emerging Economies Lynne Ciochetto, Massey University, Wellington, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56200-3; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyses four of the largest and most dynamic contemporary emerging economies. Brazil, Russia, India and China are the countries that will drive growth in the world economy in the next decades. Using an interdisciplinary approach that combines anthropology, sociology, development studies and the cultural industries of design and advertising, the book explores the dynamics of global capitalism from the perspective of global advertising. A series of country studies examines contemporary global advertising through political, economic and cultural perspectives. Bringing together fields of analysis that are usually discrete, or as in the case of advertising only superficially investigated, Globalisation and Advertising in Emerging Economies provides fresh insights about contemporary global priorities. The author argues that advertising plays a key role linking culture and the economy. By presenting individual case studies of advertising campaigns examples of the globalisation of specific brands are offered. Environmental implications of the expansion of advertising and its role in stimulating consumerism are explored in the context of the four emerging economies. The book offers a comparison and contrast of the individual country profiles and makes an assessment of the validity of the argument regarding their projected importance and the likelihood of their future dominance of the global economy.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Capitalism, Globalisation, Advertising, Consumerism and the Environment 2. Brazil 3. Russia 4. India 5. China 6.

Conclusion

Handbook of Local and Regional Development Edited by Andy Pike, Newcastle University, UK, Andres Rodriguez-Pose, London School of Economics, UK and John Tomaney, Newcastle University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £110.00 $180.00; 246x174 mm; 704pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54831-1; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Handbook of Local and Regional Economic Development provides a comprehensive statement and reference point for local and regional development in an international and multi-disciplinary context. Specifically, it aims to provide critical reviews and appraisals of the current state of the art and future development of conceptual and theoretical approaches as well as empirical knowledge and understanding of local and regional development, to encourage dialogue across the disciplinary barriers between notions of ‘local and regional development’ in the Global North and ‘development studies’ in the Global South through the international reach and scope of its coverage and contributors and to engage with and reflect upon the politics and policy of how we think about and practice local and regional development. An introduction sets out the rationale, aims and structure of the Handbook. The Handbook is organised into seven inter-related sections. Section 1 situates local and regional development in its global context. Section 2 establishes the key

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

154 issues in understanding the principles and values that help us define what is meant by local and regional development. Section 3 critically reviews the current diversity and variety of conceptual and theoretical approaches to local and regional development. Section 4 addresses questions of government and governance. Section 5 connects critically with the array of contemporary approaches to local and regional development policy. Section 6 is an explicitly global review of perspectives on local and regional development from Africa, Asia-Pacific, Latin America, North America and Europe. Section 7 provides reflection and discussion of the futures for local and regional development in an international and multidisciplinary context. The Handbook seeks to establish local and regional development in an international and multidisciplinary context. Its main contributions comprise, first, encouraging an approach that reflects upon and questions what we mean by ‘development’ locally and regionally in economic, social, cultural, ecological and political terms. Second, it underlines the importance of questioning the appropriateness of any ‘spaceless’ and/or ‘placeless’ generalised theory, policy and practice of local and regional development and emphasises the need to develop more context-sensitive approaches to local and regional development wedded to more foundational concerns such as democracy, equity, internationalism and solidarity. Last, it promotes an appreciation of politics and power relations and practice in multi-level, multi-agent and devolving systems of government and governance and the normative dimensions of value judgements about the kinds of local and regional development we should be pursuing.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: A handbook of local and regional development Andy Pike, Andrés Rodríguez-Pose and John Tomaney Section I: Local and regional development in a global context 2. Globalisation and regional development Seán Ó Riain 3 Territorial competition Ian Gordon 4. Local and regional ‘development studies’ Giles Mohan Section II: Defining the principles and values of local and regional development 5. Regional disparities and equalities: towards a capabilities perspective? Diane Perrons 6. Inclusive growth: meaningful goal or mirage? Ivan Turok 7. The green state: Sustainability and the power of purchase Kevin Morgan 8. Alternative approaches to local and regional development Allan Cochrane Section III: Concepts and theories of local and regional development 9.

Spatial circuits of value Ray Hudson 10. Labour and local and regional development Andy Herod 11. Local and regional development: a global production network approach Neil M. Coe and Martin Hess 12. Evolutionary approaches to local and regional development policy Robert Hassink and Claudia Klaerding 13. Innovation, learning, and knowledge creation in co-localised and distant contexts Harald Bathelt 14. Culture, creativity, and urban development Dominic Power and Allen J. Scott 15. Post-socialism and transition Boles?aw Doma?ski 16. Migration and commuting: local and regional development links Mike Coombes and Tony Champion 17. Within and outwith/Material and political? Local economic development and the spatialities of economic geographies Roger Lee 18. Spaces of social innovation Frank Moulaert and Abid Mehmood 19. Forging post-development partnerships: possibilities for local and regional development J.K. Gibson-Graham Section IV: Government and governance 20. The state: government and governance Bob Jessop 21. Putting ‘the political’ back into the region: Power, agency and a reconstituted regional political economy Andy Cumbers and Danny MacKinnon 22. Territorial/relational: Conceptualizing spatial economic governance Martin Jones and Gordon MacLeod 23. Institutional geographies and local economic development: policies and politics Kevin R. Cox 24. Carbon control regimes, eco-state restructuring and the politics of local and regional development Andrew E.G. Jonas, Aidan H. While and David C. Gibbs 25. Competitive cities and problems of democracy Colin Crouch 26. The politics of local and regional development Andrew Wood 27. Spatial planning and territorial development policy Peter Ache Section V: Local and regional development policy 28. Endogenous approaches to local and regional development policy Franz Tödtling 29. Territorial competitiveness and local and regional economic development: a classic tale of ‘theory led by policy’ Gillian Bristow 30. Finance and local and regional economic development Felicity Wray, Neill Marshall and Jane Pollard 31. Green dreams in a cold light Susan Christopherson 32. SMEs, entrepreneurialism and local/regional development Costis Hadjimichalis 33. Transnational corporations and local and regional development Stuart Dawley 34. Innovation networks and local and regional development policy Mário Vale 35.

Universities and regional development John Goddard and Paul Vallance 36. Transportation networks, the logistics revolution, and regional development John T. Bowen Jr. and Thomas R. Leinbach 37. (Im)migration, local, regional and uneven development Jane Wills, Kavita Datta, Jon May, Cathy McIlwaine, Yara Evans and Joanna Herbert 38. Neoliberal urbanism in Europe Sara Gonzalez 39. Gender, migration and socio-spatial transformations in Southern European cities Dina Vaiou Section VI: Global perspectives 40.

The experience of local and regional development in Africa Etienne Nel 41. Local and regional development in Asia Pacific ShiuhShen Chien 42. Local development: a response to the economic crisis. Lessons from Latin America Antonio Vázquez-Barquero 43.

North American perspectives on local and regional development Nancey Green Leigh and Jennifer Clark 44. Area definition and classification and regional development finance: the European Union and China Michael Dunford Section VII: Conclusions and futures 45. The language of local and regional development Phillip O’Neill 46. The evaluation of local and regional development policy Dave Valler 47. The new regional governance and the hegemony of neoliberalism. All change – no change? John Lovering 48.

Local left strategy now Jamie Gough and Aram Eisenschitz 49. Local and regional development conclusions and futures Andy Pike, Andrés Rodríguez-Pose and John Tomaney

Handbook of Urban Ecology Edited by Ian Douglas, University of Manchester, UK, David Goode, University College London, UK, Mike Houck, Portland State University, USA and Rusong Wang, Chinese Academy of Sciences, China PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £110.00 $180.00; 246x189 mm; 608pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49813-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The birds, animals, insects, trees and plants encountered by the majority of the world’s people are those that survive in, adapt to, or are introduced to, urban areas. Some of these organisms give great pleasure; others invade, colonise and occupy neglected and hidden areas such as derelict land and sewers. Urban ecology analyses this biodiversity and complexity and provides the science to guide policy and management to make cities more attractive, more enjoyable, and better for our own health and that of the planet. This book

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

155 provides a state-of the art guide to the science, practice and value of urban ecology to help everyone understand and enjoy their urban habitat. Original contributions from leading academics and practitioners from across the world provide an in-depth coverage of the main elements of practical urban ecology. The sixty five chapters provide practitioners and students with the wealth of interdisciplinary information needed to manage the biota and green landscapes in urban areas. In six parts it deals with the philosophies, concepts and history of urban ecology; followed by consideration of the biophysical character of the urban environment and the diverse habitats found within it. It then examines human relationships with urban nature, the health, economic and environmental benefits of urban ecology before discussing the methods used in urban ecology and ways of putting the science into practice. Urban areas have high biodiversity. Urban gardens and vegetable plots have multiple benefits, from helping to reduce greenhouse gases to providing insect and bird habitats. Encounters with nature in cities help to improve our physical and mental health. The ecosystem services provided by nature in cities include cooling the urban area, reducing urban flood risks, filtering pollutants, supplying some of our food, and giving opportunities for accessible recreation. Yet protecting urban nature faces competition from other urban land uses.

CONTENTS Part 1: Context, History and Philosophies: Introduction 1. Urban Ecology: Goals and Definitions N. E. Mcintyre 2. The Analysis of Cities as Ecosystems 3. Urban Complexity Analysis: Social-Economic-Natural Complex Ecosystem Approach Rusong Wang 4. Urban Ecology and Industrial Ecology Xuemei Bai 5. Urban Areas in the Context of Human Ecology Roderick J. Lawrence 6. The Politics of Providing for Nature and for Human Well-being and Economic Activities in Cities 7. Environmental and Intergenerational Justice: From Victorian Paternalism to ‘Intergenerational Denial’ 8. The Human Relationship with Nature: Rights of Animals and Plants in the Urban Context Jason Byrne 9. Urban Areas in the Context of Human Ecology Roderick J. Lawrence 10. Urban Natural Histories: Steps in the Path to Urban Ecology 11. Urban Greenspace Conservation: The History of Urban Greenspace Hazel Conway 12. History of Planning for Nature in Cities David Goode 13. Economic Imperialism and its Lessons for Nature in Cities Anna Chiesura Part 2: The Urban Ecological Environment: Introduction 14. The Climate of Cities Sue Grimmond 15. The Urban Heat Island Dr. T.R. Oke 16. Indoor Microclimatic Environments 17. Urban Rainfall J. Marshall Shepherd 18. Urban Hydrology and Drainage Ing. Erik Pasche 19. Urban Geomorphology: Modified and Urban Land Forms Ian Douglas 20. Urban Soils Peter J. Marcotullio 21. The Process of Natural Succession in Urban Areas Wayne C. Zipperer 22. Recombinant Ecology in Urban Areas 23. Restoration Ecology Stephen Handel 24. Creative Ecology Grant Luscombe and Richard Scott Part 3: The Nature Of Urban Habitats: Introduction 25. Paved, Roofed, Densely Built-up Urban Complexes Devoid of Vegetation and Water Bodies C. Philip Wheater 26. Urban cliffs 27. Suburban Mosaic of Houses, Roads, Gardens and Mature Trees Alison Loram 28. Corridor Zones of Wild Plants Jon Sadler 29. Landscaped Parks and Open Spaces Martin Hermy 30. Derelict Land and Construction Sites B. Strauss and R.Biedermann 31. Grassland on Reclaimed Soil, with Streets, Car Parks and Buildings but Few or no Mature Trees Tony Kendle 32. Urban Contaminated Land Mike Rivett and Jon Sadler 33. Small Woodland and Rural Areas Within the City C.Y. Jim 34. Water Bodies 35. Wetlands and Muchmodified Water Bodies Joan G. Ehrenfeld, Emilie Stander, Monica Palta 36. Urban Animal Ecology: Wildlife and Pets Peter Jarvis 37. Feral Animals in the Urban Environment Peter Jarvis Part 4: Ecosystem Services And Urban Ecology: Introduction 38. The Human Values of Urban Ecosystems: An Overview Marina Alberti 39. Intrinsic and Aesthetic Values of Urban Nature: Two Views David Nicholson-Lord, Rachel Kaplan 40. Urban Nature and Human Physical Health Jenna H. Tilt 41. Urban Nature and Human Psychological and Social Mental Health William C. Sullivan 42. Urban Street Trees and the Urban Environment Gerald Dawe 43.

Urban Vegetation and Urban Runoff 44. Urban Gardens and Biodiversity K.J. Gaston 45. Recreational Values of Urban Nature C.Y. Jim 46. Urban Agricultural Ecology 47. The Ecology of Urban Drainage Part 5: Methodologies: Introduction 48. Urban Habitat Analysis Penny Angold 49. Urban Habitat Type Mapping Peter Jarvis 50. Analysis of Urban Introduced and Invasive Species 51.

Analysis of Urban Environmental Influences on Speciation 52. Urban Biogeochemical Flux Analysis Nancy Grimm 53. Urban Metabolism Analysis Shu-Li Huang 54. Urban Greenspace Quality and Function Rusong Wang Part 6 Applications And Policy Implications: Introduction 55. Urban Greenspace Standards John Box 56. Urban Areas and the Biosphere Reserve Concept Pete Frost 57. Urban Greenspace and Adaptation to Climate Change John Handley 58. Urban Ecology and Sustainable Urban Drainage Peter Worrall 59. Green Roofs, Urban Trees and Urban Runoff Joachim Tourbier 60. Urban Ecology and Multiple Purpose Floodplain Use 61. Achieving Benefits from Urban Wildlife and Urban Nature Conservation Mathew Frith 62 . Urban Ecology in a Regional Context: Integrating the Urban Green with Rural Areas Joe Ravetz 63. Biodiversity as a Statutory Component of Urban Planning David Goode 64. Making Urban Ecology a Key Element in Urban Development and Planning John Stewart Murray 65.Towards Ecopolis: New Technologies, New Philosophies and New Developments Rusong Wang Conclusion

Sustainability in European Transport Policy Matthew Humphreys, Kingston University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57831-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The construction of the European Economic Communities in 1950 primarily set out to build an integrated economic zone in which national borders were, to a large extent, overcome. The ability of persons and goods to move freely within the economic zone was seminal in the realisation of economic integration. Underlying this, and therefore an implied necessity for European growth, an effective transport infrastructure was essential. However, with rising awareness of environmental issues, and a closer regard to sustainability of development, European transport systems and their regulation have come under scrutiny. This book puts forward a critical analysis of the body of law and policy initiatives that constitute the EU's common transport policy. The development of the transport policy is charted through amending and founding Treaties as well as non-legislative documents. The book uses a model of sustainability as the basis for the analysis as the criteria for sustainable development were set out under Article 6 of the Treaty of Rome. However, sustainable development, when taken in the context of transport is difficult to reconcile with unbridled economic

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

156 growth and unchecked freedom of movement and the book identifies a contradiction at the heart of European policy which can only become more accentuated as environmental trends become more explicit. The book argues that European regulation will eventually be forced to recognize this dichotomy, and take more forceful action to protect environmental and social development, even at the cost of economic progress.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Legislation and policy context of the Common Transport Policy 3. The relationship between law, policy and economic instruments in transport policy 4. Sustainability in transport policy 5. Pricing, permits, charges and incentives in transport policy 6. Integrating sustainability into an integrating market: towards a more sustainable transport policy 7. Conclusion

Constantine and the Christian Empire Roman Imperial Biographies

Charles M. Odahl PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 432pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57534-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Constantine and the Christian Empire is the most thoroughly researched, accessibly readable, fully illustrated and completely documented portrayal of the life and times of the first Christian emperor available in recent decades. In a seamless combination of vivid narrative and historical analysis, Dr. Odahl has compellingly related the multiple crises and massive reforms of the late Roman world, the political career and military campaigns of the great emperor Constantine, his religious conversion to and public patronage of Christianity, and his building programs in Rome, Jerusalem, and Constantinople which transformed the pagan state of antiquity into the Christian empire of Byzantium. The author’s comprehensive knowledge of the literary sources and his extensive research into the material remains of the period mean that this volume provides a more rounded and accurate portrait of Christian emperor than ever before. Extensively illustrated and fully documented, Constantine and the Christian Empire has been a landmark publication in Roman imperial, early Christian, and Byzantine history. A genealogy chart, additional illustrations, an expanded final chapter, and updated notes and bibliography in this new edition allow this book to remain the standard account of the subject for years to come.

CONTENTS 1. The Subject and Ancient Sources 2. The Imperial Crisis and Illyrian Emperors 3. The First Tetrarchy and the Caesar's Son 4. The Gallic Emperor and the Dying Persecutors 5. The Italian Campaign and Constantine's Conversion 6. Religious Concerns and Apostolic Rome 7. The Eastern Crusade and the Nicene Council 8. The Dynastic Tragedy and Helena's Pilgrimage 9. Imperial Concerns and Christian Constantinople 10. The Final Campaigns and the Emperor's Heirs 11. The Thirteenth Apostle and the Christian Empire 12. The Legacy and Modern Interpretations

Public Health and the US Military Routledge Advances in American History

Bobby A. Wintermute, Queens College, CUNY, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 230pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88170-8; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Public Health and the US Military is a history of the United States Army Medical Department’s activities before and during the Progressive Era. A period of tremendous social change, this time bore witness to the creation of an ideology of public health that influences public policy even today. The US Army Medical Department exerted tremendous influence on the methods adopted by the nation’s leading civilian public health figures and agencies at the turn of the twentieth century. Moreover the Army’s medical officers crafted a series of compelling frameworks for contextualizing racial identity and sexual morality which also influenced American perceptions of their place in the world and how they could best act to transform the physical environment to sustain whiteness in the tropics. A second critical aspect of the book recounts how medical officers struggled to acquire legitimate authority as uniformed partners to the Army’s line and staff officers. The first large conceptual overview of the role of the US Army Medical Department in American society during the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, this book details the institutional culture and quest for legitimacy of an institution dedicated to promoting public health and scientific medicine in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Practice, Status, Public Health, and the Army Medical Officer, 1818-1890 2. The Medical Officer’s Quest for Identity in ‘The New School of Scientific Medicine,’ 1861-1898 3. The Other War of 1898: The Army Medical Department’s St

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

157

The Politics and Memory of Democratic Transition Routledge/Canada Blanch Studies on Contemporary Spain

Edited by Diego Muro and Gregorio Alonso, both of King's College London, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99720-1; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Spain’s political transition to democracy is often lauded as the benchmark by which many other countries explicitly declared to have measured their own democratic progress. 2008 marks the 30th Anniversary of the Spanish Constitution, and public interest in the democratization, transition, and comparative politics of this period is higher than ever before. Designed to evaluate the paradigmatic view of the Spanish transition as an ideal model for political and social change, this new and innovative volume appraises the movement towards a more democratic Spain from a variety of important perspectives including the selection of an electoral system, the role of the church, the effect of the European Community, the output of cultural products such as cinema and television, the Basque experience, and the "Pact of Oblivion," an unwritten agreement not to prosecute those involved in abuses committed by the Francoist regime. By making comparisons to other democratic transitions, synthesizing the ideas of several leading Spanish History scholars, as well as incorporating new voices involved in creating the directions of research to come, The Spanish Model offers a thorough and vital look at this key period in contemporary Spanish history, taking stock of critical lessons to be gleaned from the Spanish Transition, and pointing the way toward its future as a democratic nation.

CONTENTS Introduction Dr Diego Muro & Dr Gregorio Alonso (King’s College London) 1. The Spanish Model Revisited by Professor Richard Gunther (University of Ohio) SECTION I: POLITICS 2. The Selection of an Electoral System: Less Consensus, more herest

Rural Women in the Soviet Union and Post-Soviet Russia Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series

Liubov Denisova, Russian State University of Oil and Gas PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55112-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This is the first full-length history of Russian peasant women in the 20th century in English; it fills a significant gap in the existing literature on rural studies and gender studies of the twentieth century Russia and is the first to take the story into the twenty-first century. The book offers a comprehensive overview of regulations concerning rural women: their employment patterns; marriages, divorces and family life; issues with health and raising children. Rural lives in the Soviet Union were often dramatically different from the common narrative of the Soviet history. The lives of rural women were even more demanding than those of other Soviet women, and even during the Khrushchev ‘Thaw’ in the late 1950s and early 1960s, rural women were excluded from reforms and liberating policies it promoted. The author, Luibov Denisova, is a leading expert in the field of rural gender history in Russia. She includes material from previously unavailable or unpublished collections and archives in Moscow, St Petersburg, Archangel, and Vologda; also interviews and sociological research conducted in thirty different Russian villages, alongside oral traditions such as folk songs and chastooshkas among peasant women in Russia. Overall, the book is a history of all rural women, from ordinary farm girls to agrarian professionals to prostitutes; it paints a unique and complete picture of rural women’s life in the Soviet Union and post-Soviet Russia.

CONTENTS PART I. Employment patterns among rural women 1. Unskilled labor in the countryside 2. Female mechanics and machines operators 3. Women at the animal wards 4. Women as collective farm leaders and agricultural specialists 5. Rural intelligentsia 6. Migration to cities and the position of newcomers PART II. Private Life 7. The politics of private life: the evolution and transformation of the Soviet Family Code 8. Marriages 9. Conflicts and divorces 10. Domostroi 11. Alcoholism in the countryside 12. The female face of the criminal world 13. Women of the oldest profession 14. Religion 15. Triple-burden lifestyle 16. Household chores 17. The special environment of the village life 18. Protection of childhood and motherhood in the countryside 19. Abortions

Religious Dissent in the Roman Empire Routledge Monographs in Classical Studies

Vasily Rudich, Yale University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $110.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-16106-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

158 This is the third in Rudich's trilogy on the intellectual roots of opposition to Nero's rule. The author's approach is based in his own experience, as a Russian exile, of the dissident mentality in the former Soviet Union, which gives the critical treatment of the sources an intriguing personal slant. The book begins with an historical perspective on Rome's relationship with the Greeks and the Jews from their earliest contacts through the period of expansion to the fall of the Roman republic, and further chapters are dedicated to the Principate of Augustus, Judaea's 'triple administration', the political and cultural vicissitudes of Greeks, Jews and Christians in the period between the death of Augustus and the accession of Nero, the beginnings of the Christian Church, and the conditions of the Jewish community in Rome.

Theorizing a Colonial Caribbean-Atlantic Imaginary Routledge Research in Atlantic Studies

Keith Sandiford, Louisiana State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87689-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book theorizes a Caribbean-Atlantic imaginary that names the specific orders of ontology and knowledge in which the consciousnesses of Amerindians, Africans and Europeans found expression in the colonial West Indies. Examining the literature that bookmarked the origins and demise of slavocratic systems in the Caribbean--Richard Ligon’s History of Barbados (1657) and Matthew ‘Monk’ Lewis’Journal of a West India Proprietor (1834)--Sandiford defines the imaginary as a model for the collective mentalities of a particular group of people in which are reflected the archives of their cultural knowledge, the repository from which they draw their shared values, their symbolic meanings and their common beliefs.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Methodology 2. Sugar and the Ocean 3. Richard Ligon in the Cape Verdes 4. Richard Ligon in Barbados 5. Matthew ‘Monk’ Lewis (i) 6. Matthew ‘Monk’ Lewis (ii) 7. Conclusion

Theorizing Medieval Geopolitics Routledge Research in Medieval Studies

Andrew Latham, Macalester College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87184-6; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Over the past two decades or so, medieval geopolitics have come to occupy an increasingly prominent place in the collective imagination—and writings—of International Relations scholars. Although these accounts differ significantly in terms of their respective analytical assumptions, theoretical concerns and scholarly contributions, they share at least one common – arguably, defining – element: a belief that a careful study of medieval geopolitics can help resolve a number of important debates surrounding the nature and dynamics of "international" relations. There are however three generic weaknesses characterizing the extant literature: a general failure to examine the existing historiography of medieval geopolitics, an inadequate account of the material and ideational forces that create patterns of violent conflict in medieval Latin Christendom, and a failure to take seriously the role of "religion" in the geopolitical relations of medieval Latin Christendom. This book seeks to address these shortcomings by providing a theoretically guided and historically sensitive account of the geopolitical relations of medieval Latin Christendom. It does this by developing a theoretically informed picture of medieval geopolitics, theorizing the medieval-to-modern transition in a new and fruitful way, and suggesting ways in which a systematic analysis of medieval geopolitical relations can actually help to illuminate a range of contemporary geopolitical phenomena. Finally, it develops an historically sensitive conceptual framework for understanding geopolitical conflict and war more generally.

Cicero and the Catilinarian Conspiracy Routledge Studies in Ancient History

Charles Odahl, Boise State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 102pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87472-4; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This story of Cicero and the Catilinarian Conspiracy is set within and offers a case study of the political, military, economic and social crises besetting the late Roman Republic in the era of the "Roman Revolution." The book chronicles the efforts of the defeated radical

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

159 politician Lucius Sergius Catilina to bring together a group of disaffected Roman nobles and discontented Italian farmers in a conspiracy to overthrow the republican government at Rome and to take control of the Italian peninsula (while the proconsul Pompey the Great and the majority of Roman military units were campaigning in the Near East), and the success of the conservative optimate consul Marcus Tullius Cicero in uncovering the conspiracy, driving Catiline out of Rome, and defeating his revolutionary followers in the capital and in Etruria. The narrative reveals the political corruption, economic problems, and military instability which were leading to the demise of the republican system and the rise of an imperial government in the first century B.C. The author’s comprehensive knowledge of the ancient sources and the modern scholarship relevant to the last century of the republic has allowed him to offer a detailed and definitive account of this important episode in Roman history. In the same seamless combination of vivid narrative and historical analysis through which he enlightened the Roman imperial age of Constantine, Dr. Odahl here illuminates the Roman republican era of Cicero. This book is a significant publication in Ciceronian studies and will become the standard account of the Catilinarian Conspiracy.

CONTENTS Preface Illustrations Chronology I. The Subject and the Ancient Sources II. The Late Republican Setting III. Catiline and the Radical Politicians IV. Cicero and the Conservative Coalition V. The Conspiracy of Catiline VI. The Victory of Cicero V

Medieval Monstrosity and the Female Body Routledge Studies in Medieval Religion and Culture

Sarah Alison Miller, Duquesne University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $105.00; 229x152 mm; 242pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87359-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The medieval monster is a slippery construct, and its referents include a range of religious, racial, and corporeal aberrations. In this study, Miller argues that one incarnation of monstrosity in the Middle Ages—the female body—exists in special relation to medieval teratology insofar as it resists the customary marginalization that defined most other monstrous groups in the Middle Ages. Though medieval maps located the monstrous races on the distant margins of the civilized world, the monstrous female body took the form of mother, sister, wife, and daughter. It was, therefore, pervasive, proximate, and necessary on social, sexual, and reproductive grounds.

Miller considers several significant texts representing authoritative discourses on female monstrosity in the Middle Ages: the PseudoOvidian poem, De vetula (The Old Woman) ; a treatise on human generation erroneously attributed to Albert the Great, De secretis mulierum (On the Secrets of Women) , and Julian of Norwich’s Showings . Through comparative analysis, Miller grapples with the monster’s semantic flexibility while simultaneously working towards a composite image of late-medieval female monstrosity whose features are stable enough to define. Whether this body is discursively constructed as an Ovidian body, a medicalized body, or a mystical body, its corporeal boundaries fail to form properly: it is a body out of bounds.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction: The Monstrous Borders of the Female Body 1: Ovidian Poetry, Virgins, Mothers, and Monsters: Ovidian and Pseudo-Ovidian Bodies 2: Gynecology, Gynecological Secrets: Blood, Seed, and Monstrous Births in De secretis mulierum 3: Mystical Theology, Monstrous Love: The Permeable Body of Christ in Julian of Norwich’s Showings Conclusion: The Monstrous Borders of the Self Notes Bibliography Index

Representations of Eve in Antiquity and the English Middle Ages Routledge Studies in Medieval Religion and Culture

John Flood, Oxford University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 308pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87796-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION As the first woman and a prototype for her daughters, the significance of the figure of Eve is a well-established commonplace of literary and gender studies. However, despite frequent nods at Eve's importance and brief, broad sketches of the history of her representation, there has yet to be a sustained and detailed study of the ways in which Eve was represented in antiquity and the English Middle Ages. Flood attempts to remedy this gap in this wide-ranging and erudite study.

CONTENTS Introduction: Eve, 'Woe or Life' 1. The First Interpreters of Genesis 2. Non-Christian Influences 3. Anglo-Saxon England 4.

Theology of the Later Middle Ages 5. The Querelle des Femmes and Defences of Eve 6. Middle English Literature 7. Epilogue

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

160

Origins of Pan-Africanism Routledge Studies in Modern British History

Marika Sherwood, Institute of Commonwealth Studies, London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 380pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87959-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Origins of Pan-Africanism: Henry Sylvester Williams, Africa, and the African Diaspora recounts the life story of the pioneering Henry Sylvester Williams, an unknown Trinidadian son of an immigrant carpenter in the late-19 th and early 20 th century. Williams, then a student in Britian, organized the African Association in 1897, and the first-ever Pan-African Conference in 1900. He is thus the progenitor of the OAU/AU. Some of those who attended went on to work in various pan-African organizations in their homelands. He became not only a qualified barrister, but the first Black man admitted to the Bar in Cape Town, and one of the first two elected Black borough councilors in London. These are remarkable achievements for anyone, especially for a Black man of working-class origins in an era of gross racial discrimination and social class hierarchies. Williams died in 1911, soon after his return to his homeland, Trinidad. Through original research, Origins of Pan-Africanism: Henry Sylvester Williams, Africa, and the African Diaspora is set in the social context of the times, providing insight not only into a remarkable man who has been heretofore virtually written out of history, but also into the African Diaspora in the UK a century ago.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. From Childhood to Teaching 2. Somewhere in North America 1891 – 1896 3. The First Years in London, 1896 – 1899 4. The African Association 5. Preparations for the Pan-African Conference 6. The Pan-African Conference, July 1900 7. The PanAfrican Association August 1900 – February 1901 8. Spreading the Word 9. London, September 1901 – September 1903 10.

Struggles in South Africa 1903 – 1904 11. Back in London, 1905 – 1908 12. Williams the Elected Politician 1906 – 1908 13. Working for Africans and West Indians 14. Involved with Liberia, 1907 – 1908 15. Returning Home

Statistics and the Public Sphere, 1750–2000 Routledge Studies in Modern British History

Edited by Thomas H. Crook and Glen O'Hara, Oxford Brookes University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87894-4; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Contemporary public life in Britain would be unthinkable without the use of statistics and statistical reasoning. Numbers dominate political discussion, facilitating debate, while also attracting criticism on the grounds of their veracity and utility. However, the historical role and place of statistics within Britain’s public sphere has yet to receive the attention it deserves. There exist numerous histories of both modern statistical reasoning and the modern public sphere; but to date, there are no works which, quite pointedly, aim to analyse the historical entanglement of the two. Statistics and the Public Sphere, 1750-2000 addresses this neglected area of historiography, and in so doing places the present in some much needed historical perspective.

CONTENTS Introduction: Numbers and the people in modern British history (Tom Crook and Glen O’Hara, Oxford Brookes University) 1.

Statistics and the career of public reason, 1820-1960: Engagement and detachment in a quantified society (Theodore M. Porter, University of California, Los Angeles) PART ONE: Rethinking statistics and the public sphere 2. The state and statistics in Victorian and Edwardian Britain: Promotion of the public sphere or boundary maintenance? (Edward Higgs, University of Essex) 3. Suspect figures: Statistics and public trust in Victorian England (Tom Crook, Oxford Brookes University) 4. Numbers and narratives: Statistical realism, bureaucratic fiction and affective aggregation, 1830-1880 (Maeve Adams, New York University) PART TWO: The business of public numbers 5. The politics of statistics in late eighteenth-century Britain: From Richard Price to Henry Beeke (Richard Sheldon, University of Bristol) 6. ‘In these you may trust’: Statistics and the economics of overseeing, c. 1790-c. 1840 (Steven King, Oxford Brookes University) 7. Gentlemen capitalists? The Independent West Middlesex Fire and Life Assurance Company fraud (James Taylor, Lancaster University) PART THREE: Statistics, political numeracy and public debate 8. Population statistics and the 1832 Reform Act (S.J. Thompson, University of Cambridge) 9. Printed statistics and the public sphere: Numeracy, party politics and the visual culture of numbers, 1880-1914 (James Thompson, University of Bristol) 10. A ‘naked strength and beauty’: Statistics in the British tariff debate, 1880-1914 (Edmund Rogers, University of Cambridge) PART FOUR: Twentieth-century innovations 11.

Polling public opinion before opinion polling: The Conservative Party and electoral prediction between the wars (Laura Beers, University of Cambridge) 12. Power to ‘consumers’ or ‘the people’? Market research and the conceptualization of affluence and the ‘good society’ in Britain, 1920-1960 (Stefan Schwarzkopf, Queen Mary, University of London) 13. Foreign exemplars and national statistics: The French model of economic data-collection in Britain, c.1951-1973 (Glen O’Hara, Oxford Brookes University) Conclusion: New histories of an enumerated people (Tom Crook and Glen O’Hara, Oxford Brookes University)

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

161

Victorians on Race Routledge Studies in Modern British History

Edward Beasley, San Diego State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 247pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88125-8; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In mid-Victorian England there were new racial categories based upon skin colour. The 'races' familiar to those in the modern west were invented and elaborated after the decline of faith in Biblical monogenesis in the early nineteenth century, and before the maturity of modern genetics in the middle of the twentieth. Not until the early nineteenth century would polygenetic and racialist theories win many adherents. But by the middle of the nineteenth century in England, racial categories were imposed upon humanity. How the idea of 'race' gained popularity in England at that time is the central focus of Victorians on Race: Racism and the Problem of Grouping in the Human Sciences. Scholars have linked this new racism to some very dodgy thinkers. Victorians on Race examines a more influential set of the era's writers and colonial officials, some French but most of them British. Attempting to do serious social analysis, these men oversimplified humanity into biologically-heritable, mentally and morally unequal, colour-based 'races'. Thinkers giving in to this racist temptation included Alexis de Tocqueville when he was writing on Algeria; Arthur de Gobineau (who influenced the Nazis); Walter Bagehot of The Economist; and Charles Darwin (whose Descent of Man was influenced by Bagehot).

Victorians on Race also examines officials and thinkers (such as Tocqueville in Democracy in America, the Duke of Argyll, and Governor Gordon of Fiji) who exercised methodological care, doing the hard work of testing their categories against the evidence.

They analyzed human groups without slipping into racial categorization. Author Edward Beasley examines the extent to which the Gobineau-Bagehot-Darwin way of thinking about race penetrated the minds of certain key colonial governors. He further explores the hardening of the rhetoric of race-prejudice in some quarters in England in the nineteenth century – the processes by which racism was first formed.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction – Reinventing Racism 2. Tocqueville and Race 3. Gobineau, Bagehot's Precursor 4. The Common Sense of Walter Bagehot 5. Bagehot Rewrites Gobineau 6. Darwin and Race 7. Argyll, Race, and Degeneration 8. Frederick Weld and the Unna

German Colonialism and National Identity Routledge Studies in Modern European History

Edited by Michael Perraudin and Jürgen Zimmerer, both of University of Sheffield, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 344pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-96477-7; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85259-0; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION German colonialism is a thriving field of study. From North America to Japan, within Germany, Austria and Switzerland, scholars are increasingly applying post-colonial questions and methods to the study of Germany and its culture. However, no introduction on this emerging field of study has combined political and cultural approaches, the study of literature and art, and the examination of both metropolitan and local discourses and memories. This book will fill that gap and offer a broad prelude, of interest to any scholar and student of German history and culture as well as of colonialism in general. It will be an indispensable tool for both undergraduate and postgraduate teaching. .

CONTENTS Introduction. German Colonialism and National Identity. Michael Perraudin and Jürgen Zimmerer Section A. Colonialism from before the Empire Chapter 1. Imperialism, Race, and Genocide at the Paulskirche: Origins, Meanings, Trajectories. Brian Vick Chapter Two. Time, Identity and Colonialism in German Travel Writing on Africa, 1848-1914. Tracey Dawe Chapter 3. Gray Zones: On the Inclusion of "Poland" in the Study of German Colonialism. Kristin Kopp Section B . Colonialism and Popular Utterance in the Imperial Phase Chapter 4. The War that Scarcely Was: The Berliner Morgenpost and the Boxer Uprising. Yixu Lü Chapter 5. Boy’s and Girl’s Own Empires: Gender and the Uses of the Colonial World in Kaiserreich Youth Magazines. Jeffrey Bowersox Chapter 6.

Picturing Genocide in German Consumer Culture, 1904-1910. David Ciarlo Chapter 7. The Visual Representation of Blackness during German Imperialism around 1900. Volker Langbehn Chapter 8. Colonialism and the Simplification of Language: Germany’s Kolonial-Deutsch Experiment. Kenneth Orosz Section C . Colonialism and the End of Empire Chapter 9. Fraternity, Frenzy, and Genocide in German War Literature, 1906-1936. Jörg Lehmann Chapter 10. Colonial Heroes: German Colonial Identities in Wartime, 1914-1918. Michael Pesek Chapter 11. Crossing Boundaries: German Women in Africa, 1919-1933. Britta Schilling Chapter 12.

Abuses of German Colonial History: The Character of Carl Peters as Weapon for völkisch and National-Socialist Discourses: Anglophobia, Anti-Semitism and Aryanism. Constant Kpao Sarè Chapter 13. "Loyal Askari" and "Black Rapist"--Two Images in the German Discourse on National Identity and their Impact on the Lives of Black People in Germany, 1918-1945. Susann Lewerenz Section D . German Colonialism in the Era of Decolonization Chapter 14. (Post-) Colonial Amnesia? German Debates on Colonialism and Decolonization in the Post-war Era. Monika Albrecht Chapter 15. Denkmalsturz. The German Student Movement and German Colonialism. Ingo Cornils Chapter 16. Vergangenheitsbewältigung à la française: Post-Colonial Memories of the Herero Genocide and 17 October 1961. Kathryn Jones Chapter 17. The Persistence of Fantasies. Colonialism as Melodrama on German Television.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

162 Wolfgang Struck Section E . Local Histories, Memories, Legacies Chapter 18. Communal Memory Events and the Heritage of the Victims. The Persistence of the Theme of Genocide in Namibia. Reinhart Kössler Chapter 19. The Genocide in "German South-West Africa" and the Politics of Commemoration--How (Not) to Come to Terms with the Past. Henning Melber Chapter 20. The Struggle for Genocidal Exclusivity. The Perception of the Murder of the Namibian Herero (1904-08) in the Age of a New International Morality. Dominik J. Schaller Chapter 21. Narratives of a "Model Colony": German Togoland in Written and Oral Histories. Dennis Laumann Chapter 22. Suspended between Worlds? The Discipline of Germanistik in sub-Saharan Africa. Arndt Witte

German Colonialism, Visual Culture, and Modern Memory Routledge Studies in Modern European History

Edited by Volker Langbehn, San Francisco State University, California, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 316pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99779-9; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85690-1; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There is no overarching master narrative in understanding the history of German colonialism, and over the past decade, the study of Germany’s colonial past has experienced a dramatic transformation in its scope of inquiry. Influenced by new theoretical and methodological approaches to the study of race, nationalism, and globalization, these new studies initiate a process of reevaluating and redefining the parameters within which German Colonialism is understood. The role of visual materials, in particular, is ideal for exploring the porousness of disciplinary boundaries, though visual culture studies pertaining to German history – and especially German colonialism – have previously been almost completely neglected. Investigating visual communication and mass culture, print culture and suggestive racial politics, racial aesthetics, racial politics and early German film, racial continuity and German film, and photography, German Colonialism, Visual Culture, and Modern Memory offers compelling evidence of a German society between 1884 and 1919 that produced vibrant and heterogeneous – and at times contradictory – cultures of colonialism. This collection of new essays illustrates the dramatic changes and vast array of perspectives that have recently emerged in the study of German colonialism.

In documenting the latest cutting-edge research of German colonial history, the contributors to this volume prove wrong the persistent assumptions that the creation of Germany’s colonial empire did not have any lasting impact on German political and cultural life.

Their essays document how colonialism in its various forms was entwined with the inner workings of modern German life and society, especially through the cultural and technical innovations of its time. In contrast to existing research, these studies show that colonial Germany played a significant role in shaping German perceptions of racial difference, influenced German support for World War I, and facilitated the construction of German nationalism. German Colonialism, Visual Culture, and Modern Memory uniquely demonstrates that the visual culture of colonialism is closely linked to the fascination with new modes of seeing and the enigma of visual experience that have become trademarks of modernity.

CONTENTS Acknowledgements. Introduction: Picturing Race: Visuality and German Colonialism. Volker Langbehn. German Colonialism 1884– 1919. 1. Advertising and the Optics of Colonial Power at the fin de siècle. David Ciarlo. 2. "... will try to send you the best views from here" – Postcards from the Colonial War in Namibia (1904–1908). Felix Axster. 3. Harmless "Kolonialbiedermeier"? Colonial and Exotic Trading Cards. Joachim Zeller. 4. Cakewalking the Anarchy of Empire around 1900. Astrid Kusser. 5. Satire Magazines and Racial Politics. Volker Langbehn. 6. Demystifying Colonial Settlement: Building Handbooks for Settlers, 1904–1930. Itohan Osayimwese. 7. Patriotism, Spectacle and Reverie: Colonialism in Early Cinema. Wolfgang Fuhrmann. German Postcolonialism 1919–Present. 8. Persuasive Maps and a Suggestive Novel – Hans Grimm’s Volk ohne Raum and German Cartography in Southwest Africa. Oliver Simons. 9. Colonial Disgust: The Colonial Master’s Emotion of Superiority. Thomas Schwarz. 10. Weimar Revisions of Germany’s Colonial Past: The Photomontages of Hannah Höch and László Moholy-Nagy. Brett M. Van Hoesen. 11. The "Colonial Idea" in Weimar Cinema. Christian Rogowski. 12. "The Black Jew": An After-Image of German Colonialism. Birgit Haehnel. 13.

Reenacting Colonialism: Germany and its Former Colonies in Recent TV Productions. Wolfgang Struck. 14. Postcolonial Amnesia?

Taboo Memories and Kanaks with Cameras. Deniz Göktürk. Contributors. References. Index.

The Caucasus Under Soviet Rule Routledge Studies in the History of Russia and Eastern Europe

Alex Marshall, University of Glasgow, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £100.00 $165.00; 234x156 mm; 384pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-41012-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Caucasus is a strategically and economically important region in contemporary global affairs. Western interest in the Caucasus has grown rapidly since 1991, fuelled by the admixture of oil politics, great power rivalry, ethnic separatism and terrorism that characterises the region. However, until now there has been little understanding of how these issues came to assume the importance they have today. This book argues that understanding the Soviet legacy in the region is critical to analysing both the new states of the Transcaucasus and the autonomous territories of the North Caucasus. It examines the impact of Soviet rule on the Caucasus, focusing in particular on the period from 1917 to 1955. Important questions covered include how the Soviet Union created ‘nations’ out of the diverse peoples of the North Caucasus; the true nature of the 1917 revolution; the role and effects of forced migration in the region;

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

163 how over time the constituent nationalities of the region came to re-define themselves; and how Islamic radicalism came to assume the importance it continues to hold today. A cauldron of war, revolution, and foreign interventions - from the British and Ottoman Turks to the oil-hungry armies of Hitler’s Third Reich, the Caucasus and the policies and actors it produced- not least Stalin, ‘Sergo’ Ordzhonikidze, and Anastas Mikoian - both shaped the Soviet experiment in the twentieth century, and appears set to continue to shape the geopolitics of the twenty-first. Making unprecedented use of memoirs, archives and published sources, this book is an invaluable aide for scholars, political analysts and journalists alike to understanding one of the most important borderlands of the modern world.

CONTENTS 1. The North Caucasus: Between gazavat and Modern Revolution 1700-1905. 2. 1905-1917: The First Crisis of Modernity in the Caucasus. 3. 1917-1918 in the Caucasus-from World War to Civil War. 4. 1919-1920: The British and Denikin’s Caucasus. 5.

Insurgency, Corruption, and the Search for a New Socialist Order, 1920-25. 6. Decossackization, Demarcation, Categorization: Creating the Soviet Caucasus, 1920-27. 7. Forging the Proletariat: Women, Collectivization, and Repression, 1928-1934. 8. Dreams of Unity, Myths of Power: The Caucasian Diaspora. 9. The Purges and Industrial Modernization: the Soviet Caucasus in the 1930s. 10.

Dealing with ‘Bandits’: Cleansing and Ethnic Repression in the Soviet Caucasus, 1941-45. 11. The Final Structural Crisis of the Soviet State, 1953-91. 12. Three Dystopias of the Post-Soviet Caucasus, 1991-2008. Afterword - The North Caucasus as a Regional Security Complex: Vladimir Putin, Pipelines, and the Rebuilding of the Russian Federal State.

The Polish Government in Exile, 1939–45 Routledge Studies in the History of Russia and Eastern Europe

Bernadeta Tendyra PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45469-8; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The "Polish Question" was both the immediate cause of the Second World War, and because of Stalin’s imposition of Soviet rule on Poland at the end of the war a cause of the Cold War which followed. How to resolve the "Polish Question" was a theme which affected international relations and planning for the post-war world throughout the war, and complicating the picture hugely was the Polish government-in-exile, which was led until 1943 by General Sikorski based in London, which had its own very strong views on the future for Poland, but which was divided by intense factional in-fighting. This book examines the Polish government-in-exile, discusses its internal factions and why they existed, and assesses the government-in-exile’s wider impact. It shows how Polish exile diplomacy was more important than hitherto recognised in shaping Allied wartime policy, how the Polish exiles’ tenacious clinging to ideals of Polish nationhood shaped their policies, though not in a united way, and how Sikorski struggled, controversially in the teeth of opposition from some of his colleagues, and ultimately unsuccessfully, to establish a Polish military presence in the east alongside the Red Army, with the aim of establishing a future Poland which would be independent, but an ally, though not a subordinate, of the Soviet Union. Overall, the book demonstrates the importance of the Polish exiles in maintaining the Polish sense of nationhood, with its attendant obsession with history, martyrdom and defining insecure borders.

CONTENTS Preface Introduction: Historical Legacy: The Rise and Fall of Independent Poland 1. Fresh Start: The Government-in-Exile and the Phoney War (September 1939 - May 1940) 2. La Débâcle: Sikorski, the Exiles and the Fall of France (June 1940 - May 1941) 3. False Dawn: The Polish-Soviet Agreement and its Aftermath (June - August 1941) 4. Broken Promise: The Demise of Sikorski’s Eastern Front (August 1941 - August 1942) 5. Downfall: The Collapse of Sikorski’s Policies, August 1942 - July 1943 Conclusions: Bitter Fruit Notes Bibliography

Race, Remembering, and Jim Crow’s Teachers Studies in African American History and Culture

Hilton Kelly, Davidson College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 134pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80478-3; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85235-4; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores a profoundly negative narrative about legally segregated schools in the United States being "inherently inferior" compared to their white counterparts. However, there are overwhelmingly positive counter-memories of these schools as "good and valued" among former students, teachers, and community members. Using interview data with 44 former teachers in three North Carolina counties, college and university archival materials, and secondary historical sources, the author argues that "Jim Crow’s teachers" remember from hidden transcripts—latent reports of the social world created and lived in all-black schools and communities—which reveal hidden social relations and practices that were constructed away from powerful white educational authorities. The author concludes that the national memory of "inherently inferior" all-black schools does not tell the whole story

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

164 about legally segregated education; the collective remembering of Jim Crow’s teachers reveal a critique of power and a fight for respectability that shaped teachers’ work in the Age of Segregation.

CONTENTS Contents Part One: Teachers and Teaching Chapter One: "Dying with One’s Boots On": Collective Remembering of Legally Segregated Schools for Blacks and Its Teachers Chapter Two: You Must Remember This: Reconstructions of the Geopolitics of Race and Racism in the Jim Crow South Chapter Three: Voices of Collective Remembering: Black Teachers in Edgecombe, Nash and Wilson Counties Part Two: Hidden Transcripts Revealed Chapter Four: "The Way We Found Them to Be": Black Teachers and the Politics of Respectability in Jim Crow North Carolina Chapter Five: A Strategy of Opportunity: Black Teachers and the Making of a New Form of Capital Part Three: Remembering Jim Crow’s Teachers Chapter Five: "The Half Had Not Been Told": Hidden Transcripts Made Public

Frances Ellen Watkins Harper Studies in American Popular History and Culture

Michael Stancliff, Arizona State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 225pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99763-8; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84825-8; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A prominent early feminist, abolitionist, and civil rights advocate, Frances Ellen Watkins Harper wrote and spoke across genres and reform platforms during the turbulent second half of the nineteenth century. Her invention of a new commonplace language of moral character drew on the persuasive and didactic motifs of the previous decades of African-American reform politics, but far exceeded her predecessors in crafting lessons of rhetoric for women. Focusing on the way in which Harper brought her readers a critical training for the rhetorical action of a life commitment to social reform, this book reconsiders her practice as explicitly and primarily a project of teaching. This study also places Harper's work firmly in black-nationalist lineages from which she is routinely excluded, establishes Harper as an architect of a collective African-American identity that constitutes a political and theoretical bridge between early abolitionism and 20th-century civil rights activism, and contributes to the contemporary portrayal of Harper as an important theorist of African-American feminism whose radical egalitarian ethic has lasting relevance for civil rights and human rights workers.

CONTENTS Introduction Chapter 1. Composing Character: Cultural Sources of African American Rhetorical Pedagogy Chapter 2. Reconstruction and Black Republican Pedagogy Chapter 3. Temperance Pedagogy: Lessons of Character in a Drunken Economy Chapter 4. Black Ireland: The Political Economics of African American Rhetorical Pedagogy after Reconstruction Chapter 5. Not as a Mere Dependent: The Historic Mission of African American Women’s Rhetoric at the End of the Century Afterword

Ancient Graffiti in Context Edited by Jennifer Baird, Birbeck University of London, UK and Claire Taylor, Trinity College, Dublin, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87889-0; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Graffiti are very common within the ancient world, but remain underexploited as a form of archaeological or historical evidence. This volume interrogates this cultural phenomenon and by doing so brings it into the mainstream of ancient history and archaeology.

Focusing on different approaches to and interpretations of graffiti from a variety of sites and chronological contexts, Baird and Taylor pose a series of questions not previously asked of this evidence, such as: What is graffiti, and how can we interpret it? What ways, and with whom, do graffiti communicate? To what extent does graffiti represent or subvert the cultural values of the society in which it occurs? By comparing themes across time and space in the ancient world, the authors are able to define and contextualize graffiti, and provide a series of interpretative strategies for scholars and students of the ancient world. Ancient graffiti range from texts and images written or drawn both inside and outside buildings, in public and private places, to those on monuments in the city and on mountains in the countryside; what unites them conceptually is that they can be seen as actively engaging with their environment in a variety of ways. This book explores these engagements and demonstrates how differences of scale and spatial dynamics can be negotiated, and as such will be essential reading for Classical archaeologists and historians alike.

CONTENTS Introduction: Ancient graffiti in context Jennifer Baird & Claire Taylor Part 1: Dialogue and Communication 1. Dialogues of Graffiti in the House of Fabius Rufus Rebecca Benefiel 2. Greek Graffiti at El Kanais Rachel Mairs 3. Transcripts of

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

165

An Archaeology of Materials Chantal Conneller, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 140pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88130-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Social approaches to technology have become increasingly important in the field of archaeology, yet less consideration has been given to the social significance of the raw materials from which artefacts were made. Author Chantal Conneller argues that we need to take materials more seriously, that substances were caught up in significant historical relationships with people prior to and as a result of their participation in technical actions. Tracing these relationships is vital for understanding how things were made, used and discarded. This book formulates a systematic approach to the study of raw materials; one that builds on detailed technological studies of mechanical properties, but encompasses people’s broader ontologies to produce a holistic understanding of materials. Exploring how even materials in mundane, daily usage are caught up in broader understandings of the world, this volume demonstrates through case studies that the properties of materials are not fixed, but change according to context. This book builds on previous studies to coalesce a systematic approach to materials at a time when there has been a call for a greater focus on materials in material culture studies. Case studies from the western European Upper Palaeolithic and Mesolithic, periods that have been unjustly neglected in recent archaeological theory building, are included. This book will establish a new perspective on the meaning and significance of materials, particularly those involved in mundane, daily usage, and will be a timely addition to the literature on technologies and materials.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Raw Materials and Form 3. Materials and Ontologies 4. Animals as Materials 5. The Mutability of Stone 6.

Conclusion

Collected Papers on Alexander the Great Ernst Badian, Harvard University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 512pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-37828-4; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Ernst Badian's work on Alexander, which began to appear almost fifty years ago, revolutionized Alexander studies. Ernst Badian has continued to contribute significantly to our understanding of Alexander and the period, and this anthology brings together for the first time many of his important publications.

CONTENTS Alexander the Great and the Unity of Mankind. The Eunuch Bagoas: A Study in Method. The Death of Parmenio. Harpalus.

Alexander the Great and the Loneliness of Power. Alexander the Great and the Greeks of Asia. Agis III: Revisions and Reflections. A King's Notebooks. The Deification of Alexander the Great. Alexander the Great between Two Thrones and Heaven. Alexander at Peucelaotis. The Ring and the Book. The King's Indians. A Note on the Alexander Mosaic. Conspiracies. Darius III

Contesting Human Remains in Museum Collections Tiffany Jenkins, Institute of Ideas, London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 180pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87960-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Museums have displayed and researched human remains since the eighteenth century, but in the last three decades skeletons and body parts have become subject to high-profile claims and controversies. From the late 1980s indigenous groups, radical archaeologists, anthropologists, and museum professionals campaigned for the repatriation of human remains to culturally affiliated groups who had suffered from colonization. The demands for return have however been fiercely contested by those who research the material professionally and consider it to be unique evidence. This book charts the influences at play on the contestation over human remains and examines the construction of this problem from a cultural perspective. The academic and popular literature interprets changes to museums as a result of external factors. By drawing on empirical research including extensive interviews with the claims-making groups, ethnographic work, document, media, and policy analysis, Contesting Human Remains in Museum Collections demonstrates that strong internal influences do in fact exist – laying bare the neglected but significant importance of the profession in constructing the issue. The only book to examine the construction of contestation over human remains from a sociological perspective, Contesting

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

166 Human Remains advances an emerging area of academic research, setting the terms of debate, synthesizing disparate ideas, and making sense of a broader cultural focus on dead bodies in the contemporary period.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Transforming Concerns for Human Remains into an Issue 2. Scientists Contest the Problem 3. The Crisis of Cultural Authority 4. The Rise of Pagan Claims on Ancient Skeletons 5. Explaining Why Human Remains are the Problem 6. Cover

The Diplomatic History of Postwar Japan Edited by Makoto Iokibe PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £25.95 $44.95; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49848-7; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Winner of the prestigious Yoshida Shigeru Prize 1999 for the best book in public history, this book presents a comprehensive and upto-date overview of Japan’s international relations from the end of the Pacific War to the present. Written by leading Japanese authorities on the subject, it makes extensive use of the most recently declassified Japanese documents, memoirs, and diaries. It introduces the personalities and approaches Japan’s postwar leaders and statesmen took in dealing with a rapidly changing world and the challenges they faced. Importantly, the book also discusses the evolution of Japan’s presence on the international stage and the important – if underappreciated role – Japan has played. The book examines the many issues which Japan has had to confront in this important period: from the occupation authorities in the latter half 1940s, to the crisis-filled 1970s; from the post-Cold War decade to the contemporary war on terrorism. The book examines the effect of the changing international climate and domestic scene on Japan’s foreign policy; and the way its foreign policy has been conducted. It discusses how the aims of Japan’s foreign relations, and how its relationships with its neighbours, allies and other major world powers have developed, and assesses how far Japan has succeeded in realising its aims. It concludes by discussing the current state of Japanese foreign policy and likely future developments.

CONTENTS Preface to the Revised Edition Preface to the Original Edition Introduction: Japanese Diplomacy from Prewar to Postwar Iokibe Makoto 1. Diplomacy in Occupied Japan Iokibe Makoto 2. The Conditions of an Independent State: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1950s Sakamoto Kazuya 3. The Model of an Economic Power: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1960s Tadokoro Masayuki 4. Overcoming the Crises: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1970s Nakanishi Hiroshi 5. The Mission and Trials of an Emerging International State: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1980s Murata Koji 6. Japanese Diplomacy After the Cold War Iokibe Makoto Conclusion: What was Postwar Japanese Diplomacy?

Corpus Approaches to Evaluation Routledge Advances in Corpus Linguistics

Susan Hunston, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-96202-5; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book applies a set of corpus investigation techniques to the study of evaluation, or stance, or affect, in naturally-occurring discourse. It reviews previous work in this area and discusses the limitations and the opportunities offered by the approach in question.

It also extends current work in a number of new directions: it extends the notion of ‘propositional status’ into the area of images as well as of texts; it proposes a set of ‘modal-like entities’ that cover some of the same semantic areas as modal verbs but which are difficult to observe without corpus evidence; it highlights the role of phraseology in the identification of evaluation; and it proposes a notion of ‘semantic sequence’, being that which is often said in specific discourses, and which, it is argued, is identifiable through corpus techniques

Corpus-Based Contrastive Studies of English and Chinese Routledge Advances in Corpus Linguistics

Tony McEnery and Richard Xiao, both of University of Lancaster, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $125.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99245-9; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

167 This book is concerned with cross-linguistic contrast of major grammatical categories in English and Chinese, two most important yet genetically different world languages. This genetic difference has resulted in many subsidiary differences that are, among other things, related to grammar. Compared with typologically related languages, cross-linguistic contrast of English and Chinese is more challenging yet promising. The main theme of this book lies in its focus on cross-linguistic contrast of aspect-related grammatical categories, or, grammatical categories that contribute to aspectual meaning – both situation aspect at the semantic level and viewpoint aspect at the grammatical level – in English and Chinese. The unique strength of this volume lies in that it is first corpus-based book contrasting English and Chinese. Given that the state of the art in language studies is to use corpora, the significance of the marriage between contrastive studies and the corpus methodology in this book is not to be underestimated.

CONTENTS Chapter 1. Introduction Chapter 2. Aspect Marking in English and Chinese Chapter 3. Temporal Adverbials and Telicity in English and Chinese Chapter 4. Quantifying Constructions in English and Chinese Chapter 5. Passives in English and ChineseChapter 6.

Negation in English and Chinese: Variants and Variations Chapter 7. Negation in English and Chinese: Special Usages Chapter 8.

Challenge and Promise, and the Way Forward

Corpus Stylistics and Dickens’s Fiction Routledge Advances in Corpus Linguistics

Michaela Mahlberg, University of Liverpool, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80014-3; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book presents a way into the Dickensian world that starts from linguistic patterns, employing corpus linguistic methodology to study electronic versions of his texts. The analysis begins with clusters -- i.e. repeated sequences of words -- as pointers to local textual functions, and quantitative findings are completed with qualitative analyses and linguistic patterns of various degrees of flexibility are identified. The study also incorporates comparable data from other nineteenth-century writers. With its corpus stylistics focus, the book presents an innovative approach to the language of one of the most popular English authors, taking a fresh view on aspects such as characterization, speech and body language. Thus, Mahlberg bridges the gap between linguistic and literary studies, providing a useful resource for both researchers and students of language and literature.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Corpus Stylistics and Dickens' Style 2. Starting with the Texts 3. Clusters, Characterization, and Labels 4. Speech and Impoliteness 5. Body Language 6. "As if": Looking at the World from Different Angles 7. Time, Place, Context, and Links Across the Textual Components 8. Dickensian Style or General Building Blocks of Fictional World

The Discourse of Teaching Practice Feedback Routledge Advances in Corpus Linguistics

Fiona Farr, University of Limerick, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 228pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80607-7; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this book, Farr examines the spoken and written language of post-observation teaching-practice feedback on teacher education programs. To do so, she draws upon theories from discourse analysis, conversation analysis, and pragmatics to frame the analysis of feedback meetings and written tutor reports, which are then examined using comparative quantitative and qualitative corpus-based techniques. The overall aim is to determine the defining characteristics of this genre, focusing especially on pragmatic factors, with the ultimate goal of investigating the salient aspects responsible for making feedback both effective and affective. Farr's research draws upon a spoken corpus of feedback interactions and a written corpus of tutor reports from language teacher education and is also strongly informed by data in the form of diary reflections and questionnaire responses from student teachers and questionnaire responses from the relevant tutors.

CONTENTS Abbreviations and Acronyms Foreword Acknowledgments 1: Language Teacher Education and Supervising Teaching Practice 2: Discourse Analysis and Teaching Practice Feedback 3: Corpus Linguistics and TP Feedback: Towards a Methodological Resolution for This Study 4: The Generic Nature of Teaching Practice Feedback: Reflection and Direction 5: The Generic Nature of Teaching Practice Feedback: Evaluative and Relational Talk 6: Hedging the Issues and Boosting Confidence 7: Evaluating Feedback: What Makes a Positive Experience? 8: Back to the Bigger Picture 9: Final Discussion Appendix 1: Pre-Feedback Questionnaire Appendix 2: Student Teacher Questionnaire Appendix 3: Tutor Questionnaire Appendix 4: Transcription Conventions Appendix 5: Teacher Online Questionnaire Appendix 6: TP Report Template Appendix 7: Tutor Online Questionnaire Appendix 8: Grade Percentage Equivalents Bibliography Index

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

168

Language and the Market Society Routledge Critical Studies in Discourse

Gerlinde Mautner, Vienna University of Economics and Business , Austria PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 216pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99814-7; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Language plays a central role in creating and sustaining the market society—a society, that is, in which market exchange is no longer simply a process, but an all-encompassing social principle. The social domains affected include education, politics and religion.

Around the world, government departments have re-defined themselves as service providers; universities produce graduates; job seekers are asked to package themselves more effectively, and there are consultants specializing in church marketing. And as individuals, too, we are supposed to brand ourselves, sell ourselves and strategically manage our personal relationships. Through an intricate dialectic, such patterns of linguistic choices reinforce the social structures that shape them, further consolidating the marketization process. Marketization thus emerges as a globally unfolding process in which language holds a key position as both cause and effect, and as both subject and object. The book examines these phenomena from a linguistic and critical perspective, drawing on critical discourse analysis, sociological treatises of market society, and critical management studies.

CONTENTS List of Figures and Tables Acknowledgments 1 Digging up the World: Introduction Part I: Conceptual Groundwork 2 Invited Invaders? The Market Society and Discourse 3 In Praise of Doubt: The Theoretical Framework Part II: Applications 4 Delivering Government: Marketisation in Public Sector Administration 5 Learn How to Make Money: Marketisation in Higher Education 6 Shop 'n' Pray: Marketisation in Religion 7 How YOU™ are like Shampoo: Marketisation in the Personal Sphere Part III: Perspectives 8 Picking Holes: Critiquing the Critical Approach 9 From Lament to Agenda: Critical Resistance to Marketisation 10 Saving the Frog from Boiling: Concluding Remarks Notes Bibliography Index

Language Mixing and Code-Switching in Writing Routledge Critical Studies in Multilingualism

Edited by Mark Sebba, Lancaster University, UK, Shahrzad Mahootian, North Eastern Illinois University, USA and Carla Jonsson, Stockholm University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87946-0; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION After many years in which interest in language alternation has focussed almost entirely on spoken code-switching, recently there has been renewed interest in written mixed-language texts. However, at the moment there is no general agreement on what constitutes the subject area and there is no widely applicable framework for analysis. The aim of this volume is to correct the deficiency just mentioned. Contributors introduce a range of approaches applied to different types of ‘multilingual texts’ (this term is used as an inclusive one, which covers both 'code-switching' in a traditional sense and other types of language mixing), and the collection will cover a range of different languages (including different scripts) and research methods. New perspectives developed in this book will be: the development of approaches to analysis which are specific to written discourse rather than based on spoken discourse; the introduction of approaches from the new literacy studies, treating mixed-language literacy from a practice perspective; the drawing together of 'old' and 'new' media types, e.g. medieval manuscripts and text messaging.

CONTENTS Introduction: Researching and theorising mixed-language texts (Mark Sebba, Lancaster University) Part 1: Digital literacies 1.

Linguistic and generic hybridity in web writing: the case of fan fiction (Sirpa Leppänen, University of Jyväskylä ) 2. Multilingual Texts on Web 2.0: The Case of Flickr.com (Carmen Lee, Open University of Hong Kong and David Barton, Lancaster University) 3.

Multilingual web discussion forums: theoretical, practical and methodological issues (Samu Kytölä, University of Jyväskylä) Part 2: Literature, advertising and print media 4. Literary Language Mixing: (Re)Constructing Culture and Identity (Carla Jonsson, University of Stockholm) 5. Repertoires and resources: understanding code mixing in the media (Shahrzad Mahootian , Northeastern Illinois University) 6. Code-Switching in U S Latino Novels (Cecilia Montes-Alcalá, Georgia Institute of Technology) 7. "Hafa Adai… means hello!" Written Codeswitching in the Social Construction of Identity on Tourism Websites (Richard W. Hallett and Judith Kaplan-Weinger, Northeastern Illinois University) Part 3: Informal literacies 8. Analyzing multilingual text-messaging in Senegal an approach for the study of mixed language SMS (Kristin Vold Lexander, University of Oslo) 9. Vernacular literacy practices in present-day Mali: combining ethnography and textual analysis to understand multilingual texts (Aïssatou Mbodj-Pouye, Centre d’études africaines, Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales, Paris and Cécile Van den Avenne, ICAR, Ecole Normale Supérieure-Lettres Sciences Humaines, Lyon) 10. Bilingualism meets digraphia: Script alternation and hybridity in Russian-American writing and beyond (Philipp Angermeyer, York University)

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

169

Multilingualism, Discourse, and Ethnography Routledge Critical Studies in Multilingualism

Edited by Marilyn Martin-Jones and Sheena Gardner, both of University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $130.00; 229x152 mm; 356pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87494-6; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The last two decades have seen a rapidly growing interest, internationally, in multilingualism and multilingual literacy and in the ways in which multilingualism is represented in the media and in public discourse. This is largely due to the significant linguistic, cultural and demographic changes that have been ushered in by globalisation, transnational population flows, the advent of new technology and the changing political and economic landscape of Europe and the accession of new nation-states to the European Union. In addressing the changing field of multilingualism, this volume hopes to: to focus on cutting edge research on multilingualism which incorporates critical, interpretive perspectives to exemplify the range of approaches to description and analysis which are currently employed within this strand of research on multilingualism to consider the methodological issues which arise in particular kinds of studies in particular sociolinguistic spaces.

Essays on Syntax and Semantics Routledge Leading Linguists

James Higginbotham, Somerville College, Oxford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-16182-4; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This much needed book draws together some of the seminal essays from one of the most important contemporary linguists, and makes them easily accessible in one place for the first time. James Higginbotham includes a new introduction orientating the reader to the links between the topics covered, and provides an overview of recent contributions to the field, particularly as they relate to his own influential work.

Logical Form and Linguistic Theory Routledge Leading Linguists

Robert May PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-32238-6; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume brings together a series of essays that explicate and explore the author's views on the role and position of logical form in linguistic theory. The essays are devoted to the conceptual and empirical justification of the idea that the syntax of natural language represents the logical form of sentences, and that the collection of these representations constitute a distinct level of linguistic representation, known as LF .

Romani Writing Routledge Research in Literacy

Paola Toninato, University of Warwick, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80590-2; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Roma (commonly known as 'Gypsies') have largely been depicted in writings and in popular culture as an illiterate group.

However, as Paola Toninato demonstrates, the Roma have a deep understanding of literacy and its implications, and use writing for a range of different purposes. While some Romani writers adopt an 'oral' use of the written medium, which is instrumental in opposing and 'deconstructing' anti-Gypsy stereotypes, other Romani authors use writing for purposes of identity-building. Writing is perceived

by Romani activists and intellectuals as a key factor in establishing a shared identity and introducing a common language that transcends linguistic and geographical boundaries between different Romani groups. As Toninato makes clear, Romani authors, acting

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

170 in-between different cultures and communication systems, regard writing as an act of 'cultural mediation' through which they are able to 're-write' and 'negotiate' their identity while retaining their ethnic specificity. Indeed, Toninato concludes by emphasizing how Romani authors have started to create self-images in which the Roma are no longer portrayed as 'objects', but become 'subjects' of written representation.

Metaphor and Reconciliation Routledge Studies in Linguistics

Lynne Cameron, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $125.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-95675-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In 1984, Jo Berry’s father, a member of the British government, was killed when an IRA bomb planted by Pat Magee exploded in a Brighton hotel. Magee was later caught and imprisoned for life. Jo Berry set out to understand why the Brighton bomb had happened, visiting Ireland and talking with other victims. When a political settlement of the Irish situation was reached in the late 1990s and Magee was released, she arranged to meet him in order to hear from him about his motivations and feelings. This book is an applied linguistic study of their talk together and of the role played by metaphor as they work towards shared understandings of the bombing and its human consequences. Using data provided by Jo Berry, and with the agreement of both participants, it presents a study of metaphor in use in a unique situation with important implications for participants and mediators in other post-conflict conciliation contexts. The focus on metaphor offers a fascinating approach to the dynamics of discourse and understanding another person.

The Economics of the Multilingual Workplace Routledge Studies in Sociolinguistics

François Grin, Claudio Streddo, both of University of Geneva, Switzerland and François Vaillancourt, University of Montreal, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 250pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80018-1; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book proposes a path-breaking study of the economics of multilingualism at work, proposing a systematic approach to the identification and measurement of the ways in which language skills and economic performance are related. Using the instruments of economic investigation, but also explicitly relating the analysis to the approaches to multilingualism at work developed in the language sciences, this interdisciplinary book proposes a systematic, step-by-step exploration of the issue. Starting from a general identification of the linkages between multilingualism and processes of value creation, it reviews the contributions of linguistics and economics before developing a new economic model of production in which language is taken into account. Testing of the model using data from two countries provides quantitative estimations of the influence of multilingualism on economic processes, showing that foreign language skills can make a considerable contribution to a country’s GDP. These findings have significant implications for language policy and suggest strategies helping language planners to harness market forces for increased effectiveness.

CONTENTS List of Tables and Figures Acknowledgments Introduction Part I: The Economic Perspective on Multilingualism 1: Language at Work: Identifying the Issue 2: On the Linguistics of the Economy v. the Economics of Language 3: A Gallery of Empirical Findings 4: Foreign Language Skills and Earnings Part II: Foreign Language Skills, Foreign Language Use, and Production 5: Language Use and the Production Process 6: From Theory to Measurement 7: The Contribution of Multilingualism to Value Creation 8: Foreign Language Skills and Hiring Strategies Part III: Policy Implications and Future Prospects 9: Policy Implications 10: Multilingualism at Work: A Prospective Glance Appendix I: Language-Augmented Production Model Appendix II: Estimation Procedure and Results Appendix III: A Simple Recruitment Model Notes Bibliography Index

A Guide to Doing Statistics in Second Language Research Using R Second Language Acquisition Research Series

Jenifer Larson-Hall, University of North Texas, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $100.00; 243x156 mm; 420pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88118-0; December 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

171 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This indispensible volume introduces second language scholars to the basics of statistical analysis using the powerful and free computer program R. Assuming no prior knowledge of statistical analysis, Jenifer Larson-Hall explains how to understand the process of statistical testing, how to choose the most useful statistical tests, and how to process experimental data in R. She covers the most common statistical tests in the field of second language research – chi-square, t-tests, correlation, multiple regression, ANOVA and others – and additionally shows how to harness R to do robust statistics for many of these statistical tests. With abundant exercises and valuable graphs depicting real-life data sets, A Guide to Doing Statistics in Second Language Research Using R is essential for any second language scholar working with statistical data. The present volume is a companion to A Guide to Doing Statistics in Second Language Research Using SPSS , also by Jenifer Larson-Hall.

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Getting started with R. Chapter 2: Some preliminaries to understanding statistics. Chapter 3: Descriptive statistics. Chapter 4: Changing the way we do statistics: Hypothesis testing, power and effect size. Chapter 5: Choosing a statistical test. Chapter 6: Correlation. Chapter 7: Multiple regression. Chapter 8: Chi-square. Chapter 9: T-tests. Chapter 10: ANOVA. Chapter 11: Factorial ANOVA. Chapter 12: Repeated measures ANOVA. Chapter 13: ANCOVA. Chapter 14: Mixed effects models. Appendix: Doing things in R (A detailed summary of various functions that come in handy when using R)

Asian Yearbook of International Law Asian Yearbook of International Law

Edited by B.S. Chimni, Jawaharlal Nehru University, India, Miyoshi Masahiro, Aichi University, Japan and Li-ann Thio, National University of Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $162.00; 234x156 mm; 392pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58227-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Launched in 1991, the Asian Yearbook of International Law is a major refereed publication dedicated to international law issues as seen primarily from an Asian perspective, under the auspices of the Foundation for the Development of International Law in Asia (DILA). It is the first publication of its kind edited by a team of leading international law scholars from across Asia. The Yearbook provides a forum for the publication of articles in the field of international law, and other Asian international law topics, written by experts from the region and elsewhere. Its aim is twofold: to promote international law in Asia, and to provide an intellectual platform for the discussion and dissemination of Asian views and practices on contemporary international legal issues. Each volume of the Yearbook normally contains articles and shorter notes; a section on State practice; an overview of Asian states participation in multilateral treaties; succinct analysis of recent international legal developments in Asia; an agora section devoted to critical perspectives on international law issues; surveys of the activities of international organizations òf special relevance to Asia; and book review, bibliography and documents sections. It will be of interest to students and academics interested in international law and Asian studies.

CONTENTS Introduction by the General Editors ARTICLES 1. Japan-Alcoholic Beverages Case Revisited: A Case of Treaty Interpretation or Formation of International Law?, Takashi Miyazaki, 2. Caveat Emptor: Three Aspects of Investment Protection Treaties, Michael Ewing-Chow and Ng Wuay Teck 3. Some Asian States' Opposition to the Concept of War Crimes in Non-International Armed Conflicts and its Legal Implications, Zhu Lijiang 4. Effectiveness of National Human Rights Institutions in International Human Rights Law: Problems and Prospects, Sanzhuan Guo NOTE Vietnam's Membership in the WTO: The challenge of Reconciling Socialist Policies with the Principle of Open Economy, Lan Anh Tran LEGAL MATERIALS State Practice of Asian Countries in the Field of International Law, Participation in Multilateral Treaties AGORA: IS THERE AN ASIAN APPROACH TO INTERNATIONAL LAW? , Is there an Asian Approach to International Law? - Questions, Theses and Reflections, BS Chimni, Asian International Law: Where is it Now?, M Sornarajah DEVELOPMENTS Case between Malaysia and Singapore concerning Sovereignty over Pedra Branca/Pulau Batu Puteh, Middle Rocks and South Ledge, Robert Beckman, Australia's "Rudd Proposal": Business as Usual, CL Lim, Suhakam: The First Ten Years: The reception and interpretation of human rights norms in Malaysia, Cheah Wuiling , Survey of Literature Book Reviews, Survey of Literature

Birth, Harm and the Role of Distributive Justice Biomedical Law & Ethics Library

Alasdair Maclean, University of Dundee, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 220pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46535-9; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book looks at the issue of harm in relation to wrongful birth, wrongful life and wrongful pregnancy claims. While addressing the issue of whether English Law is coherent and consistent in these cases, Alasdair Maclean also draws comparisons with other

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

172 jurisdictions looking at the different legal approaches of the US, Australia, France and Holland. The book then goes on to investigate the issues of harm and the relationship between distributive justice and corrective justice, exploring the implications for tort theory more generally.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Wrongful life claims 3. Wrongful Pregnancy and Wrongful Birth 4. A question of harm 5. The Use of Distributive Justice 6. Other policy arguments 7. Comparison of the three claims and the coherence and consistency of the law in Scotland and England 8. Conclusions

The Other's War Birkbeck Law Press

Tarik Kochi, Queens University Belfast, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £28.99 $55.95; 234x156 mm; 280pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57143-2; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Other's War is an intervention into a set of contemporary moral, political and legal debates over the legitimacy of war and terrorism within the context of the so-called global war on terror. Tarik Kochi considers how, despite the variety of its approaches – just war theory, classical realist, post-Kantian, poststructuralist - contemporary ethical, political and legal philosophy still struggles to produce a convincing account of war. Focusing on the philosophical problem of the rightness of war, The Other's War responds to this lack. Through a discussion of a number of key Western intellectual traditions, Kochi demonstrates how often conflicting and contradictory conceptions of war’s rightness have developed in modernity. He shows how a process of ordering violence around different notions of right has constantly redrawn the boundaries of what constitutes ‘legitimate’ violence. Such a process has consequences for anyone who claims to be fighting a ‘just war’. Building upon this account and drawing upon the philosophical heritage of G.W.F. Hegel and Ernst Bloch, The Other’s War proposes a new understanding of war, not just as a social condition characterised by violent conflict and struggles for power, but as the attempt of individuals and groups to realise their normative claims through violence. Kochi argues that both of these aspects of war are an expression of the metaphysics of human subjectivity. War begins with, and is the radical exaggeration of, a fundamental activity of human subjectivity, in which the subject constitutes its normative and material identity; realising and positing itself through acts that involve negation and violence. By drawing consideration of the problem of war back to the level of a philosophical examination of the metaphysics of human subjectivity, The Other's War develops a novel theory of war that helps us to better understand the nature of contemporary conflict as a process of recognition. From this perspective, judgment, it is concluded, needs to be constantly guided by the effort to recognise the ethics of the other's war.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. A Critique of Just War 2. The Juridical Ordering of War 3. The Challenge of Morality 4. The Ethics of Recognition 5.

A Politics of Violence 6. Developing a Theory of War 7. Judging War and Terror

Revenge versus Legality Birkbeck Law Press

Katherine Maynard, Rider University, USA, Jarod Kearney and James Guimond, Rider University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56016-0; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In the wake of Guantanamo Bay, extraordinary renditions, and secret torture centres in Eastern Europe and elsewhere, Revenge versus Legality addresses the relationship between law and wild or vigilante justice; between the power to enforce retribution and the desire to seek revenge. Taking up a variety of narratives from the eras of Romanticism, Realism, Modernism and the Contemporary period, and including new theories to explain the interactions that occur between legalistic courtroom justice and the vigilante variety, Revenge versus Legality analyzes some of the main obstacles to justice, ranging from judicial corruption, to racism and imperialism.

The book culminates in a consideration of that form of crime or lawlessness that poses the most serious threat to the rule of law: vigilante justice masquerading as legality. With its mixture of politics, literature, law, and film, this lively and accessible book offers a timely reflection on the enduring phenomenon of revenge.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Revenge and the Detective Tradition: When Dogs Don't Bark, and Detectives Don't Tell 3. Some Like It Wild: Supernatural Revenge in Sheridan Le Fanu's Mr. Justice Harbottle 4. Law and the Romantic Ego: Conspiracy and Justice in Honore de Balzac's Le Pere Goriot 5. Justice, Race, and Revenge in Twain's Pudd'nhead Wilson 6. The Empire Strikes Back: Imperialism and Justice in E. M. Forster's A Passage to India 7. Race, Sex, Fear, Revenge in Richard Wright's Native Son 8. State Terrorism and Revenge in Andre Brink's A Dry White Season 9. Rogue Cops and Beltway Vigilantes

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

173

Mental Health and Crime Contemporary Issues in Public Policy

Jill Peay, London School of Economics, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-904385-60-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Does mental disorder cause crime? Does crime cause mental disorder? And if either of these could be proved to be true what consequences should stem for those who find themselves deemed mentally disordered offenders? Mental Health and Crime examines the nature of the relationship between mental disorder and crime, and concludes that the broad definition of what is an all too common human condition – mental disorder – and the widespread occurrence of an equally all too common human behaviour – that of offending – would make unlikely any definitive or easy answer to these questions. For those who offend in the context of mental disorder many aspects of the criminal justice process and of the disposals that follow are adapted to take account of a relationship between mental disorder and crime. But if the very relationship is questionable, is the way in which we deal with such offenders discriminatory? Or is it perhaps to their benefit to be thought of as less responsible for their offending than fully culpable offenders?

The book thus explores not only the nature of the relationship, but also the human rights and legal issues arising, and some of the permutations in the therapeutic process that can ensue when those with mental health problems are treated in the context of their offending behaviour.

CONTENTS Part 1: Mental Disorder and Crime 1. What is mental disorder? 2. What is the link, if any, with criminal behaviour? 3. Historical issues and contemporary concerns (from moral insanity to biogenetics and DSPD) 4. The emergence and dominance of risk Part 2: Mental Disorder and Process 5. Diversion to civil process 6. Police, courts, community, prisons, sentencing 7. Release from civil and criminal regimes Part 3: Mental Disorder and Treatment 8. Medical 9. Therapeutic 10. Conventional 11. Unconventional Part 4: Mental Disorder and Law 12. Issues of capacity and defences 13. Capacity or risk based law 14. International Developments Part 5: Mental Disorder and Future Policy 15. Rights based 16. Discrimination/stigma based 17. International trends and research 18. Fairness, difference and equality

International Development Critical Approaches to Law

Sundhya Pahuja, Jennifer Beard, both of University of Melbourne, Australia and Ruth Buchanan, York University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00 £18.99 $37.95; 216x138 mm; 144pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43290-0; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43291-7; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book contests current approaches to law and development insofar as these depend upon two premises: first, that development is the means by which global human well-being is to be achieved; and, second that law – both domestic and international – may be used to affect that development. Asking not how law may effect development but rather how development discourse sustains (international) law itself, this book argues that what is at stake in the idea of ‘development’ is the legitimization of an increasingly forceful homogenization of the political, economic and social spheres. Developmentalism, it is further argued, provides normative ‘objectivity’ to the foundational assumptions of international law (including human rights, trade and international financial law). And, as law thus becomes both a normative and an instrumental discourse, what it overlooks is the violence of developmentalism’s transformational project.

CONTENTS 1. 'Law and Development' as a Field 2. The Development Concept and its Precursors 3. The Institutionalisation of Development 4.

Crisis and Renewal 5. Development, Human Rights and the Rule of Law

Jurisdiction Critical Approaches to Law

Shaunnagh Dorsett, University of Ulster, UK and Shaun McVeigh, University of Melbourne, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00 £18.99 $35.95; 216x138 mm; 144pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47163-3; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47165-7; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

174 Introducing one of the central topics and concerns of jurisprudence – the authorisation and authority of law - Jurisdiction aims to reintroduce and refresh jurisdictional thinking about law by addressing the ways that questions of jurisdiction still give shape to law and to legal thought. Questions of jurisdiction have been central to Western legal traditions, yet in contemporary accounts of law this is often hard to recognise. At its broadest, the question of jurisdiction engages with the fact that there is law, and with the power and authority to speak in the name of the law. Such questions encompass the authorisation and ordering of law as such, as well as determinations of authority and the administration of justice within a legal regime. Without an account of jurisdiction, this book argues, it would not be possible to articulate a position from which to speak, or speak about, the law. Jurisdiction thus examines the conceptual and institutional formation of contemporary jurisdictional techniques and procedures, and explore the ways in which the jurisdictional idiom of law remains central to a critical practice and understanding of law. Providing an original, and historically grounded, elaboration of the key themes of jurisdiction, this book offers students and scholars of law a way of thinking about the contemporary world as much in terms of law's technologies, techniques and procedures as with its ideas.

CONTENTS Part A. Discourses of Jurisdiction: 1. Inaugurating Law; 2. Sovereignty and Jurisdiction; Part B. Technologies of Jurisdiction: 3.

Categories and the Forms of Law; 4. The Devices of Law; Part C. Contemporary Jurisdictions; 5. Living With-out State Jurisdictions; 6. Critical Jurisdictons; Conclusion

Crime Scenes Discourses of Law

Rebecca Scott Bray, University of Sydney, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00 £21.99 $41.95; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48390-2; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48391-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Focusing upon the representations that take place in law, forensic medicine, criminology and culture, Crime Scenes examines the ways in which knowledge about crime, death and the dead body is produced. Forensic and medico-legal practices are charged with ‘handling’ the dead (who cannot speak for themselves) and do so primarily by making injurious events visible so that the law might pass judgment. The image is thus a key site for interpreting and reconstructing the past in legal discourse. Arguing that the images (photographic images, autopsy pictures, legal testimonies) and the narratives generated through their production are the prisms through which crime and death are seen and comprehended within law, Crime Scenes explores the tension exhibited by images, as both evidential and imaginative products. Key forensic and legal spaces – such as the crime scene, the mortuary and the courtroom – as well as key methods of representing crime and death – police photography, mortuary photography and the autopsy, and legal testimony - are considered in relation to the non-legal use of historical forensic photographs, the broader cultural fascination with such images, and the canon of mortuary art quarried from medico-legal domains. The formal ‘forensic’ image, it is argued, is a site of conjecture. And its various aspects are elucidated here through an examination of the creation and the exhibition of forensic images, and the trouble that emerges when discursive boundaries - such as those between law and art - begin to haemorrhage.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. A History of Law’s Life with the Corpse 3. Picturing Crime and Police Photography: In Love with Law’s Images 4.

Truancy: The Cultural Life of Legal Pictures 5. Letters from the Dead House: Forensic Pathology and the Mortuary 6. The Trouble with Testimony 7. Law’s Lacunae 8. The Aesthetic Life of Law’s Corpses 9. Conclusion

The Land is the Source of the Law Discourses of Law

C. F. Black, Griffith University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00 £22.99 $42.95; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49756-5; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49757-2; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Land is the Source of Law brings an inter-jurisdictional dimension to the field of indigenous jurisprudence: comparing Indigenous legal regimes in New Zealand, the USA and Australia, it offers a ‘dialogical encounter with an Indigenous jurisprudence’ in which individuals are characterised by their rights and responsibilities into the Land. Though a relatively "new" field, Indigenous jurisprudence is the product of the oldest continuous legal system in the world. Utilising a range of texts – films, novels, poetry, as well as "law stories" CF Black blends legality and narrative in order to redefine jurisprudentia in Indigenous terms. This re-definition gives shape to the jurisprudential framework of the book: a shape that is not just abstract, but physical and metaphysical; a shape that is circular and concentric at the same time. The outer circle is the cosmology, so that the human never forgets that they are inside a universe - a universe that has a law. This law is found in the second circle which, whilst resembling the ancient Greek law of physis is a law based on relationship. This is a relationship that orders the placing of the individual in the innermost circle, and which structures their rights and responsibilities into the Land. The jurisprudential texts which inform the theoretical framework of this book bring to our attention the urgent message that the Djang (primordial energy) is out of balance, and that the rebalancing of that Djang is up to

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

175 the individual through their lawful behaviour, a behaviour which patterns them back into land. Thus, The Land is the Source of the Law concludes not only with a diagnosis of the cause of climate change, but a prescription which offers an alternative legal approach to global health. C.F. Black is an Aboriginal woman who has studied, taught and written about both Western and Indigenous jurisprudential traditions. Her book will be of considerable importance to those with interests in indigenous law, jurisprudence and knowledge.

CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction: Shape of the Jurisprudence ; Cosmology; The Law of Relationship; Responsibilities and Rights; The Pattern (Methodology) of the Book; The International Community; The Theorist; The Methodology; The Narratives; Chapter 2 Land Journeys : The Journeys; Journey with Hinsha Waste Agli Win; The Maori Cosmology; Chapter 3 The Theory: Senior Law Man Neidjie Cosmology ; Cosmology; Story About Feeling; Commentary; Law of Relationship; Commentary; Rights and Responsibilities: Diplomacy; Paintings; Commentary; Conclusion; Chapter 4 The Theory: Senior Law Man Mowaljarlai - Law of Relationship ; Cosmology; Creation of the Kimberley; Timeline; Law of Relationship; The Shape of the Law; Rights and Responsibilities; Conclusion; Chapter 5 The Theory: Senior Law Man Marika - Voice of Authority ; Introduction; Cosmology; Djankawu - Creation Story (excerpts); Why Warriors Lay Down and Die; System of Law; The Balance; Rights and Responsibilities; Chapter 6 A Talngaigawarima Jurisprudential Reading: Whale Rider ; Introduction; Maori Cosmology; Trauma of Law; A. (i) Koro - Out of the Past Cosmology as a Sacred Contract; (ii) The Rangatira; B. Porourangi - Portrait of the Artist as a Young Maori; C. The Future: The Recreator - Pai as Redeemer of Tradition; Conclusion; Chapter 7 A Talngai-Gawarima Jurisprudential Reading: Thunderheart ; Introduction; Film Analysis; Part I: Introduction; White Buffalo Calf Women; Historical: The Iroquois; Cosmology Becomes History; Part II: The Law of Relationship; The Trickster; The Boundary Rider; The Hero; Part III: Rights and Responsibilities; Part IV: Conclusion; Chapter 8 A Talngai-Gawarima Jurisprudential Reading: Plains of Promise ; The World of Plains of Promise; Structure; The Story; The Time Keeper’s Shadow; Glimpse of Distant Hills; Victory Lane; Plains of Papery Grass; The Bottom Story; Creation Story; Part I: Cosmology; Part II: Law of Relationship; The Law Council; Part III: Rights and Responsibilities; Conclusion; Chapter 9 Conclusion

Novel Judgements Discourses of Law

William P. MacNeil, Griffith University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00 £21.99 $41.95; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45914-3; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45915-0; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Novel Judgments addresses the ways in which jurisprudential ideas and themes are embedded and explored within nineteenth century Anglo-American prose fiction. The nineteenth century is the crucible of the "juridical imaginary": that is, of the jurisprudential ideas and concepts which inform the law to this day. The novel not only participates actively in the construction of this juridical imaginary, devising memorable tropes and figures of law and its theory, it goes even further: providing a critique of that construction which points the reader towards a new juridical imaginary, one which may re-imagine, for example, the "command of the sovereign" ( Pride and Prejudice ), the ethics of law ( Ivanhoe ), or the "rights of (wo)man" ( Frankenstein ). As dramatisations of the principal issues and movements of nineteenth century legal theory, these novels may therefore be read jurisprudentially. For, as William MacNeil demonstrates, they make novel judgments about legal theory - judgments which not only finds it wanting, but which also carry with them a potential for transforming a juridical imaginary that is still with us.

CONTENTS Pro lex omenon: Towards a Novel Legal Theory of the Novel as Legal Theory 1. John Austin or Jane Austen? The Province of Jurisprudence Determined in Pride and Prejudice 2. Jousting with Bentham: Utility, Morality and Ethics in Ivanhoe’s Tournament of Law 3. The Monstrous Body of the Law: Wollstonecraft vs. Shelley 4. Hawthorne ’s Haunted House of Law: The Romance of American Legal Realism in The House of the Seven Gables 5. In Boz We Trust! Bleak House’s (Re)Imagination of Trusteeship 6.

Two on a Guillotine: Courts and "Crits" in A Tale of Two Cities 7. Beyond Governmentality: Retributive, Distributive and Deconstructive Justice in Great Expectations 8. "Lesser Breeds Without the Law": Law’s Empire in Lord Jim. A Jurisprudential Postscript: Century’s Close and the End of the ( Meta )Narrative of Law

The Rule of Reason in European Constitutionalism and Citizenship Discourses of Law

Yuri Borgmann-Prebil, University of Sussex, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00 £21.99 $41.95; 234x156 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56529-5; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56530-1; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

176 Identifying crucial deficiencies in the legal theories of Hart and Dworkin, The Rule of Reason in European Constitutionalism and Citizenship draws on the work of Habermas and Alexy in order to elaborate a new juridical conception of citizenship. Taking Europe as its focus, the central substantive argument of the book is that a 'rule of reason' governs supranational constitutionalism. Addressing the free movement law of the internal market, and recently developed case law on the free movement of citizens, it shows how the contours of European and member state legal systems, as well as European and national citizenship, are delimited through an ongoing judicial discourse. The constant drawing and re-drawing of the boundaries of member state and European law is negotiated in a judicial conversation that, it is argued, constitutes a key characteristic of supranational constitutionalism: one that supports a thin, juridical, and essentially rights based, conceptualisation of European citizenship. Offering an innovative theoretical analysis of EU law, The Rule of Reason in European Constitutionalism and Citizenship will be of considerable interest to scholars of European law, European politics and legal theory.

Sex, Culpability and the Defence of Provocation Discourses of Law

Danielle Tyson, Monash University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56017-7; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Dealing with the complex case law concerning the use of the provocation defence in cases of intimate killings, Sex, Culpability and the Defence of Provocation considers the construction and representation of subjectivity and sexual difference in legal narrations of homicide. Undeniably, the most vexing exculpatory cultural narrative of our times is that of a woman 'asking for it'. Addressing the operation of the criminal law on provocation across different international jurisdictions, this book explores how the process of judgment in a criminal trial involves not only the drawing of inferences from the ‘facts’ of a particular case, but also operates to deliver a narrative. Law, it is argued, constructs a narrative of how the female body incites male violence. And, pursuing an approach that is informed by socio-legal studies, literary theory and feminist theories of the body, Sex, Culpability and the Defence of Provocation considers how this narrative is constructed via a range of discursive practices that position woman as a threat to masculine norms of propriety and autonomy.

The Jewish Law Annual Volume 18 Jewish Law Annual

Edited by Berachyahu Lifshitz, the Hebrew University of Jerusalem, Israel PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57404-4; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Volume 18 of The Jewish Law Annual contains six comprehensive articles on various aspects of Jewish law. Three articles address family law. One addresses the painful issue of the plight of the wife whose husband withholds conjugal relations. In a marriage where relations are withheld, the wife may seek a divorce, while her husband may withhold divorce. Prolonged withholding of divorce renders the wife an agunah , that is, a wife chained to a dead marriage and unable to start anew and rebuild her life. The author explores the halakhic feasibility of allowing a wife in such a predicament to bring a claim for damages against her husband for infliction of mental distress. If such claims are allowed, recalcitrant husbands may rethink their intransigence and consent to grant the divorce. Another article examines the evolution of halakhic thinking on the parent–child relationship. It traces the stages by which halakhic family law changed from a basically patriarchal system in which both mother and the child were deemed subject to the father’s will, to a more balanced system where wife and husband have equal standing with respect to custody matters, and the best interest of the child is the main consideration in custody proceedings. In another article, halakhic attitudes to corporal punishment of children are analyzed. The author explores whether the "Spare the rod and spoil the child" adage, which is based on a verse from Proverbs, indeed reflects the position of Jewish law. He shows that in fact, while recourse to corporal punishment for educational purposes is permitted--subject to detailed qualifications that greatly limit its scope--two divergent approaches to corporal punishment can be discerned in the halakhic sources. One maintains that administration of corporal punishment can be a useful pedagogic tool of last resort, whereas the other seeks to minimize recourse to corporal punishment in the educational context, questioning its efficacy.

The article shows that in any event, the notion that corporal punishment is required by the law, as some, invoking the "spare the rod" maxim, have maintained, is by no means borne out by the halakhic literature. The volume also features a fascinating article on the history of two societies founded in London to further the study of Jewish law using modern scholarly methodologies. One society was active at the end of the 1920s and beginning of the 1930s, the second was active a decade later. The article explains the background to the establishment of the societies and analyzes the societies’ objectives, leaders and memberships. Both societies were founded with the intention of reformulating the classic halakhic sources in a manner that would render them suitable for contemporary application in the nascent Jewish state. But as the author shows, ultimately much of their energy was devoted to presenting the said sources to the non-Jewish legal world, for the purpose of reciprocal enrichment and edification. Rounding out the volume are two jurisprudential studies on classic legal problems. The first explores the prohibition against seeking a second legal ruling when a ruling declaring something forbidden has been handed down. What is the scope of this rule, and in what ways does it differ from the res judicata principle in western law? The author shows that both procedural and substantive readings of the prohibition were put forward in the

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

177 talmudic commentaries, and explains the jurisprudential implications of these different readings. The second article examines the question of the agent who breaches his principal’s trust, focusing on the case of the agent who executes the act he was sent to carry out, but does so for himself, rather than his principal. To what extent is he liable for ensuing damages to the principal, and is his act invariably deemed reprehensible? Another issue is the legal status of the transaction carried out by such an agent. Do the rights and obligations generated by the transaction accrue to the agent, or to the principal? And how are determinations as to the status of the transaction to be made? Is the testimony of an unfaithful agent, or one who has deviated from his mandate, deemed trustworthy? Is any role played by third parties, such as vendors, in determining the status of the transaction?

CONTENTS 1. The Prohibition against Consulting Two Authorities and the Nature of Halakhic Truth, Shimshon Ettinger 2. The Changing Profile of the Parent-Child Relationship in Jewish law, Yehiel Kaplan 3. Jewish Law in London: between Two Societies, Amihai Radzyner 4.

Corporal Punishment of Children in Jewish Law: a Comparative Study, Benjamin Shmueli 5. Recovery for Infliction of Emotional Distress: toward Relief for the Agunah, Ronnie Warburg 6. The Agent who Breaches his Principal’s Trust, Michael Wygoda

Governance Through Development Law, Development and Globalization

Celine Tan, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49554-7; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Governance Through Development locates the Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper framework within the broader context of international law and global governance; exploring its impact on third world state engagement with the global political economy and the international regulatory norms and institutions which support it. The Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper (PRSP) framework has replaced the controversial Structural Adjustment Programme, as the primary mechanism through which official development financing is channelled to low-income developing countries. It has, however, changed the regulatory landscape of international development financing, signalling a wider paradigmatic shift in the cartography of aid and consequently in the nature of north-south relations. Governance Through Development documents and analyses this change which, within a legacy of postcolonial economic relations, revealing the wider economic and geo-political significance of the PRSP framework. This framework, Celine Tan argues, establishes a new regulatory regime that builds upon the disciplinary project of structural adjustment by embedding neoliberal economic conditionalities within a regime of domestic governance and public policy reform.

Lawyers and the Construction of Transnational Justice Law, Development and Globalization

Edited by Yves Dezalay and Bryant Garth, Southwestern Law School, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58118-9; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Lawyers and the Construction of Transnational Justice examines the people, the conflicts, and the mechanisms involved in producing transnational norms and institutions. Ordinarily, a clear division is made between business law and public interest law or cause lawyering; but this volume explore the relationships and similarities between transnational developments in both spheres. Connecting the human rights side of justice with the norms used to regulate market and business, its contributors pursue detailed empirical research that focuses on the complexities, ambiguities and contradictions in the processes, as well as the outcomes, of constructing transnational justice. Addressing a range of international issues, Lawyers and the Construction of Transnational Justice is a major contribution to the field of sociology of law, as well as to debates about global governance.

CONTENTS I. Introduction; I. Lawyers and the Evolving Global Justice and Human Rights Industry; Chapter 2. John Hagan and Ron Levi, "Lawyers, Humanitarian Emergencies, and the Politics of Large Numbers"; Chapter 3. Julien Seroussi, "The Collapsing of the International Mobilization for Universal Jurisdiction: From ‘Frame Alignment’ to ‘Habitus Alignment’"; Chapter 4. Sara Dezalay, "Lawyering War or Talking Peace? On militant usages of the law in the resolution of internal armed conflicts: a case study of International Alert"; Chapter 5. Sandrine Lefranc, "From Post-Conflict Peacebuilding in Developing Countries to ADR in the North"; Chapter 6. Pierre Yves Conde, "Legal Cosmopolitanism Divided. Stating, Codifying, and Invoking International Law of State Responsibility"; II. Justice and Rules in the Transnational Governance of the Market; Chapter 7. Yves Dezalay & Bryant Garth, "Marketing and Legitimating Transnational Regulation." Drawing especially on earlier work on international commercial arbitration, the co-editors will discuss the general field of business regulation and the evolution of transnational standards; Chapter 8. Diana Rodriguez Franco, "The Globalization of Intellectual Property Rights: The Politics of Law and the Transformation of National and Transnational Legal Fields: The struggles behind the IP chapter of the Colombian-U.S. Free Trade Agreement"; Chapter 9. Gregory Shaffer, "The Trials of Winning at the WTO: What Lies behind Brazil’s Success"; III. Lawyers and the Construction of European

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

178 Justice; Chapter 10. Antoine Vauchez, "The Force of a Weak Field: Law and Lawyers in the Government of Europe"; Chapter 11.

Antonin Cohen, "The Emergent Field of European Law: Transnational Institutions, Economic Interests and Career Paths to the European Court of Justice"; Chapter 12. Mikael Madsen, "Human Rights and the Hegemony of Ideology: European Lawyers and the Cold War Battle over International Human Rights"; Chapter 13. Conclusion

Social Movements, Law and the Politics of Land Reform Law, Development and Globalization

George Meszaros, University of Warwick, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $122.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47771-0; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Social Movements, Law and the Politics of Land Reform investigates how state and rural social movements are struggling for land reform against the background of a re-emergence of constitutional promises and projects in much of the developing world. By the early 1990s, as state driven was eschewed in favour of neo-liberal market principles, the historic centrality of rural conflicts was called into question. And accelerated urbanisation - most notably in China, India and Latin America - appeared to spell the death of the peasantry itself. Nevertheless, significant struggles continue: in China, largely in response to land grabs by powerful coalitions of speculators and party officials; in India, as low caste tenant farmers and landless indigenous people continue to demand land redistribution; in South Africa, and elsewhere. This book focuses on the relationship between these struggles and the state. Taking Brazil as an example, Social Movements, Law and the Politics of Land Reform outlines the complex reasons behind the failures of its constitution and law enforcement mechanisms to deliver social justice. Whilst developments there have distinctive origins, they nevertheless provide important lessons and insights for other countries. In particular, it is argued that Brazil’s failures - as elsewhere are based not simply on the severe and widespread overestimation of the promise of law - its power and autonomy - but, more significantly, upon a corresponding underestimation of law’s relations of power. Using detailed empirical evidence the book develops a threefold argument: first, the inescapable presence of power relations in all aspects of the production and reproduction of law; secondly their dominant impact on socio-legal outcomes; and finally, given the significance of power relations, the essential role played by social movements as a force in the realisation of law’s progressive potential.

CONTENTS 1: Introduction: Constitutionalism Without Redistribution 2: Legal Paralysis and Mass Mobilisation 3: Criminalising a Mass Movement 4: The Social and Political Contingency of Law 5: The Limits of Progressive State Action 6: New Models of Legality? 7: Conclusion

Law, Complexity and Globalisation Law, Science and Society

Julian Webb, University of Warwick, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 300pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-84472-033-0; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Complexity theory has its earliest origins in studies of self-organization within genetic and other biological systems, and in parallel developments elsewhere in the natural sciences. More recently still, complexity theory has begun to impact thinking in the social sciences and social theory. Philisophically, there are still strong links with both (post-) structuralist and phenomenological traditions, while in terms of social theory, complexity theory has tended to be treated as a species of systems theory, and hence linked to the normative-functionalist projects of Durkheim and Parsons. However, more recent work on the social science of complexity has stressed how complexity theory can transcend the status inherent in classical functionalist thinking about the social order, by stressing the fluid, heterogeneous, unpredictable and increasingly global ordering of the social world.

CONTENTS The Globalization of Law and Legal Theory. Towards a Socio-legal Theory of Complexity. The Mechanics of Global Complexity.

The Mechanics of Global Complexity: Legal Networks and Flows. The Emergence of Global Law. Global Law Beyond the State.

Conclusion: The Complexity of Global Law

Carl Schmitt Nomikoi Critical Legal Thinkers

Michael Salter, University of Central Lancashire, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

179 HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47850-2; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There has been and continues to be a remarkable revival in academic interest in Carl Schmitt's thought within politics, but this is the first book to address his thought from an explicitly legal theoretical perspective. Transcending the prevailing one-sided and purely historical focus on Schmitt’s significance for debates that took place in the Weimar Republic 1919-1933, this book addresses the actual and potential significance of Schmitt's thought for debates within contemporary Anglo-American legal theory that have emerged during the past three decades. These include: the critique of legal positivism; the ‘indeterminacy thesis’ of American Critical Legal Studies; the reinterpretation of law as a form of strategically disguised politics by the contemporary sociology of law movement; the emphasis upon law as implicated in, and as aspect of, a network of mobile yet dispersed power relationships irreducible to a central state; the legal theoretical critique of human rights and liberalism more generally; Schmitt’s critique of innovations within international criminal law: the inhumanity and hypocrisy of supposedly universalistic ‘crimes against humanity’; and the retrospective criminalisation of ‘aggressive war’ as part of the Nuremberg trials process. In these respects, therefore, Michael Salter provides an overview and assessment of Schmitt's thought, as well as a consideration of its relevance for contemporary legal thought.

CONTENTS Introduction: Schmitt as a legal thinker 1. The hidden assumptions and commitments of liberal approaches to the legal process within modern liberal-democratic states 2. The concealed presuppositions and commitments of liberal approaches to public and constitutional law 3. A Schmittian analysis of the politics of declaring a state of emergency in response to terrorist / partisan violence 4. Schmitt on war, waging aggressive war and crimes against humanity 5. Criticism of the claims and implications of Schmittian legal theory Conclusion: Salvaging aspects of Schmitt through immanent critique?

Deleuze & Guattari: Emergent Law Nomikoi Critical Legal Thinkers

Jamie Murray, Liverpool John Moores University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49601-8; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Deleuze & Guattari: Emergent Law is an exposition and development of Deleuze & Guattari's legal theory. Although there has been considerable interest in Deleuze & Guattari in critical legal studies, as well as considerable interest in legality in Deleuze & Guattari studies, this is the first book to focus exclusively on Deleuze & Guattari and law. Situating Deleuze & Guattari's engagement with social organisation and legality in the context of their theory of 'abstract machines' and 'intensive assemblages', Jamie Murray presents their theory of law as that of a two-fold conception of, first, a transcendent molar law and, second, an immanent molecular emergent law. Transcendent molar legality is the traditional object of legal theory. And, as explicated here, immanent molecular emergent law is the novel juridical object that Deleuze & Guattari identify. Developing this conception, Deleuze & Guattari: Emergent Law draws out its implications for current and for future legal theory; arguing that it provides the basis for a new jurisprudence capable of creating new concepts of legality.

CONTENTS 1. The Deleuzian Ontology 2. The Deleuzian Epistemology 3. The Assemblage Theory of Legality 4. On Two Planes: Molar Law and Emergent Law 5. Social Machines: Topology of Regimes of Legalities 6. What is Deleuze & Guattari Critical Legal Theory?

Giorgio Agamben Nomikoi Critical Legal Thinkers

Thanos Zartaloudis, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 336pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-44022-6; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Giorgio Agamben: Power, Law and the Uses of Criticism is a thorough engagement with the thought of the influential Italian philosopher Giorgio Agamben. It explores Agamben’s work on language, ontology, power, law and criticism from the 1970s to his most recent publications. Introducing Agamben's work to a readership in legal theory, as well as in the humanities and social sciences more generally, Thanos Zartaloudis argues that an adequate understanding of Agamben's Homo Sacer project requires an attention to his earlier philosophical writings on language, ontology, power and time. It is through this attentive and creative analysis of Agamben's work that Zartaloudis here presents a rethinking of the ideas of justice and criticism.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

180 1. Sacred Foundations: Mythologemes of Law and Power 2. From Transcendental Sovereignty to Neo-Governmentality: The Oikonomia of Power 3. Secular Sovereignty: A Gigantomachy Over a Void 4. The Biopolitical Nomos of Insignificant Lives 5. The Sacrament of Power and the Sacrament of Language 6.The Experience of Potentiality 7. The Idea of Justice

Henri Lefebvre Nomikoi Critical Legal Thinkers

Chris Butler, Griffith University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45967-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION While certain aspects of Lefebvre’s writings have been examined extensively during the last three decades within the disciplines of geography, cultural studies, sociology, urban planning and social theory, there has been no comprehensive consideration of his work within legal studies. Henri Lefebvre: Critical Legal Studies and the Politics of Space provides the first detailed analysis of the relevance and importance of the social theory of Henri Lefebvre for the study of law and the administrative state. Introducing Lefebvre to a legal audience, this book begins by surveying the importance of Lefebvre’s work within the social sciences, and outlining the ways in which it can inform both critical legal theory and other areas of critical legal studies, such as the emerging field of critical legal geography. Key themes that run through Lefebvre’s oeuvre are then considered in some detail, including his unorthodox, humanist approach to Marxist theory, his sociological and methodological work on everyday life, his theory of the production of space, his contribution to state theory and his concept of the ‘right to the city’. Drawing on political struggles which surround the production of space, Lefebvre’s theoretical categories, Chris Butler argues, suggest a new way for critical legal scholarship to conceptualise law: as a central component in the relationship between state power and the inhabitance of space. The elements of Lefebvre’s work thus offer not only an important perspective on how urban governance and public administration have been transformed by fundamental shifts in the architecture of the state, but also an opportunity to examine how this transformation contains the possibility of new forms of spatial citizenship.

CONTENTS Introduction: Critical legal studies and Henri Lefebvre 1. The social theory of Henri Lefebvre 2. Critical legal theory and the production of abstract space 3. Law, the state and the politics of space 4. Administrative power and the rhythms of everyday life 5.

The right to the city and the production of differential space Conclusions and openings

Merger Control in Europe Routledge Research in Competition Law

Ioannis Kokkoris, Principal Case Officer and Economic Advisor, Office of Fair Trading, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56513-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book addresses the phenomenon of mergers that may result in non-coordinated effects in oligopolistic markets. Such cases are sometimes referred to as "non-collusive oligopolies", or "gap cases" and there is a concern that they might not be covered by the substantive test that some Member States use for merger assessment. Ioannis Kokkoris examines the argument that the European Community Merger Regulation (Regulation 4064/89) did not capture gap cases and considers the extent to which the revised substantive test in Regulation 139/2004 deals with the problem of non-collusive oligopolies. The author identifies actual examples of mergers that gave rise to a problem of non-coordinated effects in oligopolistic markets, both in the EU and in other jurisdictions, and analyses the way in which these cases were dealt with in practice. The book considers legal systems such as United Kingdom, United States, Australia and New Zealand. The book investigates whether there is any difference in the assessment of non-collusive oligopolies between the various substantive tests which have been adopted for merger assessment in various jurisdictions. The book also looks at the various methodological tools available to assist competition authorities and the professional advisers of merging firms to identify whether a particular merger might give rise to anticompetitive effects and explores the type of market structure in which a merger is likely to lead to non-coordinated effects in oligopolistic markets.

CONTENTS Introduction, 1. European Community Merger Regulation - Council Regulation (Ec) No 4064/89, 2. The New European Community Merger Regulation - Council Regulation (Ec) No 139/2004, 3. Merger Assessment and The Legal Substantive Test: Quantitative Methods in Merger Analysis, 4. Mergers Leading to Non-Coordinated Effects in Oligopolistic Markets, 5. Event Studies in Assessing the Gap, 6. Market Structure – Assessment Criteria of Gap Cases

Merger Control in Post-Communist Countries Routledge Research in Competition Law

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

181 Jurgita Malinauskaite, Brunel University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 400pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48653-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides a critical analysis of merger control regimes in the former socialist countries with small market economies, looking at the unique challenges facing these economies. Questions will be asked as to what extent these countries have had to follow dictation from the EU and whether this implementation of EC merger control rules has been justified from the point of view of these countries' economic situations. The book will analyse the merger control regimes in Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania, Slovenia and Slovakia. However, reference will be made to other small market economies of the EU including Cyprus, Ireland, Luxembourg and Malta in order to evaluate the particular difficulties the former socialist countries with small market economies have had in the implementation and further development of merger control rules.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Economic approach towards mergers: small market economies 3. Legal approach towards mergers: EC merger control rules and policy 4. Merger control regimes in the Baltic countries 5. Merger control regimes in Slovakia and Slovenia 6.

Merger Control Regimes in other Member States of the EU with Small Market Economies

The Political Determinants of Corporate Governance in China Routledge Research in Corporate Law

Chenxia Shi, Monash University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $110.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57401-3; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Corporate governance is currently an issue of both theoretical and practical significance in China, as it affects the development of China’s securities market and market players as well as China’s participation in the economic globalization and the world’s legal order. In recent years China has taken initiatives to follow international trends to develop its corporate governance regime. This book investigates the key factors shaping corporate governance in China and examine whether the path dependency stands in the way of substantial convergence with international models. The core question underlying this investigation is: will globalisation of markets and China’s integration into the world economy lead to the convergence of its corporate governance with international models or will path dependency shaped by its political traditions dictate a unique China path? The book also looks at whether transplanted rules on directors’ duties are effective in enhancing accountability of directors of Chinese companies. To answer these questions, both historical and comparative methods are used to examine and explain exogenous and endogenous factors shaping the path of corporate governance in China. The book examines the underlying factors shaping business regulation and corporate governance in China, including political imperatives, the traditional commercial culture, corporate legislative developments, and the evolution of corporate governance systems within China’s political economy contexts. It explains why the political economy theory and path dependence theory have a better fit than most other theories in explaining the development path of Chinese corporate governance. In doing so, it challenges the relevance of convergence explanations for legal transplantation that have been developed in European and North American contexts.

Rethinking Corporate Governance Routledge Research in Corporate Law

Alessio Pacces, Erasmus University, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 432pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56519-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book takes a comparative law and economics approach to the study of corporate governance. It looks at the overall impact of corporate law on separation of ownership and control across different jurisdictions, taking into account the contributions of economic theory, empirical research, and comparative corporate law to the analysis of corporate governance. This book reappraises the existing framework for economic analysis of corporate law. The standard approach to the legal foundations of corporate governance is based on the ‘law matters’ thesis, according to which corporate law promotes the separation of ownership and control by protecting minority shareholders from expropriation. Rethinking Corporate Governance takes a broader perspective on the economic and legal determinants of corporate governance. It shows that investor protection is a necessary, but not sufficient, legal condition for efficient separation of ownership and control. Supporting control powers vested in managers or controlling shareholders is at least as important as protecting investors from their abuse. Corporate law does not only matter in the last respect; it matters in both.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

182 CONTENTS Part 1: Theory and Evidence on Corporate Law and Economics 1. Corporate Governance: Players and Problems 2. Comparative Corporate Governance: Facts 3. Agency Costs and Incomplete Contracts: Theory 4. Comparative Institutional Analysis: 'Law Matters' Part 2: Rethinking Law 'Matters' in a Theory of Private Benefits of Control 5. 'Law Matters' Revisited: Private Benfits of Control 6.

Control Matter too: A Tale of Two Missions for Corporate Law Part 3: Corporate Law and Economics Revisited 7. Legal Distribution of Corporate Powers 8. Laws of Conflicted Interest Transactions I: Functional Analysis 9. Laws of Conflicted Interest Transactions II: Comparative legal Analysis 10. Regulation of Control Transactions I: Legal and Economic Framework 11. Regulation of Control Transactions II: How it is, How it Should be

Criminal Law and Policy in the European Union Routledge Research in European Union Law

Samuli Miettinen, University of Salford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $155.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47426-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A literal construction of the EC and EU Treaties suggests that their framers intended to limit the positive competences of both the Community and the Union in the field of criminal law. However, the European Court of Justice has consistently applied tests of necessity and effectiveness to develop the Community’s catalogue of legislative competences and the interpretation of Community law, culminating in decisions which accord to the Community a limited criminal competence where this is deemed necessary for the effectiveness of other policy aims. This book takes stock of the development of criminal law in the context of the European Community and the European Union, and examines whether this has led to a European criminal policy, and interrogates the legal effects that European-level initiatives in the field have on national criminal law and on suspects. The work reflects on the interaction between the law of the European Community and national criminal law since the signing of the Treaty of Rome and proceed to consider the prospects of criminal law enacted at the European level against this framework of historical development. The book will review the supremacy of Community law over conflicting national criminal law, the past legislative practice of harmonised ‘administrative’ penalties and their impact on national legal systems, the ramifications of the Greek Maize decision, the development of relevant Community principles of fundamental rights, and the 2005 decisions on implied criminal competence and sympathetic interpretation. In the light of these developments and the forthcoming October 2007 judgment of the Court of Justice in the ShipSource Pollution case, the work will explore whether there are fields in which the Community might enact directly applicable criminal penalties in the form of EC regulations. It will also examine related doctrinal concerns considered by the Court of Justice in its earlier case law on the interface between EC law and national criminal law.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction to European Criminal Law and Policy 2. Shaping the Criminal law of the European Union: Sources and Institutions 3.

Criminal law and the European Community 4. Criminal law and the European Union 5. Approximation and Harmonisation: Procedural and Substantive aspects 6. European Criminal Law and Individual Rights 7. Evaluating European Criminal Policy 8. The European Court of Justice and Criminal Law 9. European Criminal Law in National Courts 10. Criminal Law and the Reform Treaty 11. Prospects for Criminal Law and Policy in the European Union

Human Rights and Minority Rights in the European Union Routledge Research in European Union Law

Kirsten Shoraka, University of Hertfordshire, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49125-9; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The end of the Cold War has ushered a restructuring of the institutions of the European Community, culminating into its enlargement to Eastern Europe, under the aegis of economic integration, democracy and human rights. This book examines the development and the role of human rights in the European Union, from its inception as an economic co-operation project to an organisation of European States with a political agenda that goes beyond its borders. It argues that human rights have become an important component of the foreign policy of the European Union and that this role has grown from the inception of the Union through the Cold War and thereafter onto the process of enlargement of the Union. The book goes on to analyse the EU’s policy on minorities, as a particular example of human rights. It considers the level of their protection within the EU and the framework of international law, and compares minority rights in the older Member States including France, Germany and the UK, with newer Eastern European states.

CONTENTS 1. Overview 2. A Background to The Establishment of Human Rights in the Law and Policies of the European Union 3.The Common Foreign and Security Policy as an Instrument of Human Rights Policy 4. The Eu and the Protection of Minority Rights in Europe Chapter 5. Minority Rights in the Member States

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

183

New Governance and the European Employment Strategy Routledge Research in European Union Law

Samantha Velluti, University of Liverpool, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 292pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46779-7; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In recent years new or experimental approaches to governance in the EU, namely the Open Method of Coordination (OMC), have attracted great interest and controversy. This book examines the European Employment Strategy (EES) and its implementation through the OMC, exploring the promises and limitations of the EES for EU social law and policy and for the safeguard of social rights. This significant and timely work offers new insights and fresh perspectives into the operation of New Governance and its relationship with both European and national law and constitutionalism. This book will be of great interest to academics, researchers and postgraduate students working in European law – specifically in the field of EU employment law and gender equality- and European governance studies in general.

CONTENTS 1.Introduction 2.Conceptualizing "New" EU Governance: Revisiting Law and Constitutionalism in an Evolving European Union 3.The Impact of Globalization, Market Integration and EMU on EU Social Governance 4.The Evolution of European Labour Law: from "Employment Law" to "Employment Policy" 5.The European Employment Strategy and its Implementation through the Open Method of Coordination 6.Gender Equality and Mainstreaming in the Re-Articulation of Labour Market Policies in Italy, Denmark and the Czech Republic 7.An Assessment of Ten Years of Existence of the European Employment Strategy 8.Conclusion

Turkey’s Accession to the European Union Routledge Research in European Union Law

Edel Hughes, University of Limerick, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57785-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Turkey’s accession to the European Union is undoubtedly one of the Union’s most contested potential enlargements. The narrative that dominates the debate surrounding this issue primarily relates to problems such as a lack of respect for fundamental human rights in Turkey, the Kurdish question and the continuing stalemate concerning northern Cyprus. This book looks at these issues, but also proposes that a review of Turkey’s experience with the EU in its numerous incarnations suggests that these concerns may mask a deeper disquiet. Whilst there are several questions that Turkey must address, particularly in the area of human rights guarantees, the concerns which raise debates regarding Turkish membership are not issues that are unique to Turkey. Turkey’s EU experience also raises fundamental questions about religion and the EU project that have greater implication than simply Turkish accession. Through the lens of the Turkish example, this book addresses these broader questions, such as the nature of European ‘identity’, Europe’s Christian past, the limits of pluralism and the fundamental question of religion in the European public sphere.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part 1: Weighing History: Turkey’s Path To Accession 2. The Establishment Of Modern Turkey: Early Secular Beginnings 3. EU-Turkey Formalised Agreements 4. The Kurdish Question In Turkey Part 2: A Rights-Based Approach? 5. Human Rights Reforms And Assessment Of The Commission 6. Freedom Of Expression: Still The Issue? 7. Minorities And Turkey Part 3: Cyprus V Turkey 8. The Cyprus Question And Turkey 9. International Attempts At A Resolution To The Cyprus Problem Part 4: Lifting The Veil 10. Religion In The Public Sphere: The European Context 11. Religion In The Public Sphere 12. Conclusions: Turkey’s Path To Membership And The Broader Question Of Islam In Europe

European Prudential Banking Regulation and Supervision Routledge Research in Finance and Banking Law

Larisa Dragomir, World Savings Banks Institute, Belgium PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 384pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49656-8; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The current financial crisis and the financial market events in 2007-2009 have spurred renewed interest and controversy in debates regarding financial regulation and supervision. This book takes stock of the developments in EU legislation, case law and institutional structures with regards to banking regulation and supervision, which preceded and followed the recent financial crisis. It does not

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

184 merely provide an update, but anchors these developments into the broader EU law context, challenging past paradigms and anticipating possible developments. The author provides a systematic analysis of the interactions between the content of prudential rules and the mechanisms behind their production and application European Prudential Banking Regulation and Supervision includes discussions of the European banking market structure and of regulatory theory that both aim to circumscribe prudential concerns. It scrutinises the content of prudential norms, proposes a qualification of these norms and an assessment of their interaction with other types of norms (corporate, auditing and accounting, consumer protection, competition rules). It also features an analysis of the underpinning institutional set-up and its envisaged reforms, focusing on the typical EU concerns related to checks and balances.

Finally, the book attempts to revive the debate on supervisory liability, in light of the developments discussed. This book will be of great value to all those interested in financial stability matters (practitioners, policy-makers, students, academics), as well as to EU law scholars.

CONTENTS Part 1 : European Banking At The Turn Of The Third Millennium 1. Banks And Market Structures 2. Some Elements Of Regulatory Theory Part 2: The Normative Analyses Of Prudential Issues 3. An Evolutionary Perspective On Prudential Rules 4. The Multiple Layers Of Prudential Rules 5. Substantive Aspects Of Prudential Regulation 6. The Principles Characterising The European Prudential Regulatory Regime 7. The Interaction Of Prudential Regulation With Other Categories Of Norms Part 3: Institutional Aspects Of Prudential Regulation And Supervision 8. The Institutional Framework- General Aspects 9. The European Institutional Framework For Prudential Banking Regulation 10. The European Institutional Framework For Prudential Banking Supervision 11. The Way Forward 12. The Issue Of Supervisory Liability 13. Supervisory Liability Under The Current European Framework 14. Future European Scenarios For Supervisory Liability 15. Conclusions

International Secured Transactions Law Routledge Research in Finance and Banking Law

Orkun Akseli, Newcastle University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ75.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 342pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48810-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines international harmonisation and the law of secured transactions. International reform efforts to harmonise and modernise secured transactions law have gained pace with the globalisation of markets. Harmonised modernisation of secured transactions law is said to facilitate credit and promote economic activity by creating predictable rules. The book distils unifying principles of and considers relevant issues under international conventions on the assignment of receivables, international factoring, international interests in mobile equipment, EBRD Model Law on Secured Transactions, and the UNCITRAL Legislative Guide on Secured Transactions. The book makes comparisons of international instruments by using the English and US laws to identify and illustrate problems with the current systems that need to be addressed and offers possible solutions.

CONTENTS 1. Internationalisation of Secured Transactions Law and Facilitation of Credit 2. Harmonisation of Secured Transactions in Context 3.

Scope of Applicability and Party Autonomy 4. Effectiveness of Security Interests as between the Parties 5. Effectiveness of Security Interests against Third Parties 6. Priority of a Security Right 7. Retention of Title (Acquisition Security Right) 8. Choice of Law Issues

The Legal and Regulatory Aspects of Islamic Banking Routledge Research in Finance and Banking Law

Abdul Karim Aldohni, Newcastle University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 342pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55515-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION During the last ten years the Islamic banking sector has grown rapidly, at an international level, as well as in individual jurisdictions including the UK. Islamic finance differs quite substantially from conventional banking, using very different mechanisms, and operating according to a different theory as it is based on Islamic Sharia law, but at the same time it is always subject to the law of the particular financial market in which it operates. This book takes a much-needed and comprehensive look at the legal and regulatory aspects which affect Islamic finance law, and examines the current UK and international banking regulatory frameworks which impact on this sector. The book examines the historical genesis of Islamic banking, looking at how it has developed in Muslim countries before going on to consider the development of Islamic banking in the UK and the legal position of Islamic banks within English law.

The book explores company, contract, and tax law and traces the impact it has had on the development of Islamic banking in the UK, before going on to argue that the current legal and regulatory framework which affects the Islamic banking sector has often had a negative impact on Islamic banking in the UK. CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

185 1. Introduction 2. The Historical and Ideological Background of Islamic Banks 3. Legal Analysis of the English Legal System in Comparison to the Islamic Legal System 4. The Legal Description and Classification of Islamic Banks under the English Law 5.

Islamic Banks in Practice: The Operational Aspects of Islamic Banking 6. The Banking Regulatory and Supervisory System in the United Kingdom 7. The Application of Islamic Banking under the Conventional Banking Regulation of the United Kingdom: Fit or Conflict? 8. Islamic Banking in Malaysia, the Malaysian Case Study: A Legal Analysis 9. Concluding Remarks and Recommendations

Children and International Human Rights Law Routledge Research in Human Rights Law

Aisling Parkes, University College, Cork, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45836-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The United Nations Convention on the Rights of the Child 1989 is one of the most highly ratified human rights treaties in the world, with 192 states currently signed up to it. Article Twelve is fundamental to the Convention and states that all children capable of forming views have the right to express those views, and recognises that all children have the right to be heard in any judicial and administrative proceedings affecting them. This book explores the historical and theoretical background to Article Twelve, and examines the various models of participation which have been created to facilitate a better understanding of this provision. Aisling Parkes analyzes the extent to which Article Twelve has been implemented under international law, and in domestic law, as well as setting-out recommendations for the most effective ways of implementing Article Twelve in all areas of children’s lives.

CONTENTS 1. Article 12 and Child Participation 2. The Nature and Scope of Article 12 of the CRC 3. Implementing Article 12 in Practice 4. The Family 5. Family Law Proceedings 6. Education 7. Children in Conflict with the Law 8. Child Participation at Community, National and International Level 9. National Human Rights Institutions 10. International Enforcement of the CRC 11. Conclusion

Emerging Areas of Human Rights in the 21st Century Routledge Research in Human Rights Law

Edited by Marco Odello and Sofia Cavandoli, both of University of Wales, Aberystwyth, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56209-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides a set of studies and reflections on emerging human rights on the basis of developments in law that have taken place since the adoption of the United Nations Universal Declaration on Human Rights. The book focuses on issues and rights that were not originally included in the Universal Declaration but have become emerging areas of human rights including the right to environmental protection, humanitarian aid and human rights, and the right to democratic governance. The contributors to the volume consider these developing rights in the light of contemporary national and international law, but also consider the wider picture and the contexts in which human rights may have effect. The book maps out areas of emerging rights, taking into consideration the aims and purposes of the Universal Declaration adopted in 1948 and considers the evolution of the human rights regimes and law.

CONTENTS 1. "Virtual World, real rights?" Human Rights and the Internet, Diane Rowland 2. The dilemma of Intervention: Human rights and the UN Security Council, Emma McClean 3. The UDHR at 60: Has a Right to Democratic Governance Emerged Yet?, Richard Burchill and Sofia Cavandoli 4. Human Rights Dimensions of Contemporary Environmental Protection, Engobo Emeseh 5. Offenders, Deviants or Patients? Human rights and incarcerated offenders with mental health issues, Gareth Norris 6. Indigenous Rights in the Democratic State, Marco Odello 7. An International Convention on the Rights of Older People?, John Williams 8. The Early Practice of the International Criminal Court: Building Legitimacy?, Robert Cryer 9. Towards Achieving a Balance: Humanitarian Aid, Human Rights and Corruption, Indira Carr and Susan Breau 10. Conclusions, Marco Odello and Sofia Cavandoli

The European Court of Human Rights in the Post-Cold War Era Routledge Research in Human Rights Law

James A. Sweeney, University of Durham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $123.75; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54433-7; January 2011

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

186 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The European Court of Human Rights has been a vital part of European democratic consolidation and integration for over half a century, setting meaningful standards and offering legal remedies to the individually repressed, the politically vulnerable, and the socially excluded. After their emancipation from Soviet influence in the 1990s, and with membership of the European Union in mind for many, the new democracies of central and eastern Europe flocked to the Convention system. However, now the ‘gold rush’ is over, the Court’s position in the ‘New Europe’ is under threat. Its ability to decide cases promptly is almost fatally compromised, and the reform of its institutional architecture is effectively blocked by Russia. The time is right to take stock, to benefit from hindsight, and to consider how the Court can respond to the situation. This book examines the case law of the European Court of Human Rights with particular reference to democratic transitions in Europe and the consequent enlargement of the European Convention system. Focusing firmly on the substantive jurisprudence of the Court, the book analyses how it has responded to the difficult and distinct circumstances presented by the new Contracting Parties. Faced with different stages of, and commitments to, democratic transition, how has the Court reacted to such diversity whilst maintaining the universality of human rights – and how is this reflected in its judgments? The book tackles this question by matching rigorous doctrinal analysis of the case law with new developments in critical thinking. The cases are viewed through the prism of jurisprudence and political philosophy, with links made to European political integration and other international human rights systems. The book offers an original explanation of the Court’s predicament by drawing upon ‘thick’ and ‘thin’ notions of morality and tying this to notions of essential contestability. James A. Sweeney is a Lecturer at Durham University.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part 1: Concepts - Delimiting the problem: democratic transition and enlargement 2. Foundation and Enlargement of the Council of Europe 3.The European Court of Human Rights and Challenges of Enlargement 4. Meeting the judicial challenge: Understanding the Court’s Transitional Toolbox P art 2: Cases - Democratic transition and enlargement: background and key cases 5.

The ECtHR and Transitional Policies 6. The ECtHR and democratic rights in the transitional context Part 3: – Conclusions 7.

Institutional consolidation and judicial responses: a delicate interplay 8. Universality and democracy as essentially contested concepts 9. Conclusion: After the Gold Rush

Global Health and Human Rights Routledge Research in Human Rights Law

Edited by John Harrington, University of Liverpool, UK and Maria Stuttaford, University of Warwick, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47938-7; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The right to health, having been previously neglected is now being deployed more and more often in litigation, activism and policy making across the world. International bodies such as the WHO, UNAIDS, World Bank and WTO are increasingly using or being evaluated with reference to health rights, and international NGOs frequently use the language of rights in campaigning and in more concrete litigation. This book brings together an impressive array of internationally renowned scholars in the areas of law, philosophy and health policy to critically interrogate the development of rights based approaches to health. The volume integrates discussion of the right to health at a theoretical level in law and ethics, with the difficult substantive issues where the right is relevant, and with emerging systems of global health governance. The contributions to this volume will add to our theoretical and practical understanding of rights based approaches to health.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction, John Harrington and Maria Stuttaford 2. The Place of the Human Right to Health and Contemporary Approaches to Global Justice: Some Impertinent Interrogations, Upendra Baxi 3. Developing and Applying the Right to the Highest Attainable Standard of Health: The Role of the UN Special Rapporteur (2002-2008), Paul Hunt and Sheldon Leader 4. What Future for the Minimum Core? Contextualizing the Implications of South African Socio-Economic Rights Jurisprudence for the International Human Right to Health, Lisa Forman 5. The Ancillary-Care Responsibilities of Researchers: Reasonable But Not Great Expectations, Roger Brownsword 6. Human Rights and Health Sector Corruption, Brigit Toebes 7 . The Child’s Right to Health and the Courts, Aoife Nolan 8. The World Health Organization, the Evolution of Human Rights and the Failure to Achieve Health for All, Benjamin Mason Meier 9. The Human Right to Health in an Age of Market Hegemony, Paul O’Connell

The Human Right to Water Routledge Research in Human Rights Law

Amanda Cahill, University of Lancaster, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57786-1; September 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

187 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The human right to water under international human rights law is an area of much topical discussion with the appointment of the new UN Independent Expert on the issue of human rights obligations related to access to safe drinking water and sanitation, and movement within the NGO community for an international water treaty. This book provides an overview and examination of the human right to water as determined under international human rights law, including establishing its current legal status and substantive content and dealing with general questions and issues related to economic, social and cultural rights which affect the right to water. The book goes on to look more specifically at the application of the human right to water in the Occupied Palestinian Territories. As well as exploring the human right to water under international human rights law the book also analyses the international humanitarian law pertaining to occupation and domestic and bilateral provisions for the right to water within the Occupied Palestinian Territories. The book then considers the wider implications of the case study findings looking at what can be done to strengthen the right legally in terms of its status and codification and what remedy can be found for violations of the right, both specifically in the Occupied Palestinian Territories and in a more general context. The proposed book would be of interest not only to students, academics and practitioners within the field of international human rights law and international humanitarian law, but also to those concerned with the politics, international relations, and conflict resolution, especially in the Middle East region and Israel / Palestine.

CONTENTS 1. The Historical Development of a Legal Human Right to Water 2. The Human Right to Water – A Right of Unique Status Determining the Normative Content of the Right to Water 3. The Right to Water in the Occupied Palestinian Territories (West Bank): Part I The Legal Basis 4. The Right to Water in the Occupied Palestinian Territories (West Bank): Part II A Case Study in the Southern West Bank 5. Where do we go from here? Conclusions and Recommendations for developing the Right to Water

The Right to Religious Freedom in International Law Routledge Research in Human Rights Law

Anat Scolnicov, University of Cambridge, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48114-4; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyses the right to religious freedom within international law. Analysing legal structures in a variety of both Western and Non-Western jurisdictions, the book sets out a topography of the different constitutional structures of religion within the state and their compliance with international human rights law. The book also considers the position of women's religious freedom vis a vis community claims of religious freedom. Taking a rigorous approach to the right, Anat Scolnicov argues that the interpretation and application of religious freedom must be understood as a conflict between individual and group claims of rights, and argues for an individualistic interpretation of this right.

CONTENTS 1. Existing Protection Of Religious Freedom In International Law 2. Why Is There A Right To Freedom Of Religion? 3. The Legal Status Of Religion In The State 4. Women And Religious Freedom 5. Children, Education And Religious Freedom 6. Religious Freedom As A Right Of Free Speech 7. Conclusion

The Current State of Domain Name Regulation Routledge Research in Information Technology and E-Commerce Law

Konstantinos Komaitis, University of Strathclyde, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47776-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this book Konstantinos Komaitis identifies a tripartite problem – intellectual, institutional and ethical – inherent in the domain name regulation culture. Using the theory of property, Komaitis discusses domain names as sui generis, ‘e-property’ rights and analyzes the experience over the past ten years, through the Uniform Domain Name Dispute Resolution Policy (UDRP) and the Anticybersquatting Consumer Protection Act (ACPA). The institutional deficit he identifies, generates a further discussion on the ethical dimensions in the regulation of domain names and prompts Komaitis to suggest the creation of an environment based on justice. The relationship between trademarks and domain names has always been contentious and the existing institutions of the UDRP and ACPA have not assisted in alleviating the tension between the two identifiers. Over the past ten years, the trademark community has been systematic in encouraging and promoting a culture that indiscriminately considers domain names as second-class citizens, suggesting that trademark rights should have priority over the registration in the Domain Name Space (DNS). Komaitis disputes this assertion and seeks to bring to light the injustices and the trademark-oriented nature of the UDRP and ACPA. He further queries what the appropriate legal source to protect registrants when not seeking to promote trademark interests is. He also seeks to delineate a legal hypothesis on their nature as well as the steps of their institutionalisation process that we need to reverse, seeking to create a just framework for the regulation of domain names. Finally he explores how the current policies contribute to the philosophy of domain

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

188 names as second-class citizens. With these questions in mind, Komaitis suggests some recommendations concerning the reconfiguration of the regulation of domain names.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Taking on the sins of ICANN and the UDRP, PART I: INTELLECTUAL PROBLEM 2. Contextualising Property 3.

Introducing Trademarks 4. Domain Names: Their Technological, Socio-Economic and Legal Status PART II: INSTITUTIONAL PROBLEM 5. History of Domain Name Institutionalization 6. "Lex Domainia" – The New Lex Mercatoria? 7. The UDRP and Arbitration 8. Issues of Procedural Unfairness 9. Free Speech in the context of the UDRP 10. Regulating Domain Names Nationally: The Case of the Anticybersquatting Consumer Protection Act (ACPA) 11. Applying the UDRP and ACPA in the Right Context PART III: ETHICAL PROBLEM 12. ‘Haves’ and ‘Have-nots’ PART IV: THEMES AND ISSUES 13. Forwards and Backwards 14.

Repeating the same mistakes: New gTLDs and the IRT Recommendation Report

Law of Electronic Commercial Transactions Routledge Research in Information Technology and E-Commerce Law

Faye Fangfei Wang, Bournemouth University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $126.00; 234x156 mm; 270pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55745-0; Janurary 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The exponential growth of electronic usage in global commercial transactions has generated potential opportunities in productivity, facilitated the cross-border free movement of goods and service, and stimulated export and import trade as well as domestic sale, but at the same time, it has led to new challenges to existing laws due to the unique characteristics and complexities of online technology, culture and social behaviours. This book compares the legislative frameworks of e-commerce in the EU, US, China and International Organisations. It highlights and analyses the main legal obstacles to the establishment of trust and confidence in doing business online.

It provides an in-depth research into finding solutions to remove the barriers to the validity of electronic contracts and signatures, the enforceability of data privacy protection, the determination of Internet jurisdiction and choice of law, as well as the promotion of online dispute resolution. It encourages modernisation and harmonisation of laws concerning electronic commercial transactions through well-balanced area-specific international instruments. Law of Electronic Commercial Transactions will be of great interest to academics, legislative organisations, practitioners and lawyers in the field of international commerce.

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction 1. The Legal and Business Landscape of Electronic Commercial Transactions 2. Technical and Legal Barriers to Online Commerce Part 2: Electronic Contracts 3. What is an Electronic Contract? 4.When is an electronic contract made? 5. Where is the contract made? 6. Contemporary Issue: Electronic Battle of Forms Part 3: Online Security 7.Electronic Signatures 8.Electronic Authentication 9.Contemporary Issue: Protecting Information in Electronic Communications Part 4: Dispute Resolutions 10.Resolving Electronic Commercial Disputes Part 5: The Future 11.Conclusions and Recommendations

Online Dispute Resolution for Consumers in the European Union Routledge Research in Information Technology and E-Commerce Law

Pablo Cortés, University of Leicester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56207-2; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION E-commerce offers immense challenges to traditional dispute resolution methods, as it entails parties often located in different parts of the world making contracts with each other at the click of a mouse. The use of traditional litigation for disputes arising in this forum is often inconvenient, impractical, time-consuming and expensive due to the low value of the transactions and the physical distance between the parties. Thus modern legal systems face a crucial choice: either to adopt traditional dispute resolution methods that have served the legal systems well for hundreds of years or to find new methods which are better suited to a world not anchored in territorial borders. Online Dispute Resolution (ODR), originally an off-shoot of Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR), takes advantage of the speed and convenience of the Internet, becoming the best, and often the only option for enhancing consumer redress and strengthening their trust in e-commerce. This book provides an in-depth account of the potential of ODR for European consumers, offering a comprehensive and up to date analysis of the development of ODR. It considers the current expansion of ODR and evaluates the challenges posed in its growth. The book proposes the creation of legal standards to close the gap between the potential of ODR services and their actual use, arguing that ODR, if it is to realise its full potential in the resolution of e-commerce disputes and in the enforcement of consumer rights, must be grounded firmly on a European regulatory model.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

189 Introduction, 1. Consumer Protection and Access to Justice in the E-Commerce Era: A European Perspective, 2. Online Dispute Resolution as a Consumer Redress Strategy, 3. Consumer Adjudicative Processes Supported by ICT: Court Processes and Arbitration, 4. Online Mediation for Consumers: The Way Forward, 5. The Need for a Legal Framework to Develop Consumer ODR in the EU

Intellectual Property, Community Rights and Human Rights Routledge Research in Intellectual Property

Marcelin Tonye Mahop, Queen Mary University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47942-4; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book considers the issue of biodiversity in developing countries in relation to intellectual property rights, community rights and human rights. Drawing together a number of case studies of developing countries rich in biological and genetic resources including India, South Africa and Brazil the book examines the access to plant genetic resources and their utilisations in the contexts of scientific and commercial oriented activities pursued both in the source and user countries. Exploring how community rights are protected in national biodiversity related regulations and some international legal instruments, Marcelin Tonye Mahop also discusses the relationship between community rights and human rights in the context of biodiversity. The book looks at the issue of biopiracy asking whether this should be explored from a North-South perspective, before going on to suggest alternative measures for the legal protection of community rights at the national level with the possibility of national and international enforceability.

CONTENTS 1. Setting the Scene 2. Patents, Plant Breeders' Rights (PBRs) and Community Rights in International Forums 3. Community Rights and Selected National Regulatory Instruments 4. Selected International and Regional Human Rights Instruments and their Provisions on Community Rights and Intellectual Property Rights 5. Incursion in the 'Biopiracy' Debate: Modern Exploitation of Biodiversity Components of Developing Countries and Community Rights 6. Soft and Regional Undertakings Aimed at Community Rights 7.

Broader Framework of the Suggested Regulatory Measures 8. Applicability of the Regulatory Measures 9. Final Remarks

The Law and Economics of Intellectual Property in the Digital Age Routledge Research in Intellectual Property

Niva Elkin-Koren and Eli Salzberger, both of University of Haifa, Israel PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $123.75; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49908-8; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores the economic analysis of intellectual property law, with a special emphasis on the Law and Economics of informational goods in light of the past decade’s technological revolution. In recent years there has been massive growth in the Law and Economics literature focusing on intellectual property, on both normative and positive levels of analysis. The rise of Law and Economics as a dominant methodology in intellectual property scholarship has been accompanied by an increased economic discourse in intellectual property policy debates. The economic approach to intellectual property is often described as a monolithic, coherent approach that may differ only as it is applied to a particular case. Yet the growing literature of Law and Economics in intellectual property does not speak in one voice. The economic discourse used in legal scholarship and in policy-making encompasses several strands, each reflecting a fundamentally different approach to the economics of informational works, and each grounded in a different ideology or methodological paradigm. This book delineates the different economic approaches and analyzes their tenets. It maps the fundamental concepts and the theoretical foundation of current economic analysis of intellectual property law, in order to fully understand the ramifications of using economic analysis of law in policy making and to appreciate the current frameworks’ limitations in confronting the challenges of the information revolution. The book addresses the fundamental adjustments in the methodology and underlying assumptions that must be employed in order for the economic approach to remain a useful analytic framework for addressing IPR in the information age.

CONTENTS Part 1: Intellectual Property, Law and Economics 1. Introduction 2. Fundamental Concepts Part 2: Normative Analysis 3. Analytic Frameworks of the Economic Approach to IP 4. The Incentives Paradigm 5. The Property Model Part 3: Challenges to the Traditional Theoretical Framework 6. Economic Analysis and Governance by Technology 7. Economic Analysis and the Rise of Private Ordering Part 4: Policy 8. Economic Analysis in Intellectual Property Policymaking 9. A Positive Analysis of Intellectual Property Law 10.

Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

190

International Commercial Arbitration and the Arbitrator’s Contract Routledge Research in International Commercial Law

Emilia Onyema, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 280pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49278-2; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the formation, nature and effect of the arbitrators’ contract, addressing topics such as the appointment, challenge, removal and duties and rights of arbitrators, disputing parties and arbitration institutions. The arguments made in the book are based on a semi-autonomous theory of the juridical nature of international arbitration and a contractual theory of the legal nature of these relationships. From these premises, the book analyses the formation of the arbitrator’s contract in both ad hoc and institutional references. It also examines the institution’s contract with the disputing parties and its effect on the arbitrator’s contract under institutional references. The book draws from national arbitration laws and institutional rules in various jurisdictions to give a global view of the issues examined in it. The arbitrator’s contract is analysed from a global perspective of arbitral law and practice with insights from various jurisdictions in Africa, Asia, Europe, North and South America. The primary focus of the book is an analysis of the formation of the arbitrator’s contract and the terms of this contract and the institution’s contract. The primary question of the consequences (if any) of the breaches of the terms of these contracts and its impact on the exclusion or limitation of liability of arbitrators and institutions is also analysed with the conclusion that since these transactions are contractual and the terms can be categorised as in any normal contract, then normal contractual remedies can be applied to the breaches of these terms. International Commercial Arbitration and the Arbitrator’s Contract will be of great value to arbitration practitioners and researchers in arbitration. It will also be very useful to students of arbitration on the topics of arbitrators and arbitration institution.

CONTENTS Introduction 1 . Arbitration Agreement 2. Juridical and Relationship Theories 3. Parties to the Arbitrator’s Contract 4. Formation of the Arbitrator’s Contract 5. Terms of the Contracts 6. Remedies 7. Termination of the Contracts

Environmental Governance in Europe and Asia Routledge Research in International Environmental Law

Jona Razzaque, University of the West of England, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49654-4; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Both developed and developing countries in Asia, in the name of economic development, are following, to a large extent, the same potentially environmentally destructive path their European counterparts took in the past. The rapid changes in economic, social and political life have enormous impact on Asia’s ecosystems and resources. The key to the environmental future of these two regions lies in the evolution of the character of governance - the ensemble of social ethics, public policies and institutions which structure how governments and the civil society interact with the environment. This book looks at environmental governance in both Asia and Europe and offers a comparative analysis of the two regions in order to provide a better understanding of the concept of ‘environmental governance’ and its status in Europe and Asia. The book assesses the legislative, institutional and participatory mechanisms which affect the overall development of environmental governance, and analyses current issues, concerns and strategies in respect of environmental governance at the local, national, and international levels. This book will be valuable to scholars and students of environmental politics, EU and Asian studies, public policy, environmental law, and to decision makers and policy analysts.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Influence of international environmental governance on Europe and Asia 3. Concepts, approaches and models of environmental governance in Europe and Asia 4. Actors and institutions involved in Europe and Asia 5. Two thematic studies: water and biodiversity 6. Conclusions: lessons learned and way forward

International Law and the Conservation of Coral Reef Ecosystems Routledge Research in International Environmental Law

Edward Goodwin, University of Leicester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

191 www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48980-5; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Coral reefs are important ecosystems which are increasingly threatened by pollution, climate change and habitat change. Coral reefs are economically important to coastal communities living in predominantly developing countries, and also provide shoreline protection, catalyse land formation enabling human habitation, act as a carbon sink and are a repository for genetic and species diversity rivalling tropical rainforests. In the face of mounting man-made pressure, these ecosystems increasingly need action to be taken to ensure their conservation and long term sustainable development. This book breaks new ground by providing the first indepth account of the ways in which multilateral environmental treaty regimes are seeking to encourage and improve the conservation of warm-water coral reef ecosystems. In so doing, the work aims to raise the profile of such activities in order to reinforce their status on the environmental agenda. The book also has wider implications for the international environmental law project, arguing that sectorial legal action, provided it remains co-ordinated through a global forum which recognises and reflects the inter-connections between all elements of the natural environment, is the most practically effective way for international law to enhance conservation of habitats.

CONTENTS Part 1: Preliminaries 1. Introduction Part 2: Coral Reef Ecosystems & Their Protection 2. Marine Biology And Coral Reefs 3. For Richer, For Poorer 4. Conservation Strategies And Marine Protected Areas Part 3: The Role Of International Law 5. International Law : An Introduction To The Core Of This Study 6. The Law Of The Sea Convention And The Regional Seas Agreements 7. The Convention On Biological Diversity 8. The Convention On Wetlands Of International Importance, Especially As Waterfowl Habitat 9.

The World Heritage Convention 10. The Convention On The Conservation Of Migratory Species Of Wild Animal 11. Conclusions

International Law in a Multipolar World Routledge Research in International Law

Edited by Matthew Happold, University of Hull, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56521-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Since the creation of the United Nations in 1945, international law has sought to configure itself as a universal system. And yet, despite the best efforts of international institutions, scholars and others to assert the universal application of international law, its relevance and applicability has been influenced, if not directed, by political power. Over the past decade, discourse has tended to focus on the implications for international law of a unipolar world, characterised by US hegemony. However, that the international system may now be experiencing a tendency towards multipolarity, with various sites of power able to exert a telling influence on international relations and international law. Recent events such as Russia’s excursion into Georgia, the breakdown of the Doha round of trade negotiations, the USA’s questionable actions in the war on terror, the prominence of emerging nuclear powers, China’s assertions of its own interests on a global scale, and the rise of regional trading blocs, all pose significant questions for international law and the international legal order. International Law in a Multipolar World features contributions from a range of contributors including Nigel White, Michael Schmitt, Richard Burchill, Alexander Orakhelashvili and Christian Pippan, addressing some of the questions that multipolarity poses for the international legal system. The contributions to the volume explore issues including the use of force, governance , sovereign equality, regionalism and the relevance of the United Nations in a multipolar world, considering the overarching theme of the relationship between power and law.

International Organisations and the Idea of Autonomy Routledge Research in International Law

Edited by Nigel D. White and Richard Collins, both of University of Sheffield, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 384pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55088-8; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The volumes contains contributions from leading scholars in the field of international law, including Jan Wouters, Nigel D. White, Jan Klabbers, Mary Footer and Nico Krisch, who consider the idea of institutional autonomy in international law, and autonomy within international institutional law from a broad perspective. The book engages with the idea of international organisations as autonomous entities, both in terms of control and influence over their membership and as independent actors in the international system as a whole.

It considers the difficulties of theorising autonomy in a decentralised legal system, where autonomy appears as both desirable and dangerous at the same time. Related to this, the chapters question how changing perceptions of international law affect ideas of autonomy in particular institutional settings, and how, in turn, particular institutional structures or experiences may affect our perceptions of, or ambitions for change within the international system as a whole.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

192

Self-Determination in the Post-9/11 Era Routledge Research in International Law

Elizabeth Chadwick, Nottingham Trent University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55004-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The issue of self-determination is often thought about and discussed in terms of the post-1945 framework which attempted to balance a stable vision of state sovereignty and territorial integrity alongside the principle of the self-determination of ‘peoples’. This implied that perhaps self-determination should be realisable within contexts of domestic state political process, multi-culturalism, and/or democratic representation. However, in the last decades there has been a shift in geo-political balance regarding the ‘power to choose’ those ‘causes’ deemed more justifiable in terms of force used to achieve liberation goals. This book takes the ten-year anniversary of 9/11 as a timely point at which to review the impact on the theory and practice of self-determination caused by wider anti-terrorist action and a growing disregard of the laws of armed conflict. The book will set out in detail the altered attitudes to violent struggles for self-determination. It will introduce the growing international disquiet in the face of increasing religious fundamentalist violence, the changing nature of international terrorist actors, and the expansion in justifications for violent liberation struggles. The book will look at specific examples of when the international community has chosen to intervene, and those in which it has not in order to reach conclusions about the continued viability of self-determination within the larger context of non-interference, territorial integrity and political independence.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Changes in self-determination post-1989 3. U.N. action post-9/11, and U.N. Charter Chapter VII 4. Regional responses to struggles for self-determination 5. Self-determination, and regulation of the use of force 6. Case examples 7. Conclusions

Sovereignty, Jurisdiction, and Exploitation of the Seas, Polar Regions, Airspace and Outer Space Routledge Research in International Law

Gbenga Oduntan, University of Kent, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 384pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56212-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Sovereignty and jurisdiction are legal doctrines of a complex nature, which have been subject to differing interpretations by scholars in legal literature. The tridimensionality of state territory recognised under customary international law subsists till the present but there are other territories that do not or cannot belong to any state or political entity which also must be accounted for in legal theory.

The issues surrounding sovereignty and jurisdiction are likely to become ever more pressing as globalisation, growing pressure on resources and the need for energy and national security become acute, and the resolution of special delimitation disputes seems likely to become a vital question in the 21 st century. This book will focus primarily on the issues of sovereignty jurisdiction and control in airspace and outer space, but will also look at related issues pertaining to the Seas and Antarctica. As well as considering the matters in public international law the book will also explore aspects of private international law that are central to the understanding of sovereignty and jurisdiction over territories. Commercial exploitation, resource control and the international regime regulating contractual obligations in relation to transportation of goods and services over all forms of territory will be examined to the extent that they are necessary to explain jurisdictional rights and duties over territory. The book goes on to consider the distinction between airspace and outer space and puts forward legal criteria which would allow for the resolution of the spatial delimitation dispute. These criteria would determine where in spatial terms the exclusive sovereignty of airspace ends and where outer space - the province of all mankind begins, and contribute to the jurisprudence of territorial sovereignty and jurisdiction.

CONTENTS 1. Preliminary Considerations: Sovereignty, Jurisdiction And Control In International Law 2. Aspects Of Sovereignty And Jurisdiction Over The Seas 3. Aspects Of Sovereignty And Jurisdiction In Polar Regions And In Antarctica 4. The Legal Status Of The Airspace 5.

Jurisdiction Over Crimes In The Airspace And On Board Aircraft 6. Jurisdiction And Control In The Airspace Over International Spaces 7. Sovereignty And Trespass In Territorial Airspace 8. Jurisdiction And Control In Outer Space 9. Legality Of The Common Heritage Of Mankind Principle In Space Law 10.Utilisation Regime Over Space Based Resources: Analogies From The International Seabed Regime And Antarctica 11. Jurisdiction And Control Rationae Instrumenti And Rationae Personnae In Outerspace 12. Aspects Of Sovereignty And Jurisdiction In The Delimitation Of The Seas

State Accountability under International Law Routledge Research in International Law

Lisa Yarwood, University of Exeter, UK

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

193 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57783-0; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book considers the extent to which States are held accountable for breaches of jus cogens norms under international law. The concept of State accountability is distinguished from the doctrine of State responsibility and refers to an ad hoc practice in international relations that seeks to ensure States do not escape with impunity when they violate norms that are considered fundamental to the interests of the international community as a whole. State Accountability under International Law sets forth a definition of State accountability as the antithesis of State impunity, and establishes a threshold against which the existence, or not, of State accountability can be determined. The book draws together the many academic theories relating to accountability that have arisen in various areas of international law including environmental law, human rights and trade law before going on to examine an emerging practice of State accountability. A variety of ad hoc attempts and informal mechanisms are assessed against the threshold of State accountability established with emphasis being given to practical examples ranging from the accountability of Germany and Japan after WWII to the current attempts to prevent impunity by Sudan and Zimbabwe. The book also addresses the relationship between State accountability and the emerging practice of international humanitarian intervention to consider whether intervention could be used for the purpose of holding States accountable for a breach of jus cogens norms.

CONTENTS Part 1: Setting the Framework 1. Preliminary note on the relevance of the Ius ad Bellum 2. The methodological debate and the Quest for Custom Part 2: The Right of Self-Defence and the Armed Attack Requirement 3. Conditions of Self-defence 4. The Armed Attack Requirement Ratione Materiae 5. The Armed Attack Requirement Ratione Temporis 6. The Armed Attack Requirement Ratione Personae 7. What future for the armed attack criterion?

Alternative Perspectives on Lawyers and Legal Ethics Routledge Research in Legal Ethics

Edited by Reid Mortensen, Francesca Bartlett, both of University of Queensland, Australia, and Kieran Tranter, Griffith University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54652-2; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The study of legal ethics and the legal profession has emerged as a distinct and important field of scholarship over the last 30 years.

However, as in other disciplines, academic recognition can in turn entrench static and powerful meta-theories and narratives about professional ethos and practise, this collection seeks to disrupt this homogenising impulse and to present alternative voices by bringing together a range of international scholars writing about legal ethics and the legal profession. The book features significant and timely contributions which take contemporary and non-mainstream perspectives on the current and future shape of the legal profession. The essays not only describe the rapidly changing profession but canvas different approaches to scholarship on the legal profession. The collection seeks to explore a diverse and contextualised profession from a number of angles. Authors examine how the public sees lawyers and how lawyers see their own profession; how we practise law and how this practice shapes lawyers; how such cultural and professional practice intersects with institutional structures of the law to create certain legal outcomes; and how we regulate the legal profession to modify or institute ethical practice. The volume provides insights into legal culture and ethics from the perspective of authors from Australia, Canada, England, the United States, New Zealand and Kenya – a diversity of national perspectives that give valuable insights into developments in the profession at the local and global level. It also illustrates diversity within the profession by tracing differing professional career trajectories based on raced or gendered barriers, alternative ethical strategies and the impact of organisational cultures in which lawyers practice.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction, Francesca Bartlett, Reid Mortensen and Kieran Tranter, 2. Global Continental Shifts to a New Governance Paradigm in Lawyer Regulation and Consumer Protection: Riding the Wave, Judith L. Maute, 3. Our Common Future: The Imperative for Contextual Ethics in a Connected World, Vivien Holmes and Simon Rice, 4. The Emperor’s New Clothes: From Atticus Finch to Denny Crane, Paula Baron, 5. Doing Good by Stealth: Professional Ethics and Moral Choices in The Verdict and Regarding Henry, Rachel Spencer, 6. Solicitors as Imagined Masculine, Family Mediators as Fictive Feminine and the Hybridization of Divorce Solicitors, Lisa Webley, 7. Stein’s Ethic of Care: An Alternative Perspective to Reflections on Women Lawyering, Elizabeth Gachenga, 8. Gender, Ethics and the Discretion Not to Prosecute in the ‘Interests of Justice’ Under The Rome Statute for the International Criminal Court, Tina Dolgopol, 9. Exploring the Potential of Contextual Ethics in Mediation, Rachael Field, 10.

Nefarious Conduct and the ‘Fit and Proper Person’ Test, Duncan Webb, 11. Legal Ethics and Regulatory Legitimacy: Regulating Lawyers for Personal Misconduct, Alice Woolley, 12. The Problem of Mental Ill-Health in the Profession and a Suggested Solution, Michelle Sharp

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

194

The Ethics Project in Legal Education Routledge Research in Legal Ethics

Edited by Michael Robertson, Lillian Corbin, and Kieran Tranter, all of Griffith University, Australia and Francesca Bartlett, University of Queensland, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $123.75; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54651-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There is a growing recognition that legal professional rules or codes, the ethical basis upon which legal professionals are regulated, do not always provide guidance for many of the situations that legal practitioners and other legal actors face on a daily basis. Therefore it is important to prepare future practitioners for the eventualities which they may face in practice. However, there is no template for this goal. There is nothing that sets out how legal educators can create good ‘ethics’ learning outcomes that help students to comprehend that lawyering is much more than just applying the rules to their clients’ situations and, at a personal level, the conduct that is expected of them. Much more thought needs to be given to the question of the aims, scope and methodology of ‘legal ethics education’. This book goes some way to achieving this aim, presenting the views of a number of internationally renowned legal ethicists, including Brent Cotter and David Chavkin, on the topic of the teaching of legal ethics. The book discusses the meaning of ‘legal ethics’, adopting the basic premise that legal practitioners need to exercise personal responsibility and choice in carrying out their work. That because the current formal rules are inadequate true engagement with ethical issues requires them to exercise judgment. While this is now a well-accepted view among legal ethicists, this is not the traditional approach to teaching legal ethics and therefore there is a need to rethink the law curriculum. The contributions to the book offer a breadth of coverage examining legal ethics teaching in a range of jurisdictions including the USA, Canada, Australia, and South Africa and Hong Kong. A number of contributors discuss design issues that cover a broad field of methods, including simulations, the pervasive use of problem-solving exercises, and realworld experiences, with some of the essays revealing their empirical findings on the effectiveness of these methods and particularly as they affect the students.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction, Professor Reid Mortensen, Associate Professor Michael Robertson, Lillian Corbin, Francesca Bartlett and Kieran Tranter Part 1: What should be in the Curriculum? 2. Experience is the Only Teacher: Developing Values in the Lawyers of Tomorrow, Professor David Chavkin 3. Providing Legal Ethics Learning Opportunities throughout the Legal Curriculum, Associate Professor Michael Robertson 4. Practicing Practical Wisdom: A Neo-Aristotelean Approach to Teaching and Learning Legal Ethics, Suzette Jefferies Part 2: Legal Ethics Education in the Jurisdictions? 5. Rebirth of Legal Ethics Teaching in Canada, Professor W Brent Cotter 6. Seeing the Trees Within the Forest: Future Integration of Skills and Ethics Teaching in Hong Kong Professional Legal Education, Associate Professor Richard Wu 7. Teaching Ethics in Law Schools: A South African Perspective, Helen Kruuse Part 3: The How Question? 8. Facilitating an International Community to Develop a Resource to Support Learning in Legal Ethics, Nigel Duncan 9. Teaching Legal Ethics Through Role Playing, Professor Philip G. Schrag 10. Using Informal Learning to Enhance Ethical Legal Practice, Tony Foley, Vivien Holmes and Margie Rowe 11. Pervasive Ethics-as-Judgment Teaching: Putting Theory into Practice, Gonzalo Villalta Puig 12. Plagiarism – Y Not?, Kristoffer Greaves and Elspeth McNeill

Reaffirming Legal Ethics Routledge Research in Legal Ethics

Edited by Reid Mortensen, Francesca Bartlett, both of University of Queensland, Australia, and Michael Robertson, Lillian Corbin, and Kieran Tranter, all of Griffith University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 384pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54653-9; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION It has been over thirty years since the founding crises that birthed legal ethics as both a field of study and a discrete field of law. In that time thinking about the ethical dimension of legal practice has taken several turns: from justifications of zealous advocacy, to questions of process and connections to specifically legal values, to more recently consideration of legal conduct as part of a wider field of virtue. Parallel to this dynamism of thought, there has also been significant changes in how legal professions, especially within those that possess a common law heritage, have been regulated and the values and conceptions of legitimate conduct that has informed this regulation. This volume represents an opportunity for a comprehensive review of legal ethics as an international movement.

Contributors include many of the key participants to the legal ethics field from the United States, United Kingdom, Canada, Australia, New Zealand and South Africa, including David Luban and Deborah Rhode, as well as many of the recognised emerging thinkers.

The theme of the book is taking stock of the last thirty years of legal ethics practice and scholarship and also a forum for new ideas and new thinking regarding the conduct of lawyers and the moral and social responsibility of the legal profession. The contributions also consider the topic of dynamism. Over the last decade significant developments in both the expectations of professional conduct and the regulation of the profession has been experienced in all jurisdictions, which has seen traditional, and once sacred, conceptions of lawyering challenged and re-evaluated. The contributors also look at the theme of affirmation. Within an increasingly complex environment of change and dynamism, this volume reaffirms that there is value within the field of legal ethics. That is the project of reflecting on the unique ethical and conduct requirements of lawyering can not be submerged into a broader field of applied

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

195 philosophy, management or regulatory studies. While this volume does not deny the opportunities that exist for interdisciplinary engagement with philosophy, social science or politics, it affirms legal ethics as a legitimate and highly relevant field of inquiry.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction, Kieran Tranter, Francesca Bartlett, Lillian Corbin, Reid Mortensen and Mike Robertson, 2. The philosophical foundations of legal ethics: A roundtable Moderator: Christine Parker, 3. Personal integrity and professional ethics, Deborah L. Rhode, 4. Legal advising and the rule of law, W. Bradley Wendel, 5. Tales of terror: Lessons for lawyers from the ‘war on terrorism’ David Luban, 6. Legal ethics in a post-Westphalian world: Building the international rule of law and other tasks, Charles Sampford, 7.

An opportunity for the ethical maturation of the law firm: The ethical implications of incorporated and listed law firms, Christine Parker, 8. Carnegie’s missing step: Prescribing lawyer retraining, Lawrence K. Hellman, 9. Professionalism and pro bono public, Lorne Sossin, 10. The psychology of good character: The past, present and future of good character regulation in Canada, Alice Woolley and Jocelyn Stacey, 11. The ‘self-regulation’ misnomer, Fred C. Zacharias, 12. Why good intentions are often not enough: The potential for ethical blindness in legal decision-making, Kath Hall

Counter-Terrorism and Beyond Routledge Research in Terrorism and the Law

Edited by Andrew Lynch, Nicola McGarrity and George Williams, all of University of New South Wales, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57175-3; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book considers the increasing trend towards a ‘culture of control’ in democratic countries. The post-9/11 counter-terrorism laws in nations such as the USA, the UK, Canada and Australia provide a stark demonstration of this trend. These laws share a focus on the pre-emption of crime, restrictions on the right to liberty of non-suspects, limited public access to information, and increased community surveillance. The laws derogate, in many respects, from the ordinary principles of the criminal justice system and fundamental human rights while also harnessing public institutions in the broader project of prevention and control. Distinctively, the contributors to this volume focus on the impact of these laws outside of the counter-terrorism context. The book draws together a range of experts in both public and criminal law, from Australia and overseas, to examine the effect of counter-terrorism laws on public institutions within democracies more broadly. Issues considered include changes to the role and functions of the courts, the expansion of executive discretion, the seepage of extraordinary powers and pre-emptive measures into other areas of the criminal law, and the interaction and overlap between intelligence and law enforcement agencies. Counter-Terrorism and Beyond: The Culture of Law and Justice After 9/11 will be of interest to students and scholars of criminal law, criminology, comparative criminal justice, terrorism and national security, public law, human rights, governance and public policy.

CONTENTS Part I Introduction, 1. The Emergence of a ‘Culture of Control’, Andrew Lynch, Nicola McGarrity and George Williams Part II Prevention and Pre-Emption, Evidence and Intelligence , 2. Counter-Terrorism: The Law and Policing of Pre-Emption, Jude McCulloch and Sharon Pickering , 3. The Counter-Terrorism Purposes of an Australian Preventative Detention Order, Claire Macken , 4. The Eroding Distinction Between Intelligence and Evidence in Terrorism Investigations, Kent Roach Part III Community Surveillance and the Creation of a Culture of Suspicion , 5. Constitutional Criminal Procedure and Civil Rights in the Shadow of the ‘War on Terror’: A Look at Recent United States Decisions and the Rhetoric of Terrorism, Charles Weisselberg , 6. Suspicionless Searches and the Prevention of Terrorism, John Ip , 7. A Passport to Punishment: Administrative Measures of Control for National Security Purposes, Susan Harris Rimmer , Part IV The Normalisation of Extraordinary Measures , 8. When Extraordinary Measures Become Normal: Pre-Emption in Counter-Terrorism and Other Laws, Nicola McGarrity and George Williams , 9. The Anti-Terror Creep: Law and Order, the States and the High Court of Australia, Gabrielle Appleby and John Williams , Part V The Flow of Information in Liberal Democracies 10.Proxies for the Authorities? Using Media Information in the Investigation and Prosecution of Terrorism Offences, Lawrence McNamara , 11. The Show Must Go On: The Drama of Dr Mohamed Haneef and the Theatre of Counter-Terrorism, Mark Rix , Part VI Judicial Review and the Parliamentary Process: How Best to Protect Human Rights? 12. ExtraConstitutionalism, Dr Mohamed Haneef and Controlling Executive Power in Times of Emergency, Fergal Davis

Counter-terrorism and the Detention of Suspected Terrorists Routledge Research in Terrorism and the Law

Claire Macken, Deakin University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55051-2; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In a regional, national and global response to terrorism, the emphasis necessarily lies on preventing the next terrorist act. Yet, with prevention comes prediction: the need to identify and detain those considered likely to engage in a terrorist act in the future. The

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

196 detention of ‘suspected terrorists’ is intended, therefore, to thwart a potential terrorist act recognising that retrospective action is of no consequence given the severity of terrorist crime. Although preventative steps against those reasonably suspected to have an intention to commit a terrorist act is sound counter-terrorism policy, a law allowing arbitrary arrest and detention is not. A State must carefully enact anti-terrorism laws to ensure that preventative detention does not wrongly accuse and grossly slander an innocent person, nor allow a terrorist to escape justice and walk free to continue their plans. This book analyses preventative confinement in three models of counter-terrorism policy within the context of international human rights law: an ‘intelligence’ model of counter-terrorism which advocates preventative detention orders; a ‘war’ model which allows for even stricter executive detention orders; and a ‘criminal justice’ model, where pre-charge detention will often be the measure for confinement of suspected terrorists. Counter-terrorism and the Detention of Suspected Terrorists argues that the way forward for Governments in counter-terrorism policy, from an international human rights law perspective, is a suggested model of pre-charge detention. The proposed model law recognises the exigencies of terrorist crime, but still maintains a sufficient threshold for appropriate detention. The book is written from a global counter-terrorism perspective drawing on cases and practice from different jurisdictions including the US, the UK and Australia, as well as jurisprudence from the ECHR. CONTENTS 1. Background and Definitions 2. The Legal Framework 3. Preventative Confinement under an Intelligence Model of CounterTerrorism Policy 4. Preventative Confinement under a War Model of Counter-Terrorism Policy 5. Preventative Confinement in a Criminal Justice Model of Counter-Terrorism Policy 6. Suggestions to Governments as to how to Improve Preventative Confinement Laws in State Counter-Terrorism Policy Models 7. Summary and Conclusions

Islamic Law and the Law of Armed Conflict Routledge Research in the Law of Armed Conflicts

Niaz A. Shah, University of Hull, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56396-3; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book compares the Islamic law of armed conflict and the international humanitarian law, before going on to practically apply these findings to the current conflicts in Pakistan and Afghanistan. The book argues that although the origins and histories of Islamic and international law of armed conflicts are very different both regimes are to a great extent compatible. The book will explore the details of the Islamic law of armed conflict examining its origins in the Koran, the sunnah, the hadith and views of classical jurists. In doing so Niaz Shah concludes that while the Islamic law of armed conflict certainly does not cover every aspect of current armed conflicts but the primary sources of Islamic law do not put any restrictions on carving out rules to cover modern developments in today’s armed conflicts. The book will address the present situations in Pakistan and Afghanistan, examining the conduct of hostilities by all parties in the region including the Taliban, Al-Qaeda, the Pakistani and Afghan security forces and the US-led coalition forces and identifying violations of the laws of armed conflicts. This book will be of interest to students and scholars of international law, Islamic law, international relations, security studies and south east Asian studies.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Islamic Law of Armed Conflict 3. Early Islamic Wars: the Practice of the Prophet 4. Islamic and International Law of Armed Conflict 5. The Taliban and the Islamic Law of Armed Conflict 6. The US-led Coalition and the International Law of Armed Conflict 7. The Prosecution of War Crimes 8. Conclusion

Cross-Border Law Enforcement Routledge Research in Transnational Crime and Criminal Law

Edited by Simon Bronitt, Australian National University, Clive Harfield, University of Wollongong, Australia and Saskia Hufnagel, Australian National University PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58374-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume explores issues of law enforcement cooperation across borders from a variety of disciplinary perspectives. The borders under examination include both macro-level cooperation between nation-states, as well as micro-level cooperation between different Executive agencies within a nation-state. The volume brings together leading academics, public policy makers, legal practitioners and law enforcement officials from Europe, Australia and the Asian-Pacific region, to shed new light on the pressing problems impeding cross-border policing and law enforcement globally and regionally. Problems common to all jurisdictions are discussed and innovative ‘best practice’ solutions and models are considered. The book is structured in four parts: Police cooperation in the EU; in Australia; in the Asia-Pacific Region; and finally it considers issues of jurisdiction and due process/human rights issues, with a focus on regional cooperation strategies for countering human trafficking, organised crime and terrorism. The book would be of interest to both academic and practitioner communities in policing, criminology, international relations, and comparative and EU legal studies.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

197 CONTENTS 1. The Globalisation of Police and Judicial Cooperation: Driving Forces, Institutional Frameworks and Political Dilemmas, Cyrille Fijnaut Part 1: Police Cooperation Strategies in the European Union 2. Glocal Policing: The Conjunction of the ‘Global’ and ‘Local’ Policing, Frans Heeres 3. The Nordic Police Cooperation, Maren Eline Kleiven 4. Transferability of Police Cooperation Strategies: The Case of European Union Joint Investigation Teams, Ludo Block 5. Law Enforcement Response to Trafficking in Women and Children: A European Perspective, Aysel Allahverdiyeva 6. European Court of Justice Case Law: Strengthening the EU Penal Area?

Vanessa Ricci Part 2: Australian Police cooperation strategies 7. Mutual Assistance in Criminal Matters: Cyberworld Realities from an Australian Perspective, Shannon Cuthbertson 8. Cross-Border Police Cooperation: A comparative Study of Strategies in Australia and the European Union, Saskia Hufnagel 9. Policing Indigenous People in the NPY Lands, Jenny Fleming 10. Extradition and the Death Penalty in Australia and the EU, Saskia Hufnagel and Wendy Kukulies-Smith Part 3: Police cooperation in the Asia-Pacific Region 11. A Study on the Effectiveness of Extradition within the ASEAN Region, Ciara Henshaw 12. Law Enforcement Cooperation in Trafficking Persons Cases: Obstacles and Opportunities, Anne Gallagher and Paul Holmes 13. Enhancing ADF-Police Cooperation on Peace and Stability Operations, Damian Eaton Part 4: International Perspectives on Police and Judicial Cooperation 14. The Legality of Diplomatic Assurances/Memoranda of Understanding under International Human Rights, Christopher Michaelsen 15. Managing Human Rights and Covert Methods in Transnational Criminal Investigations, Clive Harfield 16. Jurisdiction under the Defence Force Discipline Act 1982, Ian Henderson

Regulating Sexuality Social Justice

Rosie Harding, University of Keele, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57438-9; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Regulating Sexuality: Legal Consciousness in Lesbian and Gay Lives explores the impact that recent seismic shifts in the legal landscape have had for lesbians and gay men. The last decade has been a time of extensive change in the legal regulation of lesbian and gay lives in Britain, Canada and the US. Almost every area where the law impacts on sexuality has been reformed or modified.

These legal developments combine to create a new, uncharted terrain for lesbians and gay men. And, through an analysis of their attitudes, views and experiences, this book explores the effects of these developments. Drawing on, and developing, the concept of ‘legal consciousness’, Regulating Sexuality focuses on four different ‘texts’: qualitative responses to a large-scale online survey of lesbians’ and gay men’s views about the legal recognition of same sex relationships; published auto/biographical narratives about being and becoming a lesbian or gay parent; semi-structured, in-depth, interviews with lesbians and gay men about relationship recognition, parenting, discrimination and equality; and fictional utopian texts. In this study of the interaction between law and society in social justice movements, Rosie Harding interweaves insights from the new legal pluralism with legal consciousness studies to present a rich and nuanced exploration of the contemporary regulation of sexuality.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Towards a ‘Critical’ Legal Consciousness? 3. Reconsidering Resistance 4. From ‘Outlaws’ to ‘In-laws’ 5. Stories of Law 6. Recognising Regulation 7. Imagining a Different World 8. Conclusions

Rights of Passage Social Justice

Nicholas Blomley, Simon Fraser University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57561-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Rights of Passsage: Sidewalks and the Regulation of Public Flow documents a powerful, yet mundane, form of urban governance that focuses on pedestrian flow. The dominant account of public space fails to acknowledge and engage with a remarkably pervasive yet overlooked logic that shapes the ways in which public space is regulated, conceived of, and argued about. This logic, which Nicholas Blomley calls 'pedestrianism', values public space not in terms of its aesthetic merits, or its success in promoting public citizenship and democracy. Rather, departing from much of the existing emphasis on the socially directive nature of much public space regulation , the function of the street is understood to be the promotion and facilitation of pedestrian flow and circulation. Although a powerful form of governance, pedestrianism tends to be obscured by grander and more visible forms of urban regulation. The rationality at work here may appear mundane and everyday; but, precisely because it is uncontroversial, pedestrianism is able to operate below the academic and political radar. Documenting the pervasiveness of pedestrianism, Nicholas Blomley addresses its relationship to bureaucratic practice, legal interpretation and political debate. Rights of Passsage: Sidewalks and the Regulation of Public Flow thus shows how the sidewalk is literally produced, encoded, rendered legible and operational with reference to a dense array of codes,

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

198 diagrams, specifications, academic and professional networks, engineering rubrics, and regulation - all in the name of unfettered circulation.

The Era of Transitional Justice Transitional Justice

Paul Gready, University of York, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58116-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Era of Transitional Justice: The Aftermath of the Truth and Reconciliation Commission in South Africa and Beyond explores the broader issues raised by political transition and transitional justice through the prism of the TRC and transition in South Africa. South Africa constitutes a powerful case study of the enduring structural legacies of a troubled past, and of both the potential and limitations of transitional justice and human rights as agents of transformation in the contemporary era. South Africa’s story has broader relevance because it helped to launch constitutional human rights and transitional justice as global discourses; as such, its own legacy is to some extent writ large in post-authoritarian and post-conflict contexts across the world. Based on a decade of research, and in an analysis that is both comparative and interdisciplinary, Paul Gready maintains that transitional justice needs to do more to address structural violence - and in particular poverty, inequality and social and criminal violence - as these have emerged as stubborn legacies from an oppressive or war-torn past in many parts of the world. Organised around four central themes - new keyword conceptualisation, re-imagining human rights, engaging with the past and present, remaking the public sphere - it is an argument that will be of considerable interest to those interested in the law and politics of transitional societies.

CONTENTS INTRODUCTION; CHAPTER 1: TRUTH AS GENRE; CHAPTER 2: FROM SOCIAL TRUTH TO RIGHTS-BASED PARTICIPATION; CHAPTER 3: JUSTICE PAST; CHAPTER 4: JUSTICE PRESENT; CHAPTER 5: SPEAKING TRUTH TO RECONCILIATION; CHAPTER 6: RECONCILIATION, RELATIONSHIPS AND THE EVERYDAY; CONCLUSION

Transitional Justice, Judicial Accountability and the Rule of Law Transitional Justice

Hakeem O. Yusuf, Queens University Belfast, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57535-5; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Transitional Justice, Judicial Accountability and the Rule of Law addresses the importance of judicial accountability in transitional justice processes. Despite a general consensus that the judiciary plays an important role in contemporary governance, accountability for the judicial role in formerly authoritarian societies remains largely elided and under-researched. Hakeem O. Yusuf argues that the purview of transitional justice mechanisms should, as a matter of policy, be extended to scrutiny of the judicial role in the past.

Through a critical comparative approach that cuts through the transitioning experiences of post-authoritarian and post-conflict polities in Latin America, Asia, Europe and Africa, the book focuses specifically on Nigeria. It demonstrates that public accountability of the judiciary through the mechanism of a truth-seeking process is a necessary component in securing comprehensive accountability for the judicial role in the past. Transitional Justice, Judicial Accountability and the Rule of Law further shows that an across-the-board transformation of state institutions - an important aspiration of transitional processes - is virtually impossible without incorporating the third branch of government, the judiciary, into the accountability process.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Case for Judicial Accountability in Transitions 2. Truth, Transition, and Accountability of the Judiciary 3. Political Change and Judicial Reform: An International and Comparative Perspective 4. Judicial Accountability in Political Transitions: The Nigerian Context 5. Rights, the Judiciary and Constitutionalism In Transitions 6. Transition and the Judicialization of Politics: Dialectics of a Phenomenon 7. Courts to the Rescue? The Judicialization of Politics in Nigeria Conclusion

Human Rights and the Protection of Privacy in Tort Law UT Austin Studies in Foreign and Transnational Law

Hans-Joachim Cremer, University of Mannheim, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 160pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47704-8; September 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

199 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In its case law, the European Court of Human Rights has acknowledged that national courts are bound to give effect to Article 8 of the European Convention of Human Rights (ECHR) which sets out the right to private and family life, when they rule on controversies between private individuals. Article 8 of the ECHR has thus been accorded Drittwirkung or ‘third-party’ effect in private law relationships. The German law of privacy has quite a long history, and the influence of the European Court of Human Rights’ interpretation of the ECHR has led to a strengthening of privacy protection in the German law. This book considers how English courts could possibly use and adapt structures adopted by the German legal order in response to rulings from the European Court of Human Rights, to strengthen the protection of privacy in the private sphere.

CONTENTS 1. The practical need for privacy protection in private law relationships 2. Protection under English tort law 3. The protection of privacy as a State obligation under the ECHR 4. Can and should the English courts wait until Parliament enacts legislation on privacy protection?

Asylum, Welfare and the Cosmopolitan Ideal Lydia Morris, University of Essex, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49773-2; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Asylum, Welfare and the Cosmopolitan Ideal: A Sociology of Rights puts forward the argument that rights must be understood as part of a social process: a terrain for strategies of inclusion and exclusion but also of contestation and negotiation. Engaging debate about how ‘cosmopolitan’ principles and practices may be transforming national sovereignty, Lydia Morris explores this premise through a case study of legal activism, civil society mobilisation, and judicial decision making. The book documents government attempts to use destitution as a deterrent to control asylum numbers, and examines a series of legal challenges to this policy, spanning a period both before and after the Human Rights Act. Lydia Morris shows how human rights can be used as a tool for radical change, and in so doing proposes a multi-layered 'model' for understanding rights. This incorporates political strategy, public policy, civil society mobilisation, judicial decision making, and their public impact, and advances a dynamic understanding of rights as part of the recurrent encounter between principles and politics. Rights are therefore seen as both a social product and a social force.

CONTENTS 1. The Right to Have Rights: Fond Illusion or Credo for Our Times? 2. Asylum Immigration and the Art of Government 3. Welfare Asylum and the Politics of Judgment 4. Civil Society and Civil Repair 5. An Emergent Cosmopolitan Paradigm? 6. Civic Stratification and the Cosmopolitan Ideal 7. Cosmopolitanism Human Rights and Judgment 8. Conclusion: A Sociology of Rights

Binding Men Lois Bibbings, Unversity of Bristol, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-904-38541-7; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Binding Men investigates nineteenth century notions of masculinity. It examines a number of nineteenth century criminal cases, focusing upon theoretical themes relating to masculinity and the state in order to offer a way of reading past decisions as well as a means of analyzing nineteenth century attitudes in society and the courts. Of the cases selected some are still binding upon English and Welsh courts today, others are first instance decisions and a few attracted a great deal of sensation when they were heard. Of these the most well-known are R v Dudley and Stevens (murder, necessity and cannibalism), R v Boulton (crossing dressing), R v Coney (prize-fighting) and R v Crippen (the trial of Dr Crippen). This book combines traditional legal analysis with a more socio-legal and social historical approach. Drawing upon a variety of sources including trial transcripts, law reports, official correspondence and newspaper stories, Binding Men unpicks the narratives of masculinity which the cases tell.

CONTENTS Masculinity, Law and History. Masticating the Male: A Recipe for Masculinity. Mary-Annes and Mollies: The Carnivalesque, Camp and Cross-dressing. Manly Diversions, Debauchery and Disorder. Man as Master: The Realm of the Family. Robbery and Reputation: Blackmail. The Medical Man. Conclusion

Capital Punishment and Political Sovereignty Adam Thurschwell, Cleveland State University, USA

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

200 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00 £18.99 $37.95; 216x138 mm; 144pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42423-3; PB: www.routledge.com/978-1-84568-111-1; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Adam Thurshwell, a respected academic and death penalty lawyer, draws upon Continental theory and the Anglo-American jurisprudential tradition in order to deliver a critical survey of both the theoretical aspects of capital punishment and its actual administration. Pursuing an original political approach rather than taking a moral stance, his discussion compares the topics of sovereignty, power and legitimacy with moral desert or consequentialism and explores their impact on perceptions and practices of capital punishment. Covering micro-issues of legal doctrine and administrative practice, as well as arguments for and against abolition, this book is an invaluable resource for academics and students in law and political theory.

CONTENTS 1. Capital Punishment Today 2. Current Jurisprudential Approaches to Capital Punishment: A Critique 3. Political Sovereignty and the Death Penalty 4. Race and Death 5. The Ethics of Capital Punishment 6. Conclusion: Implications, Consequences and Potential Futures

Child Pornography Alisdair A. Gillespie, De Montfort University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49987-3; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Child Pornography: Law and Policy draws on interdisciplinary work in order to critically address the law relating to child pornography. Child pornography is recognised as a specific form of child abuse and there are now many national, and international, efforts to tackle it. Yet despite these efforts, the volume of child pornography, particularly on the internet, is increasing. The law has reacted to this situation by adapting its definitions, increasing sentences and providing new powers to law enforcement. It is, however, unclear how far the law should extend. What should the relationship be between criminalisation and free-speech? And is there a link between the "use" of child pornography and contact offending? The issue of child pornography has been the subject of considerable literature in the areas of psychology, sociology and psychiatry. These studies provide the basis for a greater understanding of the nature of child pornography, as well as the profiles and behaviour of those who access or produce such material. Child Pornography: Law and Policy brings this wider literature to bear on the legal and policy frameworks relating to child pornography, questioning both the appropriateness and the effectiveness of the law in this context.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction; 2. What is Child Pornography?; 3. Non-image-based Child Pornography; 4. Indecent Photographs of Children; 5.

Virtual Child Pornography; 6. The International Dimension; 7. Young People and Child Pornography; 8. Contact Offending; 9.

Policing Child Pornography; 10. Sentencing Offenders; 11. The Victim; 12. Conclusions

Comparative Perspectives on Communal Lands and Individual Ownership Edited by Lee Godden and Maureen Tehan, both of University of Melbourne, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 416pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45720-0; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Comparative Perspectives on Communal Lands and Individual Ownership: Sustainable Futures addresses property and land title as central mechanisms governing access to communally-held land and resources. The collection assesses the effectiveness of property law and tenure models developed around concepts of individual ownership, for achieving long-term environmental and economic sustainability for indigenous peoples and local communities. It explores the momentum for change in the international realm, and then develops a comparative focus across Australia, North America, Africa, Peru, New Zealand and the Pacific region, examining the historical and current impacts of individuation of title on the customary law and practice of indigenous peoples and local communities.

Themes of property, privatisation and sustainable communities are developed in theoretical analyses and case studies from these jurisdictions. The case studies throw into sharp relief how questions of land law and resources management should not be separated from wider issues about the long-term viability of communities. Comparative analysis allows consideration of how western models of land tenure and land title might better accommodate the exercise of traditional practices of indigenous peoples and local communities, while still promoting autonomy, choice and economic development. This volume will be of interest to scholars and professionals

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

201 working in the fields of property law, land reform, policy and planning, indigenous law and customary law, environmental sustainability, development and resource management.

CONTENTS Introduction: A Sustainable Future for Communal Lands, Resources and Communities, Lee Godden and Maureen Tehan Section 1: Situating Sustainable Futures — Challenges for Communal Land and Resources 1. Managing Social Tenures, Jude Wallace 2.Social Justice, Communal Lands and Sustainable Communities, Tom Calma 3. The Estate as Duration: "Being in Place" and Aboriginal property relations in areas of Cape York Peninsula in North Australia, Marcia Langton Section 2: Trends towards Individual Title – History and Context 4. You can’t always get what you want: —Economic Development on Indigenous Individual and Collective Titles in North America: What Land Tenure Models are Relevant to Australia?, Margaret Stephenson 5. Individualisation — An idea whose time came, and went: The New Zealand experience, Richard Boast , 6. One step forward, two steps back: Peru’s approach to Indigenous land and Resources and the Law, Lila Barrera-Hernández 7. Lessons from the Cape: Beyond South Africa’s Transformation Act, Juanita M Pienaar Section 3: Recognition of Communal Lands – Processes and Pressures 8. Beyond ‘Richtersveld’: The Judicial Take on Restitution of Communal Land Rights in South Africa, Hanri Mostert , 9. Land, Environmental Management, and the New Governance in Burkina Faso, Simon Batterbury 10. Management of Customary Land as a form of Communal Property in Solomon Islands, Vanuatu and Fiji, Joseph Foukona 11. The Act that almost was: The Fijian Qoliqoli Bill 2006, Shaunnagh Dorsett Section 4: Issues for Communal Lands and Resources in Australia 12. Spatial Technologies, Mapping and the Native Title Process, Peter Bowen 13. Discrimination as a cause of Poverty in Aboriginal Communities: Measuring implementation of the Right to non-discriminatory and equitable access to Health Care Services of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples, Clancy Kelly 14. Customary Land Tenure, Communal Titles and Sustainability: The Allure of Individual Title and Property Rights in Australia, Maureen Tehan Section 5 Conclusion: Communal Governance of Land and Resources as a Sustainable Institution Lee Godden

Contemporary Perspectives on Life After Punishment Edited by Stephen Farrall, University of Sheffield, UK, Richard Sparks, University of Edinburgh, UK, Shadd Maruna, Queen’s University Belfast, UK and Mike Hough, Kings College London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55034-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Contemporary Perspectives on Life After Punishment: Escape Routes addresses the reasons why people stop offending, and the processes by which they are rehabilitated or resettled back into the community. Engaging with, and building upon, renewed criminological interest in this area, it nevertheless broadens and enlivens the current debate.

CONTENTS PART ONE: THINKING ABOUT LIFE AFTER PUNISHMENT; Stephen Farrall, Richard Sparks, Shadd Maruna & Mike Hough, Contemporary Research on Desistance from Crime; PART TWO: NEW THEORISING ON THE PROCESSES OF DESISTANCE: Sir Anthony Bottoms and Joanna Shapland, Reflections on conformity and desistance; Lesley McAra and Susan McVie, Understanding desistance: A theory of negotiated order; Mechthild Bereswill, Inside- Out – Transitions From Prison To Every Day Life: A Qualitative Longitudinal Approach, Robert Macdonald, Tracy Shildrick, Mark Simpson and Colin Webster, Biographies of exclusion and paths to inclusion: understanding marginalised young people’s criminal careers; Chris Deacy, Applying Redemption Through Film: Challenging the Sacred-Secular Divide; PART THREE: THE EXPERIENCES OF SPECIFIC GROUPS OF ‘THE PUNISHED’: Susanne Karstedt, Life after Punishment for Nazi War Criminals: Normative Balance and Integration; Anne-Marie McAlinden, The Reintegration of Sexual Offenders: From a ‘Risks’ to a ‘Strengths-based’ Model of Offender Resettlement’; Anette Ballinger, Capitalising On Punishment: Subjugated Knowledges, State Power And The Annihilation Of Condemned Women; Adam Calverley, Desistance from Crime Amongst Ethnic Minorities

The Criminology of Pleasure Mike McGuire and Simon Hallsworth, both of London Metropolitan University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54778-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Criminology of Pleasure offers a new way of thinking about crime and crime control, as it maintains that the very rationale of the criminal justice system lies in the channelling of desire and regulating of pleasure. Criminology has only confronted the importance of the desire/pleasure nexus tangentially: through the reference to transgression, resistance and edge-work, and in its concern with social marginalisation. The Criminology of Pleasure , however, argues for the fundamental importance of desire/pleasure in understanding social order and control. Whilst ostensibly concerned with crime and its control, the criminal justice system is, the authors argue, centred upon a more fundamental project – that of managing desire. Precisely what this means is systematically articulated here: first, by considering how various pleasures have been regulated in history; and, second, by mapping the key ways in which desire is now

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

202 regulated. In a political landscape that has witnessed attempts both on the part of the political right and left to attack and replace criminology with something else - a science of crime or a science of social harm - this book not only provides a highly original analysis; but also a radical, innovative and heretical defence of criminology.

The Delivery of Human Rights Edited by Geoff Gilbert, University of Essex, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57992-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Delivery of Human Rights reflects on two overlapping issues in international human rights law: how can existing norms be better implemented and effected, and how can other branches of international law or other international actors be used so as to provide an improved delivery of those norms. Rather than simply looking at the content of the rights, this book will also explore how the framers’ intention that individuals benefit from the norms can be achieved. The book is intended written and published in honour of Professor Sir Nigel Rodley KBE. It celebrates his career as an academic and practitioner in the area of human rights. Professor Rodley acted as the UN Special Rapporteur on Torture from 1993 to 2001 and is currently a member of the UN Human Rights Committee. He is also a Commissioner of the International Commission of Jurists. Since 2001 he has been a Member of the UN Human Rights Committee, established under the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights. In 1998 he was knighted in the Queen's New Year's Honours list for services to Human Rights and International Law and in 2000 he received an honorary LLD from Dalhousie University. He is Professor and Chair of the Human Rights Centre, University of Essex, having taught there since 1990. The contributors to this volume are notable experts in the area of human rights law and include Paul Hunt, Malcolm Evans, Theo van Boven, Andrew Clapham, and Hurst Hannum. The book addresses such as the Role of Special Rapporteurs, how can the absolute prohibition of torture be properly implemented, Responsibility to Protect, non-state actors, including businesses, and human rights.

CONTENTS 1. United Nations Charter-Based Procedures for Addressing Human Rights Violations: Historical Practice, Current Reform, and Future Implications, David Weissbrodt 2. The Role of Special Rapporteurs, Paul Hunt 3. The Human Rights Committee, Michael Flaherty 4. Optional Protocol to the Convention Against Torture, Malcolm Evans 5. Torture,Theo van Boven 6. Humanitarian Intervention, Basak Cali 7. Responsibility to Protect, Hurst Hannum 8. The Extraterritorial Applicability of Human Rights, Françoise Hampson 9. Still Waiting for the Goods to Arrive: The Delivery of Human Rights to the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict, Noam Lubell 10.

The US and Human Rights, Bert Lockwood 11. Non-State Actors, Andrew Clapham 12. Business and Human Rights, Sheldon Leader 13. What Refugee Law Can Learn from IDP Law … and Vice Versa, Geoff Gilbert 14. Leadership Accountability for Past Crimes: Lessons from the Fujimori case, Clara Sandoval

Drugs, Crime and Public Health Alex Stevens, University of Kent, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49104-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Drugs, Crime and Public Health provides an accessible but critical discussion of recent policy on illicit drugs. Using a comparative approach - centred on the UK, but with insights and complementary data gathered from the USA and other countries - it argues that problematic drug use can only be understood in the social context in which it takes place, a context which it shares with other problems of crime and public health. The book demonstrates the social and spatial overlap of these problems, examining the focus of contemporary drug policy on crime reduction. This focus, Alex Stevens contends, has made it less, rather than more, likely that longterm solutions will be produced for drugs, crime and health inequalities. And he concludes, through examining competing visions for the future of drug policy, with an argument for social solutions to these social problems.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction; 2. Crime, drugs and public health problems as "afflictions of inequality"; 3. Survival of the ideas that fit: The use of evidence in crime and drug policy; 4. The exaggeration of the drug-crime link; 5. Tough on crime, tough on drug users; 6. Coercing drug users: A solution to drug-related crime?; 7. International perspectives; 8. Alternative futures.

Eco Crime and Genetically Modified Food Reece Walters, The Open University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 200pp.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

203 www.routledge.com/978-1-904385-22-6; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The GM debate has been ongoing for over a decade, yet it has been contained in the scientific world and presented in technical terms.

This book brings the debates about GM food into the social and criminological arena. On September 11th 2003, the Cartagena Protocol on Biosafety became international law. As a result, a vast number of practices currently adopted by the US and UK Governments, as well as numerous bio-tech industries, became illegal. To date, criminal activity and GM food has been reported in the press, however, it has been confined to the actions of protest groups destroying GM crops and testing laboratories. This book highlights the criminal actions of state and corporate officials, including the illegal use of genetic technologies, the illegal production and sale of GM products, the economic exploitation of trade in third world countries, the monopolization of seeds and economic disaster for GM farmers, biopiracy and the manipulation of science.

CONTENTS Introduction. The Development and Production of GM Food. GM Food: Manna from Heaven or a Human Curse. International Law and the Regulation of GM Food. Third World Hunger, Corporate Exploitation and the US Trade War. Risk, Governmentality and the Political Economy of GM Food. GM Food Hazards and the Limits of National Sovereignty in Global Crime Regulation. Reflections and New Horizons: The Future of GM Food, International Regulation and Crime Prevention.

EEO Law and Personnel Practices, Third Edition Arthur Gutman, Florida Institute of Technology, USA, Laura L. Koppes and Stephen J. Vodanovich, both of University of West Florida, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £54.95 $90.00; 229x152 mm; 424pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-8058-6473-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The goal of this well known book is to provide methods for understanding major EEO laws, including the Civil Rights Act of 1964, the Equal Pay Act of 1963, and the American with Disabilities Act of 1975. Also included are over 400 cases involving federal case law that focus on issues relating to the terms and conditions of employment. New to this third edition are sections at the end of each chapter on "Implications for Practice." These accessible sections will give organizations and managers practical advice on strategies and guidelines for implementing laws and guidelines. A website of additional case materials, power points, and teaching aids will accompany this book.

CONTENTS 1. An Introduction to EEO Law. 2. Major Title VII Judicial Scenarios. 3. Major Title VII Protected Class Issues. 4. Constitutional Claims. 5. The Equal Pay Act of 1963. 6. The Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967. 7. Affirmative Action. 8. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. 9. Retaliation.

Events: The Force of International Law Edited by Fleur Johns, University of Sydney, Australia, Richard Joyce, University of Reading, UK and Sundhya Pahuja, University of Melbourne, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55452-7; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Events: The Force of International Law presents an analysis of international law, centred upon those historical and recent events in which international law has exerted, or acquired, its force. From Spanish colonization and the Peace of Westphalia, through the release of Nelson Mandela and the Rwandan genocide, and to recent international trade negotiations and the 'torture memos', each chapter in this book focuses on a specific international legal event. Short and accessible to the non-specialist reader, these chapters consider what forces are put into play when international law is invoked, as it is so frequently today, by lawyers, laypeople, or leaders. At the same time, they also reflect on what is entailed in naming these ‘events’ of international law and how international law grapples with their disruptive potential. Engaging economic, military, cultural, political, philosophical and technical fields, Events: The Force of International Law will be of interest to international lawyers and scholars of international relations, legal history, diplomatic history, war and/or peace studies, and legal theory. It is also intended to be read and appreciated by anyone familiar with appeals to international law from the general media, and curious about the limits and possibilities occasioned, or the forces mobilised, by that appeal.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction, Fleur Johns, Richard Joyce & Sundhya Pahuja 2. The International Law in Force: Anachronistic Ethics and Divine Violence, Jennifer Beard 3. Absolute Contingency and the Prescriptive Force of International Law, Chiapas-Valladolid, ca.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

204 1550, Oscar Guardiola-Rivera 4. Latin Roots: The Force of International Law as Event, Peter Fitzpatrick 5. Westphalia: Event, Memory, Myth, Richard Joyce 6. The Force of a Doctrine: Art. 38 of the PCIJ Statute and the Sources of International Law, Thomas Skouteria 7. Paris 1793 and 1871: Levée en Masse as Event, Gerry Simpson 8. Decolonisation and the Eventness of International Law, Sundhya Pahuja 9. Postwar to New World Order and Post-Socialist Transition: 1989 As Pseudo-Event, Scott Newton 10. The Liberation of Nelson Mandela: Anatomy of a "Happy Event" in International Law, Frédéric Mégret 11. Political Trials as Events, Emilios Christodoulidis 12. The Tokyo Women’s Tribunal and the Turn to Fiction, Karen Knop 13. Many Hundred Thousand Bodies Later: An Analysis of the ‘Legacy’ of the International Criminal Tribunal for Rwanda, Denise Ferreira da Silva 14. From the State to the Union: International Law and the Appropriation of the New Europe, Patricia Tuitt 15. The Emergence of the World Trade Organization: Another Triumph of Corporate Capitalism? Fiona Macmillan 16. The World Trade Organisation and Development: Victory of ‘Rational Choice’? Donatella Alessandrini 17. Protesting the WTO in Seattle: Transnational Citizen Action, International Law and the Event, Ruth Buchanan 18. Globalism, Memory and 9/11: A Critical Third World Perspective, Obiora Chinedu Okafor 19.

Provoking International Law: War and Regime Change in Iraq, John Strawson 20. The Torture Memos, Fleur Johns

Feminist Encounters with Legal Philosophy Edited by Maria Drakopoulou, University of Kent, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49760-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Presenting feminist readings of texts from the legal philosophical and jurisprudential canon, the papers collected here offer an interdisciplinary and critical challenge to established modes of reading law. Feminist approaches to law usually take the form of either critical engagements with legal doctrine, legal concepts and ideas, or critical assessments of the effects that specific areas of law have upon the lives of women. This collection, however, although rooted in feminist legal scholarship, takes the established canon of legal texts as the object of inquiry. Taking as their common starting point the fact that legal texts are plural and open to multiple readings, all the contributions in this collection offer subversive, but supplementary, interpretations of the legal canon. In this respect, however, they do not merely sustain an array of feminist styles and theories of reading. Revealing, and re-appropriating, the plural space of legal interpretation, they seek to open a hitherto unexplored arena for a feminist politics of law.

CONTENTS Introduction, Maria Drakopoulou; Engendering ‘Right Reason’: Thomas Aquinas and the Woman Question, Margaret Denike; Nomos and Physis in the 17th century tradition of Natural Law: Pufendorf’s On the law of Nature and Nations and the politics of sexual difference, Maria Drakopoulou; The Accidental Feminist: on the Pythagorean roots of John Selden’s jani anglorum, Peter Goodrich; Subjects and Subjection: The Inconsistent Position of Women in Social Contract Theory, Janice Richardson; Hegel on Women, Law and Contract, Alison Stone; Gender, Law and Genre: William Blackstone and the ‘Romance’ of Law, Dr. Sue Chaplin; Resonance: Why Feminists Do/Ought Not Read Kelsen, Panu Minnkinen; Pashukanis for Feminists: Legal Forms of Reproductive Difference, Ruth Fletcher; Re-reading Schmitt with Copjec and Bronfen: Sovereignty Beyond Exceptionality?, Julia H. Chryssostalis; The Problem of Legal Subjectivity in H.L.A. Hart’s The Concept of Law, Emma Cunliffe

Foucault and Criminology Veronique Voruz, University of Leicester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00 £22.50 $45.95; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46040-8; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46041-5; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Foucault and Criminology: an Introduction provides an introduction to Michel Foucault, written from the perspective of criminology’s engagement with his work. Foucault’s writing has become a central reference in theoretical and sociological criminology generally and, more specifically, in what Jock Young has called ‘control theory’. The main purpose of this book is to offer a better, clearer and deeper understanding of ongoing criminological debates to both undergraduate and research students in criminology by outlining the theoretical framework which criminologists have taken from Foucault. Its second purpose is to trace the evolution of Foucault’s political project and to counterpose the thrust of his elaborations to the more pedestrian applications of his critical analyses of the present in the field of criminology. In these respects, Foucault and Criminology offers a 'map' to guide students and practitioners of criminology: both through Foucault's own writings and those of contemporary criminologists whose work may be characterised as Foucauldian. In so doing, it also pursues the argument that Foucault’s historical and theoretical analyses of discipline, power and governance must be understood in the context of his overall project if criminologists are to avoid reducing Foucault’s radicality, and to reclaim the critical, and resistive, potential of his work.

CONTENTS Selected Contents: 1. Mapping ‘Foucauldian’ criminology 2. "Questions of Method" 3. Rationalities of Power and Strategies of Government 4. Dangerousness, Risk, Security 5. A Critical Engagement with Foucauldian Criminology 6. Foucauldian Crimin

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

205

Framing Crime Edited by Keith Hayward and Mike Presdee, University of Kent, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00 £27.50 $53.95; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45903-7; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45904-4; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In a world in which media images of crime and deviance proliferate, where every facet of offending is reflected in a ‘vast hall of mirrors’, Framing Crime: Cultural Criminology and the Image makes sense of the increasingly blurred line between the real and the virtual. Images of crime and crime control have become almost as 'real' as crime and criminal justice itself. The meaning of both crime and crime control now resides, not solely in the essential - and essentially false - factuality of crime rates or arrest records, but also in the contested processes of symbolic display, cultural interpretation, and representational negotiation. It is essential, then, that criminologists are closely attuned to the various ways in which crime is imagined, constructed and framed within modern society.

Framing Crime responds to this demand with a collection of papers aimed at helping the reader to understand the ways in which the contemporary ‘story of crime’ is constructed and promulgated through the image. It also provides the relevant analytical and research tools to unearth the hidden social and ideological concerns that frequently underpin images of crime, violence and transgression.

Framing Crime will be of interest to students and academics in the fields of criminology, crime and the media, and sociology.

CONTENTS 1. Opening the lens: cultural criminology and the image, Keith Hayward 2. Crime, punishment and the force of photographic spectacle, Phil Carney 3. The decisive moment: documentary photography and cultural criminology, Jeff Ferrell and Cécile Van de Voorde 4. Hindley’s ghost: the visual deconstruction of Maxine Carr, Phil J. Jones and Claire Wardle 5. Screening crime: cultural criminology goes to the movies, Majid Yar 6. The scene of the crime: Is there such a thing as ‘just looking’?, Alison Young 7.

Imagining the ‘War on Terror’: fiction, film, and framing, Alexandra Campbell 8. Framing the crimes of colonialism: critical images of Aboriginal art and Law, Chris Cuneen 9. ‘Drive it like you stole It’: cultural criminology, images and automobiles in advertisements, Stephen L. Muzzati 10. Staging an execution: the media at McVeigh, Bruce Hoffman and Michelle Brown 11.

Fighting with Images: The production and consumption of violence among online football supporters, Damián Zaitch and Tom de Leeuw 12. A reflected gaze of humanity: cultural criminology and images of genocide, Wayne Morrison

From Heritage to Terrorism Brian Simpson, University of New England, New South Wales, Australia and Cheryl Simpson, Flinders University, Adelaide, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42559-9; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Critical in style, From Heritage to Terrorism: Regulating Tourism in an Age of Uncertainty examines the law and its role in shaping and defining tourism and the tourist experience. Using a broad range of legal documents and other materials from a variety of disciplines, it surveys how the underlying values of tourism often conflict with a concern for human rights, cultural heritage and sustainable environments. Departing from the view that within this context the law is simply relegated to dealing the ‘hard edges’ of the tourist industry and tourist behaviour, the authors explore: the ways that the law shapes the nature of tourism how it can do this the need for a more focused role for law in tourism the law’s current and potential role in dealing with the various tensions for tourism in the panic created by the spread of global terrorism. Addressing a range of fundamental issues underlying global conflict and tourism, this thoroughly up-to-date and topical book is an essential read for all those interested in tourism and law.

CONTENTS Part 1: Law in Tourism 1. Conceptualising Tourism and the Tourist as a Legal Problem Part 2: Tourism as a Just Cause 2. Establishing the Exalted Tourist 3. The Urban Tourist: inserting the tourist into the cityscape 4. The Cultural Tourist: culture as tourism Part 3: Tourism as Transgression 5. The Targetted Tourist: the legal construction of fear 6. The Pleasure Tourist: sex tourism as a legal dilemma 7. Work and Death in Tourism: darkness and voyeurism Part 4: Tourism in Law 8. Conclusion: Tourism as a Legal Problem

Gender, Law and Sexualities Edited by Jackie Jones, University of the West of England, UK, Anna Grear, Bristol University, UK, Kim Stevenson, University of Plymouth, UK and Rachel Fenton, University of the West of England, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57439-6; February 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

206 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Bringing together an international range of academics, Gender, Law and Sexualities provides a comprehensive interrogation of the range of issues - both topical and controversial - raised by the gendered character of law and legal discourse. The gendering of law, legal persons and the legal profession, along with the gender bias of legal outcomes, has been a fractious, but fertile, focus of reflection. It has, moreover, been an important site of political struggle. This collection of essays offers an unrivalled examination of its various contemporary dimensions: focusing on issues of theory and representation; on violence, both national and international; and on marriage and the family. Gender, Law and Sexualities will be invaluable for all those engaged in research and study in the areas of law relating to gender and feminist studies.

CONTENTS Part 1: Gender, Law, Sex and Theory 1. Sexing the Matrix: Embodiment, Gender and Disembodied Law, A Grear 2. The Legal Concept of Sex, N Naffine 3. Re-thinking Sex/Gender in International Law, D Otto 4. De/Sexing the Woman Lawyer, R Hunter 5.

The Vulnerable Subject, the Responsive State and Equality, M Fineman Part 2: Gender, Law, Sex and Represenation 6. The Public Sex of the Judiciary: The Appearance of the Irrelevant and the Invisible, L Moran 7. The Gendered Company 10 years on, A Belcher 8. The Gendered Dock: Reflections on Concepts of Masculinity and Femininity in the Criminal Justice System 1850-1959, J Rowbottom 9. Sexuality, Gender, and Social Cognition: Schema Theory and Lesbian and Gay Identity in Judicial Decision Making, T Brower Part 3: Violence, Law and Sex: National Perspectives 10. Gendering Rape: Social Attitudes and Law Enforcement, P Rumney 11. The Legal Construction of Domestic Violence: Unmasking a 'Private' Problem, M Burton 12. Intimate Violations: Recognising Gender in Legal and Media Representations of Violence, K Stevenson 13. In Her Defence? Gender Neutrality or Gendered Reality?

Defences for Abused Women who Kill, G Dance Part 4: Violence, Law and Sex: International Perspectives 14. The Shame of 'Honour Killings' in Pakistan, S Shah-Davis 15. Ratifying the Convention: Critical Perspectives on the Council of Europe and the UK's Action Plan Against Trafficking, A Carline 16. Prosecuting Sexual Violence under Supranational Criminal Law, A-M Brouwer 17. The Role of Women in Post-Conflict Resolution, N Quenivet Part 5: Family, Law and Sex 18. Shall I Be Mother?, R Fenton, S Heenan, J Rees 19. Marginal Parenthood, G Letherby 20. The Sex of Mothering, M van den Brink 21. The Strange Case of the Invisible Woman in Abortion Law Reform, K Gleeson 22 . Arthur, Martha and the Invisibles, I McDonald Part 6: Marriage, Law and Sex 23. Marriage and Civil Unions in South African Muslim Communities, E Bonthuys and N Erlank 24. Taking sex out of marriage in the EU, J Jones 25. From Russia (and Elsewhere) with Love - Policy Responses to 'Mail Order Brides', J Marchbank 26. The Civil Partnership Act: A Very British Compromise, J Weeks

Genocide, State Crime, and the Law Jennifer Balint, University of Melbourne, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54381-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Genocide, State Crime and the Law argues that genocide and other forms of state crime must be located in relation to cultural, political and legal processes if they are to be properly understood and addressed. Discussing a series of case studies of genocide - in Armenia, Nazi Germany, Cambodia, South Africa, Ethiopia, Rwanda and the former Yugoslavia - the book is oriented towards two post-conflict problems: how to address the institutional dimensions of the harm perpetrated, and to what extent law can lay claim to being a reconstitutive actor. Such occurrences of genocide are regularly considered as an event that is disconnected from the particular character of the society in which it occurs. But it is with reference to their distinct cultural, political and legal contexts that, Jennifer Balint maintains, genocide must be approached. It is not, she argues, new institutions that are needed; but a new approach to addressing genocide and state crime - one that takes into consideration its broader social, historical and institutional dimensions. Only then is it possible to understand the limits and the potential of post-conflict political-legal processes. An important, and indeed vital, contribution to the growing interest and literature in the area of post-conflict studies, Genocide, State Crime and the Law will be of considerable value to those concerned with law’s ability to be a force for good in the wake of harm and atrocity.

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Conceptualising Genocide and State Crime; Chapter 2: The Toleration of Harm: Law and Perpetration; Chapter 3: Cutting off the Old, Envisaging the New: Law and Redress; Chapter 4: Accountability and Responsibility: Addressing Institutions; Chapter 5: Bringing Us All Together: Law and Reconciliation; Chapter 6: Law and the Constitution of State Crime and Genocide

Globalisation and the Quest for Social and Environmental Justice Edited by Shawkat Alam, Natalie Klein and Juliette Overland, all of Macquarie University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $123.75; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49910-1; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

207 There are few topics as controversial as globalisation. It is meant to bring economic growth and solve a range of social, cultural and humanitarian problems. However, there are significant debates in relation to the extent that the reality of globalisation reflects this idealized vision. In particular, globalisation has produced a highly interdependent world, rendering state boundaries meaningless and challenging the ideology and limits of certain areas of international law. This book will provide the opportunity to address some of the multifaceted issues provoked by the issue of globalisation. The book is an exploration of the intricate nexus that emerges as a result of globalisation, inextricably linking together issues of international law, human rights, environmental law and international trade law.

Bringing together a number of experts in the field, the book focuses on the areas of social justice and environmental justice, and explores the links that exists between the two and the effect of globalisation on these areas. As globalisation has many facets and actors, the contributions to the book engage with interdisciplinary research to deal with the various challenges identified, and critically explore both the potential of globalisation as a vehicle of sustainable and equitable development.

CONTENTS Part 1: Globalisation and Environment 1. Globalisation and Climate Change, Saleemul Huq 2. Globalisation and Biodiversity, Lee Godden 3. Globalisation and Marine Environment, Natalie Klein 4. Globalisation and Indigenous People/Traditional Knowledge, Johanna Gibson 5. Food Safety/GMO, Joseph McMahon Part 2: Globalisation and Human Rights 2.1. Globalisation and Human Rights: Children’s Rights, Women’s Rights 6. Globalisation and Children’s Rights, Maja Kirilova Eriksson 7. Globalisation and Feminism/Women Rights, Penelope Andrews 2.2. Economic, Social and Cultural Rights 8. Globalisation and Health, George Tomossy 9. Globalisation and Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR), Juliette Overland 10. Globalisation, Terrorism and Use of Force, Ben Saul 11. Globalisation and Refugees, Sam Blay Part 3: Globalisation and Economic Development 12. Trade Liberalization, Human Rights and Other Societal Issues, Shawkat Alam 13. Trade Liberalization and Other Societal Issues 3.1 Globalisation and FDI 14. Blue Oil: Water Resources, Social Justice, and the International Law on Foreign Investment, Kate Miles 3.2. Globalisation and Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS), Carlos M Correa 15. Globalisation and Deregulation of Government Services, Jane Kesley Part 4: Globalisation and NGOs/Non-state Actors/International Civil Society, Rafiqul Islam Part 5: Globalisation and Its Challenges: The Way Forward, M Sornarajah

Global Perspectives on the Rule of Law Edited by James J. Heckman, University of Chicago, USA, Robert L. Nelson, Northwestern University, USA and Lee Cabatingan, American Bar Foundation, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £27.50 $53.95; 234x156 mm; 342pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58959-8; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Global Perspectives on the Rule of Law is a collection of original research on the rule of law from a panel of leading economists, political scientists, legal scholars, sociologists and historians. The chapters critically analyze the meaning and foundations of the rule of law and its relationship to economic and democratic development, challenging many of the underlying assumptions guiding the burgeoning field of rule of law development. The combination of jurisprudential, quantitative, historical/comparative, and theoretical analyses seeks to chart a new course in scholarship on the rule of law: the volume as a whole takes seriously the role of law in pursuing global justice, while confronting the complexity of instituting the rule of law and delivering its promised benefits. Written for scholars, practitioners, and policymakers, Global Perspectives offers a unique combination of jurisprudential and empirical research that will be provocative and relevant to those who are attempting to understand and advance the rule of law globally. The chapters progress from broad questions regarding current rule of development efforts and the concept of rule of law to more specific issues pertaining to economic and democratic development. Specific countries, such as China, India, and seventeenth century England and The Netherlands, serve as case studies in some chapters, while broad global surveys feature in other chapters. Indeed, this impressive scope of research ushers in the next generation of scholarship in this area.

CONTENTS Global Perspectives on the Rule of Law: A Preface and an Introduction Robert L. Nelson and Lee Cabatingan Part 1: Assessing Rule of Law Development 1. Rule of Law Temptations, Thomas Carothers 2. Why Developing Countries Prove So Resistant to the Rule of Law Barry R. Weingast Part 2: Global Justice and the World Community 3. Global Justice Amartya Sen 4. The Rule of Law in Islamic Thought and Practice: A Historical Perspective Timur Kuran Part 3: Rule of Law and Economic Development 5. The Viability of the Welfare State James J. Heckman 6. Comparing Legal and Alternative Institutions in Finance and Commerce Franklin Allen and Jun "QJ" Qian 7. Law, Finance, and the First Corporations Ron Harris Part 4: Rule of Law and Political Development 8. The Politics of Courts in Democratization Thomas Ginsburg 9. Principled Principals in the Founding Moments of the Rule of Law Margaret Levi and Brad Epperly 10. The Fight for Basic Legal Freedoms: Mobilization by the Legal Complex Terence C. Halliday 11. Social Norms, Rule of Law, and Gender Reality: An Essay on the Limits of the Dominant Rule of Law Paradigm Katharina Pistor, Antara Haldar and Amrit Amirapu 12. Constitutionalism and the Challenge of Ethnic Diversity Yash Ghai

A History of Drugs Toby Seddon, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £27.50 $53.95; 234x156 mm; 190pp.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

208 www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58960-4; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Why are some psychoactive substances regarded as ‘dangerous drugs’, to be controlled by the criminal law within a global prohibition regime, whilst others – from alcohol and tobacco, through to those we call ‘medicines’ – are seen and regulated very differently? A History of Drugs traces a genealogy of the construction and governance of the ‘drug problem’ over the past 200 years: calling into question some of the most fundamental ideas in this field: from ‘addiction’ to the very concept of ‘drugs’. At the heart of the book is the claim that it was with the emergence in the late eighteenth century of modern liberal capitalism, with its distinctive emphasis on freedom, that our concerns about the consumption of some of these substances began to grow. And, indeed, notions of freedom, free will and responsibility remain central to the drug question today. Pursuing an innovative inter-disciplinary approach, A History of Drugs provides an informed and insightful account of the origins of contemporary drug policy. It will be essential reading for students and academics working in law, criminology, sociology, social policy, history and political science.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Drugs, freedom and liberalism 2. A Conceptual Map: Freedom, the ‘will’ and addiction 3. Opium, Regulation and Classical Liberalism: The Pharmacy Act 1868 4. Drugs, Prohibition and Welfarism: The Dangerous Drugs Act 1920 5. Drugs, Risk and Neo-liberalism: The Drugs Act 2005 6. Drugs as a Regulation and Governance Problem 7. Conclusions: Drugs and Freedom in the Liberal Age

Honour, Violence, Women and Islam Edited by Mohammad Mazher Idriss, University of Coventry, UK and Tahir Abbas, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56542-4; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Why are honour killings and honour-related violence (HRV) so important to understand? What do such crimes represent? And how does HRV fit in with Western views and perceptions of Islam? This distinctively comparative collection examines the concept of HRV against women in general and Muslim women in particular. The issue of HRV has become a sensitive subject in many South Asian and Middle Eastern countries and it has received the growing attention of the media, human rights groups and academics around the globe. However, the issue has yet to receive detailed academic study in the United Kingdom, particularly in terms of both legal and sociological research. This collection sets out the theoretical and ethical parameters of the study of HRV in order to address this intellectual vacuum in a socio-legal context. The key objectives of this book are: to construct, and to develop further, a theory of HRV; to rationalise and characterise the different forms of HRV; to investigate the role of religion, race and class in society within this context, in particular, the role of Islam; to scrutinise the role of the civil/criminal law/justice systems in preventing these crimes; and to inform public policy makers of the potential policies that may be employed in combating HRV. CONTENTS 1. Introduction, Mohammad Mazher Idriss 2. Honour-related violence towards South Asian Muslim Women, Tahir Abbas 3. The Silencing of Women from the Pakistani Muslim Mirpuri Community in Violent Relationships, Zahira Latif 4. There is Nothing 'Honourable' about Honour Killings: Gender, Violence and the Limits of Multiculturalism, Veena Meeto and Heidi Safia Mirza 5.

Collective Crimes, Collective Victims: A Case Study into the Murder of Banaz Mahmod, Joanne Lee Payton 6. Honour and Shame in Domestic Homicide: A Critical Analysis of the Provocation Defence, Anna Carline 7. Does the Qur’an Condone Domestic Violence, Sadia Kauser, Sjaad Hussain, Mohammad Mazher Idriss 8. The Construction of ‘Honour’ in Indian Criminal Law: An Indian Lawyer’s Perspective, Geeta Ramaseshan 9. Men’s Violence and Women’s Responsibility: Mothers’ Stories about Honour Violence, Åsa Eldén 10. Lack of Due Diligence: Judgments of Crimes of Honour in Turkey, Leylâ Pervizat 11. A Comparative Study of the Reform Work Conducted in Asia and Europe to Combat Violence and So-Called Honour Murders, Rana Husseini 12. Ending Honour Crimes in Sub Saharan Africa: Looking at a Long Hard Death, Nancy Kaymar Stafford 13. Conversations Across Borders: Men and Honour Related Violence in the UK and Sweden, Suruchi Thapar-Björkert 14. Tackling ‘Crimes of Honour:’ Evaluating the Social and Legal Responses to Combating Forced Marriages in the United Kingdom, Samia Bano 15. Reconfiguring ‘Honour’-Based Violence as a Form of Gendered Violence, Aisha Gill

Human Rights and Constituent Power Illan rua Wall, Oxford Brookes University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58497-5; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Human Rights and Constituent Power: Without Model or Warranty reworks the ordinary conception of human rights, by replacing their possessive individualism with the radically different ontology of ‘being-together’ in constituent struggle. Engaging the current

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

209 political and jurisprudential thought on constituent power with a radical political re-thinking of human rights, Ilan Rua Wall develops the idea that human rights must be considered as a non-metaphysical process of ‘right-ing’. The first part of this argument discusses both the classical theory of constituent power and its contemporary conceptualization, in order to elaborate the conception of an ‘open’ constituent power, not tied to a the closure of a constituted order. This conception is then further developed through the re-imagination of community, and of the political, as a ruptural force. The consequence is a more radical form of human rights: now understood, not just a moralistic cover for biopolitical subordination, but as a constituent potentia; the coming to presence of a radical sense of beingwith, and a very different human right-ing.

CONTENTS Introduction; Part 1: Another Human Rights?; Chapter 1: Tracing the Radical in Human Rights; Chapter 2: Retreating Human Rights; Part 2: Disconnecting from the Statist Horizon; Chapter 3: The Problem of a Closed Constituent Power; Chapter 4: Untying the Constituent from the Constituted; Part 3: Rupturing Individualism & ‘Levelling-down’; Chapter 5: Levelling-down: The Incommon & Rupture; Chapter 6: Against the Individual: The Constituent Singular Plural; Part 4: Radical Human Rights?; Chapter 7: Constituent Right-ing; Chapter 8: Right-ing or Becoming Human

Human Rights, or Citizenship?

Paulina Tambakaki, University of Westminster, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 168pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48163-2; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION While human rights have been enjoying unprecedented salience, the concept of the citizen has been significantly challenged. Rising ethical concerns, the calling into question of state sovereignty, and the consolidation of the human rights regime, have all contributed to a shift in focus: from an exclusionary, problematic citizenship to human rights. Human Rights or Citizenship? examines this shift and explores its implications for democracy. In an accessible way, the book explores the arguments within contemporary democratic theory that privilege law and legally codified human rights over citizenship; questioning whether legalism alone could lead us to a better, more equitable politics. Does the prioritisation of law and legally codified human rights risk depoliticisation? Do human rights always contest relations of power and subordination? Addressing these questions, Human Rights or Citizenship? opens a debate about the role of citizenship and human rights in democracy. It will be invaluable reading for anyone interested in democratic politics today.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Citizenship and Human Rights in Tension. Changes, Issues and Approaches 2. Privileging Human Rights 3. The Illusive Promise of Human Rights 4. Politics and Legalism 5. Back to Citizenship, An Agonistic Conception. Conclusion: And Human Rights?

Internet Child Abuse: Current Research and Policy Edited by Julia Davidson, Kingston University, UK and Petter Gottschalk, Norwegian School of Management PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55980-5; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Internet Child Abuse: Current Research and Policy provides a timely overview of international policy, legislation and offender management and treatment practice in the area of Internet child abuse. Internet use has grown considerably over the last five years, and information technology now forms a core part of the formal education system in many countries. There is however, increasing evidence that the internet is used by some adults to access children and young people in order to ‘groom’ them for the purposes of sexual abuse; as well as to produce and distribute indecent illegal images of children. This book presents and assesses the most recent and current research on internet child abuse, addressing: its nature, the behaviour and treatment of its perpetrators, international policy, legislation and protection, and policing. It will be required reading for an international audience of academics, researchers, policy makers and criminal justice practitioners with interests in this area.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Legislation & Policy: Protecting Young People, Sentencing and Managing Internet Sex Offenders 3.

Characteristics of the Internet and child abuse 4. Combating child abuse images on the internet 5. Stage Model for Online Grooming Offenders 6. Understanding the perpetrators online behaviour 7. Policing Social Networking Sites & Online Grooming 8.

Assessment and treatment approaches with online sexual offenders Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

210

Islam, Law and Identity Edited by Marinos Diamantidis and Adam Gearey, both of Birkbeck, University of London, Uk PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56681-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Islam, Law and Identity brings together a range of Muslim and non Muslim scholars in order to focus on recent debates about the nature of sacred and secular law. Law is central to the complex ways in which different Muslim communities and institutions create and re-create their identities around symbols of faith and law. But what is at stake here is not a conflict between common law and Shari`a, but the possibility of opening both forms of law to different constructions of identity. Exploring a more nuanced and sophisticated understanding of the differences and similarities between the secular and the divine, this collection examines the different legacies of monotheism, and their connection with legal traditions.And, in so doing, it takes up the specific conjunctions of traditions that give meaning, and constitute identity, in relation to such terms as Shari`a law, modernity and secularisation. | CONTENTS Introduction; PART I: 1. Feminism, Law and Identity; One Law against Another? Human Rights, Divine Authority and the Common Law, Adam Gearey; 2. British Jihad: Islam, Law and Feminism, Qudsia Mirza; 3. British Muslim Women, Identity, Human Rights and the Securitization of Islam, Katherine Brown; PART II: Islam, (post) Empire and Citizenship; 4. Siayasa or qanun: Nineteenthcentury legal reforms in Egypt and the Ottoman Empire, Khaled Fahmy; 5. The 1917 Ottoman Family Code: a pioneer step in internal reformation of Islamic law, constitutionalization of equality and laicization of religious law, Havva Guney; 6. Unruly identity: confessions, law and citizenship in Lebanon, Mara Kolesas; 7. The Invention of Islamic Criminal Law: Sodomy, Comparative Law and the Human Rights Activist, Amr Shalakany; PART III: Theology, Politics and Jurisprudence; 8. How do we talk of legalism and Islam?, Marinos Diamantides; 9. Juridical theology: faith, technique, and tradition, Alain Pottage; 10. Between Politics and Religion: Muslim Identity and the emergence of Cultural Islam, John Strawso

Jurisdiction: The Expression and Representation of Law Edward Mussawir, University of Melbourne, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58996-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Jurisdiction: The Expression and Representation of Law pursues an emerging interest in the conceptual thematic of jurisdiction within legal studies; as it maintains that an adequate understanding of the power of law requires an attention, not just to the representation of law, but to its expression. In an age in which the authority to make new laws can been invoked everywhere as a response to changing patterns of social order, the importance of the techniques and technologies through which jurisdiction is produced is self-evident. But theories of legal power in modern jurisprudence have tended to focus upon the problematic of sovereignty and its relation to the origin, foundation and purpose of authority. The issue of jurisdiction - which continue to order the technical operations of law, the modalities of legal institution and the aesthetics of judgment - has, however, remained largely unaddressed. Drawing upon the philosophy of Gilles Deleuze, Edward Mussawir provides an analysis of jurisdiction that, combining theoretical and historical commentary with contemporary case studies, focuses on three core subjects: persons, rights and actions. The fashioning of persons, possessions and procedures of law involves institutional techniques which cannot be reduced to the usual co-ordinates of rational judgment, objectivity or legal subjectivity. And it is in addressing the articulation of these techniques that Jurisdiction: The Expression and Representation of Law provides a new account of law's power: through the development of a jurisprudence of law's expression, rather than its representation.

Law Across Borders Paul Arnell, Robert Gordon University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55861-7; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the extraterritorial application of UK public law. Building upon previous analyses which have focused on a single aspect of extraterritorially applied public law including criminal law, human rights and competition law, this book will examine each field in turn placing them in their context, before drawing them together in a coherent and systematic way. The book examines recent law and practice, as well as historic developments, and explores the important issue of enforcement. It also looks at the authority supporting the restriction of extraterritorial jurisdiction looking at international law, foreign law and practice and comity. It goes on to point the way forward in the development of the extraterritorial application of public law, and suggests ways in which greater

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

211 coherence can be brought to the law. The book will be of interest to students and scholars of public law, international law, human rights, criminal law and competition law.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The context 3. Criminal Law 4. Human Rights 5. Competition Law 6. Conclusion

Law and Art Edited by Oren Ben-Dor, University of Southampton, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56021-4; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The contributions to Law and Art address the interaction between law, justice, the ethical and the aesthetic. The exercise of the legal role and the scholarly understanding of legal texts were classically defined as ars iuris - an art of law - which drew on the panoply of humanist disciplines, from philology to fine art. That tradition has fallen by the wayside, particularly in the wake of modernism. But, as this book demonstrates, a consideration of the relationship between law and art can still bring jurisprudence, and particularly critical jurisprudence, to life. In its attention to the inexpressible, art can contribute to the liberation of legal doctrine from its own selfimposed limits. It can inform the ethics of a legal theory that is concerned to address how theoretical abstractions and concrete oppressions overlook the singularity and spontaneity to which art attests. The contributors to this volume - and their engagement with the full range of 'the arts' - seek, therefore, to disturb and to supplement conventional accounts of justice: raising the difficulty, but also the promise, of that surplus which art reveals: of life over legal formalisation.

CONTENTS Part 1: Law between Ethics and Aesthetics 1. Poetic Justice: Art and the Measure of Mortality, Krzysztof Ziarek 2. Art, Law, Comparison, Igor Stramignoni 3. Judaism in The No Man's Land: Between Law and Ethics, Ariella Atzmon 4. Law's Image, Costas Douzinas 5. The Aesthetics of the Everyday and the Form of the Law, Adam Gearey Part 2: Creativity, Singularity and the Law 1. In the Absence of Judgement: Critical Art Practice and the Law, Jamie Stapleton 2. The Torch of Art and the Sword of Law: Between Particularity and Universality, Zenon Bankowski and Maksymilian Del Mar 3. The rise and fall of moral security: Hugo Grotius, Joseph Conrad and the waters of the Malay Archipelago, Stephanie Jones 4. Musical Performance, the Academy, and the Law-givers, Thomas Irvine 5. Reading law as literature: cases for conversation, Robin Lister Part 3: Law, Art and Violence 1. The Sublime Origin of Violence, Oren Ben-Dor 2. As the Osprey to the Fish: Shakespeare and the Force of Law, Richard Wilson 3. Emergency Art: The Revolution will not be Curated!, Bernadette Buckley 4. The Play of Terror, Ian Ward Part 4: Law, Justice and the Image 1. Francis Bacon's 'armature': a justice that cannot be told, Panu Minkkinnen 2. Images, Emblems, Laws, Peter Goodrich 3. Not Yet: Aboriginal People and the rule of law, Desmond Manderson 4. The Awnings of Justice: De Chirico and Luhmann against the Horizon, Andreas Philippopoulos-Mihalopoulos 5. Law and Architecture: the construction of meaningful spaces, Alain Pottage

Law and Religion in Public Life Edited by Nadirsyah Hosen and Richard Mohr, both of University of Wollongong, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57249-1; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Following the 9/11 terrorist attack, the attention paid to the issue of how peoples of various faiths live by both secular laws as well as their religious law has increased significantly. The issues of freedom of religion and religious accommodation in law are being debated in courts and legislatures across numerous jurisdictions. Such debates are also closely associated with broader discussions around secularism, multiculturalism, immigration, settlement and security. The book is unique in bringing together leading scholars and respected religious leaders to address contemporary issues in the relationship of law, religion and the state. The contributors to the volume bring legal, theoretical, historical and religious insights to bear on some of the most pressing social issues of our time. The variety of perspectives highlights the religious dimensions of law, the legal dimensions of religion, and the interaction between secular law and religion. Particular attention is given to the implications for law and society, religious tolerance and freedom. The book focuses on the practical and topical issues that have arisen in recent years in Australia. As one of the most ethnically diverse countries in the world, a pioneer of multicutural policies in immigration and social justice, Australia is a revealing site for contemporary studies in a world afraid of immigration and terrorism., issues that are affecting much of the globe.

CONTENTS Part 1: Relationships between Religion and State: historical and theoretical perspectives 1. Classifying Church-State Arrangements – Beyond Religious versus Secular, Darryn Jensen 2. The Future of Secularism: A Critique, Margaret Davies 3. Christian Origins of Secularism and the Rule of Law, Richard Mohr Part 2: Law and Religion: practical and jurisprudential considerations 4. The Role of a Jewish Court in Australia, Rabbi Jeremy Lawrence 5. Does Australia need a Mufti? Analysing the Institution of Ifta in an Australian Contemporary Context, Mohamad Abdalla 6. Why Should I Do This? Private Property Theory and Religion, Paul Babie 7. Religion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

212 and Justice: Atonement as an element of justice in both western law and Christian thought’, Cassandra Sharp Part 3: Religion, Violence and Regulation: A Critique of Law and Social Policies 8. Religion, Multiculturalism and Legal Pluralism, Frank Brennan 9.

Religion and Domestic Violence: More than a matter of misinterpretation, Daniel Stepniak 10. Religion and Freedom of Speech, Kath Gelber 11. Religion and Security, Nadirsyah Hosen

Law, Ethics and the Biopolitical Amy Swiffen, University of Alberta, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57844-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Law, Ethics and the Biopolitical explores the emerging consensus that legal authority is no longer related to national sovereignty but to the common good of a political community and the ‘moral’ attempt to nurture life. The waning legitimacy of sovereignty has signalled the renewal of a version of natural law that de-emphasises the idea of a divine law-giver, in favour of an Aristotelian conception of human flourishing as the ‘common good’. And, whilst the relationship between law and ethics has long been a central concern in legal studies, now it is the relationship between law and life that has become crucial. Synthesizing elements of AngloAmerican legal scholarship on sovereignty, theories of biopolitics and biopower, as well as recent developments in the domains of ethics, Amy Swiffen examines the invocation of ‘life’ as a foundation for legal authority. The definition of life as naturally driven to survive is not, she argues, the morally neutral limit it might appear to be. And, critically analysing the fundamental principles of the bioethical paradigm, Law, Ethics and the Biopolitical documents the connection between the bioethical good - life - and a specific form of law and of biopolitical power.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The New Reign of Ethics 3. The Ethics of Law: The Antigone Tragedy Revisited 4. The Politics of Law: A Psychoanalytic Perspective on the Good 5. Goodbye to Kant: Bioethics and the ‘Good’ Life 6. Life that Does Not Die: Bioethics and Biopolitics 7. Ethico-politics of the Future 8. Conclusion

Law in the Pursuit of Development Edited by Amanda Perry Kessaris, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £27.50 $53.95; 234x156 mm; 292pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58962-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Law in the Pursuit of Development critically explores the relationships between contemporary principles and practice in law and development. Including papers by internationally renowned, as well as emerging, scholars and practitioners, the book is organised around the three liberal principles which underlie current efforts to direct law towards the pursuit of development. First, that the private sector has an important role to play in promoting the public interest; second, that widespread participation and accountability are essential to any large scale enterprise; and third, that the rule of law is a fundamental building block of development. This insightful and provocative collection, in which contributors critique both the principles and efforts to implement them in practice, will be of considerable interest to students, academics and practitioners with an interest in the fields of law and development, international economic law, and law and globalization.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Amanda Perry-Kessaris 2. Political Consumption: Possibilities and Challenges Sally Wheeler 3. Engendering Responsibility in Global Markets: Valuing the Women of Kenya's Agricultural Sector Ann Stewart 4. Access to Medicines Versus Protection of ‘Investments’ in Intellectual Property: Reconciliation through Interpretation? Valentina Sara Vadi 5. Development, Cultural Self-Determination and the World Trade Organization Fiona Macmillan 6. Liberalisation and Environmental legislation in India Kanchi Kohli and Manju Menon 7. Accountability Mechanisms of Multilateral Development Banks: Powers, Complications, Enhancements Suresh Nanwani 8. Community Participation in Biodiversity Conservation: Emerging Localities of Tension Andreas Kotsakis 9. Stock Exchanges in East Africa: Something Borrowed, Something New? June McLaughlin 10. Rule of Law Assistance Discourse and Practice: Japanese Inflections Veronica Taylor 11. Rule of Law or Washington Consensus: The Evolution of the World Bank’s Approach to Legal and Judicial Reform Julio Faundez 12. With Friends Like These: Can Multilateral Development Banks Promote Institutional Development to Strengthen the Rule of Law? Linn Hammergren 13. World Bank Rule of Law Assistance in Fragile States: The End of the Beginning or the Beginning of the End? Klaus Decker 14. Assessing the Socio-Cultural Viability of Rule of Law Policies in Post-Conflict Societies: Culture Clash Dzenan Sahovic 15. Land and Power in Afghanistan: In Pursuit of Law and Justice? Patrick McAuslan

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

213

Lawscape Nicole Graham, University of Technology Sydney, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47559-4; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Lawscape: Property, Environment, Law considers the ways in which property law transforms both natural environments and social economies. Addressing law's relationship to land and natural resources through its property regime, Lawscape engages the abstract philosophy of property law with the material environments of place. Whilst most accounts of land law have contributed cultural analyses of historical and political value predominantly through the lens of property rights, few have contributed analyses of the natural consequences of property law through the lens of property responsibilities. Lawscape does this by addressing the relationship between the commodification of land, instituted in and by property law, and ecological and economic histories. Its synthesis of property law and environmental law provides a genuinely transdisciplinary analysis of the particular cultural concepts and practices of land tenure that have been created, and exported, across the globe.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Concetpual Origins 3. Material Origins: Practices Nation 4. Material Origins: Empire 5. Conceptual Developments 6. Contemporary Practices

Legal Architecture Linda Mulcahy, Birkbeck, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57539-3; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Legal Architecture addresses how the environment in which the trial takes place can be seen as a physical expression of our relationship with ideals of justice; as it approaches the history of courthouse design as a reflection of the troubled history of notions of due process. In contrast to a vision of judicial space as neutral Linds Mulcahy argues that understanding the factors which determine the internal design of the courtroom are crucial to a broader and more nuanced understanding of judgecraft and law. Current ways of thinking about how and why the courtroom should be partitioned into zones, and movement within it restricted, have come about as a result of turf wars about who can legitimately participate in the legal arena and call the judiciary to account. The containment of the jury, the increasing amount of space allocated to advocates, and the creation of dedicated space for journalists all have complex histories which deserve to be charted and discussed. But the issues raised by this attention to the history of court architecture are far from being of only historical significance. Across jurisdictions, important questions are beginning to be asked about the internal configurations of the courthouse and courtroom, such as the positioning of the dock, and the extent to which they undermine the assumption of innocence. Recent debate has also focused on the extent to which the traditional design of the judicial dais reflects outmoded notions of justice. A number of other issues are also ripe for more debate, including the extent to which courthouses are designed in ways which reflect their professed status as public or democratic spaces, and the ways in which the use of technology in courts is leading to practices which render the trial an inauthentic legal ritual. This fascinating and original book will be of interest to socio-legal or critical scholars working in the field of legal systems, legal method, the sociology of law, law and geography, evidence and human rights, as well as to architects.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. An ideal type? Visions of the courthouse over time 3. Symbolic courts and the reification of law 4. Degradation and humiliation 5. Virtual courts and the dematerialisation of legal space 6. Symbolic courts in the modern era 7. Conclusion

Legal Theology Peter Fitzpatrick, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00 £22.50 $42.95; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56014-6; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56015-3; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Legal Theology provides a genealogy of modern law as a secular theology, calling into question the received ideas that modern law is radically different from its religious antecedents, and that modernity involved a repudiation of theological concepts. Peter Fitzpatrick charts the lineage of this secular theology through three ‘historicities’: the creation of the world’s imperium, of the modern worldsystem, in the sixteenth century; the time of revolutions of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries; and the high modernism of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Respectively condensed here in the writings of Vitoria, Hobbes and Nietzsche, Fitzpatrick

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

214 documents the substitution of a monotheistic God by successive articulations of a persistently 'deific' law. Legal Theology thus questions the story of secularism’s triumph, by eliciting the essentially religious force of modern law: a force that is, moreover, recognisable in secularism's contemporary imperial mission.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Imperium 3. Revolution 4. Modernism

Living Under Two Laws Sharon Hanson PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £26.00 $52.00; 216x138 mm; 250pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-904385-59-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A multi-disciplinary approach to the exploration of the relationship between various forms of religious law and the demands of secular/civil English Law. The text focuses upon people 'of faith' and the tensions and accommodation they experience as they try to meet the increasingly conflictual demands of religious law and secular law. The text seeks to be a work of both theory and praxis. As such the text will apply the theoretical concept of the sacred paradox of law to specific examples drawn from various areas of English law. (For example: Employment law, Trust Law, Criminal Law, European Law, Human Rights Law and Discrimination law). In the areas of law under consideration the text will single out new legislation. Legislation that is clearly aimed at issues of religion (e.g the new regulations against Religious discrimination within employment law) and general legislation that causes major difficulties to some people of a certain level of traditionalism with differing types of religious faith (notably the Gender re-assignment Bill 2004). It draws upon aspects of socio-legal studies, law, critical legal studies, philosophy (French, German, Arabic) sociology of religion (secularisation), social history (secularisation), sociology of language, Religious studies (secularisation, the study of New Religious Movements and the new age), Christian theology, Jewish studies, Islamic Studies, discourse analysis, hermeneutics, law, critical theory, and critical legal studies.

Mainstreaming Human Security in Peace Operations and Crisis Management Edited by Wolfgang Benedek, Matthias C. Kettemann and Markus Möstl, all of University of Graz, Austria PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57402-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The concept of human security is a new approach to security that focuses on the individual human being and provides policy alternatives to the traditional state-centred view, which considers the state to be the only and ultimate referent of security. Formally introduced into the United Nations system in 1994 the concept’s intellectual roots draw from international humanitarian law, human rights and human development, and since its introduction human security has been progressively integrated into the international security discourse. Mainstreaming Human Security in Peace Operations and Crisis Management: Policies, Problems , Potential paints a comprehensive picture of the relevance of the concept of human security in practice in a time of changing security paradigms and a challenging international environment. This volume looks at the practical implications of mainstreaming human security. It focuses on the potential, problems and policies of human security in peace operations and crisis management operations of the United Nations and of the European Union. Topics addressed by the contributors include mainstreaming human rights and human security in peace and crisis management in general and the role of human security in the EU’s Common Security and Defence Policy, security sector reform, restorative responses to human rights violations by peacemakers, human security in Serbia and in African peace operations as well as proposals for human security training. The contributions to the book focus equally on mainstreaming human security in the UN and in the EU context. The global issues discussed and conclusions drawn are of relevance for the future of security addressed by peace and crisis management operations all over the world.

CONTENTS Introduction Part I: Mainstreaming Human Security in Peace Operations and Crisis Management 1. Human Security Mainstreaming in United Nations and European Union Crisis Management Operations: Policies and Practice, Wolfgang Benedek 2. Neutrality and Impartiality in Implementing Human Rights: A Framework for Measuring Human Security, Andrej Zwitter Part II: Mainstreaming Human Security in United Nations Peace Operations 3. Institutionalizing Human Rights in UN Peacekeeping Operations: Critique of the Status Quo – and a Call for a Human Rights Law Post Bellum, Sylvia Maus 4. Restorative Responses to Human Rights Violations

by Peacekeepers: Enhancing Human Security? Paul Redekop 5. Human Security and Security Sector Reform: Conceptual Convergences in Theory and Practice, Fairlie Chappuis 6. Operationalization through Training: Human Security Training and Education for Peacebuilding, Arno Truger Part III: Mainstreaming Human Security in the European Security and Defence Policy 7.

The European Way of Promoting Human Security in Crisis Management Operations: A Critical Stocktaking, Markus Möstl 8. Six

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

215 Years of Mainstreaming Human Rights into ESDP: a Success Story? Hadewych Hazelzet 9. The Civilian Response Team of the European Union: a European Contribution to Operationalizing Human Security in International Crisis Management? Irene Kaufmann Part IV: Case Studies in Mainstreaming Human Security 10 Operationalizing Human Security in Societies in Transition: A Case Study of Serbia, Dragana Duli? 11. From State to Human Security: Institutionalizing and Operationalizing Human Security in Africa, Mohammud A. Hussien Part V: Conclusions A Roadmap towards Mainstreaming Human Security, Wolfgang Benedek, Matthias C. Kettemann and Markus Möstl

Marginalized Communities and Access to Justice Edited by Yash Ghai CBE and Jill Cottrell, both of University of Hong Kong PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £27.99 $53.95; 234x156 mm; 270pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58963-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Marginalized Communities and Access to Justice is a comparative study, by leading researchers in the field of law and justice, of the imperatives and constraints of access to justice among a number of marginalized communities. A central feature of the rule of law is the equality of all before the law. As part of this equality, all persons have the right to the protection of their rights by the state, particularly the judiciary. Therefore equal access to the courts and other organs of the state concerned with the enforcement of the law is central. These studies – undertaken by internationally renowned scholars and practitioners – examine the role of courts and similar bodies in administering the laws that pertain to the entitlements of marginalized communities, and address individuals' and organisations' access to institutions of justice: primarily, but not exclusively, courts. They raise broad questions about the commitment of the state to law and human rights as the principal framework for policy and executive authority, as well as the impetus to law reform through litigation. Offering insights into the difficulties of enforcing, and indeed of the will to enforce, the law, this book thus engages fundamental questions about value of engagement with the formal legal system for marginalized communities.

CONTENTS Preface 1. The Rule of Law and Access to Justice, Yash Ghai and Jill Cottrell 2. Access to Justice: Lessons from South Africa’s Land Reform Program, Geoff Budlender 3. Access to Land and Justice: Anatomy of a State without the Rule of Law, Yash Ghai 4. The Movement of Landless Rural Workers in Brazil and their Struggles for Access to Law and Justice, Boaventura de Sousa Santos and Flavia Carlet 5. Access to Justice and Indigenous Communities in Latin America, J. Faundez 6. Seeking justice for the historical claims of indigenous people in Aotearoa New Zealand, David V. Williams 7. Peasants’ struggle for land in China, Eva Pils 8. ‘Honor’ and Violence Against Women in Pakistan, Hannah Irfan 9. Peace Versus Justice in Northern Kenya: Dialectics of State and Community Laws, Tanja Chopra 10. The Opportunities and Challenges of Using Public Interest Litigation to Secure Access to Justice for Roma in Central and Eastern Europe, James A. Goldston and Mirna Adjami 11. Conclusions and Reflections, Yash Ghai and Jill Cottrell

Neoliberalism and the Law in Post Communist Transition Ioannis Glinavos, Kingston University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 220pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48654-5; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This work examines ideas about the role of law and legal reform in the creation of market economies, focusing on the process of post communist transition in Russia. Processes of transition in Russia were guided by a set of very specific neoliberal ideas about the nature of markets and capitalism, about the role of law and the primacy of the economic over the legal and political. These ideas however have come under fire as a result of the Russian experience of transition and the serious problems encountered by reforms.

This led to a revision of the original neoliberal ideas, not least concerning the role of law and its relationship to the economic and the political. The result has been the emergence of a much more complex body of ideas about the role law plays in economic transformation. This book aims to close a gap in the literature on post communist transition by offering a theoretical interpretation of Russia’s experience which makes transition reform models comparable to development reform models. Focusing on the role of law and the relationship of economic priorities to law reform, this work offers a critical evaluation of currently dominant theories of economic and legal reform put to use in varied transition and development scenarios. In looking at the ideas which directed and animated reform in Russia, an enquiry is thus made into the wider relationship between democracy, regulation and the market in contemporary capitalism. Neoliberalism and the Law in Post Communist Transition will equip scholars and students of development studies, law, political economy and international economics with a critical guide to transition focused on the often neglected legal aspect of the reforms.

CONTENTS 1. Markets and Law 2. The Command Economy 3. Instant Capitalism 4. Responses to Instant Capitalism 5. Second Stage Reforms 6.

Neoliberalism Revisited

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

216

On the Right of Exclusion: Law, Ethics and Immigration Policy Bas Schotel, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57537-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION On the Right of Exclusion: Law, Ethics and Immigration Policy addresses the current immigration laws and practices of Western states, and argues that if states cannot substantially justify the exclusion of an alien, the latter should be admitted. When states deny aliens admission to their territory, they do not substantially justify the exclusion vis-à-vis the excluded alien. Bas Schotel challenges this state of affairs and calls for a reversal of the default position in admission laws. The justification should, he argues, involve a serious accounting for the interests and reasons applicable to the alien seeking admission. Which is to say that the burden of proof should lie with the state. To build this argument, the book makes three types of argument: legal, ethical and institutional. The legal argument shows that there are no grounds in either sovereignty or the structure of law for current admission practices. Whilst this legal argument makes a claim about what the state cannot do, the ethical argument shows what the state ought to do: and there are strong ethical reasons why the exclusion of aliens is something that should be justified. Finally, the institutional argument explores how this new position might be implemented. An original, yet practical, undermining of the logic that underlies current immigration laws, On the Right of Exclusion: Law, Ethics and Immigration Policy will be essential reading for those with intellectual, political and policy interests in this area.

CONTENTS Introduction; Part I: The Legal Problem; Part II: The Legal Claim; Part III: The Ethical Claim; Part IV: The Institutional Claim

Patient Safety, Law Policy and Practice Edited by John Tingle, Nottingham Trent University, UK and Pippa Bark, University College London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 220pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55731-3; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Patient safety is an issue which in recent years has grown to prominence in a number of countries political and health service agendas.

The World Health Organisation has launched the World Alliance for Patient Safety which calculates that at any given time 1.4 million people worldwide are suffering from an infection acquired in a health facility. Millions of patients according to the Alliance endure prolonged ill-health disability and death caused by unreliable practices, services, and poor health care environments. This book explores the impact of legal systems on patient safety initiatives. It asks whether legal systems are being used in appropriate ways to support state and local managerial systems developing patient safety procedures, and what alternative approaches can and should be utilized? The chapters in this book explore the patient safety managerial structures that exist in countries where there is a developed patient safety infrastructure and culture. The legal structures of these countries are explored and related to major in-country patient safety issues such as consent to treatment protocols and guidelines, complaint handling, adverse incident reporting systems, civil litigation systems, in order to draw comparisons and conclusions on patient safety.

CONTENTS 1. The development of a patient safety policy agenda, John Tingle 2. Pre-Trial Clinical Negligence Issues, Charles Foster 3. The Tort of Negligence and Patient Safety, José Miola 4. Medical Ethics and Patient Safety, Nils Hoppe 5. The human element, Pippa Bark 6.

Economic Aspects of Hospital Patient Safety, Stephen Heasell 7. Patient safety in primary care, Keith Haynes 8. Patient safety in secondary care, Ash Samanta and Jo Samanta 9. Patient safety in mental health care, Eva Sundin, James Houston and Jamie Murphy 10. Patient Safety and Clinical risk issues in the Netherlands, Ingrid Christiaans-Dingelhoff and Johan Legemaate 11. Patient Safety in the EU, Jean McHale 12. Patient Safety and Clinical Risk Management in Germany, Marc Stauch 13. Patient Safety and Clinical Risk in Canada, Joan M Gilmour 14. Patient Safety and Clinical Risk in the USA, Ronni P. Solomon 15. Patient Safety and the Law: Conclusions, John Tingle and Pippa Bark 16. Responding to patient harm: Patient safety initiatives in Australia, Merrilyn Walton

Penal Power and Colonial Rule Mark Brown, Melbourne University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45213-7; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

217 Penal Power and Colonial Rule provides an account of the distinctive way in which criminology developed outside the metropolitan centre. Proposing a radical revision of the Foucauldian thesis that criminological knowledge emerged in the service of a new form of power – discipline – that had inserted itself into the very centre of punishment, it argues that Foucault’s alignment of sovereign, disciplinary and governmental power will, necessarily, need to be re-read and re-balanced to account for its operation in the colonial sphere. For, although the emergence of disciplinary power and its attendant forms of knowledge provided for key social transformations in the modernising metropolitan state, in colonial states power was almost exclusively sovereign and governmental (bio-political), with disciplinary strategies given only limited and equivocal attention. In order to develop this argument, and give an account of the emergence of colonial criminology as a form of knowledge distinct from its metropolitan counterpart, this book provides an analysis of the key British colonial experience in India from the 1820s to the early 1920s. This analysis documents a colonial criminology, that was tied in crucial ways to the demands of colonial governance, whose birth can be placed 50 years or more before Lombroso or Ferri stepped upon the European stage: a criminology that developed its own unique modes of analysis, representation and measurement independent of metropolitan theory and practice. Drawing on postcolonial theory to ask whether we can speak of ‘colonial modernity’ or ‘the colonial state’ in the singular, it is, moreover, through the critical engagement of this analysis with Foucault's theoretical and historical account of the development of criminology that Penal Power and Colonial Rule opens up a new, and unduly negleted area of research.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part 1: Framework 2. Power, Knowledge, Reason 3. Colonialism and Postcolonialism Part 2: Colonial Criminology 4.

Out of History: Ethnologies of Deviance 5. Locating in Space: Cartographies of Disorder 6. Perceiving the Other: Representations of Limit 7. Rational management: Architectures of Control Part 3: Power and Order 8. Colonial Power, Colonial Criminology 9.

Postcolonial Futures

Protecting the Property Rights of Refugees and Internally Displaced Persons Anneke Smit, University of Windsor, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; ; pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57960-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Protecting the Property Rights of Refugees and Internally Displaced Persons: Beyond Restitution pursues a rigorous examination of the various ways in which the protection of housing and property rights can contribute to durable solutions to displacement. The focus of most of the international community’s recent protection efforts has been on returning displaced persons to their homes following armed conflict. However, this focus on return has come at the expense of considering other possible durable solutions, particularly in cases of protracted displacement. In this book, Anneke Smit chronicles the failure of the international community’s attempts to promote widespread return through establishing housing and property restitution mechanisms. Drawing on a variety of displacement situations, and referring throughout to international human rights and refugee law, property law and theory, and sociological and anthropological literature on displacement and the meaning of ‘home’, she argues that a housing and property policy which supports integration in the communities where refugees and internally displaced persons find themselves after conflict is likely to represent a more effective and sustainable approach than a singular focus on return. Protecting the Property Rights of Refugees and Internally Displaced Persons is based on extensive academic research, including fieldwork, as well as more than a decade of the author's practical experience working on displacement issues with government, international organisation and NGO actors. It will be of considerable interest to those with academic and policy interests in the rights of refugees and displaced persons.

CONTENTS Introduction; Chapter 1: International law protections of housing and property rights for refugees and IDPs; Chapter 2: Modern experiences with the protection of housing and property rights following displacement; Chapter 3: The law, politics and sociology of durable solutions to displacement; Chapter 4: The success of restitution and failure of return; Chapter 5: Formalising property rights in temporary shelter space; Chapter 6: Regularising secondary occupation and the uses of compensation; Chapter 7: Creating new housing and property solutions; Conclusion

Public Interest Litigation in Asia Edited by Po Jen Yap, University of Hong Kong and Holning Lau, University of North Carolina, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57781-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited volume is a timely and important contribution to the growing field of public law discourse in Asia. Surveying many of the important jurisdictions in Asia including Mainland China, Hong Kong, Taiwan, Singapore, Malaysia, India, South Korea and the Philippines, the book addresses the recent developments and experiences in the field of public interest litigation. The book offers a comparative perspective on an important aspect of public law asking crucial questions about the role of the state and how private

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

218 citizens around Asia have increasingly used the forms, procedures and substance of public law to advance public and political aims.

As well as chapters analyzing specific jurisdictions in South Asia the volume also contains a number of pieces looking at important topical issues surrounding public interest litigation in the region. These chapters consider whether PIL is an appropriate tool for addressing the grievances of various groups including refugees, victims of human trafficking and those who have experienced sex and religious discrimination.

CONTENTS Part 1: Public Interest Litigation in Greater China, 1. Public Interest Litigation in Mainland China, Fu Hualing 2. Public Interest Litigation in Taiwan, Wen-Chen Chang 3. Public Interest Litigation in Hong Kong, Po Jen Yap Part 2: Public Interest Litigation in other Asian regions 4. Public Interest Litigation in Malaysia, Tey Tsun Hang 5.Public Interest Litigation in Singapore, Tey Tsun Hang, 6. Public Interest Litigation in India, Surya Deva 7. Public Interest Litigation in South Korea, Tae-Ung Baik 8. Public Interest Litigation in the Philippines, TBC Part 3: Topical Issues on Public Interest Litigations in Asia 9. Religious and Cultural Minorities in Asia, Puja Kapai 10. Refugee Rights Advocacy in Asia, Kelley Loper 11. Sexual Orientation and Gender Identity Rights Advocacy in Asia, Holning Lau 12. Women and Children’s Rights Advocacy in Asia

Public Sex and the Law Chris Ashford, University of Sunderland, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55287-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Public Sex and the Law: Silent Desire examines the current legal status and regulation of of public sex. Legal reform of sexuality appears to have focussed upon the lesbian, gay and bisexual communities. But whilst ‘gay’ sexual acts and identities have seen a raft of legal reform and international debate - most notably in North America - sexuality activists have been reluctant to defend public sex, let alone campaign for legal reform. The men and women who engage in public sex and their expression of desire remains silent not only in the somatic encounters that take place, but also within the policy making process. This book draws upon original and multidisciplinary research into the operation of the ‘public sex community’ to highlight the unacknowledged battle being waged between the law enforcement and the cruising, cottaging and dogging communities.

Punitive States Simon Hallsworth, London Metropolitan University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $170.00; 234x156 mm; 200pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-904385-91-2; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Are there distinctive postmodern forms of punishment? Is the contemporary 'punitive' turn in the United States a sign of things to come in Europe? Is modern rationality at odds with violence, or the means to applying violence systematically? Punitive States links together these key contemporary debates in criminology, penology and social theory and offers an alternative analysis inspired by Georges Bataille and Rene Girard. The book concludes with three dramatic case studies that relate the foregoing arguments to contemporary cultural forms and political decisions.

CONTENTS Introduction. Modernity, Violence and the Civilising Process. Modernity Reconsidered and Condemned. Reclaiming Modernity.

Rethinking Violence in Modernity. The Case for a Postmodern Penality. State Violence, Masculinity and the Flight from the Feminine. A Honeymoon in Auschwitz. Monstrous Doubles

Queer Theory: Law, Culture, Empire Edited by Robert Leckey and Kim Brooks, both of McGill University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57228-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Queer Theory: Law, Culture Empire uses queer theory to examine the complex interactions of law, culture, and empire. Building on recent work on empire, and taking contextual, socio-legal, comparative, and interdisciplinary approaches, it studies how activists and scholars engaged in queer theory projects can unwittingly advance imperial projects and how queer theory can itself show imperial ambitions. The authors – from five continents – delve into examples drawn from Bollywood cinema to California’s 2008 marriage

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

219 referendum. The chapters view a wide range of texts – from cultural productions to laws and judgments – as regulatory forces requiring scrutiny from outside Western, heterosexual privilege. This innovative collection goes beyond earlier queer legal work, engaging with recent developments, featuring case studies from India, South Africa, the US, Australasia, Eastern Europe, and embracing the frames offered by different disciplinary lenses. Queer Theory: Law, Culture Empire will be of particular interest to students and researchers in the fields of socio-legal studies, comparative law, law and gender/sexuality, and law and culture.

CONTENTS Chapter 1. Introduction, Robert Leckey and Kim Brooks Part 1: Constitution Chapter 2. Queer Theory, Neoliberalism and Urban Governance, Jon Binnie Chapter 3. Regulating ‘Perversion’: The Role of Tolerance in De-Radicalizing the Rights Claims of Sexual Subalterns, Ratna Kapur Part 2: Representation Chapter 4. Cinema of Queer Desires: Bombay Cinema and Emergent Sexualities, Shohini Ghosh Chapter 5. Post-Apartheid Fraternity, Post-Apartheid Democracy, Post-Apartheid Sexuality: Queer Reflections on Jane Alexander’s 'Butcher Boys' , Jaco Barnard-Naudé Chapter 6. The Judicial Virtue of Sexuality, Leslie J. Moran Part 3: Regulation Chapter 7. Reproductive Outsiders - The Perils and Disruptive Potential of Reproductive Coalitions, Jenni Millbank Chapter 8.

Queer/Religious Potentials in US Same-Sex Marriage Debates, Jeffrey A. Redding Chapter 9. What’s Queer about Polygamy?, Margaret Denike Part 4: Exclusion Chapter 10. An ‘Imperial’ Strategy? The Use of Comparative and International Law in Arguments about LGBT Rights, Nicholas Bamforth Chapter 11. Reproducing Empire in Same Sex Relationship Recognition and Immigration Law Reform, Nan Seuffert Chapter 12. UnSettled, Ruthann Robson

Reading Modern Law: Critical Methodologies and Sovereign Formations Edited by Ruth Buchanan, York University, Canada, Stewart Motha, University of Kent, UK and Sundhya Pahuja, University of Melbourne, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56854-8; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Reading Modern Law addresses the identification and elaboration of a critical methodology for reading and writing about law in modernity. While the force of law rests on determinate and localizable authorizations, as well as an expansive capacity to encompass what has not been pre-figured by an order of rules, the key question this dynamic of law raises is how legal forms might be deployed to confront and disrupt injustice. The urgency of this question must not eclipse the care its complexity demands. This book, whilst testifying to that complexity, offers a critical methodology for addressing its many challenges. The essays in this volume - all direct or oblique engagements with the work of Peter Fitzpatrick - chart a mode of resisting the imperialism of social scientific method, as much as geo-political empire. Their authors elaborate a critical and interdisciplinary treatment of law and modernity, and outline the pivotal role of sovereignty in contemporary formations of power, both national and international. From various overlapping vantage points, therefore, Reading Modern Law interrogates law’s relationship to power, as well as its relationship to the critical work of reading and writing about law in modernity.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Writing/Archive 1. Writing by Firelight: Constructing an Enduring Consciousness of Postcoloniality, Abdul Paliwala 2. Incitement to Justice: Fitzpatrick’s Citational Style as Counter-Imperialism, Marianne Constable 3. Reading Thomas Hobbes: Peter Fitzpatrick’s gentle deconstructionist style, James Martel 4. Turning things upside down: Luther and More on law, modernity and psychoanalysis, Judith Grbich Part 2: Sovereign Formations 5. Living in International Law, Fleur Johns 6.

Understanding the Relationship between the Political and the Economic at the Interface of the National and International: Fitzpatrick’s New Constitutionalism, Fiona Macmillan 7. Democracy’s Ruin, Paul Passavant 8. Beyond Discretion: Prosecution, the Logic of Sovereignty, and the Limits of Law, Austin Sarat 9. The Alleged pre-legal World, William E. Conklin Part 3: Re/Positionings: Beyond Modernism 10. A Unique Modernism, Patricia Tuitt 11. Fences, Carrol Clarkson 12. Totemic Imminanence: Peter Fitzpatrick’s Liminal Contemplation of Law: Time that is always gone stays still, A moment in this quiet room, Johan Van Der Walt 13.

Beginnings are always… , Denise Ferreira Da Silva 14. The Legal Imperative, Peter Fitzpatrick

Regulating the International Movement of Women Edited by Sharron Fitzgerald, University of Aberystwyth, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57949-0; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Regulating the International Movement of Women interrogates the complex relationship between the state and the normative regulation of women who cross national borders. Women’s vulnerability in transborder migration circuits is a widely debated topic across the social sciences and humanities, and there have been numerous studies of the processes that create the inequality that make female migrants, in particular, vulnerable. However, the contributors to this book stress the need for a more considered engagement

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

220 with those legal and political discourses that, claiming to protect women, also prohibit and normalise certain gendered identities.

Organised around the themes of race, citizenship and human trafficking, Regulating the International Movement of Women documents this relationship between state protection and state control, as it pursues a critical examination of the role that the notion of vulnerability plays in the regulation of migrant women.

CONTENTS Introduction: Identifying the Problematic: Why Does Vulnerability Matter?, Sharron A. FitzGerald (Editor); SECTION 1: RACE; Chapter 2: Babies, Berries and Bedrooms: Vulnerability and Citizenship among Female Labour Migrants from the Global South, Jenna L. Hennebry; Chapter 3: Crossing Borders, Inhabiting Spaces: The (In)credibility of Sexual Violence in Asylum Appeals, Helen Bailliot, Sharon Cowan & Vanessa Munro; Chapter 4: Race, Normativity and the Biopolitics of Vulnerable Labourers, Deborah Dixon; SECTION 2: CITIZENSHIP; Chapter 5: A Gender Perspective on the Return of ‘Illegal Immigrants’, Heli Askola; Chapter 6: (En)gendering Vulnerability in Borderlands: Femicide and Citizenship, Marie Woodling; Chapter 7: Orpah’s Daughters: Dangerous Vulnerability, Second Generations and the Nation State, Máiréad Enright; SECTION 3: HUMAN TRAFFICKING; Chapter 8: Moral and Legal Obligations of the State to Victims of Sex Trafficking: Vulnerability and Beyond, Tsachi Keren-Paz; Chapter 9: Human Trafficking, Prostitution And The Construction Of The New Female Victim, Jo Phoenix; Chapter 10: Adaptive Normative Spatiality: Sovereignty, Mobility and the Female Trafficked Migrant, Sharron A. FitzGerald

Resolving Disputes in the Asia-Pacific Region Shahla Ali, University of Hong Kong PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58372-5; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION How diverse cultures approach conflict in the context of the integration of global markets is a new arena for research and practice. To date, most of the research on international arbitration has focused exclusively on Western models of arbitration as practiced in Europe and North America. While such studies have accurately reflected the geographic foci of international arbitration practice in the late twentieth century, the number of international arbitrations conducted in East Asia has recently been growing steadily and on par with growth in Western regions. International Arbitration and Mediation in East Asia and the West presents empirical research about the attitudes and perceptions of over 115 arbitrators, judges, lawyers and members of the rapidly expanding arbitration community in China, Hong Kong, Korea, Japan, Singapore, and Malaysia as well as North America and Europe. The both covers both international commercial arbitration and "alternative" techniques such as mediation, providing an empirical analysis of how both types of dispute resolution are conducted in the East Asian context. The book examines the history and cultural context surrounding preferred methods of dispute resolution in the East Asian region and sheds light on the various approaches to international arbitration across these diverse regions. This book will be of great interest to students and scholars of international arbitration and dispute resolution, comparative and Asian law, as well as anyone dealing with potential conflict in international business relationships in East Asia.

CONTENTS Part 1: Background 1. Harmonization in international arbitration 2. Legal diversity in international arbitration 3. The development of institutional practices of arbitral institutions in East Asia and the West Part 2: Data Presentation 4. Taking a Seat at the Global Arbitration Table: Comparing the Advantages of International Arbitration 5. Roadblocks and Facilitators of Settlement: Examining Factors that Facilitate or Hinder Settlement in International Arbitration 6. The Role of The Arbitrator in Settling Disputes 7.

Conclusions

Rethinking Rape Law Edited by Clare McGlynn, Durham University, UK and Vanessa E. Munro, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 336pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55027-7; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Rethinking Rape Law: International and Comparative Perspectives provides a comprehensive and critical analysis of contemporary rape laws, across a range of jurisdictions. In a context in which there has been considerable legal reform of sexual offences, Rethinking Rape Law engages with developments spanning national, regional and international frameworks. It is only when we fully understand the differences between the law of rape in times of war and in times of peace, between common law and continental jurisdictions, between societies in transition and societies long inured to feminist activism, that we are able to understand and evaluate current practices, with a view to change and a better future for victims of sexual crimes. Written by leading authors from across the world, this is the first authoritative text on rape law that crosses jurisdictions, examines its conceptual and theoretical foundations, and sets the law in its policy context. It is destined to become the primary source for scholarly work and debate on sexual offences laws.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

221 1. Rethinking Rape Law: An Introduction, Clare McGlynn and Vanessa E. Munro Part I: Conceptual and Theoretical Engagements 2.

From Consent to Coercion: Evaluating International and Domestic Frameworks for the Criminalization of Rape, Vanessa E. Munro 3.

Rethinking the Criminal Law’s Response to Sexual Offences: On Theory and Context, Michelle Madden Dempsey and Jonathan Herring Part II: International and Regional Perspectives 4. International Criminal Law and Sexual Violence: An Overview, Alison Cole 5. Learning our Lessons? The Rwanda Tribunal Record on Prosecuting Rape, Doris Buss 6. The Force of Shame, Karen Engle and Annelise Lottman 7. Everyday Rape: International Human Rights Law and Violence Against Women in Peacetime, Alice Edwards 8.Defining Rape under the European Convention on Human Rights: Torture, Consent and Equality, Patricia Londono 9.

Rape Law Reform in Africa: More of the Same or New Opportunities?, Heléne Combrinck Part III: National Perspectives 10.

Feminist Activism and Rape Law Reform in England and Wales: A Sisyphean Struggle?, Clare McGlynn 11. All Change or Business as Usual? Reforming the Law of Rape in Scotland, Sharon Cowan 12. Rethinking Croatian Rape Laws: Force, Consent and the ‘Contribution of the Victim’, Ivana Rada?i? and Ksenija Turkovi? 13. Rape in Italian Law: Towards The Recognition of Sexual Autonomy, Rachel Fenton 14. Rethinking Rape Law in Sweden: Coercion, Consent or Non-Voluntariness?, Monica Burman 15.

Canadian Sexual Assault Law: Neoliberalism and the Erosion of Feminist-Inspired Law Reforms, Lise Gotell 16. Rape, Law and American Society, Donald A. Dripps 17. Criminal Law and the Reformation of Rape in Australia, Peter D. Rush 18. Reforming the Law of Rape in South Africa, Shereen Mills Part IV: New Agendas and Directions 19. Independent Legal Representation for Complainants in Rape Trials, Fiona Raitt 20. Jury Deliberation and Complainant Credibility in Rape Trials, Louise Ellison and Vanessa E. Munro 21. The Mythology of Male Rape: Social Attitudes and Law Enforcement, Phil Rumney and Natalia Hanley 22.

The Cultural Silence of Rape in UK South Asian Communities, Aisha Gill 23. Sexual Assault of Women with Mental Disabilities: A Canadian Perspective, Janine Benedet and Isabel Grant

Rights, Gender and Family Law Edited by Julie Wallbank, University of Leeds, UK, Shazia Choudhry, Queen Mary University of London, UK and Jonathan Herring, University of Oxford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £27.99 $53.95; 234x156 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58958-1; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There has been a widespread resurgence of rights talk in social and legal discourses pertaining to the regulation of family life, as well as an increase in the use of rights in family law cases, in the UK, the US, Canada and Australia. Rights, Gender and Family Law addresses the implications of these developments - and, in particular, the impact of rights-based approaches upon the idea of welfare and its practical application. There are now many areas of family law in which rights and welfare based approaches have been forced together. But whilst, to many, they are premised upon different ethics - respectively, of justice and of care - for others, they can nevertheless be reconciled. In this respect, a central concern is the 'gender-blind' character of rights-based approaches, and the ontological and practical consequences of their employment in the gendered context of the family. Rights, Gender and Family Law explores the tensions between rights-based and welfare-based approaches: explaining their differences and connections; considering whether, if at all, they are reconcilable; and addressing the extent to which they can advantage or disadvantage the interests of women, children and men. It may be that rights-based discourses will dominate family law, at least in the way that social policy and legislation respond to calls of equality of rights between mothers and fathers. This collection, however, argues that rights cannot be given centrestage without thinking through the ramifications for gendered power-relations, and the welfare of children. It will be of interest to researchers and scholars working in the fields of family law, gender studies and social welfare.

CONTENTS 1. Welfare, Rights, Care and Gender in Family Law, Shazia Choudhry, Jonathan Herring and Julie Wallbank 2. Gender, Rights, Responsibilities and Social Policy, Brid Featherstone 3. Child Protection, Gender and Rights, Felicity Kaganas 4. Rights and Responsibility: Girls and Boys Who Behave Badly, Christine Piper 5. (En)Gendering The Fusion Of Rights and Responsibilities in the Law of Contact, Julie Wallbank 6. Fatherhood, Law and Fathers’ Rights: Rethinking the Relationship Between Gender and Welfare, Richard Collier 7. Mandatory Prosecution and Arrest as a Form of Compliance with Due Diligence Duties in Domestic Violence - The Gender Implications, Shazia Choudhry 8. The Limitations of Equality Discourses on the Contours of Intimate Obligations, Lisa Glennon 9. Public Norms and Private Lives: Rights, Fairness and Family Law, Alison Diduck 10. The Identification of ‘Parents’ and ‘Siblings’: New Possibilities under the Reformed Human Fertilisation and Embryology Act, Caroline Jones 11. Children with Exceptional Needs: Welfare, Rights and Caring Responsibilities, Joanna Bridgeman 12. Relational Autonomy and Family Law, Jonathan Herring 13. Concluding Thoughts: The Enduring Chaos of Family Law, Helen Rhodes

The Right to Silence Hannah Quirk, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54771-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

222 Within an international context in which the right to silence has long been regarded as sacrosanct, this book provides the first comprehensive, empirically-based analysis of the effects of curtailing the right to silence. The right to silence has served as the practical expression of the principles that an individual was to be considered innocent until proven guilty, and that it was for the prosecution to establish guilt. In 1791, the Fifth Amendment to the US Constitution proclaimed that none ‘shall be compelled in any criminal case to be a witness against himself’. In more recent times, the privilege against self-incrimination has been a founding principle for the International Criminal Court, the new South African constitution and the Ad Hoc International Criminal Tribunals for Rwanda and the former Yugoslavia. Despite this pedigree, over the past thirty years when governments have felt under pressure to combat crime or terrorism, the right to silence has been reconsidered, (as in Australia) curtailed (in most of the United Kingdom), or circumvented (by the creation of the military tribunals to try the Guantánamo detainees). The analysis here focuses upon the effects of the Criminal Justice and Public Order Act 1994 in England and Wales. There, curtailing the right to silence was advocated in terms of ‘common sense’ policy making and was achieved by an eclectic borrowing of concepts and policies from other jurisdictions. The implications of curtailing this right are here explored in detail with reference to the UK, but within a comparative context that examines how different ‘types’ of legal system regard the right to silence and the effects of constitutional protection.

CONTENTS Part 1 – Principles versus Pragmatism; A ‘benchmark of justice?’; A Crime Control Target; Part 2: The Right to Silence in Practice; The Criminal Justice and Public Order Act 1994; The Right to Silence and Cop Culture; The Right to Silence and the Realities of Legal Representation; The Right to Silence and the Courts; Part 3: Policy Making; Criminal Justice and ‘Common Sense’ Policy Making; Conclusions – The Right to Silence: Why the Debate must Continue

Risk, Power and the State Magnus Hörnqvist, Stockholm University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $110.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54768-0; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Risk, Power and the State: After Foucault addresses how power is exercised in and by contemporary state organisations. Through a detailed analysis of programmatic attempts to shape behaviour linked to considerations of risk, this book pursues the argument that, whilst Foucault is useful for understanding power, the Foucauldian tradition - with its strands of discourse analysis, of governmentality studies, or of radical Deleuzian critique - suffers from a lack of clarification on key conceptual issues. Oriented around four case studies, the architecture of the book devolves upon the distinction between productive and repressive power. The first two studies focus on productive power: the management of long-term unemployment in the public employment service and cognitivebehavioural interventions in the prison service. Two further studies concern repressive interventions: the conditions of incarceration in the prison service and the activity of the customs service. These studies reveal that power, as conceptualised within the Foucauldian tradition, must be modified. A more complex notion of productive power is needed, which covers interventions that appeal to desires, and which govern both at a distance and at close range. Additionally, the simplistic paradigm of repressive power is called into question by the need to consider the organising role of norms and techniques that circumvent agency. Finally, it is argued, Foucault's concept of strategies - which accounts for the thick web of administrative directives, organisational routines, and techniques that simultaneously shape the behaviour of targeted individuals and members of the organisation - requires an organisational dimension that is often neglected in the Foucauldian tradition.

CONTENTS Introduction; Activation guaranteed: Individualizing the pressure to perform; Subjected freedom: The productivity of power; Institutional order: Guiding repression through risk; Generalized control: Negotiating contradictory expectations through risk; Conclusions

The Scene of Violence Alison Young, Melbourne University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £27.50 $53.95; 234x156 mm; 200pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58508-8; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In the contemporary fascination with images of crime, violence gets under our skin and keeps us enthralled. The Scene of Violence explores the spectator’s encounter with the cinematic scene of violence – rape and revenge, homicide and serial killing, torture and terrorism. Providing a detailed reading of both classical and contemporary films – for example, Kill Bill, Blue Velvet, Reservoir Dogs, The Matrix, Psycho, The Accused, Elephant, Seven, Thelma & Louise, United 93, Zodiac, and No Country for Old Men – Alison Young returns the affective processes of the cinematic image to the study of law, crime and violence. Engaging with legal theory, cultural criminology and film studies, the book unfolds both our attachment to the authority of law and our identification with the illicit. Its original contribution is to bring together the cultural fascination of crime with a nuanced account of what it means to watch cinema. The Scene of Violence shows how the spectator is bound by the laws of film to the judgment of the crime-image.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

223 CONTENTS 1. The Crime-Image 2. Judging the Affect of Screen Violence 3. "Don’t You Fucking Look At Me": Sexual Injury, Vision and Cinematic Revenge 4. The Serial Killer’s Accomplice 5. The Cinema of Disaster: Screening 9/11 6. No End to Violence?

Serial Killers Francesca Biagi-Chai PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56112-9; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Francesca Biagi-Chai’s book - a translation from the French of Le Cas Landru - tackles the issue of criminal responsibility in the case of serial killers, and other 'mad' people who are nonetheless deemed to be answerable before the law in most jurisdictions. The author, a Lacanian psychoanalyst and senior psychiatrist in France, with extensive experience working in institutional settings, analyses the logic informing the crimes of famous serial killers. Addressing the Landru case (which was the inspiration for Chaplin's Monsieur Verdoux), as well as those of Pierre Riviere, Donato Bilancia, Harold Shipman and others such as Jeffrey Dahmer and Ted Bundy, Biagi-Chai casts light on the confusion that pervades forensic psychiatry and criminal law as to the distinction between mental illness and ‘madness’. Finally, she elaborates the consequences of her argument in a sustained critique of the insanity defence as it currently operates in France and elsewhere. The book includes a Preface by the renowned psychoanalyst, Jacques-Alain Miller. It also includes an introduction by the translators on the question of insanity before the law in the US and in the UK, which considers the pertinence of Biagi-Chai’s argument for forensic psychiatry, for criminal law, and for the increasing contemporary focus on the assessment of dangerousness and risk-management strategies in crime control practices.

Sexuality and the Politics of Rights in Southern Africa Oliver Phillips, University of Westminster, London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 250pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-904385-18-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Exploring sexuality and what constitutes appropriate sexual behaviours in South Africa and Zimbabwe, this book views sexuality as an instrument of social regulation and traces the historical continuities between colonialism and current debates. The distinctly contrary ways that both countries have approached sexuality epitomize either the intransigence of the ‘traditional’ or the promise of ‘liberation’. Phillips analyzes their differences and similarities, including the contrasting role of the constitution as a platform for rights in each country, their different engagement with customary law and legal subjectivity within the context of a range of concerns, including: gender equality expressions of cultural authenticity rights in local attempts to define the post-colonial nation. A powerful look at the key elements of gender relations, post-colonial nationhood and sexual rights, this book is an invaluable legal reference resource for all those interested in the interface between sexuality, gender and the law.

CONTENTS Introduction. The Growth of the State and the Development of 'Sexuality'. Sex Panics and the Nation. HIV/AIDS, National Policies and the Troubles of Sex. Intimate Challenges, Public Containment. Conclusion

Sovereignty, Human Rights and Global Order Sam Adelman, University of Warwick, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58119-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Sovereignty, Human Rights and Global Order addresses the question of whether sovereignty is an instrument of, or an impediment to, cosmopolitan visions of global governance.

CONTENTS Chapter 1: The Unsolved Problem of Modernity; Part I: "Take life or let live"; Chapter 2: The Topology of Sovereignty; Chapter 3: Sovereignty Lurking; Chapter 4: The Unexceptional Exception; Part II: "Make live or let die"; Chapter 5: Alternative Paradigms of Good and Evil? - Human Rights and Sovereignty; Chapter 6: Sovereignty Redeemed? The Power to ‘Make Live’; Chapter 7: The End of Sovereignty?

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

224

The Spatial, the Legal and the Pragmatics of World-Making David Delaney, Amherst College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46319-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Critical legal geography is practised by an increasing number of scholars in various disciplines, but it has not had the benefit of an overarching theoretical framework that might overcome its currently rather ad hoc character. The Spatial, the Legal and the Pragmatics of World-Making remedies this situation. Presenting a balanced convergence of contemporary socio-legal and critical geographic scholarship, David Delaney offers a ground-breaking contribution to the fast growing field of legal geography. Drawing on strands of critical social studies that inform both of these areas, this book has three primary components. First, it introduces a framework of interpretation and analysis centred on the productive neologisms ‘nomosphere’ and ‘nomoscapes.’ Nomosphere refers to the cultural-material environs that are constituted by the reciprocal materialization of ‘the legal,’ and the legal signification of the ‘socio-spatial'. Nomoscapes are the spatio-legal expression and the socio-material realization of ideologies, values, pervasive power orders and social projects. They are extensive ensembles of legal spaces within and through which lives are lived and, here, these neologisms are related to the more familiar notions of governmentality and performativity. Second, these neologisms are explored and applied through a series of illustrations and extensive case studies. Demonstrating their utility for scholars and students in relevant disciplines, these ‘empirical’ studies concern: the public and the private; property and land tenure; governance; the domestic and the international; and legal-spatial confinements and containments. Third, these studies contribute to an ongoing theorization of the experiential, situated pragmatics of ‘world-making'. The role of nomospheric projects and counter-projects, techniques and operations is therefore emphasized. Much of what is experientially significant about how the world is as it is and what it’s like to be in the world directly implicates the dynamic interplay of space, law, meaning and power. The Spatial, the Legal and the Pragmatics of WorldMaking provides the interpretive resources necessary for discerning and understanding the practices and projects involved in this interplay.

CONTENTS 1. Welcome to the Nomosphere 2. Nomospheric Situations 3. Nomospheric Settings 4. Nomoscapes 5. Nomospheric Projects 6.

Nomospheric Techniques

Strategic Visions for Human Rights Edited by Geoff Gilbert, Francoise Hampson and Clara Sandoval, all of University of Essex, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57988-9; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Strategic Visions for Human Rights takes a multi-disciplinary approach to future directions for human rights. It looks beyond what international human rights treaties have so far established and considers the context in which rights in the twenty-first century might develop to meet needs. The book examines how international law might be utilized to protect groups rather than just individual members of the group and it also calls into question the liberal positivist approach to international law that provides the framework for human rights norms. The book is written and published in honour of Professor Kevin Boyle. It celebrates his long career in human rights law both as an academic and a practising barrister. Professor Boyle has taken numerous cases on human rights issues to UK Courts and to the European Court of Human Rights in Strasbourg and has long been involved in human rights aspects of the peace process in Northern Ireland. He has published widely on human rights issues, focusing on freedom of expression and religion and nondiscrimination. The contributors to this volume are well-known academics in the field of human rights and include Francesca Klug, Conor Gearty, David Beetham and Asbjorn Eide. Amongst some of the issues addressed in the book are the future of the European Court of Human Rights, the role of academics play in engendering transition to post-conflict democratic states, and human rights and religious pluralism.

CONTENTS 1. Law and Human Rights rather than International Human Rights Law, Geoff Gilbert 2. Legal Change in International Human Rights Law, Clara Sandoval 3. South/South Discourse, Eugenio De Aragao 4. Universality, Historical Specificity and Cultural Difference in Human Rights, David Beetham 5. Political Science and Human Rights, Todd Landman 6. Freedom of Expression, Asbjorn Eide 7.

Rights and Righteousness: Religious Pluralism and Human Rights: Problems and Opportunities, Francesca Klug 8. Religious Minorities, John Packer 9. Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, Cees Flinterman 10. The Right to Education, Corinne Lennox 11.

Conscientious Objection to Military Service, Rachel Brett and Laurel Townhead 12. Counter-Terrorism and Human Rights, Richard Maiman 13. Northern Ireland and Human Rights, Conor Gearty 14.The role of academics in the peace process, Tom Hadden 15. The ECHR and Terrorism, Aisling Reidy 16. The Future of the European Court of Human Rights, Françoise Hampson

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

225

Surveillance and Democracy Edited by Kevin D. Haggerty, University of Alberta, Canada and Minas Samatas, University of Crete, Greece PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00 £28.99 $55.95; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47239-5; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47240-1; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This collection represents the first sustained attempt to grapple with the complex and often paradoxical relationships between surveillance and democracy. Is surveillance a barrier to democratic processes, or might it be a necessary component of democracy?

How has the legacy of post 9/11 surveillance developments shaped democratic processes? As surveillance measures are increasingly justified in terms of national security, is there the prospect that a shadow "security state" will emerge? How might new surveillance measures alter the conceptions of citizens and citizenship which are at the heart of democracy? How might new communication and surveillance systems extend (or limit) the prospects for meaningful public activism? Surveillance has become central to human organizational and epistemological endeavours and is a cornerstone of governmental practices in assorted institutional realms. This social transformation towards expanded, intensified and integrated surveillance has produced many consequences. It has also given rise to an increased anxiety about the implications of surveillance for democratic processes; thus raising a series of questions - about what surveillance means, and might mean, for civil liberties, political processes, public discourse, state coercion and public consent that the leading surveillance scholars gathered here address.

CONTENTS 1. Surveillance and Democracy: An Unsettled Relationship Kevin D. Haggerty and Minas Samatas Section 1: Theorizing Surveillance and Democracy 2.Surveillance and Transparency as Sociotechnical Systems of Accountability Deborah Johnson and Kent Wayland 3.

Identification, Surveillance and Democracy David Lyon 4. Democracy and Its Visibilities Andrea Mubi Brighenti 5. Periopticon: Control Beyond Freedom and Coercion - and Two Possible Advancements in the Social Sciences Michalis Lianos Section 2: Surveillance Policies and Practices of Democratic Governance 6. Surveillance as Governance: Social Inequality and the Pursuit of Democratic Surveillance Torin Monihan 7. Democracy, Surveillance and ‘Knowing What’s Good for You’: The Private Sector Origins of Profiling and the Birth of ‘Citizen Relationship Management Kirstie Ball, Elizabeth Daniel, Sally Dibb and Maureen Meadows 8. The Impact of Communications Data Retention on Fundamental Rights and Democracy: The case of the EU Data Retention Directive Lilian Mitrou 9. ‘Full Spectrum Dominance’ as European Union security policy: On the trail of the ‘NeoConOpticon’ Ben Hayes Section 3: Case Studies in the Dynamics of Surveillance and Democracy 10. A Trans-systemic Surveillance: The Legacy of Communist Surveillance in the Digital Age Maria Los 11. Balancing Public Safety and Security Demands with Civil Liberties in a New Constitutional Democracy: The Case of Post-1994 South Africa and the Growth of Residential Security and Surveillance Measures Anthony Minnaar 12. The Greek Olympic Phone Tappings Scandal: A Defenceless State and a Weak Democracy Minas Samatas 13. Surveillance and Democracy in the Digital Enclosure Jennifer R. Whitson

Testifying to Trauma Kirsten Campbell, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK, Hannah Starman, Institute for Ethnic Studies, Slovenia and Sari Wastell, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00 £21.99 $41.95; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45947-1; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56020-7; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION How do genocide and war crimes survivors become legal witnesses? Some fifty years after the criminal prosecutions of the Nuremberg and Tokyo Tribunals of World War Two, we have yet to fully understand how law codifies the traumas of genocides and war crimes. This problem has taken on a new importance following the establishment of the international criminal tribunals in the 1990s, as well as an increasing concern with the appropriate legal resolution of war crimes in post-conflict societies such as Iraq.

Against this background, Testifying to Trauma examines the processes by which victims’ narratives of trauma become legal testimony: investigating how the transformation of individual trauma into a codified collective violation has ramifications for individual, collective and legal identities. More specifically, this book addresses the historical and political contexts of the current legal codifications of trauma. And, through detailed attention to the various renderings of time and memory which underwrite the dissonance between personal experiences and legal narratives of trauma, its authors provide an original analysis and understanding of the technologies through which trauma is codified in international law.

CONTENTS 1. Genealogies of Codification: The Histories and Politics of the Narration of Trauma 2. Trials of History/Trials in History: Legal Institutions Post-Eichmann 3. Jurisprudence and the Narration of Trauma Post-Eichmann 4. Pre-Trial Procedures and the Production of the ‘Victim-Witness’ 5. Trial Practices and the Shaping of Legal Narratives of Trauma 6. In the Time(s) of Law 7. Before and After Law 8. Conclusions

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

226

Tomorrow's Torts Penelope Watson, Macquarie University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 750pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-876905-37-8; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION With a focus strongly on invasion of dignitary interests and/or rights, the book stresses the dynamic nature of tort law and its capacity to respond to social change in a variety of ways, and invites students to consider the mechanisms by which this may happen, including interaction with legislation and international conventions. Tomorrow’s Torts aims to: give students an opportunity to explore topics which are not covered in basic Torts courses, such as defamation take an in depth look at important areas like negligence in specific contexts, such as medical malpractice examine emerging torts or novel applications for existing torts, such as in the areas of privacy, sexual injury including harassment and stalking explore toxic torts including tobacco litigation and various pharmaceutical/ therapeutic products which have been the subject of mass tort claims or class actions Students are encouraged to adopt a creative, comparative and critical perspective, and to think about how the law of torts might look in the future, as well as to master the current law. Tomorrow’s Torts is a collection of commentary and materials suitable for use in upper level undergraduate or postgraduate Law courses, drawn from Canada, the UK, New Zealand, USA, Australia and other jurisdictions.

CONTENTS 1. Elements of defamation, freedom of speech 2. Defences to defamation, remedies 3. Human rights and tort: Privacy 4. Privacy (continued) 5. Sexual injury: harassment, nuisance, Wilkinson v Downton 6. Sexual injury: abuse/incest, battery, fiduciary duty, liability of 3 rd parties 7. Schools/Workplaces: Negligence - Bullying 8. Schools: Negligence - Educational malpractice 9. Wrongful life, wrongful birth, duties to unborn 10. Toxic torts: therapeutic goods. DES cases, prenatal and preconception injury, novel theories of causation 11. Toxic torts: consumer goods. Tobacco litigation, addiction and volenti, ethical issues for lawyers 12: Toxic torts: Mass tort litigation/class actions, ethical issues, future trends

Transcending the Boundaries of Law Edited by Martha Albertson Fineman, Emory University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00 £27.50 $53.95; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48138-0; PB: www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48140-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Transcending the Boundaries of Law brings together three generations of the most respected feminist legal theorists in order to assess the past, the present and the future of feminist legal thought in the Law and Society tradition. It follows the publication - based on a series of workshops at the University of Wisconsin in 1984 - of the very first anthology in feminist legal theory, At the Boundaries of Law (Routledge, 1991). Bringing together some of the original contributors to that volume, as well as the newest generation of critical gender scholars, this anthology not only provides a "retrospective" on over 25 years of theoretical engagement and evolution in regard to gender and law scholarship; it also charts a course for its future. The anthology is organized according to a three-generation schema.

First is the transitional generation of feminist legal scholars: those who moved us from women-in-law to feminist legal theory.

Second, is the work of the students who followed in their wake. Their path was "easier", in that they had both feminist material and mentors to facilitate their scholarly projects, and they raised important intersectional ideas and concepts that complicated the very concept of gender. The third section contains new theories and theorists, sometimes challenging the "traditional" feminist model with more critical perspectives on gender theory and addressing the tensions that have emerged between queer and feminist theories, as well as the increasingly obvious inadequacies of identity-based analyses. Transcending the Boundaries of Law is a ground-breaking collection that will be central to the further development of feminism and related critical theories.

Uncertainty in International Law Jörg Kammerhofer, Friedrich Alexander University Erlangen-Nuremberg, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57784-7; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Re-engaging with the Pure Theory of Law developed by Hans Kelsen and the other members of the Viennese School of Jurisprudence, this book looks at the causes and manifestations of uncertainty in international law. It considers both epistemological uncertainty as to whether we can accurately perceive norms in international law, and ontological problems which occur inter alia where two or more norms conflict. The book looks at these issues of uncertainty in relation to the foundational doctrines of public international law, including the law of self-defence under the United Nations Charter, customary international law, and the interpretation of treaties. In viewing international law through the lens of Kelsen’s theory Jörg Kammerhofer demonstrates the importance of the theoretical

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

227 dimension for the study of international law and offers a critique of the recent trend towards pragmatism and eclecticism in international legal scholarship. The unique aspect of the monograph is that it is the only book to apply the Pure Theory of Law as theoretical approach to international law, rather than simply being a piece of intellectual history describing it. This book will of great interest to students and scholars of public international law, legal theory and jurisprudence.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Self-defence under the United Nations Charter 3. Customary international law 4. Interpretation and modification 5.

Conflict of norms in international law 6. A constitution for international law 7. The inevitable Grundnorm

Understanding the Islamic Veiling Controversy Anastasia Vakulenko, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56550-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Understanding the Islamic Veiling Controversy provides a sophisticated analysis of relevant legislation and case law in order to examine the assumptions and limits of the debates surrounding the issue of Islamic veiling. For some, Islamic veiling indicates a lack of autonomy, the oppression of women and the threat of Islamic radicalism to western secular values; for others, it suggests a positive autonomous choice and a legitimate exercise of one’s freedom of religion - a much treasured right in democratic societies. Across seemingly diverse legal and political traditions, however, a set of discursive frameworks - the preoccupation with autonomy and choice; the imperative of gender equality; and a particular secular understanding of religion and religious subjectivity - shape the positions of both proponents and opponents of various restrictions on Islamic veiling. Rather than take a position on one or the other side of the debate, this book explores and challenges these frameworks. And, in so doing, it brings a consistent and sophisticated theoretical outlook to a comprehensive consideration of Islamic veiling controversies, as they have arisen around the world.

CONTENTS Chapter I: Islamic veiling in focus; Chapter II: Islamic veiling: Legal developments; Chapter III: Autonomy and choice; Chapter IV: Gender equality; Chapter V: Religion and secularism

Universal Jurisdiction for Humanitarian Crimes Laurie King-Irani, University of Victoria, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $190.00 £27.50 $55.95; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-84568-096-1; PB: www.routledge.com/978-1-904385-46-2; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Exploring the question 'does international justice have a local address?', this topical and thought-provoking book is an essential addition to the bookshelves of all those interested in international law, human rights and the law and politics surrounding crimes against humanity. Through a detailed analysis of a case lodged by Lebanese and Palestinian massacre survivors in a Belgian court under the principle of universal jurisdiction for war crimes and crimes against humanity, the author has put together an ethnographic account of the emerging architecture of international justice. Looking at prosecuting international crimes through the principle of Universal Jurisdiction, this book covers a range of topics, including judicial practice and processes and political issues and influences.

An outstanding engagement with the theory and practice of universal justice, this timely book is a must read.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Principle of Universal Jurisdiction: Theoretical perspectives, chief debates, and evolving jurisprudence 3.

Exceptions to the Rule of Law? Impunity for war crimes in the Middle East 3. Political repercussions and ramifications of the Sabra and Shatila case in Belgium 4. Principles and Practice Thwarted 5. Principled politics and the emerging architecture of international justice

Women, Judging and the Judiciary Erika Rackley, Durham University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54861-8; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

228 Women, Judging and the Judiciary explores continuing debates about gender representation in the judiciary and, more specifically, the importance of judicial diversity, in order to provide a fresh look at the role of the (woman) judge and the process of judging. There has been considerable debate and policy development in recent years around the issue of judicial diversity and, in particular, the need to appoint more women to the judiciary. Nevertheless, progress to date has been painfully slow, and the number of women judges, especially at senior levels, remains minuscule. This book builds on prevalent concerns with increasing judicial diversity, with enhancing the position of various underrepresented groups within the judiciary, and with constitutional reform more generally, to provide a new analysis of the assumptions which underpin, and constrain, current debates about how to achieve these aims. Providing the first critical theoretical engagement with the concepts of ‘diversity’ and ‘difference’ in the context of adjudication, Erika Rackley considers the extent to which prevailing images of the judge are enmeshed in notions of sameness and uniformity: images which are so familiar and two-dimensional that their grip on our imaginative and cognitive processes are routinely overlooked. Failing to confront such instinctive images of the judge and of judging, our understandings and interpretations are as much derived from such preconceptions as they are from what is conventionally considered to be rational thought. And, whilst deploying literary examples and techniques as a means of identifying and disrupting the hold that particular images and narratives of the judge and judging have on us, Women, Judges and the Judiciary not only explains why attempts at judicial inclusiveness and difference fail, it also pursues a deeper understanding of what judicial diversity might mean.

CONTENTS 1. Feminism, judicial diversity and the legal imagination; 2. Representations of the Woman Judge: 3. Introducing Difference; 4.

Exorcising Difference and Defining Diversity; 5. Women, Judging and Diversity

Heroism and the Supernatural in the African Epic African Studies

Mariam Konaté Deme, Western Michigan University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 172pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87492-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84620-9; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There exists a strong tendency within Western literary criticism to either deny the existence of epics in Africa or to see African literatures as exotic copies of European originals. In both cases, Western criticism has largely failed to acknowledge the distinctiveness of African literary aesthetics. This book revises traditional literary canons in examining the social, cultural and emotional specificity of African epics. Mariam Konate Deme highlights the distinguishing features that characterize the African epic, emphasizing the significance of the fantastic and its use as an essential element in the dramatic structure of African epics. As Deme notes, the fantastic can be fully appreciated only against the cosmological background of the societies that produce those heroic tales.

This book not only contributes to the scholarship on African oral literature, but also adds reshapes our understanding of heroic literature in general.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Role and Function of the Supernatural 3. The Supernatural in African Epics 4. The Hero’s Use of Supernatural Devices 5. The Hero’s Excesses 6. Women as the Bearers of Supernatural Powers in the African Epic 7. Summary, Conclusion and Recommendations for Further Study

The Children's Book Business Children's Literature and Culture

Lissa Paul, Brock University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-93789-4; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Children's Book Business is an exploration of how children's literature and children's literature publishing has been shaped by the relationship between what the author calls "status quo" books - didactic ones that support a perceived social order and often deny truths of the real, adult world - and what she calls "guerilla" books - those that undermine or question the values of the social order and actually encourage negotiation with the real world, albeit in a coded, literary way. The book explains how testing, which is more pervasive than ever, champions basic skills over appreciation of literary merit, and creates a great demand for suitably neutral (bland, inoffensive) texts that are anything but worthwhile in terms of the kind of intellectual and emotional pleasure that provides the motivation for being literate.

Humor in Contemporary Junior Literature Children's Literature and Culture

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

229 Julie Cross, Roehampton University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88267-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this new book, Julie Cross examines the intricacies of textual humor in contemporary junior literature, using the tools of literary criticism and humor theory. Cross investigates the dialectical paradoxes of humor and debunks the common belief in oppositional binaries of ‘simple’ versus ‘complex’ humor. The varied combinations of so-called high and low forms of humor within junior texts for young readers, who are at such a crucial stage of their reading and social development, provide a valuable commentary upon the culture and values of contemporary western society, making the book of considerable interest to scholars of both children’s literature and childhood studies. Cross explores the ways in which the changing content, forms and functions of the many varied combinations of humor in junior texts, including the Lemony Snickett series, reveal societal attitudes towards young children and childhood. The new compounds of seemingly paradoxical high and low forms of humor, in texts for developing readers from the 1960s onwards, reflect and contribute to contemporary society’s hesitant and uneven acceptance of the emergent paradigm of children’s rights, abilities, participation and empowerment. Cross identifies four types of potentially subversive/transgressive humor which have emerged since the 1960s which, coupled with the three main theories of humor – relief, superiority and incongruity theories – enables a long-overdue charting of developments in humor within junior texts. Cross also argues that the gradual increase in the compounding of the simple and the complex provide opportunities for young readers to play with ambiguous, complicated ideas, helping them embrace the complexities and contradictions of contemporary life.

CONTENTS 1. The "Tradition" of Humorous Transgression in Everyday-life Fiction 2. Funny Fantasy Fiction and Superiority Humour Theory: "ingenuous" anthropomorphised animal-child characters and "ingenious" child detectives 3. "New Wave Nonsense" and the Tradition of Classic Nonsense 4. Gendered Humour: Clever Girls and "Clever" Boys 5. "Funny and Fearful": The Comic-Gothic and Incongruity 6. Conclusion

Irish Children's Literature and Culture Children's Literature and Culture

Edited by Keith O'Sullivan and Valerie Coghlan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 244pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87789-3; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION What constitutes a ‘national literature’ is rarely straightforward, and it is especially complex when discussing writing for young people in an Irish context. Until recently, there was only a slight body of work that could be classified as ‘Irish children’s literature’ (whatever the parameters) in comparison with Ireland’s contribution to adult literature in the twentieth century. This volume looks critically at Irish writing for children from the 1980s to the present, examining the work of many writers and illustrators and engaging with all the major forms and genres. Topics include the gothic, the speculative, picturebooks, poetry, post-colonial discourse, identity and ethnicity, and globalization. Modern Irish children’s literature is also contextualized in relation to Irish mythology and earlier writings, thereby demonstrating the complexity of this fascinating area. The contributors, who are leading experts in their fields, examine a range of texts in relation to contemporary literary and cultural theory, and also in relation to writing for adults, thereby inviting a consideration of how well writing for a young audience can compare with writing for an adult one. This groundbreaking work is essential reading for all interested in Irish literature, childhood, and children’s literature.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Picture Books that Transcend Boundaries Sandra Beckett 2. Belief and Unbelief: Inscriptions of Religion and Cultural Identity Valerie Coghlan 3. Contemplating Otherness in Speculative Fiction Patricia Kennon 4. Child’s Play: The Child and the Nation Jarlath Kileen 5. Walking into the Night: Growing up with the Gothic Anne Markey 6. ‘The past is gone anyway’: The importance of Memory and History Sharon Murphy 7. Mythologizing the Present Ciara Ní Bhroin 8. Location, Location, Location: The Significance of Place Eilís Ní Dhuibne 9. Insularity and Internationalism: Between Local Production and the Global Marketplace Emer O’Sullivan 10. Linguistic and Narratological Representations of Selfhood Keith O’Sullivan 11. Family Amanda Piesse 12.

Meanings and Means: Children's Poetry Mary Shine Thompson 13. The Irish Call of Aladdin: "New Tales for Old!" Máire Uí Mhaicín 14. Coming of Age and Youth Culture Pádraic Whyte

New Directions in Picturebook Research Children's Literature and Culture

Edited by Teresa Colomer, Universitat Autonoma Barcelona, Spain, Bettina Kümmerling-Meibauer, University of Tübingen, Germany and Cecilia Silva-Díaz, Universitat Autonoma Barcelona PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

230 HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 279pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87690-2; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this new collection, children’s literature scholars from twelve different countries contribute to the ongoing debate on the importance of picturebook research, focusing on aesthetic and cognitive aspects of picture books. Contributors take interdisciplinary approaches that integrate different disciplines such as literary studies, art history, linguistics, narratology, cognitive psychology, sociology, memory studies, and picture theory. Topics discussed include intervisuality, twist endings, autobiographical narration, and metaliterary awareness in picturebooks. The essays also examine the narrative challenges of first-person narratives, ellipsis, and frame-breaking in order to consider the importance of mindscape as a new paradigm in picturebook research. Tying picturebook studies to studies in childhood, multimodality, and literacy, this anthology is a representative of the different opportunities for research in this emerging field.

CONTENTS List of Figures Series Editor’s Foreword Acknowledgments Introduction: Current Trends in Picturebook Research, Teresa Colomer, Bettina Kümmerling-Meibauer, Cecilia Silva-Díaz Part I: Picturebooks, Literacy, and Cultural Context 1: Words Claimed: Picturebook Narratives and the Project of Children’s Literature, Perry Nodelman 2: Interpretative Codes and Implied Readers of Children’s Picturebooks, Maria Nikolajeva 3: Picturebooks and Changing Values at the Turn of the Century, Teresa Colomer 4: How to Make Sense: Reflections on the Influence of Eighteenth Century Picturebooks on Picturebooks of Today, Nina Christensen 5: "All this book is about books": Picturebooks, Culture and Metaliterary Awareness, Evelyn Arizpe 6: Artistic Allusions in Picturebooks, Sandra Beckett Part II: Picturebooks and Storytelling 7: Frame-making and Frame-breaking in Picturebooks, Carole Scott 8: Surprised Readers: Twist Endings in Narrative Picturebooks, Brenda Bellorín and Cecilia Silva-Díaz 9: The Narrative Power of Pictures: L’Orage (The Thunderstorm) by Anne Brouillard, Isabelle Nières-Chevrel 10: Picturebooks and Trojan Horses: The Nordic Picturebook as a Site for Artistic Experiment during the 1950s, Elina Druker 11: A Strawberry? Or the Planet?: Children’s Aesthetic Response to the Picturebook Strawberries by Susumi Shingu, Moving Art Sculptor, Tomoko Masaki 12: Off-Screen: The Importance of Blank Space, Fernando Zaparaín-Hernández Part III: Making Sense Out of Picturebooks 13: Being a Guide into Picturebook Literacy: Challenges of Cognition and Connotation, Ingeborg Mjør 14: First-Person Narratives in Picturebooks: An Inquiry into the Acquisition of Picturebook Competence, Eva Gressnich and Jörg Meibauer 15: Remembering the Past in Words and Pictures: How Autobiographical Stories Become Picturebooks, Bettina Kümmerling-Meibauer 16: Do Sons Inherit the Sins of Their Fathers? An Analysis of the Picturebook Angry Man, Agnes-Margrethe Bjorvand 17: Imagination or Reality? Mindscapes and Characterization in a Finnish and a Swedish

Picturing the Wolf in Children's Literature Children's Literature and Culture

Debra Mitts-Smith, University of Illinois-Urbana Champaign, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 234pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80117-1; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION From the villainous beast of “Little Red Riding Hood” and “The Three Little Pigs,” to the nurturing wolves of Romulus and Remus and Rudyard Kipling’s The Jungle Book, the wolf has long been a part of the landscape of children’s literature. Meanwhile, since the 1960s and the popularization of scientific research on these animals, children’s books have begun to feature more nuanced views. In Picturing the Wolf in Children’s Literature, Mitts-Smith analyzes visual images of the wolf in children’s books published in Western Europe and North America from 1500 to the present. In particular, she considers how wolves are depicted in and across particular works, the values and attitudes that inform these depictions, and how the concept of the wolf has changed over time. What she discovers is that illustrations and photos in works for children impart social, cultural, and scientific information not only about wolves, but also about humans and human behavior. First encountered in childhood, picture books act as a training ground where the young learn both how to decode the “symbolic” wolf across various contexts and how to make sense of “real” wolves. Mitts-Smith studies sources including myths, legends, fables, folk and fairy tales, fractured tales, fictional stories, and nonfiction, highlighting those instances in which images play a major role, including illustrated anthologies, chapbooks, picture books, and informational books.

This book will be of interest to children’s literature scholars, as well as those interested in the figure of the wolf and how it has been informed over time.

CONTENTS List of Figures Series Editor’s Foreword Acknowledgments Introduction 1: Wolf as Predator 2: Wolf as Social Being 3: Wolf Undone 4: Wolf as Canine 5: Hunted and Endangered 6: Feral Children and Tame Wolves 7: Transcending Literature Bibliography Index

Reading the Adolescent Romance Children's Literature and Culture

Amy Pattee, Simmons College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

231 HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87594-3; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Francine Pascal’s 'Sweet Valley High' series of romance novels for older girls and young adults was one of the most protracted and successful of the twentieth century. In spite of its cool reception by teachers and librarians, the series developed a large fan base of young readers whose purchasing power pushed one volume of the series to a position on the New York Times list of best selling paperback fiction--a first for a young adult novel. 'Sweet Valley High'’s association with a contested form of youth literature—series fiction—and its relationship to the romance genre and popular reading practices has kept the series from critical consideration; however, the success and subsequent ubiquity of 'Sweet Valley High' and Pascal’s literary domain deserves attention. An examination of the series’ content, structure, and readers allows us to investigate an influential marketing and literary phenomenon and to interrogate the intersecting influences of history, audience positioning and readability that allowed 'Sweet Valley' to flourish and that contribute to the successes of subsequent series for girls.

CONTENTS I. The Landscape of Sweet Valley 1. The Evolution of Young Adult Literature and the "Sweet Valley High" Series 2. The Political Landscape of "Sweet Valley High" 3. The Literary Landscape of "Sweet Valley High" II. Visiting Sweet Valley 4. The Readers' Text: Remembering Sweet Valley 5. The Readers' Text: Leaving Sweet Valley III. Razing and Re-Developing Sweet Valley 6. The "New" Sweet Valley High 7. The Legacy of Sweet Valley High

The Role of Translators in Children’s Literature Children's Literature and Culture

Gillian Lathey, Roehampton University London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 271pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-98952-7; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers a historical analysis of key classical translated works for children, such as writings by Hans Christian Andersen and Grimms’ tales. Translations dominate the earliest history of texts written for children in English, and stories translated from other languages have continued to shape its course to the present day. Lathey traces the role of the translator and the impact of translations on the history of English-language children’s literature from the ninth century onwards. Discussions of popular texts in each era reveal fluctuations in the reception of translated children’s texts, as well as instances of cultural mediation by translators and editors.

Abridgement, adaptation, and alteration by translators have often been viewed in a negative light, yet a closer examination of historical translators’ prefaces reveals a far more varied picture than that of faceless conduits or wilful censors. From William Caxton’s dedication of his translated History of Jason to young Prince Edward in 1477 (‘to thentent/he may begynne to lerne read Englissh’), to Edgar Taylor’s justification of the first translation into English of Grimms’ tales as a means of promoting children’s imaginations in an age of reason, translators have recorded in prefaces and other writings their didactic, religious, aesthetic, financial, and even political purposes for translating children’s texts.

CONTENTS List of Figures Series Editor’s Foreword Acknowledgments Preface Introduction Part One 1: Didactic Translation: Religious Texts, Courtesy Books, Schoolbooks and Political Persuasion 2: Popular Fiction in Translation: The Child as Consumer of Romances and Fables in the Medieval and Early Modern Periods 3: Tales of the Marvellous 1690-1760: The Arabian Nights and the French Fairy Tale 4: Imagination, Reason and Mapping the World 1750-1820 5: Religious Stories and the Artful Fairy Tale in the Nineteenth Century 6: The Translating Woman: Assertive Professional or Invisible Storyteller 7: Summary of Part One: Translation Practices and the Child Audience Part Two Introduction 8: Into the Twentieth Century: Classics, the Folk Tale and Internationalism 1870-1940 9: Rewarding Translation for Children: Landmark Translations from 1940 and the Batchelder and Marsh Awards 10: Retranslation in the Twentieth And Twenty-First Centuries: For Children or Adults? 11: Translators’ Voices 12: From Anonymity to Global Marketing: The Role of Translators in Children’s Literature Notes Bibliography Index

Modern American Counter Writing Literary Criticism and Cultural Theory

A. Robert Lee, Nihon University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 296pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99811-6; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The dissident voice in US culture might almost be said to have been born with the territory. Its span runs from Roger Williams to Thoreau, Anne Bradstreet to Gertrude Stein, Ambrose Bierce to the New Journalism, The Beats to the recent Bad Subjects cybercrowd. In this new study, A. Robert Lee aims to explore those counter-seams of modern American writing that sit outside, or at least

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

232 awkwardly within, agreed literary canons. Specifically, Lee analyses three recent literary branches in the tradition: a re-envisioning of the whole Beat web or circuit; a consortium of postwar "outrider" voices – Hunter Thompson to Joan Didion to Kathy Acker; and a latest purview of what, all too casually, has been designated "ethnic" writing.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction: Counter Writing Part I: Beats 1: Beat Canon, Beat Shadow Canon 2: Beat Speaking Women: Diane di Prima, Joanne Kyger, Anne Waldman 3: Black Beat: Performing Ted Joans 4: Beat International: Michael Horovitz, Andrei Voznesensky, Kazuko Shiraishi Part II: Outriders 5: Gonzo Scripts: Hunter S. Thompson 6: A View of One’s Own: Joan Didion 7: Pirated Texts: Kathy Acker Part III: Ethnics 8: Ethnics Behaving Badly: Texts and Contexts 9: Home and Away: US Poetries of Immigration and Migrancy 10: Out of the 1990s: Latino/a Un-bordering in US Fiction 11: A Western East: America’s China Poetry in Marilyn Chin, Russell Leong, John Yau and Wing Tek Lum 12: Insider, Outsider: Japanese America Writing Japan 13: Bad Boy, Godfather, Storyteller: Frank Chin 14: Manila Tropics: Jessica Hagedorn 15: Black South, Black Europe: William Demby 16: Rearview Mirrors: Gerald Vizenor Notes Index

Black Atlantic Speculative Fictions Routledge Research in Atlantic Studies

Ingrid Thaler, University of Göttingen, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 194pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80441-7; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Since the 1980s, an increasing number of black writers have begun publishing speculative-fantastic fictions such as fantasy, gothic, utopian and science fiction. Writing into two literary traditions that are conventionally considered separate -- white speculative genres and black literary-cultural traditions -- the texts integrate an African American sensibility of the past within the present, with speculative fiction’s sensibility of the present within the future. Thaler takes stock of this trend by proposing that the growing number of texts has brought forth a genre of its own. She analyzes recent fictions by Octavia E. Butler, Jewelle Gomez, and Nalo Hopkinson as in-between color-coded literary and cultural traditions by paying particular attention to concepts of literary history and time as well as postcolonial notions of hybridity and mimicry, race, and identity. The study treads on new ground since it not only offers a broader scope of the various speculative genres in which established and emerging black authors currently publish, but also shows that these fictions contest conventionally accepted notions of white genres and black traditions and, in consequence, of (post-)postmodern literature and popular fiction.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction: White Genres, Black Traditions? Anansi, Peter Parker, and Other Tropes 1: The Meaning of the Past?

Allegory in Octavia E. Butler’s Wild Seed (1980) 2: Traveling through Time: Vampire Fiction and the Black Atlantic in Jewelle Gomez’s The Gilda Stories (1991) 3: Dystopian Future and Utopian Vision: Surviving Apocalypse in Octavia E. Butler’s Parable of the Sower (1993) 4: A Better Future? Ambiguity, Cyberpunk, and Caribbean Syncretism in Nalo Hopkinson’s Midnight Robber (2000) Conclusion: The Virtual Subculture of Black Atlantic Speculative Fiction Play It Forward: Black Atlantic Speculative Fiction and Its Futures Notes Bibliography Index

Generating the Hybrid City Routledge Research in Postcolonial Literatures

Isabel Carrera Suárez, Oviedo University, Spain PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47814-4; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is a study of the representation of the global, postcolonial, hybrid city by women writers in English. Focusing specifically on London, Toronto and Singapore as examples of different positions in the postcolonial process, Suarez grounds her discussion on theories of the global city, urban representation and postcolonial, diaspora and gender theories. The study includes close analysis of works by writers such as Jackie Kay and Andrea Levy (UK), Janice Kulyk Keefer and Dionne Brand (Canada) and Hsu-Ming Teo and Simone Lazaroo (Singapore-Australia route), to examine how they share a representation of women as active agents in generating the hybrid city, although often at the cost of exclusion. Examining the literature of these popular writers alongside the gendering of theories on ethnicity, diaspora, post/colonialism and multiculturalism this book is an exciting and timely intervention in postcolonial studies and its relation to gender and the city.

Postapartheid Literature Routledge Research in Postcolonial Literatures

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

233 Sam Durrant, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99629-7; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores the ways in which postapartheid literature reinvents South African mourning traditions. During the apartheid era, politics exerted a particular pressure on both funerary practices and on literature, both of which were instrumentalised as weapons in the struggle: just as funerals were turned into mass political protests, literature was pressed into service as protest literature. In the postapartheid era, the Truth and Reconciliation Commission (1996-99) continued to press mourning into political service, particularly through the Human Rights Violations hearings in which private losses were mourned in public and immediately subsumed within a national narrative of forgiveness and reconciliation. Despite calls for the recovery of artistic freedom and literary autonomy, literature has also been subject to political pressure; writers have been expected to follow the TRC’s lead and produce a literature of national reconciliation. While a literature of reconciliation might appear to allow for more imaginative possibilities than protest literature, it is still driven by a particular politics of memory. Durrant explores the ways in which postapartheid literature has acceded to and/or resisted this politics of memory and asks what literary resistance might mean in a postapartheid context. Is it the task of literature to produce a counter-politics of memory, or is it rather to resist the demands of the political per se, to refuse to be instrumentalised in any cause?

CONTENTS Introduction: "Keeping alive the idea of gardening" 1. The Undertakers of Transition: The Artist as Psychopomp 2. Literature and the Truth and Reconciliation Commission 3. Short-circuiting Grief: Masculinity, Combat and Isolation 4. Circuits of Grief: Women and the Mimesis of Community 5. Shifting Topographies of Loss: Becoming South Africa 6. Conclusion: Literature, Mourning and Community

The Postcolonial City and Its Subjects Routledge Research in Postcolonial Literatures

Rashmi Varma, University of Warwick, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $125.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88039-8; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is about twentieth and twenty-first century literary and cultural formations of the postcolonial city and the constitution of new subjects within it. Varma offers a reading of both historical and contemporary debates on urbanism through the filter of postcolonial fictions and the cultural fields surrounding and containing them. In particular, she presents a representational history of London, Nairobi and Bombay in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries and engages three key theoretical frameworks—the city within postcolonial theory and culture (its troubled salience in the construction of postcolonial public spheres and identities, from local, rural, ethnic/"tribal", and regional to "national", cosmopolitan and transnational subjects and spaces); postcolonial fictions as constituting a new world literary space and as a site of the articulation of contending narratives of urban space, global culture and postcolonial development; and postcolonial feminist citizenship as a universal political project challenging current neo-liberal and post neo-liberal contractions and eviscerations of public spaces and rights.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Postcolonial Itinerary 2. Eccentric Routes: Writing London 2. Different Belongings: Mapping Nairobi 3. (Un)Civil Lines: Writing Bombay 4. Conclusion: Situated Solidarities

The Postcolonial Gramsci Routledge Research in Postcolonial Literatures

Edited by Neelam Srivastava and Baidik Bhattacharya, both of University of Newcastle, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 244pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87481-6; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The importance of Antonio Gramsci’s work for postcolonial studies can hardly be exaggerated, and in this volume, contributors attempt to situate Gramsci's work in the vast and complex oeuvre of postcolonial studies. Specifically, The Postcolonial Gramsci endeavors to reassess the impact on postcolonial studies of the central role assigned by Gramsci to culture and literature in the formation of a truly revolutionary idea of the national—a notion that has profoundly shaped the thinking of both Frantz Fanon and Edward Said. Gramsci, as Iain Chambers has argued, has been instrumental in helping scholars rethink their understanding of historical, political, and cultural struggle by substituting the relationship between tradition and modernity with that of subaltern versus

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

234 hegemonic parts of the world. Combining theoretical reflections and re-interpretations of Gramsci, the scholars in this collection present comparative geo-cultural perspectives on the meaning of the subaltern, passive revolution, hegemony, the concept of nationalpopular culture, in order to chart out a political map of the postcolonial through the central focus on Gramsci.

CONTENTS Introduction: The Postcolonial Gramsci Baidik Bhattacharya and Neelam Srivastava I. Situating Gramsci in Postcolonial Theory 1.

Gramsci after Globalization: Postcolonial Speculations Baidik Bhattacharya (Newcastle University) 2. Translating Gramsci: The Travel of Theories and their Blind Spots Paolo Capuzzo and Sandro Mezzadra (University of Bologna) 3. The Uses of Gramsci: Cultural Studies, Post-imperial Britain, and the Post-colonial Conjuncture James Procter (Newcastle University) 4. The Travels of the Organic Intellectual: The Anti-colonial and the Native Intellectual in George Padmore and Frantz Fanon Neelam Srivastava (Newcastle University) 5. The Subaltern Colonial Robert J.C. Young (New York University) II. Gramsci and the Global Present 6.

The Unseen Order Iain Chambers (University of Naples "L’Orientale") 7. Gramsci in the Twenty-first Century Partha Chatterjee (Columbia University) 8. Entering the World from an Oblique Angle: Jia Zhangke as Organic Intellectual Pheng Cheah (University of California at Berkeley) 9. Army of Unmarried Women: Revisiting Passive Revolution in India Nivedita Menon (University of Delhi) 10. Society must be Led: Dilemmas of the Vanguard in Some Post-Independence Novels in India Rajeswari Sunder Rajan (New York University)

Postcolonial Nostalgias Routledge Research in Postcolonial Literatures

Dennis Walder, The Open University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-44533-7; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Examining prose, poetry and drama by writers including Achebe, Naipaul, Coetzee, Walcott, Krog, Fugard, and versions of Shakespeare, Walder pursues the often ambiguous paths of nostalgia as it has been represented within and beyond Europe so as to identify some of those processes of communal and individual experience that constitute the present and, by implication, the future.

Postcolonial Tourism Routledge Research in Postcolonial Literatures

Anthony Carrigan, Keele University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88273-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Carrigan here examines the aesthetic portrayal of tourism in postcolonial literatures. Looking at the cultural and ecological effects of mass tourism development in states that are still grappling with the legacies of 'western' colonialism, Carrigan argues that postcolonial writers not only dramatize the industry's most exploitative operations but also provide blueprints toward sustainable tourism futures.

Locating this argument in the context of interdisciplinary tourism research, the study shows how the work of creative writers can help revise some of the field's key theoretical concepts and contentions. It also provides a framework for analyzing how an industry that is subject to constant media attention and involves a huge proportion of the global population shapes the cultural, social, and environmental milieux of postcolonial literary texts.

CONTENTS Preface Introduction I. Tourism and Nature 1. Visual Perception and Touristed Landscapes 2. Contested Environments: Tourism, Indigeneity, and Ideologies of Development 3. Tourism, Desecration, and Sacred Land II. Tourism and Culture 4. Touristification and Cultural Sustainability 5. Tourism and Reindigenization III. Sex, Tourism, and Embodied Experience 6. Sex Tourism, Beach Ecology, and Compound Disaster 7. Gendered Islands, Tourism, and Prostitution Discourse 8. Conclusion

Representing Mixed Race in Jamaica and England from the Abolition Era to the Present Routledge Research in Postcolonial Literatures

S. Salih, University of Toronto, Canada.

PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-39808-4; August 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

235 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This project examines the representation of "mixed race" female identities in colonial and postcolonial societies, from the eighteenth century to the present. Concentrating particularly on the relationship between Jamaica and England, Salih challenges contemporary theorizations of hybridity, métissage and créolité in a series of historicized, localized readings, arguing that in order to understand contemporary attitudes towards mixed race women, it is necessary to examine specific historical contexts and to trace the genealogy of racial and racist discourses. She examines the figure of the "brown woman" as an object of both desire and horror and as a crucial component of the construction, representation and affirmation of whiteness, and traces the commodification of brownness from the mid-nineteenth-century and the continuing use of images of brown women to sell products. This study demonstrates the striking connections between historical and contemporary discourses of race and brownness and argues for a shift in the ways we think about, represent and discuss "mixed race" people.

CONTENTS 1: Introduction: The Mulatto in Law and Literature 2: Pre-Emancipation Stories of Race: Marly and The Woman of Colour 3: Legitimacy, Illegitimacy and Citizenship in the Nineteenth Century: Dinah Craik’s Olive and Richard Hill’s Lights and Shadows 4: Mulattos in the Contact Zone: Mary Seacole and Ozias Midwinter Coda: Modern Mulattos: Mona Lisa and The Crying Game Notes Bibliography Index

Transnational Negotiations in Caribbean Diasporic Literature Routledge Research in Postcolonial Literatures

Kezia Page, Colgate University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 187pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87362-8; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Taking an interdisciplinary approach, Page casts light on the role of citizenship, immigration, and transnational mobility in Caribbean migrant and diaspora fiction. Page's historical, socio-cultural study responds to the general trend in migration discourse that presents the Caribbean experience as unidirectional and uniform across the geographical spaces of home and diaspora. She argues that engaging the Caribbean diaspora and the massive waves of migration from the region that have punctuated its history, involves not only understanding communities in host countries and the conflicted identities of second generation subjectivities, but also interpreting how these communities interrelate with and affect communities at home. In particular, Page examines two socio-economic and political practices, remittance and deportation, exploring how they function as tropes in migrant literature, and as ways of theorizing such literature.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction: Theorizing Diaspora, Theorizing Home 1: Creating Diaspora: Caribbean Migrant Literature in England and North America, 1930’s-1960’s 2: Migrant Bodies, Scars and Tattoos: Art as Terror and Transformation in Edwidge Danticat’s Brother I’m Dying and The Dew Breaker 3: "Two places can make children?": Metaphysics, Authorship and the Borders of Diaspora 4: Rethinking a Caribbean Literary Economy: Jamaica Kincaid’s My Brother and Beryl Gilroy’s Frangipani House as Remittance Texts 5: "No Abiding City": Theorizing Deportation in Caribbean Migrant Fiction Afterword: On the Edge of the World Notes Bibliography Index

Travel Writing and Atrocities Routledge Research in Travel Writing

Robert Burroughs, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 257pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99238-1; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines eyewitness travel reports of atrocities committed in European-funded slave regimes in the Congo Free State, Portuguese West Africa, and the Putumayo district of the Amazon rainforest during the late-nineteenth and early-twentieth centuries.

During this time, British explorers, missionaries, consuls, journalists, soldiers, and traders produced evidence of misrule in the Congo, Angola, and the Putumayo, which they described their travel and witnessing of colonial violence in travelogues, ethnographic monographs, consular reports, diaries and letters, sketches, photography, and more. As well as bringing home to readers ongoing brutalities, eyewitness narratives contributed to debates on humanitarianism, trade, colonialism, and race and racial prejudice in late Victorian and Edwardian Britain. In particular, whereas earlier antislavery travelers had tended to promote British imperial expansion as a remedy to slavery, travel texts produced for the three major humanitarian campaigns of the late-nineteenth and early-twentieth century expressed — and, indeed, gave rise to — changes in the perception of Britain as a nation for whom the protection of Africans remained paramount. Burroughs's study charts the emergence of a subversive eyewitness response in travel writing, which implicated Britons and British industries in the continuing existence of slave labor in regions formally ruled by other nations.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

236 CONTENTS List of Figures List of Abbreviations Note on Place Names Acknowledgments Introduction 1: Unspeakable Voyage: Explorers and Colonialists in the Congo 2: ‘[T]he subtle consul’: Roger Casement’s Congo Report 3: In Transit and Transition: Congo Missionaries 4: Cocoa and Antislavery: Henry W. Nevinson’s A Modern Slavery 5: England’s Eyewitness: Casement’s Amazon Journal Conclusion Appendix: Ikembe’s Letter to Rev. Joseph Clark Notes Bibliography Index

Travel Writing and Ethics Routledge Research in Travel Writing

Edited by Charles Forsdick, University of Liverpool, UK, Corinne Fowler, Lancaster University, UK and Ludmilla Kostova, University of Veliko Turnovo, Bulgaria PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99539-9; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Despite the recent increase in scholarly activity regarding travel writing and the accompanying proliferation of publications relating to the form, its ethical dimensions have yet to be theorised with sufficient rigour. Drawing from the disciplines of anthropology, linguistics, literary studies and modern languages, the contributors in this volume apply themselves to a number of key theoretical questions pertaining to travel writing and ethics, ranging from travel-as-commoditisation to encounters with minority languages under threat. Taken collectively, the essays assess key critical legacies from parallel disciplines to the debate so far, such as anthropological theory and postcolonial criticism. Also considered, and of equal significance, are the ethical implications of the form’s parallel genres of writing, such as ethnography and journalism. As some of the contributors argue, innovations in these genres have important implications for the act of theorising travel writing itself and the mode and spirit in which it continues to be conducted. In the light of such innovations, how might ethical theory maintain its critical edge?

CONTENTS Part One. Genre-blending, genre-bending; 1. The Ethics of Travel Criticism – Tim Youngs; 2. Headhunting, Cannibalism, Vodun and Christianity in Sir Spenser Buckingham St John – Helen Tiffin; 3. Babel’s faultlines. Travel writing and the search for language – Michael Cronin; 4.‘We call it English ‘prosciutto’. Narratives of food, travel and nation in Paul Richardson’s Cornucopia – Jopi Nyman; 5. With or without my aunt. Revisiting Paraguay – Corinne Fowler with Javier Valiente 6.Terror – Laurie Hovell McMillin; Part Two. Toxic encounters? Issues in travel writing and cross-cultural encounter; 7. C’est le tu qui dominera. Exploring the traveller’travelee’ relationship in Victor Segalen – Charles Forsdick; 8.Tourism, Cultural Production, and Postcolonial Island Literatures – Anthony Carrigan; 9.Gourdes and Dollars: How Travel Writers Spend Money – Alasdair Pettinger; 10. Risks of Mediation: On Guides, Interpreters and Fellow Travellers – Ludmilla Kostova; 11. Travelling in the Times of Empire – Syed Manzu Islam; 12.

Hauntings: W.G. Sebald as Travel Writer – Graham Huggan; 13. The foreign traveller within the Romanian literary tradition – Alexander Drace-Francis

Beyond Cyberpunk Routledge Studies in Contemporary Literature

Edited by Graham J. Murphy, Trent University, Canada and Sherryl Vint, Brock University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $115.00; 229x152 mm; 280pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87687-2; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this collection of essays, contributors consider the continuing cultural relevance of the cyberpunk genre into the new millennium.

Cyberpunk is no longer an emergent phenomenon, but in our digital age of CGI-driven entertainment, the information economy, and globalized capital, we have never more been in need of a fiction capable of engaging with a world shaped by information technology.

Contributors seek to move beyond the narrow strictures of cyberpunk as defined in the Eighties and contribute to an ongoing discussion of how to negotiate exchanges among information technologies, global capitalism, and human social existence. Essays offer a variety of perspectives on cyberpunk’s diversity and how this sub-genre remains relevant amidst its transformation from a print fiction genre into a more generalized set of cultural practices, tackling the question of what it is that cyberpunk narratives continue to offer us in those intersections of literary, cultural, theoretical, academic, and technocultural environments.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction: The Sea Change(s) of Cyberpunk, Graham J. Murphy and Sherryl Vint Part One: Situating Cyberpunk 1. Towards a Poetics of Cyberpunk, Brian McHale 2. "A Rare State of Ferment": SF Controversies from the New Wave to Cyberpunk, Rob Latham 3. Recognizing Patterns: Gibson’s Hermeneutics from the Bridge Trilogy to Pattern Recognition, Neil Easterbrook 4. Journeys Beyond Being: The Cyberpunk-Flavored Novels of Jeff Noon, Andrew M. Butler Part Two: The Political Economy of Cyberpunk 5. Global Economy, Local Texts: Utopian/Dystopian Tension in William Gibson’s Cyberpunk Trilogy, Tom Moylan 6. "The Mainstream Finds its Own Uses for Things": Cyberpunk and Commodification, Sherryl Vint 7. Why Neo Flies, and

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

237 Why He Shouldn’t: The Critique of Cyberpunk in Gwyneth Jones’s Escape Plans and M. John Harrison’s Signs of Life, Mark Bould 8. Posthuman Melancholy: Digital Gaming and Cyberpunk, Jonathan Boulter Part Three: The Politics of Embodiment in Cyberpunk 9.

Feminist Cyberpunk, Karen Cadora 10. Woken Carbon: The Return of the Human in Richard K. Morgan’s Takeshi Kovacs Trilogy, Pawel Frelik 11. Retrofitting Frankenstein, Veronica Hollinger 12. Angel(LINK) of Harlem: Techno-Spirituality in the Cyberpunk Tradition, Graham J. Murphy Afterword: The World Gibson Made, Sherryl Vint Notes on Contributors Bibliography Index

Criticism, Crisis, and Contemporary Narrative Routledge Studies in Contemporary Literature

Edited by Paul Crosthwaite, Cardiff University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87949-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The etymological affinity between ‘criticism’ and ‘crisis’ has never been more resonant than it is today, when social life is increasingly understood as defined by a succession of overlapping global crises: financial and economic crises; environmental crises; geopolitical crises; terrorist crises; public health crises. But what is the role of literary and cultural criticism in conceptualizing this atmosphere of perpetual crisis? If, as Paul de Man maintained, criticism necessarily exists in a state of crisis, in what ways is this condition intensified at a time when the social formations within which criticism operates and the cultural artefacts that it takes as its objects are themselves pervaded by actual and imagined states of emergency? This book, the first sustained response to these questions, demonstrates the capacity of critical thought, working in dialogue with key narrative texts, to provide penetrating insights into a contemporary landscape of global, manufactured risk. Written by an international team of specialist scholars, the essays in the collection draw on a wide variety of contemporary theoretical, fictional, and cinematic sources, ranging from Giorgio Agamben, Jacques Derrida, and Fredric Jameson to Cormac McCarthy, Ian McEwan, and Lauren Beukes to Ghost and the James Bond and National Treasure series. Appearing in the midst of a phase of extraordinary turbulence in the fabric of our interconnected and interdependent world, the book makes a landmark intervention in debates concerning the cultural ramifications of globalization.

CONTENTS Introduction Paul Crosthwaite I. Critical Thought/Critical Times 1. No Apocalypse, Not Yet: Literary Criticism in an Age of Global Risk Molly Wallace 2. Beyond the Ghost Dance: Democracy and Emergency Nick Mansfield 3. The Incredible Shrinking Human Charlie Gere 4. The Risks of Sustainability Karen Pinkus II. Critical Perspectives on Crisis Narratives 5. The Rise of the Edge: Catastrophic Seascape and the Ecological Uncanny in Cormac McCarthy's The Road Rebecca Giggs 6. Narrating the Coming Pandemic: Avian Influenza, Anticipatory Anxiety, and Neurotic Citizenship Penelope Ironstone Catterall 7. Grey Goo and You: The Ecophagy of Global Capital Robin Stoate 8. Risk and Morality in Ian McEwan's Saturday Lidia De Michelis 9. After Globalization: Narratives of Post-American Hegemony Imre Szeman 10. "The Corporation of Terror": Financial Fictions/Fictions of Finance Nicky Marsh 11. Casino Royale, Financial Aesthetics, and National Narrative Form Alissa G. Karl 12. Phantasmagoric Finance: Risk and the Supernatural in Contemporary Finance Culture Paul Crosthwaite 13. Global Capitalism and a Dystopian South Africa: Trencherman by Eben Venter and Moxyland by Lauren Beukes Andries Visagie

Multimodality, Cognition, and Experimental Literature Routledge Studies in Multimodality

Alison Gibbons, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87361-1; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Since the turn of the millennium, there has seen an increase in the inclusion of typography, graphics and illustration in fiction. This book engages with visual and multimodal devices in twenty-first century literature, exploring canonical authors like Mark Z. Danielewski and Jonathan Safran Foer alongside experimental fringe writers such as Steve Tomasula, to uncover an embodied textual aesthetics in the information age. Bringing together multimodality and cognition in an innovative study of how readers engage with challenging literature, this book makes a significant contribution to the debates surrounding multimodal design and multimodal reading. Drawing on cognitive linguistics, cognitive psychology, neuroscience, semiotics, visual perception, visual communication, and multimodal analysis, Gibbons provides a sophisticated set of critical tools for analysing the cognitive impact of multimodal literature.

CONTENTS 1. Multimodality and Cognitive Poetics 2. Crossing Thresholds and the Exploring Reader of House of Leaves by Mark Z. Danielewski 3. Embodied Readings of Cyberbodies: Tomasula and Farrell's VAS: An Opera In Flatland 4. Talking Multimodality and Cultural Trauma in Jonathan Safran Foer's Extremely Loud & Incredibly Close 5. Cutting and Pasting A Woman's World by Graham Rawle 6. Floating Text and Conceptual Fish: Steven Hall's The Raw Shark Texts 7. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

238

Ecocriticism and Early Modern English Literature Routledge Studies in Renaissance Literature and Culture

Todd Andrew Borlik, Bloomsburg University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $105.00; 229x152 mm; 228pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87861-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Borlik reveals the surprisingly rich potential for the emergent "green" criticism to yield fresh insights into early modern English literature in this timely new study. Deftly avoiding the anachronistic casting of sixteenth and seventeenth-century authors as modern environmentalists, he argues that environmental issues, such as nature's personhood, deforestation, energy use, air quality, climate change, and animal sentience, are formative concerns in many early modern texts. The readings infuse a new urgency in familiar works by Shakespeare, Sidney, Spenser, Marlowe, Ralegh, Jonson, Donne, and Milton. At the same time, the book forecasts how ecocriticism will bolster the reputation of less canonical authors like Drayton, Wroth, Bruno, Gascoigne, and Cavendish. Its chapters trace provocative affinities between topics such as Pythagorean ecology and the Gaia hypothesis, Ovidian tropes and green phenomenology, the disenchantment of Nature and the Little Ice Age, and early modern pastoral poetry and modern environmental ethics. It also examines the ecological onus of Renaissance poetics, while showcasing how the Elizabethans' sense of a sophisticated inter-play between nature and art can provide a precedent for ecocriticism's current understanding of the relationship between nature and culture as "mutually constructive." Situating plays and poems alongside an eclectic array of secondary sources, including herbals, forestry laws, husbandry manuals, almanacs, and philosophical treatises on politics and ethics, Borlik demonstrates that Elizabethan and Jacobean authors were very much aware of, and concerned about, the impact of human beings on their natural surroundings.

CONTENTS Introduction--The Knotted Garden: Toward an Early Modern Ecopoetics 1. Reincarnating Pythagoras: Anima Mundi and Renaissance Theory 2. MuteTimber? Fiscal Forestry and Environmental Stichomythia in The Old Arcadia 3. The Reformation and the Disenchantment of Nature 4. "Hast Any Philosophy in Thee, Shepherd?": Environmental Ethics and the Good Life in Renaissance Pastoral 5. Rethinking Dominion: Pastoral and the Republic of Nature 6. Conclusion

Prophecy and Sibylline Imagery in the Renaissance Routledge Studies in Renaissance Literature and Culture

Jessica L. Malay, University of Huddersfield, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $105.00; 229x152 mm; 228pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87792-3; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book restores the rich tradition of the Sibyls to the position of prominence they once held in the culture and society of the English Renaissance. The sibyls — figures from classical antiquity — played important roles in literature, scholarship and art of the period, exerting a powerful authority due to their centuries-old connection to prophetic declamations of the coming of Christ and the Apocalypse. The identity of the sibyls, however, was not limited to this particular aspect of their fame, but contained a fluid multilayering of meanings given their prominence in ancient Greek and Roman cultures, as well as the widespread dissemination of prophecies attributed the sibyls that circulated through the oral tradition. Sibylline prophecy of the Middle Ages served as another conduit through which sibylline authority, fame, and familiarity was transmitted and enhanced. Writers as disparate as John Foxe, John Dee, Thomas Churchyard, John Fletcher, Thomas Heywood, Jane Seager, John Lyly, An Collins, William Shakespeare, and many draw upon this shared sibylline tradition to produce particular and specific meanings in their writing. This book explores the many identities, the many faces, of the prophetic sibyls as they appear in the works of English Renaissance writers.

CONTENTS List of Figures Editorial Note Acknowledgments Introduction 1: Sibylline Heritage: From the Mists of Antiquity 2: Reforming the Sibyl: The Appropriation of the Sibyls in the Middle Ages and Reformation 3: The Sibyls in Elizabeth’s Court and Country 4: The Sibyls: God’s Divines or She Imps of Satan? 5: Shakespeare’s Sibyls 6: To be a Sibyl: Jane Seager’s Sibylline Poems 7: The Final Act: Revealing the Sibyls in Jacobean England Notes Bibliography Index

Representing the Plague in Early Modern England Routledge Studies in Renaissance Literature and Culture

Edited by Rebecca Totaro, Florida Gulf Coast University, USA and Ernest B. Gilman, New York University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $105.00; 229x152 mm; 284pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87797-8; June 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

239 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This collection offers readers a timely encounter with the historical experience of people adapting to a pandemic emergency and the corresponding narrative representation of that crisis, as early modern writers transformed the plague into literature. The essays examine the impact of the plague on health, politics, and religion as well as on the plays, prose fiction, and plague bills that stand as witnesses to the experience of a society devastated by contagious disease. Readers will find physicians and moralists wrestling with the mysteries of the disease; erotic escapades staged in plague-time plays; the poignant prose works of William Bullein and Thomas Dekker; the bodies of monarchs who sought to protect themselves from plague; the chameleon-like nature of the plague as literal disease and as metaphor; and future strains of plague, literary and otherwise, which we may face in the globally-minded, technologydependent, and ecologically-awakened twenty-first century. The bubonic plague compelled change in all aspects of lived experience in Early Modern England, but at the same time, it opened space for writers to explore new ideas and new literary forms—not all of them somber or horrifying and some of them downright hilarious. By representing the plague for their audiences, these writers made an epidemic calamity intelligible: for them, the dreaded disease could signify despair but also hope, bewilderment but also a divine plan, quarantine but also liberty, death but also new life.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction, Rebecca Totaro Section One: Making the Plague Serve Form and Function, 1563-1666 1: Writing the Plague in English Prose Satire, William Kerwin 2: Plague Space and Played Space in Urban Drama, 1604, Kelly J. Stage 3: Physical and Spiritual Illness: Narrative Appropriations of the Bills of Mortality, Erin Sullivan Section Two: Governing Bodies in Plague-Time 4: Contagious Figurations: Plague and the Impenetrable Nation after the Death of Elizabeth, Richelle Munkhoff 5: "Thinking to pass unknown": Measure for Measure, the Plague, and the Accession of James I, James D. Mardock Section Three: Performances, Playhouses, and the Sites of Re-Creation 6: "Sweet recreation barred": The Case for Playgoing in Plague-time, Nichole DeWall 7: Shakespeare’s Dual Lexicons of Plague: Infections in Speech and Space, Paula S. Berggren 8: "A plague on both your houses": Sites of Comfort and Terror in Early Modern Drama, Barbara H. Traister Section Four: Contemporary Turns 9: Plague in A Midsummer Night’s Dream: A Girardian Reading of Bottom and Hippolyta, Matthew Thiele 10: Dekker’s and Middleton’s Plague Pamphlets as Environmental Literature, Charles Whitney Afterword: Plague and Metaphor, Ernest B. Gilman Notes on Contributors Index

Shakespeare, Jonson, and the Claims of the Performative Routledge Studies in Renaissance Literature and Culture

James Loxley, University of Edinburgh, UK and Mark Robson, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99327-2; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book will constitute an original intervention into longstanding but insistently relevant debates around the significance of notions of ‘performativity’ to the critical analysis of early modern drama. In particular, the book aims to: show how the investigation of performativity can enable readings of Shakespeare and Jonson that challenge the dominant methodological frameworks within which those plays have come to be read; demonstrate that the thought of performativity does not come to rest in the simplicity of method or instrumentality, and that it resists its own claim that language and action might be understood as unproblematically instrumental; demonstrate that this self-resistance occurs or takes place as a moment in the process of articulating the claims of the performative, and that this process is itself in an important sense dramatic.

CONTENTS Introduction: the continuing claims of the performative; Part 1: Performativity, History, Criticism; 1. Words of the future: promises; 2.

Recovering the past: libels; Part 2: At the limits of the performative; 3. Being obnoxious: Jonson makes his excuses; 4. Beyond all possible neutrality: declarations of/in dependence; Part 3: The conditions of the performative; 5. Responsibilities: the challenge of seriousness; 6. Alienated majesty: animating the ordinary; Conclusion

Language, Ideology and Identity in Serial Killer Narratives Routledge Studies in Rhetoric and Stylistics

Christiana Gregoriou, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87229-4; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this book, Gregoriou explores the portrayal of the serial killer identity and its related ideology across a range of contemporary crime narratives, including detective fiction, the true crime genre and media journalism. How exactly is the serial killer consciousness portrayed, how is the killing linguistically justified, and how distinguishing is the language revolving around criminal ideology and identity across these narrative genres? By employing linguistic and content-related methods of analysis, her study aims to work toward the development of a stylistic framework on the representation of serial killer ideology across factual (i.e. media texts), factional (i.e.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

240 true crime books) and fictional (i.e. novels) murder narratives. By analyzing serial murder narratives across various genres, Gregoriou uncovers a widely shared ‘group schema’ for these murderers, and questions the extent to which real criminal minds are in fact linguistically fictionalized. This study of the mental functioning and representation of criminal personas will illuminate our schematic understanding of actual criminal minds.

CONTENTS 1. Introducing the Scene of the Serial Killer Crime 2. Here is the (Killer!) News 3. Get Your True Crime Here 4. Buy Our Latest Crime Novel 5. The Verdict

Literary Reading, Cognition, and Emotion Routledge Studies in Rhetoric and Stylistics

Michael Burke, Roosevelt Academy, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87232-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This work seeks to chart what happens in the embodied minds of engaged readers when they read literature. Despite the recent stylistic, linguistic and cognitive advances that have been made in text processing methodology and practice, very little is known about this cultural-cognitive process and especially about the role that emotion plays. Burk’s theoretical and empirical study focuses on three central issues: the role emotions play in a core cognitive event like literary text processing; the kinds of bottom-up and topdown inputs most prominently involved in the literary reading process; and what might be happening in the minds and bodies of engaged readers when they experience intense or heightened emotions: a phenomenon sometimes labeled ‘reader epiphany.’ This study postulates that there is a free-flow of bottom-up and top-down affective, cognitive inputs during the engaged act of literary reading, and that reading does not necessarily begin or end when our eyes apprehend the words on the page. Burke argues that the literary reading human mind might best be considered both figuratively and literally, not as computational or mechanical, but as oceanic.

CONTENTS Introduction I. Some Basics of Reading 1. Discourse Processes and Memory Functions 2. Perception, Cognitive Appraisal and Emotion 3. Literary Reading-Induced Mental Imagery (LRI) II. Some Affective Inputs During Literary Reading 4. Mood and Location 5. Themes 6. Style 7. Towards a Model of Emotion in Literary Reading III. A Case Study of Heightened Reader Emotion at Literary Closure 8. Closure and Reader Epiphany 9. Reading the Closing Lines of The Great Gatsby 10. A Cognitive Stylistic Analysis of The Great Gatsby 11. Disportation 12. Conclusion

The Female Romantics Routledge Studies in Romanticism

Caroline Franklin, University of Wales, Swansea, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99541-2; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This study focuses on the dynamic interaction between Byron and Madame de Staël, Lady Morgan, Mary Shelley and Jane Austen; and the reaction to Byronism of the Brontës and Harriet Beecher Stowe. It thus challenges previous critics’ segregation of the male Romantic poets from their female peers, whose agenda was perceived to be different: domestic and social CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Byron, Nineteenth-century Women Travel Writers and Italy 3. ‘Thunder without rain’: Byronism and Mary Shelley’s Dialectic of Power and Light 4. The Libertine and the Lady Novelist: Ironic Romantics Byron and Austen 5. Sex and Religion: The Brontë Sisters and Libertinism 6. Harriet Beecher Stowe and the Byronic Heroine 7. Conclusion

Crossing Gender in Shakespeare Routledge Studies in Shakespeare

James W. Stone, National University of Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 186pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87360-4; February 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

241 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this book, Stone effects a return to gender, after many years of neglect by Twenty-First-Century critics, via a methodology of close reading that foregrounds moments of sexual decentering and disequilibrium within the text and in the interstices of the dialogue between Shakespeare and his critics. Issues addressed range from the cross dressing of Viola and Imogen to the cross gartering of Malvolio, the sound of "un" and the uncanny lyric narcissism of Richard II, Hamlet’s misogyny, androgyny, and the poison of marital/political "union," Othello’s fears of impotence, rumors of Antony’s emasculation versus the militant yet nurturing triumphalism of Cleopatra’s suicide, and Posthumus’s hysterical reaction to the "woman’s part" in himself and his compensatory fantasies of parthenogenesis. Stone unpacks ideologically powerful but unsustainable male claims to self-identity and sameness, set over against man’s type-gendering of women as the origin of divisive sexual difference, discord, and the dissolution of marriage. Men who blame women for the difference that divides and weakens their sense of unity and sameness to oneself are unconscious that the uncanny feminine is not outside the masculine, its reassuring canny opposite; it is inside the masculine, its uncanny difference from itself.

CONTENTS Preface Acknowledgments Introduction 1: The Transvestic Glove-Text of Twelfth Night 2: The Sound of "Un" in Richard II 3: Androgynous "Union" and the Woman in Hamlet 4: Impotence and the Feminine in Othello 5: Martial Cleopatra and the Remasculation of Antony 6: The Woman Within in Cymbeline Epilogue: The Tain of the Mirror Notes Bibliography Index

Shakespeare and Trauma Routledge Studies in Shakespeare

Catherine Silverstone, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 144pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-95645-1; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this original study, Silverstone explores the relationship between performances of Shakespeare’s plays and the ways in which they engage with various traumatic events and histories. In considering this relationship, she asks how performance might articulate traumatic events and investigates the ethical and political implications of attempts to represent trauma in performance. In exploring these issues, Silverstone interrogates a range of narratives about Shakespeare, gender, sexuality, ethnicity, colonisation and violence.

Aesthetic Pleasure in Twentieth-Century Women's Food Writing Routledge Studies in Twentieth-Century Literature

Alice McLean, Sweet Briar College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87138-9; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this study, McLean explores the aesthetic pleasures of eating and writing in the lives of three of the most eloquent food writers of the twentieth-century: M.F.K. Fisher (1908-1992), Alice B. Toklas (1877-1967), and Elizabeth David (1913-1992). Growing up during a time when women's food writing was largely limited to the domestic cookbook, which delineated a track hedged by duty, domesticity, and self-sacrifice, Fisher, Toklas, and David each pioneered an idiosyncratic form of writing that challenged such rigidly gendered and proscriptive bounds. They did so by writing about food as a source of sensual pleasure, both aesthetic and erotic. For these women, food encouraged a sensory engagement with their environment and a physical receptivity toward pleasure that engendered their creative aesthetic. Articulating a language through which female appetite is not only celebrated but also artfully and publicly sated, Fisher, Toklas, and David expanded women’s food writing beyond the domestic realm to establish a tradition of British and American culinary literature that celebrates female appetite for pleasure and for culinary adventure. In so doing, they illuminate the power of genre-bending food writing to transgress and reconfigure conventional gender ideologies.

Diary Poetics Routledge Studies in Twentieth-Century Literature

Anna Jackson, Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 217pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99831-4; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

242 The diary is a genre that is often thought of as virtually formless, a "capacious hold-all" for the writer’s thoughts, and as offering unmediated access to the diarist’s true self. Focusing on the diaries of Katherine Mansfield, Virginia Woolf, Antonia White, Joe Orton, John Cheever, and Sylvia Plath, this book looks at how six very different professional writers have approached the diary form with its particular demands and literary potential. As a sequence of separate entries the diary is made up of both gaps and continuities, and the different ways diarists negotiate these aspects of the diary form has radical effects on how their diaries represent both the world and the biographical self. The different published editions of the diaries by Katherine Mansfield, Virginia Woolf and Sylvia Plath show how editorial decisions can construct sometimes startlingly different biographical portraits. Yet all diaries are constructed, and all diary constructions depend on how the writer works with the diary form.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction: Form and the Diary 1: Antonia White 2: John Cheever 3: Joe Orton 4: Katherine Mansfield 5: Virginia Woolf 6: Sylvia Plath 7: The Dash 8: Sentence Fragments: Diary Cows? 9: "I" And "You" Conclusion: "And coming here this morning..." Notes Bibliography Index

Gender, Ireland and Cultural Change Routledge Studies in Twentieth-Century Literature

Gerardine Meaney, University College Dublin, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 289pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-95790-8; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyzes the roots of Irish social and sexual conservatism and the dramatic change in one of the most basic areas of human experience: how we understand our roles as men and women. It looks at the relationship between sexual and cultural dissent and the long, slow role of culture in generating change. Meaney offers the first major study that sets the relationship between national and gender identities in the context of analysis of Irish identity as white identity, tracing the identification of female sexuality with foreign threat in nationalist discourse and its consequences in contemporary representations of immigrant women and their children. The study presents an extended analysis of the relationship between feminism and nationalism, and between gender and modernism. Analyzing the role of Joyce in contemporary culture and Yeats and Synge in the understanding of tradition, it also sets their work in the context of their less known female contemporaries and challenges conventional understandings of the Irish literary tradition. The book concludes with an analysis of the relationship between race and masculinity in Irish characters in US and British culture, from Patriot Games to Rescue Me and The Wire, The Romans in Britain to M.I.5 CONTENTS Introduction Part I: Race, Women and Nation Chapter One: Virgin Mother Ireland Chapter Two: Landscapes of Desire: Women and Ireland in Twentieth Century Film Chapter Three: Feminisms, Nationalisms and Identities: Gender and Dissent Part II: Writing, Bodies, Canons Chapter Four: Modernism and the Gender of Writing Chapter Five: Haunting James Joyce: Invisible Bodies Chapter Six: The Sons of Cuchulainn: Violence, the Family, and the Irish Canon Part III: Race, Masculinity and Popular Culture Chapter Seven: The Devil’s Own Patriot Games: The Troubles and the Hollywood Action Movie Chapter Eight: Masculinity and Ethnicity: The Wire and Rescue Me Chapter Nine: The Undercover Irishman: Extimating National Anxiety Conclusion Notes Bibliography Index

Italo Calvino's Architecture of Lightness Routledge Studies in Twentieth-Century Literature

Letizia Modena, Villanova University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88038-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This study recovers Italo Calvino's central place in a lost history of interdisciplinary thought, politics, and literary philosophy in the 1960s. Drawing on his letters, essays, critical reviews, and fiction, as well as a wide range of works--primarily urban planning and design theory and history--circulating among his primary interlocutors, this book takes as its point of departure a sweeping reinterpretation of Invisible Cities . Passages from Calvino's most famous novel routinely appear as aphorisms in calendars, posters, and the popular literature of inspiration and self-help, reducing the novel to vague abstractions and totalizing wisdom about thinking outside the box. The shadow of postmodern studies has had a similarly diminishing effect on this text, rendering up an accomplished but ultimately apolitical novelistic experimentation in endless deconstructive deferrals, the shiny surfaces of play, and the ultimately rigged game of self-referentiality. In contrast, this study draws on an archive of untranslated Italian- and French-language materials on urban planning, architecture, and utopian architecture to argue that Calvino's novel in fact introduces readers to the material history of urban renewal in Italy, France, and the U.S. in the 1960s, as well as the multidisciplinary core of cultural life in that decade: the complex and continuous interplay among novelists and architects, scientists and artists, literary historians and visual studies scholars.

His last love poem for the dying city was in fact profoundly engaged, deeply committed to the ethical dimensions of both architecture

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

243 and lived experience in the spaces of modernity as well as the resistant practices of reading and utopian imagining that his urban studies in turn inspired.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Prelude to Invisible Cities: Urban Planners and the City in Crisis 2. Utopia and Imagination: The Ethical Imperatives of Lightness 3. Three Memos for the Next Millenium, or the Language of the Future City 4. Architectures of Lightness 5.

Conclusion

Jewishness and Masculinity from the Modern to the Postmodern Routledge Studies in Twentieth-Century Literature

Neil R. Davison, Oregon State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $105.00; 229x152 mm; 315pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87586-8; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This study examines the impact of racial, gender, and religious constructs of Jewish masculinity on a select group of male writers including George Du Maurier, Theodor Herzl, Ernest Hemingway, James Joyce, and Philip Roth during the Modernist and Postmodern eras. In reading the work of these authors, Davison demonstrates how religious-based prejudices as well as doctrinal Judaic concepts were sustained in the discourse of race and gender surrounding "the Jew." The project engages a dynamic composed of the historically constitutive Jewish racial portrait, the psychosexual impact of that racial theory as internalized by Jewish males, and differing or conflicting discussions of Judaic-based gender and codes of male behavior. By focusing alternately on non-Jewish and Jewish writers, Davison explores how the racial/gender construct of "the feminized Jew" was pivotal to each in negotiating maleselfhood during his encounter with modernity. The study engages these issues during the Dreyfus era, within early Zionism, and in post-war High Modernism. In a final chapter on Roth, Davison explores how the author’s postmodernism remains tethered to Jewish history, liberalism, gender, and Judaic concepts.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction 1: "The Jew" as Homme/Femme Fatale: Jewish (Art)ifice, Trilby , and Drefyus 2: Emancipation to Das Muskeljüden : Zionism, Masculinity, and the Liberated Jewish Body 3: The Feminized Jewish Pugilist: Racial Ambivalence and Weak Muscle-Jews 4: Gendered-Jewishness in Ulysses : Bloom as Semi-queer Jew 5: From Klugman to Pipik: Philip Roth and Postcolonial/Postmodern Old-New Jewish Gender Coda Notes Index

Making Space in the Works of James Joyce Routledge Studies in Twentieth-Century Literature

Edited by Valerie Benejam, University of Nantes, Frances and John Bishop, University of California, Berkeley, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99741-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION James Joyce’s preoccupation with space—be it urban, geographic, stellar, geometrical or optical—is a central and idiosyncratic feature of his work. In this volume some of the most esteemed scholars in Joyce studies have come together to evaluate the perception and mental construction of space, as it is evoked through Joyce’s writing. With essays addressing all of Joyce's major works, this volume is a critical contribution to our understanding of modernism, as well as the relationship between space, language, and literature.

CONTENTS Editors’ Introduction, Valérie Bénéjam and John Bishop I. Spatial Perception 1. Fretful Effs and Flung Phrases: Joyce’s Manuscripts as Spatial and Visual Objects, Mike Groden 2. "Where are we at all? and whenabouts in the name of space?" (FW 558.33): Joyce's Mapping of Unconscious Space, John Bishop 3. The Acoustic Space of Ulysses, Valérie Bénéjam 4. Optical Space in Dubliners and A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man, André Topia 5. A Skin of Thought. Maud Ellmann II. Modern Urban Space 6. The Thomistic Representation of Dublin in Ulysses, Sam Slote 7. Disorienting Dublin, Eric Bulson 8. All Over the Place: James Joyce and the Inner Speech of the City, Luke Gibbons 9. Spatial Imaginings: History and Dislocation in Joyce’s Dubliners, Anne Fogarty 10. Gabriel’s Re-Mapping of Dublin: The Fabricated Cityscape of "The Dead", Liam Lanigan 11. A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Urban Planner: Joyce and Dublin’s Engineering Cultures, Michael Rubenstein III. Language and Geography 12. Mapping the ‘Call from Afar’: The Echo of Motifs in James Joyce’s Literary Landscape, Katherine O’Callaghan 13. Joyce the Post, David Spurr 14. The Habitus of Language(s) in Finnegans Wake, Laurent Milesi

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

244

Primo Levi's Narratives of Embodiment Routledge Studies in Twentieth-Century Literature

Charlotte Ross, University of Birminham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88041-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION For many people Levi is known as a survivor of the Holocaust and testimonial writer. Fewer people think of him as a science fiction writer who engages with issues such as virtual reality devices, the cloning of human beings, posthuman subjectivity and cyborg bodies: that is, human subjects whose bodies and consciousnesses are aligned with and augmented by non-organic components, dissolving the boundaries between the biological and the technological. This book explores precisely these issues. Ross analyses Levi’s representations of, and reflections on, human experience, with a focus on an aspect of his work that has hitherto received little sustained critical attention; his representations of the human body, and embodiment. Offering a reading of some of Levi’s lessdiscussed works (including essays, newspaper columns and his ‘science fiction’ stories), Ross elucidates Levi’s concept of the human as the creator of containers alongside his representations of our embodied and intellectual selves, bringing his work into new dialogue with critical and theoretical reflections on human existence.

CONTENTS Introduction I. Ontologies and Epistemologies 1. Containers and their Contents 2. Embodying (in/non) Humanity 3. Embodied Knowledge and Linguistic Containers 4. Epistemological Containers: Science and Literature II. Bodily Modifications and Mutations 5. Bodies, Prostheses and Sentient Technologies 6. Bureaucratized and Technologized Bodies 7. Close Couplings and Docile Bodies 8. Re-Combining the Organic Human Body 9. Conclusions

Travel and Modernist Literature Routledge Studies in Twentieth-Century Literature

Alexandra Peat, University of Toronto, Scarborough, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87233-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Through close readings of works from Henry James to W. E. B. Du Bois and from Virginia Woolf to Jean Rhys, Peat discusses how fictional travellers negotiate and adapt various tropes of travel (such as quest, expatriation, displacement, and exile) as models for their own journeys. Specifically, Peat considers the ethical dimensions of modernist travel from two distinct vantages. The first focuses on the relationship between the secular and the sacred in modernist travel literature, arguing that the recurrent narrative of secular travel is haunted by a desire for spiritual transcendence. The second posits modernist travel fiction as a potentially positive example of transcultural relations, consciously arguing against the received notion that travel during an imperial era is always by nature itself imperialist. Throughout, particular attention is paid to the transnational nature of modernism and the various global flows traced by modernist literature.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction: The Spiritual Ethics of Modern Pilgrimage 1: Initiatory Pilgrimage: The Female Pilgrim Comes of Age in Rose Macaulay’s The Towers of Trebizond, E. M. Forster’s A Room With a View and Virginia Woolf’s The Voyage Out 2: Acquisitive Pilgrimage: Renouncing the Quest in Henry James’s The American and The Ambassadors and E. M. Forster’s Where Angels Fear to Tread and A Passage to India 3: Wandering Pilgrimage: Mobile Expatriatism in Ernest Hemingway’s The Sun Also Rises, F. Scott Fitzgerald’s Tender is the Night, and Claude McKay’s Banjo 4: Imaginative Pilgrimage: Home and Exile in Jean Rhys’s Voyage in the Dark, Evelyn Waugh’s A Handful of Dust, Joyce Cary’s To Be a Pilgrim, and Virginia Woolf’s The Years Epilogue Notes Bibliography Index

The Construction of Irish Identity in American Literature Routledge Transnational Perspectives on American Literature

Chris Dowd, Missouri Southern State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88043-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the development of literary constructions of Irish-American identity from the mid-nineteenth century arrival of the Famine generation through the Great Depression. It goes beyond an analysis of negative Irish stereotypes and shows how Irish

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

245 characters became the site of intense cultural debate regarding American identity, with some writers imagining Irishness to be the antithesis of Americanness, but others suggesting Irishness to be a path to Americanization. This study emphasizes the importance of considering how a sense of Irishness was imagined by both Irish-American writers conscious of the process of self-definition as well as non-Irish writers responsive to shifting cultural concerns regarding ethnic others. It analyzes specific iconic Irish-American characters including Mark Twain’s Huck Finn and Margaret Mitchell’s Scarlet O’Hara, as well as lesser-known Irish monsters who lurked in the American imagination such as T.S. Eliot’s Sweeney and Frank Norris’ McTeague. As Dowd argues, in contemporary American society, Irishness has been largely absorbed into a homogenous white culture, and as a result, it has become a largely invisible ethnicity to many modern literary critics. Too often, they simply do not see Irishness or do not think it relevant, and as a result, many Irish-American characters have been de-ethnicized in the critical literature of the past century. This volume reestablishes the importance of Irish ethnicity to many characters that have come to be misread as generically white and shows how Irishness is integral to their stories.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Staging Ireland in America 2. ‘Sivilizing’ Irish-America 3. The Invisible Ethnicity 4. Replacing the Immigrant Narrative 5. Conclusion

Slave Heroism in the Transatlantic Imagination Routledge Transnational Perspectives on American Literature

Celeste-Marie Bernier, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-95830-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume examines representations of slave heroism in the African American, African Caribbean and European American transatlantic literary imagination. Chapters focus on heroic figures such as Toussaint L’Ouverture, Joseph Cinque, Madison Washington, Nat Turner, Sojourner Truth and Harriet Tubman, exploring dramatisations of slave heroes by well-known and neglected nineteenth- and twentieth-century authors, including Frederick Douglass, Lydia Maria Child, William Wells Brown, Charles Chesnutt, William Styron, C. L. R. James, Harriet Beecher Stowe, Langston Hughes, Arna Bontemps and Pauline E. Hopkins.

Travel and Dislocation in Contemporary American Fiction Routledge Transnational Perspectives on American Literature

Aliki Varvogli, University of Dundee, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99582-5; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers a critical study and analysis of American novels that quite literally "go outward": it discusses books whose protagonists go abroad, and concentrates on narratives that take place mainly away from the US’s geographical borders.

Contemporary American fiction has featured soldiers, missionaries, tourists, heritage travelers, fugitives from the law, aid workers and aspiring philanthropists. What do these characters reveal about what it means to be American at the beginning of the twenty-first century? And what do these novels tell us about the place of America in the world, and about the nature of American literature itself?

These are some of the broader themes and questions that this study explores.

CONTENTS Introduction Part I: Africa and the Limits of Fiction 1. Philip Caputo, Acts of Faith and Dave Eggers, What is the What 2. Russell Banks, The Darling and Norman Rush, Mortals Part II: Travel and Globalisation 3. Amy Tan, Saving Fish from Drowning and Ruth Ozeki, My Year of Meats 4. Jonathan Safran Foer, Everything Is Illuminated and Dave Eggers, You Shall Know Our Velocity Part III: Patriots and Expatriates 5. Nell Freudenberger, Lucky Girls and Arthur Phillips, Prague 6. Ethan Canin, Carry Me Across the Water and Chang Rae Lee, A Gesture Life 7. Conclusion

Narrative Developments from Chaucer to Defoe Edited by Gerd Bayer, University of Erlangen, Germany and Ebbe Klitgard, Roskilde University, Denmark PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87948-4; December 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

246 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This collection analyzes how narrative technique developed from the late Middle Ages to the beginning of the 18th century. Taking Chaucer’s influential Middle English works as the starting point, the original essays in this volume explore diverse aspects of the formation of early modern prose narratives. Essays focus on how a sense of selfness or subjectivity begins to establish itself in various narratives, thus providing a necessary requirement for the individuality that dominates later novels. Other contributors investigate how forms of intertextuality inscribe early modern prose within previous traditions of literary writing. A group of chapters presents the process of genre-making as taking place both within the confines of the texts proper, but also within paratextual features and through the rationale behind cataloguing systems. A final group of essays takes the implicit notion of the growing realism of early modern prose narrative to task by investigating the various social discourses that feature ever more strongly within the social, commercial, or religious dimensions of those texts. The book addresses a wide range of literary figures such as Chaucer, Wroth, Greene, Sidney, Deloney, Pepys, Behn, and Defoe. Written by an international group of scholars, it investigates the transformations of narrative form from medieval times through the Renaissance and the early modern period, and into the eighteenth century.

CONTENTS Introduction Ebbe Klitgård and Gerd Bayer Part I: The Growing Sense of Self 1. The Encoding of Subjectivity in Chaucer’s Wife of Bath’s Tale and Pardoner’s Tale Ebbe Klitgård 2. The Representation of Thought from Chaucer to Aphra Behn Monika Fludernik 3.

Writing Selves: Early Modern Life Writing and the Genesis of the Novel Miriam Nandi Part II: The Force of Intertextuality 4.

Chaucer’s Presence as Pre-Text to The Parliament of Fowls William Quinn 5. From Hell: Late Elisabethan Complaints in the Mirror Tradition Anna Swärdh 6. Telling Tales: the Artistry of Lady Mary Wroth’s Urania Rahel Orgis 7. The Early English Novel in Antwerp: The Impact of Jan van Doesborch and Lawrence Andrewe Robert Maslen Part III: The Consolidation of Genre 8. Narrative and Poesis: Defoe and the Problems of Conversion Gabrielle Starr 9. The Prenovel: The Constitutive Force of Catalogues Goran Stanivukovic 10. Paratext and Genre: Making 17th-Century Readers Gerd Bayer Part IV: The Presence of Social Discourses 11.

Narrative and Gossip in Troilus and Criseyde Neil Cartlidge 12. Hollow Models: Thomas Deloney’s Adoption of Prose Alan Drosdick 13. The Transformative Power of Prose: The Adaptation of the Eucharist Debate in Elizabethan Romance Christina Wald

Celebrity and Glamour in Contemporary Russia BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Edited by Helena Goscilo, Ohio State University, USA and Vlad Strukov, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58765-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This is the first book to explore the phenomenon of glamour and celebrity in contemporary Russian culture, ranging across media forms, disciplinary boundaries and modes of inquiry, with particular emphasis on the media personality. The book demonstrates how the process of ‘celebrification’ in Russia coincides with the dizzying pace of social change and economic transformation, the latter enabling an unprecedented fascination with glamour and its requisite extravagance; how in the 1990s and 2000s, celebrities - such as film or television stars - moved away from their home medium to become celebrities straddling various media; and how celebrity is a symbol manipulated by the dominant culture and embraced by the masses. It examines the primacy of the visual in celebrity construction and its dominance over the verbal, alongside the interdisciplinary, cross-media, post-Soviet landscape of today’s fame culture. Taking into account both general tendencies and individual celebrities, including pop-diva Alla Pugacheva and ex-President and current Prime Minister Vladimir Putin, the book analyses the internal dynamics of the institutions involved in the production, marketing, and maintenance of celebrities, as well as the larger cultural context and the imperatives that drive Russian society’s romance with glamour and celebrity.

CONTENTS Part I The Art of Politics, and the Politics of Art 1. The Ultimate Celebrity: VVP as VIP Objet d’Art 2. The Mistress of Moscow: a Case of Corporate Celebrity Part II Prosaic Glamour 3. Akunin’s Secret and Fandorin’s Luck: Postmodern Celebrity in Post-Soviet Russia 4. Glamour à la Oksana Robski - Tatiana Mikhailova Part III Mediating Glamour: Film, Estrada, and New Media Stars 5.

Fatherland, Family, and Faith: The Power of Nikita Mikhalkov’s Celebrity 6. "Much Ado and Nothing:" Mikhail Zadornov as a Celebrity of Russian Comedy 7. Russian Internet Stars: Gizmos, Geeks, and Glory Part IV Gendered Sounds and Screams of Stardom 8. Feminism à la Russe? Pugacheva-Orbakaite’s Celebrity Construction through Family Bonds 9. Elevating Verka Serdiuchka: A StarStudy in Excess Performativity Part V Moscow Snobbery: From ‘High’ Art to Haute Cuisine 10. Zurab Tsereteli’s Exegi Monumentum, Luzhkov’s Largesse, and the Collateral Rewards of Animosity 11. Hot Prospekts: Dining in the New Moscow

Cultural and Social Change in Taiwan Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Ming-Yeh Rawnsley, University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42187-4; February 2011

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

247 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION From a Japanese colony to an authoritarian regime to a new democracy, Taiwanese society has gone through many phases of social transition since 1945. This book examines the processes of cultural, social and political transition in Taiwan since 1945, investigating their impact on the Taiwanese cultural industries, with a particular focus on cinema and theatre, and showing how changes in cinema and theatre illustrate the broader cultural, social and political changes taking place. It sets out the history of the development of Taiwanese theatre and cinema since the 1930s, and relates this to broader changes within Taiwanese society. It analyses the sociopolitics of Taiwanese-language cinema, and the impact of language policies including the government’s encouragement and promotion of Mandarin in the 1960s. Important issues are considered, notably the modernization and commercialization of cinema and theatre in Taiwan, focusing in particular on Taiwanese produced gangster movies, and also questions of liberalization and democratization, especially the new wave of independent cinema that arrived in the mid 1980s. The book includes interviews with important movie directors, actors, producers, industry workers and critics, including Chen Qiu-yan and Huang Jian-ye. Overall, it provides a full account of cultural, political and social change in Taiwan over the last eighty years, and its relationship with Taiwanese cinema and theatre.

CONTENTS 1. Cultural and Social Changes in Taiwan: 1930s–1990s 2. Socio-Politics of Taiwanese-Language Cinema: Symposium by the National Movie Foundation on ‘How to Preserve the Heritage of Taiwanese Cinema’ 3. Language Policies and Taiwanese Cinema: An Interview with Chen Qiu-yan 4. From ‘Taiwanese’ Cinema to ‘Mandarin’ Cinema: Bai Jing-rui and Cinema in Taiwan 5.

Modernization and Commercialization: Interviewing Huang Jian-ye on Gangster Movies 6. Liberalization of Cinema: Interviewing Huang Yu-shan on the New Independent Cinema Movement in Taiwan 7. Democratization of Cinema: Transition of Identities and Hou Hsiao-Hsian 8. The Past, Present and Future of the Taiwanese Modern Theatre 9. Democratization and Modernization of Traditional Theatre: Wu Xing-guo on ‘Consolidation of Traditional and Modern Theatres’ 10. Democratization of Culture: Searching for the Lost Public Sphere – A Dialogue between Zhong Ming-de and Huang Jian-ye 11. Conclusion

Global Chinese Cinema Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Edited by Gary D. Rawnsley and Ming-Yeh T. Rawnsley, both of University of Leeds, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45315-8; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The film Hero , directed by Zhang Yimou and released in 2002, is widely regarded as the first globally successful indigenous Chinese blockbuster. A big expensive film with multiple stars, spectacular scenery, and astonishing action sequences, it touched on key questions of Chinese culture, nation and politics, and was both a domestic sensation and an international hit. This book explores the reasons for the film’s popularity with its audiences, discussing the factors which so resonated with those who watched the film. It examines questions such as Chinese national unity, the search for cultural identity and role models from China’s illustrious precommunist past, and the portrayal of political and aesthetic values, and attitudes to gender, sex, love, and violence which are relatively new to China. The book demonstrates how the film, and China’s growing film industry more generally, have in fact very strong international connections, with Western as well as Chinese financing, stars recruited from the East Asian region more widely, and extensive interactions between Hollywood and Asian artists and technicians. Overall, the book provides fascinating insights into recent developments in Chinese society, popular culture and cultural production.

CONTENTS Part I: Changing Discourse of National Identities and Heroism 1. The Political Narrative(s) of Hero - Gary D. Rawnsley 2. Recycled Heroes, Invented Tradition and Transformed Identity - Yingjie Guo 3. The Emperor and the Assassin: China’s National Hero and the Myth of State Origins - Yiyan Wang 4. The King, the Musician and the Village Idiot: Images of Manhood - Kam Louie Part II: Transformations of Cultural Perception, Genre and Stardom 5. Twenty-first Century Women Warriors: Variations on a Traditional Theme - Louise Edwards 6. On ‘Tian Xia (All under Heaven)’ in Zhang Yimou’s Hero - Xiaoming Chen and Ming-Yeh T. Rawnsley 7. Hero : Rewriting the Chinese Martial Arts Film Genre - Haizhou Wang and Ming-Yeh T. Rawnsley 8. ‘Would You Rather Spend More Time Making Serious Cinema?’: Hero and Tony Leung’s Polysemic Masculinity - Mark Gallagher 9. Fifteen Minutes of Fame: Transient/Transnational Female Stardom in Hero - Olivia Khoo Part III: Local vs. Global: Deconstructing Global Chinese Blockbusters 10. Camp Pleasure in an Era of Chinese Blockbusters: Internet Reception of Hero in Mainland China - Sabrina Qiong Yu 11. North American Reception of Zhang Yimou’s Hero - Wendy Larson 12. Heroic Music: From Hunan to Hollywood and Back Katy Gow 13. Visual Effects Magic: Hero ’s Sydney Connection - Mary Farquhar 14.Towards a Global Blockbuster: The Political Economy of Hero ’s Nationalism - Anthony Fung and Joseph M. Chan

HIV/AIDS, Health and the Media in China Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Johanna Hood, University of Technology, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47198-5; October 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

248 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION HIV/AIDS is an increasingly serious problem in China, with an increasing number of new cases every year. As a result, HIV organizations have boomed, with both state and non-governmental organisations responding to the threat with campaigns to increase public awareness of the disease, utilising the media as the primary tool to reshape citizens’ understandings and views of HIV/AIDS. This book explores how HIV/AIDS is portrayed in China’s media. It argues that, despite increasing education campaigns, media coverage and social and academic openness towards HIV/AIDS, many Chinese of the majority Han ethnic group regard infection as a distant possibility, believing themselves to be immune and infection a problem only for certain non-Han ethnic groups with perceived lower moral standards, in particular black Africans. The book explores how HIV/AIDS is reported, analysing the language used in constructing and encoding the health narrative, its subjects, and ideas about the disease. It demonstrates how China’s media frequently employs negative events to present the most extreme possibilities of poverty, danger, disasters and disease, with black Africa portrayed as an antiquated, distant and socioculturally and politically backward place, uniquely unsuitable for the containment of disease, in contrast with the progressive, scientifically sophisticated and morally upstanding Chinese. It argues that this discourse has had the effect of distancing many Chinese from the perceived possibility of infection, thus compromising the effectiveness of public health campaigns on HIV/AIDs. It suggests that the key to combating the spread of the disease lies in challenging the racialised narratives through which the disease is portrayed in China’s media, rather than simply by aiming to educate greater numbers of people.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. HIV/AIDS Narratives and the Media in China 3. Differentiating Understandings: Black and Blackness, Race and Place 4. Africa, Africans and HIV/AIDS 5. Governance and the Production of Yuanshi 6. Kexue Science and Modern Morality 7.

Conclusion

Islam and Popular Culture in Indonesia and Malaysia Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Edited by Andrew Weintraub PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56518-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Home to approximately one-fifth of the world’s Muslim population, Indonesia and Malaysia are often overlooked or misrepresented in media discourses about Islam. Islam is a religion but there is also a popular culture, or popular cultures of Islam that are mass mediated, commercialized, pleasure-filled, humorous, and representative of large segments of society. This book focuses on these forms and the accompanying practices of production, circulation, marketing, and consumption of Islam. It dispels the notion that Islam is monolithic, militaristic, and primarily Middle Eastern and emphasizes upon its dynamic, contested, and performative nature in contemporary Indonesia and Malaysia. It addresses important questions such as – Under what historical and social conditions have popular culture and Islam become mutually constitutive as sites for defining Islam in the Malay world? What forms does Islam take in popular culture? What meanings about Islam do audiences derive from popular culture? What is the relationship between Islam and Malay identity, viz a viz long-standing debates about language, culture, race, and ethnicity in the Malay world?

CONTENTS Introduction: Islam, Popular Culture & Southeast Asian Studies Andrew N. Weintraub 1. Upgraded Piety and Pleasure: The New Middle Class and Islam in Indonesian Popular Culture Ariel Heryanto 2. Negotiating Mass Media Interests and Heterogeneous Muslim Audiences in Indonesian Television Ishadi SK 3. Music, Islam, and the Commercial Media in Contemporary Indonesia R. Anderson Sutton 4. The Liberal Islam Network in Cyberspace Muhamad Ali 5. Sexing Islam: Religion and Contemporary Malaysian Cinema Noritah Omar 6. Taking Liberties: Independent Filmmakers Representing the Tudung in Malaysia Gaik Cheng Khoo 7.

Multiple Islams, Multiple Modernities: Art Cinema in between Nationhood and Everyday Islam in Bangladesh and Malaysia Zakir Hossain Raju 8. Holy Matrimony? The Print Politics of Polygamy in Indonesia Suzanne Brenner 9. Sex Sells, or Does it? Discourses of Sex and Sexuality in Popular Women's Magazines in Contemporary Indonesia Sarah Krier 10. Preaching, Pop and Politics: Nasyid Boy Band Music in Muslim Southeast Asia Bart Barendregt 11. Musical Modernity and Arab Aesthetics in Arab-Indonesian Orkes Gambus Birgit Berg 12. Music as a Medium for Communication, Unity, Education, and Da'wah Rhoma Irama

New Media and Human Rights in Southeast Asia Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Edited by Mike Hayes, Mahidol University, Thailand and James Gomez, Keio University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56111-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

249 The rapid development of human rights standards and protection mechanisms in South East Asia for the past decade has caused a number of tensions. Among the most significant of these is in the area of new media, where many governments have had to reassess, or even invent, new controls in a medium widely recognized as almost uncontrollable. While there have been historic battles between the media and government in many South East Asian countries, this book concentrates on the new sites where these battles take place, and further, the new actors involved. It analyzes the democratizing capabilities by looking past state-citizen relationships to the roles of the private sector, and to the control mechanisms in place in the new media. It examines the ways in which the new media is challenging views of democracy and human rights, how it both enables and violates human rights standards and how it is being used by organizations and individuals to support human rights and democracy. By bringing together key issues from human rights and alternative media organizations in Asia, the book will stimulate discussion, exchange ideas, and inspire further research in the area of new media and human rights in Asia.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Mike Hayes and James Gomez 2. Relating Human Rights to the New Media Mike Hayes 3. Online Opposition Journalism: Promoting Democracy and Human Rights in Singapore James Gomez 4. Malaysia: What now for Malaysian Media? Eric Loo 5. Transnational Capital: The Political economy of the Shin – Temasek Deal Ukrist Pathmanand 6. The implications for Internet Regulation on Democratic Public Sphere in Thailand Pirongrong Ramasoota Rananand 7. Freedom of Expression in a Surveillance Society: Activism in Thailand Supinya Klangnarong 8. Cambodia, Human Rights and the New Media: A Struggle for Control Judith Clarke 9. Reading between the Lines: The Private Media and New Media in Burma Myint Zaw 10. New Media and Solidarity Movements: Revisiting Burmese Identity Outside Burma Carole Faucher 11. Advocating for Press Freedom in the New Media Roby Alampay 12. Private Sector Influence in the New Media Jonathan Woodier

On-Line Society in China Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Edited by David Herold, Hong Kong Polytechnic University and Peter Wolfgang Marolt, National University of Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56539-4; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book argues that the internet in China is a separate 'space' in which a separate society of individuals and institutions interact, and that, while the 'real' and the 'online' spaces interact and influence each other, the Chinese internet is more than merely a technological or media extension of offline Chinese society. Unlike other studies of the internet in China, which either explore what is specifically Chinese about the internet in China, or which focus on new forms of interaction between social actors in China or the new social movements made possible by their new interaction, or which, using the methods of media studies, explore the internet as another medium for entertainment, this book examines Chinese people on the internet and what they actually do on the internet, discussing a wide range of different activities.

CONTENTS Introduction: Noise, Spectacle, Politics – Carnival in Chinese Cyberspace, David Herold Part I – Creating the Carnival – Netizens and the State 1. China's Internet and the Dynamic Manipulation of Online Discourse, Peter Marolt 2. The Internet Police in China: Regulation, Scope and Myth, Peng Hwa Ang and Xiaoyan Chen 3. China's Censorship 2.0: How companies censor bloggers, Rebecca Mackinnon Part II – Celebrating the Carnival – Fun, Freak-shows, and Masquerades 4. The Chinese Internet as Paradoxical Space, Hongmei Li 5. Egao: Visual Carnival and Iconoclasm in Chinese Cyberspace, Yongmin Zhao 6. Beyond virtual carnival and masquerade: Gaming in Chinese Cyberspace, Weihua Wu PART III – Instrumentalising the Carnival – Rioting as Activism 7. Human Flesh Search Engines: From Carnivalesque Riots to Online Democracy, David Herold and Rodney Chu 8. One voice emerging from the noise: Open Source Computing in China, Matteo Tarantino 9. Chinese internet users and global privacy advocacy, Kenneth Farrall 10. Taking Urban Conservation Online: Chinese Civic Action Groups and the Internet, Nicolai Volland Conclusion – Netizens and Citizens, Cyberspace and Modern China, Peter Marolt and David Herold

Politics and the Media in 21st Century Indonesia Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Edited by David Hill, Murdoch University, Australia and Krishna Sen, Curtin University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47652-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the media in the post-authoritarian politics of 21 st century Indonesia. It addresses two important and related questions: How is the media being transformed, both in terms of its structure and content, by the changing political economy of Indonesia after the fall of Soeharto? What is the potential impact of this media in enabling or hampering the development of democracy in Indonesia? Whilst recognising the impact of the fall of Soeharto and the New Order regime, this book shows that many

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

250 of the factors influencing developments in politics and the media were global and would have had an impact upon Indonesia irrespective of the government in power. Specifically, it explores the role of ethnic identity and nationalism; increasingly cheaper and diversified means of media production, challenging state monopolies of the media; the reality of a simultaneously personalised and globalised media; and the challenging of the formerly paradigmatic connection between a free media and democracy by global capitalism and corporate control of the media. It explores the impact of these developments on Indonesia’s politics and media, arguing that the dominant forces transforming Indonesia today did not arise from the singular point of Sueharto’s resignation, but from a set of factors that are autonomous from, yet interlace with, Indonesia’s internal politics, to shape its cultural industries.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Mediating the Politics of Regime Change in Asia Krishna Sen 2. Ownership and its Impact on Journalists and their practices Ignatius Haryanto 3. Indonesian Journalism Post-Soeharto: Changing Ideals and Professional Practices Janet Steele 4. "Radio Activity": The Creation of Media-Literate Radio Audiences in Indonesia Edwin Jurriëns 5. Media and morality: Pornography post Soeharto Jennifer Lindsay 6. The Construction of Women in Contemporary Indonesian Women’s Cinema Hapsari Dwiningtyas Sulistyani 7. Reorganisation of Media Power in Post-Authoritarian Indonesia Rachma Ida 8. The Transformation of the Media Scene: From War to Peace in the Moluccas, Eastern Indonesia Birgit Bräuchler 9. On the Borders of the Nation-State: Local Media in the Land of Papua David T. Hill 10. Local Media, Local Power and the Monarchy in Jogyakarta Priyambudi Sulistiyanto 11. Riding Wave of Change: Islamic Press in Post-Authoritarian Indonesia Budi Irawanto 12. Community Radio and the Empowerment of Local Culture in Indonesia Mario Antonius Birowo

Rethinking Transnational Chinese Cinema Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Jeremy E. Taylor, University of Sheffield, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49355-0; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Amoy-dialect film industry thrived in Hong Kong and Southeast Asia in the 1950s. Film in Amoy dialect, a dialect of Chinese, reflects a particular period in the history of the Chinese diaspora, and has been little studied due to its ambiguous place within the wider realm of Chinese and East Asian film history. This book represents the first full length, critical study of the origin, the significant rise and the rapid decline of the Amoy-dialect film industry in post-war Asia. Rather than examining the industry for its own sake, it focuses on its broader cultural, political and economic significance in the region. In particular, it questions many of the assumptions that are currently being made about the ‘recentness’ of transnationalism in Chinese cultural production, as well as the prominence given to ‘the nation’ and ‘nation-building’ in studies of Chinese cinemas and of the Chinese Diaspora. By examining a cinema that was not ‘national’, not grounded in any particular national tradition, and largely unconcerned with the ‘nation-building’ project in post-war Asia, this book challenges the very terms of reference within which many studies of film have been conducted.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction. Defining the Amoy-dialect films; an industry remembered in the popular imagination in Southeast Asia but almost forgotten by scholars; the impossibility of ‘grounding’ this industry in debates about ‘national cinemas’ or ‘transn

Youth, Society and Mobile Media in Asia Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Edited by Stephanie Hemelryk Donald, University of Sydney, Australia, Theresa Dirndorfer Anderson, University of Technology Sydney, Australia and Damien Spry, University of Sydney, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54795-6; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the influence of mobile media technology on the lives of young people in East and North Asia, South East Asia and Australia. It discusses the impact information communication technologies have today on social identity, well-being, participation and exclusion. It explores current media practices and their innovative, transformative and disruptive uses at the local, the regional, the national, and the global level. In particular, it analyses mobile media not as a discrete object, but rather as part of a dynamic communication and information environment in which human-object relations are constantly reconfigured. It covers key theoretical and conceptual themes in youth mobile media research focusing on social, cultural and political aspects, including coverage of key themes such as regulation and technology, practices, pedagogies, aesthetics, social change, and representations of mobile youth. The book includes new accounts of recent research into the uses of mobile media by young people, and how these are situated in a broader socio-political context. Case studies include mobile panics in Australia (the notorious Kings of Wirrabee sexual assault case) and Japan (the scandals of high school girls as teenage prostitutes) in which mobile media use has had significant impact. This book offers an up-to-date examination of the influence of information communication technologies on young people’s lives in the region.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

251 CONTENTS Part I: Introduction – Why Mobility Matters: Young People and Media Competency in the Asia-Pacific Part II: 1. Angels and Devils: Youth Mobile Media Politics, Fear, Hope and Policy in Japan and Australia 2. Japanese Mobile Youth in the 2000s 3. ‘Your Phone Makes You, You’: Exploring the Youth Script in Teen Magazine Representations of Mobile Media 4. The Traditional Meets the Technological: Mobile Navigations of Desire and Intimacy Part III: 5. The Price of Being Mobile: Youth, Gender and Mobile Media 6. The City, Self and Connections: ‘Transyouth’ and Urban Social Networking in Seoul 7. The Representation of Mobile Youth in the Post-colonial Techno-nation of Korea Part IV: 8. Official and Unofficial Mobile Media in Australia: Youth, Panics, Innovation 9.

Mobile Design: Giving Voice to Children and Young People

The Media, Cultural Control and Government in Singapore Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia Series

Terence Lee, Murdoch University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-41330-5; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores this inherent contradiction present in most facets of Singaporean media, cultural and political discourses, and identifies the key regulatory strategies and technologies that the ruling People Action Party (PAP) employs to regulate Singapore media and culture, and thus govern the thoughts and conduct of Singaporeans. It establishes the conceptual links between government and the practice of cultural policy, arguing that contemporary cultural policy in Singapore has been designed to shape citizens into accepting and participating in the rationales of government. Outlining the historical development of cultural policy, including the recent expansion of cultural regulatory and administrative practices into the ‘creative industries’, Terence Lee analyzes the attempts by the Singaporean authorities to engage with civil society, the ways in which the media is used to market the PAP’s policies and leadership and the implications of the internet for the practice of governmental control. Overall, The Media, Cultural Control and Government in Singapore offers an original approach towards the rethinking of the relationship between media, culture and politics in Singapore, demonstrating that the many contradictory discourses around Singapore only make sense once the politics and government of the media and culture are understood.

CONTENTS 1. The Politics of Culture: A Mediated Introduction 2. Cultural Governmentality and Citizenship 3. Administering Culture: Cultural Policy, Regulation and the Creative Industries 4. Gestural Politics: A ‘New’ Civil Society 5. The Internet, Surveillance and Technological Auto-Regulation 6. Media Governmentality and Political Communication 7. Conclusion: Always ‘New’: Governing Contradictions with Consistencies

Cinema, Memory, Modernity Routledge Advances in Film Studies

Russell J. A. Kilbourn, Wilfrid Laurier University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 313pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80118-8; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Since its inception, cinema has evolved into not merely a ‘reflection’ but an indispensable index of human experience – especially our experience of time’s passage, of the present moment, and, most importantly perhaps, of the past, in both collective and individual terms. In this volume, Kilbourn provides a comparative theorization of the representation of memory in both mainstream Hollywood and international art cinema within an increasingly transnational context of production and reception. Focusing on European, North and South American, and Asian films, Kilbourn reads cinema as providing the viewer with not only the content and form of memory, but also with its own directions for use: the required codes and conventions for understanding and implementing this crucial prosthetic technology — an art of memory for the twentieth-century and beyond.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction: Cinema, Memory, Modernity: The Return of Memory as Film 1: No Escape from Time: Memory and Redemption in the International Postwar Art Film 2: The ‘Crisis’ of Memory: ‘Traumatic Identity’ in the Contemporary Memory Film 3: ‘Global Memory’: Cinema as Lingua Franca and the Commodification of the Image 4: The Eye of History: Memory, Surveillance and Ethicality in the Contemporary Art Film 5: ‘Prosthetic Memory’ and Transnational Cinema: Globalized Identity and Narrative Recursivity in City of God Conclusion: Remembering to Forget: The Catachreses of Modernity Notes Bibliography Index

Cinematic Emotion in Horror Films and Thrillers Routledge Advances in Film Studies

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

252 Julian Hanich, Free University Berlin, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 302pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87139-6; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Why can fear be pleasurable? Why do we sometimes enjoy an emotion we otherwise desperately wish to avoid? And why are the movies the predominant place for this paradoxical experience? These are the central questions of Julian Hanich’s path-breaking book, in which he takes a detailed look at the various aesthetic strategies of fear as well as the viewer’s frightened experience. By drawing on prototypical scenes from horror films and thrillers like Rosemary’s Baby, The Silence of the Lambs, Seven and The Blair Witch Project , Hanich identifies five types of fear at the movies and thus provides a much more nuanced classification than previously at hand in film studies. His descriptions of how the five types of fear differ according to their bodily, temporal and social experience inside the auditorium entail a forceful plea for relying more strongly on phenomenology in the study of cinematic emotions. In so doing, this book opens up new ways of dealing with these emotions. Hanich’s study does not stop at the level of fear in the movie theater, however, but puts the strong cinematic emotion against the backdrop of some of the most crucial developments of our modern world: disembodiment, acceleration and the loosening of social bonds. Hanich argues that the strong affective, temporal, and social experiences of frightening movies can be particularly pleasurable precisely because they help to counterbalance these ambivalent changes of modernity.

CONTENTS List of Figures Acknowledgments Part I Introduction Chapter One: How to Describe Cinematic Fear, or Why Phenomenology?

Chapter Two: Multiplexperiences: Individualized Immersion and Collective Feelings Part II Chapter Three: Frightening Fascination: A Phenomenology of Direct Horror Chapter Four: Intimidating Imaginations: A Phenomenology of Suggested Horror Chapter Five: Startling Scares: A Phenomenology of Cinematic Shock Chapter Six: Anxious Anticipations: A Phenomenology of Cinematic Dread Chapter Seven: Apprehensive Agitation: A Phenomenology of Cinematic Terror Part III Chapter Eight: Moments of Intensity: LivedBody Metamorphoses and Experienced Time Chapter Nine: Moments of Collectivity: The Cinema of Fear and Feelings of Belongingness Chapter Ten: The End Notes Bibliography Index

Distributing Silent Film Serials Routledge Advances in Film Studies

Rudmer Canjels, VU University Amsterdam, The Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 244pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87714-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Tracing the international consumption, distribution, and cultural importance of silent film serials in the 1910s and 1920s, Canjels provides an exciting new understanding of the cultural dimension and the cultural transformation and circulation of media forms.

Specifically, he demonstrates that the serial film form goes far beyond the well-known American two-reel serial—the cliffhanger.

Throughout the book, Canjels focuses on the biggest producers of serials, America, France, and Germany, while imported serials, such as those in the Netherlands, are also examined. This research offers new views on the serial work of well known directors as D.W. Griffith, Abel Gance, Erich von Stroheim, and Fritz Lang, while foregrounding the importance of lesser known directors such as Louis Feuillade or Joe May. In the early twentieth-century, serial productions were constantly undergoing change and were not merely distributed in their original form upon import. As adjusted serials were present in large quantities or confronted different social spaces, nationalistic feelings and views stimulated by the unrest of World War I and the expanding American film industry could be incorporated and attached to the serial form. Serial productions were not only adaptable to local discourses, they could actively stimulate and interact as well, influencing reception and further film production. By examining the distribution, reception, and cultural contexts of American and European serials in various countries, this cross-cultural research makes both local and global observations.

Canjels thus offers a highly relevant case study of transnational, transcultural and transmedia relations.

CONTENTS I. Film Seriality and Its Serial Uses: Transition and Beyond 1. Seriality Unbound 2. Monopolizing Episodic Adventuress II. Localizing Serials: Translating Spectacle and Daily Life Beyond 3. American Mysteries in France 4. German Spectacle from Within 5. Adjusting Seriality in the Netherlands III. Confronting Seriality in Europe and America 6. Consuming New World Views: American Serials in Germany 7. Minds that Cannont Condense: European Serials in America 8. Overshooting inAmerica IV. Another Time 9. Adjusting Forms and Diminishing Uses

Hollywood Melodrama and the New Deal Routledge Advances in Film Studies

Anna Siomopoulos, Bentley College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

253 HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 244pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88293-4; Janury 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION While historians and critics have pointed out the influence of the New Deal on Hollywood film of the 1930s and early 40s, these examinations have frequently begun and ended with a catalog of Rooseveltian iconography in the Hollywood films of the period. In contrast to these studies, this book considers the many different ways that Hollywood films of the New Deal era addressed the fundamental concepts of the burgeoning welfare state, ideas such as liberal empathy, consumer citizenship, the refeudalization of the state, and, above all, the welfare state ideal of minimal economic redistribution. Siomopoulos argues that Hollywood melodrama in particular became politicized when the New Deal defined consumption as a civic obligation that could help end the Depression and create a more united and democratic nation. When the Roosevelt administration began to promote the idea that the public had a national duty to re-circulate into the economy the income that it had received from New Deal programs, Hollywood melodrama responded in a variety of ways, most of which were supportive of New Deal rhetoric, but some of which pointed out the contradictions in New Deal ideology.

CONTENTS Introduction: "Public Daydreams": Fantasies of Redistribution in Hollywood Melodrama of the New Deal 1. Scarface Over the White House: The New Deal and the Public Gangster Film 2. Hollywood Sacer: The Forgotten Man, the Mass-Mediated Sovereign, and the Embodied Citizen 3. "I Didn't Know Anyone Could Be So Unselfish": The Welfare State, Consumer Citizenship and the Maternal Melodrama of the 1930s 4. The Refeudalization of Depression-Era America: The Asian Warlord, the Black Emperor, and Hollywood’s New Deal 5. The Doubleness of Indemnity: 1940s Film Noir and the Paternalist Welfare State Conclusion: Towards a Political Theory of Melodrama

Korea’s Occupied Cinemas Routledge Advances in Film Studies

Brian Yecies, Centre for Asia Pacific Social Transformation Studies, Australia and Ae-Gyung Shim, University of New South Wales, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99538-2; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This project compares and contrasts the development of cinema in Korea during the Japanese occupation (1910–1945) and US Army Military (1945–1948) periods within the larger context of cinemas in occupied territories. It promises to yield new knowledge and insight by examining the then nascent film industry in Korea in the light of Hollywood’s global expansion campaign, which began in 1929, and the ascension of Japan’s wartime activities. By avoiding a comprehensive application of Western theory on the Korean situation, the project investigates key moments in Korea’s cinematic history and touches directly upon the themes of nation building, national identity, colonial modernity, propaganda and cultural protectionism as well as the sensitive subject of collaboration. This study demonstrates the formation of a cinema under occupation is more complex than our conventional understandings of national cinema tell us.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Early Screenings, 1903–1926 2. Thriving and/or Collaborating in Silence: Na Ungyu’s Arirang (1926) 3.

Systematization of Film Censorship: Profiteering From Hollywood's Golden Age, 1926–1936 4. Modernizing Tradition with Sounds, 1926–1936 5. Empire-Building Cinema, 1936–1945 6. Cinema of Reorientation, 1945–-1948. Conclusion: Occupied Cinemas in Korea

South Asian Cinema Routledge Advances in Film Studies

Alka Kurian, University of Sunderland, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-96117-2; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Using the lenses of post-colonial and feminist theory, Kurian examines politically engaged, women-centred South Asian films.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Class, Caste and Social Exculsion 2. Globalisation and Disenfranchisement 3. Race and Sexuality 4. Communalism and Nationalism. Conclusion. Notes. Bibliography. Index

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

254

Global Media Ecologies Routledge Advances in Internationalizing Media Studies

Doris Baltruschat, Carleton University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 277pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87478-6; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this study, Baltruschat calls attention to dramatic changes in worldwide media production. Her work provides new insights into industry re-organization, digital media, and audience interactivity as pivotal relationships are redrawn along the entire value chain of production, distribution, and consumption. Based on an international study, she details how cultural agents now negotiate a media landscape through collaborative ventures, co-productions and format franchising. These varied collaborations define the new global media economy and affect a shift across the entire field of cultural production. Through detailing the intricacies of globally networked production ecologies, Baltruschat elucidates the shifting power relations in media production, especially in regards to creative labor and trade of intellectual properties. In the new global economy, "content" has become the "new currency." As a result, relational dynamics between cultural agents emerge as key forces in shaping worldwide cultural production, now increasingly characterized by flexible production and consumption. The blurring of lines in international media developments require new parameters, which define creativity and intellectual property in relation to interactive audiences and collaboratively produced content. Baltruschat clearly maps and defines these new dynamics and provides solutions as to how creative labor constellations can advance and enrich the new media economy. This is especially pertinent as global film and TV production does not necessarily result in greater media diversity. On the contrary, interdependencies in policy regimes, prioritization of certain genres, and branded entertainment epitomize how current networked ecologies reflect broader trends in cultural and economic globalization.

CONTENTS List of Tables, Figures, and Maps Preface and Acknowledgments Introduction and Overview 1: International Film and TV Coproduction under Review 2: Activating Codes and Conventions in Co-produced Docudramas 3: Media Ecologies in Format Franchising 4: Formats and Reality TV: The Case of the Idol Franchise 5: Auditioning for Idol 6: "Content as Currency": New Alliances between Media and Cultural Agents 7: Summary and Conclusion Appendix A Glossary Notes Bibliography Index

Understanding Media and Culture in Turkey Routledge Advances in Internationalizing Media Studies

Edited by Christian Christensen and Miyase Christensen, both of Karlstad University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87592-9; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Discourse (both popular and academic) surrounding Turkey has leaned toward the reductionist and the de-contextualized, framing Turkish media, culture and politics in polarized terms such as East vs. West, Modern vs. Traditional or Muslim vs. Christian. The objective of this new volume is to move away from such essentialist dichotomies and to provide scholars with a well-written, comprehensive and much-needed investigation into media and culture in Turkey. Three themes, "Structures," "Spaces" and "Voices," make up the core structure of the book, providing an intellectual and epistemological arc. Following an introductory chapter written by the co-editors, the first section, "Structures," provides critical examinations of the structural underpinnings of contemporary Turkish media and culture through analyses of, for example, journalism, cultural policy, Information Society and citizenship. The second section, "Spaces," connects Turkish media and culture to spatial/locational factors: Turkey’s role and place in Europe; the Turkish diasporic space; representations of the Turkish "East;" and Istanbul as urban/social space. In the final section, "Voices," the book turns toward chapters that address central issues in contemporary Turkish media—for example, Islam, arabesk music and the presentation of Kurds on national television—from a cultural perspective. The text will be essential reading for scholars within, for example, Middle and Near Eastern Studies, Media Studies, Sociology who wish to gain a deeper understanding of the relationship between media, politics and culture in this complex and increasingly important country.

Ecology and Environment in European Drama Routledge Advances in Theatre & Performance Studies

Downing Cless, Tufts University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 284pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80439-4; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

255 Looking at European drama through an ecological lens, this book chronicles nature and the environment as primary topics in major plays from ancient to recent times. Cless focuses on the few, yet well-known plays in which nature is at stake in the action or the environment is a dramatic force. Though theater predominantly explores human and cultural themes, these plays fully display the power of the other-than-human world and its endangerment during the history of Europe. While offering a broad overview, the book features extensive case studies of several playwrights, plays, and eco-theater productions: Aristophanes’ The Birds, Marlowe’s Doctor Faustus, Shakespeare’s A Midsummer Night’s Dream and The Tempest, and Giraudoux’s The Madwoman of Chaillot. In each case, Cless connects nature in the play to nature in the life of the playwright based on biographical research into the understanding of natural philosophy and awareness of the immediate environment that influenced the specific play. The book is one of the first of its kind in a growing field of ecocriticism and emerging eco-studies of theater.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments 1: Introduction 2: Greek Tragedy 3: Aristophanes’ The Birds 4: From Menander to Moralities 5: Marlowe’s Doctor Faustus 6: Shakespeare’s A Midsummer Night’s Dream and The Tempest 7: From Renaissance to Romanticism 8: Ibsen and Chekhov 9: Giraudoux’s The Madwoman of Chaillot 10: Brecht, Beckett, and Beyond — A Conclusion Notes Bibliography Index

Feminist Visions and Queer Futures in Postcolonial Drama Routledge Advances in Theatre & Performance Studies

Kanika Batra, Texas Tech University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87591-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this timely study, Batra examines contemporary drama from India, Jamaica, and Nigeria in conjunction with feminist and incipient queer movements in these countries. Postcolonial drama, Batra contends, furthers the struggle for gender justice in both these movements by contesting the idea of the heterosexual, middle class, wage-earning male as the model citizen and by suggesting alternative conceptions of citizenship premised on working class sexual identities. Further, Batra considers the possibility of Indian, Jamaican, and Nigerian drama generating a discourse on a rights-bearing conception of citizenship that derives from representations of non-biological, non-generational forms of kinship. Her study is one of the first to examine the ways in which postcolonial dramatists are creating the possibility of a dialogue between cultural activism, women’s movements, and an emerging discourse on queer sexualities.

CONTENTS Introduction I. Postcolonial Sexual Citizenship in Jamaica 1. Making Citizens: Community, Kinship and the National Imaginary in Dennis Scott's Plays 2. "We shouldn't shame to talk": Postcolonial Sexual Citizenship in Sistren Theatre Collective's Bellywoman Bangarang and QPH II. Gendered Violence and the Queer Subaltern in India 3. A People's Theatre from Delhi, India, in Alliance with the Women's Movement 4. Queering the Subaltern: Caste and Sexuality in Mahesh Dattani's Seven Steps Around the Fire and Mahasweta Devi and Usha Ganguly's Rudali: From Fiction to Performance III. Gender, Sexuality, and Postcolonial Development in Nigeria 5. Resistant Citizenship: Reading Feminist Praxis and Democratic Renewal in Nigeria through Femi Osofisan's Morountodun 6. "Daughters who know the languages of power": Community, Sexuality, and Postcolonial Development in Tess Onwueme's Tell it to Women 7. Epilogue

Global Ibsen Routledge Advances in Theatre & Performance Studies

Edited by Erika Fischer-Lichte, Barbara Gronau and Christel Weiler, all of Freie Universitaet Berlin, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87713-8; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Ibsen’s plays rank among those most frequently performed world-wide, rivalled only by Brecht, Chekhov, Shakespeare, and the Greek tragedies. But while there exist countless studies on Ibsen the dramatist and the significance of his plays within different cultures written mainly by literary scholars, none of them examine the ways in which Ibsen's plays were performed, or the impact of such performances on the theater, social life, and politics of these cultures. The essays in this volume discuss performances from five continents--Europe, Africa, Asia, the Americas, and Australia--and cover a variety of Ibsen's plays, including A Doll's House , Hedda Gabler , Peer Glynt , and Ghosts . Specifically, contributors look at the way performances of Ibsen's plays address problems typical to modern or modernising societies all over the world, including the inferior social status of women; the decay of bourgeois family life and values; religious fundamentalism; industrial pollution and corporate cover-up; and/or the loss of and search for identity.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

256 Introduction Erika Fischer-Lichte I. What Happened to the Women’s Liberation Movement? – A Doll’s House and Hedda Gabler on stage 1. Ibsen on the Platteland: The first professional production of A Doll’s House in Afrikaans goes on tour Temple Hauptfleisch and Hilda van Lill 2. Ibsen’s A Doll’s House in America Marvin Carlson 3. A Doll’s House in the Antipodes Jacqueline Martin 4.

Canajun-eh? Finding a house for Nora in Canada Errol Durbach 5. Women’s issues and theater style: A Doll’s House in Japan Mitsuya Mori 6. Against love - Nora and Hedda on the contemporary Scandinavian stage Tiina Rosenberg 7. Deborah Warner directs Hedda Gabler: Mercurial Pistols Maria Shevtsova II. Performing Peer Gynt – Negotiating Cultural Identity 8. Peer Gynt at the pyramids of Giza Nehad Selaiha 9. Peer Gynt in Israel: A national hero returning from exile? Freddie Rokem 10. Antunes Filho’s Peer Gynt - A remarkable production of Ibsen in Brazil Thereza Menezes 11. Patrice Chéreau’s Peer Gynt: A renewed reception of Ibsen’s theater in France Catherine Naugrette 12. Werner Egk’s Peer Gynt in Berlin 1938 - opera and politics Clemens Risi III. Modernization of Society and the Emergence of a New Theatre 13. Ghosts and gods: Ibsen, tragic actors and modern tragedies in contemporary Greek theater practice Platon Mavromoustakos 14. An Enemy of the People - the play that anticipates the future Wang Ning 15. An Enemy of the People as a ‘Trojan Horse’ - Frank Castorf stages Ibsen in the German Democratic Republic 1988 Barbara Gronau 16. Rosmersholm in the Moscow Art Theater (1908) and it’s First Studio (1918) Dmitry Trubotchkin 17.

Eleonora Duse and Gordon Craig’s lost Ibsen Laura Caretti

Performing Embodiment in Samuel Beckett's Drama Routledge Advances in Theatre & Performance Studies

Anna McMullan, Queens University Belfast, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 186pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-38598-5; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The representation and experience of embodiment is a central preoccupation of Samuel Beckett’s drama, one that he explored through diverse media. McMullan investigates the full range of Beckett’s dramatic canon for stage, radio, television and film, including early drama, mimes and unpublished fragments. She examines how Beckett’s drama composes and recomposes the body in each medium, and provokes ways of perceiving, conceiving and experiencing embodiment that address wider preoccupations with corporeality, technology and systems of power. McMullan argues that the body in Beckett’s drama reveals a radical vulnerability of the flesh, questioning corporeal norms based on perfectible, autonomous or invulnerable bodies, but is also the site of a continual reworking of the self, and of the boundaries between self and other. Beckett’s re-imagining of the body presents embodiment as a collaborative performance between past and present, flesh and imagination, self and other, including the spectator / listener.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments 1: Introduction 2: Dehiscent Bodies: From ‘Le Kid’ to Eleutheria 3: Intercorporeal Performances and the Hauntings of History in Waiting for Godot and Endgame 4: ‘This visible flesh’: Krapp’s Last Tape and Happy Days 5: Mimes and Fragments: Corporeal Laboratories 6: Radiophonic Embodiments 7: The Flesh of the Screen and the ‘eye of prey’: Beckett’s Film 8: Unhomely Semblances and the Televisual Matrix 9: The Late Theatre: Performing Traces of Embodiment 10: Mutated Bodies: Stage Performances of Beckett’s Late Prose Texts Conclusion: Re-embodying Beckett’s Drama in the Twenty-first Century Notes Bibliography Index

The Provocation of the Senses in Contemporary Theatre Routledge Advances in Theatre & Performance Studies

Stephen Di Benedetto, University of Miami, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 277pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87267-6; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Di Benedetto considers theatrical practice through the lens of contemporary neuroscientific discoveries in this provoking study, which lays the foundation for considering the physiological basis of the power of theatre practice to affect human behavior. He presents a basic summary of the ways that the senses function in relation to cognitive science and physiology, offering an overview of dominant trends of discussion on the realm of the senses in performance. Also presented are examples of how those ideas are illustrated in recent theatrical presentations, and how the different senses form the structure of a theatrical event. Di Benedetto concludes by suggesting the possible implications these neuroscientific ideas have upon our understanding of theatrical composition, audience response, and the generation of meaning.

CONTENTS Preface: Why Contemporary Performance Can Provoke the Senses Acknowledgments 1: Our Sensing Bodies: A Multidisciplinary Approach to Understanding Live Theatrical Experience 2: Scintillating Visions and Visual Perception: How Light, Movement and Stage Space Capture Our Attention and Stimulate Our Brains 3: Attendant to Touch: Cutaneous Stimulation and its Expressive Capabilities 4: Noses, Tongues and Other Surprising Possibilities: Harnessing Olfaction and Gustation in Performance 5: Aural

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

257 Landscapes: Voices, Noises, Vibrations and Other Quivering Stimulators of Cochlear Perception 6: The Sentient Body: Guiding Somatic Responses Within Performative Structures Notes Bibliography Index

The Theatre of the Bauhaus Routledge Advances in Theatre & Performance Studies

Melissa Trimingham, University of Kent, Canterbury, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $120.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-40398-6; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book gives the history of the Bauhaus’s "theatre of space," focusing on the experimental stage work at Dessau between 1925 and 1929. This is used to explain the earlier stage work at Weimar and Schlemmer’s extensive oeuvre connected with the Bauhaus, particularly The Triadic Ballet . The idea of "theatre of space" is used to highlight twentieth-century practitioners who privilege the visual, aural, and plastic qualities of the stage above character, narrative and, themes (for example Schlemmer himself, Robert Wilson, Tadeusz Kantor, Robert Lepage, Pina Bausch). This impressive volume will be of use to students and academics involved in the areas of twentieth-century performance, the history of performance art, the history of avant-garde theatre, modern German theatre, and Weimar-era performance.

CONTENTS List of Figures Preface Acknowledgments 1: The Theatre of the Bauhaus 2: Modernism 3: Space: Light and Scenery 4: Body and Motion 5: Body and Objects 6: Sound 7: Time 8: Afterword Notes Bibliography Index

Russian Mass Media and Changing Values Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series

Edited by Arja Rosenholm, Kaarle Nordenstreng, both of University of Tampere, Finland and Elena Trubina, Ural State University, Russia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57746-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides a multi-faceted picture of the many complex processes taking place in the field of contemporary Russian media and popular culture. Russian social and cultural life today is strongly individualised and consumers are offered innumerable alternatives; but at the same time options are limited by the new technologies of control which are a key feature of Russian capitalism.

Based on extensive original research by scholars in both Russia itself and in Finland, the book discusses new developments in the media industry and assesses a wide range of social and cultural changes, many of which are related to, and to an extent generated by, the media. The book argues that the Russian mass media industry, whilst facing the challenges of globalization, serves several purposes including making a profit, reinforcing patriotic discourse and popularizing liberalized lifestyles. Topics include changing social identities, new lifestyles, ideas of "glamour" and "professional values". Overall, the book demonstrates that the media in Russia is far from homogenous, and that, as in the West, despite new technologies of control, media audiences are being offered a new kind of pluralism which is profoundly influencing Russia's cultural, social and political landscape.

CONTENTS Part I: Mapping the Media Landscape 1. Contemporary Structure of the Russian Media Industry 2. Changing Media Use in Russia 3.

A New Generation of Journalists Part II: Biopolitics of the Media 4. ‘We Must All Give Birth: That’s an Order’: The Russian Mass Media Commenting on V.V. Putin’s Address 5. Portrayal of Health Policy in Russian Newspapers 6. Eastern Cowboys: Masculine Selves and Coping with Stressful Life in the Russian Edition of Men’s Health Magazine 7. In Search of a ‘New (Wo)Man’: Gender and Sexuality in Contemporary Russian Self-help Literature Part III: Media as the Arbiters of Style 8. ‘Family - that’s an Opera’: Creativity and Family Representations in Russian Women’s Magazine Krest’ianka 9. Modern Russian Entertainment TV: ‘Live Well Now – Ask Me How’ 10. Russian Glamour and Its Representations in Post-Soviet Mass Media 11. Between a Good Home and a Good City: The Privatization of Residential Life in Russian Lifestyle Journalism

Cognitive Poetics and Cultural Memory Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies

Mikhail Gronas, Dartmouth College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99737-9; August 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

258 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this volume, Gronas addresses the full range of psychological, social, and historical issues that bear on the mnemonic existence of modern literary works, particularly Russian literature. He focuses on the mnemonic processes involved in literary creativity, and the question of how our memories of past reading experiences shape the ways in which we react to literary works. The book also examines the concrete mnemonic qualities of poetry, as well as the social uses to which poetry memorization has historically been put to use. This study will appeal to scholars of cognitive poetics, Russian literature, and cultural studies.

CONTENTS Note on Transliteration and Translations Acknowledgments Introduction 1: Mnemonic Critics: Conceptual Metaphor in Literary Judgments 2: Mnemonic Readers: The Literary Canon and Mnemonic Survival 3: Mnemonic Lines: The Social Uses of Memorized Poetry 4: Mnemonic Poets: The Tip-of-the-Tongue State, the Saussurean Anagram, and Mechanisms of Mnemonic Creativity Conclusion Notes Bibliography Index

Emotion, Genre, and Justice in Film and Television Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies

Deidre Pribram, Molloy College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99828-4; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this study, Pribram uses the law and order generic network and its relationship to juridical discourses to show how emotions are deployed to construct ideologies of law and justice while, simultaneously, constructing cultural understandings of the meaning of various emotions. Emotions are considered from the perspective of the specific ways they function in media texts to frame and maintain complex cultural notions such as law, justice, and injustice.

International Journalism and Democracy Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies

Edited by Angela Romano, Queensland University of Technology, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 275pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-96110-3; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines different models from around the world of how journalism can support deliberation — the processes in which societies recognize and discuss the issues that affect them, appraise the potential responses, and make decisions about whether and how to take action. Authors from across the globe identify the types of journalism that might best assist or even drive deliberative activity in different cultural and political contexts. Case studies from 15 nations spotlight different approaches to deliberative journalism, including strategies that have been sometimes been labeled as public or civic journalism, peace journalism, development journalism, citizen journalism, the street press, community journalism, social entrepreneurism, or other names. Each of the approaches that are described offer a distinctive potential to support deliberative democracy, but the book does not present any of these models or case studies as examples of categorical success. Rather, it explores different elements of the nature, strengths, limitations and challenges of each approach, as well as issues affecting their longer-term sustainability and effectiveness.

CONTENTS List of Tables and Figures Acknowledgments Part 1: Deliberative Journalism 1 Deliberation and Journalism, Angela Romano 2 American Public Journalism Versus Other International Media Models, Angela Romano Part 2: Public and Citizen Journalism 3 Public Journalism in South Africa: Experiences and Experiments with Local and Community Media, Brett Davidson 4 Civic Journalism Initiatives in Nigeria, Tokunbo (Tokz) Awoshakin, 5 Sustaining Public Journalism Practices: The Australian Experience, Angela Romano 6 Public Journalism Kiwi Style: Lingering Echoes of a Big Bang, Margie Comrie and David Venables 7 Public Journalism in Japan: Experiments by a National Paper, Yohtaro Hamada 8 Civic and Citizen Journalism in Germany, Klaus Forster 9 Public Journalism in Finnish Mainstream Newspapers, Laura Ruusunoksa 10 Citizen Voices: Public Journalism Made in Colombia, Ana Maria Miralles Part 3: Other Deliberative Models for Peace, Participation, Development and Empowerment 11 Britain’s Big Issue: Street Papers as Social Entrepreneurs, Angela Romano 12 Inspiring Public Participation: Environmental Journalism in China, Jiannu Bao 13 Peace Journalism in Indonesia, Gita Widya Laksmini Soejoatmodjo 14 Traditions of ‘Public Journalism’ in India, Pradip Thomas 15 In the Hands of the People: Citizen Media for Revitalising Puerto Rico’s Poor Communities, Angela Romano and Anette Sofía Ruiz Morales 16 Viração Magazine: Consciousness-Raising Media for Young Brazilians, Paulo Lima and Izabel Leão Part 4: Conclusions 17 Ongoing Issues for Deliberative Journalism, Angela Romano Notes on Contributors Index

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

259

Landscapes of Holocaust Postmemory Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies

Brett Kaplan, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87476-2; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION How do the spaces of the past stay with us through representations—whether literary or photographic? How has the Holocaust registered in our increasingly globally connected consciousness? What does it mean that this European event is often used as an interpretive or representational touchstone for genocides and traumas globally? In this interdisciplinary study, Kaplan asks and attempts to answer these questions by looking at historically and geographically diverse spaces, photographs, and texts concerned with the physical and/or mental landscape of the Holocaust and its transformations from the postwar period to the early twenty-first century. Examining the intersections of landscape, postmemory, and trauma, Kaplan's text offers a significant contribution to our understanding of the spatial, visual, and literary reach of the Holocaust.

CONTENTS Introduction I. Burning Landscapes: The Transformation of Hitler’s Holiday Retreat 1. The Obersalzberg 2. Souvenirs of Berchtesgaden 3. Eva’s Cousin II. Burning Images: Three Photographers Explore Traumatic Landscapes 4. Lee Miller 5. Susan Silas 6. Collier Schorr III. Burning Silence: The Uncanny Presence of the Holocaust in the Work of J.M. Coetzee 7. Disgrace 8.

Elizabeth Costello 9. Foe 10. Conclusion

Letters, Postcards, Email Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies

Esther Milne, Swinburne University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 262pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99328-9; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this original study, Milne moves between close readings of letters, postcards and emails, and investigations of the material, technological infrastructures of these forms, to answer the question: How does presence function as an aesthetic and rhetorical strategy within networked communication practices? As her work reveals, the relation between old and new communication systems is more complex than allowed in much contemporary media theory. Although the correspondents of letters, postcards and emails are not, usually, present to one another as they write and read their exchanges, this does not necessarily inhibit affective communication.

Indeed, this study demonstrates how physical absence may, in some instances, provide correspondents with intense intimacy and a spiritual, almost telepathic, sense of the other’s presence. While corresponding by letter, postcard or email, readers construe an imaginary, incorporeal body for their correspondents that, in turn, reworks their interlocutor’s self-presentation. In this regard the fantasy of presence reveals a key paradox of cultural communication, namely that material signifiers can be used to produce the experience of incorporeal presence.

CONTENTS List of Figures Acknowledgments Introduction 1: "The Conscious Presence of a Central Intellect": British Postal History 2: "The simple transcripts of natural feeling": Signifiers of Presence in Epistolary Practice 3: "The ghosts of all my impertinent letters": Presence in Crisis 4: "The Self-conscious air of the reproduced": Postcard History 5: "A photo of the ship that I am now on": Signifiers of Presence, Intimacy and Privacy in Postcard Correspondence 6: A Brief History of Electronic Mail 7: "In my sickness": Constructing Presence on the Cybermind Discussion Group Conclusion Notes Bibliography Index

Teletechnologies, Place and Community Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies

Rowan Wilkin, Swinburne University of Technology, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87595-0; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Teletechnologies, or technologies of distance, cannot be ignored. Indeed, the present electronic age is said to have wrought profound changes to how we think about and experience who we are, where we are, and how we relate with one another. Place and community have traditionally formed key concepts for thinking about these issues, but what relevance do these concepts now hold for us? In this wide-ranging study, Wilken re-evaluates how ideas of place and community intersect with and help us make sense of a world

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

260 transformed by information and communication technologies. This interdisciplinary investigation ranges across diverse textual and contextual terrain, exploring approaches from media and communications, architectural history and theory, philosophy, sociology, geography, literature, and urban design. The rich analysis of these myriad texts reveals the complex and at times contradictory ways in which notions of place and community circulate in relation to these technologies of distance. Wilken’s examination underscores both the enduring importance of ideas of place and community in the present age, and the urgent need to continue to engage with, think about and reconfigure these twin ideas.

CONTENTS 1. ‘Re-grounding’ Debate: Finding Place and Community in an Electronic Age 2. Techno-sociality: Computer-Mediated Communication and Virtual Community 3. The Problem of Community 4. Haunting Affects: Place in Virtual Discourses 5. The Quest for ‘Spirit of Place’: Architecture and the Rhetoric of Place-Making 6. Radical Possibilities: Early Experiments in Architectural Computing 7. A ‘Neuromanticism’: Architectural Visions of Cyberspace 8. Domesticating Technology, Mobilising Place 9.

Rethinking Teletechnologies, Place and Community

Violence, Visual Culture, and the Black Male Body Routledge Research in Cultural and Media Studies

Cassandra Jackson, The College of New Jersey, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 172pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88042-8; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION From early photographs of disfigured slaves to contemporary representations of bullet-riddled rappers, images of wounded black men have long permeated American culture. While scholars have fittingly focused on the ever-present figure of the hypermasculine black male, little consideration has been paid to the wounded black man as a persistent cultural figure. This book considers images of wounded black men on various stages, including early photography, contemporary art, hip hop, and new media. Focusing primarily on photographic images, Jackson explores the wound as a specular moment that mediates power relations between seers and the seen.

Historically, the representation of wounded black men has privileged the viewer in service of white supremacist thought. At the same time, contemporary artists have deployed the figure to expose and disrupt this very power paradigm. Jackson suggests that the relationship between the viewer and the viewed is not so much static as fluid, and that wounds serve as intricate negotiations of power structures that cannot always be simplified into the condensed narratives of victims and victimizers. Overall, Jackson attempts to address both the ways in which the wound has been exploited to patrol and contain black masculinity, as well as the ways in which twentieth century artists have represented the wound to disrupt its oppressive implications CONTENTS List of Figures Acknowledgments Introduction 1: Early Photography and the Cultural Work of Wounds 2: Photography and the Disabled Black Subject in the Art of Carrie Mae Weems 3: Fantasies of Wounding: Black Male Bodies in Hip Hop 4: Branding Black Men: Hank Willis Thomas’s B®anded series 5: The Appropriation of Lynching Photography 6: Seeing Without Looking: Lynching in Charles W. Chesnutt’s The Marrow of Tradition Notes Bibliography Index

History of Participatory Media Routledge Studies in Cultural History

Edited by Anders Ekström, KTH Royal Institute of Technology, Sweden, Solveig Jülich, Stockholm University, Sweden, Frans Lundgren, Uppsala University, Sweden and Per Wisselgren, Umeå University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 185pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88068-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book argues for a historical perspective on issues relating to the notion of participatory media. Working from a broad concept of media – including essays on the 19th century press, early sound media, photography, exhibitions, television and the internet – the book offers a broad empirical approach to different modes of audience participation from the mid 19th century to the present. Using the insights from the historical case studies, the book also explores some of the key concepts in discussions on the politics of participation, arguing for a theoretical perspective sensitive to the asymmetries that characterize the distribution of agency in the relationship between media and users. Scholarly discussions on participatory media now occur in several fields. This book argues that all of these discussions are all too often obscured by a rhetoric of newness, assuming that participatory media is something unique in history, radical and revolutionary. By challenging the historiography implicit in this rhetoric, the book also engages in a discussion of issues of more general relevance to the multidisciplinary field of media history.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

261 Introduction: Participatory Media in Historical Perspective Eckström, Jülich, Lundgren, and Wisselgren 1. From Enlightened Participation to Liberal Professionalism: On the Historiography of the Press as a Resourse for Legitimacy Lundell 2. The Politics of Participation: Francis Galton’s Anthropometric Laboratory and the Formation of Civic Selves Lundgren 3. Creating Audiences, Making Participants: The Cylinder Phonograph in Ethnographic Fieldwork Boström 4. Knowing Media, Knowing Audiences: Performing Publics at the Early 20 th Century Fun-Fair Ekström 5. The Interactivity of the Model Home Sandberg 6. Touring the Congo: The Roles of Mobility and Materiality in Missionary Media Gustafsson Reinius 7. Say Milk, Say Cheese! Inscribing Participation in the Milk Propaganda’s Photography Habel 8. Daniel Ellsberg and the Lost Idea of the Photocopy Gitelman 9.

Remixing the Public Fetus: Lennart Nilsson’s Medical Imagery and Participatory Culture Jülich 10. Expedition Robinson, Participatory Media, and the History of the Social Experiment Wisselgren 11. Two Museum Websites: Socio-Technical Arrangements for Engagement with the Past Axelsson

The Local Scenes and Global Culture of Psytrance Routledge Studies in Ethnomusicology

Graham St John PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 289pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87696-4; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This lively textual symposium offers a collection of formative research on the culture of global psytrance (psychedelic trance). As the first book to address the diverse transnationalism of this contemporary electronic dance music phenomenon, the collection hosts interdisciplinary research addressing psytrance as a product of intersecting local and global trajectories. Contributing to theories of globalization, postmodernism, counterculture, youth subcultures, neotribes, the carnivalesque, music scenes and technologies, dance ritual and spirituality, chapters introduce psytrance in Goa, the UK, Israel, Japan, the US, Italy, Czech Republic, Portugal and Australia. As a global occurrence indebted to 1960s psychedelia, sharing music production technologies and DJ techniques with electronic dance music scenes, and harnessing the communication capabilities of the Internet, psytrance and its cultural implications are thoroughly discussed in this first scholarly volume of its kind.

CONTENTS List of Plates and Figures Psytrance: An Introduction, Graham St John Section I: Goa Trance 1: Goa is a State of Mind: On the Ephemerality of Psychedelic Social Emplacements, Luther Elliott 2: The Decline of Electronic Dance Scenes: The Case of Psytrance in Goa Anthony, D’Andrea 3: The Ghost of Goa Trance: A Retrospective, Arun Saldanha Section II: Global Psytrance 4: Infinite Noise Spirals: The Musical Cosmopolitanism of Psytrance, Hillegonda Rietveld 5: Psychedelic Trance Music Making in the UK: Rhizomatic Craftsmanship and the Global Market Place, Charles de Ledesma 6: Re-evaluating Musical Genre in UK Psytrance, Robin Lindop 7: (En)Countering the Beat: Paradox in Israeli Psytrance, Joshua I. Schmidt Section III: Liminal Culture 8: DemenCZe: Psychedelic Madhouse in the Czech Republic, Botond Vitos 9: Dionysus Returns: Contemporary Tuscan Trancers and Euripides’ The Bacchae, Chiara Baldini 10: Weaving the Underground Web: Neotribalism and Psytrance on Tribe.net, Jenny Ryan 11: Narratives in Noise: Reflexivity, Migration and Liminality in the Australian Psytrance Scene, Alex Lambert 12: Liminal Culture and Global Movement: The Transitional World of Psytrance, Graham St John Notes on Contributors Index

Disability and New Media Routledge Studies in New Media and Cyberculture

Katie Ellis, The University of Western Australia and Mike Kent PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87135-8; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines how digital design is triggering disability when it could be a solution. Video and animation now plays a prominent role in the World Wide Web and new types of protocols have been developed to accommodate this increasing complexity.

However, as this has happened the potential for individual users to control how the content is displayed has been diminished. It has been argued that the Internet will not be fully accessible until disability is considered a cultural identity in the same way that class, gender and sexuality are. Kent and Ellis build on this notion and apply it to more recent Web 2.0 phenomena, social networking sites, virtual worlds and file sharing.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction I. At the Crossroads 2. Universal Design in a Digital World 3. iTunes is Pretty (Useless) when You’re Blind 4.

Building Digital Stairways: Nice view, but what about my wheelchair? II. How did we get here? 5. We Want You in our Network: Universal Design v Retrofitting the Web 6. (Physical) Disability is a Form of Social Oppression? 7. Does that Face-‘Book’ come in Braille? Social Networking Sites and Disability III. Where to next? 8. Avatars with Wheelchairs, but No Virtual Guide Dogs: Disability and Second Life 9. Challenges and Opportunities: The Road Ahead for Disability in a Digital World 10. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

262

Media Representations of Gender and Torture Post-9/11 Routledge Studies in Rhetoric and Communication

Marita Gronnvoll, Eastern Illinois University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87480-9; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this timely book, Gronnvoll offers a feminist rhetorical examination of gender and torture, looking at the media coverage of Abu Ghraib and Guantánamo Bay, as well as recent popular entertainment television serials where torture appears as a plot device (including 24). In exposing news media coverage to such scrutiny, she finds that cases of American personnel engaging in torture achieved notoriety chiefly because of the fact that women were perpetrators. The language of commentators suggests at least as much social outrage over the gender performance of the women as over the fact of torture being committed by Americans. At the same time, political and social discourses sketch a portrait of an intractable enemy in the form of the Muslim "Other" and betray a longing for a savior warrior hero who is capable of prevailing over this perceived "evil." Yet, news coverage of Abu Ghraib and Guantánamo Bay suggests women warriors are socially perceived as lacking the necessary qualifications to be such saviors. This finding provides a transition into an examination of popular entertainment television programs that feature male and female heroes as government agents engaged in fighting the war on terrorism. Ultimately, Gronnvoll's analysis suggests that a Western cultural longing for a savior is partially fulfilled through fictional programming portrayals of masculine warriors who engage in torture and remain heroic.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments 1: Interrogating Torture 2: Gender (In)Visibility at Abu Ghraib 3: Sex, Blood, and Degradation: The Women of Gitmo 4: Torture Television 5: 24: Reshaping the Messiah 6: A Question of Torture Notes Bibliography Index

Representing the Black Female Subject in Western Art Routledge Studies on African and Black Diaspora

Charmaine A. Nelson, McGill University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 258pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87116-7; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85124-1; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers the first concentrated examination of the representation of the black female subject in Western art through the lenses of race/color and sex/gender. Charmaine A. Nelson poses critical questions about the contexts of production, the problems of representation, the pathways of circulation and the consequences of consumption. She analyzes not only how, where, why and by whom black female subjects have been represented, but also what the social and cultural impacts of the colonial legacy of racialized western representation have been. Nelson also explores and problematizes the issue of the historically privileged white artistic access to black female bodies and the limits of representation for these subjects. This book not only reshapes our understanding of the black female representation in Western Art, but also furthers our knowledge about race and how and why it is (re)defined and (re)mobilized at specific times and places throughout history.

CONTENTS Introduction Part I: From Girls to Women: Locating Black Female Subjects in Western Art 1. Through An-Other’s Eyes: White Canadian Artists – Black Female Subjects 2. Racing Childhood: Representations of Black Girls in Canadian Art Part II: Slavery and Portraiture: Agency, Resistance and Art as Colonial Discourse 3. Slavery, Portraiture and the Colonial Limits of Canadian Art History 4. The Fruits of Resistance: Reading Portrait of a Negro Slave on the Sly 5. Tying the Knot: Black Female Slave Dress in Canada Part III: The Nude and the Naked: Black Women, White Ideals and the Radicalization of Sexuality 6. Coloured Nude : Fetishization, Disguise, Dichotomy 7. The "Hottentot Venus" in Canada: Modernism, Censorship and the Racial Limits of Female Sexuality Part IV: From White Marble to Coloured Stone: Aesthetics, Materiality and Degrees of Blackness 8. White Marble, Black Bodies and the Fear of the Invisible Negro: Signifying Blackness in Mid-Nineteenth-Century Neoclassical Sculpture 9. Vénus Africaine : Race, Beauty and African-ness 10. Allegory, Race and the Four Continents: Jean-Baptiste Carpeaux’s Les quatre parties du monde soutenant la sphe re céleste . Conclusion: Whiteness as Collective Narcissism, Towards a New Vision

Jesse Owens, the Press, and the 1936 Berlin Olympic Games Studies in African American History and Culture

Pamela C. Laucella, Indiana University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99614-3; October 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

263 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Jesse Owens secured his place as one of the most celebrated athletes of the twentieth-century after winning four gold medals at the 1936 Olympics in Berlin. This book examines the press coverage of the time, which helped to elevate Owens to such status. Pamela C. Laucella utilizes examples not just from the mainstream press, but also from the black and Communist press, and reveals critical differences in the tone, emphasis, and type of coverage. She offers exceptional insight into the potency of language and discourse in influencing readers’ perceptions of events and individuals and demonstrates how the press coverage of the 1930s continues to shape our understandings of Owens’ legacy.

CONTENTS Introduction Chapter 1: The Press Treatment of Race and Jesse Owens Chapter 2: Grantland Rice’s Coverage of Owens Chapter 3: The Mainstream Writers Chapter 4: The Black Newspapers Chapter 5: The American Communist Press’ Treatment of Jesse Owens Chapter 6: Conclusions Notes. Bibliography. Index.

Aging Among Japanese American Immigrants Studies in Asian Americans

Itsuko Kanamoto PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 160pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-97946-7; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Aging is inevitable. Every individual experiences life's pathos of diminishing strength, flexibility, beauty, roles, relationships, and memory. On the other hand, aging is a group experience that differs from culture to culture. Especially in multicultural societies like the United States, aging differs from one ethnic group to another. The Japanese American elderly, who are perceived as a model minority, are no exception to this differentiation. Aging among Japanese American Immigrants explores the ethnic dimensions of aging among Japanese immigrants in the United States. Due to the successful assimilation of Japanese (Issei) and Japanese Americans (Nisei and Sansei) into American society, they have not been perceived as a discrete age group that needs social support or special health care. Their aging experience, however, is essentially dissimilar to that of 'white ethnic' elderly. Most of the Issei and Nisei are now old men and women who relish Japanese ethnic food and croon Japanese songs in Japanese. It is apparent that the elderly are forced to re-synthesize themselves and transform their social and cultural involvement based on their ethnicity. The ethnographic research explores the ethnic dimensions of aging among Japanese and Japanese-American elderly in the United States, and illustrates their acculturative aging process and the parallel diminishment of culture-deculturative process.

CONTENTS 1. The Graying Japanese American Community 2. Toward New Perspectives on Ethnicity and Aging 3. Living with the Japanese Elderly: Research Methodology 4. Ethnohistory as Collective Memory of Japanese Immigrants in the United States 5. Tales of Aging: Oral Life History as Projective Configuration of Memory 6. Retracing Ethnic Memory: The Ethnography of Aging in Elderly Communities 7. Conclusion: Activating Ethnicity in Memory during the Later Stage of Life

Network Journalism Ansgard Heinrich, University of Melbourne, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88270-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Drawing on current theoretical debates in journalism studies, and grounded in empirical research, Heinrich here analyzes the interplay between journalistic practice and processes of globalization and digitalization. She argues that a new kind of journalism is emerging, characterized by an increasingly global flow of news as well as a growing number of news deliverers. Within this transformed news sphere the roles of journalistic outlets change. They become nodes, arranged in a dense net of information gatherers, producers, and disseminators. The interactive connections among these news providers constitute what Heinrich calls the sphere of "network journalism."

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Information Age and Its Footprints on Journalism Culture 3. The Telegraph and the Evolution of News Agencies 4. Network Journalism: Between Decentralization and Non-Linear News Flows 5. Research Design: Media Practitioners in the UK, the US, and Germany 6. The Impact of Digitalization on Newsroom Practices 7. The Shared Information Sphere: UserGenerated Content Providers, Citizen Journalists, Media Activists and Bloggers 8. Active User-Participation as Indicator of the Network Journalism Sphere 9. Transnational News Flows in the Network Journalism Sphere 10. Re-conceptualizing Journalistic Outlets as Information Notes 11. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

264

Transmedia Television Elizabeth Evans, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $105.00; 229x152 mm; 244pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88292-7; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The early years of the twenty-first century have seen dramatic changes within the television industry. Television texts are no longer confined to the television set as new online and mobile viewing services and multiplatform, transmedia storytelling techniques become ever more pervasive. Viewers can become players as games invite them to explore the narrative worlds of television programmes.

They can take television with them, using portable technologies to watch it at bus stops or on trains. They can break free of television schedules, watching programmes online whenever they choose. They can engage with ‘television’ without ever turning a television set on. Transmedia Television offers an in-depth study of audience attitudes towards the emergence of the internet and mobile phone as platforms for televisual content. Focusing on a particular period of rapid change and using case studies including Spooks , 24 and Doctor Who , it considers how the industry has exploited emergent technologies and the extent to which audiences have embraced them. How has television content been transformed by shifts towards multiplatform strategies? What is the appeal of using game formats to lose oneself within a narrative world? How can television, with its ever larger screens and association with domesticity, be reconciled with the small portable, public technology of the mobile phone? What does the shift from television schedules to online downloading mean for our understanding of ‘the television audience’? Transmedia Television offers insight into each of these questions, ultimately considering what ‘television’ now means for its audiences.

CONTENTS Introduction Part I Understanding Transmediality 1. Transmedia Storytelling: A Historical Perspective 2. Transmedia Engagement: The Internet and Mobile Phone as Alternatives to the Television Set 3. Transmedia Audiences: The Consequences of Emergence Part II Audiences for Emergent Transmedia Drama 4. Spooks Gaming: Immersion and Agency 5. 24: Conspiracy and Mobile Television: Immersion and Immediacy 6. 4OD as Television Archive: Agency, Immediacy and the Transmedia Audience 7. Conclusion: What’s Wrong With Television?

Studies on the Abuse and Decline of Reason The Collected Works of F. A. Hayek

Edited by Bruce Caldwell, Duke University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 336pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57383-2; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The studies of which this book is the result have from the beginning been guided by and in the end confirmed the somewhat oldfashioned conviction of the author that it is human ideas which govern the development of human affairs, Hayek wrote in his notes in 1940. Indeed, Studies on the Abuse and Decline of Reason remains Hayek’s greatest unfinished work and is here presented for the first time under the expert editorship of Bruce Caldwell. In the book, Hayek argues that the abuse and decline of reason was caused by hubris, by man’s pride in his ability to reason, which in Hayek’s mind had been heightened by the rapid advance and multitudinous successes of the natural sciences, and the attempt to apply natural science methods in the social sciences.

CONTENTS Editorial Foreword. Introduction. Prelude Individualism: True and False Part 1: Scientism and the Study of Society 1. The Infl uence of the Natural Sciences on the Social Sciences 2. The Problem and the Method of the Natural Sciences 3. The Subjective Character of the Data of the Social Sciences 4. The Individualist and ‘Compositive’ Method of the Social Sciences 5. The Objectivism of the Scientistic Approach 6. The Collectivism of the Scientistic Approach 7. The Historicism of the Scientistic Approach 8. ‘Purposive’ Social Formations 9. ‘Conscious’ Direction and the Growth of Reason 10.Engineers and Planners Part 2: The Counter-Revolution of Science 11. The Source of the Scientistic Hubris: L’Ecole Polytechnique 12. The "Accoucheur d’Idées": Henri de Saint- Simon 13.

Social Physics: Saint- Simon and Comte 14. The Religion of the Engineers: Enfantin and the Saint- Simonians 15. Saint- Simonian Infl uence 16. Sociology: Comte and His Successors Part 3: Comte and Hegel 17. Comte and Hegel Appendix: Related Documents Some Notes on Propaganda in Germany (1939). Selected Correspondence, F. A. Hayek to Fritz Machlup (1940– 41). Preface to the U. S. Edition (1952). Preface to the German Edition (1959). Acknowledgments. Index.

Autonomy and Liberalism Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy

Ben Colburn, University of Cambridge, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 166pp.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

265 www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87596-7; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book concerns the foundations and implications of a particular form of liberal political theory. Colburn argues that one should see liberalism as a political theory committed to the value of autonomy, understood as consisting in an agent deciding for oneself what is valuable and living life in accordance with that decision. Understanding liberalism this way offers solutions to various problems that beset liberal political theory, on various levels. On the theoretical level, Colburn claims that this position is the only defensible theory of liberalism in current circulation, arguing that other more dominant theories are either self-contradictory or unattractive on closer inspection. And on the practical level, Colburn draws out the substantive commitments of this position in educational, economic, and social policy. Hence, the study provides a blueprint for a radical liberal political agenda which will be of interest to philosophers and to politicians alike.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction: What is Liberalism? 1: Three Conceptions of Autonomy 2: A Theory of Autonomy 3: Autonomy and Anti–Perfectionism 4: Autonomy-Minded Liberalism 5: Multicultural Liberalism Conclusion Notes Bibliography Index

Contrastivism in Philosophy Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy

Edited by Martijn Blaauw, VU University Amsterdam, The Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87860-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Contrastivism can be applied to a variety of problems within philosophy, and as such, it can be coherently seen as a unified movement. This volume brings together state-of-the-art research on the contrastive treatment of philosophical concepts and questions, including knowledge, belief, free will, moral luck, Bayesian confirmation theory, causation, and explanation.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction—Contrastivism in Philosophy Martijn Blaauw 2. Contrastive Explanation Christopher Hitchcock 3. Contrastive Causation Jonathan Schaffer 4. Contrastive Knowledge Adam Morton 5. Contrastive Belief Martijn Blaauw 6. Contrastive Bayesianism Branden Fitelson 7. Contrastive Moral Luck Julia Driver 8. Contrastive Free Will Walter Sinnott-Armstrong

Epistemology and the Regress Problem Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy

Scott Aikin, Vanderbilt University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 244pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87800-5; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In the last decade, the familiar problem of the regress of reasons has returned to prominent consideration in epistemology. And with the return of the problem, evaluation of the options available for its solution is begun anew. Reason’s regress problem, roughly put, is that if one has good reasons to believe something, one must have good reason to hold those reasons are good. And for those reasons, one must have further reasons to hold they are good. And so a regress of reasons looms. In this new study, Aikin presents a full case for infinitism as a response to the issue of the regress of reasons. The most defensible form of infinitism, he argues, is that of a mixed theory – that is, epistemic infinitism must be consistent with and even rely on other solutions to the regress problem.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Regress Problem 2. Infinitism Defended 3. Metaepistemology and the Varieties of Infinitism 4. Foundationalism and Infinitism 5. Foundationalism, Infinitism, and Argumentation

Habermas and Literary Rationality Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy

David L. Colclasure, Monterey Institute of International Studies, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 151pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99471-2; May 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

266 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Literary scholarship has paid little serious attention to Habermas' philosophy, and, on the other hand, the reception of Habermas has given little attention to the role that literary practice can play in a broader theory of communicative action. David Colclasure's argument sets out to demonstrate that a specific, literary form of rationality inheres in literary practice and the public reception of literary works which provides a unique contribution to the political public sphere.

CONTENTS 1: Introduction 2: The Theory of Communicative Action: A Synopsis 3: Literary Rationality and Communicative Reason 4: The Claim of Authenticity: Wolfgang Hilbig and the Novel "Ich" 5: Concluding Remark Notes Bibliography Index

Habermas and Rawls Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy

Edited by James Gordon Finlayson, Sussex University, UK and Fabian Freyenhagen, University of Essex, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87686-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Habermas and Rawls are two heavyweights of social and political philosophy, and they are undoubtedly the two most written about (and widely read) authors in this field. However, there has not been much informed and interesting work on the points of intersection between their projects, partly because their work comes from different traditions—roughly the European tradition of social and political theory and the Anglo-American analytic tradition of political philosophy. In this volume, contributors re-examine the Habermas-Rawls dispute with an eye toward the way in which the dispute can cast light on current controversies about political philosophy more broadly. Moreover, the volume will cover a number of other salient issues on which Habermas and Rawls have interesting and divergent views, such as the political role of religion and international justice.

CONTENTS Introduction I. The Original Dispute 1. Reconciliation through the Public Reason: Remarks on John Rawls’s Political Liberalism Jürgen Habermas 2. Reply to Habermas John Rawls† 3. Reasonable versus True: or the Morality of World Views Jürgen Habermas II. Evaluation and Revaluation of the Dispute 4. Habermas and Rawls on Collective Reasoning Chris McMahon (University of California, Santa Barbara) 5. Justice: Transcendental not Metaphysical: What Habermas Should have said to Rawls Joseph Heath (University of Toronto, Canada) 6. The Justification of Justice Rainer Forst (University of Frankfurt) III. Substantive Issues 7. The Idea of Social Criticism in Habermas and Rawls Andrea Sangiovanni (King's College London) 8. Habermas and Rawls on Human Rights Jeff Flynn (Fordham) 9. Procedural versus substantive conceptions of justice Cristina Lafont (Northwestern University) 10.

Democracy and Public Reasons Anthony Simon Laden (University of Illinois at Chicago) 11. Habermas and Rawls on Religion Catherine Audard (London School of Economics) 12. Habermas and Rawls on International Justice Jim Bohman (St. Louis) 13.

Afterword Jürgen Habermas

Objectivity and the Language-Dependence of Thought Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy

Christian Barth, Humboldt-Universität, Berlin, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88269-9; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Comprising the insights of two primary representatives of twentieth century and contemporary philosophy, this book provides an original transcendental analysis of the nature of thought. Looking at the works of Donald Davidson and Robert Brandom, Barth creates a transcendental defence of universal conceptual lingualism and linguistic interpretationism. This defence also provides an explanation of the phylogenesis of the concept of objectivity, which reveals the intersubjective roots of this concept. The consequences of the developed position have a strong impact on many contemporary debates in the philosophy of mind and language and on empirical research in cognitive science, ethology, artificial intelligence, and cognitive archaeology. The book is, thus, a substantial contribution to lively discussed topics in contemporary theoretical philosophy and empirical research on cognition.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: The Lingualism/Mentalism-Controversy 2. From Conceptual Analysis to Transcendental Analysis 3. A Davidsonian TDM-Argument in Favour of Universal Conceptual Lingualism 4. Brandomean Answers to the Objection from Thought and to the Objection from Objectivity 5. Summary and Outlook

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

267

Philosophical Delusion and its Therapy Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy

Eugen Fischer, University of East Anglia, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-33179-1; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Philosophical Delusion and its Therapy develops a novel account of the nature and genesis of philosophical problems. This account vindicates a revolutionary reorientation of philosophical work: the project of philosophical therapy pioneered by Ludwig Wittgenstein.

With the help of concepts adapted from different branches of cognitive science (cognitive linguistics, cognitive and clinical psychology), the book explains where and why therapy is called for in philosophy, and develops techniques to actually carry it out.

The Philosophy of the Pittsburgh School Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy

Chauncey Maher, Dickinson College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 260pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80442-4; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this volume, Maher contextualizes the work of a group of contemporary analytic philosophers--The Pittsburgh School--whose work is characterized by an interest in the history of philosophy and a commitment to normative functionalism, or the insight that to identify something as a manifestation of conceptual capacities is to place it in a space of norms. Beginning by identifying the key players of the Pittsburgh School--Wilfried Sellars, Robert Brandom, John McDowell, John Haugeland, and others--and describing the central themes that characterize their work, the book then dedicates chapters to the School's contributions to individual areas of philosophy, covering language, action, mind, knowledge, and science.

Rawls, Citizenship, and Education Routledge Studies in Contemporary Philosophy

M. Victoria Costa, Florida State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $105.00; 229x152 mm; 194pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87795-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book develops and applies a unified interpretation of John Rawls’ theory of justice as fairness in order to clarify the account of citizenship that Rawls relies upon, and the kind of educational policies that the state can legitimately pursue to promote social justice.

Costa examines the role of the family as the "first school of justice" and its basic contribution to the moral and political development of children. It also argues that schools are necessary to supplement the education that families provide, teaching the political virtues that support just social institutions. The book also examines the questions of whether civic education should aim at cultivating patriotic feelings, and how it should respond to the deep cultural pluralism of contemporary democratic societies.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments 1: Introduction 2: What is a Just Society? 3: Stability and Social Change 4: The Family 5: Reasonable Citizens 6: Free and Equal Citizens 7: Patriotism 8: Cultural Diversity 9: Concluding Remarks Notes Bibliography Index

Ethics and the Digital Divide Routledge Studies in Ethics and Moral Theory

Emma Rooksby, Charles Sturt University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $120.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-39960-9; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The digital divide is a term used to denote inequalities in access to information and communication technologies (ICTs). Despite the existence of numerous publications concerning the digital divide, and the obvious importance of the subject area, there has, to date,

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

268 been almost no research published on philosophical and normative aspects of the subject. This book fills that gap. Emma Rooksby poses the intriguing question: 'Are digital divides unjust?' The key aims of the book are: to provide a broad overview of the phenomena collectively known as digital divides, at both national and international levels, and to develop a clear and well-reasoned account of the morally significant aspects of digital divides to develop a philosophical framework, based on John Rawls theory of justice, in which to evaluate digital divides to illustrate the relationship between inequalities in access to ICTs and broader issues of social justice, at both national and global levels. This book will be if interest to a broad range of philosophers, as well as to the general reader who has some interest in information technology and/or digital divides.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Characterising Digital Divides 3. How to Argue about Digital Divides 4. The Nature of the Disagreement 5. Global Justice and the Digital Divide

Freedom of the Will Routledge Studies in Metaphysics

Ferenc Huoranszki, Central European University, Budapest, Hungary PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87947-7; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The book provides a novel interpretation of G. E. Moore’s famous conditional analysis of free will and discusses several questions about the meaning of free will and its significance for moral responsibility. Although Moore’ theory has a strong initial appeal, most metaphysicians believe that there are conclusive arguments against it. Huoranszki argues that the importance of conditional analysis must be reevaluated in light of some recent developments in the theory of dispositions. The original analysis can be amended so that the revised conditional account is not only a good response to determinist worries about the possibility of free will, but it can also explain the sense in which free will is an important condition of moral responsibility. This study addresses three fundamental issues about free will as a metaphysical condition of responsibility. First, the book explains why agents are responsible for their actions or omissions only if they have the ability to do otherwise and shows that the relevant ability is best captured by the revised conditional analysis. Second, it aims to clarify the relation between agents’ free will and their rational capacities. It argues that free will as a condition of responsibility must be understood in terms of agents’ ability to do otherwise rather than in terms of their capacity to respond to reasons. Finally, the book explains in which sense responsibility requires self-determination and argues that it is compatible with agents’ limited capacity to control their own character, reasons, and motives.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Fate and Freedom 2. Contingency and Free Will 3. Responsibility and Control 4. Reason and Intelligibility 5.

Spontaneity and Self-determination 6. Concluding Remarks

The Metaphysics of Powers Routledge Studies in Metaphysics

Edited by Anna Marmodoro, University of Oxford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 227pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87685-8; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume is a collection of papers that advance our understanding of the metaphysics of powers — properties such as fragility and electric charge. The metaphysics of powers is a fast developing research field with fundamental questions at the forefront of current research, such as Can there be a world of only powers? What is the manifestation of a power? Are powers and their manifestations related by necessity? What are the prospects for dispositional accounts of causation? The papers focus on questions concerning the metaphysics of powers that cut across any particular subject-specific ontological domain -- whether philosophy of science, philosophy of mind, ethics, epistemology – investigating the metaphysical structure of powers, the nature of the manifestation of powers, the necessity or contingency of a power’s relation to its manifestations, and powers and causation. A number of authors also engage in discussion with Humean and neo-Humean treatments of causation, thereby making contributions to a larger metaphysical debate beyond powers. Additionally, the authors engage critically with the latest contributions to the debate on powers in the literature, thereby bringing together in a wholesome and analytical way the most recent and noteworthy theoretical developments in this research field.

CONTENTS Introduction, Anna Marmodoro 1: On the Individuation of Powers, E.J. Lowe 2: Do Powers Need Powers to Make Them Powerful?

From Pandispositionalism to Aristotle, Anna Marmodoro 3: Categories and the Ontology of Powers: A Vindication of the Identity Theory of Properties, Kristina Engelhard 4: Powerful Qualities, John Heil 5: Manifestations as Effects, Jennifer McKitrick 6: Puzzling Powers: The Problem of Fit, Neil Williams 7: Dispositions, Manifestations, and Causal Structure, Toby Handfield 8: Causal Powers

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

269 and Categorical Properties, Brian Ellis 9: A Powerful Theory of Causation, Stephen Mumford and Rani Anjum 10: Causation and the Manifestation of Powers, Alexander Bird 11: Antidotes for Dispositional Essentialism, Markus Schrenk Notes on Contributors Bibliography Index

The Semantics and Metaphysics of Natural Kinds Routledge Studies in Metaphysics

Edited by Helen Beebee and Nigel Sabbarton-Leary, both of University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87366-6; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Essentialism--roughly, the view that natural kinds have discrete essences, generating truths that are necessary but knowable only a posteriori --is an increasingly popular view in the metaphysics of science. At the same time, philosophers of language have been subjecting Kripke’s views about the existence and scope of the necessary a posteriori to rigorous analysis and criticism. Essentialists typically appeal to Kripkean semantics to motivate their radical extension of the realm of the necessary a posteriori ; but they rarely attempt to provide any semantic arguments for this extension, or engage with the critical work being done by philosophers of language. This collection brings authors on both sides together in one volume, thus helping the reader to see the connections between views in philosophy of language on the one hand and the metaphysics of science on the other. The result is a book that will have a significant impact on the debate about essentialism, encouraging essentialists to engage with debates about the semantic presuppositions that underpin their position, and, encouraging philosophers of language to engage with the metaphysical presuppositions enshrined in Kripkean semantics.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments 1: Introduction, Helen Beebee and Nigel Sabbarton-Leary 2: Rigidity, Natural Kind Terms and Metasemantics, Corine Besson 3: General Terms as Designators: A Defence of The View, Genoveva Martí and José Martínez-Fernández 4: Are Natural Kind Terms Special? Åsa Wikforss 5: The Commonalities Between Proper Names and Natural Kind Terms: A Fregean Perspective, Harold Noonan 6: Theoretical Identity Statements, Their Truth, and Their Discovery, Joseph LaPorte 7: Discovering the Essences of Natural Kinds, Alexander Bird 8: The Elements and Conceptual Change, Robin Hendry 9: On the Abuse of the Necessary A Posterior, Helen Beebee and Nigel Sabbarton-Leary 10: Crosscutting Natural Kinds and the Hierarchy Thesis, Emma Tobin 11: From Constitutional Necessities to Causal Necessities, Jessica Wilson 12: Realism, Natural Kinds and Philosophical Methods, Richard Boyd Notes on Contributors Index

Dialectics, Politics, and the Contemporary Value of Hegel's Practical Philosophy Routledge Studies in Nineteenth Century Philosophy

Andrew Buchwalter, University of North Florida, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 260pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80610-7; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores and details the actuality (Aktualität) of Hegel’s social and political philosophy--its relevance, topicality, presence, and contemporary validity. It asserts--against the assumptions of those in a wide range of traditions--that Hegel’s thought not only remains relevant to debates in current social and political theory, but is capable of productively enhancing and enriching those debates.

The book is divided into three main sections. Part I considers the actuality of Hegel’s social and political thought in the context of a constructed dialogues with later social and political theorists, including Marx, Adorno, Habermas, and Rawls. Part II explores Hegel’s internal criticism of Enlightenment rationality as well as the unique manner in which his thought reaffirms both the classical tradition of politics and the Christian conception of freedom in order to deepen and further develop our understanding of modernity and modern secularity. And, Part III considers Hegel’s contribution to current theorizing about globalization.

CONTENTS Introduction: The Actuality of Dialectics I: Normative Political Theory in Dialogue 1. Hegel, Marx, and the Concept of Immanent Critique 2. Hegel, Adorno, and the Concept of Transcendent Critique 3. Law, Culture, and Constitutionalism: Remarks on Hegel and Habermas 4. Political Pluralism in Hegel and Rawls II: Modernity and Secularity 5. Hegel and the Doctrine of Expressivism 6.

Hegel, Hobbes and Kant on the Scienticization of Practical Philosophy 7. Hegel’s Concept of Virtue 8. Political Theology and Modern Republicanism: Hegel’s Conception of the State as an "Earthly Divinity" Part III: Eurocentrism, Globality, and Interculturalism 9. Hegel’s Conception of an "International ‘We’" 10. Hegel, Global Justice, and the Logic of Recognition 11. Is Hegel’s Philosophy of History Eurocentric? 12. Conclusion. Dialectical Political Theory Today

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

270

Mill's Radical Liberalism Routledge Studies in Nineteenth Century Philosophy

Jonathan Riley, Tulane University, New Orleans, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-18909-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this major reinterpretation and contemporary defence of Mill's political philosophy, Riley offers a new reading of Mill's radical doctrine that is quite distinct from the prevalent and vague understanding of the term 'liberalism'. Based on the argument of On Liberty , the book begins by indicating the current debates about Mill's liberalism, followed by a summary of the argument, and an exploration of the alternative forms of liberalism that have since emerged such as the doctrines of Green, Bosanquet and Berlin. Riley then provides a full reinterpretation of Mill's doctrine covering issues of social custom and behaviour, and recent claims about Millian application on cases of pornography and prostitution . This fascinating investigation of one of the most controversial doctrines in philosophy is essential reading for students of Mill and political philosophy, and for those interested in the concept of liberty and its application.

Vanishing Matter and the Laws of Nature Routledge Studies in Seventeenth Century Philosophy

Edited by Peter Anstey, University of Otago, New Zealand and Dana Jalobeanu, Western University “Vasile Goldis,” Romania PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $105.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88266-8; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume brings together a range of new studies on the philosophy of matter, its qualities and law-like behavior in the early modern period. Chapters are unified by a number of interlocking themes--including the laws of nature, vanishing matter, and our knowledge of material bodies--which together enable some of the broader contours of the philosophy of matter to be charted in new ways.

CONTENTS Introduction I. Cartesian Matter 1. The Vanishing Nature of Body in Descartes' Natural Philosophy Mihnea Dobre 2. The New Matter Theory and Its Epistemology: Descartes (and late Scholastics) on Hypotheses and Moral Certainty Roger Ariew II. Matter, Mechanism, and Medicine 3. Post-Cartesian Atomism: The Case of Francois Bernier Vlad Alexandrescu 4. The Matter of Medicine: New Medical Matter Theories in Mid-Seventeenth-Century England Peter Anstey 5. Without God: Gravity as a Relational Quality of Matter in Newton's Treatise Eric Schliesser III. Matter and the Laws of Motion 6. The Cartesians of the Royal Society: The Debate Over the Nature of collisions (1668-1671) Dana Jalobeanu 7. On Composite Systems: Descartes, Newton, and the Law-Constitutive Approach Katherine Brading 8. Huygens, Wren, Wallis, and Newton on Rules of Impact and Reflection Jemma Murray, William Harper, and Curtis Wilson IV. Leibniz and Hume 9. Leibniz, Body and Monads Daniel Garber 10. Leibniz on Void and Matter Sorin Costreie 11. Hume on the Distinction Between Primary and Secondary Qualities Jani Hakkarainen

Emergence in Science and Philosophy Routledge Studies in the Philosophy of Science

Edited by Antonella Corradini, Catholic University of Milan, Italy and Timothy O'Connor, Indiana University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 354pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80216-1; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The concept of emergence has seen a significant resurgence in philosophy and the sciences, yet debates regarding emergentist and reductionist visions of the natural world continue to be hampered by imprecision or ambiguity. Emergent phenomena are said to arise out of and be sustained by more basic phenomena, while at the same time exerting a "top-down" control upon those very sustaining processes. To some critics, this has the air of magic, as it seems to suggest a kind of circular causality. Other critics deem the concept of emergence to be objectionably anti-naturalistic. Objections such as these have led many thinkers to construe emergent phenomena instead as coarse-grained patterns in the world that, while calling for distinctive concepts, do not "disrupt" the ordinary dynamics of the finer-grained (more fundamental) levels. Yet, reconciling emergence with a (presumed) pervasive causal continuity at the fundamental level can seem to deflate emergence of its initially profound significance. This basic problematic is mirrored by similar controversy over how best to characterize the opposite systematizing impulse, most commonly given an equally evocative but vague

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

271 term, "reductionism." The original essays in this volume help to clarify the alternatives: inadequacies in some older formulations and arguments are exposed and new lines of argument on behalf the two visions are advanced.

CONTENTS List of Figures Introduction, Antonella Corradini and Timothy O’Connor PART I: Emergence: General Perspectives Introduction to Part 1 1. The Secret Lives of Emergents, Hong Yu Wong 2. On the Implications of Scientific Composition and Completeness: Or, The Troubles, and Troubles, of Non-Reductive Physicalism, Carl Gillett 3. Weak Emergence and Context-sensitive Reduction Mark Bedau 4. Two Varieties of Causal Emergentism, Michele Di Francesco 5. The Emergence of Group Cognition, Georg Theiner and Timothy O’Connor PART II: Self, Agency and Free Will Introduction to Part 2 6. Why My Body is Not Me: The Unity Argument for Emergentist Self-Body Dualism, E. J. Lowe 7. What About the Emergence of Consciousness Deserves Puzzlement?, Martine Nida Rümelin 8. The Emergence of Rational Souls, Uwe Meixner 9. Are Deliberations and Decisions Emergent, if Free?, Achim Stephan 10. Is Emergentism Refuted by the Neurosciences? The Case of Free Will, Mario De Caro PART III: Physics, Mathematics, and the Special Sciences Introduction to part 3 11. Emergence in Physics, Patrick Mcgivern And Alexander Rueger 12. The Emergence of the Intuition of Truth in Mathematical Thought, Sergio Galvan 13. The Emergence of Mind at the Co-evolutive Level, Arturo Carsetti 14.

Emerging Mental Phenomena: Implications for Psychological Explanation, Alessandro Antonietti 15. How Special are Special Sciences?, Antonella Corradini Notes on Contributors Index

Platonism, Naturalism, and Mathematical Knowledge Routledge Studies in the Philosophy of Science

James Robert Brown, University of Toronto, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87266-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This study addresses a central theme in current philosophy: Platonism vs Naturalism and provides accounts of both approaches to mathematics, crucially discussing Quine, Maddy, Kitcher, Lakoff, Colyvan, and many others. Beginning with accounts of both approaches, Brown defends Platonism by arguing that only a Platonistic approach can account for concept acquisition in a number of special cases in the sciences. He also argues for a particular view of applied mathematics, a view that supports Platonism against Naturalist alternatives. Not only does this engaging book present the Platonist-Naturalist debate over mathematics in a comprehensive fashion, but it also sheds considerable light on non-mathematical aspects of a dispute that is central to contemporary philosophy.

CONTENTS Preface 1. Mathematical Explanation 2. What is Naturalism? 3. Perception, Practice, and Ideal Agents: Kitcher’s Naturalism 4. Just Metaphor?: Lakoff’s Language 5. Semi-Naturalists and Reluctant Realists 6. A Life of its Own?: Maddy and Mathematical Autonomy 7. Seeing with the Mind’s Eye: The Platonist Alternative 8. Afterword

Popper’s Critical Rationalism Routledge Studies in the Philosophy of Science

Darrell Rowbottom, University of Oxford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99244-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book presents Popper’s views on science, knowledge, and reality, and examines the significance and tenability of these in light of recent developments in philosophy. Supported throughout with close reference to Popper’s writings, it presents a novel view of his philosophical outlook, and demonstrates how it remains relevant in the modern day.

CONTENTS Introduction; 1. Popper on Induction: Dissolving the Myths; 2. The Alternatives:'Falsificationism' and Critical Rationalism; 3.

Probability, Confirmation, and Corroboration; 4. Theory and Observation; 5. The Aim of Science; 6. Popper's Metaphysics and Beyond

C. D. Broad’s Philosophy of Time Routledge Studies in Twentieth Century Philosophy

L. Nathan Oaklander, University of Michigan – Flint, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

272 www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99812-3; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this study, Oaklander's primary aim is to examine critically C.D. Broad’s changing views of time and in so doing both clarify the central disputes in the philosophy of time, explicate the various positions Broad took regarding them, and develop his own responses both to Broad and the issues debated.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: The Problem of Time 2. The Early Years: A Defense of the B-theory of Time 3. Is the Future Open? 4. McTaggart’s Paradox 5. The Middle Period: A Defense of Absolute Becoming and a Critique of the B-theory 6. Temporal Experience 7.

Presentism 8. The Later Years: The Two-Dimensional Time Hypothesis

Bioregionalism and Global Ethics Studies in Philosophy

Richard Evanoff, Aoyama Gakuin University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87479-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book suggests that current trends towards globalization are creating entirely new social and environmental problems which require cross-cultural dialogue towards the creation of a new "global ethic." Current models of development are based on an implicit global ethic which advocates bringing everyone in the world up to the same standards of living as those prevalent in the so-called "developed" countries through unlimited economic growth. Evanoff argues that this goal is not only unattainable but also undesirable because it ultimately undermines the ability of the environment to sustain both human and non-human flourishing, exacerbates rather than overcomes social inequalities both within and between cultures, and fails to achieve genuine human well-being for all but a wealthy minority. An alternative bioregional global ethic is proposed which seeks to maximize ecological sustainability, social justice, and human well-being through the creation of economically self-sufficient and politically decentralized communities delinked from the global market, but confederated at appropriate levels to address problems that transcend cultural borders. Such an ethic is based on a transactional view of the relationship between self, society, and nature, which attempts to create more symbiotic and less conflictual modes of interaction between human cultures and natural environments, while promoting the flourishing of both. Instead of a single monolithic global ethic, bioregionalism suggests that there should be sufficient convergence between cultures to allow for the successful resolution of mutual problems, but also sufficient divergence to enable the continued evolution of both biological and cultural diversity on a global scale.

CONTENTS Preface Acknowledgements List of Figures I. A Bioregional Perspective on Global Ethics 1. Bioregionalism and the Dominant Development Paradigm 2. Cross-Cultural Dialogue on a Global Ethic II. A Transactional Framework for Bioregional Ethics 3.

Transactionalism and Bioregional Ethics 4. The Coevolution of Nature And Society 5. The Social Construction of Nature III. Harmonizing Self, Society, and Nature 6. Beyond Anthropocentrism and Ecocentricism 7. Communicative Ethics and Moral Considerability 8. Cross-Cultural Dialogue on a Land Ethic IV. A Bioregional Paradigm for Global Ethics 9. Bioregionalism and Ecological Sustainability 10. Bioregionalism and Social Justice 11. Bioregionalism and Human Well-Being V. Bioregionalism in a Global Context 12. Preserving Biocultural Diversity 13. Bringing the Economy Home 14. Acting Locally, Interacting Globally VI. Globalism in Its Place 15. Global Ethics Revisited 16. Transitions to a Bioregional "World Order"

The Ethics of Need Studies in Philosophy

Sarah Clark Miller, University of Memphis, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $110.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88268-2; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this book, Sarah Clark Miller illuminates the philosophical importance of the notion of need and constructs an ethical framework through which we can determine which needs have moral significance. She synthesizes insights from Kantian and feminist ethics to establish that our inescapable interdependence gives rise to a duty to care for the fundamental needs of others. We are obligated not merely to meet others’ needs, but to do so in a manner that expresses "dignifying care," a concept Miller originates to capture how human interactions can grant or deny equal moral standing and inclusion in a moral community. Miller argues that meeting others’ needs also entails bolstering their agency, understood in a broad way that moves beyond the conventional identification of agency with rational capacity and foregrounds human emotional and relational abilities. She illustrates these theoretical developments by examining two cases where urgent needs require a caring and dignifying response: the needs of the elderly and the needs of distant

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

273 strangers.The work as a whole provides a compelling case for the moral significance of human need, a central, yet undertheorized concept in ethics.

CONTENTS Introduction: Reasoning the Need 1. The Moral Significance of Needs 2. The Duty to Care 3. The Manner of Meeting Needs 4. The Margins of Agency: Caring for the Fundamental Needs of Old Age 5. Global Needs and Cosmopolitan Care 6. Conclusion: Future Needs

James Mill and the Despotism of Philosophy Studies in Philosophy

David McInerney, University of Adelaide, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-95612-3; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This study considers the relations between James Mill's The History of British India (1818) and Enlightenment historiography, especially William Robertson's Historical Disquisition Concerning the Knowledge the Ancients had of India (1791). David McInerney argues that it was in The History of British India that Mill first published his theory of government, which appears there in his account of 'Oriental despotism' and his criticisms of Robertson's account of the caste system, and that, contrary to the opinion of certain critics, Mill's usage of 'history' in The History of British India is not rationalist but rather entails a distinctively empiricist conception of the relationship between historical records and the improvement of government.

CONTENTS Preface Introduction James Mill and our postcolonial conjuncture Chapter 1 The topos of 'Oriental Despotism' in Western political thought Chapter 2 India in the Scottish Enlightenment: Smith, Millar, Robertson Chapter 3 The India debates and Mill's departure from 'Common Sense' Chapter 4 Mill's empiricism and his critique of the Orientalist 'saving hypothesis' Chapter 5 Mill's account of 'the system of castes' and his essay on 'Government' Chapter 6 Mill on 'The Mohammedans': Education, Government, and Knowledge Bibliography

The Baltic States BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Richard Mole, University College London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; ÂŁ80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-39497-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Baltic States provides an informative and interesting overview of developments in Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania, as they made the transition from Soviet domination to membership of the European Union. Uniquely analyzing the entire transition, this book: focuses on the concepts of identity, sovereignty and power in the domestic and international politics of the Baltic states charts the development of the identities of these states during the twentieth century, going on to examine how this changed with the end of Soviet rule considers the implications for domestic political, economic and social life, and also for foreign policy assesses the shift in identity that culminated in these states joining the EU, and the ceding of sovereignty that this entailed. With the politics of the European Union being a highly topical topic, this book constitutes an impressive account of a critical phase in the history of the Baltic states, and represents an important contribution to wider theoretical debates concerning the nature of identity, power, sovereignty and nationalism.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Identity and Power in National Politics 2. Identity and Power in International Relations 3. Sovereignty and Identity in the Baltic State: A Historical Perspective 4. State and Nation-Building: Creating a Post-Soviet Identity 5. State and Nation-Building: Identity, Economy and Society 6. The Legacy of History: Identity and Foreign Policy 7. Between Russia and NATO: Identity and Security 8. Joining the European Union: Identity and Sovereignty. Conclusion

Bolshevising the Soviet Communist Party BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Younhee Kang, Kookmin University, Korea PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

274 HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-36370-9; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In the early years of the Soviet Union, the nature of the communist party was not yet fixed. The key features of the communist regime all emerged during the key period of the First Five Year plan, 1928-32. This book, based on extensive original research and making full use of the party archives, examines the party organization at the regional and local level. Focusing on the Leningrad region, the book considers party organization and structure, personnel, membership and recruitment, and explores the purges which occurred as the party fixed on the Stalinist direction it was to follow, discarding other possible ways forward.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Leningrad Oblast and Leningrad City 3. Party Structure and Organisation 4. Party Membership and Recruitment 5.

Party Purges in 1929-30 and 1933 6. Party Personnel 7. Factory Party Cells in Leningrad 8. Conclusions

Constitutional Bargaining in Russia, 1990–93 BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Edward Morgan-Jones, University of Kent, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 196pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49991-0; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The years 1990-93 were a critical moment in Russia’s political development. This book provides a systematic explanation of outcomes of constitutional bargaining processes in Russia, which radically reshaped the institutions of the Russian state: removing Russia from constitutional subordination to the Soviet Union in 1990; creating a presidency and a constitutional court in 1991; and restructuring the relationship between the central state and its component federal units with the passage of three Federal Treaties in 1992. The book explores the reasons for these outcomes and identifies why there were consistent delays to the passage of a new Russian constitution as well as why negotiations eventually broke down. The book assesses the plausibility of different theoretical approaches to constitutional choice and argues that the role of uncertainty (and politician's strategic responses to uncertainty) in shaping constitutional outcomes has been under-explored by rational choices approaches to constitutional bargaining. Using a rich set of source materials - including roll call votes, parliamentary records, unpublished parliamentary and constitution commission documents, Russian newspapers - the book provides a detailed study of Russian politician's decision making about constitutional choices. It is a valuable resource to those interested in Russia and post-communist politics, the origins of political institutions, comparative government, democratisation and development studies.

CONTENTS 1. Explaining the Beginning of Constitutional Negotiations 2. Explaining the Outcomes of Constitutional Negotiations before the fall of the Soviet Union 3. Yeltin’s Missed Opportunity? 4. Constitutional Negotiations within Congressional Institutions after the fall of the Soviet Union. 5. Explaining the Breakdown of Constitutional Negotiations

Disease, Health Care and Government in Late Imperial Russia BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Charlotte Henze, University of Cambridge, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54794-9; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book addresses fundamental issues about the last decades of Tsarist Russia, contributing significantly to current debates about how far and how successfully modernisation was being implemented by the Tsarist regime. It focuses on successive outbreaks of cholera in the city of Saratov on the Volga, in particular contrasting the outbreak of 1892, which was widely regarded at the time as a national fiasco and a transformative episode for the Russian Empire, with the 1904 outbreak, when completely new scientific and administrative arrangements successfully contained the disease. The book sets the outbreaks fully in their social, economic, political and cultural context. It explains why a medical and social disaster that had long since been overcome in other parts of Europe continued much later in Russia. It explores autocratic government, urban renewal, public health, and disaster management, including the management of widespread public hysteria and social unrest. It analyses the degree to which Western medical knowledge was assimilated, how far related institutional and epistemological changes resulted, and just how far public health and urban government advanced in a relatively short period.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Cholera in Russia 3. Saratov on the Eve of the Epidemic 4. Cholera in Saratov, 1892 5. Sanitised Politics and the Politics of Medicine 6. The Revival of Cholera, 1904-1914 7. Conclusion: Saratov, Cholera and the Empire

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

275

The EU–Russia Borderland BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Edited by Heikki Eskilinen, Ilkka Liikanen and James W. Scott, all of University of Eastern Finland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55247-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION After the collapse of the Soviet Union, there were high hopes of Russia’s "modernisation" and rapid political and economic integration with the EU. But now, given its own policies of national development, Russia appears to have ‘limits to integration’. Today, much European political discourse again evokes East/West civilisational divides and antagonistic geopolitical interests in EU-Russia relations. This book provides a carefully researched and timely analysis of this complex relationship and examines whether this turn in public debate corresponds to local-level experience – particularly in border areas where the European Union and Russian Federation meet. This multidisciplinary book - covering geopolitics, international relations, political economy and human geography - argues that the concept ‘limits to integration’ has its roots in geopolitical reasoning; it examines how Russian regional actors have adapted to the challenges of simultaneous internal and external integration, and what kind of strategies they have developed in order to meet the pressures coming across the border and from the federal centre. It analyses the reconstitution of Northwest Russia as an economic, social and political space, and the role cross-border interaction has had in this process. The book illustrates how a comparative regional perspective offers insights into the EU-Russia relationship: even if geopolitics sets certain constraints to co-operation, and market processes have led to conflict in cross-border interaction, several actors have been able to take initiative and create space for increasing cross-border integration in the conditions of Russia’s internal reconstitution.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Heikki Eskelinen, Ilkka Liikanen, James Scott Part 1: NW Russia in the Internal and External Integration of the Russian Federation 2. Federal Reforms, Interregional Relations and Political Integration in Northwest Russia Elena Belokurova and Maria Nozhenko 3. Regional Identity-Building and Cross-Border Interaction Elena Belokurova and Maria Nozhenko Part 2: Processes and Actors 4. Geopolitics and the Market: Borderland Economies in the Making Heikki Eskelinen 5. The West and Cooperation with the West in Post-Soviet Ethnic Mobilisation in Russian Karelia Ilkka Liikanen 6. Crossing the Borders of Finnish and North-West Russian Labour Markets Pertti Koistinen, Oxana Krutova & Tuukka Arosara 7. Re-Connecting Territorialities? Spatial Planning Co-Operation between Eastern Finnish and Russian and Sub-national Governments Matti Fritsch 8. Oil and Gas Infrastructure in Northwest Russia: Business Development and Social Responsibility Dmitry Zimin 9. Civil Society Organisations as Drivers of CrossBorder Interaction: On Whose Terms, for Which Purpose? Jussi Laine and Andrey Demidov Part 3: Arenas (Of Cross-Border Interaction) 10. Russian Border Towns: Four Stories of Cross-Border Interaction (Svetogorsk, Sortavala, Kostomuksha and Kandalaksha) Dmitry Zimin, Juha Kotilainen et al 11. Repositioning a Border Town: Sortavala Alexander Izotov 12. Informal Transitions: North-West Russian Youth Living Amidst the Hybridity of Western Influences and Soviet Legacies Pirjo Jukarainen Part 4: Reflections and Conclusions 13. The Northwest Russian Borderland in a European Context Vladimir Kolossov and James Scott 14.

Reciprocal Perspectives and Integration. Lessons from the Finnish-Russian Case Heikki Eskelinen and Ilkka Liikanen

Khrushchev in the Kremlin BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Edited by Jeremy Smith, University of Birmingham, UK and Melanie Ilic, University of Gloucestershire, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47648-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book, based on extensive original research including in recently declassified archives, considers politics, economics and the process of government in the Soviet Union under the leadership of Nikita Khrushchev. It examines the full complexity of government, including central government, individual ministries, regional leaders, separate institutions such as the military, and the lower levels of the Communist Party, outlining the interactions between them, and the contradictions arising from competing interests, and showing how the development and implementation of the important reforms which took place in this period were much more than Khrushchev’s own ideas. It discusses the various important reforms, and argues that de-Stalinisation was not the overarching determinant of policy, demonstrating continuities with as well as breaks from the past. Unlike many other studies which consider the subject from the perspective of the Cold War and superpower relations, this book provides an overview of the internal development of the Soviet Union in this period, locating it in the broader context of Soviet history.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Jeremy Smith 2. Khrushchev as Leader Ian Thatcher 3. The Rise of Political Clans in the Party-State Apparatus Nikolai Mitrokhin 4. Reorganisations of the Central Committee Apparatus Alexander Titov 5. Civil-Military Relations Joshua Andy 6.

Policy Against Dissent Robert Hornsby 7. Leadership and Nationalism in the Soviet Republics, 1953–59 Jeremy Smith 8. MoscowKiev Relations and the Sovnarkhoz Reform Nataliya Kibita 9. The Leningrad Party Organisation in the Khrushchev Era John Barber 10. The Sovnarkhozi in Ukraine Valery Vasiliev 11. Khrushchev and Technology Transfer from the West Sari Autio-Sarasmo 12. The

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

276 Economy of Illusions: The Phenomenon of Data Inflation in the Khrushchev Era Oleg Khlevniuk 13. The Modernisation of the Soviet Railways John Westwood 14. From Khrushchev (1935) to Khrushchev (1956–64): Construction Policy Compared Bob Davies and Melanie Ilic

Learning to Labour in Post-Soviet Russia BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Charles Walker, University of Oxford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47985-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores how young people in Russia struggle with individual transitions to adulthood – in education, work, housing and family – in a society which itself is undergoing a rapid and thoroughgoing transformation. Based on extensive original research, it shows how Russia’s vocational education system continues to channel its graduates into employment in state and former-state industrial enterprises, despite the severe problems with wage non-payment, irregularity of employment and unsafe working conditions, at the same time as young vocational graduates themselves are more interested in pursuing the new opportunities in the emerging service sector and the increasingly accessible market of higher education. Overall, it shows how young people’s aspirations are at odds with, and how some circumvent, a system designed to prepare working class children for working class jobs and thereby reinforce existing social stratification.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Transition from school to work in theoretical perspective 3. Transitions in transition: young people in emerging markets of labour, education and housing 4. Managing transitions: the IVET system in Ul’ianovsk Oblast 5. Fractured transitions: from inheritance to individualization 6. ‘Learning to learn’: making and breaking educational transitions 7. Social networks and role playing: the boundaries of transitions and the limits of change 8. Conclusion: Navigating a ‘zombie’ system

Poland's Troubled Transition, 1989–2008 BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Jacqueline Hayden, Trinity College, Dublin, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49451-9; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines developments in Poland from 1989 to the present. Based on extensive original research, including the author’s interviews with many of the leading participants, the book discusses the different visions for a post-communist Poland held by different parties and individuals, and outlines how events have unfolded, and how these visions have been either implemented, frustrated or modified.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Interpreting 1989 – conflicting conceptions of the Roundtable deal and the impact on contemporary Polish politics. 2.

Explaining endemic instability: the post-communist political landscape and the institutional legacy of the Roundtable. 3. It’s the economy stupid! Evaluating ‘shock therapy’ and the legacy of the Balcerowicz Plan. 4. The idea of Poland after communism: competing visions. 5. Church and state in post-communist Poland. 6. Whither Poland? Conclusions and assessments by key players.

Presidential Power and Television in Putin’s Russia BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Tina Burrett, Hosei University, Japan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56182-2; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION As a new president takes power in Russia, this book provides an analysis of the changing relationship between Russian television and the presidency during the tenure of President Vladimir Putin. It argues that the conflicts within Russia’s political and economic elites, and President Putin’s attempts to rebuild the Russian state after its fragmentation in the Yeltsin years are the most significant causes of changes in Russian media. Furthermore, it sheds light on the ways in which oligarchic media owners in Russia used television for their own political purposes and that media manipulation was not the exclusive preserve of the Kremlin, but a common pattern of behaviour

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

277 in elite struggles in the post-Soviet era. Basing its analysis predominately on interviews with key players in the Russian media and political elites, and on secondary sources drawn from the Russian and Western media, the book examines broad themes that have been the subject of constant media interest, and have relevance beyond the confines of Russian politics.

CONTENTS 1. Covering the President: An Introduction 2. The End of Independent Television? Reconstructing the Russian Television Landscape, March 2000 to June 2003 3. Controlling the News Agenda 4. National Television and the 2003 State Duma Election: Coverage of the Candidates, Corruption and Khodorkovsky 5. Securing the System and a Second Term: Television Coverage of the March 2004 Russian Presidential Election 6. Putin’s Second Term 7. The President Covered

Russia and Islam BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Edited by Roland Dannreuther, University of Westminster, UK and Luke March, University of Edinburgh, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55245-5; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, both the Russian state and Russia's Muslim communities have struggled to find a new modus vivendi in a rapidly changing domestic and international socio-political context. At the same time as Islamic religious belief and practice have flourished, the state has become increasingly concerned about the security implications of this religious revival, reflecting and responding to a more general international concern over radicalised political Islam. This book examines contemporary developments in Russian politics, how they impact on Russia's Muslim communities, how these communities are helping to shape the Russian state, and what insights this provides to the nature and identity of the Russian state both in its inward and outward projection.

The book provides an up-to-date and broad-ranging analysis of the opportunities and challenges confronting contemporary Muslim communities in Russia that is not confined in scope to Chechnya or the North Caucasus, and which goes beyond simplistic characterisations of Muslims as a 'threat'. Instead, it engages with the role of political Islam in Russia in a nuanced way, sensitive to regional and confessional differences, highlighting Islam's impact on domestic and foreign policy and investigating sources of both radicalisation and de-radicalisation.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part 1: Discourses and Frameworks of Analysis 2. Russian Approaches to Extremism, Nationalism and Religion Alexander Verkhovsky 3. Discourses and Approaches to Islam and Islamism in Russia Roland Dannreuther Part 2: Russia and Islam in Comparative Perspective 4. Comparing Islamic Communities in the North Caucasus and Volga-Urals Region Galina Yemelianova 5. Comparative Approaches to Muslim Integration: Russia, France and the UK Ekaterina Braginskaia 6. Moderating Anti-Islamicism: The Comparative Dimension Stephen Hutchings and Galina Miazhevich 7. Radical Islam in the North Caucasus: Domestic and International Aspects Domitilla Sagramoso Part 3: Russian Muslim Communities: State Interaction and Responses 8. Moscow and Muslims: The Limits of Multiculturalism Luke March 9. Tatarstan: Islam and Nationalism Azat Khurmatullin 10. ‘Kadyrov’ Strategies against Radical Extremism in Chechnya and Beyond John Russell 11. North Caucasus: Dynamics of Radicalisation and DeRadicalisation Akmet Yarlykapov Part 4: Russia and the Muslim World 12. Russia and the Muslim World: Interests, Power Projection and Identity Dina Malysheva 13. Framing Islam: Religion, Regime Stability and Security and Russian-Central Asian Relations Matteo Fumagalli 14. Russia and Iran: The Limits of Pragmatism Elaheh Koolaee 15. Conclusion

The Socialist Alternative to Bolshevik Russia BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

Elizabeth White, Univesity of Ulster, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43584-0; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Socialist Revolutionary party, which had been the largest and most popular party in Russia in 1917, did not after the October Revolution just disappear into the "dustbin of history", as Trotsky hoped, but, led by its leadership in exile, continued to observe and comment on developments in Russia, often putting forward policy proposals on a wide range of topics, policies which, based on a shrewd understanding of the real situation in Russia, offered realistic alternatives to the policies being pursued by the Marxist Bolshevik regime. This book, based on extensive original analysis of Socialist Revolutionary (SR) party materials, shows how the SR party operated, how it formulated and disseminated its ideas, what these ideas were, and how the party's ideas developed in response to changing circumstances in Russia and Europe more widely, showing how its vision of a populist, socialist regime failed to materialise as state control, dictatorship and the collectivisation of agriculture took hold.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

278 Introduction 1. The Road to 1917: Marxist and Narodnik Debates over Russian Development 2. The Socialist Revolutionary Party, Russia and Europe in the 1920s 3. The Soviet Economy during NEP: The Commune and the Cooperative 4. The Bolshevik Regime and Soviet Society and SR Political Tactics 5. The ‘Socialist League of the New East’ and the National Question 6. The SRs and the ‘Great Turn’ 7. The Collectivisation of Agriculture and the SR Agrarian Programme 8. The 1930s and the Road to War. Conclusion

Public Policymaking in Hong Kong Comparative Development and Policy in Asia

Eliza Lee, University of Hong Kong, et al PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57605-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book discusses civic engagement and public policymaking in postcolonial Hong Kong. Utilizing case studies of citizens’ advisory committees involving four policy areas - urban planning, social welfare policy, environmental protection, and arts and culture policy - it examines the interaction between the state and civil society, and explores how far the state opens up its policy process for citizens’ participation. Although citizens' advisory committees are widely used in liberal democracies, they were made extensive use of by the colonial administration in Kong Kong, and continue to be used under the present regime. Some people have argued that the committees are mostly window-dressing. This book, however, demonstrates that they do offer the opportunity for increased public involvement, with some committees having been tranformed into more open forums, though at the same time other forms of societal mobilisation have had a significant impact on policy, forcing the government to delay or alter a wide range of policies on harbour reclamation, urban planning and heritage conservation.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Civic Engagement and Public Policymaking in a Semi-Democracy 2. The Urban Planning Policy Domain – The Case of Southeast Kowloon Planning 3. The Social Welfare Policy Domain – The Case of Anti-Poverty 4. Environmental Protection Policy Domain – The Case of Municipal Solid Waste Management 5. The Arts and Culture Policy Domain - The Case of Performing Arts 6.

Conclusion: The Consequence of Societal Mobilization in Different Policy Domains 7. Civic Engagement in Asia: Hong Kong and Other Political Regimes Compared

Iraq, Democracy and the Future of the Muslim World Durham Modern Middle East and Islamic World Series

Edited by Ali Paya, University of Westminster, UK and John L. Esposito, Georgetown University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58228-5; July /2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Iraq, democracy and Islam are powerful global forces which shape not only many aspects of the lives of Muslims, but the lives of other citizens of the world as well. This book explores many of the challenging questions posed by the interconnections between these three forces, concentrating on issues which have global significance and which have been less studied up until now. It contains contributions from many of the leading thinkers and academics from this subject area, including the former President of Iran, Seyyed Mohammad Khatami. Topics such as the compatibility of Islam and democracy, and the question of whether democracy can be encouraged in the Middle East are looked at carefully. Contributors evaluate the circumstances under which democracy can be imposed by outside force, and asks what forces are driving the confrontation between the West and Islam, before looking at how this confrontation is likely to develop. This book presents a comprehensive picture of dynamic change in the geopolitics of our time, and offers a timely contribution to research on Middle East Politics and Islamic Studies.

CONTENTS Introduction Section 1: Iraq 1. Religion, Sect, Ethnicity and Tribe: The Uncertainties of Identity Politics in the New Society Faleh Abdul-Jabbar 2. Lessons from Iraq Laith Kubba 3. Kurdistan: Democracy and Future of Iraq Salah Aziz 4. Forging a Third Way: Sistani's Marjaiyya between Quietism and Wilayat al-Faqih Abbas Kadhim Section 2: 5. Humble Democracy? On the Need for New Thinking about an Aging Ideal John Keane 6. Islamic Democracy: A Valid Concept of an Oxymoron? Ali Paya 7. Promoting Democracy Bhikhu Parekh 8. The Democratic Freedom Deficit in the Middle East Beverley Milton-Edwards Section 3: The Future of the Muslim World 9. World of Islam, Historical Perspectives and Modern Political Discources Seyyed Mohammad Khatami 10. The Saga of Islam and Democracy in the Middle East John Esposito 11. Islam's Future Imperfect: Fighting over Camels at the End of History Abdelwahab El-Affendi 12. Triumph through Destabilization: The Future of Politcal Islam Mohammad Samiei 13. Reason and revelation in Islamic Political Ethics Abdulaziz Sachedina

Iran and the International System Durham Modern Middle East and Islamic World Series

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

279 Edited by Anoush Ehteshami and Reza Molavi, both of University of Durham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55966-9; Augsut 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Much attention in the West has focused on Iran as a problem – a potential nuclear threat, seen by George W Bush as part of the "axis of evil", and by Barack Obama as a top priority for serious diplomatic engagement at the very highest levels. This book goes further however by discussing how international relations are viewed from inside Iran itself, outlining the factors which underpin Iranian thinking on international relations and considering what role Iran, as a large and significant country in the Middle East, ought to play in a fairly constructed international system. It includes contributions by leading scholars and policy makers from inside, as well as from outside Iran, including academics and policy-makers with unparalleled access and insights into the motivations of the Iranian leadership. Subjects covered include: the rationale of Iran’s Islamic constitution, including its electoral system, and the impact this has on international relations; Iran’s view of the ideal international system, including the place of ethics, peace and security; Iran’s international interests, including energy needs; and relations with the West, including the clash between Iranian and Western views of the world order.

CONTENTS Introduction by the Editors, Professor Anoush Ehteshami, Dean of Internationalisation, International Office, Durham University & Dr. Reza Molavi, Executive Director, Centre for Iranian Studies, Durham University "The Ideological and Ethical Foundations of Iran’s Foreign Policy" (provisional title), Dr. Ali Akbar Alikhani, Imam Sadiq University, Tehran "Political Rationality of the Islamic Republic of Iran in Comparison with Contemporary Fundamentalism", Morteza Bahrani, Institute for Social and Cultural Studies, Ministry of Science Research and Technology "The Islamic Republic of Iran and the Ideal International System", Dr. Dehghani Firooz-Abadi, Allameh Tabatabei University, Tehran "Peace and Security in the International System: An Iranian Approach", Professor Afshar Efekhari, Imam Sadiq University, Tehran "The Islamic Republic of Iran’s Constitution and the International System", Dr. Mohammad Bagher Khorramshad, Allameh Tabatabaei University, Tehran "Iran and World Order/Disorder: The Future", Dr. Abbas Maleki, Sharif University, Tehran "The Islamic Republic of Iran and the World International System Clash with the Domination Paradigm", Dr. Manouchehr Mohammadi, Ministry of Foreign Affairs "Two different faces of Iran-West relations: Incompatibility of Official Levels with Everyday Life", Dr. Vahid Shalchi, Cultural Studies Department, Institute for Social and Cultural Studies, Iran Professor Anoush Ehteshami, Dean of Internationalisation, International Office, Durham University, tba Professor Ali Gheissari, University of Oxford, tba Dr. Arshin Adib-Moghaddam, Department of Politics and International Studies, School of Oriental and African Studies, tba Professor Paul Rogers, University of Bradford, tba "Concluding Remarks", Ariabarzan Mohammadighalehtaki, Doctoral Candidate, Durham University & Team Leader, Centre of Iranian Studies for Contemporary Iranian Politics & Eskandar Sadeghi, Doctoral Candidate, Durham University & Team Leader, Centre for Iranian Studies Publications

Islamic Extremism in Kuwait Durham Modern Middle East and Islamic World Series

Falah Abdullah al-Mdaires, Kuwait University PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56719-0; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is the first to provide a complete overview of Islamic extremism in Kuwait. It traces the development of Islamist fundamentalist groups in Kuwait, both Shiite and Sunni, from the beginning of the twentieth century. It outlines the nature and origins of the many different groups, considers their ideology and organization, shows how their activities are intertwined with the wider economy, society and politics to the extent that they are now a strong part of society, and discusses their armed activities, including terrorist activities. Although focusing on Kuwait, it includes overage of the activities of Islamist groups in other Gulf States. It also discusses the relation between Ruling Families with Islamist political groups, thereby demonstrating that the intertwining of Islamic ideology and armed activities with politics is not a new development in the region.

CONTENTS 1. The Roots of the Islamist political groups 2. Sunni Islamist political groups 3. Shi’ite Islamist political groups 4. The Relationships between the Kuwaiti Regime and the Islamist political groups 5. Spread of the Islamist political groups in the Social Body 6. Islamist political groups and Religious Violence, International Terrorism 7. The Armed Islamist Sunni Jihadist Groups 8. The Armed Islamist Shi’ite Jihadist Groups

Islam in the Eyes of the West Durham Modern Middle East and Islamic World Series

Edited by Tareq Y. Ismael, University of Calgary, Canada and Andrew Rippin, University of Victoria, Canada

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

280 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56414-4; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION From the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001 in New York to the Madrid and London bombings of 2004 and 2005, the presence of Muslim communities in the West has generated security issues and major political concern. The government, the media, and the general public have raised questions regarding potential links between Western Muslims, radical Islam and terrorism. This speculation has given rise to popular myths concerning the Islamic world and led to a host of illiberal measures such as illegal warranting, denial of Habeas Corpus , "black prisons" and extreme torture throughout the democratic world. This book challenges the authenticity of these myths and examines the ways in which they have been used to provide an ideological cover for the "war on terror" and the subsequent Iraq war. It argues that they are not only unfounded and hollow, but have also served a dangerous purpose, namely warmongering and the empowering of the national-security state. It further considers the origin and transmission of these myths, focusing on media, government policy and popular discourse.

CONTENTS 1. The ‘West’ and the Islamic World: Patterns of Confrontation and Paths to Reconciliation 2. The Origin of Difference: Edward Said, Michel Foucault and the modern image of Islam 3. Demonizing the Enemy in the War on Terror 4. Islam and Muslims as seen by the Christian Zionists 5. Vigilante Masculinity and the ‘War on Terror’ 6. Islam in the US: The Contemporary Scene 7. ‘Jihadiology’ and the problem of reaching a contemporary understanding of Jihad 8. Muslims, Neighbours in Asia? The Transformation of Japan’s Perceptions of Islam as Shown in Its Media 9. U.S Politics, Media and Muslims in the Post 9/11 Era 10. Media and Societal Discourse on Western-Muslim Relations 11. Understanding the Muslim World: We Can Do Better 12. Applying "the McCarthy Test" to Canadian and American Security Legislation: A 10-Year Retrospective on the Impact of September 11, 2001 on Privacy Rights 13.

Huntington’s ‘Clash of Civilizations’: Rumours and Clarification 14. Getting it Wrong Yet Again: America and the Islamic Mainstream

The Populist Radical Right in Poland Extremism and Democracy

Rafal Pankowski, Collegium Civitas, Poland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 258pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47353-8; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this important and accessible study, Rafal Pankowski makes sense of the rapid growth of organized radical nationalism on the political level in Poland by showing its origins, its internal dynamics and the historical, political, social and cultural context that has made it possible. From political obscurity to the heart of mainstream politics, the recent rise of the extreme right in the Polish context surprised many observers. In the 1990s Poland was usually referred to as a country without significant extremist or populist movements. It was considered to be a stable, even if young, democracy, and ‘extremists’ were perceived as just a little nuisance to the liberal-democratic consensus. By the mid-2000s, the picture changed completely, two populist radical right parties entered into a coalition government with the right-wing conservative Law and Justice Party. All of a sudden, racist extremist affiliations were not a hindrance to a high-level career, but were tolerated or even seemed positively valued. The entrance of extremists into state structures was no longer a matter of isolated individual cases, but took on systemic features. Presenting a detailed analysis of the Polish national populism, the book will use theories of social movements (in particular the concept of discursive opportunity structure), as well as relevant theories of transition and democratization. In particular, the specific cultural resources of Polish nationalist populism are to be analyzed because they are deemed to be among principal reasons for the relative success of the radical nationalists and their particular brand of identity politics The book not only provides a detailed analysis of Polish nationalism but will also have a much broader transnational significance, essential reading for scholars of national populism in the context of post-communism and beyond.

CONTENTS 1. Pre-communist Legacies 2. Communist-Period Legacy The National Question and the Communist Regime 3. After Communism 4.

The League of Polish Families and its Integral Nationalism 5. Self-Defence: Radical Populism 6. The Anti-Liberalism of Law and Justice 7. Nationalist Populism in Power: The 2005-7 Experiment and Beyond 8. Conclusion

Radical Left Parties in Contemporary Europe Extremism and Democracy

Luke March, University of Edinburgh, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42560-5; October 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

281 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION What has happened to the European radical left after the collapse of the USSR? How has it reacted, reformed, even revived? This new volume is the first to provide an extensive answer. It will focus both on communists and non-communists, and will address their nonparliamentary and international activity through a pan-European perspective. It will be of interest to students and sholars of comparative politics, political parties and radical politics.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Defining the Radical Left 3. Historical Context: The End of History and the End of the Radical Left? 4. Communists 5. Democratic Socialists 6. Left-Wing Populists 7. Radical Left Parties and the European Parliament 8. The Radical Left as a Movement 9. Conclusion

Social and Political Thought of Julius Evola Extremism and Democracy

Paul Furlong, University of Cardiff, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58968-0; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book considers not the beginning or origins of terrorism but how groups that use terrorism end. Virtually all the groups that employed terrorist violence during the 1960s and 1970s have passed from the scene in one way or another. Likewise most of the individuals who embarked on ‘careers’ in terrorism over these same years now engage in other pursuits. The author argues that alQaida and the various violent Islamist groups it has inspired are, like their predecessors, bound to bring their operations to an end.

Rather than discussing the defection or de-radicalization of individuals the book aims to analyze how terrorist groups end. It examines the historical record and analyzes in some detail the various ends of these violent organizations. Much of the analysis is based on a massive data collection on terrorism compiled by researchers at the national security studies center at the University of Haifa. As a result, the book provides a unique empirically informed perspective on the end of terrorism that is a valuable addition to the currently available in the literature on the subject.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Methods 3. Defeat 4. Success 5. Transformation 6. Conclusions

The Forum on China–Africa Cooperation (FOCAC) Global Institutions

Ian Taylor, University of St. Andrews, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $110.00; 216x138 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54860-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The increase in China’s economic and political involvement in Africa is arguably the most momentous development on the continent since the end of the Cold War. This book seeks to detail the origins, structure, workings and activities of The Forum on China-Africa Cooperation (FOCAC) and its development over the last nine years. Mindful of the growing realisation that Africa is to play an increasingly important role in global energy politics, Ian Taylor provides a clear and detailed overview of an organisation that has been generally overlooked, despite the exponential rise in the importance of the Chinese presence in Africa. Topics addressed include: The key structures, functions and operations of the FOCAC The importance and development of the triennial summits, including the focus on cultural exchanges and economic cooperation The key criticisms and challenges currently faced by the FOCAC Discussion of ‘emerging issues’ – is it possible to have a "win-win" situation between Africa and China, as the FOCAC suggests? The Forum on China-Africa Cooperation provides a concise introduction to an organisation that will be instrumental in the future of Africa’s relationship with the developed world, and will be of interest to students of African and Chinese politics, International Relations and International Organizations.

Deleuze and Guattarri on Fascism Interventions

Edited by Brad Evans, University of Leeds, UK and Julian Reid, King's College London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58967-3; August 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

282 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers a genealogical interrogation of the relationship between security and risk through its materialisation in insurance.

Empirically, the importance of insurance cannot be understated. Insurance expenditure in 2005 was nearly three times the world’s total defence budget. However, nearly 90% of the world’s insurance premiums are currently sold in OECD countries characterising insurance as a distinctive liberal security technology. Regardless of its importance, the analysis of insurance has so far remained at a highly descriptive level and its theorisation has escaped the interest of political, security, and international relations theorists. This book aims to redress this gap. Moreover, whereas insurance provides a particular form of security central to the development of capitalist economies and liberal governance, little is known about how it relates to ethics, and power. In particular, apart from seminal analyses on the operation and function of insurance, not much is known about how it directly relates to i) changing conceptions of life, ii) evolving ways of being in the world, and iii) the orders of governance through which these are promoted and protected. This book contributes a theorisation of insurance in relation to these three ‘defining aspects of insurance’. In so doing it advances a novel contribution to the understanding of how a risk-based approach to security informs the problem of security and modernity, and in particular, it makes a novel contribution to the study of the biopolitics of security.

International Relations and Non-Western Thought Interventions

Edited by Robbie Shilliam, Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57772-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The purpose of the book is to use a set of geo-culturally diverse investigations in order to sketch out, on the grounds of IR, the theoretical and substantive contours of an engagement with non-Western thought that refuses to approach this body of thought as either exotic to, or derivative of, the orthodox Western canon. In fine, the book highlights and explores the global , rather than European or Western context within which knowledge of modernity has been developed. In this respect, the core assumption that frames the book is that colonialism and imperialism have always been co-constitutive of processes of capitalist development and/or the modern territorial re-organization of political communities. At a minimum, globalization is not an escape from this historical relationship, but a re-ordering – and possibly intensification - of it. The retrieval for IR of this global colonial and imperial context to the knowledge production of modernity might help to provide deeper insights into the racial, religious, and cultural dimensions of a modernity shaped so fundamentally by colonialism and Western expansionism, insights that are right now desperately needed for a discipline so closely implicated in Western foreign policy making.

CONTENTS Biographies: 1. Non-Western thought and International Relations Robbie Shilliam 2. The perilous but unavoidable intellectual terrain of the "non-West" Robbie Shilliam Part I : Colonial Conditions 3. On colonial modernity: Civilization versus nationhood in Cuba, c.1840 Gerard Aching 4. Anti-Racism and Internationalism in the thought and practice of Cabral, Neto, Mondlane and Machel Branwen Gruffyd Jones 5. Voices from the "Jewish Colony": Sovereignty, Power, Secularization and the Outside Within Willi Goetschel Part II:Cultural Contexts 6. International Relations of Modernity in Sayyid Qutb’s thoughts on Sovereignty: The Notion of Democratic Participation in the Islamic Canon Sayed Khatab 7. Decoding Political Islam: the International Historical Sociology of Ali Shariati's Political Thought Kamran Matin 8. Beyond Orientalism and "Reverse Orientalism": Through the Looking Glass of Japanese Humanism Ryoko Nakano 9. Culture in Contemporary IR theory: The Chinese Provocation Arif Dirlik Part III: Beyond the Nation-State 10. Alternative sources of cosmopolitanism: Nationalism, universalism and Créolité in Francophone Caribbean thought Martin Munro and Robbie Shilliam 11. The Internationalist Nationalist: Pursuing an Ethical Modernity with Jawaharlal Nehru Priya Chacko 12. Radical anti-colonial thought, anti-colonial Internationalism, and the politics of human solidarities Anthony Bogues Reflections: 13. Untimely Reflections Mustapha Pasha

Madness in International Relations Interventions

Alison Howell, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57626-0; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides a novel approach to the study of security and global governance by demonstrating that psychological interventions are integral to global governmentality. It brings together three divergent case studies in order to illustrate how therapeutic interventions are deployed in a range of global governance projects, and, as such, how the psy disciplines (psychiatry, psychology, and their sub-disciplines) are called upon in the pursuit of global security and order. This book argues that global order is pursued quite literally through attempts to quash purported psychological disorders, in disparate sites. In each case study, the author traces a ‘diagnostic competition’ over the psychological state of a targeted population, in order to assess the effects of the problematization of the psyches of these populations. The empirical case studies of therapeutic interventions are as follows: 1. Guantánamo Bay, where both the US military and human rights organizations deployed psychiatric diagnoses of the detainees in order to represent their

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

283 reported suicide attempts as evidence that the detainees were either madmen or victims 2. Post-conflict populations, where two models for the delivery of psychological aid have been forged: the psychosocial and the mental health models 3. The Canadian military, where so-called Operational Stress Injuries amongst soldiers have been treated with the aim of returning soldiers to duty in the service of global order and security By bringing these case studies together, this study provides a novel approach to the study of security and global governance. It demonstrates that the global governance of minds is not a coordinated effort, but proceeds on a variety of fronts.

Additionally, the cases show how therapeutic interventions are sometimes coercive, but at other times benevolent, depending on whether the subject population is considered a threat (Guantanamo detainees), victim (post-conflict populations), or provider (Canadian soldiers) of security and order. The case studies thus run from the most coercive/sovereign to the most benevolent/governmental.

The EU Presence in International Organizations Routledge Advances in European Politics

Edited by Spyros Blavoukos and Dimitris Bourantonis, both of Athens University of Economics and Business, Greece PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56924-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This study provides a comprehensive discussion of all aspects of the European Union presence in International Organisations (IOs).

The editors seek to explore both the political and institutional implications of the EU’s interaction with IOs and the effect of the EU’s presence on the functioning of the respective IOs. The result of an international workshop with an outstanding line up of experts, the book discusses a range of issues, including: The Impact of the EU security contributions to IO’s such as the OSCE, NATO and the UN, and the EU’s role in decision making. The role of EU – US relations in the development of major International Organisations Participation in the Doha Development agenda and the EU’s relationship with the WTO The issues of leadership and coherence within and outside the EU The growing international relationship with the African Union and the more troubled supporting role of the Commonwealth. Approaching the EU's international interactions from different theoretical and analytical angles, this work clearly discusses the broad spectrum of issues that surround the evolution and future of the European Union in an international context CONTENTS 1. Introduction: The EU Presence in International Organizations Spyros Blavoukos and Dimitris Bourantonis 2. EU Contribution to and Cooperation with Multilateral Organizations Emil J. Kirchner 3. The European Union and NATO: Subordinate Partner, Cooperative Pillar, Competing Pole? James Sperling 4. The EU as a Security Actor: in and with the UN and NATO Hanna Ojanen 5.

The Big Three and the High Representative: Dilemmas of Leadership Inside and Outside the EU Christopher Hill 6. The EU, the US and International Organizations: Trade Politics in the Global Political Economy Michael Smith 7. Effective Multilateralism on Trial: EU Compliance with WTO Law Alasdair R. Young 8. The European Commission in the WTO’s DDA Negotiations. A Tale of an Agent, a Single Undertaking, and Twenty-Seven Nervous Principals Bart Kerremans 9.Commonwealth and the European Union: a Multilateralism of International Institutions Paul Taylor 10. Conclusions Spyros Blavoukos and Dimitris Bourantonis

Believing in Russia – Religious Policy After Communism Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series

Geraldine Fagan PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $160.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49002-3; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book presents a comprehensive overview of religion in Russia since the end of the communist regime, exposing many of the ambiguities and uncertainties about the position of religion in Russian life. It shows how religious freedom in Russia has, contrary to the widely held view, a long tradition, and how the leading religious institutions in Russia today, including especially the Russian Orthodox Church but also Muslim, Jewish and Buddhist establishments, owe a great deal of their special positions to the relationship they had with the former Soviet regime. It discusses the nature of everyday religious life in Russia, contrasting the internal life of faith communities with the public discourse of their leaders. It examines the flowering of religious freedom and the burgeoning of new sects in the years immediately after the end of the Soviet regime, showing how freedoms were subsequently curtailed, but only partially, by the important law of 1997. It discusses how far Russian Orthodox Christianity is related to Russian national culture, demonstrating the unresolved nature of the key question, Is Russia to be an Orthodox country with religious minorities or a multiconfessional state? and concluding that Russian society has so far failed to reach a consensus on the legal status of religion and its role in public life, contrasting the position in Russia on this with the position in other former Soviet republics including Belarus and Ukraine.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

284 Introduction 1. Russia’s religious freedom tradition 2. ‘Native land protected by God’ 3. Rites of spring 4. Discrimination via the rule of law 5. Retreat from the rule of law 6. In search of tradition 7. Dialogue deadlock 8. Alternative scenarios Conclusion

The Colour Revolutions in the Former Soviet Republics Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series

Edited by Donnacha Ó Beacháin, Dublin City University, Ireland and Abel Polese, Edinburgh University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58060-1; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the significance of the colour revolution regime-change process - popular shorthand for non-violent protests that overthrew post-communist authoritarian regimes - the Georgian Rose Revolution (2003); the Ukrainian Orange Revolution (2004), and the Kyrgyzstani Tulip Revolution (2005) being the most dramatic examples. It covers the former Soviet republics comprehensively, including republics such as Russia where colour revolutions did not occur, despite apparently favourable conditions; and considers why some post-Soviet countries underwent a colour revolution and others not? Identifying the conditions for successful colour revolutions, it asks whether there is a revolutionary blueprint that has been exported and continues to be transferred to areas of the world under autocratic rule. The book examines the ideologies of the post-Soviet ruling regimes, showing how political elites integrated nationalism, populism and authoritarianism into political debates; analyses anti-regime opposition movements, discussing the factors which led to the rise of such movements and outlining how the opposition movements were constituted and how they operated; and assesses the impact of external forces including the USA, the EU and Russia. Overall it evaluates the colour revolution phenomenon in its entirety, pointing out common features between different countries.

CONTENTS Part I - The spreading of colour revolutions: achievements and limits , Georgia, Ukraine, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Part II – Antidotes for the coloured virus: the regimes strike back , Belarus, Russia, Uzbekistan , Tajikistan Kazakhstan , Turkmenistan.

Russia and Europe Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series

Edited by Kjell Engelbrekt and Bertil Nygren, Both of Stockholm University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56105-1; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Russian-European political relations have always been problematic and one of the main reasons for this is the different perspectives on even the very basic notions and concepts of political life. With a worldwide recession, the problems as well as the opportunities in Russian-European relations are magnified. While most works on Russian-European, Russian-American and Russian-West relations focus on current policies and explain them from a standard set of explanatory variables, this book penetrates deeper into the structural and ideational differences that tend to bring about misperceptions, miscalculations, misinterpretations and misdeeds in this twodirectional relationship. It applies a very broad conceptual framework to analyse differences that are as relevant for Europe and the EU as it is to Russia’s immediate neighbours and, while doing so, identifies the key factors that will dominate Russia-EU ties in the next decade.

CONTENTS Preface 1. A Reassertive Russia and an Expanding European Union Kjell Engelbrekt and Bertil Nygren Part 1: Norms, Values, and Institutions 2. Russia and Europe after the Cold War: Cultural Convergence or Civilizational Clash Russell Bova 3. Perceptions of Democracy and Democratic Institution-Building – Electoral Democracy the Russian Way Bertil Nygren 4. The Theory and Practice of Reciprocity in EU-Russian Relations Tatiana Romanova 5. Beyond the Paradigm of Integration in EU-Russian Relations: Sovereignty and the Politics of Resentmen Sergei Prozorov Part 2: Moscow, Brussels and the Big Three 6. The Return of History: Hard Security Issues in the Russia-Europe Relationship Yuri Fedorov 7. Russia-EU Relations: The Economic Dimension Boris Frumkin 8. GermanRussian Relations, 1992-2009 Angela Stent 9. Russia and the European Great Powers: France Isabelle Facon Part 3. ’In-BetweenEurope’ 10. European Energy Policy Meets Russian Bilateralism: The Case of South Eastern Europe Kjell Engelbrekt and Ilian Vassilev 11. Ukraine’s Emerging Democracy and the Russia Factor Petro Burkovsky and Olexiy Haran 12. Riding Three Horses: Moldova’s Enduring Identity as a Strategy for Survival Patricia Fogarty 13. Conclusions and Outlook Kjell Engelbrekt and Bertil Nygren

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

285

Regional Development in Central and Eastern Europe Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series

Edited by George Gorzelak, University of Warsaw, Poland, John Bachtler, University of Strathclyde, UK and Maciej Smętkowski, University of Warsaw, Poland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00; 234x156 mm; 352pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57136-4; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides an up-to-date assessment of the main processes and dilemmas of regional development and regional policy in the newer European Union Member States in Central and Eastern Europe and neighbouring countries. It highlights the difficulties of balancing the demands within the new Member States for rapid regional growth and development with, firstly, the demands of the European Union overall that restructuring and development should conform to the aims and principles of EU common policies; and, secondly, with budgetary constraints. The book covers a wide range of issues, including global and national challenges to regional convergence and cohesion; regional dynamics, city networks and border issues; the effectiveness of policy responses at national and European levels, including an assessment of policy experiences from outside the new Member States; and likely future developments.

CONTENTS Part I: Central and Eastern Europe: The Dynamics of Development and Policy Responses 1. The Puzzles of Convergence: Europe’s Economic History in the 20th Century 2. The Competitiveness of Central and Eastern European Countries: An Analysis of the Legal Environment 3. Regional Development Dynamics in Central and Eastern European Countries 4. Challenges for National Regional Policies in the New Member States 5. Policy Lessons from the Reconstruction of East Germany - The Former German Democratic Republic Part II: Metropolises Of Central And Eastern Europe: New Competitors Or Secondary Nodes Of Global Networks 6. The State of European Cities and the Positions of New Member States 7. Central and Eastern European Urban Regions and the Knowledge Economy - 8. Metropolitan Functions of Warsaw, Prague and Budapest 9. Spatial Planning and City Networks in Economic Development: A Critique of the Polish National Development Strategy Part III: Border Location: An Impediment Or Opportunity For Regional Development 10. Economic Geography and European Integration: The Effects on he EU External Border Regions 11. The European Union And Borders of Inclusion and Exclusion 12. The Former Iron Curtain and the New Eastern External Border: The Impact on Spatial Development 13. International Communications and Borders Regions: Transcending the Problem of Scale On The Boundary Between Russia And The EU Part IV: Central And Eastern Europe And The Eu Cohesion Policy Reforms: A Source Of Change Or A Defender Of The Status Quo? 14. Renewing EU Cohesion Policy 15. EU Cohesion Policy: A Decline behind the Horizon? 16. Eu Cohesion Policy and the Peripheries of the New Member States Conclusions

Russia's Skinheads Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series

Hilary Pilkington, University of Warwick, UK, Al'bina Garifzianova and Elena Omel'chenko PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57596-6; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Russia’s Skinheads: Exploring and Rethinking Subcultural Lives provides a thorough examination of the phenomenon of skinheads, explaining its nature and its significance, and assessing how far Russian skinhead subculture is the ‘lumpen’ end of the extreme nationalist ideological spectrum. There are large numbers of skinheads in Russia, responsible for a significant number of xenophobic attacks, including 70 deaths in 2007 alone, making this book relevant to Russian specialists as well as to sociologists of youth subculture. It provides a practical example of how to investigate youth subculture in depth over an extended period – in this case through empirical research following a specific group over six years – and goes on to argue that Russian skinhead subculture is not a direct import from the West, and that youth cultural practices should not be reduced to expressions of consumer choice. It presents an understanding of the Russian skinhead as a product of individuals’ whole, and evolving, lives, and thereby compels sociologists to rethink how they conceive the nature of subcultures.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Hilary Pilkington Part 1: Growing up in a harsh climate 2. The weight of the Vorkuta sky: Place and youth cultural identities Hilary Pilkington 3. ‘At home I was a nobody’: Growing into skinhead Elena Omel’chenko 4. ‘Upgrading’: youth cultural interests and strategies Al’bina Garifzianova 5. Skinhead solidarity: Friendship, trust, authority and power Elena Omel’chenko and Al’bina Garifzianova Part 2: The meaning(s) of skinhead 6. ‘Skinhead is a movement of action’: Ideology and political engagement Hilary Pilkington 7. ‘Any skinhead likes to fight’: Non-political ‘action’, ritual violence and skinhead solidarity Hilary Pilkington 8.

No longer ‘on parade’: Style and the performance of skinhead Hilary Pilkington 9. In search of intimacy: homophobia and homoerotica in the performance of masculinity Elena Omel’chenko Part 3: Reflections on the Research Process 10. Re-usable condoms? Respondents’ reflections on participating in research Elena Omel’chenko 11. Research emotions: re-reading the diary Al’bina Garifzianova 12. Does it have to end in tears? Accounting for positionality in team-based ethnography Hilary Pilkington 13.

Conclusion: Skinhead lives Hilary Pilkington

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

286

Reconciliation in Post-Suharto Indonesia Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series

Priyambudi Sulistiyanto, National University of Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43120-0; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The era of rule by the Suharto regime in Indonesia was characterised by a long series of gross human rights abuses. This book examines the politics of reconciliation and forgiveness in post Suharto Indonesia since 1998.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Politics of Reconciliation and Forgiveness in Emerging Democracies 2. Regime Change, Justice and Reconciliation 3.

Failure of Prosecution (the case of the East Timor tribunal) 4. Reconciliation through a Truth Commission (a critical examination) 5.

Haunted by the Past (the case of the 1965/1966 Mass Killing) 6. Trials versus ‘Islamic’ Reconciliation (the case of Tanjung Priok Killings) 7. Reconciliation with Compensation (the Lampung/Talangsari Killings) 8. Searching for Justice and Reconciliation (the Trisakti/Semanggi Killings 9. Post-Suharto Indonesia in Comparative Perspective Conclusion

Discourse and Democracy Routledge Critical Studies in Discourse

Michael Farrelly, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87235-5; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this new study, Farrelly gives a critical examination of democracy as it is conceived and practiced in contemporary advanced liberal nations. The received wisdom on democracy is probelmatized through a close analysis of discourse in combination with critical theories of democracy and of the State. The central theme of the book is the paradox of pervasive reference to democracy as a legitimation of political action by liberal governments versus the converse weakening of actual democratic practice within the liberal world. Farrelly builds on the work of Fairclough and others to examine this paradox, developing a new critical concept of 'democratism' as an ideology that undermines the possibility of a more genuine democracy through political actors who oversimplify the idea of democracy. The book argues for a recasting of democratic discourse and practice and includes critical analysis of key political texts taken from presidential and prime ministerial speeches from the US and UK that attach democracy to non-democratic practices; from UK election manifestoes through which political parties seek a democratic mandate whilst simultaneously seeming to construct a version of democracy that excludes the people; and from comparative research in Europe what shows alternative discourses which, though still problematic, highlight the contingency of liberal accounts of democracy.

CONTENTS 1. The Problem of Contemporary Democracy 2. Discourse and Democracy 3. Ideology and Democracy 4. The STruggle Towards Democracy 5. The Subversion of Democracy 6. Democratism 7. Asserting Democracy

The Discourse of the New World Order Routledge Critical Studies in Discourse

Annita Lazar, Nanyan Technicological University, Singapore and Michelle Lazar, National University of Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80443-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Much has been written about the events of 9/11 and its aftermath as constituting a rupture in US and world history. This book, however, proposes that while the attacks on US homeland were unprecedented, the ensuing discourse of President G.W. Bush and his ‘war on terror’ campaign cannot be said to constitute a radical departure. The book aims to show that President Bush’s statements and actions since 9/11 belong within a broader unfolding discourse of the ‘New World Order', which has been underway since the end of the Cold War. To make their case, Lazar and Lazar adapt and develop Foucault’s notion of ‘discourse formation’ for a critical discourse analysis of almost two decades of post-Cold War presidential texts and talk, including speeches, press conferences, radio addresses, policy documents, and interviews. This book is the first to be jointly written by a linguist and a political scientist, allowing for the marriage of theoretical and analytical insights from international relations, international security studies, strategic studies, political discourse analysis and critical discourse studies.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

287 CONTENTS Introduction 1. Discourse of the New World Order: The Discourse in Context 2. ‘Outcasting’ the Double Face of Threat in the New World Order 3. Securing the New World Order 4. Internationalizing the War on Terror in the New World Order 5. Leadership in the New World Order 6. Resistance to the New World Order 7. Epilogue: Continuity and Change in the Discourse of the New World Order

Metaphor, Nation and the Holocaust Routledge Critical Studies in Discourse

Andreas Musolff, University of Durham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $120.00; 229x152 mm; 236pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-80119-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is the first to provide a cognitive analysis of the function of biological/medical metaphors in National Socialist racist ideology and their background in historical traditions of Western political theory. Its main arguments are that the metaphor of the German nation as a body that needed to be rescued from a deadly poison must be viewed as the conceptual basis rather than a mere propagandistic by-product of Nazi genocidal policies culminating in the Holocaust, and that this metaphor is closely related to the more general metaphor complex of the nation as a human body/person, which is deeply ingrained in Western political thought. The cognitive approach is crucial to understanding the nature and the origins of this metaphor complex because it goes beyond the rhetorical level by analyzing the ideological and practical implications of the conceptual mapping body-state in detail. It provides an innovative perspective on the problem of how the Nazis managed to ‘revive’ a clichéd metaphor tradition to the point where it became a decisive factor in European and world history. Musolff reveals how such a perspective allows us to explain why the body-state metaphor continues to be attractive for use in contemporary political theories.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments 1: Introduction: Deadly Metaphors That Won’t Die? Bodies and Parasites as Concepts of Political Discourse Part I 2: The Cognitive Import of Metaphor in Nazi Ideology 3: Body, Nature and Disease as Political Categories in Mein Kampf 4: The Public Presentation and Reception of Anti-Semitic Imagery in Nazi Germany 5: Methodological Reflection: Body and Illness Metaphors in the Evolution of Western Political Thought and Discourse Part II 6: Solidarity and Hierarchy: The State-Body Metaphor in the Middle Ages 7: Concepts of Healing the Body Politic in the Renaissance 8: From Political Anatomy to Social Pathology: Modern Scenarios of the Body Politic and its Therapy 9: German Conceptual and Discursive Traditions of the Body Politic Metaphor 10: Conclusion: Metaphor in Discourse History Notes Bibliography Index

Rethinking Gramsci Routledge Innovations in Political Theory

Edited by Marcus Green, California State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $110.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77973-9; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited volume provides a coherent and comprehensive assessment of Antonio Gramsci's significant contribution to the fields of political and cultural theory. It contains seminal contributions from a broad range of important political and cultural theorists and explains the origins, development and context for Gramsci's thought as well as analysing his continued relevance and influence to contemporary debates.

CONTENTS Introduction Marcus E. Green , Rethinking Gramsci and Rethinking Marxism I. Culture and Criticism 1. Stuart Hall Race, Culture, and Communications: Looking Backward and Forward at Cultural Studies 2. Paul Bové Dante , Gramsci and Cultural Criticism 3.

Daniel O’Connell Bloom and Babbitt: A Gramscian View 4. Marcia Landy Socialist Education Today: Pessimism or optimism of the intellect? II. Hegemony, Subalternity, Common Sense 5. Derek Boothman The Sources for Gramsci’s Concept of Hegemony 6.

Marcus E. Green Gramsci Cannot Speak: Presentations and Interpretations of Gramsci’s Concept of the Subaltern 7. Evan Watkins Gramscian Politics and Capitalist Common Sense 8. Nelson Moe Production and Its Others 9. Adam David Morton Social Forces in the Struggle over Hegemony: Neo-Gramscian Perspectives in International Political Economy 10. Richard Howson From EthicoPolitical Hegemony III. Political Philosophy 11. Richard D. Wolff Gramsci, Marxism and Philosophy 12. Carlos Nelson Coutinho General Will and Democracy in Rousseau, Hegel, and Gramsci 13. Wolfgang Fritz Haug From Marx to Gramsci, from Gramsci to Marx: Historical Materialism and the Philosophy of Praxis 14. Steven R. Mansfield , Gramsci and the Dialectic 15. Esteve Morera Gramsci’s Critical Modernity IV. On Gramsci’s Prison Notebooks 16. David F. Ruccio Unfinished Business: Gramsci’s Prison Notebooks 17. Joseph W. Childers Of Prison Notebooks and the Restoration of an Archive 18. Peter Ives The Mammoth Task of

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

288 Translating Gramsci 19. William V. Spanos Cuvier’s Little Bone: Joseph Buttigieg’s English Edition of Antonio Gramsci’s Prison Notebooks 20. Joseph A. Buttigieg The Prison Notebooks : Antonio Gramsci’s Work in Progress

The Political Economy of Aid in Palestine Routledge Political Economy of the Middle East and North Africa

Sahar Taghdisi-Rad, United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD), Switzerland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56325-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Despite receiving the highest per capita aid worldwide for many years, the economies of the West Bank and Gaza Strip have failed to achieve any lasting developmental outcomes and suffer from major weaknesses which undermine their very survival. This book examines the nature of donor operations in Palestine. It focuses on the role of trade-related donor assistance in Palestine, more commonly known as Aid for Trade. It discusses how such trade-related assistance is only another instance of donors working ‘around’ the conflict and how aid to Palestine cannot bring about significant improvement as long as the Palestinian economy is fundamentally affected by Israeli occupation, settlement and blockade. It argues that unless restructured and more carefully targeted, aid can only act as a temporary relief mechanism. Furthermore, the book sheds light on critical areas within Palestinian territories that are in need of development and require significant and immediate attention at both the national and the international level.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: A Critical Analysis of the Aid Debate in the Context of Conflict-Affected Countries: The Case of Palestine 2. Aid Effectiveness Debate Disputed 3. Palestinian Economic Performance and Donor Response: A Pre- and Post-Intifada Analysis 4. Aid for Trade: The Rise of Trade-Related Assistance 5. (De-) development and Collapse of Palestinian Trade: 1967 – present 6. TradeRelated Assistance in Palestine 7. Evaluation of Trade-Related Assistance in Palestine 8. Conclusion

Defining the Atlantic Community Routledge Research in Atlantic Studies

Edited by Marco Mariano, University of Eastern Piedmont, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 245pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99904-5; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this volume, essays by scholars from both sides of the Atlantic open new perspectives on the construction of the "Atlantic community" during World War II and the early Cold War years. Based on original approaches bringing together diplomatic history and the history of culture and ideas, the book shows how atlantism came to provide a solid ideological foundation for the security community of North American and European nations which took shape in the 1940s. The idea of a transatlantic community based on shared histories, values, and political and economic institutions was instrumental to the creation of the Atlantic Alliance, and partly accounts for the continuing existence of the Atlantic partnership after the Cold War. At the same time, this study breaks new ground by arguing that the emergence of the idea of "Atlantic community" also reflected deeper trends in transatlantic relations; in fact, it was the outcome of the re-definition of "the West" due to the rise of the US and the decline of Europe in the international arena during the first half of the Twentieth Century.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments Introduction, Marco Mariano Part I: American Vistas 1: How Europe Became Atlantic: Walter Lippmann and the New Geography of the Atlantic Community, Ronald Steel 2: Wilsonianism, Pre-Wilsonian American Liberalism, and the Atlantic Community, Frank Ninkovich 3: The Atlantic Community as Christendom: Some Reflections on Christian Atlanticism in America, c.1900-1950, Emiliano Alessandri 4: Re-mapping America: Continentalism, Globalism, and the Rise of the Atlantic Community, 1939-1949, Marco Mariano Part II: Transatlantic Crossings 5: Social Protection and the Promise of a Secure Future in Wartime Europe and America, Maurizio Vaudagna 6: What Winning Stories Teach: The Marshall Plan and Atlanticism as Enduring Narratives, David Ellwood 7: The Congress for Cultural Freedom: Constructing an Intellectual Atlantic Community, Giles Scott-Smith Part III: At the Receiving End 8: The Anglo-American ‘Special Relationship’ in the Atlantic Context During the Late 1940s and 1950s, Kathleen Burk 9: When the High Seas Finally Reached Italian Shores: Italy’s Inclusion in the Atlantic Communitas, Mario Del Pero 10: The Atlantic Community and the Restoration of the Global Balance of Power: The Western Alliance, Japan, and the Cold War, 1947-51, Yuichi Hosoya 11: Old West versus New West: Perón’s ‘Third Position,’ Latin America, and the Atlantic Community, Loris Zanatta Notes on Contributors Index

Chairing Multilateral Negotiations in the United Nations Routledge Research on the United Nations (UN)

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

289 Dimitris Bourantonis, American University, Washington DC, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 216x138 mm; 248pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49082-5; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The book examines the important role of the chairmanship office in multilateral negotiations within the UN setting. Although chairmanship is a generic feature of international politics, negotiations, and decision-making, it has been scarcely researched. The neutrality and impartiality assumptions that have been long associated with the chair have veiled the chair’s potential in molding negotiation outcomes. The book develops an analytical framework for the systematic study of the chairmanship office and its potential impact on multilateral negotiations. It elaborates on its origins, the parameters and conditions of chair’s effectiveness, and the performance of the chair’s functions.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Setting The Framework Of Analysis: The Role Of The Chair In Multilateral Negotiations 3. The United Nations System: International Politics And Institutional Design 4. Chairing The Security Council 5. Chairing UN Conferences 6. Chairing UN Working Groups 7. Conclusions 8. Annexes

ASEAN Regionalism Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series

Christopher Roberts, University of Canberra, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49001-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the key motivations for and challenges to greater regional integration in Southeast Asia. It demonstrates how security and economic concerns -domestic, regional and international - have either contributed to, or detracted from, an increased level of unity and cooperation in ASEAN. It also explores how the patterns of interaction and socialization generated by these issues, together with the nature of domestic political systems, have affected the emergence of common values, norms and interests. It covers the full range of issues confronting ASEAN at present, and the full range of ASEAN countries, and discusses both developments in ASEAN to date and also likely future developments.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Security, Identity and Cooperation in International Relations 2. The Rise of Southeast Asia and the Search for Regional Order 3. ASEAN Into the Third Decade: Institutional Responses, Exogenous Engagement and Membership Expansion 4. Thailand, the Philippines and Indonesia: Domestic Developments and Regional Effects 5. Myanmar in ASEAN: A Challenge to Cohesion and the ASEAN Way? 6. Contemporary Challenges: The Limits to Economic and Security Cooperation 7. Regionalism Anew? Institutional Responses and their Limitations. Conclusion: Retrospect and Prospects

American Foreign Policy and Postwar Reconstruction Routledge Studies in US Foreign Policy

Jeff Bridoux PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $110.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56397-0; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION On the eve of the invasion of Iraq, President G.W. Bush argued that if setting up democracy in Japan and Germany after WW II was successful, then it should also be successful in Iraq. This book provides a detailed comparison of the reconstruction of Japan from 1945 to 1952 with the current reconstruction of Iraq and provides a new analytical framework for understanding the success or failure of reconstruction projects.

CONTENTS 1. American Power: The Tale of Force and Consent 2. Power and the American Experience 3. The Delicate Mix of Coercion and Consent: Assessing Truman’s and G.W. Bush Understanding of Power and Foreign Policy 4. American Power at Risk?: Reconstructing Iraq 5. Reconstructing Japan: Coercion, Consent and Consistency 6. Postwar Reconstruction and the American Experience

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

290

Race and US Foreign Policy Routledge Studies in US Foreign Policy

Mark Ledwidge, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48211-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The book provides cutting edge insight into the racial aspect of US foreign affairs. In addition to extending the parameters of US foreign policy literature to include race and ethnicity, the book documents case-specific analyses of the evolutionary development of the African American foreign affairs network (AAFAN). Whilst the examination of race in regard to the construction of US foreign policy is significant, this book also provides a cross disciplinary approach which utilises historical and political science methods to paint a more realistic appraisal of US foreign policy. In short this book will transcend the standard mono-disciplinary approach which overestimates the separation between domestic and foreign affairs. The unique approach of this monograph will add an important dimension to a newly emerging field.

United States Cuban Relations Routledge Studies in US Foreign Policy

Jessica Gibbs, Aberystwyth University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43747-9; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This is a comprehensive examination of US policy towards Cuba with a particular emphasis on the post-Cold War era. As well as providing a detailed account of US policy and actions towards Castro's regime, Jessica Gibbs also illustrates how this case study provides a revealing insight into wider debates about US foreign policy and international relations theory.

CONTENTS 1. The United States and Cuba: From the Cuban Revolution to the Fall of the Berlin Wall 2. The Cuban Democracy Act: ‘Putting the Hammer down on Fidel Castro’? 3. Continuity and Change under Clinton 4. The Rafter Crisis of 1994 5. The Helms-Burton Act: ‘Adios Fidel’? 6. The Transformation of the Anti-Embargo Movement 7. The Elian Gonzalez Case: ‘We won’t Forget, We Vote’ 8.

George W. Bush: Champion of the Anti-Castro Cause? 9. Conclusion

The US Public and American Foreign Policy Routledge Studies in US Foreign Policy

Edited by Andrew Johnstone, University of Leicester, UK and Helen Laville, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55315-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Though often overlooked, public opinion has always played a significant role in the development and promotion of US foreign policy and this work seeks to comprehensively assess the impact and nature of that opinion through a collection of historical and contemporary essays. The volume evaluates the role of organizations and movements that look to represent public opinion, and assesses the nature of their relationship with the government. The contributors utilize a number of different approaches to examine this impact, including polling data, assessments of the role of the media, and the wider consideration of ideas and ideology, moving on to examine the specific role played by the public in the policy making and policy promotion process. Engaging with new questions as well as approaching old questions from a new angle, the work argues that whilst the roles change, and the extent of influence varies, the power of the public to both initiate and constrain foreign policy clearly exists and should not be underestimated. This work will be of great interest to all those with an interest in American foreign policy, American politics and American history. .

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Andrew Johnstone and Helen Laville Section 1: The Public and War 2. From Coast Defence to Embalmed Beef: The Influence of the Press and Public Opinion on McKinley’s Policymaking during the Spanish-American War Joseph Smith 3.To Mobilize a Nation: Citizens Organizations and Intervention and on the Eve of WWII Andrew Johnstone 4. Power to the People?

American Public Opinion and the Vietnam War Andrew Priest Section 2: Public Interests and Ideology 5. Organized Labor and the Social Foundations of American Diplomacy, 1898-1920 Rhodri Jeffreys-Jones 6. Religion and World Order at the Dawn of the American Century Andrew Preston 7. Gender Apartheid? American Women and Women’s Rights in American Foreign Policy Helen

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

291 Laville Section 3: Interests and Ethnicity 8. African Americans and US Foreign Policy: The American Negro Leadership Conference on Africa and the Rhodesian Crisis Carl P. Watts 9. The American Public and the US-Israeli "Special" Relationship Elizabeth Stephens 10. The Cuban Lobby and US Policy toward Cuba Jessica Gibbs Section 4: The Public and the War on Terror 11.

Neoconservatism and the American Public: Was 9/11 a Hegemonic Moment? Maria Ryan 12. "You Don’t Launch a Marketing Campaign in August": The Bush Administration and the Public Before and After the Iraq Invasion Scott Lucas

Rewards for High Public Office in Europe and North America Edited by B.Guy Peters, University of Pittsburgh, USA and Marleen Brans, Katholieke Universiteit Leuven, Belgium PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $130.00; 246x174 mm; 400pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-78105-3; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book addresses an important element of public governance, and does so in longitudinal and comparative manner. The approach enables us to make a number of interesting statements now only about the development of political systems but also about the differences among those systems. It provides an unique systematic investigation of both formal and informal rewards for working in high-level positions in the public sector, and seeks to determine the impacts of the choices of reward structures.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Comparing the Rewards of High Public Office Country Chapters 2. United Kingdom 3. France 4. Germany 5.

Netherlands 6. Belgium 7. Spain 8. Sweden 9. Norway 10. United States 11. Estonia 12. Slovakia 13. Romania 14. Conclusion

The History of Vegetarianism and Cow-Veneration in India Routledge Advances in Jaina Studies

Ludwig Alsdorf PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 216x138 mm; 184pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54824-3; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION For the first time, this influential study by Ludwig Alsdorf is made available to an English speaking audience, translated by Bal Patil.

It focuses on two of the most pertinent issues in Indian religion, the history of vegetarianism and cow-veneration, and its historical approach remains relevant to this day. With reference to significant brahminical texts, such as key chapters of the Book of Manu, the book centres on the author’s analysis of the role of Jinism in the history of vegetarianism. The author explores the history of meateating in India and its relationship to religious thought and custom, and searches for solutions to the problem of cattle veneration.

Besides a comprehensive translation of the original German manuscript "Beiträge zur Geschichte von Vegetarismus und Rinderverehrung in Indien", four important articles directly related to Alsdorf’s work by Kapadia, Heesterman and Schmidt are made available in this new edition. These additional contributions and careful notes by the editor Willem Bollée add a modern perspective to a study that remains a key reference for students and scholars of Religious Studies, Asian Studies and History.

CONTENTS Introduction. Abbreviations 1. Contributions to the History of Vegetarianism and Cow Veneration in India 2. Bibliography. Appendix I: Review of Alsdorf by Jan Heesterman. Appendix II: Classical follow-up article by H.-P. Schmidt, ‘The Origin of Ahimsà. Appendix III: do, Ahimsà and Rebirth. Appendix IV: H.R. Kapadia’s Critical Review of Western Interpretations of Early Jaina Vegetarianism: ‘Prohibition of Flesh Eating in Jainism’

Jaina Law and Society Routledge Advances in Jaina Studies

Edited by Peter Flügel, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54711-6; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyses contemporary Jain identity and legal status in India. It explores these aspects according to the distinct doctrinal interpretations, forms of organisation and legal and ethical codes by different Jain representativies and presents the social history of Jain law and the modern construction of Jainism as an independent religion.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

292 CONTENTS 1. Introduction Peter Flügel Part 1: Monastic Law and Lay Ethics 2. Jainism: Window on Early India Johannes Bronkhorst 3.

Thoughts on the Meaning and the Role of the Svetâmbara Canon in the History of Jainism Nalini Balbir 4. Protecting the Faith: Exploring the Concerns of Jain Monastic Rules Phyllis Granoff 5. Atonements in the Rituals of the Terapanth Svetambara Jains Peter Flügel 6. Renounced, Venerated and Engaged Bodies: Situating Ethical Discourse Among Jains Anne Vallely Part 2: Jaina Law and the State 7. Dharma and Religion in the Constituent Assembly Debates Torkel Brekke 8. Jain Minority Rights and Indian Secularism under the Siege of Hindutva Bal Patil 9. Concept of Public Worship: Legal Rights and Obligations D.K. Jain 10. The Proof of Custom: Contesting the Jain Widow’s Inheritance Rights Manisha Sethi 11. Commented Jaina Law Case List Post C.R. Jain (1942) Werner Menski and Jeremy Brown Part 3: Custom and Community 12. Jainism and the Life of Trade: Cutting Emeralds in Jaipur Lawrence A. Babb 13. Caste Identity and Origin Myths of the Agravals in an Uttaranchal Market Town Ulrich Oberdiek 14. The Svetambara Murtipujaka Jaina Community in Delhi Akiko Shimizu 15. Religious Response to Social Unrest: The Rise of Kanji Swami Panth in Contemporary Jainism Ravindra K. Jain 16. Padmaraja Pandita (1861-1945) Revisited Hampa Nagarajaiah 17. From Herodotus Onwards: Descriptions of Unidentified Jainas Robert J. Del Bontà

Religion and Language in Post-Soviet Russia Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe Series

Brian Bennett, Niagara University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-78063-6; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Church Slavonic - the traditional language of the Russian Orthodox Church - has enjoyed a strong revival in the post-Soviet period, as has the Russian Orthodox Church itself. This book examines the revival of Church Slavonic, relating it to a wide range of contemporary social and cultural developments in contemporary Russia, including debates about protecting Russia from western cults and culture, debates about recovering pre-revolutionary traditions and articulating Russian/Orthodox identities, and to factionalism and renewal within the Orthodox Church. It thereby explores the revival of orthodoxy in Russia not from the standpoint of ecclesiastical politics or church-state relations, but rather through the myths, rituals, symbols, texts and discourses that span both official and popular religion in post-Soviet Russia. As such the book will be of great interest to scholars of sociolinguisitcs and of religion, as well as to Russian studies specialists.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The ABC’s of Faith 2. The Crucible of Liturgical Language 3. The Mythos of Logos 4. From Logos to Logo 5. Sign Languages 6. Conclusion

Buddhism in Australia Routledge Critical Studies in Buddhism

Edited by Cristina Rocha, University of Western Sydney, Australia and Michelle Barker, Further Initiatives, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56818-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyses the arrival and localisation of Buddhism in Australia in the context of the globalisation of Buddhism. In 2006, Buddhists accounted for 2.1 per cent of Australia’s population, almost doubling the 1996 figures, and making it the fastest growing religion in the country. Unlike the US and the Europe, Australia is located close to Asia, and as such has received intense flows of people, ideas, and commodities from its neighbouring countries. This book investigates the inception of Buddhism in the country whilst also providing a voice to people on the ground who have been fundamental in making this process possible. For the first time, academic analysis and practioners' experience are juxtaposed to show the adaptations and challenges of Buddhism in Australia from above and below . This book is a unique and valuable contribution to the study of Buddhism in the West.

Buddhist Practice and Visual Culture Routledge Critical Studies in Buddhism

Julie Gifford, Miami University, Ohio, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-78098-8; August 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

293 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This is the first study to provide an overall interpretation of the Buddhist monument Borobudur in Indonesia. Including both the narrative reliefs and the Buddha images, the book opens up a wealth of information on Mahayana Buddhist religious ideas and practices that could have informed Borobudur and it convincingly interprets Borobudur within that context. The author explores a version of the classical Mahayana that foregrounds the importance of the visual in relation to Buddhist philosophy, cosmology, soteriology, meditation, devotion, and ritual. The absence of the living historical Buddha was a source of deep regret for classical Mahayanists, but the Buddha could be "seen" by realizing the true nature of his teaching, through visionary experience, by encountering his numinous presence in images, or through some combination of the three. Consequently the author shows that the architects of Borobudur designed a visual world in which the Buddha appeared in a variety of forms and could be interpreted in all three ways. Presenting new material, the book contributes immensely to a new and better understanding of the significance of the Borobudur for the field of Buddhist and Religious Studies.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Borobudur: Monumental Mandala and Bodhisattva Path 3. Carving Out Time: The Narrative Relief Panels 4.

Piecing Together Space: The Panorama of the Purified Field 5. To Emptiness and Back: The Transformative Work of the Terraces

The Spread of Tibetan Buddhism in China Routledge Critical Studies in Buddhism

Smyer Dan Yü, The Minzu University of China PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57532-4; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is concerned with contemporary Tibetan Buddhist revivals in the Tibetan regions of the Sichuan and Qinghai Provinces in China. Interpreting the intricate entanglements of the Buddhist revivals with cultural identity, state ideology, and popular imagination of Tibetan Buddhist spirituality in contemporary China, the author explores the broader sociocultural implications of such revivals.

Based on detailed cross-regional ethnographic work, this book demonstrates that the revival of Tibetan Buddhism in contemporary China is intimately bound with both the affirming and negating forces of globalization, modernity, and politics of religion, indigenous identity reclamation, and the market economy. The analysis points to the multidimensionality of Tibetan Buddhism in relation to different religious, cultural, and political constituencies of the PRC. By recognizing the greater contexts of China’s politics of religion and of the global status of Tibetan Buddhism, this book presents an argument that the revival of Tibetan Buddhism is not an isolated event limited merely to Tibetan regions; instead, it is a result of the intersection of both local and global transformative changes.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Mise-en-scène of Tibetan Buddhism in China 2. Tulkus , Genuine Charisma, and Its Transmissible Interiority in Kham and Amdo 3. Spirit Mountains, Sacred Sites, and Territorial Charisma 4. Pilgrimage from Han China to High Altitude Enlightenment 5. Money, Freedom, and the Price of Charismatic Teachings 6. Re-understanding of Scientism, Scapegoating, and the Marginality of Religion in China from a Tibetan Perspective 7. Buddhism, Ethnic Nationalism, and Destigmatization of Tibet in the Cyberspace of Urban Tibetans 8. Conclusion: Globalization, Performance Religion, and Tibet as a Remedy for Modern Illnesses

Tibetan Rituals of Death Routledge Critical Studies in Buddhism

Margaret Gouin, University of Bristol, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56636-0; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book describes and analyses the structure and performance of Tibetan Buddhist death rituals, and situates that performance within the wider context of Buddhist death practices generally. Drawing on a detailed and systematic comparative survey of existing records of Tibetan funerary practices, including historical travel accounts, anthropological and ethnographic literature, Tibetan texts and academic studies, it demonstrates that there is no standard form of funeral in Tibetan Buddhism, although certain elements are common. The structure of the book follows the twin trajectories of benefiting the deceased and protecting survivors; in the process, it reveals a rich and complex panoply of activities, some handled by religious professionals and others by lay persons. This information is examined to identify similarities and differences in practices, and the degree to which Tibetan Buddhist funeral practices are consistent with the mortuary rituals of other forms of Buddhism. A number of elements in these death rites which at first appear to be unique to Tibetan Buddhism may only be ‘Tibetan’ in their surface characteristics, while having roots in practices which pre-date the transmission of Buddhism to Tibet. Filling a gap in the existing literature on Tibetan Buddhism, this book poses research challenges that will engage future scholars in the field of Buddhism, Tibetan Buddhism and Anthropology.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

294 CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The Sources 3. Before Death 4. Immediately After Death 5. Disposal of the Body 6. Special Cases 7. Post-Disposal Rituals of Benefit and Protection 8. Remembering the Deceased 9. Conclusion

Indian Philosophy and Western Theism Routledge Hindu Studies Series

Martin Ganeri, Heythrop College, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55262-2; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is a study of the Vedanta of Ramanuja, in particular his concept of Brahman and of Brahman’s relationship with the world.

It is also a critique of modern Western and Indian interpretation of Ramanuja’s work. Placing emphasis on Ramanuja’s account of Western theistic thought, it argues for a major rethinking of what kind of account is offered and for a reversal of the tendencies of earlier interpretations. Modern Western and India studies of Ramanuja have drawn parallels with Western theistic accounts or used Western concepts to describe his thought. The author puts forward that fundamental points of convergence with classical Western theism and fundamental divergences from non-classical forms can be identified, thus reversing the tendency of earlier interpretation. It examines in detail the general comparisons that have been made and the various terms used, addressing the neglect of classical Western theism and of its relationship to Indian thought by Western and Indian scholars and furthers the proper appreciation of Ramanuja as a great Vedantic teacher.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Ramanuja, his tradition and his moder interpreters 2. The Vedanta of Ramanuja 3. Classical Western Theism and Ramanuja 4. Non-classical Western Theism and Ramanuja 5. Conclusion

Religion, Narrative and Public Imagination in South Asia Routledge Hindu Studies Series

James Hegarty, University of Cardiff, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55863-1; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Sanskrit Mahabharata is one of the greatest works of world literature and pivotal for the understanding of both Hindu traditions and wider society in ancient, medieval and modern South Asia. Its perennial popularity in contemporary South Asia can hardly be overestimated. This book presents a new synthesis of philological, anthropological and cognitive-linguistic method and theory in relation to the study of narrative text by focusing on the form and function of the Mahabharata in the context of early South Asia.

Arguing that the combination of structural and thematic features which have helped to establish the enduring cultural centrality of religious narrative in South Asia was first outlined in the text, the author shows the Mahabharata’s complex orientation to the cosmic, social and textual past. He demonstrates that the formation of a very specific cultural and cosmic geography is outlined most clearly in the Mahabharata.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Studying the Story to End All Stories 2. Ritual and Textual Structure in the Sanskrit Mahabharata 3. Constructing the Significant Past 4. Constructing a Cultural Geography 5. Past, Place and Power in early South Asia 6. Conclusions: Towards a New Orientation to Religious Narrative

Women in the Hindu Tradition Routledge Hindu Studies Series

Mandakranta Bose, University of British Columbia, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $144.00; 216x138 mm; 170pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77814-5; Januray 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book accounts for the origin and evolution of the nature and roles of women within the Hindu belief system. It explains how the idea of the goddess has been derived from Hindu philosophical ideas and texts of codes of conduct and how particular models of conduct for mortal women have been created. Hindu religious culture correlates philosophical speculation and social imperatives to

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

295 situate femininity on a continuum from divine to mortal existence. This creates in the Hindu consciousness multiple - often contradictory - images of women, both as wielders and subjects of authority. The conception and evolution of the major Hindu goddesses, placed against the judgments passed by texts of Hindu sacred law on women’s nature and duties, illuminate the Hindu discourse on gender, the complexity of which is compounded by the distinctive spirituality of female ascetic poets. Drawing on a wide range of Sanskrit texts, the author explains how the idea of the goddess has been derived from Hindu philosophical ideas and also from the social roles of women as reflected in, and prescribed by, texts of codes of conduct. She examines the idea of female divinity which gave rise to models of conduct for mortal women. Instead of a one-way order of ideological derivation, the author argues that there is constant traffic between both ways the notional and the actual feminine. This book brings together for the first time a wide range of material and offers fresh stimulating interpretations of women in the Hindu Tradition.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Gendered Divinity: Goddesses in the Hindu Tradition 3. Shaping Women’s lives: The Role of Ancient Hindu Texts 4. Women Poets of Hinduism 5. Sanctuary: Women and Home Worship 6. Conclusion

Health and Religious Rituals in South Asia Routledge South Asian Religion Series

Fabrizio Ferrari, University of Chester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56145-7; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is the first analysis of the concept of disease, possesion and healing in the major South Asian religious traditions. It discusses forms of divine possession or affliction and health issues at the crossroad of religious studies and medical anthropology. In order to avoid the classic, and problematic, chronological subdivision of religions according to their structure, the book is divided in four geographical areas with the city of Varanasi, a highly powerful site in South Asia, symbolically identified as the centre. Through this framework, the book emphasises the centrality of bodily and psychological experiences, both individual and collective, as ways to understanding and explaining religion in South Asian cultural contexts. It shows that debates over South Asian indigenous understandings of disease as forms of possession or affliction have come to gain visibility in and around discussions of social and religious matters as well as the constitution of community and gendered identities, At a time where the insurgence of new pandemics and a growing debate on health issues in a religious context is prominent, this timely contribution facilitate a more comprehensive understanding of South Asian cultures. It consolidates and promotes indigenous ways to understanding physical and mental imbalances through diverse conceptualisations of the divine.

CONTENTS Preface Fabrizio M. Ferrari Part 1: Introduction 1. Possession in theory and practice Frederick Smith 2. A Critique toward the category ‘possession’ Aditya Malik Part 2: Possessions from the West 3. Possessive Spirits: Love Sickness and Healing in Northern Pakistan Magnus Mardsen 4. Sikh Controversies concerning Punjabi Pilgrimage Sites used for Healing and Possession Ron Geaves 5. Healing the Afflicted Self: Demons and Desire in Jainism Anne Vallely Part 3: Possessions from the North 6. Tibetan Buddhism, Disease and the Deities Who Heal Ivette Vargas-O’Bryan 7. A Ban Jhankri in the City: Curing New Diseases Using Old Shamanic Techniques Deepak Shimkhada 8. Calculating Fecundity in the Kasyapa Samhita Anthony Cerulli Part 4: Possessions from the East 9. The whisper of spirits. Shamanic kinship and the cult of the ancestor among the Lanjia Saoras of Orissa Stefano Beggiora 10. Disease, Healing and Possession among Christians in Bangladesh Cosimo Zene Part 5: Possessions from the South 11. Gumez, Vezarishn & Tan-drustih: affliction and healing in Zoroastrianism Rastin Mehri 12. Goddesses and Illness in Southern India William Harman 13. The Overrun of the Demons: Modernity and Possession in Sri Lanka Eva Ambos 14. Conclusion Fabrizio M. Ferrari

Rethinking Religion in India Routledge South Asian Religion Series

Edited by Esther Bloch, Marianne Keppens, both of Ghent University, Belgium, and Rajaram Hegde, Kuvempu University, India PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54890-8; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book critically assesses recent debates about the colonial construction of Hinduism. Increasingly scholars have come to realise that the dominant understanding of Indian culture and its traditions is unsatisfactory. According to the classical paradigm, Hindu traditions are conceptualized as features of a religion with distinct beliefs, doctrines, sacred laws and holy texts. Today, however, many academics consider this conception to be a colonial ‘construction’. This book focuses on the different versions, arguments and counter-arguments of the thesis that the Hindu religion is a construct of colonialism. Bringing together the different positions in the debate, it provides necessary historical data, arguments and conceptual tools to examine the argument. Organized in two parts, the first half of the book provides new analyses of historical and empirical data; the second presents some of the theoretical questions that have

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

296 emerged from the debate on the construction of Hinduism. Where some of the contributors argue that Hinduism was created as a result of a western Christian notion of religion and the imperatives of British colonialism, others show that this religion already existed in pre-colonial India; and as an alternative to these standpoints, other writers argue that Hinduism only exists in the European experience and does not correspond to any empirical reality in India. This volume offers new insights into the nature of the construction of religion in India and will be of interest to scholars of the History of Religion, Asian Religion, Postcolonial and South Asian Studies.

CONTENTS Part 1: Historical and Empirical Arguments 1. Hindus and Others 2. Hindu Religious Identity with Special Reference to the Origin and Significance of the Term ‘Hinduism’, c. 1787-1947 3. Representing Religion in Colonial India 4. Colonialism and Religion 5.

Women, the Freedom Movement, and Sanskrit: Notes on Religion and Colonialism from the Ethnographic Present Part 2: Theoretical Reflections 6. Colonialism, Hinduism and the Discourse of Religion 7. Who Invented Hinduism? Rethinking Religion in India 8.

Orientalism, Postcolonialism and the ‘Construction’ of Religion 9. The Colonial Construction of What?

Adam Smith as Theologian Routledge Studies in Religion

Edited by Paul Oslington, Australian Catholic University PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 144pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88071-8; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Adam Smith wrote in a Scotland where Calvinism, Continental natural law theory, Stoic philosophy, and the Newtonian tradition of scientific natural theology were key to the intellectual lives of his contemporaries. But what impact did these ideas have on Smith’s system? What was Smith’s understanding of nature, divine providence, and theodicy? How was the new discourse of political economy positioned in relation to moral philosophy and theology? This book considers the theological background and meaning of Smith’s work, opening up a dialogue between economists and theologians. Adam Smith as Theologian gathers a group of eminent economists, historians, philosophers, and theologians to reflect on these questions, examining the extent to which even contemporary economics may contain residues of Smith’s theological mores.

CONTENTS Introduction: Theological Readings of Smith Paul Oslington Part I: Smith in Context 1. The Influence of Religious Thinking on the Smithian Revolution Benjamin Friedman 2. Smith and Natural Law John Haldane 3. Smith and Augustine Eric Gregory 4. C

Christianity and Party Politics Routledge Studies in Religion and Politics

Martin Steven, University of Glasgow, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55660-6; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Christianity and Party Politics in Britain aims to discuss and evaluate the contemporary relationship between party politics and religion in Britain. The book focuses on the important role of the Church in both electoral politics and public policy formulation in twenty first century Britain, and argues that contrary to the established secularisation argument, religion continues to be a powerful influence within British politics. Recent high profile debates over how society should regulate issues related to the sanctity of life place this highly topical study at the forefront of current debate. With no written constitution or bill of rights, Britain has become a specific model for how western liberal democracies are being forced to deal with these types of challenges. The big political questions in Britain today continue to concern moral, as well as socio-economic, affairs – for example, stem cell research, the environment, and the right to free speech and movement. Steven begins by examining the basics of electoral and party behaviour in Britain and how religious affiliation has traditionally influenced the way people choose to vote, and how recent surveys have suggested it continues to do so. Moving on to discuss how this affects the behaviour of party politicians, the role of the Christian church as an interest group is analysed; to what extent are these major societal institutions continuing to influence public policy decisions? Broadening the debate out to the international context, the work evaluates how the relationship between party politics and religion in Britain has been affected by global factors, for example, the ‘war on terror’, the influence of American politics, and the impact of European integration.

Providing a valuable and long overdue contribution to the field, this work will provide readers with a detailed knowledge of how the worlds of politics and religion interact in modern Britain.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Religion and British politics Part 1: The Electoral Context 2. Elections and patterns of religious voting behaviour 3.

Christian Democracy and its absence from British party politics Part 2: The Constitutional Legacy 4. Christianity and the political establishment 5. Christianity, identity and the politics of nationalism 6. The Roman Catholic Church: the politics of the sanctity of life

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

297 Part 3: The Challenges of Globalization 7. Conservative Christianity and the ‘Americanisation’ of religious politics 8. European integration and religious interests 9. Conclusions: keeping the faith

Politics and the Religious Imagination Routledge Studies in Religion and Politics

Edited by John H. A. Dyck, Paul S. Rowe and Jens Zimmermann, all of Trinity Western University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77998-2; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Politics and the Religious Imagination is the product of a group of interdisciplinary scholars each analyzing the connections between religious narratives and the construction of regional and global politics, combining a set of theoretical and philosophic insights with several case studies that represent varied geographies and religious customs. The past decade has seen increasing interest in the links between religion and politics, and this edited volume seeks to take religion seriously as a motivator of action. Few studies have attempted to bring together the multi-disciplinary work in this burgeoning field of study and this work takes a global perspective, using a variety of contexts including East-West relations to analyze the following key themes: the constructive and destructive hermeneutics of religious stories the relevance and importance of religion as a dominant political narrative the rise of new stories among groups as agents of change the way that religious narratives help to define and constrain the Other the manipulation of religious stories for political benefit This work argues that it is insufficient to judge the relationship of religion and politics through mere institutional or quantitative lenses, and this collection proves that while this promise of the narrative part of the social imaginary has been recognized in political theory to a certain extent, its influence in the realm of empirical political science has yet to be fully considered. Combining the work of a wide range of experts, this collection will be of great interests to scholars of politics, philosophy, religious studies, and the literary influence of religion.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Rowe, Zimmermann, and Dyck Section 1: Imagining Religion and Politics 2. Politics and the Religious Imagination Richard Kearney 3. Imagining the Catechism of the Citizen Simon Critchley 4. Catechising the Secular Imagination: a Response to Simon Critchley Jens Zimmermann Section 2: The Religious Imagination in American Politics 5. Agents of Change: Lyndon Johnson, Catholics, and Civil Rights Lawrence McAndrews 6. Narrating Desire: the Gospel of Wealth in Christian America David Gutterman 7. Green for God: Religious Environmentalists in the United States Andrew Pieper 8. Understanding Jewish Women and their Efforts to Secure Political Power Terri Fine Section 3: The Religious Imagination in Global Politics 9. Accomodating the Other: Lessons from Encounters between Christianity and Confucianism in Early Modern China Hassan Bashir 10. Charles Taylor’s Modernity in a Latin American Catholicism Gustavo Morello 11. Telling Multiple Stories: the BJP’s Appeal to Group-Specific Interests and the Hindutva Master Frame Shelly Ghai 12. Crosscutting Narratives: Diaspora and Indigenous Movements among Coptic Christians in Egypt Paul Rowe 13. Conclusion Rowe, Zimmermann and Dyck

Politics, Religion and Gender Routledge Studies in Religion and Politics

Edited by Sieglinde Rosenberger and Birgit Sauer, both of University of Vienna, Austria PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56148-8; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Heated debates about Muslim women's veiling practices have attracted the attention of European policymakers over the last decade.

The headscarf has been both vehemently contested by national and/or regional governments, political parties and public intellectuals and passionately defended by veil wearing women and their supporters. Systematically applying a comparative perspective, this book addresses the basic question: why does the headscarf tantalise and cause such controversy over issues about religious pluralism, secularism, neutrality of the state, gender oppression, citizenship, migration, and multiculturalism. And as a consequence, why has it become part of the disciplinary practices of some European countries but not of others? While the need for a collection of interpretative research essays regarding the current debates on the veil in Europe has become evident for quite some time, the possibility of bringing together high quality analysis depended on the existence of a body of critical research focusing on the broad issues associated with the Muslim veil debates. This opportunity was given to the FP6-project "Values, Equality and Differences in Liberal Democracies: Debates about Muslim Headscarves in Europe (VEIL)". In this unique collection the theoretical and empirical research results of the project are presented and evaluated, offering an interdisciplinary scope and European-wide setting. The book can be seen as comprising of two main parts: Part I will put the focus on the identification of (conflicting) fundamental rights, moral values and political principles addressed in the headscarf debates by the main actors on national and European level Part II contains research results, which aim at contributing to explain the differences and similarities in regulating and legislation with regard to Muslim headscarves in the countries investigated. Utilizing a comparative perspective this work focuses on the different religious,

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

298 political and cultural meanings of the veiling issue across European countries and on the comparative explanation of veiling regimes in European countries.

An Introduction to Tantric Philosophy Routledge Studies in Tantric Traditions

Lyne Bansat-Boudon, Ecolé Pratique des Hautes Études, Paris, France and Kamalesha Datta Tripathi, Banaras Hindu University, India PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-34669-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Paramarthasæra, or the Essence of [the Teachings on] Supreme Reality by Abhinavagupta (Xth to XIth AD) is a compendium of the monistic doctrine of Trika Saivism. This book offers the first commented English translation of both the text and its commentary

by Yogaraja (XIIth AD), along with a corrected Sanskrit text, introduction, indices and appendices. In an attempt to follow the principles of Yogarajas commentary, the authors unfold the metaphysical as well as mystic meanings of the text. In this process, they have taken recourse to both traditional Indian exegesis and the current interpretations among scholars of Kasmir Saivism. This edition will be of interest to Indologists and specialists of Kasmir Saivism, as well as to specialists and students of religious studies, philosophy and anthropology.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Translation of Paramarthasara and Commentary by Yogaraja, with notes 3. Sanskrit Text 4. Glossary

Tantric Mantras Routledge Studies in Tantric Traditions

Andre Padoux, Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, France PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-42386-1; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Making Andre Padoux’ work accessible to an English-speaking readership for the first time, this book provides a systematic and complete overview of the highest scholarly quality on Tantric mantras. It: presents a general summary on the nature of Tantric mantras, their phonetic aspect, structure and classifications explains the metaphysical-theological nature of Tantric mantras and gives an introduction to their beliefs and practices discusses the extraction and examination of mantras, certain characteristics such as their 'perfect nature' and their imperfections describes certain mantrics practices. Creating a significant impact in the study of Tantric mantras, this book will be of great interest to scholars of religious studies, theology, Indology, South Asian studies, and Asian religion.

CONTENTS 1. The Extraction and Examination of Mantras 2. Nyasa, the Ritual Placing of Mantras 3. Japa, the Repetition of Mantras 4. The Use of the Rosary (Aksamala) According to the Jayakhya-Samhita 5. Mantradosa and Mantrasamskara 6. Mantric Practices and the Nature of Mantras

Daoism and the Creation of Tradition Routledge Studies in Taoism

Gil Raz, Dartmouth College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77849-7; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION At the core of Daoism are ancient ideas concerning the Way, the fundamental process of existence (the Dao). Humans, as individuals and as a society, should be aligned with the Dao in order to attain the fullness of life and its potential. This book presents the history of early Daoism, tracing the development of the tradition between the first and the fifth centuries CE. This was an era of political instability and social turmoil in China but it was also a period of cultural efflorescence, which saw the appearance of new forms of literature and the integration of Buddhism in Chinese society and culture. Several Daoist movements emerged during this period, the best known being the Celestial Masters in the second century. Other relatively well-known lineages include the Upper Clarity and the Numinous Treasure lineages that appeared in the fourth century. The labels applied to these lineages refer to either textual or ritual categories and are very difficult to determine socially, and they obscure the social reality of early medieval China. The author argues

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

299 that these lineages should be understood not as schools but as narrowly defined associations of masters and disciples, and he describes these diverse social groupings as "communities of practice." Shedding new light on a complex and multifaceted phenomenon, the formation of Daoism as a new religion in early medieval China, this book presents a major step forward in Daoist Studies.

CONTENTS 1. Cults of Immortality 2. Blood Rites and Pure Covenants 3. Powers of Inscription 4. Sexual Practice among Medieval Daoists 5. The Development of Daoist Ritual 6. Conclusion

Daoist Rituals, State Religion, and Popular Practices Routledge Studies in Taoism

Shin-Yi Chao, Rutgers University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-78066-7; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book focuses on one of the few Chinese deities that can rightfully claim a countrywide devotion, Zhenwu or the Perfected Warrior. Religious specialists, lay devotees, the state machine, and the cultural industry all participated, both collaboratively and competitively, in the evolution of this devotional movement. Organized chronologically on the development of the Zhenwu worship in Daoist rituals, state religion, and popular practices, it centres on the development and transformation of the godhead of Zhenwu as well as the devotional movement focused on him. The author investigates the complicated means by which various social and political groups contested with each other in appropriating cultural-religious symbols. The question at the core of the book is how, in a given historical context, human agents and social institutions shape the religious world to which they profess devotion.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Zhenwu Worship at the Time of its Early Formation 3. Devotional Practice on Zhenwu during Song Times 4.

Zhenwu Worship and the Internal Dynamics of Daoism 5. Zhenwu Worship in the Yuan and the Ming Dynasties 5. Vernacular Forms of Zhenwu Worship 6. Zhenwu Worship in Practice: A Case Study of Fujian 7. Comparison of Zhenwu Worship in the Song and Ming Dynasties 8. Conclusion

Religion and Commodification Vineeta Sinha, National University of Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87363-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Sustaining a Hindu universe at an everyday life level requires an extraordinary range of religious specialists and ritual paraphernalia.

At the level of practice, devotional Hinduism is an embodied religion and grounded in a materiality, that makes the presence of specific physical objects (which when used in worship also carry immense ritual and symbolic load) an indispensable part of its religious practices. Using the lens of ‘visuality’ and ‘materiality,’ Sinha offers insights into the everyday material religious lives of Hindus as they strive to sustain theistic, devotional Hinduism in diasporic locations--particularly Singapore, Malaysia, and Tamilnadu-where religious objects have become commodified.

CONTENTS 1. Setting the Scene: The Scope of Research 2. Mapping Spaces and Objects: Disapora Hinduism and Prayer Items 3. Visualising Divinity: Statues, Paintings & Photographs 4. Homes for Gods: Prayer Altars for Family Shrines 5. Flowers for Sale: Flowers for Worship 6. Sustaining Festival Hinduism: Deepavali and Tai Pucam 7. Spirituality and Commerce: Theorising the Complex Ties

Pakistan's Security Asian Security Studies

Shaun Gregory, University of Bradford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-40573-7; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Pakistan: Securing the Insecure State is an in-depth analysis of the contemporary security of Pakistan - now one of the most important states in the world in terms of international security. The book attempts to identify and examine the means by which Pakistan might

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

300 make progress towards a more stable and secure future. It is innovative in at least three respects. Firstly, it argues that Pakistan’s security issues are operative at multiple levels – intra-state, state, regional and international - and that these levels are deeply interlinked and should not be considered in isolation. The work thus explores and then links analysis of security at each level in a way that has not been done before. Secondly, the book takes a broad approach to security that includes economic and social issues. As part of this, it examines security dynamics in relation to the powerful forces presently impacting South Asia, most notably globalisation, the US-led war on terrorism, the domestic clamour for peace and stability, and the strategic realignments underway -in particular, in the US-Indian-Pakistan relationship and in the China-India-Pakistan relationship. Thirdly, the book draws on the 'Security Community' ideas of Deutsch. This theory argues that states can move their core strategic relationship towards a less conflictual and eventually stable and peaceful situation through economic, political and social interaction, as well as politico-military engagement.

This book will be of great interest to all scholars of South Asian politics, Asian regional security and IR in general.

CONTENTS 1. Inside the Pakistani State 2. Federalism and Pakistani State Security 3. Terrorism in Pakistan 4. The Great Enemy: Pakistan and India 5. Pakistani Security in Regional Context 6. Great Power Rivalry and Pakistan 7. Securing the Insecure State

US–China–EU Relations Asian Security Studies

Edited by Robert Ross, Harvard University, USA, Øystein Tunsjø, Norwegian Insititute of Defence Studies and Zhang Tuosheng, China Foundation for International & Strategic Studies, China PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 306pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55233-2; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume brings together a group of leading international scholars to discuss how US-China-EU relations will shape the future of international politics. Arguing that these three powers will play a key role in establishing and managing a new world order, the contributors examine how a future global order is developed by the interaction of these leading actors in the international system. The authors also address how the US, China and the EU promote cooperation and manage conflict of interests on a wide spectrum of issues including new security challenges. By linking the management of international affairs to specific policy issues, the book shows that the US-China-EU triangular configuration is a pivotal relationship for understanding contemporary international relations. This book offers a comprehensive assessment of US-China-EU interactions and will be of great interest to students of Asian politics, US foreign policy, EU politics and security studies and IR in general. Robert S. Ross is Professor of Political Science at Boston College, Associate, John King Fairbank Center for East Asian Research, Harvard University, Associated Professor at the Norwegian Institute for Defence Studies, Senior Advisor, Security Studies Program, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and a member of the Council on Foreign Relations. Øystein Tunsjø is Senior Research Fellow at the Norwegian Institute for Defence Studies. Zhang Tuosheng is director of the research department and senior fellow at the China Foundation for International and Strategic Studies.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Robert Ross, Øystein Tunsjø and Zhang Tuosheng Part 1 2. The United States and the Future Global Order Robert Art 3. On China’s Concept of the International Security Order Zhang Tuosheng 4. The European Union as Civilian Power: Aspirations, Potential, Achievements Hans Maull Part 2 5. Changes and Continuities in EU-China Relations: A German Perspective Gudrun Wacker 6. Travelling Hopefully, Acting Realistically? UK-China Interactions James Gow 7. China and European Security and Economic Interests: A French Perspective Jean Pierre Cabestan 8. China and US Security and Economic Interests: Challenges and Opportunities Robert Sutter 9. An Analysis of Chinese Images of the United States and EU Wu Baiyi Part 3 10. China-US-EU Relationship in a Changing Era Wan Yizhou 11. Strategy, Politics, and World Order Perspective: Comparing the EU and US Approaches to China’s Resurgence Rosemary Foot Part 4 12. Global Imbalances and Currency Politics: China, Europe and the United States Andrew Walter 13. Managing Tension and Promoting Cooperation: US-Europe Approaches on Security Issues with China Bates Gill 14. US-China-EU Relations: Towards a New World Order? Robert Ross, Øystein Tunsjø and Zhang Tuosheng

The New Citizen Armies BESA Studies in International Security

Edited by Stuart A. Cohen, Bar-llan University, Israel PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56546-2; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited book constitutes the first detailed attempt at a comparative international analysis of the transformations that are currently affecting the composition of the Israel Defense Forces (IDF) and their place in Israeli society. Focusing primarily on deviations from the traditional norm of universal military service, the book compares the emergence of a new type of "citizen army" in Israel with the formats that have in recent decades become evident in other western democracies. In addition, these essays correct the conventional tendency to concentrate almost exclusively on the influences stimulating military institutional change in the West, and thereby to

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

301 overlook the equally important factors that retard its momentum. By contrast, this volume deliberately highlights the brakes as well as the accelerators in current processes, thereby presenting a far more faithful picture of their complexity. This book will be of much interest to students of Israeli politics, military studies, Middle Eastern politics, security studies and IR in general. Stuart Cohen is a senior research associate of the BESA (Begin-Sadat) Center for Strategic Studies and also teaches political studies at Bar-Ilan University, Israel. His most recent book is Israel and its Army: From Cohesion to Confusion (Routledge, 2008).

CONTENTS Part 1: Continuities and their Manifestations 1. The Enduring Citizen-Soldier Tradition in the United States Ronald R. Krebs 2.

Recruiting the All-Volunteer Force: Continuity and Change in the British Army, 1963-2008 Christopher Dandeker 3. The Royal Netherlands Army, 1814-2008: The Rise and Decline of a Citizen Army? Jan Hoffenaar 4. Reversing the Tide of Jewish History: Culture and the Creation of Israel's 'People's Army' Stuart A. Cohen Part 2: Change: Causes and Constraints 5. Operational and Technological Incentives and Disincentives for Force Transformation Avi Kober 6. Strategic and Political Factors Preventing the Shift from 'Citizen Armies' to Professional Militaries Gabriel Sheffer and Oren Barak 7. Gender Issues in the Transformation to an AllVolunteer Force: A Transnational Perspective Michelle Sandhoff, Mady Wechsler Segal, David R. Segal 8. Conscription versus Recruitment Through Markets: Economic Considerations Yaacov Lifshitz 9. The Officer Corps in the All-Volunteer Army: The American Experiment Continues Leonard Wong 10. Up from the Ashes: The Re-Professionalization of the Canadian Forces After the 'Somalia' Affair David J. Bercuson Part 3: Israeli Dilemmas and Experiences 11. Where Will the Women Be? Gendered Implications of the Decline of Israel's Citizen Army Orna Sasson-Levy 12. From the 'Citizen Army' to the 'Market Army': Israel as a Case Study Yagil Levy 13. Teaching Citizens to be Professional Soldiers: IDF Responses and Their Implications Tamir Libel

Democratic Citizenship and War Cass Military Studies

Edited by Yoav Peled, Noah Lewin-Epstein and Guy Mundlak, all of Tel Aviv University, Israel PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55224-0; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited volume explores the theoretical and practical implications of war and terror situations for citizenship in democratic states.

Citizenship is a key concept in Western political thought for defining the individual’s relations with society. The specific nature of these rights, duties and contributions, as well the relations between them, are determined by the citizenship discourses that prevail in each society. In wartime, including low-intensity wars, democratic societies face different challenges than the ones facing them during peacetime, in areas such as human rights, the status of minorities, the state’s obligations to its citizens, and the meaning of social solidarity. War situations can affect not only the scope of citizenship as an institution, but also the relations between the prevailing discourses of citizenship and between different groups of citizens. Since 9/11 and the declaration of the 'war on terror', many democracies have been grappling with issues rising out of the interface between citizenship and war. This volume examines the effects of war on various aspects of citizenship practice, including: immigration and naturalization, the welfare state, individual liberties, gender relations, multiculturalism, social solidarity, and state – civil society relations. This book will be of great interest to students of military studies, political science, IR and security studies in general.

CONTENTS Introduction Part I: Citizenship and War: The View From Political Theory 1. Republican Citizenship, Repression of Liberal Rights and Multi-Polarity Alberto Spektorowski and Carl Schmitt 2. Security Council Activism in the Age of the War on Terror: Implications for Human rights, Democracy and Constitutionalism Jean Cohen 3. Beyond The Security vs. Liberty Paradigm: A New Look on Security Politics Sharon Weinblum Part II: Citizenship and War: An Historical Perspective 4. The Alien-Citizen Distinction and the Global War on Terrorism Tung Yin and David Abraham 5. Citizens at War: Traitors and Internal Enemies Ute Frevort 6. Limited War, Limited Citizenship: The Case of Veterans in the People’s Republic of China Niel J. Diamant 7. Soldiers’ Violence and the Dialectics of Citizenship and Victimhood in Contemporary Israel Yaron Ezrahi Part III: Citizenship, War and the Rights of Women and Ethnic Minorities 8. Indian Muslims and the War on Terror: Reflections on Their Citizenship Status Ornit Shani 9. Women as the Bearers of the Nation: Women's Rights in Israel – between Liberal and Ethnic Citizenship Gila Stopler 10. The Palestinian-Israeli "Visionary Documents": Background, Implications and Critique Uri Ram Part IV: Social and Economic Citizenship in Wartime 11.

Democracy’s Disappearing Duties: The Washington Consensus and the Limits of Citizen Participation Timothy A. Canova 12. The Reversal of Citizenship: The Lebanon War and Intifada in the 1980's and the 2000's Lev Grinberg

A European Army Cass Military Studies

Sven Biscop, Royal Institute for International Relations, Belgium PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46625-7; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

302 In the European Security and Defence Policy (ESDP), the EU has acquired an operational military dimension, which has two objectives: (1) equipping the EU with the institutions and procedures to plan for, decide on and implement military (and civilian) operations abroad; and (2) enhancing the quality and quantity of deployable military capabilities at the disposal of the EU. Great progress has been achieved on the institutional side, but the capabilities side is lagging behind as the bottom-up nature of the capability-building process has made for slow progress. This book assesses: • how the bottom-up nature of the capability dimension of the ESDP and the resulting persisting national focus of EU Member States (each striving for full capacity at the national level) impede the generation of deployable capabilities for the EU (and therefore for NATO as well); • whether a reorientation towards capacity at the aggregate EU-level and the introduction of top-down coordination is achievable; • how such reorientation, via pooling of national assets into multinational frameworks and reduction of intra-EU duplication, could generate more deployable capabilities within the existing and expected budgetary context. This book adds flesh to the bone structure of the idea of far-reaching military integration by elaborating a possible size and composition of a ‘European army’ and assessing in more detail how it can be achieved. It then puts that firmly in the context of conceptual thinking about the nature of the EU as an international actor. This book will be of interest to students of military studies, European Politics and Strategic Studies.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. EU Ambitions 2. EU Forces 3. EU Command 4. EU Civilian Capabilities 5. EU Partners 6. EU Strategic Culture

Managing Military Organizations Cass Military Studies

Edited by Joseph Soeters, Paul C. van Fenema and Robert Beeres, all of the Netherlands Defense Academy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48406-0; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book deals with the processes and theories involved in managing military organisations in both peacetime and crisis conditions.

Examining the challenges faced by policymakers and military commanders in conducting military operations, this book considers the benefits of conventional management and organisation theory for the military. At the same time, these essays recognise that the military should be considered as a highly individual organisation, operating in exceptional circumstances. This awareness of the differences between the military and other organisations generates important lessons not only for the military but also for general organisations as it teaches them how to cope in exceptional, ‘hyper’ conditions. These theoretical lessons are illustrated by case studies and experiences from recent military operations, such as those in Iraq and Afghanistan. This book will be of great interest to students of military studies, security studies and organizational studies. Joseph Soeters chairs the department of management and organization studies and defence economy at the Netherlands Defense Academy and he is a professor in organizational sociology at Tilburg University. Paul. C. van Fenema is an associate professor of organization studies at the Netherlands Defence Academy and Tilburg University. Robert Beeres is an associate professor in the field of defence accounting and control (business administration) at the Netherlands Defence Academy and at Nyenrode Business School.

CONTENTS 1. Introducing Military Organizations Joseph Soeters, Paul C. van Fenema and Robert Beeres Part 1: Context, Strategy and External Coordination 2. Leading Military Organizations in the Risk Society: Mapping the New Strategic Complexity Frans Osinga and Julian Lindley French 3. Legitimacy and Surveillance: Shifting Patterns of Vertical and Horizontal Control Paul Ducheine, Jan van der Meulen and René Moelker 4. Internationalization of the Military Anthony King 5. Research, Development and Innovation in the Military Daniel Uiterwijk and Ivar Kappert Part 2: Internal Coordination and Preparation of Operations 6. Designing and Preparing Military Organizations for Expeditionary and Network Performance Erik de Waard and Eric-Hans Kramer 7. (Re-)Drawing the Boundaries: Sourcing Operational and Supportive Services in Military Organizations Paul C. van Fenema and Robert Beeres 8.

Logistics Planning and Control: Lessons Learned in Afghanistan Bas Rietjens, Ton van Kampen and Tim Grant Part 3: Military Organizations in Action 9. Leadership During Operations Ad Vogelaar, Coen van den Berg and Thom Kolditz 10. Sensemaking During Operations and Incidents Eric-Hans Kramer, Roos Delahaij and Bart van Bezooijen 11. Managing Moral Professionalism in Military Operations Peter Olsthoorn, Marten Meijer and Desiree Verweij 12. Military Law and Operations Ben Klappe 13. Trust and Control in the Military: Dual or Dueling Forces? Marion Bogers, Andrea van Dijk and Jacqueline Heeren-Bogers 14. Partnering with ‘Strangers’ Myriame Bollen and Joseph Soeters 15. Military Organizations and National Crisis Response Paul C. van Fenema Part 4: Monitoring Operational Effectiveness and (Secondary) Outcomes 16. Commanding and Controlling Crisis Response Operations Christiaan Davids, Robert Beeres and Tim Grant 17. Measuring Performance in Today’s Missions: The Effects-Based Approach to Operations Joseph Soeters, Sebastiaan Rietjens, and Willem Klumper 18. Learning Military Organizations and Organizational Change Tom Bijlsma, Irma Bogenrieder and Peter van Baalen 19. Managing Well-being of Military Personnel and Their Families Tessa Op den Buijs, Manon Andres, and Paul Bartone 20. Epilogue: Military Heterogeneous Value Creation Paul C. van Fenema, Joseph

Modern War and the Utility of Force Cass Military Studies

Edited by Isabelle Duyvesteyn, University of Utrecht, the Netherlands and Jan Angstrom, Swedish National Defence College

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

303 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57595-9; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book investigates the use and utility of military force in modern war. After the Cold War, Western armed forces have increasingly been called upon to intervene in internal conflicts in the former Third World. These forces have been called upon to carry out missions that they traditionally have not been trained and equipped for, in environments that they often have not been prepared for.

A number of these ‘new’ types of operations in allegedly ‘new’ wars stand out, such as peace enforcement, state-building, counterinsurgency, humanitarian aid, and not the least counter-terrorism. The success rate of these missions has, however, been mixed, providing fuel for an increasingly loud debate on the utility of force in modern war. This edited volume poses as its central question: what is in fact the utility of force? Is force useful for anything other than a complete conventional defeat of a regular opponent, who is confronted in the open field? This book will be of much interest to students of strategic studies, war and conflict studies, counterinsurgency, security studies and IR. Isabelle Duyvesteyn is an Associate Professor at the Department of History of International Relations, Utrecht University in the Netherlands. Jan Angstrom is a researcher at the Swedish National Defence College.

CONTENTS Foreword by General Sir Rupert Smith 1. War, What is it Good for? Jan Angstrom 2. From Victory to Success: The Changing Mission of Western Armed Forces Christopher Dandeker 3. The International Private Security Company: A Unique and Useful Actor?

Christopher Spearin 4. Great Expectations: The Use of Armed Force to Combat Terrorism Isabelle Duyvesteyn 5. Why does Peacekeeping Succeed or Fail? Peacekeeping in the Democratic Republic of Congo and Sierra Leone Sarah Kreps 6. Exploring the Utility of Armed Force in Peace Operations: German and British Approaches in Northern Afghanistan Kersti Larsdotter 7.

Counterinsurgency Doctrine: the U.S. Experience Thomas Mockaitis 8. No Simple Formula: The Use of Military Force in Counterinsurgency James Corum 9. Adapting to Counter-Insurgency; The US Army in Iraq, July 2004-December 2006 Brian Burton and John Nagl 10. Inviting the Leviathan: External Forces, War and State Building in Afghanistan Jan Angstrom 11. Between Reluctance and Necessity: The Utility of Military Force in Humanitarian and Development Operations Robert Egnell 12. War, What it is Good for … Isabelle Duyvesteyn

Naval Power and Expeditionary Wars Cass Series: Naval Policy and History

Edited by Bruce Elleman and Sarah Paine PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-54608-9; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume examines the contribution of naval power to strategic victory by focusing on the decision to open a new theater in an ongoing war, and the contribution of such 'peripheral' expeditions to strategic victory, from the 19th century to Iraq.

CONTENTS Foreword John B. Hattendorf. Introduction Bruce A. Elleman and S.C.M. Paine 1. Legal Issues of Peripheral Campaigns Eric T. Jensen 2. The Royal Navy and the Peninsular War 1808-13 Michael Duffy 3. Arctic Campaign during the Crimean War Andrew Lambert 4. The Gallipoli Debacle Robin Prior 5. The Mesopotamian Campaign during World War I Paul G. Halpern 6. Japan’s Peripheral Operation to Defeat Chiang Kai-shek: The Attacks on Pearl Harbor, Malaya, and the Philippines S.C.M. Paine 7. The U.S. War in the Pacific: The Guadalcanal Campaign Bradford Lee 8. The New Guinea Campaign during World War II David Stevens 9.

Peripheral Campaigns in the Korean War Edward J. Marolda 10. The Malay Archipelago during the Emergency and Confrontation, 1948-66 Jeffrey Grey 11. China and the "Boat People" Offensive in the 1979 Sino-Vietnamese War Bruce A. Elleman 12. Always Expect the Unexpected: The Falklands/Malvinas Maritime Conflict 1982 Eric Grove 13. The Maritime Campaign in Iraq Peter Jones 14. Conclusions: The War on Terror during the 21 st Century John Reeve. Epilogue, Bruce A. Elleman and S.C.M. Paine

Piracy, Terrorism and Irregular Warfare at Sea Cass Series: Naval Policy and History

Martin N. Murphy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55039-0; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This is the first detailed study of irregular warfare at sea, covering such topics as piracy, asymmetric war, and terrorism.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

304 1. Introduction 2. Navies and Naval Strategy 3. Asymmetry and Irregular 4. Pirates and Privateers 5. Commerce-Raiding and Guerre de Course 6. The Development of Naval Special Forces 7. Modern Asymmetric Challenges 8. From the Sea: Raiding and Presence 9.

Conclusion. Bibliography

Technology and the Mid-Victorian Royal Navy Cass Series: Naval Policy and History

Howard J. Fuller, University of Wolverhampton, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-37004-2; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A revealing new examination of Palmerstonian diplomacy during the pivotal decade of the 1860s, the evolution of the modern capital ship and the real nature of ‘empire’, ‘technology’ and ‘seapower’. In contrast to the standard image of the mid-Victorian Royal navy as all-powerful, Howard Fuller shows how it suffered serious challenges in this period. Global naval supremacy was no longer ‘unassailable’ or certain. He skilfully demonstrates how what was good naval practice during the Trent Affair was no longer good in the American Civil War once the Unionist side introduced the ‘monitor’ form of Ironclad, which deliberately forfeited longer-range power-projection for local, coastal ‘command of the sea’. Technology had pitted tactically based, national powers of defence against strategically based imperial ones – and had intertwined with modern civilian-military debates. How the Royal Navy addressed this issue, successfully or not, and how such decision-making at Whitehall affected that at Westminster is explored using a wealth of international primary and secondary sources. This book will be of great interest to all students of the Royal Navy, and of maritime and strategic studies in general.

Statebuilding and Justice Reform Cass Series on Peacekeeping

Matteo Tondini PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 172pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55894-5; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The book provides an updated account of justice reform in Afghanistan, which started in the wake of the US-led military intervention of 2001. In particular, it focuses on the role of international actors and their interaction with local stakeholders, highlighting some provisional results, together with problems and dilemmas encountered in the reform activities. Since the mid-1990s, justice system reform has become increasingly important in state-building operations, particularly with regard to the international administrations of Bosnia, Kosovo, East Slavonia and East Timor. Statebuilding and Justice Reform examines in depth the reform of justice in Afghanistan, evaluating whether the success of reform may be linked to any specific feature or approach. In doing so, it stresses the need for development programmes in the field of justice to be implemented through a multilateral approach, involving domestic authorities and other relevant stakeholders. Success is therefore linked to limiting the political interests of donors; establishing functioning pooled financing mechanisms; restricting the use of bilateral projects; improving the efficacy of technical and financial aid; and concentrating the attention on the ‘demand for justice’ at local level rather than on the traditional supply of financial and technical assistance. This book will be of much interest to students of Afghanistan, intervention and statebuilding, peacekeeping, and post-conflict reconstruction, as well as International Relations in general. Matteo Tondini is a researcher and a legal advisor. He has served as a project advisor to the Embassy of Italy in Kabul, Development Cooperation Unit, working within the ‘Afghanistan Justice Program’ and has a Phd in Political Systems and Institutional Change, from the Institute of Advanced Studies, Lucca, Italy.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Justice System Reform in Afghanistan 2. Reforming Public Institutions in Countries Recovering from Conflict: A Brief Overview 3. Justice Sector Reform in Countries Recovering from Conflict 4. The System of Justice in Afghanistan before the US Military Intervention of 2001 5. Phase One – From Tokyo to London: The ‘Lead Nation Approach’ 6. Phase Two – From London to Paris and Beyond: Implementing the Local Ownership Principle in Justice Sector Reform 7. Conclusion

UN Peace Operations and Post-Conflict Reconstruction Cass Series on Peacekeeping

Eirin Mobekk, University of Bradford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48086-4; October 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

305 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book looks at UN Peace Operations in Haiti and why they went so dramatically wrong first time around, resulting in much deepseated conflict, in order that these lessons can be taken into account in future operations elsewhere.

CONTENTS 1. UN Peace Operations: An Overview 2. Haiti and the Need for Multilateral Interventions 3. Disarmament, Demobilisation and Reintegration (DDR) 4. Security Sector Reform 5. Justice and Reconciliation 6. External Democracy Promotion 7. Sustainable Economic Development 8. Conclusion

Negotiating with Terrorists Cass Series on Political Violence

Guy Olivier Faure, Sorbonne University, France and I. William Zartman, Johns Hopkins University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56629-2; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited volume addresses the important issue of negotiating with terrorists, and offers recommendations for best practice and processes. Hostage negotiation is the process of trying to align two often completely polarised parties. Authorities view hostage taking as unacceptable demands made by unacceptable means. However terrorists view their actions as completely justified, even on moral and religious grounds. If they are to try and reconcile these two sides, it is essential for hostage negotiators to understand terrorist culture, the hostage takers’ profiles, their personality, their view of the world and also the authorities, their values and their framing of the problem raised by the taking of hostages. Although not advocating negotiating with terrorists, the volume seeks to analyse when, why, and how it is done. Part I deals with the theory and quantifiable data produced from analysis of hostage situations, while Part II explores several high profile case studies and the lessons that can be learnt from them. This volume will be of great interest to students of terrorism studies, conflict management, negotiation, security studies and IR in general. I William Zartman is the Jacob Blaustein Distinguished Professor Emeritus of International Organization and Conflict Resolution and former Director of the Conflict Management and African Studies Programs, at the Paul H. Nitze School of Advanced International Studies, Johns Hopkins University, Washington, DC. He is a member of the Steering Committee of the Processes of International Negotiation (PIN) Program at the International Institute of Applied Systems Analysis (IIASA) in Laxenburg, Austria. He is author/editor of over 20 books on negotiation, conflict and mediation. Guy Olivier Faure is Professor of Sociology at the Sorbonne University, Paris I, and a member of the Steering Committee of the Processes of International Negotiation (PIN) Program at the International Institute of Applied Systems Analysis (IIASA) in Laxenburg, Austria. He has served as an advisor to French government on hostage negotiations.

CONTENTS Introduction GO Faure and I. William Zartman Part 1: How to Negotiate: Kidnapping the Kidnappers Introductionto Part 1 1.

Guidelines for Negotiators with Terrorists Laurent Combalbert 2. Quantitative and Qualitative Aspects of Kidnapping and Hostage Negotiation Alex Schmid and P. Flemming 3. Talking to the Devil David Pinder Part 2: Practical/Tactical: Freeing the Hostages Introduction to Part 2 4. Terrorist Negotiating Strategy in Lebanon Karen Feste 5. Negotiating in Beslan and Beyond Adam Dolnik 6.

Negotiating Visible and Hidden Agendas Victor Kremenyuk 7. Negotiating The Grand Swap in Khandahar P. Sahadevan Part 3: Conclusions 8. Lessons for Practice GO Faure and I. William Zartman. Bibliography

Political and Military Evolution of Irish Republican Groups Cass Series on Political Violence

Kacper Rekawek PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58801-0; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the post-ceasefire evolutions and histories of the main Irish republican terrorist factions, and the interconnected character of politics and militarism within these. The book offers the first comparative study of the two leading Irish republican terrorist movements: the Official IRA and the Provisional IRA. It presents the lesser-known Officials’ political-military evolution and analyses whether they could have been role models for the Provisionals, who called their seminal ceasefire twenty-two years after their rivals (1972 and 1994, respectively). In short, it discusses whether the PIRA might have learned lessons from the bitter and ultimately unsuccessful experience of the Officials . The book assesess the post-ceasefire evolutions of these movements and unearths new interpretations about a well-known terrorist group (PIRA) through studying it comparatively with its neighbours, ideological comrades and immediate competitors. This book will be of much interest to students of Irish politics, terrorism studies, security studies and politics in general.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

306 1. Introduction 2. The Official Republican Movement: Military Evolution 1972-92 3. The Provisional Republican Movement: Military Evolution 1994-2005 4. Thematic Analysis of Official Republican and Provisional Republican Post-Ceasefire Militarism 5. The Official Republican Movement: Political Evolution 1972-92 6. The Provisional Republican Movement: Political Evolution 1994-2005 7. Thematic Analysis of Official Republican and Provisional Republican Post-Ceasefire Politics 8. Conclusions. Bibliography

Political Assassinations and International Politics Cass Series on Political Violence

Suchitra Dutta, University of St Andrews, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-41800-3; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the phenomenon of political assassinations in the contemporary world. It makes a clear distinction between a murder, an assassination and a political assassination although there may indeed be some overlap between the terms. Suchitra Dutta analyzes the various justifications that can be used in order to assess whether or not political assassinations can ever be justified, particularly focusing on the consequentialist/utilitarianist approach, the Just War tradition, and terroristic justification. Discussing specific cases such as those of Anwar Sadat, Yitzhak Rabin and Rajiv Gandhi, it provides an analysis of the contemporary state of the political assassination regime. Political Assassinations and International Politics will be of interest to academics working on terrorism, security and ethics related issues.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Definitions 3. Justifications 4. Assassination of Anwar Sadat 5. Assassination of Rajiv Ghandi 6. Assassination of Yitzhak Rabin 7. Political Assassination Regime 8. Conclusion

Terrorism and the Olympics Cass Series on Political Violence

Edited by Anthony Richards, Peter Fussey and Andrew Silke, all of University of East London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49939-2; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Drawing on contributions from leading academics and practitioners in the field, this book provides a review and analysis of major event security, major sporting event security and Olympic security.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Anthony Richards, Peter Fussey and Andrew Silke 2. The International Terrorist Threat and its Implications for the London Olympics of 2012 Afzal Ashraf and Andrew Silke 3. Responding to Suicide Terrorism Anthony Richards and Steve Swain 4.

Securing the Transport System Steve Swain 5. Intelligence and Major Event Security, tbc 6. The Role of Technology Keith Weston and Peter Fussey 7. The Role of Surveillance Peter Fussey 8 . Designing Stadia for Safer Events Jon Coaffee 9. The Challenge of Inter-Agency Coordination Keith Weston 10. The Role of the Private Security Industry Project Director - 2012, British Security Industry Association 11. European Perspectives on Major Event Security Frank Gregory 12. Olympic Case Studies: From Barcelona 1992 to Sydney 2000, tbc 13. Olympic Case Studies: From Athens 2004 to Beijing 2008, tbc 14. Conclusion and ways Forward

Terrorism, Identity, and Legitimacy Cass Series on Political Violence

Edited by Jean Rosenfeld PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57857-8; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited collection is a critical examination of the significance of history, religion and 'transcendent purpose' on the successive waves of terror that have assaulted and shocked modern societies, and is inspired by David Rapoport's research. The perspectives here favour an interdisciplinary approach to terrorism studies that is diachronic, as well as synchronic; comparative, and inductive, as well as deductive. Above all, this approach questions and challenges conventional wisdom and welcomes critical and surprising divergent ideas into the emerging theory about what David Rapoport terms 'extralegal violence'. This collection is both theoretical and empirically grounded in actual cases. The contributors’ scholarship ranges across disciplines to include methodology and substantive

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

307 ideas from political science, anthropology, the philosophy of language, gender studies, forensics and profiling, and the sociology and history of religions. In summary, the aim of Terrorism, Legitimacy, and Identity: Interdisciplinary Perspectives is to discuss David Rapoport’s contributions to the understanding of terrorist phenomena in human political experience; and to provide diverse, new perspectives on the stubborn challenge of waves of terrorism to sovereign states that struggle to develop and/or maintain their selfidentity. This book will be of much interest to students of terrorism studies, religion, sociology, war and conflict studies and IR in general.

Terrorist Groups and the New Tribalism Cass Series on Political Violence

Jeffrey Kaplan, University of Wisconsin, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-45338-7; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The central focus of this book is a small but vitally important group of movements that constitute a distinct 'fifth wave' of modern terrorism, here called the "New Tribalism". Terrorist Groups and the New Tribalism examines a collection of terrorist or insurgent movements whose similarity in tactics, strategic vision and desire to radically reshape their worlds to conform with a ‘Golden Age’ dream of perfection which is to be achieved through a genocidal or ethnic cleansing process to make way for the emergence of a new, radically perfected tribal utopia in a single generation. These shared strategic and tactical factors allow them to be examined through a comparative lens as a distinct ‘fifth wave’ of modern terrorism. Structured around the theoretical framework of David Rapoport’s Four Waves thesis, the book examines anomalous movements that began within a distinct wave of international terrorism, but, following a crisis model, has turned inwards toward radical localism, tribalism and xenophobia. The text is divided between theory and in depth case studies of the Ugandan Lord’s Resistance Army and the Sudanese Janjaweed. It concludes with a design for further, field-work based research. This book will be of interest to students of Terrorism and Political Violence, Genocide, Conflict Studies, African politics and Political Science in general. Jeffrey Kaplan is an Associate Professor of Religion and the Director of the Institute for the Study of Religion, Violence and Memory at the University of Wisconsin Oshkosh. He is the author of 11 books on terrorism and political violence.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Theory 1. Terrorism and Religious Violence 2. Rapoport’s Four Waves Theory Revisited 3. The Fifth Wave Part 2: Praxis 4. The Lord’s Resistance Army 5. The Janjaweed in the Sudan 6. Conclusion—The Fifth Wave?

The Globalization of the Cold War Cold War History

Edited by Max Guderzo and Bruna Bagnato, University of Florence, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 188pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55226-4; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book focuses on the globalisation of the Cold War in the years 1975-85, highlighting the transformation from bipolar US-Soviet competition to global confrontation. Offering a detailed analysis of this fundamental shift that occurred during this period, as well as the interconnections of this process with the new industrial-technological revolution, this book demonstrates how the United States returned to a position of global economic leadership. In so doing, the book aims to challenge the traditional and misleading paradigm that interprets the gradual development of the Cold War in basic bipolar terms; in fact, most of the factors triggering superpower attitudes and interplay were linked to a complex web of relations with their allies, as well as to the political, economic, social, ideological and military factors structurally intrinsic to the ‘peripheral’ regions where the confrontation actually took place. Many of the essays in this volume focus on the foreign and security policies of the United States, with the aim of reassessing the Carter administration as the foundation for Reagan’s final show-down with the Soviet Union. The contributors, however, go beyond the traditional patterns of foreign policy analysis, giving due attention to transnational phenomena and institutional histories that better explain the gradual transformation in the years that prepared the world for the post-Cold War globalisation era. This book will be of much interest to students of Cold War studies, international history, US foreign policy, European politics and IR in general. Max Guderzo is Professor of the History of International Relations and holds the Jean Monnet Chair of the History of European Unification at the University of Florence. Bruna Bagnato is Associate Professor of the History of International Relations at the University of Florence.

CONTENTS Introduction Bruna Bagnato and Max Guderzo Part 1: The Latin American Arena 1. Carter’s New Look: US Foreign Policy in Latin America, 1977-80 Max Guderzo 2. Operation Urgent Fury: The Shift from Rhetorical to Military Offensive in Reagan’s Global Rollback of Communism Stefano Luconi Part 2: African Challenges 3. Libya, the United States and the Soviet Union: From the Rise of Qadhafi to Ronald Reagan’s Policy of Pressure Massimiliano Cricco 4. Human Rights versus Cold War: The Horn of Africa,

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

308 Southwest Asia and the Emergence of the Carter Doctrine Barbara Zanchetta 5. Carter and the African Morass: US Policy and the Failure of the State-Building Process in Angola and the Congo Maria Stella Rognoni 6. East-South Relations in the 1970s and the GDR Involvement in Africa: Between Bloc Loyalty and Self-Interest Sara Lorenzini Part 3: War and Peace in Asia 7. The United States and the Iran-Iraq War: The Limits of American Influence Malcolm Byrne 8. The United States and the Third World in the Carter Years: The Case of India Mariele Merlati 9. The Sino-American Entente of 1www.routledge.com/978-9 and Its ‘Baptism of Fire’ in Indochina Enrico Fardella Part 4: A Different World 10. The International System after the End of the Cold War Ennio Di Nolfo

International History of the Vietnam War Cold War History

Ang Cheng Guan, Nanyang Technical University, Singapore PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-35095-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book attempts to complete the groundbreaking and seminal study of the Vietnam War from an international perspective began by the late-Ralph B. Smith in the 1980s, of which only three volumes of a projected five was completed. The most recent volume was published more than a decade ago in 1991 and it brought the story of the Vietnam War up till 1966. This book takes up the story where it stopped – The Manila Conference and the Decisions of November 1966 through to the end of the conflict in April 1975. It adopts the same ‘formula/methodology’ as the earlier volumes by: following a tight chronology examining the decisions of both sides of the war simultaneously when appropriate relate the war to the regional and global perspective at every stage in the evolution of the conflict. The author makes use of a far greater body of communist and non-communist sources which were not available in the preCold War period when Professor Smith began his study. International History of the Vietnam War will be of interest to students of the Vietnam War, Southeast Asian history, US foreign policy, and international history in general.

Yugoslavia and the Soviet Union in the Early Cold War Cold War History

Svetozar Rajak, London School of Economics, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-38074-4; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The first comprehensive insight into one of the most spectacular episodes of the Cold War – the reconciliation between Yugoslavia and the Soviet Union between 1953 and 1955. At the time, this process had shocked the World as much as the violent break-up of their relations did in 1948. This new book provides an explanation for the collapse of the process of normalization of Yugoslav-Soviet that occurred at the end of 1956 and the renewal of their ideological confrontation. It alsos explain the motives that guided the two main protagonists, Josip Broz Tito of Yugoslavia and the Soviet leader Nikita Sergeevich Khrushchev. This book establishes several pioneering theses. Firstly, that the significance of the Yugoslav-Soviet reconciliation went beyond their bilateral relationship. It had ramifications for relations in the Eastern Bloc, the global Communist movement, and on the dynamics of the Cold War world at its crucial juncture. Secondly, that the Yugoslav-Soviet reconciliation brought forward the process of de-Stalinization in the USSR and in the Peoples’ Democracies. Thirdly, that it enabled Khrushchev to win the post-Stalin leadership contest. Lastly, the book argues that the process of Yugoslav-Soviet reconciliation permitted Tito to embark, together with Nehru of India and Nasser of Egypt upon creating the new entity in the bi-polar Cold War world – the Non-aligned movement. This book will be of much interest to Cold War historians and students of international relations and postwar European history.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Overtures 2. Normalisation 3. Comradeship 4. Confrontation. Conclusion

Global Biosecurity Contemporary Security Studies

Edited by Peter Katona, University of California, Los Angeles, USA, John P. Sullivan, National Terrorism Early Warning Resource Center, Los Angeles Sheriff's Department, USA and Michael D. Intriligator, University of California, Los Angeles, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 352pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46053-8; January 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

309 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores a range of biohealth and biosecurity threats, places them in context, and offers responses and solutions from global and local, networked and pyramidal, as well as specialized and interdisciplinary perspectives. Specifically covering bioterrorism, emerging infectious diseases, pandemic disease preparedness and remediation, agroterroism, food safety, and environmental issues, the contributors demonstrate that to counter terrorism of any kind, a global, networked, and multidisciplinary approach is essential. To be successful in biosecurity, this book argues it is necessary to extend partnerships, cooperation, and co-ordination between public health, clinical medicine, private business, law enforcement and other agencies locally, nationally and internationally. Internationally, a clear understanding is needed of what has happened in past epidemics and what was accomplished in past bioprograms (in Britain, South Africa, Russia, for example). This book also assesses how, with the right technology and motivation, both a state and a nonstate actor could initiate an extremely credible biothreat to security at both local and national levels. This book will be of much interest to students, researchers and practitioners of security studies, public health, public policy and IR in general. Peter Katona is Associate Professor of Clinical Medicine at the David Geffen School of Medicine at UCLA in Infectious Diseases. He is co-founder of Biological Threat Mitigation, a bioterror consulting firm. John P. Sullivan is a lieutenant with the Los Angeles Sheriff’s Department.

He is also a researcher focusing on terrorism, conflict disaster, intelligence studies, and urban operations. He is co-founder of the Los Angeles Terrorism Early Warning (TEW) Group. Michael D. Intriligator is Professor of Economics at the University of California, Los Angeles (UCLA). He is also Professor of Political Science, Professor of Public Policy in the School of Public Policy and Social Research, and Co-Director of the Jacob Marschak Interdisciplinary Colloquium on Mathematics in the Behavioral Sciences, all at UCLA. CONTENTS Preface. Reflections of an Old Bioweaponeer William Patrick III. Introduction: Global Biosecurity and the Spectrum of Infectious Disease Threats Peter Katona, John P. Sullivan and Michael D. Intriligator Part 1: Assessing the Threats of Natural and Deliberate Epidemics 1. Emerging and Re-emerging Infectious Diseases Peter Katona and W. Michael Scheld 2. Biological Warfare and Bioterrorism: How Do They Differ from Other WMD Threats Philip Coyle 3. A History of Bioterrorism and Biocrimes Peter Katona and Seth Carus 4. Food and Agricultural Biosecurity Tom Frazier 5. The Economic, Political, and Social Impacts of Bioterrorism Michael D. Intriligator 6. Technology and the Global Proliferation of Dual-Use Biotechnologies Mark Gorwitz 7. Conflict and Environmental Security Setting the Stage for Humanitarian Crises John P. Sullivan Part 2: Gaps and Weaknesses in Current Public Health Preparedness and Response Systems 8. Problems in Coordinating Health, Law Enforcement and Intelligence Activities in the U.S. and Europe Stefan Brem and Stéphane Dubois 9. Emerging Roles of Reserve Forces: National Guard Role and Mission in Domestic Preparedness Annette L. Sobel 10. Mitigating Crisis Through Communication Dan Rutz Part 3: Integrated Approaches to Infectious-Disease Preparedness and Response 11a. Bioterrorism Surveillance Manfred Green 11b. The Role of Informal Information Sources as an Adjunct to Routine Disease Surveillance Majorie Pollack 12. A Public Health Model for WMD Threat Assessment: Connecting the Bioterrorism Dots on the Local Level Dickson Diamond and Moon Kim 13. Integrating Local, State, and Federal Responses to Infectious Threat Jonathan E. Fielding, Elan Shultz, Noel Bazini-Barakat, Deborah Davenport, Jon Freedman, Robert Mosby and Robert Ragland 14. Vulnerable Populations in Disaster Planning: Children are Different Jeffrey S. Upperman 15.

Developing a New Paradigm for Biodefense in the 21st Century: Adapting our Healthcare Response to the Biodisaster Threat Joseph Rosen and C. Everett Koop 16. Biosecurity Neil Jacobstein 17. Towards a Global Ius Pestilentiae : The Functions of Law in Global Biosecurity David P. Fidler Conclusion: An Integrated, Networked Approach to Infectious Disease Preparedness Peter Katona, John P. Sullivan and Michael D. Intriligator Epilogue: Reflections on the Future of Bioweapons Alvin Toffler

Justifying America's Wars Contemporary Security Studies

Nicholas Kerton-Johnson, Bristol University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56168-6; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the justifications for, and practice of, war by the US since 1990, and examines four case studies: the Gulf War, Kosovo, Afghanistan and Iraq. The author undertakes an examination of presidential speeches and public documents from this period to determine the focal points on which the respective presidents based their rhetoric for war. The work then examines the practice of war in the light of these justifications to determine whether changes in justifications correlate with changes in practice. In particular, the justificatory discourse finds four key themes that emerge in the presidential discourses, which are tracked across the case studies and point to the fundamental driving force in US motivations for going to war. The four key themes which emerge from the data are: international law or norms; human rights; national interest; and egoist morality (similar too, but wider than, 'exceptionalism'). This analysis shows that 9/11 resulted in a radical shift away from an international law and human rights-focused justificatory discourse, to one which was overwhelmingly dominated by egoist-morality justifications and national interest. This book will be of much interest to students of US foreign policy, humanitarian intervention, Security Studies, and IR theory.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Setting the context: Intervention and Norms in International Society 3. The Gulf War 4. The Kosovo Intervention 5.

The Intervention in Afghanistan 6. The Iraq War 7. Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

310

Multipolarity in the 21st Century Contemporary Security Studies

Edited by Donette Murray and David Brown, both of Royal Military Academy, Sandhurst, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47547-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book seeks to help shape the debate surrounding power and polarity in the twenty-first century both by assessing the likelihood of US decline and by analysing what each of the so-called 'rising powers' can do (in terms of 'hard' and 'soft' power), what they want to do (i.e. foreign and security policy), and the weaknesses and obstacles that may hinder their continued development. In doing so, it will examine the implications of a multipolar world for international security. American supremacy has generated intense debate surrounding both the nature and quality of this power, as well as the execution and thrust of US foreign policy. At the same time, significant developments in four rising powers - China, Russia, India and the European Union – have provoked analysts to ask whether multipolarity is a realistic prospect. Such a development may result from a rebalancing occasioned by US decline or because the US, still hugely powerful, is joined by two or more of these states (or - in the case of the EU – a collection of states). To be considered a ‘pole’, the potential competitors to the US will have to either amass sufficient power in all of Waltz’s categories of power (including population size, territory, resources, economic wealth, military strength and ‘competence’) or manage to reshape the power paradigm to reflect a new kind of superpower. Written by a combination of emerging scholars and recognised experts, this volume will provide a timely and authoritative analysis of one of the most controversial and compelling security debates of the twenty-first century. The book will appeal to students of International Relations, Security Studies and Foreign Policy.

CONTENTS Introduction Donette Murray 1. The American Eagle Rob Singh 2. The Chinese Dragon Donette Murray 3. The Russian Bear Dmitri Polikanov 4. The Indian Tiger Sumit Ganguly and Manjeet S Pardesi 5. The EU: A different kind of beast? John McCormick Conclusion - A New World Order –an emerging multipolar framework? David Brown

Private Security Contractors and New Wars Contemporary Security Studies

Kateri Carmola, Middlebury College, Vermont, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-77171-9; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book addresses the ambiguities of the growing use of private security contractors and provides guidance as to how our expectations about regulating this expanding ‘service’ industry will have to be adjusted. In the warzones of Iraq and Afghanistan many of those who carry weapons are not legally combatants, nor are they protected civilians. They are contracted by governments, businesses, and NGOs to provide armed security. Often mistaken as members of armed forces, they are instead part of a new protean proxy force that works alongside the military in a multitude of shifting roles, and overseen by a matrix of contracts and regulations.

This book analyzes the growing industry of these private military and security companies (PMSCs) used in warzones and other high risk areas. PMSCs are the result of a unique combination of circumstances, including a change in the idea of soldiering, insurance industry analyses that require security contractors, and a need for governments to distance themselves from potentially criminal conduct. The book argues that PMSCs are a unique type of organization, combining attributes from worlds of the military, business, and humanitarian organizations. This makes them particularly resistant to oversight. The legal status of these companies and those they employ is also hard to ascertain, which weakens the multiple regulatory tools available. PMSCs also fall between the cracks in ethical debates about their use, seeming to be both justifiable and objectionable. This transformation in military operations is a seemingly irreversible product of more general changes in the relationship between the individual citizen and the state. This book will be of much interest to students of private security companies, war and conflict studies, security studies and IR in general. Kateri Carmola is the Christian A. Johnson Professor of Political Science at Middlebury College in Vermont. She received her Ph.D. from the University of California, Berkeley.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Complex Identity of the PMSC 2. The Multifaceted Origins of the PMSC Industry 3. Contracting and Danger in the Risk Society 4. PMSCs and the Clash of Legal Cultures 5. Frontier Ethics Epilogue: Recommendations

Rethinking Security Governance Contemporary Security Studies

Edited by Christopher Daase and Cornelius Friesendorf, both of Goethe University, Frankfurt, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

311 HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48535-7; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores the unintended consequences of security governance actions and explores how their effects can be limited.

Security governance describes new modes of security policy that differ from traditional approaches to national and international security. While traditional security policy used to be the exclusive domain of states and aimed at military defense, security governance is performed by multiple actors and is intended to create a global environment of security for states, social groups, and individuals. By pooling the strength and expertise of states, international organizations, and private actors, security governance is seen to provide more effective and efficient means to cope with today’s security risks. Generally, security governance is assumed to be a good thing, and the most appropriate way of coping with contemporary security problems. This assumption has led scholars to neglect an important phenomenon: unintended consequences. While unintended consequences do not need to be negative, often they are. The CIA term "blowback," for example, refers to the phenomenon that a long nurtured group may turn against its sponsor. The rise of al Qaeda, which had benefited from US Cold War policies, is only one example. Raising awareness about unwanted and even paradoxical policy outcomes and suggesting ways of avoiding damage or limiting their scale, this book will be of much interest to students of security governance, risk management, international security and IR. Christopher Daase is Professor at the Goethe University Frankfurt and head of the research department International Organizations and International Law at the Peace Research Institute Frankfurt (PRIF/HSFK). Cornelius Friesendorf is lecturer at the Goethe University Frankfurt and research fellow at the Peace Research Institute Frankfurt (PRIF/HSFK).

CONTENTS Introduction: Security Governance and the Problem of Unintended Consequences Christopher Daase and Cornelius Friesendorf 1.

Strengthening Autocracy: The World Bank and Social Reform in Egypt Florian Kohstall 2. Security Governance, Complex Peace Support Operations and the Blurring of Civil-Military Tasks Susan E. Penksa 3. Unintended Consequences of International Statebuilding Ulrich Schneckener 4. Unintended Consequences of International Security Assistance: Doing More Harm than Good?

Ursula C. Schroeder 5. Unintended Criminalizing Consequences of Sanctions: Lessons from the Balkans Peter Andreas 6. Unintended Consequences of Measures to Counter the Financing of Terrorism Thomas J. Biersteker 7. Neither Seen Nor Heard: The Unintended Consequences of Counter-Trafficking and Counter-Smuggling Benjamin S. Buckland 8. Unintended Consequences of Targeted Sanctions Mikael Eriksson 9. The Privatization of Force and its Consequences: Unintended but not Unpredictable Jörg Friedrichs Conclusion: Analyzing and Avoiding Unintended Consequences of Security Governance Cornelius Friesendorf and Christopher Daase

Russia's Foreign Security Policy in the 21st Century Contemporary Security Studies

Marcel de Haas, Netherlands Institute of International Relations PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47730-7; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines Russia’s security policy under the presidencies of Vladimir Putin, Dmitry Medvedev and beyond. Under Putin and Medvedev, Russia has developed from a neglected regional power into a self-declared resurgent superpower. Russia’s background in the former Soviet Union as well as close ties with the upcoming new powers of China and India served as spring-boards towards regaining an influential status in the world. Simultaneously, Moscow developed an assertive policy towards the West and unwilling neighbours, culminating in August 2008 in an armed conflict with Georgia. Reviewing this decade of Russian international security policy, this book analyses major security documents, military reforms and Moscow’s policy actions to provide an assessment of the future of Russian security policy. This book will be of much interest to students of Russian politics and foreign policy, European politics and Security Studies and IR in general. Marcel de Haas is Senior Fellow on military doctrine, strategy and security policy of the Netherlands, NATO, EU, Russia and the CIS at the Netherlands Institute of International Relations.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Structure of Putin’s Foreign Security Policy (2000-2008) 2. Implementation of Putin’s Foreign Security Policy 3.

Structure of Medvedev’s Foreign Security Policy (2008-2009) 4. Implementation of Medvedev’s Foreign Security Policy 5. The Russian-Georgian Armed Conflict of August 2008 6. Assessment of Russia’s Foreign Security Policy (2000-2009) and Outlook beyond Medvedev. Bibliography

Russian Imperialism Revisited Contemporary Security Studies

Domitilla Sagramoso, Kings College London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56227-0; October 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

312 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION By examining Russia’s military, economic, political, and diplomatic policies towards the former Soviet states since 1991, this book assesses whether Russian leaders have been able to discard the country’s imperial legacy.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: The Setting: Russia’s Policies Towards the Near Abroad under President Yeltsin 1. The Underlying Principles of Russia’s Policy Towards the "Near Abroad" 2. Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States 3. Russia’s Role in the Military Conflicts in the Near Abroad 4. Russia’s Energy Trade with the former Soviet Space 5. Russian Minorities in the Baltic States, Ukraine and Kazakhstan Part 2: The Evolution of Russia’s Policies Towards the "Near Abroad" under President Putin 6. Russia’s Policies Towards the Near Abroad from 1999 to 2004 7. Russia’s Policies to the Former Soviet States from 2004 to the Present.

Conclusion

Understanding NATO in the 21st Century Contemporary Security Studies

Edited by Graeme P. Herd, Geneva Centre for Security Policy, Switzerland and John Kriendler, George C. Marshall European Center for Security Studies, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43633-5; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume provides an overview of the evolution of NATO, alliances and global security governance in the twenty-first century. For so-long the cornerstone of the transatlantic partnership, the evolution of NATO has profound implications for the co-operative or competitive nature of transatlantic relations and regional and global security governance. As NATO moves into the twenty-first century its role, purpose, utility and very existence as the core transatlantic security alliance is increasingly questioned. For many observers with a more profound understanding of the evolution of NATO, such self-doubt has been a constant feature of NATO throughout its existence. But contemporary debates that question the utility of NATO and its collective security role do appear more strident, extreme and are expressed in a more determined fashion than arguments between allies on how best to secure the Cold War collective defence role. The Iraq War widened the spectrum of opinion as to NATO’s future to an unprecedented degree. An interesting feature of this intense debate is that only the extremes tend to prick public consciousness – NATO as train-wreck or NATO in robust and rude health. Understanding NATO in the 21st Century will appeal to students of NATO, international security and international relations in general.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: NATO 20/20 2. NATO Transformation 3. Crisis Response Operations 4. NATO’s Role in Combating International Terrorists 5. NATO Enlargement 6. NATO Partnerships 7. NATO and Mutually Supporting Institutions 8. NATO HQ Reform 9.

NATO’s Future: 2020 Alternative Scenarios

Unipolarity and World Politics Contemporary Security Studies

Birthe Hansen, University of Copenhagen, Denmark PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47820-5; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This new book offers a coherent model of a unipolar world order.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. World Order Analysis 3. The System 4. Unipolar World Order and US Strategies 5. Unipolarity and Other States 6.

Gains, Capabilities and Dilemmas 7. Conflict and Cooperation 8. Dangers, Challenges, and Possibilities 9. Perspectives on Unipolarity

US Collective Memory, Intervention and Vietnam Contemporary Security Studies

David Ryan, University College Cork, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-40564-5; December 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

313 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Vietnam War has generated significant diplomatic and cultural influences on US foreign policy. This book explores the construction and interaction of US collective memory with the politics of US intervention since the late 1960s. On the one hand, the United States drew lessons that after Vietnam it had to demonstrate its resolve and credibility through the continued use of force, yet there were considerable domestic constraints to doing so generated from collective memories. On the other hand, military power was one of the areas in which the US still remained supreme and this was especially important at a time when economic competition was felt more acutely. It depended on continued engagement and intervention, just at a time when its collective memory and external opposition was growing. The author looks at the formation, sites and reception of US collective memory, situated within the debate on the politics of identity. The significance of this concerns the power of the US to intervene and at times to go to war (beyond the strict constitutional remit). But it is also about the evolution of strategies adapted by the United States to deal with the collective memory of defeat in Vietnam. US Collective Memory, Intervention and Vietnam will be of great interest to students of US foreign policy, US politics and strategic studies and international relations in general.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Collective Memory, Vietnam and US Post-War Strategy 1. On Collective Memory & Vietnam 2.

Counterpoint: War and Historiography 3. Vietnam: Strategic Implications Part 2: US Intervention Since Vietnam 4. 'We Will Not be the Paper Tigers of Saigon': Ford and the Immediate Aftermath 5. 'We Are Now Free of that Inordinate Fear': Carter and NonIntervention 6. The United States of Amnesia and the Reagan Doctrine 7. We've Kicked the Vietnam Syndrome? Bush and the Gulf War 8. Clinton's Criteria: The Crisis of Intervention and Cultural Adjustments 9. 9/11: The War on Terrorism and the End of the Vietnam Syndrome? 10. Iraq. Conclusions

US Hegemony and International Legitimacy Contemporary Security Studies

Lavina Rajendram Lee, Macquarie University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55236-3; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines US hegemony and international legitimacy in the post-Cold War era, focusing on its leadership in the two wars on Iraq. The preference for unilateral action in foreign policy under the Bush Administration, culminating in the use of force against Iraq in 2003, has unquestionably created a crisis in the legitimacy of US global leadership. Of central concern is the ability of the United States to act without regard for the values and interests of its allies or for international law on the use of force, raising the question: does international legitimacy truly matter in an international system dominated by a lone superpower? US Hegemony and International Legitimacy explores the relationship between international legitimacy and hegemonic power through an in depth examination of two case studies – the Gulf Crisis of 1990-91 and the Iraq Crisis of 2002-03 – and examines the extent to which normative beliefs about legitimate behaviour influenced the decisions of states to follow or reject US leadership. The findings of the book demonstrate that subordinate states play a crucial role in consenting to US leadership and endorsing it as legitimate and have a significant impact on the ability of a hegemonic state to maintain order with least cost. Understanding of the importance of legitimacy will be vital to any attempt to rehabilitate the global leadership credentials of the United States under the Obama Administration. This book will be of much interest to students of US foreign policy, IR theory and security studies. Lavina Rajendram Lee is a lecturer in the Department of Modern History, Politics and International Relations at Macquarie University, Australia, and has a PhD in International Relations from the University of Sydney.

CONTENTS Acknowledgments 1. Introduction and Theoretical Framework 2. Legitimacy and Followership in the Gulf Crisis 3. Material Interests and Followership in the Gulf Crisis 4. Legitimacy and Followership in the Iraq Crisis 5. Material Interests and Followership in the Iraq Crisis 6. Comparative Analysis and Theoretical Implications 7. Conclusion

War, Ethics and Justice Contemporary Security Studies

Edited by Mark Phythian and Annika Bergman-Rosamond, both of University of Leicester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55234-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited volume addresses the key issues of ethics, war and international relations in the post-9/11 world.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

314 Introduction: War, Ethics and Justice in a Post-9/11 World Annika Bergman-Rosamond and Mark Phythian 1. Tactics of Mistake: Torture, History and the Ethics of Liberal Wars After 9/11 Caroline Kennedy-Pipe 2. Ethics and the British Military: The Dilemmas and Demands of the ‘War on Terror’ Wyn Rees 3. An Australian Approach to Ethical Warfare? Australia and the ‘War on Terror’ Thomas Moore 4. The Internationalisation of Swedish Military Policy: Political Economy and Ethical Legitimisation Annika Bergman-Rosamond 5. Symbolics of Power and the Return of the Sacrificial Soldier to Canadian Soil Tina Managhan 6. Warrior Diplomats: Locating Gender and Power in the ‘War on Terror’ Annika Bergman-Rosamond and Thomas Moore 7. Do Forces for Good contain Real Men? Military Masculinities in the British Army on Operations Other Than War Claire Duncanson 8. Ethics, Gender and Intelligence in the ‘War on Terror’ Cynthia Enloe 9. Intelligence Ethics – An Oxymoron? Mark Phythian 10. Intelligence Ethics in the War against Terrorism: The Case of Israel Shlomo Shapiro 11. ‘Burning a Path to Peace’? War, Ethics and Justice in the Israel-Palestine Conflict Adrian Hyde-Price 12. The ‘War on Terror’: Intelligence, Ethics, and Justice in Pakistan and Afghanistan Rob Johnson. Conclusion: Towards a Global Ethics in an Age of Terror? Prospects and Challenges Mark Phythian

The EU and Counter-Terrorism Contemporary Terrorism Studies

Javier Argomaniz, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56525-7; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is a theoretically informed analysis of how coherently the European Union fights terrorism in the post-9/11 era. Few studies have looked at how the European Union has transformed into a relevant international anti-terrorist actor. Yet, as a reaction to the terrorist attacks in New York, Madrid and London, the European Union has become increasingly active in the field of counterterrorism. It has acted to coordinate member states’ policies, to harmonise national legislation, and even to support operational work conducted by national authorities. The EU’s reaction to the threat of transnational terrorism has been complex and multidimensional, ranging from the exchange of information between police and intelligence agencies to judicial cooperation, and from infrastructure protection to the fight against terrorist recruitment and financing. This book offers a comprehensive empirical account of the polity, policy and politics of EU counter-terrorism, based on an analysis of academic literature, official documents, and about fifty interviews with policy-makers, experts and practitioners carried out at EU institutions (i.e. Commission, Council, Eurojust, Europol), Permanent Representations of the EU Member States and national capitals.This book will be of much interest to students of counter-terrorism, EU politics and security studies.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Part 1: Politics 2. Post-9/11 Institutionalisation of European Union Counter-Terrorism Part 2: Polity 3. The Institutional Framework of EU Counter-terrorism 4. Institutional Consistency Part 3: Policies 5. The EU Counter-Terror Policy Response 6. Horizontal Consistency 7. Vertical Consistency 8. Conclusion: Institutionalisation, Consistency Weaknesses and Implications. Bibliography

International Terrorism Post-9/11 Contemporary Terrorism Studies

Edited by Asaf Siniver, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55230-1; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited volume brings together both western and non-western approaches to counter-terrorism in the post-9/11 era. This multicultural study of counter-terrorism strategies identifies common lessons from failed and successful attempts to counter the terrorist threat and provides guidelines for an effective counter-terrorism strategy. The book explores the changing dynamics of terrorism from a range of perspectives – from the global threat posed by home-grown terrorism in North Africa and the larger security dimensions in the Middle East, to the various strategies employed by western and non-western societies in their efforts to develop effective counterterrorism strategies. Core themes in the book include the divergent dynamics of the phenomena categorised under the 'terrorism' label, and the domestic, national and regional variants of international terrorism. As such, the book offers in-depth analysis of the relationship between the local and the global, both in the root causes of, and responses to, terrorism since 9/11. This book will be of much interest to students of terrorism and political violence, security studies and IR. Asaf Siniver is Lecturer in International Security in the Department of Political Science and International Studies at the University of Birmingham.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction Asaf Siniver 2. Security and ‘terror’ in the Middle East and North Africa: Drivers and limitations of Protest and ‘terrorism’ Gerd Nonneman 3. Radicalism, Extremism and Government in North Africa George Joffé 4. Strategic Confusion: America’s Conflicting Strategies and the War on Terrorism David Hastings Dunn and Oz Hassan 5. American Counter-terrorism through the Rewards for Justice Program, 1984-2008 Steve Hewitt 6. British Armed Forces and European Union Perspectives on

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

315 Countering Terrorism Major General Graham Messervy-Whiting 7. The Development of the UK Intelligence Community after 9/11 Sir Francis Richards 8. Israel and the Al-Aqsa Intifada: The Conceptzia of Terror Clive Jones 9. Russia and Counter Terrorism: A Critical Appraisal Cerwyn Moore and David Barnard-Wills 10. Fixing the Elusive: India and the Foreignness of Terror Ted Svensson 11. Australian Identity, Interventionism and the ‘War on Terror’ Jack Holland and Matt McDonald 12. Counter-Terrorism in Southeast Asia Post 9/11 Andrew T H Tan

Talking to Terrorists Contemporary Terrorism Studies

Carolin Goerzig PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57997-1; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the doctrine of giving no concessions to terrorists, and uses empirical research to establish whether there is any link between negotiating with such groups and the spread of violence. The logic of the no-concessions doctrine is based on the argument that other terrorist groups multiply when they realize that terrorism succeeds in achieving political goals. Proponents of the no-concessions doctrine have argued that there is a pattern in terrorist contagion which results from giving in to their demands.

Statistical evidence for terrorist contagion is not convincing enough, however, as depicting an increase in terrorist incidences as a consequence of concessions could merely imply a flawed causality. Without an explanation for such correlations we are left wondering whether other reasons could be decisive in the increase in terrorist actions. Based on field research in four countries and interviews with current and former members of several different terrorist groups, this book establishes a qualitative relationship between concessions to terrorists on the one hand and (non-)contagion of other terrorist groups on the other. The deterrence effect, intended by the imperative never to concede, is seriously challenged. In fact, it can be precisely through concessions that groups mentalities and actions are called into question. The book will be of great interest to students of terrorism and political violence, war and conflict studies, security studies and IR/politics. Carolin Goerzig is a Post-Doctoral Fellow at the EU Institute for Security Studies in Paris and has a PhD in Political Science from Ludwig-Maximilians-University of Munich.

CONTENTS 1. Questioning the No-Concessions-Doctrine 2. Arguing for a Differentiated Picture 3. The Jama’ah Islamiya’s Change of Means and the Reaction of the Egyptian 4. The PLO’s Change of Ends and the Reaction of Hamas 5. The AUC’s Change of Ends and the Reaction of the ELN 6. The PKK’s Change of Ends and the Reaction of the Turkish Hezbollah 7. Implications for Policy 8.

Conclusion

European–American Relations and the Middle East CSS Studies in Security and International Relations

Edited by Victor Mauer and Daniel Möckli, both of Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH), Zürich, Switzerland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47664-5; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the evolution of European-American relations with the Middle East since 1945. Placing the current transatlantic debates on the Middle East into a broader context, this work analyses how, why, and to what extent European and US roles, interests, threat perceptions, and policy attitudes in the region have changed, relating to both the region as a whole and the two main issues analysed: Gulf Security and the Arab-Israeli Conflict. The contributors then go on to discuss the implications of these developments for Western policymaking. The volume makes four key contributions. First, it examines the subject matter from a truly transatlantic perspective, with all chapters adopting a bi- or multilateral approach, taking into account the views from both the US and individual European countries or the EC/EU collectively. Second, the book takes a long-term view, covering a series of crises and developments over the past six decades. Third, it has a systematic structure, with the predominantly chronological order of the chapters being geared towards depicting trends and evolutions with regard to the key themes of the book. Finally, the book builds bridges between historians and political scientists/analysts, as well as between experts of transatlantic relations and Middle East scholars. This book will be of great interest to students of transatlantic relations, the Middle East, US foreign policy, European politics, international history and IR in general. Daniel Möckli is a Senior Researcher at the Center for Security Studies (CSS), ETH Zurich. He is also the editor of CSS Analyses in Security Policy. Victor Mauer is Deputy Director and Head of Research of the Center for Security Studies (CSS), ETH Zurich, and Lecturer in the Department of Social Sciences and Humanities at ETH Zurich.

CONTENTS Introduction Daniel M öckli and Victor Mauer Part 1: Changing Roles and Interests: From Suez to Iraq 1. Suez 1956: European Colonial Interests and US Cold War Prerogatives Tore T. Petersen 2. Iraq 2003: Regime Change and Its European Discontents Victor Mauer Part 2: The Arab-Israeli Conflict and the West 3. Anglo-American Relations and the Palestine Question, 1945-56 John Sakkas

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

316 4. At Odds in the Middle East: Paris, Washington, and the Six-Day War, 1967 Garret Martin 5. The EC-Nine and Transatlantic Conflict During the October War and the Oil Crisis, 1973/74 Daniel Möckli 6. The Euro-Arab Dialogue, the Venice Declaration, and Beyond: The Limits of a Distinct EC Policy, 1974-89 David Allen and Andrin Hauri 7. From Madrid to Camp David: Europe, the US, and the Middle East Peace Process in the 1990s Patrick Müller and Claire Spencer 8. The Middle East Quartet: A New Role for Europe? Constanza Musu Part 3: Gulf Security and Transatlantic Relations 9. Dealing with Iran: The US, Britain, and Regime Change 1951-3 Malcolm Byrne 10. Securing Gulf Oil: Britain, NATO, and the Question of Military Intervention East of Suez, 1949-68 Stephen Blackwell 11. Subcontracting Security: The US, Britain, and Gulf Security Before the Carter Doctrine Roland Popp 12. Great Game Redux: The US, Europe, and Gulf Security in the Late Cold War Peter John Brobst 13. Europe, the US, and the Gulf After the Cold War Gerd Nonneman 14. Iran and the Bomb: Washington, the EU, and Iranian Nuclear Ambitions Harsh V. Pant Conclusion: Major Trends in European-American Relations and the Middle East since 1945 Daniel Möckli and Victor Mauer

Geopolitics for the 21st Century Geopolitical Theory

Edited by Leonard Hochberg and James D. Hardy Jr., both of Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43392-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This edited volume assesses the geopolitical configuration of forces in the international arena at the beginning of the twenty-first century. Since the end of the Cold War, the international arena has entered a period of transition. Although the United States emerged as the victor in the Cold War, there is considerable disagreement among foreign policy elites over what its role should be: a stealth empire, an overt hegemon, a policeman of the maritime-commercial commons or to withdraw from its international commitments and protect the homeland from new and dangerous threats. Six years ago, the United States appeared to be the uncontested superpower of the post-Cold War era, but terrorism, asymmetrical warfare, conflicts over strategic goods (such as oil and minerals), and the quest for a defence against missiles launched by rogue states, have produced considerable uncertainty. In response to structural (economic and military) changes and changes in the perception of American power, regional powers are vying for status in the international order.

Geopolitics for the 21st Century will be of interest to students of geopolitics, strategic studies and international relations.

CONTENTS Introduction Leonard Hochberg and James D. Hardy, Jr. 1. The Enduring Significance of Classical Geopolitical Thought Leonard Hochberg, James D. Hardy, Jr. and Geoff Sloan 2. Geopolitics and Strategic Cultures: A Comparison of the Arab, Chinese, and Western Ways of War Laurent Murawiec 3. The Geopolitics of Terror: How Home Grown Jihadists are Recruited in the West Steven Emerson 4. The Geopolitics of Strategic Goods Ewan Anderson 5. Classical Geopolitics in the Space Age: The Strategy of Transformation Everett Carl Dolman 6. Toward a Second Cold War Era? 2000-2025: A Geopolitical Net Assessment of Current Trajectories and Future Developments Ioannis Loucas. Conclusion

Inventing Geopolitics Geopolitical Theory

Venier Pascal, University of Salford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-36932-9; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION British Imperial geographer and politician Sir Halford Mackinder is generally considered to be one of the founding fathers of geopolitics. The aim of this book is to provide a long overdue reconsideration of his contribution to the history of strategy. In doing so, it will provide a critical review of his geopolitical writings; an exploration of other key aspects of Mackinder’s strategic thought and his ideas on grand strategy; as well as an analysis of the context of his strategic work, and its implications, both as part of a broader policy agenda and in terms of the actual impact on British policy-making.

Insuring Security Interventions

Luis Lobo-Guerrero, University of Keele, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58343-5; August 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

317 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book offers a genealogical interrogation of the relationship between security and risk through its materialisation in insurance.

Empirically, the importance of insurance cannot be overstated. Insurance expenditure in 2005 was nearly three times the world’s total defence budget. However, nearly 90% of the world’s insurance premiums are currently sold in OECD countries characterising insurance as a distinctive liberal security technology. Regardless of its importance, the analysis of insurance has so far remained at a highly descriptive level and its theorisation has escaped the interest of political, security, and international relations theorists. This book aims to redress this gap. Moreover, whereas insurance provides a particular form of security central to the development of capitalist economies and liberal governance, little is known about how it relates to ethics, and power. In particular, apart from seminal analyses on the operation and function of insurance, not much is known about how it directly relates to i) changing conceptions of life, ii) evolving ways of being in the world, and iii) the orders of governance through which these are promoted and protected. This book contributes a theorisation of insurance in relation to these three ‘defining aspects of insurance’. In so doing it advances a novel contribution to the understanding of how a risk-based approach to security informs the problem of security and modernity, and in particular, it makes a novel contribution to the study of the biopolitics of security.

War, Identity and the Liberal State Interventions

Victoria Basham, University of Bristol, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58341-1; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines how the geopolitics of identity, war and liberalism are experienced and negotiated in the everyday lives of members of the armed forces, and how these experiences in turn, reinforce and sustain dominant and intersecting discourses of conflict, governance, gender, ethnicity and sexuality. The book draws on original and unique research with military personnel to take an intimate look at how soldiers negotiate, challenge, reinforce and resist the liberal state and its war machinery in their daily lives.

CONTENTS The Geopolitics of the Everyday in the Military 2. Towards a ‘History of the Present’ 3. Intimacies of War and Gender 4. Forbidden Intimacies: Heteronormativity and Military ‘Values’ 5. Imperial Encounters and the Structural Privileging of Whiteness 6. The March of Progress?

America, the UN and Decolonisation LSE International Studies Series

John Kent, London School of Economics, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46414-7; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the role of the UN in conflict resolution in Africa in the 1960s and its relation to the Cold War. Focussing on the Congo, this book shows how the preservation of the existing economic and social order in the Congo was a key element in the decolonisation process and the fighting of the Cold War. It links the international aspects of British, Belgian, Angolan and Central African Federation involvement with the roles of the US and UN in order to understand how supplies to and profits from the Congo were producing growing African problems. This large Central African country played a vital, if not fully understood role, in the Cold War and proved to be a fascinating example of complex African problems of decolonisation interacting with international forces, in ways that revealed a great deal about the problems inherent in colonialism and its end. This book will be of much interest to students of US foreign policy, the UN, Cold War history and international history in general.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Independence Disaster 1958 - Sept 1960 2. The Dismissal and Murder of Lumumba and the Establishment of the Adoula Government September 1960 - August 1961 3. The Adoula Government and Kitona: the Conflict and Dilemmas Created by US and UN Policy August - December 1961 4. Too Little Too Late January - July 1962 5. The Last Adoula Government of a Divided Congo July – December 1962 6. The End of Secession and the Beginning of the End for the Congo December 1962 - January 1963 7.

Unified Nation Building and No Unity to Build On January- Oct 1963 8. The Emerging Chaos and the Forces of Disintegration Bring Tshombe’s Return October 1963 -July 1964 Conclusion

Hamas and Suicide Terrorism LSE International Studies Series

Rashmi Singh

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

318 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49804-3; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyses the root causes of suicide terrorism at both the elite and rank-and- file levels of the Hamas. Using extensive fieldwork and on-the-ground interviews, the volume seeks to delve beneath the surface and understand why and how suicide operations were adopted as a sustained mechanism of engagement within the Israeli-Palestinian landscape of conflict. Challenging widespread arguments that tend to either emphasise the role of religion, particularly Islam, in propelling suicide terrorism or to trace its roots to the power struggles between Palestinian political players, this work locates the emergence and spread of this phenomenon in a complex network of interrelated factors. This multifaceted approach, combined with extensive research conducted in Israel and the Palestinian territories, enables the author to identify three core factors that fuel suicide bombing campaigns in the region. First, Palestinian suicide operations as a complex combination of instrumental and expressive violence which are adopted by rational organisations and individuals to assert power, achieve political and/or societal survival, and enable retaliation as well as competition.

In other words, suicide bombings not only serve distinct political and strategic goals for both Hamas and its operatives but they also serve to convey a symbolic message to various audiences, within Israel, the Palestinian territories and around the world. Second, how suicide operations not only perform a crucial role in the formation and consolidation of Palestinian national identity but also how they are the latest manifestation of the historically entrenched norm of militant heroic martyrdom. Finally, it illustrates how political Islam is systematically employed by organisations like Hamas in order to facilitate the articulation, justification and legitimisation of suicide operations as a modern-day jihad against Israel through the means of modern interpretations and fatwas. In short, the main themes of this work counter approaches that juxtapose social and/or political motivations against religious ones in favour of studying suicide terrorism in the Palestinian territories from a combined socio-political cultural perspective which acknowledges the roles played by not only the organisation and the individual ‘martyr’ but also that of Palestinian society. This approach not only facilitates a much needed, multifaceted, holistic understanding of suicide bombings in this particular region but also yields policy-relevant lessons to address extreme political violence in other parts of the world. By adopting such a multi-level and multi-causal approach, this work fills a fundamental gap in contemporary terrorism literature. This book will be of much interest to students of Hamas, terrorism, Middle East politics and security studies.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. A Brief Political History of the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict 3. Suicide Operations as the Convergence of Expressive and Instrumental Violence with Multiple Rationalities 4. Identity, Power and the Palestinian Norm of Militant Heroic Martyrdom 5.

Jihad, Political Islam and the Duality of Suicide Bombings 6. Conclusion. Bibliography

Radicalisation and the Media Media, War and Security

Edited by Andrew Hoskins, University of Warwick, UK, Awan Akil and Ben O'Loughlin, both of Royal Holloway, University of London, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55035-2; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The book examines the 'new' environment of conflict in the post-9/11 age, in which there appear to be emerging threats to security and stability in the shape of individuals and groups holding or espousing 'radical' views about religion, ideology, often represented in the media as oppositional to 'Western values'. This book asks what, if anything, is 'new' about these 'radicalising' discourses, how and why do these relate to 'political' acts of violence and terror, and what is the role of the mass media in promoting or hindering them? The book looks into the nature of radicalising discourses in Web 2.0 spaces and how these communications as well as acts of political violence broadcast on the web are supported and 'legitimised'. This includes exploring how the acts themselves and explanations for them on the web are 'picked up' and represented in mainstream television news media or Big Media, through the journalistic and editorial uses of words, phrases, graphics, images, and videos. It analyses how interpretations of the term 'radicalisation' are shaped by news representations through investigating audience responses, understandings and misunderstandings. Transnational in scope, this book seeks to contribute to an understanding of the connectivities and relationships that make up the new media ecology, especially those that appear to transcend the local and the global, accelerate the dissemination of radicalising discourses, and amplify media/public fears of political violence. This book will be of great interest to students of political violence/terrorism, security studies, media studies and politics.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: The Problem of Radicalisation 2. Jihadist Spaces of Legitimation 3. Antagonistic Media 4. Big Media: The Remediation of jihad 5. Audiences and Publics 6. Legitimising Jihadist Violence: The Yazidi Girl 7. Conclusion: The Utility of Deradicalisation? Bibliography

Helmuth Von Moltke

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

319 Military History and Policy

Arden Bucholz, SUNY College, Brockport, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-70200-3; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This detailed and comprehensive book offers the first modern biography of Helmuth Von Moltke, a major progenitor of the processes modern great powers use to engage in large-scale warfare. Drawing upon the author’s own previously published works, Moltke, Schlieffen and Prussian War Planning and Moltke and the German Wars, 1864-1871 , it also contains original research. The volume suggests that the General Staff was a pioneer of what became known in the twentieth century as ‘operations research’, establishing some of the framework for the modern economics of transportation. However, Moltke was much more than just a Prussian soldier and strategist. He was a best-selling author (travel writings, love letters), pioneer cartographer (Asia Minor, Rome, Silesia), dedicated lover and devoted husband, legislator, linguist, family leader, music lover, and spa devotee. Helmuth Von Moltke will appeal to students of military history and strategy, as well as historians of nineteenth century Germany.

CONTENTS 1. Family 2. Youth and Education, 1890-1819 3. Profession, 1819-1835 3.1 Danish Army 3.2 Prussian Army 4. Ottoman Empire, 1835-1839 5. Marriage, Corps Chief of Staff and Royal Duties, 1840-1856 6. Chief of the General Staff, 1857-88 6.1 Six Years of Peace, 1857-1863 6.2 Three Wars in Seven Years, 1864-1871 6.3 Seventeen Years of Peace, 1871-1888 7. Moltke in Retirement, 1888-1891 7.1 Kreisau and Berlin 7.2 Legislator in Reichstag and Herrenhaus 8. Death and Transfiguration 9. Legacy: Imperial Germany to the Great War 10. Bibliographical Essay

Critical Perspectives on Human Security PRIO New Security Studies

Edited by David Chandler, University of Westminster, UK and Nik Hynek, Institute of International Relations, Prague, Czech Republic PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56734-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This new book presents critical approaches towards Human Security, which has become one of the key areas for policy and academic debate within Security Studies and IR. The Human Security paradigm has had considerable significance for academics, policy-makers and practitioners. Under the rubric of Human Security, security policy practices seem to have transformed their goals and approaches, re-prioritising economic and social welfare issues that were marginal to the state-based geo-political rivalries of the Cold War era.

Human Security has reflected and reinforced the reconceptualisation of international security, both broadening and deepening it, and, in so doing, it has helped extend and shape the space within which security concerns inform international policy practices. However, in its wider use, Human Security has become an amorphous and unclear political concept, seen by some as progressive and radical and by others as tainted by association with the imposition of neo-liberal practices and values on non-Western spaces or as legitimizing attacks on Iraq and Afghanistan. This book is concerned with critical perspectives towards Human Security, highlighting some of the tensions which can emerge between critical perspectives which discursively radicalise Human Security within frameworks of emancipatory possibility and those which attempt to deconstruct Human Security within the framework of an externally imposed attempt to regulate and order the globe on behalf of hegemonic power. The chapters gathered in this edited collection represent a range of critical approaches which bring together alternative understandings of human security. This book will be of great interest to students of human security studies and critical security studies, war and conflict studies and international relations.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction David Chandler and Nik Hynek Part 1: Human Security and Emancipation 2. ‘We the Peoples’: Contending Discourses of Security in Human Rights Theory and Practice Tim Dunne and Nicholas J. Wheeler 3. Development of the Human Security Field: A Critical Examination David Bosold 4. Has Human Security Had Its Day? Neil Cooper, Mandy Turner and Michael Pugh 5. Human Security, Biopoverty and the Possibility for Emancipation David Roberts 6. Emancipatory Forms of Human Security and Liberal Peacebuilding Oliver P. Richmond 7. Towards a Critical Security Paradigm? Reconceptualizing the ‘Vital Core’ of Human Security Giorgio Shani 8. The Siren Song of Human Security Ryerson Christie 9. The Limits to Emancipation in the Human Security Framework Tara McCormack Part 2: Human Security and Regimes of Power 10. Human Security and the Securing of Human Life: Tracing Global Sovereign and Biopolitical Rule Marc G. Doucet and Miguel de Larrinaga 11. Rethinking Human Security: Economy, Governmentality and Hybridization of Individuals 12. Human Security: Sovereignty, Citizenship, Disorder Kyle Grayson 13. (Bio)Human Security Julian Reid 14. Inhuman Security Mark Neocleous 15. Living not Human: The Biopolitics of Security Mick Dillon 16. Human Security and the Globalization of the Political David Chandler. Conclusion

Security and Global Governmentality PRIO New Security Studies

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

320 Edited by Miguel de Larrinaga, University of Ottawa, Canada and Marc G. Doucet, Saint Mary's University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56058-0; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines global governance through Foucaultian notions of governmentality and security, as well as the complex intersections between the two. The volume explores how Foucault's understanding of the general economy of power in modern society allows us to consider the connection of two broad possible dynamics: the global governmentalization of security and the securitization of global governance. If Foucault's work on governmentality and security has found resonance in IR scholarship in recent years it is in large part due to his understanding of how these forms of power must necessarily take into account the management of circulation that, in seeking to maximize ‘good’ versus ‘bad’ circulatory flows, brings into play and problematizes the 'inside'/'outside' upon which domestic and international spaces have been traditionally understood. Indeed, Foucault introduces a set of conceptual tools that can inform our analyses of globalization, global governance and security in ways that have been left largely unexplored in the discipline of IR. Miguel de Larrinaga is Assistant Professor at the University of Ottawa where he has been teaching since 2002. Marc G. Doucet is an Associate Professor in the Department of Political Science at Saint Mary’s University.

CONTENTS Introduction: The Global Governmentalization of Security and the Securitization of Global Governance Miguel de Larrinaga and Marc G. Doucet Part 1: Historical Treatments and Critical Readings 1. European Diplomacy and the Origins of Governmentality Kevin McMillan 2. Governing Circulation: A Critique of the Biopolitics of Security Claudia Aradau and Tobias Blanke Part 2: Global Governmentality and Global War 3. Neoliberal Political Economy and the Iraq War: A Contribution to the Debate about Global Biopolitics Nicholas J. Kiersey 4. The New Frontiers of the National Security State: The US Global Governmentality of Contingency David Grondin 5. Governmentality, Sovereign Power, and Intervention: Security Council Resolutions and the Invasion of Iraq Miguel de Larrinaga and Marc G. Doucet Part 3: Securitizing Global Governance: Contemporary Cases 6. Circulation of Desire: The Security Governance of the International "Mail-Order Brides" Industry Anne-Marie D’Aoust 7. Governmentalizing the State: The Disciplining Logic of Human Security Nadine Voelkner 8. Thinking Locally, Acting Globally: The Governmentalization-Securitization Interplay in Recent Advanced-Liberal Peace Machinery Nik Hynek

Security, Risk and the Biometric State PRIO New Security Studies

J. Benjamin Muller, King's University College at University of Western Ontario, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 151pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48440-4; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines a series of questions associated with the increasing application and implications of biometrics in contemporary everyday life. In the wake of the events of 9/11, the reliance on increasingly sophisticated and invasive technologies across a burgeoning field of applications has accelerated, giving rise to the term 'biometric state'. This book explores how these ‘virtual borders’ are created and the effect they have upon the politics of citizenship and immigration, especially how they contribute to the treatment of citizens as suspects. Finally and most importantly, this text argues that the rationale of 'governing through risk' facilitates pre-emptory logics, a negligent attitude towards 'false positives', and an overall proliferation of borders and ubiquitous risk, which becomes integral to contemporary everyday life, far beyond the confined politics of national borders and frontiers. By focusing on specific sites, such as virtual borders in airports, trusted traveller programs like the NEXUS program and those delivered by airlines and supported by governmental authorities (TSA and CATSA respectively), this book raises critical questions about the emerging biometric state and its commitment and constitution vis-à-vis technology of ‘governing through risk’. This book will be of interest to students of biopolitics, critical security, surveillance studies and International Relations in general. Benjamin J. Muller is assistant professor in International Relations at Simon Fraser University, Burnaby, Canada. He completed his PhD in the School of Politics and International Studies at Queen’s University Belfast, Northern Ireland, in 2005.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Security, Risk, and the Biometric State: Governing Borders and Bodies 2. Are You Who You Say You Are? Biometrics and the Management of Borders and Bodies 3. Suspect(ing) Biometrics: Identity, Security and National ID Cards 4.

Catastrophe, Narrative, and the Failure of Imagination 5. Securing the Political Imagination: Popualr Culture, The Security Dispositif and the Biometric State 6. A North American Biometric State? 7. Securitizing the Global Norm of Identity: Biometrics and Homo Sacer in Fallujah. Conclusion

Terror and the Politics of Catastrophe PRIO New Security Studies

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

321 Edited by Claudia Aradau, Open University, UK and Rens Van Munster, University of Southern Denmark PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49809-8; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores the governmentality of terror as a complex discursive and institutional formation deployed at the horizon of a catastrophic future.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Governing Catastrophe 1. Catastrophic Futures 2. Taming the Future: Worst Case Scenarios 3. Domesticating Uncertainty: Terrorism Insurance 4. The Aestheticisation of Catastrophe Part 2: Rethinking Catastrophe 5. Catastrophe and Modernity: Lisbon 6. ‘Never again!’: Auschwitz and Hiroshima 7. New York: Politicising Catastrophe 8. Conclusion: Politics in/of the Present

The New Spatiality of Security Routledge Critical Security Studies

Caroline Croser PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56522-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides a theoretically rigorous explanation of how the US military operates in Iraq, and increases our understanding of the operation of 'informatic' violence by the networked military.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Spatial Operation of Violence 2. A Praxiography of the Battlespace Interlude: The (not-so-)Distant Roar of Battle 3. CPOF: Commanding the Future 4. Addressing Multiplicity in the Event-ful City 5. Being Present in Baghdad. Conclusion.

Bibliography

Reimagining War in the 21st Century Routledge Critical Security Studies

Manabrata Guha PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 272pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56166-2; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book interrogates the philosophical backdrop of Clausewitzian notions of war, and asks whether modern, network-centric militaries can still be said to serve the 'political'. In light of the emerging theories and doctrines of Network-Centric War (NCW), this book traces the philosophical backdrop against which the more common theorizations of war and its conduct take place. Tracing the historical and philosophical roots of modern war from the 17 th Century through to the present day, this book reveals that far from paralyzing the project of re-problematisating war, the emergence of NCW affords us an opportunity to rethink war in new and philosophically challenging ways. This book will be of much interest to students of critical security studies, social theory, war studies and political theory/IR. Manabrata Guha is Assistant Professor (ISSP) at the National Institute of Advanced Studies, Bangalore, India.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Prelude to Clausewitz 2. Clausewitz and the Architectonic of War 3. Machining (Network-centric) War 4. Theorizing War in the Age of Networks 5. Concept-War Conclusion

Discourses and Practices of Terrorism Routledge Critical Terrorism Studies

Edited by Bob Brecher, Mark Devenney, both of University of Brighton, UK and Aaron Winter, University of Abertay Dundee, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

322 HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 196pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48808-2; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This interdisciplinary book investigates the consequences of the language of terror for our lives in democratic societies. The approach of this book is in direct contrast with those that either view terrorism simplistically, as a clear reality threatening democratic society and thus requiring certain sorts of response, or argue, equally simplistically, that the invocation of terror is merely the ideological veil for continued capitalist exploitation. While closer in spirit to the second of these, this work does not simply dismiss the discourse on terror, but rather investigates the consequences of this discourse for the organisation of life in democratic societies. In interrogating the discourse of terror from a variety of viewpoints, this interdisciplinary text builds upon the understanding of the importance of the language of terror from a new perspective: the interconnections between discourses of terror; the material realities they at once reflect and help produce; and the specificities of particular historical circumstances. In offering an integrated approach of this sort, and founded on a base of applied philosophy, broadly conceived, the contributors offer a new contribution to both public and academic debate, and at the same time initiate a series of further interventions in Critical Terrorism Studies. This book will be of interest to students of critical terrorism studies, terrorism studies, security studies, philosophy and discourse theory. Bob Brecher is Director of the Centre for Applied Philosophy, Politics & Ethics at Brighton University. He has published widely in moral, political and applied philosophy and the politics of higher education. Mark Devenney is Academic Programme Leader in Humanities at the University of Brighton. He has published in the areas of critical theory, post-Marxism and post-Colonial politics. Aaron Winter is Lecturer in Sociology at the University of Abertay Dundee. His research focuses on terrorism and the concept of ‘extremism’, whiteness, masculinity and violence, and the extreme right, organised racism and the religious right in the United States.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Philosophy, Politics, Terror Bob Brecher and Mark Devenney 2. Rediscovering the Individual in the "War on Terror": a Virtue and Liberal Approach Heather Widdows 3. Is there a Justifiable Shoot-to-Kill Policy? Shahrar Ali 4. Torture and the Demise of the Justiciable Standard of Enlightened Government: A S Perspective Don Wallace and Akis Kalaitzidis 5. Asylum and the Discourse of Terror: the European "Security state" Fran Cetti 6. Feeling Persecuted? The Definitive Role of Paranoid Anxiety in the Constitution of "War on Terror" Television Hugh Ortega Breton 7. Fundamentalist Foundations of Terrorist Practice:the Political Logic of Life-Sacrifice Jeff Noonan 8. Specificities, Complexities, Histories: Algerian Politics and George Bush’s USA-led "War on Terror" Martin Evans 9. Ignatieff, Ireland and the Lesser Evil: Some Problems with the Lessons Learnt Mark McGovern 10. American Terror: from Oklahoma City to 9/11 and After Aaron Winter. Bibliography

Female Suicide Bombers Routledge Critical Terrorism Studies

V. G. Julie Rajan, Rutgers University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55225-7; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the phenomenon of female suicide bombings through postcolonial, Third World, feminist, and human-rights frameworks. Through those multiple contexts, the author reveal the highly complex subjectivities and social agencies of women suicide bombers in contemporary conflict situations internationally, such as Palestine, Sri Lanka, and Chechnya. In the postcolonial era, many women have executed fatal suicide bombing missions globally. Since the 1980s, Sri Lankan women, known as the Black Tigers, have carried out one-third of the suicide attacks initiated by the LTTE (Liberation Tigers of Tamil Eelam) against the Sri Lankan government. In Chechnya, women known as the Black Widows have been involved in 81% of attacks against the Russian government since 2000. Many of the books published on this phenomenon have revealed interesting ways to read women bombers’ subjectivities, but do not complicate adequately the phenomenon of women bombers both inside and outside of their militant activities, or against the patriarchal, Orientalist, and Western feminist cultural and theoretical frameworks that label female bombers primarily as victims of backward cultures. In contrast, this book offers a corrective lens to the existing discourse, and encourages a more balanced evaluation of women bombers by exploring them also through postcolonial, Third World feminist, and women’s and human rights cultural and theoretical frameworks. Through those multiple contexts, this book reveals the highly complex subjectivities and social agencies of women suicide bombers in contemporary conflict situations. This book will be of interest to students of terrorism, gender studies and security studies in general.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Gender, Deviance, and Narrative Violence 2. Negotiating "Victims" 3. Producing the Spectacle of the Martyr 4.

Projecting the Maternal and the Monstrous 5. Sexualization, Fetishism, and Fantasy 6. Women and Suicide Bombing in the Post-9/11 Era. Bibliography

An Intellectual History of Terror Routledge Critical Terrorism Studies

Mikkel Thorup, Aarhus University, Denmark

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

323 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57995-7; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book investigates terrorism and anti-terrorism as related and interacting phenomena, undertaking a simultaneous reading of terrorist and statist ideologists in order to reconstruct the ‘deadly dialogue’ between them. This work investigates an extensive array of violent phenomena and actors, trying to broaden the scope and ambition of the history of terrorism studies. It combines an extensive reading of state and terrorist discourse from various sources with theorizing of modernity’s political, institutional and ideological development, forms of violence, and its guiding images of self and other, order and disorder. Chapters explore groups of actors (terrorists, pirates, partisans, anarchists, Islamists, neo-Nazis, revolutionaries, soldiers, politicians, scholars) as well as a broad empirical source material, and combine them into a narrative of how our ideas and concepts of state, terrorism, order, disorder, territory, violence and others came about and influence the struggle between the modern state and its challengers. The main focus is on how the state and its challengers have conceptualized and legitimated themselves, defended their existence and, most importantly, their violence. In doing so, the book situates terrorism and anti-terrorism within modernity’s grander history of state, war, ideology and violence. This book will be of much interest to students of critical terrorism studies, political violence, sociology, philosophy, and Security Studies/IR in genera Mikkel Thorup is Assistant Professor at the Institute of Philosophy and the History of Ideas, University of Aarhus, Denmark.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: To Terrorize and to Theorize Part I: Investigative Signposts 2. Killing Words: On Justifying Violence 3. The Violently Privileged: On the State 4. Beyond the Line: On Frontierlands Part II: Archive of Terrors 5. Terror as Fright: The Concept of Terror before the French Revolution 6. Terror as Policy: The Concept of Terror during the French Revolution 7. Terror as Crime: The Concept of Terror after the French Revolution Part III: Pirates and Terrorists 8. Pirates and Barbarians: the Barbary ‘Axis of Piracy’ and Western ‘Anti-Terror’-Campaigns 9. Enemy of Humanity: the Anti-Piracy Discourse in Present Day Anti-Terrorism 10. State Pirates: Warriors in the Maritime Frontierland Part IV: States of Terror, States of Humanity 11. All Talk and No Security: the Securitist Critique of the Liberal Democracy’s Irresponsibility 12. The Humanitarian Sovereign: Cosmopolitan Warfare in the New Global Frontierland

The Making of Terrorism in Pakistan Routledge Critical Terrorism Studies

Eamon Murphy, Curtin University of Technology, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56526-4; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume examines the social, and political and economic factors that have contributed to the rise of terrorism in Pakistan, employing an historical and critical terrorism studies perspective.

CONTENTS Part 1: Islam, the Formation of Pakistan, and the First Military Dictatorship, 1947-69 1. A Clash of Civilizations? Islam in Pakistan 2.

A Dream of a Secular, Inclusive, Democratic State Lost: Mohammed Ali Jinnah and the Formation of Pakistan 3. Class, Ethnicity and the Establishment of the New State 4. Enduring Conflict: The Kashmir Conflict and Ongoing Wars with India Part 2: On the Path to Islamization, 1969-98 5. Disaster: The Break-up of Pakistan and the Treat to the Sate’s Srvival 6. A Lost Opportunity: The Failure of Democracy under Zulfikar Ali Bhutto 7. On the Path to Global Terrorism: Islamization under General Zia ul-Haq 8. A Crucible for Terrorism: Afghanistan jihad and the Roles of the US and Saudi Arabia 9. Saudi Arabia and the Spread of Wahhabi Islam in Pakistan 10. Saviour or Failure? General Pervez Musharraf and the War on Terrorism 11. The Acid Test: 9/11 and the War on Terrorism Part 3: Pakistan Jihad and the Emergence of Global Terrorism, 1998-2009 12. A Turning Point? Descent into Chaos or the Restoration of Democracy and the Defeat of Terrorism. Conclusion: The Making of Terrorism

The Globalization of NATO Routledge Global Security Studies

Veronica M. Kitchen, University of Waterloo, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57017-6; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines NATO’s transition from a Cold War mutual defence organization into a global alliance, and puts the recent crisis over the Afghanistan mission in the context of long-standing debates over out-of-area interventions. Originally, NATO bound the western allies together for the purposes of mutual defence as defined by Article 5 of the North Atlantic Treaty, which declared that an

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

324 attack on the territory of one ally was to be considered an attack on them all. However, Article 4 of the Treaty invites the allies to consult with each other on a less formal basis whenever their 'territorial integrity, political independence, or security' was threatened, without the automatic commitment to a shared response. During the Cold War, the allies consulted both formally and informally on issues beyond mutual defence in debates that were, more often than not, extremely contentious. After the Cold War, these out-of-area missions became the primary focus of NATO’s military missions. The allies had to debate the scope of co-operation for every mission they considered undertaking collectively. This book argues that NATO’s identity has changed from a Cold War mutual defence organization to a global alliance in the course of debates over how to respond to the changing circumstances of its security environment. This book will be of much interest to students of security studies, international organisations, contemporary history and IR in general.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Identity, Security, and Political Talk 2. The Suez Crisis: Establishing the Out-of-Area Norm 3. The Cold War Community and the Vietnam War 4. Changing Notions of Security and the Intervention in Bosnia 5. September 11 th and the Dispute over Iraq 6. The Post-9/11 Alliance and Changing Notions of Mutual Defence in Afghanistan Conclusion: A New Strategic Concept and New Norms?

Great Powers and Strategic Stability in the 21st Century Routledge Global Security Studies

Edited by Graeme P. Herd, Geneva Centre for Security Policy, Switzerland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 234pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56054-2; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book addresses the issue of grand strategic stability in the 21 st century, and examines the role of the key centres of global power - US, EU, Russia, China and India - in managing contemporary strategic threats. This edited volume examines the cooperative and conflictual capacity of Great Powers to manage increasingly interconnected strategic threats (not least, terrorism and political extremism, WMD proliferation, fragile states, regional crises and conflict and the energy-climate nexus) in the 21 st century. The contributors question whether global order will increasingly be characterised by a predictable interdependent one-world system, as strategic threats create interest-based incentives and functional benefits. The work moves on to argue that the operational concept of world order is a Concert of Great Powers directing a new institutional order, norms and regimes whose combination is strategic-threat specific, regionally sensitive, loosely organised, and inclusive of major states (not least Brazil, Turkey, South Africa and Indonesia).

Leadership can be singular, collective or coalition-based and this will characterise the nature of strategic stability and world order in the 21 st century. This book will be of much interest to students of international security, grand strategy, foreign policy and IR. Graeme P. Herd is Co-Director of the International Training Course in Security Policy at the Geneva Centre for Security Policy (GCSP). He is co-author of several books and co-editor of The Ideological War on Terror: World Wide Strategies for Counter Terrorism (2007), Soft Security Threats and European Security (2005), Security Dynamics of the former Soviet Bloc (2003) and Russia and the Regions: Strength through Weakness (2003).

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction 1. International Security, Great Powers and World Order Graeme P. Herd and Pàl Dunay Part 2: Strategic Threats: Nature and Evolution 2. Terrorism and Political Extremism Ekaterina Stepanova 3. Proliferation of Weapons of Mass Destruction Gustav Lindstrom 4. Regional Crisis, Conflict and Fragile States Caty Clément 5. How Energy and Climate Change may pose a Threat to Sustainable Security Tapani Vaahtoranta Part 3: Centres of Global Power: Strategic Priorities and Threat Management 6.

The United States: Leadership Beyond Unipolarity? Matthew Rhodes 7. The Russian Federation: Striving for Multi-Polarity but Missing the Consequences Pavel K. Baev 8. China as an Emergent Center of Global Power Bates Gill 9. India’s Eclectic Approach to Global Strategic Threats S iddharth Varadarajan 10. The European Union, Facing Non Traditional Threats in a Globalized World Thierry Tardy Part 4: Conclusions: Cooperation and Conflictual Imperatives 11. Great Powers, Strategic Threats and Uncharted Waters Graeme P. Herd

International Conflict in the Asia-Pacific Routledge Global Security Studies

Jacob Bercovitch, University of Canterbury, New Zealand and Mikio Oishi, University of Otago, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58004-5; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyses four major long-standing and intractable conflicts in the Asia-Pacific region (the Korean Peninsula; the Taiwan Strait; the South China Sea (Spratly Islands); and India-Pakistan), and aims to identify the mechanisms used to manage these conflicts.

International Conflict in the Asia-Pacific brings together in one volume four major international conflicts that have shaped the region,

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

325 and studies how they evolved and how best to manage them. The book seeks to find a pattern common to the four conflicts and their management as well as taking note of variations among them, hereby aiming to establish what might be called the 'Asia-Pacific way of managing intractable conflicts'. This book will of much interest to students of international conflict management, Asian politics, security studies and IR in general. Jacob Bercovitch is Professor of International Relations in the Political Science Department at the University of Canterbury in New Zealand. Widely regarded as one of the most influential scholars in the field of international conflict resolution, he is author of more than 15 books and numerous articles. Mikio Oishi is a Visiting Fellow with the National Centre for Peace and Conflict Studies (NCPACS), University of Otago and a Research Fellow with Political Science Programme of University of Canterbury.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Conflicts in the Asia-Pacific Region in the Post-World War II Period 2. Conflict Management and its Application to Conflicts in the Asia-Pacific Region 3. Management of Conflict on the Korean Peninsula: From Confrontation to Sustaining a Failing State 4. Management of the Rivalry across the Taiwan Strait: Addressing the Transformation from Ideological Rivalry to Ethnic Conflict 5. Management of Dispute over the Spratly Islands: Taming a Dragon in the South China Sea 6. Management of the IndoPakistani Conflict: Siamese Twins Inflicting Lethal Blows on Each Other 7. Conclusion Bibliography

US Strategy in Africa Routledge Global Security Studies

Edited by David J. Francis, University of Bradford, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48510-4; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book outlines the construction, interpretations and understanding of US strategy towards Africa in the early twenty-first century.

No single issue or event in the recent decades in Africa has provoked so much controversy and unified hostility and opposition as the announcement by former President George W. Bush of the establishment of the United Stated Africa Command – AFRICOM. The intensity and sheer scale of the unprecedented unity of opposition to AFRICOM across Africa surprised many experts and lead them to ask why such a hostile reaction occurred. This book explores the conception of AFRICOM and the subsequent reaction in two ways. Firstly, the contributors critically engage with the creation and global imperatives for the establishment of AFRICOM and present an analytical outline of African security in relation to and within the context of the history of US foreign and security policy approaches to Africa. Secondly, the book has original chapter contributions by some of the key actors involved in the development and implementation of the AFRICOM project including Theresa Whelan, the former US Deputy Assistant Secretary for African Affairs. This is not only an attempt to contribute to the academic and policy-relevant debates based on the views of those who are intimately involved in the design and implementation of the AFRICOM project but also to show, in their own words, that ‘America has no clandestine agenda for Africa’. This book will be of interest to students of US foreign policy/national security, strategic studies, international security and African politics. David J. Francis is Chair of African Peace & Conflict Studies in the Department of Peace Studies at the University of Bradford.

CONTENTS Part 1: AFRICOM and US Security Policy in Africa 1. Introduction: AFRICOM: US Strategic Interests and African Security David J. Francis 2. Africa: A new Strategic Perspective Theresa Whelan 3. AFRICOM: What is it and what will it do? Daniel Volman 4.

AFRICOM: Terrorism and Security Challenges in Africa J. Peter Pham 5. AFRICOM and Challenges to African Security Mohamed Salih 6. Solutions Not Yet Sought: A Human Security Paradigm for the 21 st Century Shannon Beebe Part 2: African Responses: Threats and Opportunities 7. AFRICOM: Its Reality and Future Jeremy Keenan 8. African Union and AFRICOM Tom Teiku 9. Into Africa - Always Something New: AFRICOM and the History of Telling Africans what their Security Problems Are David Chuter 10.

AFRICOM and the New Aid and Security Partnerships Josephine Osikena Conclusion: AFRICOM and the future of US Africa Relations David J. Francis

Economic Development and Military Security Routledge Studies in Defence and Peace Economics

Somnath Sen, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-39513-7; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The challenges of economic development become harder to achieve if poor countries also face military threats, either from external sources (such as the arms race between India and Pakistan) or from internal sources (conflicts and civil wars in Kashmir, Nepal and Sri Lanka). This book examines the relationship between economic and military security in developing countries. Set in the context of South Asia, focusing on India and Pakistan: two of only a dozen or so countries which have the capability to produce nuclear weapons, it is the product of detailed analytical research.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

326 CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Economic Development and Military Security: Methodology 3. Midnight’s Children: The Burden of History in South Asia 4. Diversity in Unity: India and Pakistan 5. Small is Beautiful: Sri Lanka, Bangladesh and Nepal 6. To Arm or Not to Arm: Arms Race in South Asia 7. Human Security: Impact of Militarization 8. Problems, Prospects and Policy 9. Back to the Future: Where Do We Go from Here 10. Conclusion

Economics of Defence Policy Routledge Studies in Defence and Peace Economics

Keith Hartley, University of York, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-27132-5; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Defence policy is of continuing interest and concern to all nations. There are armed conflicts and new threats. Difficult choices cannot be avoided. This book has three aims. First, to identify the typical questions raised by economists when studying defence policy.

Second, to show how simple economic analysis can be used to answer these questions and contribute to our understanding of defence issues. Third, to provide a critical evaluation of defence policy.

CONTENTS 1. Economics and Defence Policy: An Overview, 2. How Do Economists Analyse Defence?, 3. Defence Budgets: Evaluating Efficiency, 4. The Determinants of Defence Expenditure, 5. The Military-Industrial-Political Complex: Economics and Public Choice, 6. Equipment Procurement Policy, 7. Personnel Policy, 8. The National Defence Industrial Base, 9. The Economics of Military Alliances: NATO, 10. European Defence Policy: The EDEM and EDTIB, 11. Evaluating International Collaborative Projects, 12. The Economics of Conflict, 13. The Political Economy of Arms Control and Disarmament, 14. The Economics of New Threats: Terrorism and Homeland Security.

The Economics of UN Peacekeeping Routledge Studies in Defence and Peace Economics

Nadège Sheehan, Rutgers University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £90.00 $145.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56746-6; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Whereas most of the literature on peacekeeping looks at it from a political, financial or legal position, this book is the first to look at the economic aspects. Nadège Sheehan argues that though UN peacekeeping is a political activity it is dependent on economics considerations and that these operations are generally considered generally to be the best tool to organize the world politico-economics order. This book offers a comprehensive analysis of the economics of peacekeeping, considering expenditures, gains obtained through participation in missions and alternative cost-effective choices for producing and financing UN peacekeeping operations. This is a novel and innovative approach in an under researched area.

CONTENTS Part 1: The Politico-Economic Organization of Peacekeeping Operations 1. Theoretical Basis of UN Peacekeeping operations 2.

History of UN Peacekeeping Operations 3. From First-Generation to Second-Generation Operations, or the Development of UN Peacekeeping Operations Part 2: Financing of UN Peacekeeping Operations 4. Financing Peacekeeping Operations: A Peacekeeping Assessment Scale that Shows Inequity 5. UN Peacekeeping Expenditures and Total Costs Part 3: Peacekeeping Operations: A Rehabilitation of Political Economy 6. The Debates around UN Peacekeeping Operations 7. UN Peacekeeping, an Important Tool for the World Politico-Economic Organization Part 4: What Production and Financing System Alternatives? 8. The Need for Better Economic Choices for Producing Peacekeeping Operations 9. Towards an Analysis of More Effective Financing Solutions Summary and Conclusion

Kosovo, Intervention and Statebuilding Routledge Studies in Intervention and Statebuilding

Edited by Aidan Hehir, University of Westminster, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56167-9; January 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

327 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines international engagement with Kosovo since NATO’s intervention in 1999, and looks at the three distinct phases of Kosovo’s development; intervention, statebuilding and independence. Kosovo remains a case study of central importance in international relations, illustrative of key political trends in the post-Cold War era. During each phase, international policy towards Kosovo has challenged prevailing international norms and pushed the boundaries of conventional wisdom. In each of the three phases 'Kosovo' has been cited as constituting a precedent, and this book explores the impact and the often troubling consequences and implications of these precedents. This book explicitly engages with this debate, which transcends Kosovo itself, and provides a critical analysis of the catalysts and consequences of contemporary international engagement with this seminal case study. Each chapter focuses on a particular aspect of the international engagement with Kosovo and situates events there in an international context, highlighting the extent to which international policy towards Kosovo has challenged existing norms and practices. Kosovo has been cited in certain texts as a positive template to be emulated, but the contributors to this book also identify the often controversial and contentious nature of these new norms. This book will be of much interest to students of humanitarian intervention and statebuilding, war and conflict studies, security studies and IR in general. Aidan Hehir is a Senior Lecturer in International Relations at the Department of Politics and International Relations, University of Westminster.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: Kosovo and the International Community Aidan Hehir 2. Responding to Kosovo’s Call for Humanitarian Intervention: Public Opinion, Partisanship, and Policy Objectives Alynna J. Lyon and Mary Fran T. Malone 3. Kosovo and the Advent of Sovereignty as Responsibility Alex Bellamy 4. Conflicting Rules: Global Constitutionalism and the Kosovo Intervention Anthony F. Lang, Jr 5. De Facto States in the Balkans: Shared Governance versus Ethnic Sovereignty in Republika Srpska and Kosovo Rick Fawn and Oliver P. Richmond 6. Policing the State of Exception in Kosovo Barry J. Ryan 7. Explaining the International Administration’s Failures in the Security and Justice Areas Giovanna Bono 8. Kosovo – The Final Frontier? From Transitional Administration to Transitional Statehood James Gow 9. Kosovo, Sovereignty and the Subversion of UN Authority James Kerr-Lindsey 10. Microcosm, Guinea Pig or Sui Generis? Assessing International Engagement with Kosovo Aidan Hehir. Appendix: Interview with Dr Fatmir Sejdiu, President of the Republic of Kosovo

Statebuilding, Security-Sector Reform and the Liberal Peace Routledge Studies in Intervention and Statebuilding

Barry Ryan, University of Keele, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55833-4; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book contextualises the rapid growth of Security Sector Reform (SSR) in state-building, and provides a critique of the liberal peace theories that lay behind it.

CONTENTS 1. The Freedom of Security 2. Security Sector Reform and Statebuilding 3. The Logos of a Liberal Peace 4.The European Security Strategy and SSR 5. Bilateral Actors in SSR 6. Democratization and SSR 7. Socio-economic Development and SSR 8. The Logos of Liberal War. Bibliography

Conflict, Security and the Reshaping of Society Routledge Studies in Liberty and Security

Edited by Alessandro Dal Lago and Salvatore Palidda, both of Universita di Genova, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57034-3; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is an examination of the effect of contemporary wars (such as the 'War on Terror') on civil life at a global level.

Contemporary literature on war is mainly devoted to recent changes in the theory and practice of warfare, particular those in which terrorists or insurgents are involved (for example, the 'revolution in military affairs', 'small wars', and so on). On the other hand, today's research on security is focused, among other themes, on the effects of the war on terrorism, and on civil liberties and social control. This volume connects these two fields of research, showing how 'war' and 'security' tend to exchange targets and forms of action as well as personnel (for instance, the spreading use of private contractors in wars and of military experts in the 'struggle for security') in modern society. This shows how, contrary to Clausewitz's belief war should be conceived of as a "continuation of politics by other means", the opposite statement is also true: that politics, insofar as it concerns security, can be defined as the 'continuation of war by other means'. This book will be of much interest to students of critical security studies, war and conflict studies, terrorism studies, sociology and IR in general. Salvatore Palidda is Professor of Sociology in the Faculty of Education at the University of Genoa. Alessandro Dal Lago is Professor of Sociology of Culture and Communication at the University of Genoa.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

328 CONTENTS Introduction Alessandro Dal Lago and Salvatore Palidda Part I: The Constituent Role of Armed Conflicts 1. Fields Without Honour: Contemporary War as Global Enforcement Alessandro Dal Lago 2. The Barbarization of the Peace: The Neo-Conservative Transformation of War and Perspectives Alain Joxe 3. Norm/Exception: Exceptionalism and Governmental Prospects Roberto Ciccarelli 4. Reversing Clausewitz? War and politics in French Philosophy: Michel Foucault, Deleuze-Guattari and Raymond Aron Massimiliano Guareschi 5. Global War and Technoscience Luca Guzzetti Part II: Securisation 6. September 14, 2001: The Regression to the Habitus Didier Bigo 7. Revolution in Police Affairs Salvatore Palidda 8. Surveillance: From Resistance to Support Eric Heilmann 9. Enemies, Not Criminals: The Law and Courts Against Global Terrorism Gabriella Petti Part III: The Reshaping of Global Society 10. Media at War Marcello Maneri 11. Global Bureaucracy: Irresponsible But Not Indifferent Mariella Pandolfi and Laurence Mcfall 12. The Space of Camps: Towards a Genealogy of Places of Internment in the Present Federico Rahola

Mapping Transatlantic Security Relations Routledge Studies in Liberty and Security

Edited by Mark Salter, University of Ottawa, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 320pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57861-5; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines how legal, political, and rights discourses, security policies and practices migrate and translate across the North Atlantic. The complex relationship between liberty and security has been fundamentally recast and contested in liberal democracies since the start of the 'global war on terror'. In addition to recognizing new agencies, political pressures, and new sensitivities to difference, it is important that not to over-state the novelty of the post-9/11 era: the war on terror simply made possible the intensification, expansion, or strengthening of policies already in existence, or simply enabled the shutting down of debate. Working from a common theoretical frame, if different disciplines, these chapters present policy-oriented analyses of the actual practices of security, policing, and law in the European Union and Canada. They focus on questions of risk and exception, state sovereignty and governance, liberty and rights, law and transparency, policing and security. In particular, the essays are concerned with charting how policies, practices, and ideas migrate between Canada, the EU and its member states. By taking ‘field’ approach to the study of security practices, the volume is not constrained by national case study or the solipsistic debates within subfields and bridges legal, political, and sociological analysis. It will be of much interest to students of critical security studies, sociology, law, global governance and IR in general. Mark B. Salter is Associate Professor at the School of Political Studies, University of Ottawa.

CONTENTS Introduction: Mark B. Salter 1. Special Delivery: the Multilateral Politics of Extraordinary Rendition Maria Koblanck 2. Miscarriages of Justice and Exceptional Procedures in the ‘War against Terrorism Emmanuel-Pierre Guittet 3. Risk-Focused Security Policies and Human Rights: The Impossible Symbiosis Anastassia Tsoukala 4. The International Politics of Data Privacy: European Leadership and the Ratcheting up of Canadian Rules Abraham Newman 5. Aviation Security and the War on Terror Mark B. Salter 6. The Accountability Gap: Human rights and EU external cooperation on criminal justice, counterterrorism and the rule of law Susie Alegre 7. Norms and Expertise in the Global Fight against Transnational Organized Crime and Terrorism Amandine Scherrer 8. Tracing Terrorists: The EU–Canada Agreement in PNR Matters Peter Hobbing 9. Replacing and Displacing the Law: Europeanization of the Judicial Power Antoine Mégie 10.Transjudicial conversations about Security and Human Rights Audrey Macklin 11. Removeable aliens? Canada’s position on indefinite immigration detention in comparative perspective Rayner Thwaites 12. The Role of NGOs in the Access to Public Information: Extraordinary Renditions and the Absence of Transparency Márton Sulyok and András L. Pap 13.

Sovereignty and Security R.B.J. Walker and Maria Koblanck

Gender, Nationalism and Conflict Transformation Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict Resolution

Fidelma Ashe, University of Ulster at Jordanstown, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-55816-7; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book looks at the gendering of the on-going process of conflict transformation in Northern Ireland. It aims both to document and analyze the effects of the restructuring of formal and civil society politics on gender and sexual equality. Consequently, it opens up the analysis of Northern Ireland’s political transition to feminist scrutiny at local and international levels. The volume adopts a nonessentialist framework designed to trace the political constitution and reconstitution of gender inequities through conflict transformational processes. This theoretical orientation is informed by a mix of analysis of academic and government sources and qualitative interviews with a range of actors operating in formal political arenas and civil society organizations. Further, the book connects with the complex and diverse debates around the central categories and concepts applied in the field of gender, nationalism and conflict transformation, such as feminist analysis in the areas of gender and nationalism, women’s political representation,

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

329 transitional justice, and human rights in relation to the concrete case study of Northern Ireland. This book will be of much interest to students of gender studies, conflict transformation, ethnic conflict, peace studies and Irish politics.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Ethno-Nationalist Conflict, Gender and Sexuality 2. Gender and Nationalism in Ireland 3. Gender, Ethnicity and Conflict Transformation Part 2: Gender, Sexuality and Political Institutions 5. Gender Equality, the Political Parties and the Assembly 6. Equality Discourses and Institutions 7. Gendering Policing and Security Part 3: Gender and Conflict Transformation in Civil Society 8. The Continuing Struggle of Women’s Groups 9. Gender, Demilitarisation and Restorative Justice 10. Gendering Forgetting and Remembering 11. Conclusion. Bibliography

Governing Ethnic Conflict Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict Resolution

Andrew Finlay, Trinity College Dublin, Ireland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 216x138 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49803-6; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book traces the emergence of a common technology of peace and how, in the process, the liberal state has come to embrace illiberal subjects and practices. The idea that conflicts are problems that have causes and therefore solutions rather than winners and losers has gained momentum since the end of the Cold War, and it has become more common for third party mediators acting in the name of liberal internationalism to promote the resolution of intra-state conflicts. These third-party peace makers appear to share lessons and expertise so that it is possible to speak of an emergent common technology of peace based around a controversial form of power-sharing known as consociation. In this common technology of peace, the cause of conflict is understood to be competing ethnonational identities and the solution is to recognize these identities, and make them useful to government through power-sharing. The problem with consociational arrangements is not simply that they institutionalise ethnic division and privilege particular identities or groups, but, more importantly, that they close down the space for other ways of being. By specifying identity categories, consociational regimes create a residual, sink category, designated ‘other’. These ‘others’ not only offer a challenge to prevailing ideas about identity but also stand in reproach to conventional wisdom regarding the management of conflict. This book will be of much interest to students of conflict resolution, ethnic conflict, identity, and war and conflict studies in general. Andrew Finlay is Lecturer in Sociology at Trinity College Dublin.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Anthropology, Cultural Pluralism and Consociational Theory 3. Essentialism and the Reconciliation of the Liberal State to Ethnicity 4. Is Ethnopolitics a form of Biopolitics? 5. Consociationalism as a form of liberal governmentality: ‘single identity work’ versus community relations 6. Paradigm Shifts and the Production of ‘National Being’ 7. No Exit: Human Rights and the Priority of Ethnicity 8. ‘A Long Way To Get Very Little’: the Durability of Identity, Socialist Politics and Communal Discipline 9.

Conclusion

Migration and Security in the Global Age Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict Resolution

Feargal Cochrane, University of Lancaster, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 208pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58775-4; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is an interdisciplinary examination of several interconnecting aspects of migrant communities in the context of contemporary conflict and security. It aims to illustrate how the diversity of migrant populations cross-cuts political, cultural, social and economic spheres of activity. The book builds a connected picture of contemporary migrants/diasporas that reflects the fact that they exist within, and help to construct, an integrated and multi-layered political, social, cultural and economic mileau. While empirically focused studies are often case-specific and, while rich in local detail, lack comparative breadth or the ability to make connections and see irregularities across a number of cases that might be of interest to scholars beyond that specific area. This work intends to connect these literatures together more thoroughly. In particular, it seeks to demonstrate that political, cultural, economic and social factors all play important roles in helping us understand the actual (and potential) roles of migrant communities in conflict and security within contemporary society. The book has a thematic structure, with multiple case studies being used throughout the text, including the Palestinian, Sri Lankan, Irish and Somali diaspora communities. London will be used as a site for primary data collection, due to its multi-ethnic character and the vibrancy of its diaspora communities. A series of interviews will be carried out in London among several migrant communities to provide qualitative evidence linked to the central arguments within the book concerning the impact of globalisation and the new security environment on patterns of association at both political and cultural levels.

This book will be of much interest to students of migration and diaspora communities, peace and conflict studies, security studies and ethnic conflict.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

330 CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Impact of Globalisation on Migration and Conflict 2. Examining the Long Distance Nationalists 3. Examining the Long Distance Peace Builders 4. Migration and the War on Terror 5. Fusion Cuisine: Migrants, Food and Conflict 6. Troubled Tours: Diaspora Tourism, Homeland and Remembrance 7. Migration, Globalisation and Civil Society –The Changing role of Associationalism 8. Policy Matters: Migration and Security in the 21st Century. Bibliography

Small Arms, Crime and Conflict Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict Resolution

Edited by Owen Greene, Bradford University, UK and Nic Marsh PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56700-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book critically examines the nexus between arms availability and armed violence.

CONTENTS Introduction Owen Greene and Nic Marsh 1. The Tools of Insurgency: A Review of the Role of Small Arms and Light Weapons in Warfare Nicholas Marsh 2. Small Arms and Light Weapons Spread and Conflict Mike Bourne 3. Lethal Instruments: Small Arms and Deaths in Armed Conflict Joakim Kreutz and Nicholas Marsh 4. Regaining State Control: Arms and Violence in Post-Conflict Countries Joakim Kreutz, Nicholas Marsh and Manuela Torre 5. Armed Violence within Societies Owen Greene 6. Causes and Costs of Gun Violence: A Critical Evaluation Thomas Jackson and Nicholas Marsh 7. SALW and Armed Violence in Urban Areas Valentina Bartolucci and Anna Kannewarff 8. Guns, Goons and Gold as Burdens of a Fragile State Governing Small Arms and Light Weapons Ariel Macaspac and Owen Greene 9. Governing Small Arms and Light Weapons Owen Greene 10. Restructuring the Production of Small Arms and Light Weapons Dimitar Dimitrov and Peter Hall 11. What do the Natives Know: Are there Societal Mechanisms for Controlling SALW and other Idle Questions Michael Ashkenazi 12. Post-Conflict Disarmament and Governance Owen Greene and Albert Boada 13. What do We Now Think We Know, and Priorities For Future Research Owen Greene and Nicholas Marsh

Theory and Practice of International Mediation Routledge Studies in Security and Conflict Management

Jacob Bercovitch, University of Canterbury, Christchurch, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-46958-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Jacob Bercovitch has been at the forefront of developments in international mediation for more than 25 years, and is generally recognized as one of the most important scholars in the field. His theoretical and empirical analyses have come to define the parameters in the study of mediation. In the international arena, where a large and highly diverse number of actors coexist, where each guards its sovereignty and independence zealously, and where each views the resort to violence as a viable option, mediation is one of the most important ways of dealing with conflicts. This volume brings together some of the most significant essays on international mediation by Jacob Bercovitch, and will help scholars and practitioners trace the history of the field, its position today, and its future.

The book will be of much interest to all students of mediation, negotiation, conflict management and International Relations in general.

CONTENTS Part 1: The Nature and Theory of Mediation 1. Social Research and the Study of Mediation: Designing and Implementing Systematic Archival Research 2. Putting Mediation in Context 3. Mediation: A Review of Performance and Analysis of Behavior 4. The Study of International Mediation: Theoretical Issues and Empirical Evidence 5. Mediation Success or Failure: The search for the Elusive Criteria Part 2: Case Studies in Mediation 6. A Case Study of Mediation as a Method of International Conflict Resolution: The Camp David Experience 7. Conflict Management and the Oslo Experience: Assessing the Success of Israeli-Palestinian Peacemaking Part 3: Empirical Studies in Mediation 8. Is there Madness in the Method of Mediation: Research into the Conditions of Effective Mediation (with Scott Gartner) 9. Negotiation or Mediation? An Exploration of the Factors Affecting the Choice of Conflict Management in International Conflict (with R. Jackson) 10. Who Mediates: The Political Economy of International Conflict Management (with G. Schneider) 11. Why Do They Do it Like This: An Analysis of the Factors Influencing Mediator Behavior in International Conflicts (with A. Houston) Part 4: Current Issues in Mediation Research 12. Managing Ethnic Conflicts: the Role and Relevance of Mediation 13. Managing Ethnic Civil Wars: Assessing the Determinants of Successful Mediation (with K. DeRouen) 14. Culture and International Mediation: An Empirical Assessment (with O. Elgstrom) 15. The United Nations and the Mediation of International Disputes 16. The Termination of Enduring International Conflicts: Theoretical and Empirical Considerations" (with P. Diehl and G. Goertz) 17. Preventing Deadly Conflicts: The Contribution of International Mediation

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

331

A History of the Egyptian Intelligence Service Studies in Intelligence

Owen L. Sirrs, US Defense Intelligence Agency, Washington DC, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 288pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56920-0; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book analyzes how the Egyptian intelligence community has adapted to shifting national security threats since its inception 100 years ago. Starting in 1910, when the modern Egyptian intelligence system was created to deal with militant nationalists and Islamists, the book shows how the security services were subsequently reorganized, augmented and centralized to meet an increasingly sophisticated array of challenges, including fascism, communism, army unrest, Israel, France, the United Kingdom, conservative Arab states, the Muslim Brotherhood and others. The book argues that studying Egypt’s intelligence community is integral to our understanding of that country’s modern history, regime stability and human rights record. Intelligence studies have been described as the ‘missing dimension’ of international relations. It is clear that intelligence agencies are pivotal to understanding the nature of many Arab regimes and their decision-making processes, and there is no published history of modern Egyptian intelligence in either a European language or in Arabic, though Egypt has the largest and arguably most effective intelligence community in the Arab world.

This book will fill a clear gap in the intelligence literature and will be of much interest to students of intelligence studies, Middle Eastern politics, international security and IR in general.

CONTENTS Introduction Part 1: Intelligence and the Monarchy 1. Mamur Zapt 2. Decline & Fall of the Old Regime Part 2: Intelligence under Nasser 3. Creating a New Intelligence Community 4. General Intelligence 5. Egyptian Intelligence & the Suez Crisis 6. Unity, Subversion & Secession 7. Intelligence & the Yemen Wars 8. The Intelligence State 9. The 1967 War 10. Nasser's Twilight Part 3: Intelligence under Sadat 11: Power Struggles 12. Grand Deception in the 1973 War 13. Rejectionists Part 4: Intelligence under Mubarak 14. Troubles at Home & Abroad 15. State Security 16. General Intelligence Wars 17. September 2001 & Beyond.

Conclusion

Intelligence, Command and Military Operations Studies in Intelligence

Kevin Jones PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-38636-4; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This new book explores the relationship between intelligence and command at the operational level of war, and the extent to which it nourished operational performance on the battlefield. It does so through the medium of a fresh case study of the British Eighth Army’s performance, under three different commanders, at several key points during the campaign in Italy. These comprise operations Husky and Baytown (the invasion of Sicily and Italy respectively), under Montgomery; the Eighth Army’s part in the fourth battle of Cassino and the Gothic Line offensive, under Oliver Leese; and the final offensive in Italy, under Richard McCreery. This book will be of much interest to students of the Second World War, intelligence studies, operational military history and strategic history.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. The Application of Intelligence to Military Operations in the British Army during the Second World War 2. Eighth Army’s Intelligence Organisation and Performance during the Italian Campaign 3. Preparing for t

The South African Intelligence Services Studies in Intelligence

Kevin A. O'Brien PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43397-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is the first-ever history of South African intelligence and provides a detailed examination of the various stages in the evolution of South Africa’s intelligence organizations and structures. It covers: the apartheid period of 1960-90 the transition from apartheid to democracy of 1990-94 the post-apartheid period of new intelligence dispensation from 1994-2005. In the first period, it

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

332 examines not only the apartheid government’s intelligence dispensation and operations, but also those of the African National Congress, and its partner, the South African Communist Party (ANC/SACP) – as well as those of other liberation movements and the ‘independent homelands’ under the apartheid system. Examining the civilian, military and police intelligence structures and operations in all periods, as well as the extraordinarily complicated apartheid government’s security bureaucracy (or 'securocracy') and its structures and units, the book discusses how South Africa’s Cold War ‘position’ influenced its relationships with various other world powers, especially where intelligence co-operation came to bear. It outlines South Africa’s regional relationships and concerns – the foremost being its activities in South-West Africa (Namibia) and its relationship with Rhodesia through 1980. Finally, it examines the various legislative and other governance bases for the existence and operations of South Africa’s intelligence structures – in all periods – and the influences that such activities as the Rivonia Trial (at one end of the history) or the Truth and Reconciliation Commission (at the other end) had on the evolution of these intelligence questions throughout South Africa’s modern history.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction: South African Intelligence in Revolution and Counter-Revolution 1960-2005 2. South Africa 1960-2000: Changing History, Changing International Context 3. Republican Intelligence: The Birth of South Africa’s Intelligence Capability, 1948 to 1965 4. The ANC’s Revolutionary War, 1960-1www.routledge.com/978 5. The Threat Grows: The Rise of the 'Securocracy', 1965-1972 6.

'Total Strategy' and Scandal: The 'Securocratisation' of the Government, 1972-1www.routledge.com/978 7. The Assassins’ Web: The Rise of the National Intelligence and Counter-Revolutionary Structures, 1www.routledge.com/978-1985 8. Crossing the Rubicon: 'The Gloves Come Off' for the Total Counter-Revolutionary Strategy, 1985-1990 9. The Failure of the ANC’s Revolutionary War Strategy, 1www.routledge.com/978-1990 10. Negotiating a Settlement: Reform and Retrenchment For All, 1990-1994 11. The New South Africa’s Intelligence Environment, 1994-1995 12. Problems in Progress: Control, Oversight and Accountability in South Africa’s Intelligence Dispensation, 1996-2005 13. Conclusion: Still Fighting The War – The Legacy of South Africa’s Intelligence

Gender and Peacebuilding Edited by Funmi Olonisaken, Karen Barnes and Ekaette Ikpe PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58797-6; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book provides a critical assessment of the impact of UN Resolution 1325 by examining the effect of peacebuilding missions on increasing gender equality within conflict-affected countries. UN Resolution 1325 was adopted in October 2000, and was the first time that the security concerns of women in situations of armed conflict and their role in peacebuilding was placed on the agenda of the UN Security Council. It was an important step forward in terms of bringing women’s rights and gender equality to bear in the UN’s peace and security agenda. More than a decade after the adoption of this Resolution, its practical reality is yet to be substantially felt on the ground in the very societies and regions where women remain disproportionately affected by armed conflict and grossly under-represented in peace processes. This realization, in part, led to the adoption in 2008 and 2009 of three other Security Council Resolutions, on sexual violence in conflict, on violence against women, and for the development of indicators to measure progress in addressing women, peace and security issues. Despite this, there remains a serious gap in knowledge about the real difference that this earlier resolution has made to the lives of the most affected communities and regions; and what added value the new resolutions will have. The book draws together the findings from nine case studies to provide guidance on how the impact of Resolution 1325 can be measured, and how peacekeeping operations could improve their capacity to effectively engender security.

This book will be of much interest to students of peacebuilding, gender studies, the United Nations, international security and IR in general.

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction 1. Introduction Funmi Olonisakin and Karen Barnes 2. The Evolution of 1325 Karen Barnes Part 2: Country Case Studies 3. Timor Leste, Sumie Nakaya 4. Kosovo Catherina H. Hall-Martin 5. Liberia E. Njoki Wamai 6. Nepal Lesley Abdela 7.

Nigeria Ekaette Ikpe 8. Rwanda Kiri-Ann E. Richardson Olney 9. Sierra Leone Karen Barnes 10. Sudan Gihan Eltahir Eltom Part 3: Regional Case Studies 11. African Union Bineta Diop 12. Economic Community of West African States Awa Ceesay Ebo 13.

Southern African Development Community Nyaradzo Machingambi 14. European Union Karen Barnes Part 4: Conclusion 15.

Conclusion Funmi Olonisakin

The Routledge Handbook of European Security Edited by Sven Biscop and Richard Whitman PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £125.00 $185.00; 246x174 mm; 384pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58828-7; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This new Handbook brings together key experts on European security from the academic and policy worlds to examine the European Union (EU) as an international security actor. While the focus is on the politico-military dimension, security will be put in the context of the holistic approach advocated by the EU. Each chapter critically examines EU objectives, instruments and means, in order to

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

333 assess their effectiveness, and identify their weaknesses, and offer some recommendations for the EU as a security actor on the international stage. This Handbook accounts for the gradual emergence of the EU as an autonomous actor in this field since the end of the Cold War, its objectives being to safeguard European security by improving global security. A key aspect of this development has been the emergence of a defence component through the EU’s European Security and Defence Policy (ESDP), re-baptized the Common Security and Defence Policy (CSDP) by the Lisbon Treaty. Whilst this remains a contested development, the international role for the EU as a security actor is here to stay, and is covered in this volume in detail; providing an essential assessment for all students of European Security, the EU, European Politics, security studies and IR in general. The volume is organized in five parts: Part I sets the scene: after a historical overview of the development of European security institutions and an assessment of today’s multipolar order, it analyzes the holistic "grand strategy" underlying EU policies and assesses whether a European strategic culture has emerged. Part II looks at the institutions that make and implement policy in the different dimensions covered by the "grand strategy", charts the instruments and means at their disposal, and assesses to which extent "sub-strategies" in each area are linked up with the overall objectives put forward in the ESS. Part III then assesses the effectiveness of the actual policies and actions undertaken, putting the politico-military dimension in the context of the holistic approach. Part IV analyzes the role of partnerships with other actors in these policies. Part V offers a theoretical perspective on all of these developments.

CONTENTS Introduction: A Secure Europe in a Better World - European Security through the EU Part I: The EU as an International Security Actor 1. The Emergence of European Security Institutions (1945-2010) 2. Theoretical Perspective (I): A 'Realist/Traditional' Perspective 3. Theoretical Perspective (2): A "Constructivist/Critical" Perspective 4. The Age of Interpolarity 5. The European Security Strategy 6. European Strategic Culture Part II: Institutions, Instruments and Means 7. CFSP and Diplomacy 8. Military ESDP 9. Civilian ESDP 10. Industry and Technology 11. Democracy and Human Rights 12. Security and Development Part III: Policies 13.

The Balkans 14. Eastern Neighbourhood and Russia 15. Southern Neighbourhood incl. the Middle East 16. Iran and the Gulf 17. SubSahara Africa 18. Asia including Central Asia 19. New Geopolitical Horizons: Maritime, the Arctic 20. Terrorism 21. Nonproliferation, Arms Control and Disarmament 22. Energy Part IV: Partners 23. NATO and the US 24. The UN 25. The OSCE 26. The African Union 27. Strategic Partners: The BRICs and others

The Routledge Handbook of Human Security Edited by Mary Martin, London School of Economics, UK and Taylor Owen, Oxford University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £125.00 $195.00; 246x174 mm; 384pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-58128-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This Handbook will serve as a standard reference guide to the subject of human security, which has grown greatly in importance over the past 15 years, since the concept was first promoted by the UNDP in its 1993 and 1994 Human Development Reports. The volume fills a clear gap in the literature on human security and provides a broad overview of human security scholarship and thinking, reflecting the multi-disciplinary perspectives which have informed the development of the concept of and its policy use. It elaborates how human security has been theorised, and shows the variety of policy applications attached to it, as well as tackling some of the methodological issues which it raises. It draws on three broad aspects of human security thinking: Theoretical issues to do with defining human security as a specific discourse Human security from a policy and institutional perspective, and how it is operationalised in different policy and geographic contexts Case studies and empirical work Featuring some of the leading scholars in the field, the Routledge Handbook of Human Security will be essential reading for all students of human security, critical security, conflict and development, peace and conflict studies, and of great interest to students of international security and IR in general.

CONTENTS Introduction Part I: Concepts and Contexts 1. Birth of a discourse 2. Filling the security gap - HS vs HR vs Human development 3.

Broad or narrow – the definition debate 4. The critical view of human security 5. From competition to convergence. Human and National Security Part II: Global Policy challenges 6.Violence and conflict 7. Development/Poverty 8. Disasters 9. Environment 10.

Economics and human security 11. Health Part III: Applications 12. Canada and human security 13. Japan 14. European Union 15.

African Union 16. US - Rethinking Counter insurgency 17. Asia 18. Changing violence in Latin America Part IV: Methodologies and Tools 19.Indicators - Sally Stares 20. Mapping 21.The Use of Force 22. International Law 23. Gendering Human Security 24.

Psychology

Routledge Handbook of Insurgency and Counter-Insurgency Edited by Paul B. Rich and Isabelle Duyvesteyn, University of Utrecht, the Netherlands PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £125.00 $199.00; 246x174 mm; 400pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56733-6; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This new handbook provides a wide-ranging overview of the current state of academic analysis and debate on insurgency and counterinsurgency, as well as an-up-to date survey of contemporary insurgent movements and counter-insurgencies. There has been an

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

334 upsurge of scholarly interest in the field of insurgency and counter-insurgency over the past 30 years, and it is now a major subfield in the discipline of International Relations and Security Studies. In part, this reflects the increasing globalisation of insurgency and the interdependent nature of insurgent strategies and tactics. Student interest in the area has continued to burgeon too, despite the ending of most colonial insurgencies by the early 1980s and the resolution of guerrilla conflicts in Vietnam, Algeria and Southern Africa.

Insurgency since this time has evolved into a variety of newer forms in the post-colonial era and has become linked to a variety of conflicts centred on trafficking in narcotics, precious stones and metals, hardwoods and child trafficking. In addition, many modern insurgencies are not necessarily linked to stable state structures but may be a product of fragile or weak state structures prone to degenerate into warlord formations centred on regional, ethnic or clan networks. Moreover, both insurgent and counter-insurgent military strategies have been considerably affected by the evolution of military technology in the post-Cold War era. Insurgent formations are no longer reliant upon the support and assistance of a few major powers involved in a wider Cold War conflict but on a global network of arms dealers. The range of weaponry has become increasingly sophisticated and theories of 'Fourth-Generation Warfare' have intruded into recent analyses of insurgency and counter insurgency, indicating that analyses of contemporary insurgent movement are a often closely related to weak state structures or state failure, as well as aspects of post-Cold War warfare broadly termed 'new wars'. These are shaped by sub-state movements forging and manufacturing newer and varied forms of identity – often in response to the wider impact of a global media. This handbook will be of great interest to all students of insurgency and small wars, terrorism/counter-terrorism, strategic studies, security studies and IR in general, as well as professional military colleges and policymakers.

CONTENTS Introduction: The Study of Insurgency and Counter-insurgency Paul Rich and Isabelle Duyvesteyn Part 1: Theoretical and Analytical Issues 1. The Historiography of Insurgency Ian Beckett 2. The Sociological and Psychological Study of Insurgency and Counterinsurgency Jeffrey Sluka 3. Rethinking the Nature of Insurgency Steven Metz 4. Changing Forms of Insurgency: Pirates and Narcogangs? Robert Bunker 5. Insurgency, Counter-insurgency and Policing Alice Hills 6. Insurgency and Cyber-war David Betz 7. Ethical Dimensions to Insurgency and Counter-insurgency Christopher Coker Part 2: Insurgent Movements 8. Insurgent Movements in Latin America Daniel Castro 9. Insurgent Movements in Africa William Reno 10. Insurgent Movements in Iraq Ahmed Hashim 11. The Insurgency of Hamas and Hizballah TBA 12. Insurgent Movements in South East Asia Larry Cline 13. Insurgent Movements in Pakistan Christine Fair 14. Insurgency in Afghanistan Antonio Giustozzi 15. Insurgent Movements in India Navnita Chadha Behera 16. Insurgent Movements in Russia John Russell Part 3: Counterinsurgency 17. The Debate on Counter-insurgency William Rosenau 18. The Technology and Logistics of Modern Counter-insurgency Kevin O’Brien 19. Trends in US Counter-insurgency Tom Mockaitis 20. Counter-insurgency in Iraq and Afghanistan: A Strategic Watershed? John Nagl 21. On Israeli Counter-insurgent Doctrines and Practice Sergio Catignani 22. A 'Successful' Model of Counter-insurgency? The Sri Lankan Government’s War against the LTTE TBA 23. British Counter-insurgency since Ulster Warren Chin 24. Counter-insurgency in a Non-democratic State: The Russian Example Yuri Zhukov 25. Counter-insurgency in South America Mark T. Berger 26. Counter-insurgency in India Sumit Ganguly and David Fidler 27. Counter-insurgency in Pakistan Julian Schofield 28. Counter-insurgency in China Martin I. Wayne 29.

Counter-insurgency in South East Asia Tom Marks Part 4: Insurgency and Counter-insurgency in a Globalising World 30.

Contemporary Insurgency and Counter-insurgency David Kilcullen 31. Emerging Trends in the Twenty-first Century Paul Rich and Isabelle Duyvesteyn

The Routledge Handbook of New Security Studies Edited by J. Peter Burgess, PRIO, Oslo, Norway PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £125.00 $185.00; 246x174 mm; 316pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48437-4; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This new Handbook gathers together state-of-the-art theoretical reflection and empirical research by a group of leading international scholars in the subdiscipline of Critical Security Studies. In today’s globalised setting, the challenge of maintaining security is no longer limited to the traditional foreign-policy and military tools of the nation-state, and security and insecurity are no longer considered as dependent only upon geopolitics and military strength, but rather are also seen to depend upon social, economic, environmental, ethical models of analysis and tools of action. The contributors discuss and evaluate this fundamental shift in four key areas: I. New security concepts II. New security subjects III. New security objects IV. New security practices Offering a comprehensive theoretical and empirical overview of this evolving field, this book will be essential reading for all students of critical security studies, human security, international/global security, political theory and IR in general. J. Peter Burgess is Research Professor at PRIO, the International Peace Research Institute, Oslo, where he leads the Security Programme and edits the interdisciplinary journal Security Dialogue. In addition, he is Adjunct Professor at the Norwegian University of Science and Technology, Trondheim (NTNU), and Research Fellow at the Institute for European Studies, Brussels.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction J. Peter Burgess Part 1: New Security Concepts 2. Civilizational Security Brett Bowden 3. Risk Oliver Kessler 4.

Small Arms Keith Krause 5. Critical Human Security Taylor Owen 6. Critical Geopolitics Simon Dalby Part 2: New Security Subjects 7 . Biopolitics Michael Dillon 8. Gendered Security Laura Shepherd 9. Identity Security Pinar Bilgin 10. Security as Ethics Anthony Burke 11. Financial Security Marieke de Goede 12. International Law and Security Kristin B. Sandvik Part 3: New Security Objects 13. Environmental Security Jon Barnett 14. Food Security Rachel Slater and Steve Wiggins 15. Energy Security Roland Dannreuther 16. Cyber Security Myriam Dunn Cavelty 17. Pandemic Security Stephan Elbe 18. Biosecurity Frida Kuhlau and John Hart Part 4: New Security Practices 19. Surveillance Mark Salter 20. Urban Insecurity David Murakami Wood 21. Privatization of Security Anna

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

335 Leander 22. Migration William Walters 23. Security Technologies Emmanuel-Pierre Guittet and Julien Jeandesboz 24. Designing Security Cynthia Weber and Mark Lacy 25. New Mobile Crime Monica den Boer

Routledge Handbook of Terrorism Research Edited by Alex Schmid, University of St Andrews, UK, Albert Jongman, Ministry of Defence, the Netherlands and Eric Price, International Atomic Energy Agency, Austria PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £125.00 $199.00; 246x174 mm; 512pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-41157-8; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book is a new edition of the most comprehensive existing reference book on political terrorism, previously published to great acclaim in 1984. It is a monumental collection of definitions, conceptual frameworks, paradigmatic formulations, and bibliographic sources, which has been revised and updated as a resource for the expanding community of researchers on the subject of terrorism.

This Handbook surpasses the previous edition in both scope and importance. Handbook of Terrorism Research will be essential reading for all students of terrorism, political science and security studies, as well as policy makers and professionals in the security field.

CONTENTS 1.Acknowledgments 2. Introduction Alex P. Schmid 3. The Problem of Defining Terrorism Alex P. Schmid 3.1. Appendix: 250 Definitions of Terrorism Schmid and Easson 4. Typologies of Terrorism Sarah Marsden and Alex P. Schmid 5. Theories of Terrorism Bradley McAllister and Alex P. Schmid 5.1. Appendix: Hypotheses on Root Causes of Terrorism A.Schmid 6. Data Bases of Terrorism Neill Bowie and Alex P. Schmid 6.1. Appendix: List of Research Centers and Programmes on Terrorism and Political Violence Alex P. Schmid and Gillian Duncan 7. Literature of Terrorism Alex P.Schmid 7.1. Library Resources for Research on Terrorism Eric Price 8. Bibliography of Terrorism Gillian Duncan, Albert J. Jongman and Alex P. Schmid 9. List of Extremist and Terrorist Organizations Albert J. Jongman 9.1 Appendix: Chronology of Al Qaeda Attacks Bradley McAllister 9.2 Appendix: Chronology of Al -Qaeda Communiques from Osama Bin Laden and Ayman al Zawahiri Donald Petersson 10. Glossary and Acronyms on Terrorism and Counter-Terrorism Alex P. Schmid 11. About the Authors

The Routledge Handbook of Transatlantic Security Edited by Jussi Hanhimäki, Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies, Geneva, Switzerland, Georges-Henri Soutou and Basil Germond, University of Central Lancashire, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £125.00 $199.00; 246x174 mm; 336pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57283-5; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This new Handbook provides readers with the tools to understand the evolution of transatlantic security from the Cold War era to the early 21st century. After World War II, the US retained a strong presence as the dominant member of NATO throughout the Cold War. Former enemies, such as Germany, became close allies, while even countries that often criticized the United States made no serious attempt to break with Washington. This pattern of security co-operation continued after the end of the Cold War, with NATO expansion eastwards extending US influence. Despite the Iraq war prompting a seemingly irreparable transatlantic confrontation, the last years of the Bush administration witnessed a warming of US-European relations, expected to continue with the Obama administration. The contributors address the following key questions arising from the history of transatlantic security relations: What lies behind the growing and continuing European dependency on security policy on the United States and what are the political consequences of this? Is this dependency likely to continue or will an independent European Common Foreign and Security Policy eventually emerge? What has been the impact of 'out-of-area' issues on transatlantic security cooperation? The essays in this Handbook cover a broad range of historical and contemporary themes, including the founding of NATO; the impact of the Korean War; the role of nuclear (non-)proliferation; perspectives of individual countries (especially France and Germany); the impact of culture, identity and representation in shaping post-Cold War transatlantic relations; institutional issues, particularly EU-NATO relations; the Middle East; and the legacy of the Cold War, notably tensions with Russia. This Handbook will be of much interest to students of transatlantic security, NATO, Cold War Studies, foreign policy and IR in general. Basil Germond is Research Associate at the Centre for Sustainable Development, University of Central Lancashire. Jussi M. Hanhimäki is professor of international history and politics at the Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies in Geneva. Georges-Henri Soutou is Professor Emeritus at Paris-Sorbonne (Paris IV) University.

CONTENTS Introduction, editors Part I: Transatlantic Security in the Cold War Era 1. Three ministers and the world they made: Acheson, Bevin and Schuman, and the Making of the North Atlantic Treaty Anne Deighton 2. The Korean War: Miscalculation and Alliance Transformation Samuel Wells 3. The Doctrine of Massive Retaliation and the Impossible Nuclear Defense of the Atlantic Alliance:

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

336 From MC 48 to MC 70 (1953-1959) François David 4. IVth Republic France and the Atlantic Alliance: Between faithfulness to the alliance and national interests, Jenny Raflik 5. The Fourth Republic and NATO: Loyalty to the Alliance versus National Demands George-Henri Soutou 6. NATO Forever? Willy Brandt's Heretical Thoughts on an Alternative Future Benedikt Schoenborn 7.

Negotiating with the Enemy and Having Problems with the Allies: the impact of the Non-proliferation Treaty on Transatlantic Relations Leopoldo Nuti 8. Power Shifts and New Security Needs: NATO, European Identity, and the Reorganization of the West, 1967–75 Daniel Möckli and Andreas Wenger 9. West Germany and the United States during the Middle East Crisis of 1973: 'Nothing but a Semi-Colony'? Bernhard Blumenau 10. The United States and the 'Loss' of Iran: Repercussions on Transatlantic Barbara Zanchetta Part II: Transatlantic Security Beyond the Cold War 11. The Warsaw Pact, NATO and the End of the Cold War Jérôme Elie 12. The Road to Saint Malo: Germany and EU-NATO Relations after the Cold War Wolfgang Krieger 13. EU-NATO relations after the Cold War Hanna Ojanen 14. Security of the EU Boundaries in the Post Cold-War Era Axel Marion 15. Venus Has Learned Geopolitics: the European Union’s Frontier and Transatlantic Relations Basil Germond 16. The Rise and Fall of Criticism Towards the United States in Transatlantic Relations: From Anti-Americanism to Obamania Tuomas Forsberg 17. Strategic Culture and Security: American Antiterrorist Policy and the Use of Soft Power after 9/11 Jérôme Gygax 18. European Security Identity since the end of the cold war Guillaume de Rougé 19. A Realistic Reset with Russia: Practical Expectations for US-Russian Relations James Goldgeier 20. The Obama Administration and Transatlantic Security: Problems and Prospects Jussi M. Hanhimäki 21. Conclusion: Is the Present Future of Transatlantic Security already History? Jean Jacques De Dardel

The Routledge Handbook of War and Society Edited by Steven Carlton-Ford, University of Cincinnatti, USA and Morten G. Ender, United States Military Academy, West Point, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £125.00 $199.00; 246x174 mm; 368pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-56732-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The wars in Iraq and Afghanistan represent two of the most interesting and potentially troubling events of recent decades. In the wake of 9/11, the United States and other nations went to war in Afghanistan presumably to find and either capture or kill Osama bin Laden and other leaders of Al Qaeda. Following on the heels of the war in Afghanistan, the U.S. and other nations embarked on a war in Iraq, ostensibly to find and destroy Saddam Hussein’s stockpiles of weapons of mass destruction, and eventually as the rationale evolved, to free Iraq and create a democratic government. These two wars—so similar in their beginnings—generated different responses from various publics and the mass media; they have had profound effects on the members of the armed services, on their families and relatives, and on the people of Iraq and Afghanistan. The wars, particularly the war in Iraq, have created conditions and situations of interest to sociologists of the media, military sociologists, psychologists, and anthropologists, military strategists, political scientists, students of humanitarian aid, social psychologists, scholars of social movements, and theorists of globalization. In short, this edited volume will provide an introduction to current sociological and behavioral research on the effects of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.

This book will be of interest to students of the Iraq and Afghanistan wars, miltiary sociology, war studies, anthropology, US politics and psychology.

CONTENTS Part 1: War on the Ground: Combat and its Aftermath 1. 21st Century Narratives from Afghanistan: Storytelling, Morality and War Anne Irwin and Ryan Pengelly 2. Two U.S. Combat Units in Iraq: Psychological Contracts When Expectations and Realities Diverge Wilbur Scott, David McCone, and George Mastroianni 3. Capturing Saddam Hussein: Social Network Analysis and Counterinsurgency Operations Brian J. Reed and David R. Segal 4. Fighting Two Protracted Wars with an All-Volunteer Force Susan M. Ross 5. Irregular War Brigid Myers Pavilonis 6. Learning the Lessons of Counterinsurgency: The U.S. From Vietnam to Iraq Ian Roxborough 7. Apples, Barrels, and Abu Ghraib George R. Mastroianni and George Reed 8. Anomie as ‘Derangement’ at Abu Ghraib, Bagram Air Force Base, and Guantanamo Bay: An Examination of Postemotional Displacement, Scapegoating, and Responsibility Ryan Ashley Caldwell and Stjepan G. Mestrovic Part 2: War on the Ground: Non-Combat Operations 9. Policing PostWar Iraq: Insurgency, Civilian Police, and the Reconstruction of Society Mathieu Deflem and Suzanne Sutphin 10. Policing Afghanistan: Civilian Police Reform and the Resurgence of the Taliban Mathieu Deflem 11. Managing Humanitarian Information in Iraq Aldo Benini, Charles Conley, Joseph Donahue, and Shawn Messick 12. Role of Contractors and other Non-Military Personnel in Today’s Wars O. Shawn Cupp and William C. Latham, Jr . 13. Psychological Operations in Afghanistan: Measuring the Effectiveness of Radio Malumat and Sulh Newspaper James E. Griffith, David Champagne and Joseph Arlinghaus 14. Cholera in Iraq: Indirect Health Consequences of War Daniel Poole 15. Iraqi Adolescents: Self-Regard, Self-Derogation, and Perceived Threat in War Steve Carlton-Ford, Morten G. Ender and Ahoo Tabatabai Part 3: The War Back Home: The Social Construction of War, its Heroes and its Enemies 16. Globalization and the Invasion of Iraq: State Power and the Enforcement of Neo-liberalism Daniel Egan 17. Why the Pakistani Nation Opposes the Afghan War Riaz Ahmed Shaik 18. Talking War: How Elite Newspaper Editorials and Opinion Pieces Debated the Attack on Iraq Alexander G. Nikolaev and Douglas V. Porpora 19. Debating Antiwar Protests: The Microlevel Discourse of Social Movement Framing on a University LISTSERV Mark Hedley and Sara A. Clark 20. Mass Media as Risk-Management in the ‘War on Terror’ Christopher Pieper 21. Making Heroes: An Attributional Perspective Gregory C. Gibson, Richard Hogan, John Stahura and Eugene Jackson 22. Homemade Enemies: The Social Construction of the Enemy in the War on Terror Erin Steuter and Deborah Wills Part 4: The War Back Home: Families and Youth on the Home Front 23. Greedy Media: Army Families, Embedded Reporting, and War in Iraq Morten G. Ender, Kathleen M. Campbell, Toya J. Davis and Patrick R. Michaelis 24. Military Child WellBeing in the Face of Multiple Deployments Rachel Lipari, Anna Winters, Kenneth Matos, Jason Smith and Lindsay Rock 25. Youth Attitudes toward the Wars in Iraq and Afghanistan: Trends and Variations Morten G. Ender, David E. Rohall and Michael D. Matthews

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

337

Health and the National Health Service Contemporary Issues in Public Policy

John Carrier, London School of Economics, UK and Ian Kendell, University of Portsmouth, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 350pp. www.routledge.com/978-1-904385-14-1; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Reviewing recent healthcare policy in the NHS, this book firmly locates the NHS in the context of the welfare state. Setting health policy in both an historical and modern context (post-1997) Kendall and Carrier weigh up the successes and failures of the National Health Service in the United Kingdom and examine the conflicts which have driven the Health Service for over fifty years. After looking at recent responses to the apparent failure of healthcare in the United Kingdom, they conclude that the NHS has successfully met the challenges it faced when founded over sixty years ago and is likely to continue to meet the changing health needs of the population. This excellent book is appropriate for a wide range of undergraduate and postgraduate students studying health policy and the NHS. CONTENTS 1. Social Assistance and Voluntarism 2. Social Insurance and Local Government 3. War and Welfare 4. Political Parties and Pressure Groups 5. Efficiency and Equity 6. Reorganization and Rationality 7. Managers and Markets 8. New Labour and New NHS 9. Health and Health Care 10. The Role of the State 11. Rationing, Regulation and Rights 12. NHS: Success or Failure?

Immigration, Integration and Crime Contemporary Issues in Public Policy

Luigi M. Solivetti, University of Rome-La Sapienza, Italy PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $115.00; 234x156 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49072-6; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The problem of social control has constituted the acid test for the entire issue of immigration and integration. But whilst recent studies show that the crime rate for non-nationals is three, four or more, times higher than that of the country’s 'own' citizens, academic interest in these statistics has been inhibited by the political difficulties they raise. Immigration, Integration and Crime addresses this issue directly. Providing a thorough analysis of immigration and crime rates in all of the main European countries, as well as examining the situation in the US, Luigi Solivetti concludes that the widespread notion that a large non-national population produces high crime rates must be rejected. Noting the undeniably substantial, but significantly variable, contribution of non-nationals to crime statistics in Western Europe, he nevertheless goes on to analyse and explain the factors that influence the relationship between immigration and crime. It is the characteristics of the 'host' countries that is shown to be significantly associated with non-nationals’ integration and, ultimately, their involvement in crime. In particular, Solivetti concludes, it is 'social capital' in the host societies – comprised of features such as education, transparency, and openness – that plays a key role in non-nationals’ integration chances, and so in their likelihood to commit crime. Supported by extensive empirical data and statistical analysis, Immigration, Integration and Crime provides an invaluable contribution to one of the most pressing social and political debates - in Europe, and elsewhere.

CONTENTS Introduction Section 1. The debate on immigration and criminality: past and present 1.1 Immigration and criminality: some basic questions Section 2. The research project 2.1 Objectives and methods of research 2.2 Countries covered by the research 2.3 The nonnational populations covered by the research: some preliminary remarks Section 3. National and non-national population in Western Europe 3.1 Population of Western Europe and its evolution in time 3.2 Immigration and the presence of non-nationals in Europe: What has changed? 3.3 Immigrant influxes and the origin of non-nationals Section 4. Criminality in the countries of Western Europe 4.1 Criminality and social control 4.2 Immigrants and criminality in Western Europe: easy stereotypes, difficult realities 4.3 Further remarks on variations of non-nationals populations and variations of criminality: what if the explanation is not immigration? Section 5. Non-nationals in prison, non-nationals charged 5.1 Some data 5.2 Non-nationals incarceration index Section 6. Indicators of socioeconomic condition, integration and origin 6.1 Integration: a complex concept and five models 6.2 Socio-economic and cultural differences between the host countries 6.3 Differences in the integration of non-nationals in the various countries 6.4 Differences in the origin of non-nationals present in the various countries 6.5 Association between the incarceration index and the socio-economic parameters in the various European countries

Indigenous Knowledge, Ecology, and Evolutionary Biology Indigenous Peoples and Politics

Raymond Pierotti, University of Kansas, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

338 HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 307pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87924-8; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84711-4; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Indigenous ways of understanding and interacting with the natural world are characterized as Traditional Ecological Knowledge (TEK), which derives from emphasizing relationships and connections among species. This book examines TEK and its strengths in relation to Western ecological knowledge and evolutionary philosophy. Pierotti takes a look at the scientific basis of this approach, focusing on different concepts of communities and connections among living entities, the importance of understanding the meaning of relatedness in both spiritual and biological creation, and a careful comparison with evolutionary ecology. The text examines the themes and principles informing this knowledge, and offers a look at the complexities of conducting research from an indigenous perspective.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Defining Traditional Ecological Knowledge 2. All Things Are Connected: Communities as Both Ecological and Social Entities in Indigenous American Thought 3. Predators Not Prey: "Wolves of Creation" Rather Than "Lambs of God" 4. Metaphors and Models: Indigenous Knowledge and Evolutionary Ecology 5. Cultural and Biological Creation and the Concept of Relatedness 6.

Applying Principles of TEK within the Western Scientific Tradition 7. Connected to the Land: Nature and Spirit in Native American Novels 8. Ecological Indians: European Imaginations and Indigenous Reality 9. A Critical Comment on Both Western Science and Indigenous Responses to the Western Scientific Tradition 10. Who Speaks for the Buffalo? Finding the Indigenous in Academia 11.

Traditional Ecological Knowledge: The Third Alternative

Descriptions of Deviance Routledge Advances in Criminology

Stephen Hester, University of Wales Bangor, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-95570-6; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Descriptions of Deviances critically engages with the two hitherto dominant perspectives in the sociology of deviance and criminology, and thereby clarifies the key differences between these theoretical points of view and the ethnomethodological approach to deviance. Hester offers an original and exemplary contribution to ethnomethodology and conversation analysis that not only illuminates the production of descriptions of deviance in the context of referral consultations, but also explores the relations between different ‘layers’ of organization - sequential, categorical and factual - that are operative and discoverable within talk-in-interaction.

By connecting the analysis of these materials to previous ethnomethodological work on crime and deviance, Descriptions of Deviance articulates and publicises, what is now, a very substantial submerged corpus of ethnomethodological studies that are directly relevant to the sociology of deviance and criminology, but which have hardly received any attention from mainstream sociologists and criminologists.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Ethnomethodology, Sociology and Deviance 2. Assessment Sequences 3. Extended Descriptions 4. The Categorical Organization of Descriptions of Deviance 5. Recognizing References to Deviance 6. Accountably Deviant 7. Mundane Reason and the Description of Deviance 8. From Description to Intervention: The Social Organization of Educational Psychological Reaction 9.

Ethnomethodology, Deviance and the Organization of Description

Feminist Studies Routledge Advances in Feminist Studies and Intersectionality

Nina Lykke, Linköping University, Sweden PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 242pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87484-7; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85277-4; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In this book, feminist scholar Nina Lykke highlights current issues in feminist theory, epistemology and methodology. Combining introductory overviews with cutting-edge reflections, Lykke focuses on analytical approaches to gendered power differentials intersecting with other processes of social in/exclusion based on race, class, and sexuality. Lykke confronts and contrasts classical stances in feminist epistemology with poststructuralist and postconstructionist feminisms, and also brings bodily materiality into dialogue with theories of the performativity of gender and sex. This thorough and needed analysis of the state of Feminist Studies will be a welcome addition to scholars and students in Gender and Women’s Studies and Sociology.

CONTENTS

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

339 Part I: What is Feminist Studies? 1. A Guide’s Introduction 2. A Postdisciplinary Discipline 3. Undoing Proper Research Objects Part II: To Theorize Intersectional Gender/Sex 4. Intersectional Gender/Sex: A Conflictual and Power-Laden Issue 5. Theorizing Intersectionalities: Genealogies and Blind Spots 6. Genealogies of Doing 7. Making Corporealities Matter: Intersections of Gender and Sex Revisited Part III: To Re-tool the Thinking Technologies 8. Rethinking Epistemologies 9. Methodologies, Methods and Ethics 10. Shifting Boundaries between Academic and Creative Writing Practices Part IV: To Use a Feminist Hermeneutics 11. Doing and Undoing the God-Trick: Analytical Examples

Sexuality, Gender and Power Routledge Advances in Feminist Studies and Intersectionality

Edited by Anna G. Jónasdóttir, Örebro University, Sweden, Valerie Bryson, Huddersfield University, UK and Kathleen B. Jones, San Diego State University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 244pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88087-9; September 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This volume aims to break new ground in the fields of sexuality and gender studies. Its framework is grounded in three interconnected principles: that ideas and knowledge can have transformative political effects; that theory must be firmly grounded in ‘real world’ conditions and experiences; and that the investigation of sexuality and its intersections with gender and other roles, identities and structural contexts must lie at the heart of social and political analysis. It offers perspectives and case analyses that, taken together, contribute to the development of new approaches to thinking about sexuality and its relationship to gender that go beyond existing theories and practices.

Women, Civil Society and the Geopolitics of Democratization Routledge Advances in Feminist Studies and Intersectionality

Denise M. Horn, Northeastern University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 120pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87225-6; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85459-4; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Over the past decade, democratization and civil society promotion became key variables in preserving global security and the liberal economic market. This book examines the prevalence of democratization policies as a hegemonic geopolitical tool; these policies represent a concerted political effort in which civil society organizations are manipulated through funding strategies. Denise Horn offers a fresh, innovative feminist-constructivist perspective by arguing that Western gender norms—i.e. those norms that determine degrees of participation within civil society—inform the policies of hegemonic powers and transform the foundations of civil society in transitional states. This powerful volume will be of interest to students and scholars in Gender and Women’s Studies, Political Science, and International Relations.

CONTENTS Part 1: Constructing Gender and Democratization Within a Framework of Geopolitics 1. Gentle Invasions: Creating Pro-American and Pro-European Spaces for Global Democracy 2. Gentle Invasions and the Development of Civil Society in Transitional States 3. PostSoviet US and EU Foreign Policy: Exploiting the Tools of Democratization Part 2: Case Studies: Gentle Invasions and the Newly Independent States 4. Setting the Agenda: US and Nordic Gender Policies in the Estonian Transition to Democracy 5. Constructing Agency: Civil Society and Gender Identity in Moldova 6. Gentle Invasions: Universally Applicable or Culturally Specific?

The Mutual Construction of Statistics and Society Routledge Advances in Research Methods

Edited by Ann Rudinow Saetnan, Norwegian University of Science and Technology, Heidi Mork Lomell, University of Oslo, Norway and Svein Hammer, Norwegian University of Science and Technology PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 316pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87370-3; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84661-2; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Statistics are often seen as simple, straightforward, and objective descriptions of society. However, what we choose to count, what we choose not to count, who does the counting, and the categories and values we choose to apply when counting, matter. This volume

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

340 addresses the ways in which statistics and numbers are gathered and applied in social science research. The contributors argue that we must become more aware of the power and the limitations of statistics. Learning statistics needs to be about more than simply mastering the techniques of using the tool; it needs to also be about learning the dangers of that tool and learning to control it within social and ethical bounds. These dangers lie in the routines through which statistics are applied; the discourses from which they emerge and into which they are deployed; the power relations created by those discourses; and the assumptions, meanings, and categories statistics carry with them in those discourses. This volume will be necessary reading for students and scholars using quantitative data within the social sciences.

CONTENTS Introduction: By the Very Act of Counting: The Mutual Construction of Statistics and Society Ann Rudinow Sætnan, Heidi Mork Lomell and Svein Hammer Section 1: Overarching Themes and Approaches 1. Numbers: Their Relation to Power and Organization Jon Hovland 2. Words and Numbers: For a Sociology of the Statistical Argument Alain Desrosières 3. Sociology in the Making: Statistics as a Mediator Between the Social Sciences, Practice, and the State Christopher Kullenberg 4. Governing by Indicators and Outcomes: A Neo-Liberal Governmentality? Svein Hammer Section 2: Visibility, Invisibility and Transparency 5. Ethnicity: Differences and Measurements Ellen Balka and Kjetil Rodje 6. Seeing Like Citizens: Unofficial Understandings of Official Racial Categories in a Brazilian University Luisa Farah Schwartzman 7. Ideas in Action: ‘Human Development’ and ‘Capability’ as Intellectual Boundary Objects Asun Lera St. Clair Section 3: Accountability and Manageability 8. Labelling and Tracking the Criminal in Mid-Nineteenth Century England and Wales: The Relationship Between Governmental Structures and Creating Official Numbers Chris Williams 9. From Categorization to Public Policy: The Multiple Roles of Electronic Triage Ellen Balka 10. Making Sense of Numbers: The Presentation of Crime Statistics in the Oslo Police Annual Reports 1950-2008 Heidi Mork Lomell 11.

Statistics on a Website: Governing Schools by Numbers Svein Hammer and Sigrunn Tvedten 12. Locating the Worths of Performance Indicators: Performing Transparencies and Accountabilities in Health Care Sonja Jerak-Zuyderent and Roland Bal Section 4: Reporting and Acts of Resistance 13. Co-Constructing Medical Diagnosis Practice and Hospital Activity Statistics: How Coding Practices Turn Patients into Numbers Gunnhild Tøndel 14. GIS in Practice: Domestication of Statistics in Policing Helene I. Gundhus

Atoms, Bytes and Genes Routledge Advances in Sociology

Martin Bauer, London School of Economics, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-95803-5; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book demonstrates the varied contributions of public resistance to technological developments. Bauer compares public resistance to three strategic technologies over the last fifty years (nuclear power, information technology, and genetic engineering), and shows how resistance contributes to efficient and sustainable developments. The theory of this book is based on a functional analogy: like pain, resistance is a signal that things are going wrong; what acute pain does for individual action, resistance does for collective projects, it motivates and defines a more realistic future. The book brings together empirical evidence from a wide range of sources, and integrates the author’s own extensive research over the last fifteen years. This empirically grounded study also offers critical discussion of key concepts, such as technology movement, objectification and legitimation, representation and framing, public opinion, attitude, risk perception and public understanding, public participation and resistance, closure and re-opening, mobilization and social influence, issue cycles CONTENTS Part 1: Theoretical Foundations 1. Technology Movements: Framing and Objectification 2. Challenge and Response: The ‘Pain’ of the Technology Project 3. New Benchmarks: Consumerism, Environmentalism, Anti-Globalisation Part 2: Nuclear Power and Risk Perceptions 4. Nuclear Power: Military and Civil Uses 5. Risk, Public Opinion and Public Understanding of Science Part 3: Information Technology and Social Mobilization 6. Information Technology: From Mainframe to WorldWideWeb 7. Social Influence and Mobilization Part 4: Genetic Engineering and Institutional Learning 8. Genetic Engineering: Life Science, Biotechnology, Cloning and Genomics 9. Institutional Learning: State Regulation and Corporate Actors Part 5: Does History Repeat Itself? 10.

Scenarios of Public Opinion over Nanotechnology

Discourse Learning and Social Evolution Routledge Advances in Sociology

Max Miller, Universität Hamburg, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $135.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-36842-1; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-02824-7; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

341 This key book is at the cutting edge of academic research within this sphere of sociology. How discourse develops in children is a critical concept for discourse learning (the development of basic premises of knowledge). This important work takes this idea and applies it to social groups and systems.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Learning How to Contradict and Still Pursue a Common End 3. Argumentation and Cognition 4. Moral Discourse 5.

Discourse and Morality: Two Case Studies of Social Conflicts in a Segmentary and a Functionally Differentiated Society 6.

Intersystemic Discourse and Coordinated Dissensus 7. Why Darwinism Fails in Explaining Social and Cultural Evolution 8. Planning and Evolution 9. Some Theoretical Aspects of Systemic Learning 10. Commentaries to 'Some Theoretical Aspects of Systemic Learning' 11. Who Conducts a Discourse: A Reply to my Commentators

Globalization and Transformations of Social Inequality Routledge Advances in Sociology

Edited by Ulrike Schuerkens, École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales, France PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 333pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87482-3; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84925-5; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Social inequality is a worldwide phenomenon. Globalization has exacerbated and alleviated inequality over the past twenty-five years.

This volume offers analytical and comparative insights from current case studies of social inequality in eleven countries within all the major regions of the world. Contributors provide an assessment of the overall social globalization phenomenon in the global world as well as the outlook transformations of global social inequality in the future. This book will be a timely addition for students and scholars of globalization studies, social inequality, sociology and cultural and social anthropology.

CONTENTS List of Tables. List of Figures. Preface Ulrike Schuerkens . Theoretical and Empirical Introduction: Globalization and Transformations of Social Inequality Ulrike Schuerkens 1. Mobilities as Dimensions of Social Inequalities Katharina Manderscheid 2.

Impact of Remittances on Income Inequalities in Romania Ana Maria Zamfir, Cristina Mocanu, Eva Militaru and Speranta Pirciog 3.

Creating Best Performing Nations in Education: The Case of the European Union’s Use of Benchmarking Susana Melo 4. Gender, Inequality, and Globalization Ilse Lenz 5. Nicaragua: Constructing the Bolivarian Alliance for the Peoples of Our America (ALBA) Thomas Muhr 6. The Transformation of the Social Issue: Poverty, Society, and the State Anete Brito Leal Ivo and Ruthy Nadia Laniado 7. Limits to the Revitalization of Labor: Social Movement Unionism in Argentina Ayse Serdar 8. Communities : A Lever for Mitigating Social Tensions in Urban China Amandine Monteil 9. Rising Income Inequality in Central and Eastern Europe: The Influence of Economic Globalization and Other Social Forces Nina Bandelj and Matthew Mahutga 10. Indian Society and Globalization: Inequality and Change Gérard Djallal Heuzé 11. Economic Globalization and the Empowerment of Local Entrepreneurs in Nigeria Adeyinka Oladayo Bankole 12. Poverty in Senegal: Theoretical Approaches and the Manifestation of Poverty in People’s Living Conditions François-Xavier de Perthuis de Laillevault and Ulrike Schuerkens . Contributors. Index.

Perspectives on Genetic Discrimination Routledge Advances in Sociology

Thomas Lemke, Goethe-Universität Frankfurt am Main, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87858-6; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Over the past 15 years, a series of empirical studies in different countries have shown that our increasing genetic knowledge leads to new forms of exclusion, disadvantaging and stigmatization. The spectrum of this "genetic discrimination" ranges from disadvantages at work, via problems with insurance policies, to difficulties with adoption agencies. The empirical studies on the problem of genetic discrimination have not gone unnoticed. Since the beginning of the 1990s, a series of legislative initiatives and statements, both on the national level and on the part of international and supranational organizations and commissions, have been put forward as ways of protecting people from genetic discrimination. This is the first book to critically evaluate the empirical evidence and the theoretical usefulness of the concept of "genetic discrimination." It discusses the advantages and limitations of adopting the concept, and offers a more complex account distinguishing between several dimensions and forms of genetic discrimination.

Twentieth Century Music and the Question of Modernity Routledge Advances in Sociology

Eduardo De La Fuente, Monash University, Australia

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

342 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 216pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-96208-7; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84547-9; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In the first decade of the twentieth century, many composers rejected the principles of tonality and regular beat. This signaled a dramatic challenge to the rationalist and linear conceptions of music that had existed in the West since the Renaissance. The ‘break with tonality’, Neo-Classicism, serialism, chance, minimalism and the return of the ‘sacred’ in music, are explored in this book for what they tell us about the condition of modernity. Modernity is here treated as a complex social and cultural formation, in which mythology, narrative, and the desire for ‘re-enchantment’ have not completely disappeared. Through an analysis of Schoenberg, Stravinsky, Boulez and Cage, 'the author shows that the twentieth century composer often adopted an artistic personality akin to Max Weber’s religious types of the prophet and priest, ascetic and mystic. Twentieth Century Music and the Question of Modernity advances a cultural sociology of modernity and shows that twentieth century musical culture often involved the adoption of ‘apocalyptic’ temporal narratives, a commitment to ‘musical revolution’, a desire to explore the limits of noise and sound, and, finally, redemption through the rediscovery of tonality. This book is essential reading for those interested in cultural sociology, sociological theory, music history, and modernity/modernism studies.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Modernity, Modernism and Music 2. Myth and Narrative in Twentieth Century Musical Culture 3. The Structure of Musical Revolutions 4. Music in Max Weber’s Sociology of Modernity 5. Modernity in Theodor Adorno’s Philosophy of Modern Music 6. Music in Modern Theories of Communication 7. Arnold Schoenberg: The Composer as Prophet 8. Igor Stravinsky: The Composer as Priest 9. Pierre Boulez: The Composer as Ascetic 10. John Cage: The Composer as Mystic 11. From Avant-Gardism to Post-Modernism 12. Musical Re-Enchantment?

Youth in Contemporary Europe Routledge Advances in Sociology

Edited by Jeremy Leaman and Martha Wörsching, both of Loughborough University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 326pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87817-3; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85153-1; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book examines the everyday living conditions experienced and also shaped by young people in Europe. Contributors reflect on the current context of economic, social and political change affecting youth in the critical transition from dependence to independence.

The volume provides the reader with a multi-dimensional and interdisciplinary view of youth cultures, drawn from a variety of recent research throughout the continent.

CONTENTS Introduction: Youth Culture in Contemporary Europe Jeremy Leaman and Martha Wörsching Part I: Life Chances and SocioEconomic Determinants of Youth Today 1. Determinants of Social Exclusion among the Young in Estonia, Germany and the United Kingdom Kairi Kasearu, Dagmar Kutsar and Avo Trumm 2. Poverty and Unemployment of Young Europeans from an Intergenerational Perspective Wielis?awa Warzywoda-Kruszy?ska, Magdalena Rek and Ewa Rokicka 3. Youth Unemployment Policy in Britain and German: A Comparison of ‘Third Way’ Approaches Jeremy Leaman Part II: Youth and Socio-Cultural Transformations 4. Young Europeans and Educational Mobility Rachel Brooks and Johanna Waters 5. Events of Hope and Events of Crisis: Childhood, Youth and Hope in Britain Peter Kraftl 6. Youth Cultures as a Way to Tackle Insecure Transitions into Adulthood Barbara Stauber 7.

Online Counselling: Meeting the Needs of Young people in Late-Modern Societies Andreas Vossler and Terry Hanley Part III: Youth as a Problem Group? 8. Some Insights into Violent Youth Crime Chris Lewis, Gavin Hales and Daniel Silverstone 9. Youth Citizenship and Risk in UK Social Policy Alan France, Liz Sutton and Amanda Waring 10. Leaving the Parental Home or Staying On? Young People in Spain and the Development of Social Capital Andreu López Blasco Part IV: Youth and Political Culture 11.

Youth Culture and European Integration in Germany: Back to European Basics? Gudrun Quenzel and Mathias Albert 12. ‘Europe?

Totally Out of My Depth’: National and European Citizenship among Young People in Germany and England Daniel Faas 13.

Political Participation of Youth: Young Germans in the European Context Wolfgang Gaiser and Johann de Rijke 14. Making a Difference? Political Participation of Young People in the UK Martha Wörsching 15. Renouncing Violence or Substituting for It? The Consequences of the Institutionalisation of Alleanza Nazionale on the Culture of Young Neo-Fascist Activists in Italy Stéphanie Dechezelles

Managing and Marketing Tourist Destinations Routledge Advances in Tourism

Metin Kozak, Mugla University, Turkey and Seyhmus Baloglu, University of Nevada, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99171-1; August 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

343 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Without adequate research and management, the potential impacts and benefits of tourism and travel services will not be maximised.

In this volume, tourism scholars Metin Kozak and Seyhmus Baloglu evaluate the theoretical approaches and applications to competitive advantage within tourist destinations and demonstrate the ways to further develop the concept of destination competitiveness for application within tourist destinations. Kozak and Baloglu highlight the need for collaboration between the representatives of both the public and private sectors to adequately manage the growth and issues relevant within international tourism, marketing, management and competitiveness. This book will be indispensable to students and scholars of tourism, hospitality, and leisure and recreation programs, as well as practitioners within these industries.

CONTENTS 1. Why Destination Competitiveness? 1.0. Introduction 1.1. Major Characteristics of the Tourism Industry 1.2. Trends of the Tourism Industry 1.3. Why Destination Competitiveness? 1.4. Summary 1.5. Case Study 2. Destination Competitiveness: An Overview 2.0.

Introduction 2.1. Destination Competitiveness: An Overview 2.2. Overview of Past Destination Competitiveness Research 2.3.

Framework of Destination Competitiveness 2.4. Summary 2.5. Case Study 3. Determinants of Destination Competitiveness 3.0.

Introduction 3.1. Factors Affecting Destination Competitiveness 3.1.1. Bargaining Power of Customers (Analysis of Demand Side) 3.1.2. The Bargaining Power of Suppliers (Tour Operators) 3.1.3. Threat of Emergence of New Destinations 3.1.4. Threat of Substitute Products and Services 3.1.5. Competition Among Existing Destinations (Analysis of Supply Side) 3.1.5.1. Access to Tourist Markets (Distance) 3.1.5.2. Non-Controllable Factors 3.2. Summary 3.3. Case Study 4. Relationship and Network Strategies for Destination Management 4.0. Introduction 4.1. Tourist Relationship Management 4.2. Supplier Relationship Management 4.3.

Knowledge Management 4.4. Destination-Based Quality Management 4.5. Benchmarking Tourism Destinations 4.5. Summary 4.6.

Case Study 5. Destination-Based Marketing Strategies 5.0. Introduction 5.1. Cost (Price) Leadership 5.2. Product Diversification 5.3.

Destination Positioning 5.4. Market Segmentation 5.5. Enhanced Tourist Satisfaction 5.6. Sustained Destination Image 5.7.

Destination Life Cycle and New Product Development 5.8. Innovation 5.9. Destination Branding 5.10. SWOT Analysis 5.11. Market Research 5.12. Summary 5.13. Case Study 6. Transition from Traditional Marketing to ‘IT’ Marketing 6.0. Introduction 6.1.

Importance of Information & Communication Technology in Tourism 6.2. Distribution Channels in Tourism 6.3. Effects on the Structure of Distribution Channels 6.4. Communication in Tourism, IT and Destination Competitiveness 6.5. Managerial Implications 6.6. Summary 6.7. Case study

Tourism and Poverty Routledge Advances in Tourism

Regina Scheyvens, Massey University, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 160pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99675-4; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Tourism and Poverty addresses a critical question facing many academics, governments, aid agencies, tourism organisations, and conservation bodies around the world: can tourism work as a tool to overcome poverty? This book is the first to present a focused description and critique of the issues surrounding poverty and tourism. Relying on a wealth of primary data on tourism, Scheyvens supports her findings with novel case studies from her own research, such as a ‘voyeurs of poverty’-style ‘volunteer tour’ in Nepal, to pro-poor changes being implemented by major British tour operators, to community-controlled budget tourism in Samoa. This book will fundamentally alter the way academics and tourism professionals understand the current and potential role of tourism in alleviating poverty.

Tourist Shopping Villages Routledge Advances in Tourism

Laurie Murphy, Pierre Benckendorff, Gianna Moscardo and Philip Pearce, all of James Cook University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-96527-9; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Shopping is perhaps the most universal of tourist activities. Tourists form a separate retailing segment from the general population and place importance on different products and product attributes, contributing billions of dollars each year for both the private and public sector by which retail areas, townscapes and streetscapes can be revitalised. This landmark volume – based on a two year research program from a team of authors -- examines the forms and functions of approximately 50 tourist shopping villages in Australia, New Zealand, the United Kingdom, Ireland, Canada and the United States. This volume will interest scholars of Tourism, Geography, Business, and Economics, as well as government officials, civic leaders, and individual entrepreneurs and retailers seeking to maximise their returns and local community residents

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

344 CONTENTS 1. Tourist Shopping Opportunities: Placing Tourist Shopping Villages in a Larger Context 2. Tourist Shopping Experiences: The Shopper’s Perspective 3. A Conceptual Model of Sustainable Tourist Shopping Village Design 4. The Importance of Location, Anchor Attractions and Entrepreneurs 5. Shopping Village Streetscapes, Landscapes and Servicescapes 6. Theming and Presentation 7. The Structure and Organisation of Shopping Village Activities 8. Support Services and Facilities 9. Barriers, Challenges and Information Needs 10. The Future of Tourist Shopping Villages

Tourists, Tourism and the Good Life Routledge Advances in Tourism

Philip Pearce, James Cook University, Australia, Sebastian Filep, MODUL University Vienna, Austria and Glenn Ross, James Cook University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 305pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99329-6; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84586-8; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Tourism is arguably one of the largest self-initiated commercial interventions to create well-being and happiness on the entire planet.

Yet there is a lack of specific attention to the ways in which we can better understand and evaluate the relationship between well-being and travel. The recent surge of scholarly work in positive psychology concerned with human well-being and flourishing represents a contemporary force with the potential to embellish and augment much current tourism study. This book maps out the field and then draws linkages between tourists, tourism and positive psychology. It discusses topics such as the issue of excess materialism and its fragile relationship with well-being, the value of positive psychology to lifestyle businesses, and the insights of the research field to spa and wellness tourism. This volume will interest those who study and practise tourism as well as scholars and graduate students in a range of disciplines such as psychology, sociology, business and leisure.

CONTENTS Introduction to Chapter 1. 1. Scholarship in Psychology and Tourism Section A. Introduction to Section A: Principally About Individuals. 2. Flow and Tourist Satisfaction 3. Time, Tourism, Host Communities and Positive Psychology 4. Ethics, Tourism and Wellbeing Section B. Introduction to Section B: Individuals and Tourism Contexts. 5. Materialism in Tourism and its Alleviation Through Good Values 6. Lifestyle Businesses and Their Community Effects 7. Spa and Wellness Tourism and Positive Psychology 8.

Summary, Synthesis and Future Directions

Development and Gender Equity in the Anglophone Caribbean Routledge International Studies of Women and Place

Michelle Rowley, University of Maryland, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87854-8; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book uses the Anglophone Caribbean as its site of critique to explore two important questions within development studies. First, to what extent has the United Nations' call to implement gender-mainstreaming projects resulted in the realization of gender equity for women within developing societies? Second, does gender-mainstreaming have the conceptual, operational, and technical capacities to address the centrality of the body in 21st-century lobbies for gender equity? In asnwering these questions, Rowley examines such issues as reproductive rights and equity, sexual harassment, and sexual minorities' rights.

Gender and Rurality Routledge International Studies of Women and Place

Lia Bryant, University of South Australia and Barbara Pini, Curtin University of Technology, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 226pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-48899-0; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84828-9; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The study of gender in rural spaces is still in its infancy. Thus far, there has been little exploration of the constitution of the varied and differing ways that gender is constituted in rural settings. This book will place the question of gender, rurality and difference at its center. The authors examine theoretical constructions of gender and explore the relationship between these and rural spaces. While there have been extensive debates in the feminist literature about gender and the intersection of multiple social categories, rural feminist social scientists have yet to theorize what gender means in a rural context and how gender blurs and intersects with other

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

345 social categories such as sexuality, ethnicity, class and (dis)ability. This book will use empirical examples from a range of research projects undertaken by the authors as well as illustrations from work in the Australasia region, Europe, and the United States to explore gender and rurality and their relation to sexuality, ethnicity, class and (dis)ability.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Gender, Indigeneity, and Rurality 3. Gender, Ethnicities, and Rurality 4. Gender, Class, and Rurality 5. Gender, Heterosexuality, and Rurality 6. Gender, Disability, and Rurality 7. Gender, Aging, and Rurality 8. Conclusion

The Cultural Politics of Female Sexuality in South Africa Routledge Research in Gender and Society

Henriette Gunkel, Fort Hare Institute of Social and Economic Research, South Africa PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 182pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87269-0; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85603-1; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Sexual identity has emerged into the national discourse of post-apartheid South Africa, bringing the subject of rights and the question of gender relations and cultural authenticity into the focus of the nation state’s politics. This book is a fascinating reflection on the effects of these discourses on non-normative modes of sexuality and intimacy and on the country more generally. While in 1996, South Africa became the first country in the world that explicitly incorporated lesbian and gay rights within a Bill of Rights, much of the country has continued to see homosexuality as un-African. Henriette Gunkel examines how colonialism and apartheid have historically shaped constructions of gender and sexuality and how these concepts have not only been re-introduced and shaped by understandings of homosexuality as un-African but also by the post-apartheid constitution and continued discourse within the nation.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. ‘Homosexuality is Un-African’: Unfolding the Colonial Legacy within Post-Apartheid Homophobia 2. Is Pink Really White in South Africa? Reflections on Discourses of Homosexuality in the Post/Apartheid State 3. Homosociality and the Technologies of Homophobia 4. ‘I Didn’t Think of It as Lesbian’: Mapping out Intimacy and Homo/Sociality 5. Aftermath

Ethics, Materiality, and the Problem of Objectification Routledge Research in Gender and Society

Ann Cahill, Elon University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 244pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88288-0; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Objectification is a foundational concept in feminist theory, used to analyze such disparate social phenomena as sex work, representation of women's bodies, and sexual harassment. However, there has been an increasing trend among scholars of rejecting and re-evaluating the philosophical assumptions which underpin it. In this work, Cahill suggests an abandonment of the notion of objectification, on the basis of its dependence on a Kantian ideal of personhood. Such an ideal fails to recognize sufficiently the role the body plays in personhood, and thus results in an implicit vilification of the body and sexuality. The problem with the phenomena associated with objectification is not that they render women objects, and therefore not-persons, but rather that they construct feminine subjectivity and sexuality as wholly derivative of masculine subjectivity and sexuality. Women, in other words, are not objectified as much as they are derivatized, turned into a mere reflection or projection of the other. Cahill argues for an ethics of materiality based upon a recognition of difference, thus working toward an ethics of sexuality that is decidedly ­ and simultaneously ­ incarnate and intersubjective.

Gender and Neoliberalism in India Routledge Research in Gender and Society

Elisabeth Armstrong, Smith College, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-96158-5; February 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores how the All India Democratic Women's Association, a socialist women's organization based in India, has flourished in neoliberalism's shadow.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

346 CONTENTS Introduction 1. Multiple Pasts: AIDWA and the Indian Post-Independence Women’s Movement 2. Gender and Socialist Ideology in the Nineties 3. Activist Research, Political Knowledge 4. Time and Money in Neoliberalism: The Building Blocks of Women’s Political Organization 5. In Solidarity: AIDWA’s Transnational Translation. Conclusion

Gender, Violence, and Law Routledge Research in Gender and Society

Melanie Randall, The University of Western Ontario, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87117-4; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The law has been the major site of advocacy, reform efforts and social change in relation to a variety of complex social problems.

Gendered violence is one of them. After nearly three decades of advocacy and law reform, what can we understand about current legal responses to, and engagement with, issues of gendered violence? This book aims squarely at critically analyzing legal responses to, interventions in, and remedies for violence against women, with an overarching aim of assessing the extent to which the law has been - or could still be - effectively utilized in the project to end violence in women’s lives. Drawing on Canadian, U.S. and UK jurisprudence and spanning a variety of contexts of gendered violence (including domestic violence, sexual assault, child abuse, and rape), Melanie Randall illustrates the persistent complexities and challenges surrounding legal understandings of and responses to violence against women.

Migration, Domestic Work and Affect Routledge Research in Gender and Society

Encarnación Gutiérrez-Rodríguez, University of Manchester, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 260pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99473-6; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84866-1; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Domestic and care work in private households is now the largest employment sector for migrant women. This book sheds light on these households through its focus on the interpersonal relationships between Latin American “undocumented migrant” domestic workers and employers in Austria, Germany, Spain and the UK. The personal experiences of these women form the basis for Gutiérrez-Rodríguez’s decolonial analysis of the feminization of labor in private households and cultural analysis of domestic work as affective labor. This book will be a necessary voice in the debates on citizenship, cosmopolitanism, and migrant workers’ rights.

CONTENTS Introduction: Sensing Domestic Work. 1. Decolonizing Migration Studies: On Transcultural Translation 2. Coloniality of Labor: Migration Regimes and the Latin American Diaspora in Europe 3. Governing the Household: On the Underside of Governmentality 4.

Biopolitics and Value: Complicating the Feminization of Labor 5. Symbolic Power and Difference: Racializing Inequality 6. Affective Value: Ontologies of Exploitation 7. Decolonial Ethics and the Politics of Affects: Talking Rights

Transgender Identities Routledge Research in Gender and Society

Edited by Sally Hines, University of Leeds, UK and Tam Sanger, Queen’s University Belfast, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 315pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99930-4; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85614-7; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION In recent years transgender has emerged as a subject of increasing social and cultural interest. This volume offers vivid accounts of the diversity of living transgender in today's world. The first section, "Emerging Identities," maps the ways in which social, cultural, legal and medical developments shape new identities on both an individual and collective level. Rather than simply reflecting social change, these shifts work to actively construct contemporary identities. The second section, "Trans Governance," examines how law and social policy have responded to contemporary gender shifts. The third section, "Transforming Identity," explores gender and sexual identity practices within cultural and subcultural spaces. The final section, "Transforming Theory?", offers a theoretical reflection on the increasing visibility of trans people in today’s society and traces the challenges and the contributions transgender theory has brought to gender theory, queer theory and sociological approaches to identity and citizenship. Featuring contributions from throughout the

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

347 world, this volume represents the cutting-edge scholarship in transgender studies and will be of interest to scholars and students interested in gender, sexuality, and sociology.

CONTENTS Introduction Sally Hines Part 1: Emerging Identities 1. The Emergence of New Transgendering Identities in the Age of the Internet Richard Ekins and Dave King 2. Becoming Knowably Gendered: The Production of Transgender Possibilities and Constraints in the Mass and Alternative Press from 1990-2005 in the United States Laurel Westbrook 3. Telling Trans Stories: (Un)doing the Science of Sex Alison Rooke Part 2: Trans Governance 4. Recognising Diversity? The Gender Recognition Act and Transgender Citizenship Sally Hines 5. Transsexual Agents: Negotiating Authenticity and Embodiment within the UK’s Medicolegal System Zowie Davy 6.

(In)Visibility in the Workplace: The Experiences of Trans-Employees in the UK Em Rundall and Vincent Vecchietti Part 3: Transforming Identities 7. The Impact of Race on Gender Transformation in a Drag Troupe Eve Shapiro 8. Transgendering in an Urban Dutch Streetwalking Zone Katherine Gregory 9. Beyond Borders: Lived Experiences of Atypically Gendered Transsexual People Sara Davidmann Part 4: Transforming Theory 10. Who Put the ‘Hetero’ in Sexuality? Angie Fee 11. Corporeal Silences and Bodies that Speak: The Promises and Limitations of Queer in Lesbian/Queer Sexual Spaces Corie J. Hammers 12. Towards a Sociology of Gender Diversity: The Indian and UK Cases Surya Monro 13. Beyond Gender and Sexuality Binaries in Sociological Theory: The Case for Transgender Inclusion Tam Sanger

Identity in the Internet Age Routledge Research in Information Technology and Society

Fengshu Liu, University of Oslo, Norway PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87486-1; December 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Fengshu Liu situates the lives of Chinese youth and the growth of the Internet against the backdrop of rapid and profound social transformation in China. In 2008, the total of Internet users in China had reached 253 million (in comparison with 22.5 million in 2001). Yet, despite rapid growth, the Internet in China is so far a predominantly urban-youth phenomenon, with young people under 30 (especially those under 24), mostly members of the only-child generation, as the main group of the netizens’ population. As both youth and the Internet hold the potential to inflict, or at least contribute to, far-reaching economic, social, cultural, and political changes, this book fulfills a pressing need for a systematical investigation of how youth and the Internet are interacting with each other in a Chinese context. In so doing, Liu sheds light on what it means to be a Chinese today, how ‘Chineseness’ may be (re)constructed in the Internet Age, and what the implications of the emerging form of identity are for contemporary and future Chinese societies as well as the world.

Towards a Normative Theory of the Information Society Routledge Research in Information Technology and Society

Alistair S. Duff, Napier University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-95571-3; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION There is a clear need for a systematic, integrative, and rigorous normative theory of the information society. In this book, Duff offers a prescriptive theory to help to guide the academic and policy communities as they debate the future shape of emerging post-industrial, information-based societies. He argues that information policy needs to become anchored in a left-liberal philosophy which foregrounds a feasible permutation of the core ideals of freedom, equality and brotherhood. The information society, if it is to be worth having at all, cannot be allowed to be largely the outcome of the free play of market forces and technological determinism. The social structure, including the information economy, must be subjected to a regulatory axiological system as explicated by some leading proponents of social democracy.

CONTENTS 1. Framework for a Normative Theory of the Information Society 2. Religious Social Democracy as a Normative Tradition 3. Social Engineering and the Programme of Information Society Development 4. On the Social Distribution of Information and News 5.

Conclusion: Towards the International Information Polity?

The Olympic Games and Cultural Policy Routledge Research in Sport, Culture and Society

Beatriz Garcia, University of Liverpool, UK

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

348 PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99563-4; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book explores how cultural policies are reflected in the design, management and promotion of the Olympic Games. Beatriz Garcia examines the concept and evolution of cultural policies throughout the recent history of the Olympic Games and then specifically evaluates the cultural program of the Sydney 2000 Olympic Games. Garcia argues that the cultural relevance of a major event is highly dependant on the consistency of the policy choices informing its cultural dimensions. She demonstrates how major events, such as the Olympic Games, frequently fail to leave long-term cultural legacies and are often unable to provide an experience that fully engages and represents the host community, due to their over-emphasis on an economic rather than a social and cultural agenda.

CONTENTS Part 1: Cultural Policy & the Olympic Movement 1. Introduction: The Cultural Policy of Global Events 2. The Olympic Games Cultural Programme 3. The Cultural Policies of the IOC Part 2: Designing and Managing The Olympic Cultural 4. Towards Sydney 2000. Australian Heritage and Olympic Promises 5.A New Image for Sydney and Australia 6. Internal Operations: Fitting Cultural Imperatives Within a Sports Event Management Structure 7. External Operations: Liaising with Olympic Cultural Stakeholders Part 3: Communicating the Olympic Cultural Programme 8. Olympic Communications & Marketing 9. The Olympic Arts Festival Communication & Marketing Strategy 10. Existing & Potential Stakeholders 11. The Cultural Olympiad Media Coverage Part 4: Towards a Cultural Olympics 12.Cultural Programming Post Sydney 2000 13. The Future of Cultural Policy at the Olympics.

References. Index.

Race, Ethnicity and Football Routledge Research in Sport, Culture and Society

Edited by Daniel Burdsey, University of Brighton, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88205-7; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION As the first edited collection dedicated specifically to race, ethnicity and British football, this book brings together a range of academics, comprising both established commentators and up-and-coming voices. Combining theoretical and empirical contributions, the volume will addresses a wide variety of topics such as the experiences of Muslims, the recruitment of African players, devolution and national identities, case studies of minority ethnic clubs, "mixed-race" players, multiculturalism and anti-racism, sectarianism, education, and foreign club ownership. Covering the both amateur and professional spheres, and focusing on both players and supporters, the book elucidates the linkages between race, ethnicity, gender and masculinity.

Social Capital and Sport Governance in Europe Routledge Research in Sport, Culture and Society

Edited by Margaret Groeneveld, University of Ulster, UK, Barrie Houlihan, Loughborough University, UK and Fabien Ohl, University of Lausanne, Switzerland PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 230pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87609-4; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84689-6; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Although there is significant interest in the social role of sport in fostering civil society from both policymakers and academics, there is a lack of evidence of the specific role of sport federations in this system. This book critically presents the mechanisms and structures in a selection of sport federations within a variety of European countries that illuminate the varied relationships between not-for-profit sport federations, their members, governments and the citizens they represent. The contributors explore the contrasts and synergies between core social capital theoretical perspectives, and how these may be informed by and/or shape the realities of governance from different perspectives within the sport system.

CONTENTS 1. Social Capital, Governance and Sport Barrie Houlihan and Margaret Groeneveld 2. The EU and Sport Governance: Between Economic and Social Values Borja García 3. Czech Sport Governance Cultures and a Plurality of Social Capitals: Politicking Zone, Movement and Community Dino Numerato 4. Danish Sport Governance: Tradition in Transition H. Thomas R. Persson 5. Sport and Social Capital in England Andrew Adams 6. Social Capital and Sport Governance in France Cristina Fusetti 7. Sport, Divided Societies and Social Capital in Ireland David Hassan and Allan Edwards 8. The Social Capital of Sport: The Case of Italy Simone Baglioni 9. Governance and Social Capital: Democratic Effects and Policy Outcomes in a Nordic Sport Model Ø rnulf Seippel 10.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

349 Conclusion: Understanding Social Capital as Both Metaphor and Traditional Form of Social Exchange Margaret Groeneveld and Fabien Ohl

Sport Policy in Britain Routledge Research in Sport, Culture and Society

Iain Lindsay, University of Southampton, UK and Barrie Houlihan, Loughborough University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87483-0; November 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Since 1990, Britain has seen a period of unprecedented public investment in, and political commitment to, sport. In this book, Iain Lindsey and Barrie Houlihan examine and analyze sport policy since the appointment of John Major as leader of the Conservative Party in 1990. John Major’s period as Prime Minister was a watershed in British sport policy marking the beginning of a prolonged period of public and lottery investment and relatively high political salience. The text also locates Labour sport policy not only in relation to the previous government of John Major, but also in relation to the Labour government’s broader concerns and ambitions related to modernisation of British institutions, its ambition to tackle the ‘wicked issues’ epitomised by its focus on achieving greater social inclusion, and its interest in facilitating greater stakeholder involvement in the policy process. Lindsey and Houlihan provide the first analysis that examines sport policy as a field of government and that discusses how the various sectors (e.g. youth/school sport, mass sport, etc.) have been affected by government policy and the competition for public resources.

CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. The 1990's. A Decade of Transition 3. New Labour and its Priorities 4. Elite Success and/or Increased Participation?

The Roles of UK Sport and Sport England 5. The Changing Role of National Governing Bodies and Clubs 6. The Forgotten Partner – Local Government 7. School and Youth Sport 8. Conclusion. Notes. Bibliography. Index.

Theology, Ethics and Transcendence in Sports Routledge Research in Sport, Culture and Society

Edited by Mark Stephen Nesti, Liverpool John Moores University, UK, Jim Parry, University of Leeds, UK and Nick Watson, York St John University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 176pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87851-7; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This multidisciplinary volume examines the relationship between sport and spirituality/religion. Contributors explore the intersections between sport and prayer, sin and evil, zen, ethical and spiritual concerns, and sectarianism.

Women and Exercise Routledge Research in Sport, Culture and Society

Edited by Eileen Kennedy, Roehampton University, UK and Pirkko Markula, University of Alberta, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 256pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87120-4; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Exercise promotion has become an increasingly important and visible part of public health campaigns. Studies have demonstrated that women have higher levels of obesity and are generally less physically active than men. While significant quantitative research has increased our knowledge of women’s exercise patterns, these studies have revealed only some of the complex issues related to women’s health, the body and physical activity. This volume fills this gap by examining women's contradictory experiences of their bodies, health and exercise within the cultural context of consumerism. Featuring contributions by leading scholars on women and exercise across North America and Europe, this timely examination of women, exercise and fitness will shape the international dialogue on these critical issues.

CONTENTS Introduction Pirkko Markula and Eileen Kennedy Part 1: Consuming Exercise and Health Chapter 1: Positioning the Body from Fashion to Performance: the Discursive Construction of Exercise in Women’s Lifestyle and Fitness Magazines Eileen Kennedy and

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

350 Evdokia Pappa Chapter 2: Women, Exercise and the Quest for Occupational Success Amanda Waring Chapter 3: Women Developing and Branding Fitness Products on the Global Market: The Case of "Method Putkisto" Jaana Parviainen Chapter 4: "The Media and I": A Feminist Deterritorialisation? Pirkko Markula Part 2: Body Trouble: Fat Women and Exercise Chapter 5: Fit, Fat and Feminine?

The Stigmatisation of Fat Women in Fitness Gyms Louise Mansfield Chapter 6: "I Am (Not) BIG…It’s the Pictures That Got Small": Examining Cultural and Personal Exercise Narratives and the Fear and Loathing of Fat Kerry R. McGannon, Christina R. Johnson and John C. Spence Chapter 7: Fat Women’s Experiences of Exercise Synne Groven, Kari Solbrække, Gro Rugseth and Gunn Engelsrud Part 3: In the Name of Health: Women's Exercise and Public Health Chapter 8: A Means to an End? Public Health Discourse and Young Women’s Disordered Engagement with Exercise Emma Rich Chapter 9: Refusing to Run for the Cure: Women’s Physical Activity and Embodied Breast Cancer Activism in Canada Samantha King Chapter 10: "Doing Something That’s Good for Me": Exploring Intersections of Physical Activity and Health Lisa McDermott Chapter 11: Resistance in Exercise Settings: The Significance of Western Public Health Discourse for Older Women from Diverse Ethnic Backgrounds Sharon Wray Part 4: Lived Body Experiences: Exercise, Embodiment and Performance Chapter 12: Growing Old (Dis)Gracefully?: The Gender/Ageing/Exercise Nexus Elizabeth C.J. Pike and Bethany Simmonds Chapter 13: The New "Superwoman": Intersection of Fitness, Physical Culture, and the Female Body Jessica Chin Chapter 14: Fashioning Fitness: Aesthetic, Bodies and Artificial Fibres Magdalena Petersson McIntyre Chapter 15: Become Aware of Gendered Embodiment: Female Beginners Learning Aikido Paula Lokman Chapter 16: Doing Running: A Woman Runner and the Negotiation of Public Space Jacqueline Allen Collinson

Biometrics Routledge Studies in Science, Technology and Society

Joseph Pugliese, Macquarie University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 224pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87487-8; June 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Biometric technologies, such as finger- or facial-scan, are being deployed across a variety of social contexts in order to facilitate and guarantee identity verification and authentication. In the post-9/11 world, biometric technologies have experienced an extraordinary period of growth as concerns about security and screening have increased. This book analyses biometric systems in terms of the application of biopolitical power – corporate, military and governmental – on the human body. It deploys cultural theory in examining the manner in which biometric technologies constitute the body as a target of surveillance and as a data-information object. The book thereby provides a comprehensive overview and critical analysis of both the local and global ramifications of biometric technologies.

CONTENTS Introduction: Biopolitics of Biometrics 1. A Genealogy of Biometric Technologies 2. The Biometrics of Infrastructural Whiteness 3.

"Identity Dominance": Biometrics, Biosurveillance, Terrorism and War 4. Identity Fraud and Imposture: Biometrics, the Metaphysics of Presence and the Alleged Liveness of the "Live" Evidentiary Body 5. Neurotechnologies of Truth: Brain Fingerprinting’s Neurognomics and No Lie MRI’s Digital Phrenology. Epilogue.

Global Public Health Vigilance Routledge Studies in Science, Technology and Society

Lorna Weir and Eric Mykhalovskiy, both of York University, Canada PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £60.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 260pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-95842-4; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85772-4; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Global Public Health Vigilance is the first sociological book to investigate recent changes in how global public health authorities imagine and respond to international threats to human health. This book explores a remarkable period of conceptual innovation during which infectious disease, historically the focus of international disease control, was displaced by "international public health emergencies," a concept that brought new responsibilities to public health authorities, helping to shape a new project of global public health security. Drawing on research conducted at the World Health Organization, this book analyzes the formation of a new social apparatus, global public health vigilance, for detecting, responding to and containing international public health emergencies. Between 1995 and 2005 a new form of global health surveillance was invented, international communicable disease control was securitized, and international health law was fundamentally revised. This timely volume raises critical questions about the institutional effects of the concept of emerging infectious diseases, the role of the news media in global health surveillance, the impact of changes in international health law on public health reasoning and practice, and the reconstitution of the World Health Organization as a power beyond national sovereignty and global governance. It initiates a new research agenda for social science research on public health.

CONTENTS 1. Knowing Global Public Health 2. Emerging Infectious Diseases: An Active Concept 3. Early Warning Outbreak Detection and Alert: A Technique 4. From Infectious Disease to Public Health Emergency 5. A World on Alert: Emergency Vigilance in Global Biopolitics 6. Concluding

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

351

The Politics of Bioethics Routledge Studies in Science, Technology and Society

Alan Petersen, Monash University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £65.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99006-6; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Recent rapid advances in the biosciences have led to considerable debate about the social, ethical, and legal implications of research and its applications. The mapping of the human genome, advances in cloning techniques, the harvesting of embryonic stem cells for research, increasing use of genetic testing in healthcare, and the development of large-scale genetic databases have not only generated high expectations about new diagnostics and treatments but also considerable widespread fear about their consequences. This book offers a critical appraisal of bioethics and its implications as it pertains to the fields of health and medicine and public health, with a particular emphasis on recent technological innovations as they provide a noteworthy exemplar of the power of bioethics in shaping policies, practices and notions of societal benefits. Whereas other books have tended to examine ethical dilemmas and challenges of applying ethical principles, often in relation to a limited array of issues, this book investigates the socio-political implications of bioethics discourse and practices in relation to a range of controversial (or potentially controversial) developments. Providing a benchmark for future debate and scholarly work, this volume will be of interest to policymakers, clinicians, scholars, and others who are looking for new ways of making sense and evaluating recent developments in the field of bioethics.

Rethinking Disability Routledge Studies in Science, Technology and Society

Michael Schillmeier, Ludwig-Maximilians University of Munich, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 210pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99325-8; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85484-6; January 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This text is a critical and empirically-based introduction to disability studies. It offers a comprehensive, book-length analysis of disability through the lens of Science and Technology Studies (STS), and presents a practice-oriented discussion of how bodies, senses and things are linked in everyday life and configure "enabling" and "disabling" scenarios. Relevant to a broad spectrum of medical practitioners and practicing social service workers, the book will also be essential reading in the fields of disability studies, sociology of the body/senses, medical sociology and STS. CONTENTS Introduction: Rethinking Disability: Revisiting the Social Part 1: ‘The Social’ in Question: Rethinking Modern Di/visions 1. The Social and the Religion of Modernity 2. Othering Blindness in the Light of Vision and Di/vision Part 2: In Medias Res 3. A Dis/ability Manifesto Part 3: Dis/abling Practices 4. Dis/abling Spaces of Calculation 5. Time-Spaces of In/dependence and Dis/ability 6. From Exclusive Perspectives to Inclusive Differences 7. Concluding Remarks

Wired and Mobilizing Routledge Studies in Science, Technology and Society

Victoria Carty, Chapman University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88070-1; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This book highlights how online networking offers potential for new forms of activist mobilizing, repertoires, participatory democracy, direct action, fundraising, and civic engagement. It calls for a re-conceptualization of some of the main tenets of contentious and electoral politics, which were originally constructed to describe and analyze face-to-face forms of mobilization, in order to more accurately analyze contemporary forms of protest, electoral processes, and civil society organizing.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Overview of Social Movement Theories and a Proposed Synthesis 2. Students Against Sweatshops and Corporate Social Responsibility: The Anti-Nike Campaign 3. Contentious Politics, Cyberactivism, and Electoral Reform: The Reemergence of the Peace Movement Post 9-11 4. MoveOn.org and the Digital Revolution 5. The 2008 Presidential Election and Youth Activism: Digital Technologies as Grassroots Empowerment or Elite Control? Conclusion

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

352

Governmentality Routledge Studies in Social and Political Thought

Edited by Ulrich Bröckling, University of Leipzig, Germany, Susanne Krasmann, University of Hamburg, Germany and Thomas Lemke, University of Frankfurt, Germany PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 392pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-99920-5; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84647-6; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Examining questions of statehood, biopolitics, sovereignty, neoliberal reason and the economy, Governmentality explores the advantages and limitations of adopting Michel Foucault's concept of governmentality as an analytical framework. Contributors highlight the differences as well as possible convergences with alternative theoretical frameworks. By assembling authors with a wide range of different disciplinary backgrounds, from philosophy, literature, political science, sociology to medical anthropology, the book offers a fresh perspective on studies of governmentality.

CONTENTS 1. From Foucault’s Lectures at the Collège de France to Studies of Governmentality: An Introduction Ulrich Bröckling, Susanne Krasmann and Thomas Lemke 2. Relocating the Modern State: Governmentality and the History of Political Ideas Martin Saar 3.

Constituting Another Foucault Effect: Foucault on States and Statecraft Bob Jessop 4. Governmentalization of the State: Rousseau's Contribution to the Modern History of Governmentality Friedrich Balke 5. Government Unlimited: The Security Dispositif of Illiberal Governmentality Sven Opitz 6. The Right of Government: Torture and the Rule of Law Susanne Krasmann 7. Foucault and Frontiers: Notes on the Birth of the Humanitarian Border William Walters 8. Beyond Foucault: From Biopolitics to the Government of Life Thomas Lemke 9. Coming Back to Life: An Anthropological Reassessment of Biopolitics and Governmentality Didier Fassin 10. The Birth of Lifestyle Politics: The Biopolitical Management of Lifestyle Diseases in the United States and Denmark Lars Thorup Larsen 11. Biology, Citizenship and the Government of Biomedicine: Exploring the Concept of Biological Citizenship Peter Wehling 12.

Human Economy, Human Capital: A Critique of Biopolitical Economy Ulrich Bröckling 13. Decentring the Economy: Governmentality Studies and Beyond? Urs Stäheli 14. Economy beyond Governmentality: The Limits of Conduct Ute Tellmann 15.

Constructing the Socialized Self: Mobilization and Control in the "Active Society" Stephan Lessenich

Hemingway on Politics and Rebellion Routledge Studies in Social and Political Thought

Edited by Lauretta Conklin Frederking, University of Portland, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 233pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-87222-5; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84836-4; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hemingway has been labeled a ‘communist sympathizer,’ ‘elitist’, and a ‘rugged individualist.’ This volume embraces the complexity of political advocacy in Hemingway’s novels and short stories. Hemingway’s characters physically, intellectually and spiritually become part of resisting current conditions and affirm the value of resistance, even destruction, regardless of political outcome. Much more than political nihilism, rebellion allows man to realize the potentialities of his greatness as a leader, the realities of his solidarity as a comrade, and the simple sensations of everyday living. Hemingway draws new perspectives on the meaning of politics in our own lives at the same time as his writings affirm boundaries of political thought and literary theory for explaining many of the themes we study.

CONTENTS Part I: Introduction 1. The Rebel: Hemingway and the Struggle Against Politics Lauretta Conklin Frederking Part II: Hemingway in Liberal Times 2. Hemingway on Being in Our Time Catherine Zuckert 3. Hemingway, Hopelessness, and Liberalism William Curtis Part III: The Politics of Morality, Manliness, and God 4. Ethics Without Theodicy in Ernest Hemingway’s A Farewell to Arms Sayres Rudy 5. Manly Assertion Harvey Mansfield 6. Hemingway, Religion, and Masculine Virtue Joseph Prud’homme Part IV: The Impossibility of Politics 7. Hemingway’s For Whom the Bell Tolls : Rebellion and the Meaning of Politics in the Spanish Civil War Kerstin Hamann 8."The Revolutionist" David Winston Conklin 9. To Have and Have Not : Hemingway Through the Lens of Theodor Adorno Lauretta Conklin Frederking

Human Security, Transnational Crime and Human Trafficking Routledge Transnational Crime and Corruption

Edited by Shiro Okubo, Ritsumeikan University, Japan and Louise Shelley, George Mason University, USA PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $130.00; 234x156 mm; 256pp.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

353 www.routledge.com/978-0-415-43701-1; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Important changes have occurred in transnational crime and human trafficking during recent years. These phenomena have become much more global in comparison to the regional level on which they once operated. Europe, North America and Asia are now fully integrated into the international problems of organized crime and human trafficking. Examining transnational crime, human trafficking and its implications for human security from both Western and Asian perspectives, this book, with essays from contributors based in Europe, the US and Asia fills a gap on all bookshelves; providing an excellent volume on the under considered area of Asian transnational crime. Considering it as a globalized phenomenon which is no longer confined to operating at the traditional regional level, it: outlines the overall picture of organized crime and human trafficking in the contemporary world, examining the current trends and recent developments contrasts the experience and perception of these problems in Asia with those in Western countries, analyzing the distinctive Japanese perspective on globalization, human security and transnational crime examines the policy responses of key states and international institutions - both Asian and Western including Germany, Canada, the United States, the European Union, Japan, Korea and Thailand. A timely analysis of the increasingly serious problems of transnational crime, human trafficking and their impact on human security, linking both Western and Asian perspectives.

CONTENTS Preface: Origin and Objective of the Human Security Project Part 1: Human Security and Transnational Crime 1. Human Security and Transnational Crime 2. Transnational Organized Crime: The German Response 3. International Organized Crime Operating in Western Europe: The Judicial and Police Approach Against Organized Crime in the European Union 4. Canada’s New Concerted Efforts to Combat Transnational Organized Crime: New Concerns, Emerging New Enforcement Practices, and New Legislation 5.

Japanese Crime Situation and Transnational Organized Crime 6. Drug Trafficking and Korea 7. Organized Crime Control and Drug Prevention Strategy: Thai Perspective Part 2: Human Security and Human Trafficking 8. International Human Trafficking: An Important Component of Transnational Crime 9. The European Union Effort to Combat Illegal Migration, Smuggling and Trafficking in Human Beings: Impact on Spanish Law 10. Trafficking into the United States and Western Hemisphere from Asia 11. Current Situation of Migrant Women Employed in the Sex and Entertainment Sector of Korea 12. Japanese Experience and Response in Combating Trafficking

Time Use Studies and Unpaid Care Work Routledge/UNRISD Research in Gender and Development

Edited by Debbie Budlender, University of Cape Town, South Africa PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £70.00 $95.00; 229x152 mm; 260pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-88224-8; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-84614-8; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Across the world, unpaid care work - unpaid housework, care of persons, and "volunteer" work - is done predominantly by women.

This book presents and compares unpaid care work patterns in seven different countries. It analyzes data drawn from large-scale time use surveys carried out under the auspices of the United Nations Research Institute for Social Development (UNRISD). With its indepth concentration on time use patterns in developing nations, this book will offer many new insights for scholars of gender and care.

CONTENTS 1. What do Time Use Studies Tell Us about Unpaid Care Work? Evidence from Seven Countries Debbie Budlender 2. Tanzania: Care in the Context of HIV and AIDS Debbie Budlender 3. South Africa: When Marriage and the Nuclear Family Are Not the Norm Debbie Budlender 4. Unpaid Care Work: Analysis of the Indian Time Use Data Neetha N. and Rajni Palriwala 5. Republic of Korea: Analysis of Time Use Survey on Work and Care Mi-young An 6. Analysis of Time Use Surveys on Work and Care in Japan Yuko Tamiya and Masato Shikata 7. The Case of Nicaragua Isolda Espinosa González 8. Unpaid Care Work in the City of Buenos Aires Valeria Esquivel

Watching Sport Ethics and Sport

Stephen Mumford, University of Nottingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 192pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-37790-4; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-09935-3; February 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION While philosophy of sport has tended to focus on the participator, the majority of people actually experience sport as a spectator.

Mumford here considers the philosophical import of watching sport, suggesting that far from being passive, it is an aesthetic, a moral and an emotional experience for spectators. Delving into parallels with art and theatre in terms of a release from the self, this book outlines the aesthetic qualities of sport from the incidental beauty of a well-executed football pass to the enshrined artistic interpretation inherent in performed sports such as ice-skating or gymnastics. We then move on to consider the moral lessons to be

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

354 learned from watching competitive sport, looking at the rewards of endeavour and the penalties of cheating and how these apply to a wider approach to life. Finally, sport is recognized as a focus of profound emotional experiences, bringing an essential human touch into a theoretical and academic forum of debate. With such universal themes, this book will appeal to a broad audience across philosophical disciplines and sports studies.

CONTENTS Part 1: Sport As An Aesthetic Experience Introduction: Sport As An Aesthetic Experience. Three Degrees Of Art In Sport. A Broad Sense Of Aesthetic Experience. The Loss Of Self. Response Dependence And The Ontology Of Sport Part 2: Sport As A Moral Guide Introduction: Sport As Guide To Life. Exhibitionism. Wider Guide To Life Part 3: Sport As A Focus Of Emotion Introduction: Sport As An Emotional Experience. The Simplicity Of Sporting Emotions. The Rationality Of Emotions. Allegiance Support.

Inclusion and Exclusion Through Youth Sport International Studies in Physical Education and Youth Sport

Edited by Richard Bailey and Symeon Dagkas, both of University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 302pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57803-5; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85239-2; January 2011 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION We can reach far more people through sport than we can through political or educational programmes. In that way, sport is more powerful than politics. We have only just started to use its potential to build up this country. We must continue to do so. – Nelson Mandela, said to the South African footballer, Lucas Radebe Nelson Mandela’s statement reflects a widely held view that sport can contribute in unique and far-reaching ways to important broad social outcomes. But is it really the case? Can sport bring people from different backgrounds together, and, in doing so, can it act as a force for social transformation and change? In the increasingly popular language of policymakers and practitioners, can sport contribute to social inclusion? Or is it the case that sport actually acts to marginalize and disadvantage some groups within society? Does it reinforce, rather than challenge the inequities of society? Focusing on youth sport as a touchstone sector of sport in society, this book examines the theoretical and empirical bases of arguments for sport’s role in the social inclusion agenda, offering international perspectives on an issue that underpins many of the bold claims and presumptions being made for the power of sport. It represents the most up-to-date and authoritative presentation of core knowledge related to inclusion and exclusion in youth sport and as such, will be invaluable reading for any student, researcher, policy maker or practitioner working in sports development, sports coaching, sport studies or physical education.

CONTENTS Section 1: Understanding Inclusion and Exclusion 1. Understanding Exclusion and Sport 2. Sport, Social Capital and Social Inequality 3. Socio-Cultural Aspects of Exclusion from Sport Participation 4. The Economics of Exclusion 5. The Discourses of Social Exclusion in Sport Section 2: The Construction of Exclusion 6. Gender and Exclusion 7. Ethnicity and Sport 8. Ability as an Exclusionary Concept in Youth Sport 9. Sporting Fat: Youth Sport and the Obesity ‘Epidemic’ 10. Sexuality and Youth Sport 11. Exclusion and Elite Sport Section 3: Moving Towards Inclusion 12. Physical Education for All Case Studies of Inclusion through Sport 13 Facilitating Inclusion of Muslim Children in Sport and Physical Activity 14. Young People’s Voices in Sport 15. Children’s Talent Development in Sport 16. Dance and Empowerment 17. Empowerment Through Disability Sport 18. Case Studies of Inclusion Through Sport 19. Teaching About Equity and Justice Through Sport 20. Sport as a Tool in Inclusion in Developing Countries

Muslim Women and Sport International Studies in Physical Education and Youth Sport

Edited by Tansin Benn, University of Birmingham, UK, Gertrud Pfister, University of Copenhagen, Denmark and Haifaa Jawad, University of Birmingham, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £80.00 $150.00; 234x156 mm; 304pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49076-4; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-88063-0; July 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Examining the global experiences, challenges and achievements of Muslim women participating in physical activities and sport, this important new study makes a profound contribution to our understanding of both contemporary Islam and the complexity and diversity of women’s lives in the modern world. The book presents an overview of current research into constructs of gender, the role of religion and the importance of situation, and looks closely at what Islam has to say about women’s participation in sport and what Muslim women have to say about their participation in sport. It highlights the challenges and opportunities for women in sport in both Muslim and non-Muslim countries, utilising a series of extensive case-studies in various countries which invite the readers to conduct cross-cultural comparisons. Material on Iraq, Palestine and Bosnia and Herzegovina provides rare insights into the impact of war on sporting activities for women. The book also seeks to make important recommendations for improving access to sport for girls and women from Muslim communities. Muslim Women and Sport confronts many deeply held stereotypes and crosses those commonly quoted boundaries between ‘Islam and the West’ and between ‘East and West’. It makes fascinating reading for anyone with an interest in the interrelationships between sport, religion, gender, culture and policy.

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

355 CONTENTS Introduction - Muslim Women and Sport Part 1: Underlying Contexts 1. The Values of Physical Activity, Sport and Physical Education in the Lives of Young Women 2. Islam, Women and Sport 3. Muslim Women and Sport in Diasporas: Theories, Discourses and Practices - Analyzing the Case of Denmark Part 2: National Perspectives 4. Women in Sports Leadership in Bahrain 5. "Balancing between the cultures …" – Sports and Physical Activities of Muslim Girls and Women in Germany 6. Physical Activities and Sport for Women in Iran 7. The Sultanate of Oman and the Position of Girls and Women in Physical 8. Women and Sport in Syria 9.

Struggling for Empowerment - Sport Participation of Women and Girls in Turkey Part Three: Case Studies 10. Palestinian Women’s National Football Team Aims High – Case Study to Explore the Interaction of Religion, Culture, Politics and Sports 11. Challenges Facing South African Muslim Secondary School Girls’ Participation in Physical Activities, Physical Education and Sport. 12. Religion and the State – The Story of a Turkish Elite Athlete 13. A Case Study on United Arab Emirates: Women, Disability and Sport Part Four: Narratives 14. Experiences of War in Bosnia and Herzegovina and the Effects on Physical Activities of Girls and Women 15.

Women in Sport in North Africa: Voices of Moroccan Athletes 16. Womens’ Narratives of Sport and War in Iraq Conclusion

Young People, Physical Activity and the Everyday International Studies in Physical Education and Youth Sport

Edited by Jan Wright, University of Wollongong, Australia and Doune MacDonald, University of Queensland, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £75.00 $125.00; 234x156 mm; 240pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-49313-0; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85071-8; May 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Despite society’s current preoccupation with interrelated issues such as obesity, increasingly sedentary lifestyles and children’s health, there has until now been little published research that directly addresses the place and meaning of physical activity in young people’s lives. In this important new collection, leading international scholars address that deficit by exploring the differences in young people’s experiences and meanings of physical activity as these are related to their social, cultural and geographical locations, to their abilities and their social and personal biographies. Young People, Physical Activity and the Everyday places young people’s everyday lives at the centre of the study, arguing that it is this "everydayness" - school, work, friendships, ethnicity, family routines, interests, finances, location – that is the key to shaping the engagement of young people in physical activity. By allowing the voices of young people to be heard through these pages, the book helps the reader to make sense of how young people see physical activity in their lives. Drawing on a breadth of theoretical frameworks, and challenging the orthodox assumptions that underpin contemporary physical activity policy, interventions and curricula, this book powerfully refutes the argument that young people are "the problem" and instead demonstrates the complex social constructions of physical activity in the lives of young people. It is essential reading for all serious students of physical activity, physical education, health, youth work and social policy.

CONTENTS Introduction: Theorising Youth and Physical Activity Part 1: Physical Activity and Geographical Locations 1. The Place of Physical Activity in the Lives of Rural Young People: Stories From the ‘Outback’ 2.‘The Police be Comin’ so That’s Why I Didn’t go Over There’: Young People’s use of Neighborhood Spaces in a US City 3. Young People, Cities and Physical Activity Part 2: Social and Cultural Location and Physical Activity 4. Social Class, Schooling and Young People’s Meanings of Physical Activity and Health. 5.

Physical Activity and Indigenous Young People 6. Physical Activity and Confucianism: the Relations Between Hong Kong Children and Their Parents 7. ‘Our Prophet Said We Should Play Sport’: Young Muslim Women Negotiating Islam, Popular Culture and Physical Activity Part 3: Physical Activity and Constitution of Selves: Health, Fitness and Bodies 8: Eating Well, Being Active and the Production of the "Good Citizen" 9: Young People, Transitions and Physical Activity 10. ‘Pump Weights, Eat Right’: Young People’s Engagements with Health Discourses 11. ‘Making Castles in the Sand’: Community Contexts and Physical Culture 12.

Diversity, Subjectivity and Constructions of Fitness and Health by Young Canadians Part 4: Methodological Issues and Future Directions 13. Reflections on Methodological Issues and Lessons Learned From the Life Activity Project

The Gay Games Routledge Critical Studies in Sport

Caroline Symons, Victoria University, Australia PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 328pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47296-8; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-89184-1; April 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Gay Games is an important piece of new social history, examining one of the largest sporting, cultural and human rights events in the world. Since their inception in 1980, the Gay Games have developed into a multi-million dollar mega-event, engaging people from all continents, while the international Gay Games movement has become one of the largest and most significant international institutions for gay and lesbian people. Drawing on detailed archival research, oral history and participant observation techniques, and informed by critical feminist theory and queer theory, this book offers the first comprehensive history of the Gay Games from 1980

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

356 through to the Chicago games of 2006. It explores the significance of the Games in the context of broader currents of gay and lesbian history, and addresses a wide range of key contemporary themes within sports studies, including the cultural politics of sport, the politics of difference and identity, and the rise of sporting mega-events. This book is important reading for any serious student of international sport or gender and sexuality studies.

CONTENTS Introduction 1. Dancing with Tom Waddell 2. "We are Normal": "Challenge in 1982": Gay Games I 3. "We are Healthy": "Triumph in 1986": Gay Games II and the Procession of the Arts 4. Gay Games in Transition: "Celebration 90": Gay Games III and Cultural Festival 5. Going Global: The Internationalization of the Gay Games Movement 6. Big, Brash and Bold: "Unity 94": Gay Games IV and Cultural Festival 7: The Gay Way To Europe and the World: Gay Games V and Cultural Festival 8: "Under New Skies": Gay Games VI and Cultural Festival 9: "Transexed Conundrums" 10: Montreal – No – Chicago! Or Back To Basics: Chicago 2006 and the Split within the International GLBTI Sports Movement Conclusion

Routledge Handbook of Biomechanics and Human Movement Science Routledge International Handbooks

Edited by Youlian Hong, Chinese University of Hong Kong and Roger Bartlett, University of Otago, New Zealand PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £29.99 $59.95; 246x174 mm; 400pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57693-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-88968-8; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Routledge Handbook of Biomechanics and Human Movement Science is a landmark work of reference. Now available in a concise paperback edition, it offers a comprehensive and in-depth survey of current theory, research and practice in sports, exercise and clinical biomechanics, in both established and emerging contexts. Including contributions from many of the world's leading biomechanists, the book is arranged into five thematic sections: Biomechanics In Sports Injury, Orthopedics And Rehabilitation Health And Rehabilitation Training, Learning And Coaching Methodologies And Systems Of Measurement Drawing explicit connections between the theoretical, investigative and applied components of sports science research, this book is both a definitive subject guide and an important contribution to the contemporary research agenda in biomechanics and human movement science. It is essential reading for all students, scholars and researchers working in sports biomechanics, kinesiology, ergonomics, sports engineering, orthopaedics and physical therapy.

CONTENTS Section 1: Biomechanics in Sports 1. Biomechanics of Throwing Roger Bartlett and Matthew Robins 2. The Biomechanics of Snowboarding Greg Woolman 3. Biomechanics of Striking and Kicking Bruce Elliott, Jacqueline Alderson and Machar Reid 4.

Swimming Ross H. Sanders, Stelios Psycharakis, Roozbeh Naemi, Carla McCabe, and Georgios Machtsiras 5. Biomechanics of the Long Jump N.P. Linthorne 6. External and Internal Forces in Sprint Running Joseph P. Hunter, Robert N. Marshall, and Peter J. McNair 7. Biomechanical Simulation Models of Sports Activities M.R. Yeadon and M.A. King Section 2: Injury, Orthopedics and Rehabilitation 8. Lower Extremity Injuries William C. Whiting and Ronald F. Zernicke 9. Upper Extremity Injuries Ronald F. Zernicke, William C. Whiting, and Sarah L. Manske 10. Biomechanics of Spinal Trauma Brian D. Stemper and Narayan Yoganandan 11. In Vivo Biomechanical Study for Injury Prevention Mario Lamontagne, D. L. Benoit, and A. Caraffa, G. Cerulli 12. Impact Attenuation Performance and Injury with Artificial Turf Rosanne S. Naunheim Section 3: Health and Rehabilitation 13. Influence of Backpack Weight on Biomechanical and Physiological Responses of Children During Treadmill Walking Youlian Hong, Jing Xian Li, and Gert-Peter Brüggemann 14. Ankle Proprioception in Young Ice Hockey Players, Runners, and Sedentary People Jing Xian Li and Youlian Hong 15. The Plantar Pressure Characteristics During Tai Chi Exercise De Wei Mao, Youlian Hong, and Jing Xian Li 16.

Biomechanical Studies for Understanding Falls in Older Adults Daina L Sturnieks and Stephen R Lord 17. Postural Control in Parkinson's Disease Stephan Turbanski Section 4: Training, Learning and Coaching 17. Application of Boemechanics in Soccer Training W. S. Erdmann 18. Exploring the Perceptual-Motor Workspace: New Approaches to Skill Acquisition and Training Chris Button 19. Application of Biomechanics in Martial Art Training Manfred M. Vieten 20. Developmental and Biomechanical Characteristics of Motor Skill Learning Jin H. Yan, Bruce Abernethy and Jerry R. Thomas 21. Using Biomechanical Feedback to Enhance Skill Learning and Performance Bruce Abernethy, Richard S.W. Masters, and Tiffany Zachry Section 5: Methodologies and systems of measurement 22. Measurement of Pressure Distribution Ewald M. Hennig 23. Measurement for Deriving Kinematic Parameters: Numerical Methods Young-Hoo Kwon 24. Methodology in Alpine and Nordic Skiing Biomechanics Hermann Schwameder, Erich Müller, Thomas Stöggl and Stefan Lindinger 25. Measurement and Estimation of Human Body Segment Parameters Jennifer L. Durkin 26. Use of Electromyography in Studying Human Movement Travis W. Beck and Terry J. Housh

Children and Exercise XXV Edited by Serge Berthoin and Georges Baquet, both of Lille 2 Université, France PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 360pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-57514-0; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-85473-0; September 2010

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

357 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Children and Exercise XXV presents the latest scientific research into paediatric exercise physiology, endocrinology, kinanthropometry, growth and maturation, and youth sport. Including contributions from a wide-range of leading international experts, the book is arranged into seven thematic sections addressing: cardiovascular responses to exercise genetics, metabolism and physical activity limiting factors of muscle exercise respiratory responses to exercise epidemiology in physical activity and obesity physical activity and nutrition metabolic disorders and exercise. Offering critical reviews of current topics and reports of current and on-going research in paediatric health and exercise science, this is a key text for all researchers, teachers, health professionals and students with an interest in paediatric sport and exercise science, sports medicine and physical education.

Motor Learning in Practice Edited by Ian Renshaw, Queensland University of Technology, Australia, Keith Davids, Queensland University of Technology, Australia and Geert J. P. Savelsbergh, Vrije Universiteit Amsterdam, The Netherlands and Manchester Metropolitan University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £85.00 $140.00; 234x156 mm; 252pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47863-2; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-88810-0; March 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Motor Learning in Practice explores the fundamental processes of motor learning and skill acquisition in sport, and explains how a constraints-led approach can be used to design more effective learning environments for sports practice and performance. Drawing on ecological psychology, the book examines the interaction of personal, environmental and task-specific constraints in the development of motor skills, and then demonstrates how an understanding of those constraints can be applied in a wide range of specific sports and physical activities. The first section of the book contains two chapters that offer an overview of the key theoretical concepts that underpin the constraints-led approach. These chapters also examine the development of fundamental movement skills in children, and survey the most important instructional strategies that can be used to develop motor skills in sport. The second section of the book contains eighteen chapters that apply these principles to specific sports, including basketball, football, boxing, athletics field events and swimming. This is the first book to apply the theory of a constraints-led approach to training and learning techniques in sport.

Including contributions from many of the world’s leading scholars in the field of motor learning and development, this book is essential reading for any advanced student, researcher or teacher with an interest in motor skills, sport psychology, sport pedagogy, coaching or physical education.

CONTENTS PART I 1 The constraints-based approach to motor learning: Implications for a non-linear pedagogy in sport and physical education 2 Instructions as constraints in motor skill acquisition 3 Building the foundations: Skill acquisition in children PART II 4 Perceptual training for basketball shooting 5 Saving penalties, scoring penalties 6 Stochastic perturbations in athletics field events enhance skill acquisition 7 Interacting constraints and inter-limb co-ordination in swimming 8 The changing face of practice for developing perception: Action skill in cricket 9 The "nurdle to leg" and other ways of winning cricket matches 10 Manipulating tasks constraints to improve tactical knowledge and collective decision-making in rugby union 11 The ecological dynamics of decision-making in sailing 12 Using constraints to enhance decision-making in team sports 13 Skill development in canoeing and kayaking: An individualised approach 14 A constraints-led approach to coaching association football: The role of perceptual information and the acquisition of co-ordination 15 Identifying constraints on children with movement difficulties: Implications for pedagogues and clinicians 16 Augmenting golf practice through the manipulation of physical and informational constraints 17 Skill acquisition in dynamic ball sports: Monitoring and controlling action-effects 18 A constraints-based training intervention in boxing 19 Researching co-ordination skill 20 Skill acquisition in tennis: Equipping learners for success

Projectile Dynamics in Sport Colin White, Portsmouth, University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £95.00 $155.00; 246x174 mm; 336pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47331-6; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-88557-4; August 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION How can we predict the trajectory of a baseball from bat to outfield? How do the dimples in a golf ball influence its flight from tee to pin? What forces determine the path of a soccer ball steered over a defensive wall by an elite player? An understanding of the physical processes involved in throwing, hitting, firing and releasing sporting projectiles is essential for a full understanding of the science that underpins sport. This is the first book to comprehensively examine those processes and to explain the factors governing the trajectories of sporting projectiles once they are set in motion. From a serve in tennis to the flight of a ’human projectile’ over a high jump bar, this book explains the universal physical and mathematical principles governing movement in sport, and then shows how those principles are applied in specific sporting contexts. Divided into two sections, addressing theory and application respectively, the book explores key concepts such as: friction, spin, drag, impact and bounce computer and mathematical modelling variable sensitivity the design of sports equipment materials science. Richly illustrated throughout, and containing a wealth of research data as well as worked

Routledge Research New titles: February 2010-February 2011

358 equations and examples, this book is essential reading for all serious students of sports biomechanics, sports engineering, sports technology, sports equipment design and sports performance analysis.

CONTENTS Section 1 – The Theory Chapter 1 – Sports Projectile Modeling – Why, How and….So What! Chapter 2 – Launching Projectiles into Motion Chapter 3 – Motion of Projectiles under the Influence of Gravity Chapter 4 – Impact and Bounce Chapter 5 – Drag and Lift Chapter 6 – The Effects of Spin Section 2 – Practical Applications Chapter 7 – Shot Put and Hammer Chapter 8 – Discus Chapter 9 – Javelin Chapter 10 – Golf Chapter 11 – Tennis and Squash Chapter 12 – Cricket and Baseball Chapter 13 – FootballChapter 14 – Rugby and American Football Chapter 15 – Some Assorted Sporting Projectiles Appendices

Routledge Handbook of Sports Development Edited by Barrie Houlihan and Mick Green, both of Loughborough University, UK PUBLICATION DETAILS HB; 1 volume; £110.00 $180.00; 246x174 mm; 512pp. www.routledge.com/978-0-415-47996-7; EB: www.routledge.com/978-0-203-88558-1; October 2010 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Sports development has become a prominent concern within both the academic study of sport and within the organisation and administration of sport. The Routledge Handbook of Sports Development is the first book to comprehensively map the wide-ranging territory of sports development as an activity and as a policy field, and to offer a definitive survey of current academic knowledge and professional practice. Spanning the whole spectrum of activity in sports development, from youth sport and mass participation to the development of elite athletes, the book identifies and defines the core functions of sports development, exploring the interface between sports development and cognate fields such as education, coaching, community welfare and policy. The book presents important new studies of sports development around the world, illustrating the breadth of practice within and between countries, and examines the most important issues facing practitioners within sports development today, from child protection to partnership working. With unparalleled depth and breadth of coverage, the Routledge Handbook of Sports Development is the definitive guide to policy, practice and research in sports development.

CONTENTS Introduction. Part 1: Origins of Sports Development Part 2: Understanding the Contemporary Context of Sports Development Part 3: Sports Development and Young People Part 4: Sports Development and Adult Mass Participation Part 5: Development Through Sport Part 6: Sports Development and Elite Athletes Part 7: Issues in the Practice of Sports Development Part 8: Measuring the Impact of Sports Development. Conclusion: The Future of Sports Development